The Journal

of

Daniel Wheeler

——————————

Originally Entitled:

Memoirs of the Life and Gospel Labours of
Daniel Wheeler
A Minister of the Society of Friends

He brought me up also out of a horrible pit, out of the miry clay, and set my feet upon a rock, and established my goings. And he has put a new song in my mouth, even praise unto our God: many shall see it, and fear, and shall trust in the LORD.—Psalm 40:2-3

* * *

Unabridged Version

Formatting & Modernized Spelling by
The Friends Library — 2018

Preface.

In presenting to the public the following Memoirs, a few explanatory remarks may be requisite.

For some years previous to the decease of our honoured parent, it was evidently a matter which he had much at heart, to leave behind him some narrative of his life; no doubt believing that a record, in which might be traced so many instances of Divine mercy and interposition, could not but be instructive and strengthening to others. This work, however, though commenced in the year 1831, was never completed; and it has been our duty to supply the deficiency from whatever sources lay within our reach. From the period at which the autobiography abruptly terminates, to the time of his removal to Russia, the recollections of his family, and, in some instances, the memoranda of his intimate friends, have furnished the only data: but it must be observed, that nothing has been allowed a place, which could not be stated with entire confidence; more might undoubtedly have been given, by including incidents not so distinctly remembered, and matter derived from traditional, rather than personal knowledge, which in the present instance has been carefully avoided.

Of the succeeding sixteen years, from 1817, the private correspondence of the deceased affords almost the only materials; but as this was tolerably copious, and generally written with the entire openness of friendship, it constitutes not the least valuable part of the Work.

The narrative of his religious visit to the South Sea Islands, etc., has been carefully revised since its last publication, and some additional matter from the original notes has been interspersed: a map of some of the Islands, constructed from the best accessible authorities, is also introduced.

For the closing years of his life, the private journal has again been quoted. The brevity of the American portion of it, will perhaps be regretted, though easily explained by the increasing age and infirmities of the writer; but although short, it was thought to contain matter of sufficient interest to warrant its insertion. The record of his last illness has been furnished by the amiable family, who were then his kind attendants.

The Appendix will be found to contain several articles which though not actually a part of the narrative, are yet interesting in connexion with it. The extracts from the notes of our brother Charles, written while accompanying his father among the islands of the Pacific, exhibit a somewhat succinct view of the condition of their inhabitants, and are the more worthy of notice, as their lamented author was not only himself well qualified to observe, but also to estimate the evidence of others.

It will be seen, that the present work is to be regarded chiefly in the light of a compilation. From the nature of some of the materials, it will also be evident, that it has occasionally been as much a duty to omit, as in other instances to insert; but the reader may be assured, that the selection has been fairly and impartially made: and that whenever any alteration has been attempted, it has been merely a verbal correction, without affecting the sense of the passage. It is hardly possible that so near a relation to the deceased should be an entirely impartial Editor, and if any passages should be found indebted for their insertion rather to feeling than to judgment, it is hoped that both the judgment and feeling of the reader will combine to induce him to make some charitable allowance.

It remains for me to acknowledge my obligations to all those who have in any way assisted in the present work, and particularly to my esteemed friend A. R. Barclay, who has kindly superintended its publication.

In conclusion, I would express my hope that no passage occurring in the present volume may give just cause of offence to any; but that on the contrary, many may derive from it edification and comfort.

Daniel Wheeler Jr.
Eighth Month 18th, 1842.

A Testimony

Of Balby Monthly Meeting in the County of York, concerning Daniel Wheeler deceased.

Our beloved friend Daniel Wheeler was the youngest son of William and Sarah Wheeler of Conduit-street, Hanoversquare, London; and was born there the 27th day of Eleventh Month, 1771.

His parents were rather above the middle rank in society, and being consistent members of the Established church, were strict in conforming to its rites and ceremonies, punctual in attending their place of worship, and careful to train up their children to devotional exercises.

Before he was twelve years old,, he was deprived of parental restraint by the death of his father and mother; and was placed at a school at Fulham, for the purpose of learning navigation, to prepare him for his future seafaring life.

Thus left an orphan, through the interest of a relative he was entered on the King's books as midshipman at an early age: while he was preparing for the service, and before he had completed his thirteenth year, circumstances led to the breaking up of the family circle, giving rise to a long separation from his brothers and sisters, to whom he was very warmly attached.

He now sailed for the first time, cruising on the coast of Portugal; and after remaining six years in the navy, he finally quitted his ship, and entered the ranks of the army as a private soldier.

'When about sixteen years of age,' he says, 'having been unwell, and probably led to reflect a little on that account, I was made sensible of a Divine visitation extended to me at that time; disclosing, with indubitable clearness, the vanity and emptiness of every earthly station, tarnishing the pride and glory of this perishing world in my sight; and which, though little understood and less regarded at the moment, has since, at different times, been brought to my remembrance by Him that declares unto man what is His thought, that makes the morning darkness, and treads upon the high places of the earth, the Lord, the God of Hosts is his name! When this occurred, although then entered into the bond of iniquity, yet I had not launched so fully into its awful abyss, as was afterwards most lamentably the case; and from what I have since witnessed, in unutterable mercy, of the strength and power of redeeming love, a belief is induced, that, if this warning voice, then sounded in the secret of my sinful heart, had been hearkened unto and waited upon, my footsteps,—even mine, would have been conducted from the horrible pit to which they were fast verging.'

It was after long exposure to the severity of the weather, during a harassing service in one of the most unhealthy districts of Europe, that Daniel Wheeler was seized with a prevailing fever, which swept away many of his fellow-soldiers; and after all prospect of recovery seemed to be gone, he was in mercy raised up from the hospital, where numbers were daily perishing round him, to become, in future years, the messenger of mercy and glad tidings to others. At this period, however, although he maintained a fair character among his fellow-men, he was living in a state of much estrangement of heart from God, and often striving against his own secret convictions. In the discharge of those duties belonging to his station, he had acquitted himself to the satisfaction of his superiors; he had been advanced to the rank of serjeant-major, and was afterwards further promoted.

In 1794 or 1795, he paid a short visit to his eldest sister residing near Sheffield, who was married, and had become a member of the Society of Friends by convincement. He was not long allowed to enjoy this interval of quiet, before he was summoned to join the regiment, in which he had obtained a commission, on its departure for the West Indies. They set sail; twice the fleet put to sea, and as often encountered a dreadful hurricane; several of the vessels were lost, the troops perishing in them: but Daniel Wheeler was providentially spared, experiencing a narrow escape.

Reflecting on these disasters, and the renewed occurrence of wonderful preservation, so unexpected and so undeserved, his heart was touched; he could not resolve a third time to expose his life as he had done, but determined to quit the army, so soon as he could meet with suitable employment. He communicated this resolution to his sister at Woodhouse near Sheffield, and returned there, having given up his commission, in 1796.

His mind was now opened to embrace the principles of Friends, and he attended our meetings at Woodhouse. This excited the ridicule of some of his nearest relatives and companions, whose astonishment was great at the thorough change that soon appeared in him. The work was not suffered to be long on the wheel; the effect was decisive and permanent, affording a display of Divine power, not less remarkable in this rapid conversion, than where there has been a more gradual accomplishment of its purposes.

He made an application to be admitted into membership with Friends: and after a suitable time, his request was complied with, in the Second Month, 1799.

It is worthy of notice, that but little, if any, instrumental means was concerned in this remarkable change. While attending the small and generally silent meetings of Woodhouse, Daniel Wheeler had felt the truth of our principles, and had yielded to the conviction. His was a stability and growth in religion of no ordinary measure. In a very few years after his convincement he was appointed an overseer, and he was indeed a bright example of zeal, sincerity, and love to his friends, in that responsible station.

An opening to begin business in a small way at Sheffield presenting itself was readily embraced; and in this, as in his future undertakings, the Divine blessing appeared to attend him, and to crown his exertions with success.

In the Sixth Month, 1800, he was married to Jane Brady, the daughter of Thomas and Rachel Brady of Thorne, in whom he found a helpmate indeed, of sound judgment, guileless and faithful. He remarks in a letter written after her death, 'the heavenly Master's love has never ceased to follow us through all the vicissitudes of time, during a life, not a little chequered, for a term of more than thirty-two years and a half, when He was pleased to deprive me of my greatest earthly treasure, and to take back that which He gave: but it was His own, I verily believe, even His,—the same who enabled me to say, in the moment of my greatest distress, “Blessed be the name of the Lord.”'

As a tradesman he was diligent in business; he was also “fervent in spirit; serving the Lord.” By the strictest attention to integrity in all his dealings, he gained the esteem of all with whom he had to do. Yet it was easy to see where his heart was fixed: his Bible was his favourite companion, and the few minutes that could be spared at a time amidst his daily concerns, were spent in the perusal of the inspired writings.

For some time previous to 1813, the impression had become strong upon his mind, that he would be called to advocate the cause of truth and righteousness upon the earth. Very deep were his conflicts, and very close was his application of soul to his heavenly Father for strength to perform his will; and it was his practice, when he lived in the country, to withdraw early in the morning to a small field near his house, for the purpose of religious retirement and prayer.

He was very watchful lest he should be led away from the grace vouchsafed to him; frequently refraining from conversation apparently innocent, and in which he delighted, lest at any unguarded moment he might grieve that Holy Spirit, whom he felt to be his comforter and guide. He was recorded as an approved minister in the Sixth Month, 1816.

About this period our friend was made sensible that some sacrifice would be called for on his part, as an evidence of his gratitude for the unutterable mercy and great condescension of the Almighty, in having plucked him as a brand from the burning; and he saw clearly that it was indispensable for him, as much as might be, to separate himself from the world and the things of the world, by declining his prosperous trade, and retiring with his family into a smaller compass. The extent of his business was becoming a burden. He felt the force of our Lord's declaration: “You cannot serve God and mammon and his obedience to the requirement was full and unreserved. 'Not,' said he, 'that I have acquired a sufficiency, without doing something for my livelihood; far from it. I have still a prospect of maintaining my family comfortably with care and industry, leaving the event to Him who knows the thoughts and intents of the heart. I have no desire to accumulate riches for my children, the blessing seldom attends it; and the baneful effects thereof are too often visible, even in our Society.'

His mind was thus disposed to withdraw from his concerns in trade, and he was in a state of waiting preparation, when an inquiry was made, on behalf of the Emperor Alexander of Russia for a member of the Society of Friends, to superintend some works of drainage and of agriculture in the neighbourhood of Petersburg. Daniel Wheeler offered himself for the service, and finally accepted the appointment.

On the 18th of Sixth Month, 1818, he attended the meeting at Sheffield, when he took an affectionate leave of Friends there. He told them that nothing less than apprehended duty could have induced him to take the present step; that four years ago it was clearly intimated to him, that it would be required of him to remove into Russia; and though the prospect was very trying to the natural part, yet endeavouring to obtain resignation, he had been favoured to feel sweet peace. His mind had been deeply affected while sitting among them, in viewing the prospect before him, when he would be deprived of the precious privilege of thus assembling with his Friends; that he wished none might suppose his case a hard one, for he thought that there was scarcely a person on the face of the earth, who had more largely partaken of the gracious dealings and protecting care of a merciful Providence. Twice he had been preserved from shipwreck,—he had been favoured to escape the devouring pestilence when numbers were falling around him; and, when many were destroyed by the cruel hand of war, his life had indeed been marvellously spared. And surely the Almighty Being, whose arm had been so often extended for his preservation, when he was running headlong in the paths of error, had a right to dispose of the residue of his days, and was worthy of obedience.

He shortly after embarked for Petersburg, and took charge of the works committed to him. These operations appear to have been conducted successfully, much to the improvement of the extensive estates, and to the satisfaction of the parties concerned. There is also ground to hope, that his labours will at a future day prove a blessing to that empire.

On account of circumstances connected with the religious profession of the country, the gospel services of our dear friend were much circumscribed to private interviews; and in the line of his religious duty, he addressed the English residents in that city. The uniformly guarded and consistent life and conversation, the unbending integrity which no self-interest could warp,—no influence from without could suppress, will be long had in honourable remembrance in that land, to the glory of that Lord and Master; whom diligently to serve and faithfully to obey, was more to our dear friend than the smiles of princes, or all that the world could bestow.

During the abode of Daniel Wheeler in Russia, he was careful to keep up in his house the regular attendance of meetings for worship, twice on First days, and on Fifth days. An orderly and regular attention to the reading of the Scriptures was daily observed in his family; nor did they omit the frequent perusal of the writings of Friends.

For the distant members of his own Monthly Meeting he evinced his concern, by addressing them once a year, and occasionally at other times; putting them in remembrance of the things which belonged unto their peace.

In the Fourth Month, 1825, our friend Daniel Wheeler was liberated by his Monthly Meeting to attend the Yearly Meeting in Dublin, and for other religious engagements in Ireland. He was also concerned in Third Month, 1831, to visit Friends in Devonshire and Cornwall, as well as the inhabitants of the Scilly Islands. These services appear to have been accomplished, much to the satisfaction of his Friends, and to the comfort of his own mind.

At the end of 1832, while he was confined by indisposition at the house of a friend in Norfolk, the mournful intelligence arrived from Russia of the death of his beloved wife. This was one of the greatest trials that could have befallen him; but the Almighty hand was near to comfort and sustain him; and he was mercifully strengthened to say, “The Lord gave, and the Lord has taken away; blessed be the name of the Lord.” A little before this he had laid before his Friends at their Monthly Meeting in Ninth Month 1832, his prospect of paying a visit in gospel love to the Islands of the Pacific Ocean, Van Diemen's Land, and New South Wales, in which, as well as in the Quarterly Meeting and the Morning Meeting of ministers and elders in London, he had their full concurrence and earnest desires for his preservation.

For so very extensive a service, the necessary arrangements occupied a considerable time; these being at length completed, he sailed from the Thames the 13th of Eleventh Month, 1833. The vessel was proceeding down the English Channel, when on the 21st they were overtaken by a heavy storm, which induced them to take shelter off the Isle of Wight; and from adverse winds, and other causes, they were not able to take their final departure until the 15th of Third Month, 1834. He had been anxious to set out, and this detention was a great exercise to his faith. Yet, prompt in his movements as our dear friend was accustomed to be, when his duty was clearly defined, his example is strikingly instructive, in the patience and the stedfast faith with which he would wait until the true light so shone upon his path, as to point out not only the way, but the right time to move in it; and closely as he had been tried on this occasion, he was at last permitted to see and acknowledge, that he had not been detained one day too long.

The voyage out was a very tempestuous one, but he was preserved through all danger; and, accompanied by his son Charles, arrived safely at his destination.

Amongst those distant islands he was long and acceptably occupied. Yet he was often made sensible, preparatory to attending meetings, and other religious services, that he had no ability or qualification of his own, until he was humbled as in the dust; when after patiently waiting to be endowed with strength from on high, he has been enabled so to minister, that the Divine power has overshadowed the assembly; softening and contriting these poor islanders; filling their eyes with tears, and their hearts with love, until they could scarcely allow him to leave them. This arduous service, extended through the long period of nearly four years, was at length brought to a close; and he returned safely to England.

In the published accounts of our valued Friend's labours in these distant regions, there is abundant evidence of his care to direct his hearers to the Great Teacher and Sanctifier, and to wean them from a dependence on instrumental aid; and it is gratifying to observe, that, in preaching the truth boldly, without respect of persons, he also gained the good-will of the resident missionaries, who received him with uniform kindness, and gave him on his departure very ample testimonials of their approval.

It may not be unprofitable in this place to notice the exemplary care which our departed Friend had exercised over his tender offspring, to train them up in the nurture and admonition of the Lord: that they might experience a growth in grace, was the fervent desire of his heart. He would rise at an early hour to read the Scriptures to them, and at night he would quietly withdraw from the room, when the children were gone to rest, to endeavour to direct their youthful minds in reverent approach to their heavenly Father.

The blessing of Him who alone was able to preserve them, and render them fit for His kingdom, we believe was not lacking. For when, within a short period of each other, three of these young people were called from their afflicted parent to exchange time for eternity, he had the consolation of knowing that their end was crowned by a humble and confiding trust in redeeming mercy.

Had it been in the ordering of the Divine will, after so long a traveller in distant regions, and sensible of declining strength our dear Friend would have thankfully settled down for a season of rest. Hence it is scarcely in words to express the sympathy that was felt for him, when he informed his Monthly Meeting, on the return of his certificate for the South Seas, that it was required of him at once to set out for the American Continent, to visit more especially the cities on the coasts. At this time his son Charles Wheeler, his endeared companion amidst the perils and fatigues of the Southern hemisphere, was in a critical state of health, and for his sake his father might have felt anxious to delay his voyage. But so devoted was he to his Master's service, and so faithful to apprehend duty, that the yearnings of a father's heart could not stay him, nor call forth a repining word. He proceeded to America, and appeared to have pretty much carried out the work required of him, when he found himself released to pay a visit to the remnant of his family, who had now removed on account of Charles's declining state, to the more genial climate of France. At St. Germains, near Paris, he witnessed the peaceful close of his dear son. He once more attended his own Monthly Meeting in Third Month, 1840, and soon after sailed from this country for the last time, for New York. On preparing for his voyage out, he writes, 'But now that the time draws nigh, I feel more than ever the need of the prayers of the faithful for preservation and support in this the evening sacrifice about to be offered, when the natural strength of the poor body, and perhaps that of the mind also is weakened, as days have multiplied upon me, and years have increased; and, I think I never felt more at the prospect of being again severed from my beloved children:' adding, 'Certain it is that nothing short of implicit obedience to what we believe to be a divine requirement will be accepted; and nothing can so fully bring our love to the test, as the having to leave all and forsake all, without making any reserve for ourselves.'

A week after he sailed, Daniel Wheeler was taken ill, and continued so for the remainder of the voyage. The complaint appeared to be a cold attended with fever, and as he was unable to lie down from difficulty of breathing, his strength rapidly declined. He received every attention that could be rendered on ship-board, for he bore the respect and regard of all. When he arrived at New York, he was conducted on shore by kind Friends there, and further medical advice was obtained. The opinion formed of his situation was decidedly unfavourable. On being told that he was thought to be in a very critical state, he said: 'All has been done that could be done;—only write to my dear children, how it is.' The work has been going on with the day. All I want is quietness, it is a great thing to be clear from pain.' 'Love to all my friends on this side the Atlantic as well as the other.' 'I want nothing but the love of my heavenly Father, and I witness it. The Lord is good to them who love and fear His name: great things has He done for me; things so wonderfully marvellous, that they could hardly be believed, were I to tell of them.'

He remarked to a friend; As to himself, he had no doubt: he had the same faith that had been with him through life, and which was founded upon the gospel of Christ, which enabled him to say with the Apostle, “nevertheless I live; yet not I, but Christ lives in me: and the life which I now live in the flesh, I live by the faith of the Son of God, who loved me, and gave himself for me.”

All that the most assiduous care and tenderness, aided by medical skill, could do, proved unavailing to restore him. His exhausted frame gradually sunk under the disorder, and he quietly passed away on the 12th of Sixth Month, 1840, aged sixty-eight years; having been a faithful labourer in the gospel vineyard above twenty-four years.

The Christian warfare was thus ended. Full of years, his loins girded about, and his light burning, he was as one that waits for his Lord.

We see abundant cause to exalt His holy name, who thus led forth our beloved friend,—who preserved him through many perils by sea and land—who conferred upon him strength in time of need, and sufficient qualification for His service;—and who, in His own appointed time, we reverently believe, has called him in redeeming love “to an inheritance incorruptible, and undefiled, and that fades not away.”

Signed in and on behalf of the Meeting aforesaid, held at Sheffield, the 3rd of Twelfth Month, 1840.

A Testimony

Of the Monthly Meeting of Friends of New York, concerning our Friend Daniel Wheeler.

'At the Yearly Meeting of Friends held in New York, by adjournments, from the 24th of Fifth Month, 1841, to the 28th of the same inclusive.

'A Testimony of the Monthly Meeting of New York, concerning our late valued, and beloved friend Daniel Wheeler of Great Britain, approved by the Quarterly Meeting of Westbury, and by the Meeting for Sufferings, was read:—

'This tribute of affection and of justice to his memory was very satisfactory to this meeting; the Testimony was directed to be recorded, and the Clerk was requested to cause a copy of it, together with a copy of this minute, to be forwarded to the Monthly Meeting of Balby in England, of which our dear friend was a member.'

Our beloved friend Daniel Wheeler of England, having finished his labours in the ministry of the gospel, and ended his days in this city, this meeting feels it to be incumbent upon it to make public some account of his religious services in this land, of the progress of his illness, and of his interesting expressions, when he laid down his head in peace among us.

He first arrived in this city on a religious visit to Friends in this country, with certificates of unity from the meetings to which he belonged, on the 1st of the First Month, 1839.

During the following spring and summer, he attended the Yearly Meetings of Philadelphia, Virginia, New York, and New England. In the Eighth Month, he visited the British provinces of New Brunswick and Nova Scotia, and in the Ninth Month attended the Yearly Meeting of Ohio. During his religious engagements amongst us, he was careful to seek for the guidance of the Holy Spirit, and to move no faster nor further than his way was thus opened. Hence his preaching was sound, weighty, and edifying, ministering grace to the hearers, and is fresh in our minds, accompanied by deep and feeling unity with his religious services. In all his movements he was remarkably watchful to wait for that Divine direction, which had so often and so remarkably preserved him in many seasons of peril, during his extensive travels by sea and land.

In consequence of intelligence of the declining health of his son Charles, he sailed for England on the 1st of the Tenth Month, and found him in France, where he had gone with the hope of deriving benefit from the climate, and had the satisfaction of continuing with him until the peaceful close of his life; after which our dear friend again embarked for this country, and arrived in New York on the 28th day of the Fourth Month, 1840.

During the voyage he was taken sick, and was so ill on arrival, that he was removed with difficulty to the house of our friend John Clapp. On the following day he was increasingly ill, and remarked to the physician that he could not endure another such a day.

On the morning of the 30th, it appeared from his rapid respiration and the coldness of his extremities, as if he was sinking fast, and it was thought proper to inform him of it: he replied, 'All has been done that could be done; only write to my dear children how it is: the work has been going on with the day. Love to all my friends, on this side the Atlantic as well as the other. It is a great thing to be clear of pain. I desire nothing but the love of my heavenly Father, and I witness it.'

He revived, however, in the afternoon, so as to write a few lines to his children. On the following day, he had returns of oppression. On the 3rd of the Fifth Month, after being bled, he said, 'Without blood there is no cleansing upon which one of the physicians remarked, “It is the blood of Jesus that cleanses us from all our sins.” 'Yes,' Daniel replied,' but not in our natural unregenerate state. If we walk in the light as he is in the light, then I believe it will cleanse us from our sins: yes,' he added with much emphasis, 'I know it.'

In the evening he said he had had a hard struggle, and at one time he did not know but it was the cold sweat of death.

On the morning of the 6th, he called for his clothes, and having given directions for the disposition of some papers which they contained, he said, 'Now I have done with the things of this world;' and further observed, that he had no wish to live, but for the sake of his family, and that the Lord Jesus might live in him; that he had been his guide for many years, and he had declared his name unto thousands: that he had no hope but in Him, and he was the same Lord over all: that it was not the prospect of immediate release, that led him to speak thus, but it was in his heart, and he must say it while he had words; with much more, in a very impressive manner, and with a strong voice.

Towards evening his mind appeared to overflow with adoration of the mercy and goodness of his dear Lord and Master, which had constantly attended him in his pilgrimage, and crowned him with loving-kindness and tender mercies.

He briefly recapitulated what had occurred since he left America, alluding to the consolation he had received at the death of his son Charles; so that he had to rejoice in the midst of grief, saying, “The Lord is good to them that love and fear his name: great things has he done for me;” things so wonderfully marvellous that they would hardly be believed were I to tell of them. If I have experienced any shortness in my journey Zionward, it has been on my side, and not the Lord's; for he has been faithful, and his promises have been and remain to be, yes and amen, forever. While I was on ship-board, and thought by some to be nigh unto death, how did the Lord appear for my help and consolation! and since I have been in this chamber, how has he appeared for my comfort in the night season, and I have been enabled to sing hymns of praises and thanksgiving unto him! When the ship made her soundings I made my soundings, on that Rock which has never failed me, whose foundation is from everlasting to everlasting. I saw that I should be safely landed, though extremely weak in body, and was enabled to say, should the Lord see fit to raise me up, and strengthen me, still to show forth his wonderful works to the children of men, or cut short the work in righteousness, Your will, O God, and not mine be done. I do not see how the end will be.'

9th.—He passed a distressing night, and one time said, 'I did not know whether I should live to see the light of another day.'

11th.—He said he felt the Saviour to be near him, every hour of the day. From this period there was some apparent improvement, and for a time he was more comfortable; but the disease not being removed, his weakness again increased, and on the 29th he was very feeble. At one time he said, as to himself, he had no doubt: he had the same faith which had been with him through life, and which was founded upon the gospel of Christ, which enabled him to say with the apostle, “Nevertheless I live; yet not I, but Christ lives in me; and the life which I now live in the flesh, I live by the faith of the Son of God, who loved me, and gave himself for me.”

12th of Sixth Month in the morning, he said, 'Perhaps this day will end all your cares and troubles.' In the afternoon he said, 'It is very doubtful whether I shall be permitted to return to England.' In the evening his breathing became more laboured: after some time he was incapable of being aroused, and a little after twelve o'clock at night, he quietly passed away, in the 69th year of his age.

Throughout all his extreme weakness and great distress, that faith and trust in the mercies and promises of his dear Redeemer, which had been so remarkably exemplified during his eventful life, remained firm and unshaken; and that all things would work together for good, seemed to be the prevailing covering of his mind throughout his illness.

He had ceased from his many and extensive labours; and we feel an assurance that he has entered into that rest, which is prepared for the people of God.

His remains were conveyed to Friends' Meeting-house, in Orchard-street, where a large and solemn meeting was held; in which, testimony was borne to the sufficiency of that Divine power, by which he was prepared for usefulness in the church, and made instrumental in promoting the cause of vital Christianity in the world. After which the corpse was followed to the grave by many Friends and others, and interred in Friends' burial-ground, the 15th of the same month.

Signed by direction, and on behalf of the Monthly Meeting aforesaid, held in New York, 7th of Fourth Month, 1841.

Memoirs of Daniel Wheeler.

Chapter I.

Introductory Remarks by The Author—His Parentage, Education—Early Becomes an Orphan—Enters the Merchant Service, then the Royal Navy—Is Paid Off—Enters the Army.

Having frequently derived much valuable instruction, from the perusal of the narratives of those who have long since exchanged an earthly for a heavenly inheritance, the thought has at times occurred to me, that a short memoir of my own life,—however evil “the days of the years of my pilgrimage” have been,—might, under the Divine blessing, be made in like manner useful to others. But perhaps, from the humiliating conviction, that days as without number have been miserably devoted to madness and folly, in forgetfulness of a long-suffering Lord God, who is abundant in goodness and truth,—the guilty mind would gladly hide the remembrance of these forever in oblivion, and pass over them in silent abhorrence; or, conscious that there yet remains a stubborn and unsubdued residue of human corruptions,—a sense of unworthiness and unfitness may have hitherto operated to retard the undertaking; lest the creature should in any degree be exalted, to whom shame only with blushing and confusion of face must ever belong.

Whatever may thus far have impeded any attempt of the kind, I am induced, not as a matter of choice, but as a duty, now in the sixty-first year of my age, to commence the work; humbly imploring the assistance of Him, who “knows the thoughts and intents of the heart,” to enable me, as far as it may be carried forward, to accomplish it to his own praise and glory, as a faithful testimony for the advancement of our holy Redeemer's kingdom in the hearts of my fellow-creatures.

Although no man can possibly be excusable for having done wrong, because others may have been as bad as himself, or even worse,—yet the magnitude of the present undertaking would, in my view, be diminished, if on reviewing writings of a similar kind, any thing like resemblance, or a parallel case could be discovered. But, alas! all that have gone before, appear to me to have travelled a much shorter time than myself, in the broad way that leads to destruction. Many have yielded again and again to the temptations of the unwearied and insidious enemy of mankind, and have been long in the fetters of sin and death; yet I feel to have surpassed all others, that I have read any account of, in having drawn “iniquity as with cords of vanity, and sin as it were with a cart rope.” I can adopt as my own, I hope in a degree of true abasement of self, the acknowledgment of the apostle,—“this is a faithful saying, and worthy of all acceptation, that Christ Jesus came into the world to save sinners, of whom I am chief.”

I was born in London, the 27th day of the Eleventh Month, 1771: my parents, William and Sarah Wheeler, were members of the established religion of the country, and strict adherents to all its rites and ceremonies; and although not particularly conspicuous as being more religious than others of the same class, yet they were highly esteemed and respected, by a large circle of acquaintance for uprightness and integrity,—of which there are at this day many living witnesses. They had a large family of children, whose minds they endeavoured to imbue at an early age with the fear of their great Creator,—taking them regularly to attend the performance of public worship, and also reading the Holy Scriptures in the family at home; portions of which I well remember reading aloud when very young.

By a document now in my possession, it appears that until some time after my father's marriage, he was not in any line of business; but afterwards, to meet the demand occasioned by a great increase of family, he commenced the wine trade in a select way. To enter into minute family details is not the present object, nor is it within my reach, being too young, when deprived of both parents, to be able to speak from knowledge of my own. I have but a very indistinct recollection of my father's person, not being quite seven years old when he died, at the age of forty-three years. Some time before his death, our once large family of children was reduced to five only, of whom I was the youngest. We then lived in London, at the Bond Street end of Lower Grosvenor Street; but those parts of the premises which looked into Bond Street, were occupied by another person, as tenant to my father.

My mother was endowed with a large capacity, combining great sweetness with firmness of mind: and although an entire stranger to every kind of business, she persevered in an extraordinary manner after the death of her beloved husband, in carrying on the trade for the support of the family; and so long as she lived, it continued increasingly to flourish, our eldest brother being her assistant in the business. When she was attacked by the illness that deprived her family of their endeared and only surviving parent, I was sent for home on the mournful occasion, being then at a boarding-school at Parson's Green, near Fulham. Of the loss of such a mother, I was very sensible, being about twelve years old at the time; and as I had a much greater personal knowledge of her worth and solicitous affection, than I could possibly have had of my dear father, the event of losing her made a deeper and more lasting impression. I had had much of her maternal society, and had largely partaken of her constant parental and tender care, of which, perhaps, from being the youngest of the family, I had more than an ordinary share.

A clergyman related to my mother by marriage, who resided on a living in the West Riding of Yorkshire, had the whole management of our family affairs, being left sole executor. He came up to London at this eventful moment; and after having examined into the state of things, it was judged eligible that the business should still be carried on for the benefit of us all, by our eldest brother; whose character at that period, and known capability, seemed fully to warrant such a decision. Shortly after, I was sent again to school; and our little family band, although lamentably reduced, still remained awhile longer unbroken.

For a few months after this great bereavement, all things went on as well as could be expected with our solitary family; but the deep affliction into which it had been plunged, by degrees began to wear away, although for a time it seemed as if it could scarcely be borne, much less forgotten. Our brother, on whose conduct the welfare of the rest greatly depended, thus left without parental control, became less and less attentive to business; and gradually sliding into bad habits, and mixing with evil associates, gave way to every excess and indulgence in his power. From his extravagance and negligence, the affairs entrusted to him at home became so much embarrassed, that it was now determined by the executor in trust, that the business should be disposed of; and the necessary steps were taken accordingly. It was not long before a person came forward, who was competent to purchase the stock on hand, and enter into the trade on his own account.

Although by our brother's imprudence, the family were now banished from a comfortable home, and separated, never all to meet again in mutability; yet the business itself received no material check, nor was it for a single hour suspended; but was afterwards carried on to advantage for several years by our successor. When proper arrangements were made, our beloved but unhappy brother sailed for Jamaica, preferring in all probability a foreign clime, rather than endure the reflections which he so justly merited at home, for having thus brought ruin and disgrace upon a family, whose prospects had been less clouded than those of many others in similar circumstances. It cannot be doubted that much sorrow of heart would be his portion: but I had never an opportunity of obtaining much information respecting him, from the time he left England until several years after his death. He died at the age of thirty-eight years; and it appears that he had been comfortably settled for the last several years of his life, and been frequent in correspondence with those branches of our family that were more stationary than myself. My other brother had previously settled in the West Indies. At this time, my eldest sister went to reside with our relative in Yorkshire, to whom she looked up as a guardian, until married: my youngest sister was at a boarding school at Putney; and I remained with the family which succeeded to the business. Having been previously removed from school to assist my brother in the counting-house, I had acquired considerable knowledge of its management; it was therefore a convenience to them who were entire strangers to it, and for a time no other occupation offering for me to engage in, I was furnished with employment, and had still a comfortable home.

Our family compact was now forever dissolved;—we were scattered and widely separated from each other, without any near relative in the world. My father was an only son, and my mother an only daughter, so that we had neither uncles nor aunts; and I believe, in the strict application of the term cousin, not one that could properly be called so: neither were any of our grand-parents living, or had ever been known to us, except our dear mother's mother, who ended her days at our house three years before her daughter's decease. Our family being thus severed from each other, we were cast upon the wide world, as to relatives, in a peculiarly destitute situation; but yet not altogether friendless,—for some who had long been bound to the family by ties of strong attachment, clearly evinced their sincerity, by never withdrawing from the orphan children, (now overtaken by adversity,) that regard and kindness, which had been extended to their deceased parents in the days of their prosperity;—a test which the friendship of the world can but seldom bear.

Having brought my little narrative to this point, it seems necessary to determine in what manner it shall be carried forward, before we proceed any farther. After due consideration, I am of the mind that it should be hereafter confined principally to events relating to myself; only in future bringing into view other branches of the family, when the hand of time shall, through the over-ruling providence of Almighty God, have again led some of us into connexion with each other at periods far remote: one of which was made productive of the most striking and important change in the history of my life; and which I humbly hope will lead to the accomplishment of another, transcendently greater and everlasting, at my death. But, reader, if the power to choose were mine, to draw an impenetrable shade over the next several years would best suit my natural inclination; it would save me many pangs, and I should at once bring you to the time when I could tell you with delight, “what the Lord has done for my soul.” But with these years omitted, the long-suffering and unutterable goodness of my gracious God and Saviour would be eclipsed, his tender mercies would be ungratefully robbed of their lustre, the riches of his grace obscured, and its glory hidden.

I must therefore, like the regular and progressive gradations of nature, proceed from those days of childhood and youth, at which I had now arrived,—would that I could say, of innocency. But ah! at this distance of time, I can painfully trace the springings up of the evil root, which failed not at an early age to bring forth fruit of those things “whereof I am now ashamed;” having sorrowfully found from woful experience, that their “end is death.” Canst you then wonder at the shrinking of human nature from the task of thus re-opening a dark picture of guilt? such as I pray it may never be your lot to know, or to have to render an account of as your own. Though now in full abhorrence of the same, through the mercy of God in Christ Jesus, I have a hope that my sins, though many, will be forgiven, and forever blotted out as “a thick cloud;” and that my tribulated soul will yet be cleansed by the precious “blood of sprinkling, that speaks better things than that of Abel.” This only “cried from the ground” for vengeance against the offender; while the blood of Him, who cried—“Father, forgive them, for they know not what they do,” cleanses from all sin, and was shed for many, for the remission of sins,—yes, for all that repent, believe, and obey the gospel in the secret of their hearts revealed, which is “the power of God unto salvation.” But although ready to shudder at the prospect before me, I feel strengthened to proceed, so far as I may rightly do, from a belief that the work in which I am now engaged, is prompted in mercy, and will not be in vain, peradventure to myself, if not to another. For if permitted to finish it, I shall have had another opportunity afforded, even at this late hour, for repentance,—a truly great and blessed privilege to every sinner. And how much more shall I owe unto my Lord, if in the course of a diligent search, it should please the “faithful witness,” in condescension to discover to the view of my mind sins, which, through the subtle working of the grand adversary, have been partly hidden and imperfectly repented of.

For some time after the separation of our family before hinted at, had taken place, my attention was fully occupied; until the party, who had taken to the business, became acquainted with its usual routine. The master of the house, holding a post in a public office under government, which required his regular attendance, was absent every day until after dinner; and as his family consisted only of very young children, I had no associates but among the servants; whose example did not fail to have in many things a baneful influence on my thoughtless mind,—though at the time imperceptible,—and the-consequences unregarded. Yet I was at times desirous that a situation in a well conducted family, with whom in the days of my parents we had been intimately acquainted, would offer for me; which in all respects would have been much more guarded, than that in which I was; but in this my hope was disappointed.

There was a merchant in the city, who had long shown much friendship for us; on whom without any particular reason I kept an eye, as one who was likely to befriend me. He frequently called on business: and one day on perceiving him coming, it occurred to me immediately, that his business was on my behalf. This proved to be the case: for in a short time I was sent for, and informed that he had obtained a situation for me, on board a ship then lying in the Thames, fitting out for Oporto, commanded by a respectable man, a lieutenant in the navy, then on half pay; she belonged to some merchants with whom he was connected in the import trade. This offer was at once accepted on my part, and I suppose that any other would at that time have been the same, without regard to choice; as I do not remember that one occupation had any preference with me rather than another. I am not aware that any attempt was made to dissuade me from this undertaking, by those whose sentiments would have been regarded, or by any other person; so that the needful preparation was immediately made for this unexpected change of station.

I should not feel easy without noticing in this place, for the benefit of others, the manifold temptations to which young people are necessarily exposed, when brought up to trades similar to that in which I was then employed. From the nature of these trades, there is scarcely a probability of escape from insensibly falling into habits (much more readily acquired than shaken off,) of tasting different kinds of wines and strong liquors, which too often leads the way to intemperance. The injurious effects of these practices, and of such exposure at an early age, having been felt and witnessed by myself, make mo the more desirous to warn others against the business.

But a short time elapsed before I went on board the ship, which, in a few days, proceeded to Gravesend. The weather being rough, we were detained a day or two at the Nore; and after reaching the Downs, we were again hindered by boisterous and contrary winds for more than a fortnight. From these and other detentions at sea, the ship was too late to procure a cargo in Portugal, which resulted in our wintering in the Douro; so that before we reached London again, the voyage had occupied fully six months. We were but a short time in the river, before we sailed again on the second voyage; which was completed in less than half the time of the former. During our stay in England, my time was taken up in learning navigation; so that I had scarcely any opportunity of seeing either my sister, or any of our old friends. While I belonged to this vessel, we had a providential escape from 'fire; the danger was greatly increased by the river being frozen at the time: but with prompt assistance from other ships then in the Thames, the ice was broken, and sufficient water procured to extinguish the flames, before much damage was done. By the time our second voyage was completed, I had become tolerably accustomed to the situation; and although we had experienced some rough weather, I was reconciled to it as much as could be expected.

Soon after returning to London the second time, I found that some of my friends had succeeded in procuring for me the station of midshipman on board a ship of war, then commissioned at Plymouth, and preparing for the cruising service. This affair was brought about by an intimate friend of my late dear mother, whose brother was appointed to the command of this vessel; and it was considered by those who felt interested in my welfare, as an important foundation-stone, upon which my nautical career would at a future day be established. The change, however specious in appearance at the time, was to me but as an introduction to a school, which is not often equalled, and but seldom surpassed for vice and immorality. After the necessary equipments were provided, I took leave of my youngest sister, who was still at Putney at school, and of some of those with whom we were the most intimately acquainted, and I joined the ship at Plymouth. The situation I had now obtained, was for some time much less comfortable than the one in which I had been engaged. Before, I had been placed amongst only a few strangers, but now the crew altogether consisted of many; and being an entire stranger to naval etiquette, my situation was dull and mortifying; particularly as from my not having completed my fourteenth year, all those of the officers with whom I could use freedom, were several years older than myself. It was not long before we left the harbour, and sailed for the Isle of Man station. This was a stormy and dangerous passage, in which, through Divine mercy, we were favoured to witness a marvellous preservation from shipwreck,—the dawn of day discovering to us just in time the small island of Grasholm; towards which the vessel was drifting in a direct course, and already within a short distance of the breakers. We were lying to at the time under two or three storm sails; but there happily being room to wear clear of the rocky crags, the danger was soon left behind. After remaining in these parts about fourteen months, visiting alternately the coasts of Scotland, Ireland, and Wales, and putting into a variety of harbours for provisions and water, as occasion required, we reached Liverpool in a leaky condition. Here we expected to be repaired: but instead of being permitted to go into the dock for that purpose, instructions were received from the Admiralty to procure an extra pump and proceed immediately to Plymouth; this, although attended with much risk, was at last accomplished in safety.

While in this harbour, interest was made on my behalf with an admiral of considerable estate and influence in the neighbourhood, with whom in former days some of our family had been personally acquainted. Through this medium, I was in a short time received on board a ship of the line, then bearing the flag of a rear-admiral. This advance, under such patronage, was considered to hold out a promising aspect; but while it seemed to pave the way to promotion, it opened at once a door to an extensive range of acquaintance with officers on board, whose circumstances in life enabled them to deviate with less difficulty than myself from the path of virtue; whose example I endeavoured to follow, until nothing but the lack of means prevented my going still greater lengths than the worst of them. While in this ship, when about sixteen years of age, having been unwell, and probably led to reflect a little on that account, I was made sensible of a Divine visitation being extended to me: disclosing with indubitable clearness the vanity and emptiness of every earthly station, tarnishing the pride and glory of this perishing world in my sight; and which, though little understood and less regarded at the moment, has since, at different periods of my chequered life, been brought to my remembrance, by Him “who declares unto man his thoughts,—who makes the morning darkness, and treads upon the high places of the earth,—the Lord, the Lord of hosts is his name.” When this occurred, although then entered into the bond of iniquity, I had not launched so fully into its dreadful abyss, as was afterwards most lamentably the case; and from what I have since witnessed in unutterable mercy, of the strength and power of redeeming love, a belief is induced, that if this warning voice, then sounding in the secret of my sinful heart,—“Behold I stand at the door, and knock,” had been hearkened unto, and waited upon, my footsteps, even mine, would have been conducted from the horrible pit to which they were fast verging.

I continued nearly six years in the navy: but were all the changes from ship to ship enumerated which took place during that time, and the great variety of incidents which befel me, they would swell this narrative far beyond the limits intended: while however I am desirous of avoiding the error of gratifying self, or merely amusing others, I beg to be preserved from a greater,—in omitting any thing tending in the slightest degree to make known the aboundings of that wondrous goodness and mercy, which followed me all along through an unparalleled course of presumptuous and unrestrained liberty. It may therefore suffice for me to say, that notwithstanding the many and great dangers I was exposed to, and the hardships and suffering I had to endure, through all which I was preserved and sustained in a manner at this day inconceivable to myself; yet none of these things were sufficient to soften the rocky heart, or bring me to a sense of my lost condition: for whether on board or on shore, in harbour or at sea, or in whatever country, if I could meet with associates prone like myself to evil, I was always ready to hasten with them to it, either in word or in deed.

An expected war with a foreign power had occasioned an unusually large fleet to collect at Spithead; but after a time, the differences being adjusted, the ships were dispersed to their respective posts, and that to which I belonged was paid off. She was commissioned again the next day as a guard-ship, and I have no doubt that I might have resumed my station as one of her mates, had I made application: for with all my private failings as a poor sinful creature, my public character had not suffered in any of the ships in which I had served, but rather the contrary; for my pride and presumption had often prompted me in moments of extreme danger, in a daring manner to take the most hazardous post, even when duty did not require it, or warrant the risk. But instead of applying to be re-instated in my former birth, I remained on shore in pursuit of sinful gratifications with increased avidity; and going up to London, so much time elapsed before my return, that I never afterwards attempted to procure a situation in the ship I had left, or in any other. In this way I left the service altogether; and would I could say, that I left the service of sin at the same time: but I had not then filled up to the brim the measure of iniquity. For some time I remained without any employment; at length I concluded to go to Canterbury, without any other motive than what arose from examining the names of places to which stage coaches ran from the inn at which I was then stopping; and as I knew nothing of that place, it is very probable that I thought no person there knew any thing of me.

I now found the disadvantage of not having been regularly brought up to a trade; and although desirous of getting into some employ, no matter what,—yet for lack of this knowledge, I was alike unfit for all; and I could not bear the thought of making my forlorn situation known to those who had been the friends of my childhood, amongst whom there is no doubt but helpers would have been found. As my means became every day more scanty, I was at length reduced to complete poverty; and after many fruitless attempts to procure a livelihood, there seemed left to me no other alternative, than that of entering as a volunteer into the army: this plan was accordingly adopted without delay.

I must now digress awhile from the narrative, to mention a circumstance, which the facts just related have afresh awakened and impressed on my memory. Towards the latter part of the time of my being in the navy, it was suggested to my lost and bewildered mind, by the subtle destroyer of men, that nothing short of making away with myself, could extricate me from the difficulties by which I was surrounded, and shelter me from shame and disgrace; and the method of its accomplishment was at seasons hinted at. But,—blessed be the name of the Lord God of heaven and earth forever! his invisible arm of merciful interposition preserved me from this dreadful snare; and in the greatness of his love and strength he has at this distant period, put it into the heart of his unworthy creature to record his mighty acts, to his praise and to his glory, with humble and reverend thankfulness. Greatly do I desire, that if this relation should ever fall into the hands of any poor sinners and servants of the cruel taskmaster, as was then my lot,—that such may be hereby strengthened and encouraged to look unto the Lord their God for help, even though they may be plunged into the very gulf of despair: for “his compassions fail not,”—they are new every morning; his tender mercies are over all his works; and he will give power to the faint, and strength to them that have no might of their own, to resist this, and every other temptation of that wicked one, who was a liar from the beginning.

Chapter II.

The Author Goes to Plymouth, There with His Regiment to Ireland—Kilkenny—Dublin—Harassing Service—Personal Danger—Recruits—Liverpool—Bristol—Southampton—Embarks from There with Troops for the Campaign in Holland.

It was a little remarkable, that, after all the pains I had taken to screen my fallen situation from the knowledge of those who had been acquainted with me, the regiment in which I had engaged, proved to be at that very time on duty at Plymouth, a place where, above all others, I had the greatest number of acquaintances; but I was so completely metamorphosed in appearance, that I was never in one instance found out by any whom I had formerly known, even when brought into close contact with them. This change of condition, however, wrought in me no change of life. My conduct for a time was almost entitled to the appellation of reformed, but this period was short indeed; for having speedily acquired a knowledge of all that was required of me in the way of duty, I began to rise above the impressions made by difficulties gone by, and again to look forward to a farther participation in the delusive and miserable pleasures of this transitory and wicked world.

In less than a year we were ordered to Ireland; and three transports having arrived for us in Catwater, a short time completed the embarkation: we sailed for the Cove of Cork, reaching it in safety after a fine passage. While at sea, it was soon discovered, that I was no stranger to the management of a vessel; and though I concealed my having served several years in a superior station, yet I felt so much at home, that I voluntarily performed the duty of a sailor during my stay on board, not a little proud of my qualifications. It is most probable that pride and self-conceit were the only motives that prompted these endeavours to be useful; few, indeed, of our actions, however specious in appearance, are wholly divested of self in some shape or other, when examined in the pure mirror of truth; such is the depravity of the human heart in its natural state.

Having frequently been sheltered before by the coves, bays, and harbours of Ireland, and frequently been on shore in different places, I was tolerably well acquainted with the character and customs of the people; whose hospitality to strangers has long been acknowledged by all who have visited their shores: and although now unable to move in the same sphere as formerly, yet I still found opportunities to indulge the evil propensities of fallen nature. But as the miserable inhabitants in some of the provinces were rapidly ripening for rebellion, our time was much occupied by hard and laborious service.

After landing at the Passage of Cork, we proceeded to that city, but shortly marched forward to Kilkenny. This place was a station that afforded more quiet and comparative ease, than any which afterwards fell to my lot, while engaged in the regular service; but our stay here was of short duration, before entering upon the arduous duty of Dublin garrison. The agitated state of public affairs at that period, greatly augmented our fatigue; and it frequently happened that we were on duty every other night, and this in the winter season.

Discontent increasing and disturbances breaking out in the interior of the country, small detachments of troops were dispatched from Dublin, to strengthen the authority of magistrates in their endeavours to maintain public tranquillity, and to afford protection to the peaceable inhabitants from the nightly depredations of numerous gangs of misled and intoxicated desperadoes, to which they and their property were constantly exposed under a variety of diabolical pretences. It was my lot to be chosen with the first of the detached parties, to a share of this dangerous and harassing service; on which, such was at one time the emergency, that we were kept on the alert night after night, without any intermission for a week together, with only such intervals of rest as could be procured in the day time.

While on this expedition, on a particular enterprise with a constable, I was to all appearance reduced to the necessity of taking the life of another to save my own. The constable perceiving the danger, had left me alone; when I was suddenly attacked by a poor infuriated creature, in a state little short of perfect madness from continued intoxication, supported by several others, but in a less outrageous condition. I kept him at bay for some time; but at last he got so near, that it became every moment more difficult to avoid being reached by the violent strokes he made with some kind of weapon, I think of iron, which were repeatedly received by the firelock in my hands, then loaded with ball. In this situation, there seemed left to me no other than the dreadful alternative of shooting him to save myself. I called in vain in the language of appeal to the other people to interfere: they stood by, as if to see how matters were likely to terminate, before they began to act or take a part of any consequence either way; which they nearly carried too far: but when they saw me actually preparing to shoot the man, they hastily cried out,—'spare life! spare life!'—which I only needed their help to enable me to accomplish. They then seized him, and in the midst of the struggle and confusion which took place amongst themselves, my escape was happily effected. I cannot suppose at that time, when I needed only the help of other men to enable me to spare life, that the principal motive was other than that of self-preservation,—accompanied by fear of the immediate consequences that would inevitably have followed, and must have resulted in my own destruction. Therefore it is greatly to be feared (although that heart must be callous indeed, which in all such cases does not recoil from the horrid act,) that it was not love to my fellow-creature, which prompted the desire in me to spare his life. Let none mistake it as such. I have frequently thought of this circumstance since it occurred, I hope with humble thankfulness to the great Preserver of men; and now on committing it to record, as one of those many events, in which there was but one step between me and the grave, and while shuddering at the strong recollection of it,—my soul magnifies that unmerited and amazing mercy, afresh displayed and multiplied to my understanding in a two-fold view:—on the one hand, in withholding me from the crime of taking away the life of a fellow-creature, like myself, “in the gall of bitterness;” and if I had escaped myself, thus sparing me, at this late hour, amidst the decay of nature, when the shadows of the evening are stretching out and my feet drawing near the margin of the grave,—the appalling thought of a brother's blood, yet unwiped away:—on the other hand, in rescuing from immediate death two miserable sinners, wholly unprepared to die; for had I taken away the man's life, my own would doubtless have been quickly sacrificed to the revenge of his enraged companions. Thus as my history rolls on, the enormous load of debt which I already owe unto my Lord still accumulates; and verily it never can be liquidated, but in that infinite and wondrous mercy, which delights to forgive every repenting sinner, who in the depths of humility and abasedness of self, has indeed “nothing to pay” withal.

On the arrival of some fresh detachments from the garrison, I learned that a vacancy had occurred during our absence on this service, and that the blank was filled up by the promotion of myself. Although this circumstance was of trifling import, yet it served to flatter and feed pride, and eventually to open the way again for a renewal of those evil habits, from which for a time I had been sheltered. As each body of troops was relieved from this extra fatigue at a given time, our turn came in regular course at the expiration of a few weeks, when we again returned to Dublin. Not long after this, inquiry was made for a person qualified to assist in the writing department of the commander-in-chief, under his own personal inspection: I never knew exactly how it was brought about, but in the course of a few days, it was decided in my favour; and I immediately entered upon this new and altogether unexpected employment. Being now on most days at liberty at an early hour, and freed from restraint and control, and from that incessant round of duties, which had before fully occupied my time and attention, and compelled in a degree to orderly conduct, together with having it more in my power by possessing greater means,—I soon began to take my swing in every inordinate gratification to which I was naturally prepense, and in which an extensive metropolis furnished ample opportunity to indulge; thus adding sin to sin, and making farther woful work for repentance. And although at times, in the midst of these evil practices I was made sensible of convicting reproofs, sufficient to have awakened any one but myself; yet they only seemed to deter me for a short interval from persisting in them, or until another opportunity offered;—such was their dominion over me. This course was however at last stopped, by my attendance being no longer necessary at the writing department, together with the sudden march of the regiment to Granard; but not before my health had begun to suffer from my folly.

Our stay was not long at this place; for the French revolution, which had occurred about two years before, now began to occasion more frequent movements and changes amongst the military. I was engaged in some hazardous enterprises while lying here; and although the town was small, and our time in it short, yet there were sufficient temptations to be found for my unwary feet to fall into. From this place, a part of the regiment, consisting of two hundred picked men and a suitable number of officers, was drafted to serve in an expedition then preparing to act in the West Indies. The same quota was selected from every regiment in Ireland, then seventeen in number,—and possibly from every regiment in England also. From all the information that I could ever obtain, the greatest part, if not the whole of these poor devoted fellows, then declared to be the flower of the British army, fell victims to the climate and the war. I mention this lamentable fact, although foreign to my subject, to perpetuate all in my power, the ravages of this horrid and desolating scourge of the human race. At the same time, under a deep sense of my then sinful and still sinning condition, my mind is struck with admiration, that I was not included in the above-mentioned draft, to which I was no less liable than others; were it only as a punishment which I so justly merited, for my unprecedented rebellion against a long-suffering and all-gracious Lord God.

Our next remove was to Galway; where after some weeks I was again promoted, from what cause I do not now remember; but, as had been the case in the navy, so now, however profligate my conduct in the general, I still kept up a fair name, by being ready for all the duties that devolved upon me.

By this time several new regiments were raising by field-officers, in expectation of promotion when the number of each was completed, according to the then existing proposals of the government; at whose expense, and under whose particular patronage these measures were undertaken, for the purpose of more vigorously prosecuting the continental war. In order to expedite the formation of these new corps, application was made to the commanding officers of old established regiments, for persons competent to assist in their equipment and discipline, where such could be recommended. For one of these regiments, intended to be formed in Dublin of recruits raised from the different provinces, two others with myself were selected, and accordingly despatched immediately to commence the necessary operations in that city.

After leaving Grranard, and to the time of my again reaching Dublin, perhaps my course of life, from one or other cause, might not be quite so dissipated as for some time previous. But this could only be attributed to an accumulation of duty, and not from any change wrought in myself: for alas! the old evil root still remained in unabated strength, though dormant; which in a while did not fail to shoot forth, and produce those works of unmortified flesh, which had so long and so often been manifested in my conduct and conversation, and were now not likely to be less frequent, from my being again promoted shortly after joining this new regiment. Some progress was made in organizing the new troops, as the different small detachments arrived in the course of the winter from the interior of the country; and by the time the spring fairly opened, the whole number stipulated, was raised and accepted. Such was the urgency of affairs just then, that, while in a raw and incomplete state of discipline, almost beyond conception, from the wildness of character of the class of people, of which the principal part of the regiment was composed, immediate embarkation was ordered, and transports were actually in waiting to receive it. In two days, the whole were on board of three ships, which sailed with the first tide for Bristol.

When the time for sending off these newly raised troops was fully come, the utmost despatch was necessary; for it was very evident, that had time been allowed for the information to spread to any material extent, the embarkation could scarcely have been effected without bloodshed. As it was, though the preparations commenced soon after three o'clock in the morning, the concourse of people assembled together was immense, to behold their unfortunate countrymen in every relation of fathers, husbands, brothers, and sons, forced away from their native shores,—I may say forced away, for it was necessary to assemble a strong military force from the garrison to ensure the embarkation, which after all was not effected without some difficulty. From my own personal knowledge of the fate of many of these poor fellows, and of the destination of those remaining after I left them, I think it is possible but scarcely probable, that any of them ever returned to their families, friends, or country any more; as will subsequently appear, if this narrative be proceeded with.

We were favoured with a fine passage to the Severn, and landed about six miles below Bristol; in which city we remained one night, and then marched forward to an encampment, where several other regiments were previously assembled, at Netley Abbey, not many miles from Southampton. From the undisciplined condition, with but small exception, of the officers and men who composed our regiment, it was only reasonable to suppose it had now reached its destination for the present; but after a few weeks training, it was numbered with the line. We received a set of new colours, and embarked on Southampton river, with the other regiments which formed the camp at Netley Abbey, to join the British army then on the Continent, under the command of the Duke of York. We dropped down to Spithead the next morning, and the same afternoon, Earl Moira, the commander-in-chief, having joined the expedition, we sailed, thirty-seven ships in company, under proper convoy to the coast of Flanders.

The weather being thick, with light airs of wind, our passage, though fine, was rather tedious, before reaching an anchorage off the port of Ostend. From circumstances of an unfavourable cast, unknown to us at the time, it was judged most prudent for the expedition to be free from every incumbrance likely to retard or impede its movements through the Netherlands; the success and safety of the enterprise wholly depending upon its ability to evade and elude, by the rapidity of its movements, in forced marches by night, the greatly disproportionate strength of the enemy. The number of troops then under Earl Moira, was little more than 7000; while the French force, through which we had to pass, was estimated at 80,000, and they were at the time so posted, as seemed to prohibit our junction with the Duke's army. It was therefore concluded, that every article of baggage and stores belonging either to officers or soldiers, beyond what they could themselves carry, should be left on board the ships. At an early hour of the morning after our arrival in the roads off the town of Ostend, every officer and soldier was furnished with a blanket, and an allowance of three days' provisions and water from the stores of the transports; it being very uncertain whether any supplies could be obtained for some days to come. Thus provided, the troops were disembarked under cover of two large floating batteries, prepared for the occasion, to prevent any attempt to frustrate their descent. As the boats employed had many times to pass to and fro, between the ships and the shore, before the whole were conveyed, it was near night when the landing was fully accomplished. To expedite the landing, a large float was made use of, to assist in crossing a narrow space of water connected with the harbour; so that the troops were enabled to land at more than one point at a time, and then unite. It was well for those who had nothing to do with this ill-adapted float; for in the hurry, it became overladen with soldiers, and was quickly overturned, causing the loss of many men, who, from their being encumbered with arms, baggage, and provisions, were incapable of making much effort to save themselves; this weight being strongly attached to their bodies, they sank before they could extricate themselves from it. I landed on the main shore of the harbour, and thus providentially escaped with only seeing the float then loading, just before the accident happened.

I do not know how it fared with others, but it is scarcely probable, all circumstances considered, that there could be any material superiority in the accommodation of one more than another. On the morning that we landed, I might doubtless have been supplied with a blanket, in common with others; but as I occupied a station, in which little rest could be expected, even when others slept, and supposing that I should be able to borrow from some of the others, when they could not be used by themselves, this opportunity was lost; but I afterwards regretted the non-acceptance of it. From the day we left the transports, several weeks elapsed before I got to sleep under the cover of a tent; as these, with the rest of the luggage and stores, were left on board the ships to be conveyed to Helvoetsluys, as a place more secure from the French than Ostend. We remained upon the sand hills near Ostend three days and nights after landing, and then commenced a march which could scarcely be equalled for fatigue and hardship; as we were wholly unprovided with provisions, and every common necessary, with which the generality of troops are usually furnished at the opening of a campaign.

It would be no very difficult task for me at this day, to enter into minute detail of particular circumstances, were it consistent with the declared object before me, in setting about to pen this memoir; for although so many years have rolled away since these miserable scenes were actually shared in and witnessed,—yet such are the strong impressions stamped on my memory by the sufferings endured, and the manifold deliverances which followed, that while endeavouring to insert such incidents only as are needful to preserve the chain of history, in sufficient links of connection to enable me to proceed with correctness,—transactions that have long been forgotten, though they once formed a prominent feature in the toils of the day, are recalled from oblivion in a remarkable manner. I must however forbear to intrude them here, and proceed again with saying, that on leaving the neighbourhood of Ostend, we passed through Bruges, and penetrated into the country by way of Ghent.

The first halting place of the army, in the evening of the same day that it left the coast, was called the 'Pigeon's Nest;' but it did not prove a very quiet one,—for by two o'clock in the morning, the advance of the enemy was announced by the firing of the picquets, by which we were surrounded. Whether this attack was intended to alarm only, or to endeavour to take us by surprise, I never understood; if the latter, it certainly failed, for the troops were literally sleeping on their arms, covered with their blankets, so that in a few minutes, a line was formed, with the commander-in-chief present. It was however considered prudent to remain there no longer, and in half an hour this post was abandoned, and the march continued until noon the next day, when a stoppage occurred, from the French having occupied a bridge over which we had to pass. Notwithstanding the men were almost ready to faint for lack of food, having scarcely tasted any thing for twenty-four hours; yet on its being proclaimed through the line that volunteers were needed to force the passage over the bridge, a sufficient number immediately offered, apparently glad of such an opportunity. After three hours' detention, the obstruction was removed, I am inclined to think by its being found that the force advancing against it, was much too strong for that by which the bridge was occupied.

The army then moved forward until midnight, although its course was much impeded by a tremendous storm of thunder, lightning, and heavy rain, which commenced at nine, p.m., and continued several hours. I do not see how I could have sufficiently exalted the name of my God, and his gracious dealings with a poor benighted and rebellious creature, without mentioning the two facts just related; inasmuch as they magnify in my view, his long-suffering and protection, to one who was utterly insensible of his loving-kindness, and who then knew Him not: and I trust I shall not be permitted to overlook or pass by any thing that will show forth his praise, and tend to his glory; or be prevented from acknowledging his power and his might; who has, according to his mercy, so many times delivered me out of every distress. For, notwithstanding the constant exposure to every shower of rain that fell, without covering over my head, and with no couch but the earth, and that at times soaked with wet; while harassed with fatiguing marches night after night, and with little rest by day; amidst hunger and thirst, being often short of food for days together, and occasionally no water to be had, without digging a well to procure it, to avoid the unwholesome waters of the stagnant pools;—and although for several weeks together my clothes were never taken off, but to renew a shirt, and my shoes but seldom off my weary feet;—yet through all, my health was not materially affected, till near the approach of winter. But in the above description, not one half has been told of that marvellous mercy which was still extended for my preservation, when many fell by the sword, or were taken captives by the enemy,—when thousands were swept off by pestilence,—and while unhurt myself, I saw the wounds of others bleed. Once while gone to Helvoetsluys in search of some baggage, I entirely missed a contest, in which our regiment was deprived of twenty-eight men; and, when at last overwhelmed with sickness and distress, the same Divine and compassionate arm of everlasting love and strength, was still underneath to bear up my helpless head, and in his own time to rescue me from the very jaws of death, to celebrate his praise, and to declare in humble thankfulness and gratitude of soul, “his wonderful works to the children of men.”

Chapter III.

Nimeguen—Many Dangers—Attacked by Fever—Hospital Treatment, Heavy Mortality Among the Sick—Disasters of the British Army—Retreat to Bremen—Returns to England.

As the winter approached, the health of the troops began to fail to an alarming and awful extent, from exposure to cold rains which fell almost daily; and yet we were compelled to keep the field, being constantly on the retreat before the greatly superior force of the enemy. As we drew near the walls of Nimeguen, the British forces made a stand, probably to afford time for preparing a floating bridge across the Waal, to secure our retreat behind that river. At the same time, the French used every effort in their power to intercept our retreat, by endeavouring to get between us and Nimeguen, which from the strength of its fortifications was capable of affording a cover for several days, or until our army had passed in safety over the bridge.

The last two or three days the contest between the two armies became more severe, by the continual arrival of fresh divisions of the French at this point: on the last day the cannon scarcely ceased to roar from sun-rise to sun-set. The regiment to which I belonged, was ordered on the reserve with three others; two of which were British, and the third Hanoverian. As the cannonade increased, the first regiment of reserve was called upon, in two hours after the second was summoned, and by eleven o'clock in the forenoon, the third. The direction from which the sound of the conflict issued, left no doubt that it was rapidly approaching the ground on which we stood; and although, as the last reserve, we had not been ordered to march, yet our tents were struck, and every thing prepared to move on the first alarm.¹ I had been going about in the wet for several days previous, without the practicability of obtaining dry clothes; and this day being colder and more rainy than usual, with the increased exertion necessary on account of the threatening aspect of things close upon us, might hasten an illness, the foundation of which had already been deeply laid, and which began with shivering fits, just in the interval of waiting for the expected courier to call us to the field of slaughter.

About three o'clock in the afternoon, a light dragoon arrived with a dispatch, but instead of its hastening us to the scene of action, it proved to be an order for us to join the rear of another regiment then retreating towards Nimeguen. Our army, after sustaining for many hours with great loss the unequal combat, was at length compelled to retire. Thus were we preserved when on the very brink of danger, in a manner as unlooked for as unmerited, from sharing in the disasters of a day, in which much human life was wasted, and which entailed great suffering and distress on many who survived it. After we had moved forward two or three miles, the coldness and shivering I had previously felt were succeeded by violent heat and fever, and my throat seemed almost closed up. For several days I had found swallowing very painful and difficult, from its extreme soreness,—but had taken little notice of it. In this condition I was still able to keep up with the body of the regiment; but after entering the gates of Nimeguen, from the frequent stoppages which took place in the miry streets of the city, owing to accidents constantly occurring with the floating bridge, occasioned by the fire of the French upon it,—I became more and more affected with something of the cramp kind, which nearly prevented my standing upright. As the night drew on, it became colder, and my pain increased, but I kept going on as well as I could; at length we came in sight of the bridge, when we were again stopped for some time. I was near the colours of the regiment, and an officer who carried one of them, made some remarks to me about the bridge; but feeling myself much worse, I told him I should never go over that bridge. He endeavoured to cheer me up, saying, that I should go over that and many more; but however, my assertion proved correct, for before the line again moved forward, I had left it, and was leaning against the wall of a house, no longer able to proceed from increased illness.

In this position I remained for some time; and after having painfully beheld the last of the rear of the regiment pass on and leave me behind, there seemed to be no hope left, as the only men in the world from whom I could expect a helping hand were all out of sight. But, although apparently forsaken by all, and left to perish unseen and unknown, yet that ever-compassionate Arm, which had so often been with me in extremity, was again stretched out, and did not long allow me to remain in this deplorable condition; but in adorable mercy, my gracious Lord was pleased to put into the hearts of some of the regiment who knew the real cause of my absence, to send two of the men back to endeavour to find me out, and render every assistance in their power.

As I had not gone from the place where I stopped, they had no difficulty in finding me, although it was by that time nearly dark; but as I could not possibly go forward to the regiment, they at last concluded to leave me in the hands of a picquet of cavalry, which was left to cover the retreat of the army through the city. Having helped me to the place, and left me in charge of the picquet, they made off with all haste to overtake their companions. Here the wife of a soldier gave me some ground pepper mixed with heated spirits; and although, from the state of my throat, I could scarcely swallow the fiery mixture, yet it proved useful, considerably relieving the pain in my stomach, and renewing the general warmth. As it was expected that the enemy would attack the batteries in the night, which however was not the case, although they kept up a heavy firing, I was helped into a loft to be out of the way; here I remained until the morning, and was then assisted on board of a galliot, provided for the reception of those, who, like myself, were disabled by sickness or other causes.

The hold of this vessel was filled with as many people as could lie close to each other: they were in the various stages of a violent epidemic disorder, and from the heat occasioned by so many being crowded together, the air was very oppressive, and difficult to breathe. Two other galliots of a similar description, proceeded in company with us up the river, in hopes of getting round a neck of land, at which the Waal and the Rhine unite. But although considerable exertions were made by the sailors, aided by such of the sick as were at all able to stand, of whom I made one, they had not succeeded in warping round the point, when a party of French hussars made their appearance on the shore. It was fully expected they would endeavour to prevent our escape, by opening a fire with cannon; but before they had time to bring any near enough to bear on us, we had got fairly into the current of the Rhine, and were soon beyond their reach. Being much exhausted I went below, but soon became very ill from the closeness of the place. While under this and other distressing circumstances, both of body and mind, one of our companions who lay next but one to me, was removed by death from all his troubles; and although none of us could expect at the time, but that a similar fate would in all probability soon overtake us,—yet, in my own case at least, notwithstanding I was worn down with fatigue and sickness, and without a glimpse of any thing to make life any longer desirable, except the fear of death,—still nature could not but feel appalled, when the dead body of a fellow-sufferer was dragged past, to be taken on to the deck of the vessel. As the evening came on, I became much worse; and although the night was cold and frosty, I thought it better to get on deck, where I could breath more freely, rather than remain any longer below: accordingly three or four of the people helped me up, for I was now so faint for lack of support, that I had scarcely any strength left. I remained on deck all night and got a little sleep; in the morning, the cold compelled me again to go below, but I felt a little refreshed, and better able to bear the closeness of the place, keeping near the hatchway, where there was a greater circulation of air. In two days more we arrived at Rhenin, a town close to the bank of the Rhine, where an old monastery was fitted up as a hospital for the British sick.

Sometime after reaching this place, a person came on board the galliot to see if there were any amongst the newly arrived sick, with whom he was acquainted. He came down below, and after looking round was about going away, when I made what effort I could for some one to stop him. He had looked at me amongst the rest, but I was so much reduced and altered in appearance that he had not recognised me, but passed by, although he had once known me very well. When brought back, he soon recollected me, and feelingly expressed great regret at finding his old acquaintance in such a weak condition. He had been a patient in this hospital himself, and when restored to health again, being found an active and useful person, he was retained as a ward-master for the benefit of others. Having had the fever, he was tolerably well acquainted with the best mode of treating it; and soon after finding me, he administered a small quantity of strong cordial, which had the desired effect for a short time, by enabling me to get on shore.

With his assistance I was conveyed to the hospital, where he soon procured one of the surgeons to examine me, and being very desirous to render every assistance in his power, he suggested to him the propriety of giving some particular medicine, which had often proved useful in bad cases; to which the surgeon replied, not aware that I heard all that was passing between them, 'he will not need any thing long.' By this it was evident that mine was considered a hopeless case; which could not be wondered at, the disorder having been so fatal, that those who had recovered were said not to average more than one in fifty; and as my attack had been so long neglected, the conclusion was reasonable, although it did not prove correct. In a few days I was so much recruited as to be able to walk about the town: but it was a distinguishing characteristic of this complaint, that having once had it, was no security whatever against a second attack,—and that those who got well through it the first, or perhaps the second time, were frequently its victims on the third encounter. I found by experience that this report was not without foundation, for instead of being fully restored to health again, as for the first few days seemed probable, the disorder returned a second time, and with much more violent symptoms.

As a state of high delirium soon came on, I was but a short time sensible of what transpired, after the application of a large blister; except the workings of a terrified imagination, some of the impressions of which, even at this distance of time, are not wholly obliterated from my memory,—so deeply and strongly were they engraven. From the treatment which followed when no longer delirious, the disorder must have been of the nature of typhus,—as at one time a liberal allowance per day, of equal parts of brandy and port wine was given me, as hot as could well be taken. How long this continued I am not aware, but I was confined to my bed for such a length of time, as to be wholly unable to move in any direction from extreme weakness; and so generally was this the case in this disorder, that a man was appointed in every ward to go round occasionally, to turn from one side to the other, such of the patients as were incapable of turning themselves.

I was at length brought so near the brink of the grave, that, to all appearance, no alteration for the better could be expected. I am not aware that I had even a wish to live; but my mind was so reconciled to the prospect of death, which then seemed near and inevitable, that I had given my watch into the hands of the person who had visited the galliot, with a request, that he would inform my family where I had ended my days. Indeed, when some expectation of recovery was at last held out, I could not help looking forward with a feeling of regret, to the probability of having again to encounter the series of hardships and distress, to which I should unavoidably be subjected.

As I regained a little strength, I began to take notice of the state of things around me; and having daily heard a noise like that of a carpenter's shop, I now ascertained the cause to be the nailing up of the coffins, each day, of those who had died in the last twenty-four hours; and I found that the dead-house, or place where the dead were deposited previously to interment, when taken out of the wards, being opposite the windows of the room I was in, afforded full opportunity for my beholding the striking and affecting scene, which could not fail to excite feelings of horror and dismay, in one so much enervated by the very disease, which I now witnessed to be so fatal to others. The average number of deaths was twenty-seven in a day and night; but sometimes the number so increased, that the Dutch could not furnish coffins sufficient for the demand of the day; and then the method of sewing up the bodies in the bedding they had occupied, was resorted to. Several waggon loads of bodies were carried off every afternoon for interment.²

When able to walk about the room with the assistance of my stick, it happened that the regiment to which I belonged, was quartered in a village about two miles from the bank of the Rhine, opposite to that on which the hospital stood. Some of the officers came over to ascertain for themselves, whether any of the missing from their regiment were amongst the sick; at length they came into the ward where I was, and the second in command, with whom I was well acquainted, being with them, I requested his help to get me liberated from the hospital,—telling him, that I had no chance of becoming thoroughly well while in it, and of the danger to which I was constantly exposed of having another relapse. He immediately applied to some of the medical staff on duty, and conducted them to me through the wards; but it ended in his informing me, that the doctors could not suffer my going out until farther recovered, as I was quite unfit for exposure.

Not knowing how long I might be detained, I was now determined to make my escape on the first opportunity; and the next day being remarkably fine, I walked out two or three times into the air, though with much difficulty. The following morning I met with a person belonging to the regiment, who was going to join it again the same afternoon; and as we were well acquainted, I did not hesitate to disclose my intention of quitting the hospital in a clandestine manner, and resolved to accompany him, if possible.

I returned again to the hospital as at other times; and in the afternoon, as if going to take another walk, I proceeded to the river side; and the ferry boat being just ready for setting off, I got into it undiscovered, and passed the Rhine, arriving at the village of Kesterne soon after dark the same evening, without taking cold, although the river was thickly frozen over, and a passage cut through the ice, to allow the ferry boat to cross backwards and forwards. From this time I rapidly gathered strength, and at the end of a week was so much recruited, as to venture back to the hospital to see how those fared, whom I had left behind; at the same time, it is very probable, to show how I had fared myself; without any fear of being detained, as I was evidently much stronger than when under their roof.

To lessen the fatigue, I procured a horse for the excursion, and proceeded accordingly towards the river side. The risk I then ran, however unwarrantable, afforded me another opportunity of seeing the effect of a renewed attack of this dreadful disorder, upon a Scotch sergeant of the Highland watch, who had had the fever twice, and both times recovered from it. He was a very stout man, and when I left the hospital, appeared in perfect health and strength. In the interval of my absence, he had been seized with it a third time, and when I saw him, had nearly finished his course; he was speechless, and survived but a short time afterwards: I think this last time, he was ill only three days. Although I escaped any farther infection, yet I was punished for my temerity before getting back again to Kesterne. After crossing the river in the boat, I had to pass through a small sheet of shallow water which had been frozen, but was then broken up by the loaded waggons that passed that way. On getting up to it, I found it in a half frozen state, the old ice not being sufficiently strongly united again to bear the horse, which refused to pass it; and on my urging him forward, he lay down with me in the water. It was with difficulty that I could extricate myself from him, and it is doubtful whether I should have succeeded, without the assistance of another person then at hand. In this wet condition I had a long distance to go, in a keen frosty night, in an open waggon, which the day following threatened a renewal of my illness; but by the timely use of medicines, I was favoured, not according to my desert, to escape without any serious indisposition.

In looking back at the marvellous manner in which I was sustained through all this conflict, and again restored as one brought back from the dead, I cannot avoid adverting to that period of my illness, when my mind felt so reconciled to the prospect of death, as before-mentioned; and I now fully believe, from what I have since been mercifully favoured to experience, that so far from being in any degree prepared for such an awful event, a deceptive feeling must have been superinduced by the state of torpor and insensibility in which I then was, and which totally benumbed any better feelings and desires as to the future. To this may be added a predominating fear, of having to endure more of those sufferings, of which I had had no small share; which, the probability of being again restored to health seemed to banish every hope of escaping. Truly awful is the thought which this view of my then lost condition occasions, when I contemplate the woe and misery which must have been my eternal portion, if unutterable mercy and long-suffering had been withdrawn; and if the soul had been required of one, who had witnessed no repentance towards God the Judge of all, except what at times the fear of punishment had extorted; and who was a stranger to that saving faith in the Lord Jesus Christ, as the “Lamb of God that takes away the sin of the world,”—without which, his precious blood would have been shed in vain for me:—I should thus have died in my sins, which unrepented of, would have followed after to judgment, in terrible array against my guilty soul—and yet when my end was apparently so near and inevitable, if such questions as are frequently proposed on the like occasions had been put to me, I have little doubt, but satisfactory answers would have been returned, as to my belief and hope in the essential truths of the gospel. But alas! this would have been from hearsay and traditional report, and not from any heartfelt saving knowledge of my own: for it is now plain to my understanding, that no man can have saving faith in Jesus Christ, who is unacquainted with, and does not walk in, the light of that Divine Spirit, which is so justly styled the Spirit of faith. It is through this alone, that the death and sufferings of Christ and his whole sacrifice for sin are availing, and truly applied to all those, who through faith lay hold of him, the true Light and Saviour of them that believe in his inward and spiritual appearance. These can say to others from sensible and blessed experience,—“Behold the Lamb of God, that takes away the sin of the world they have received the atonement by Him, and they reap the glorious fruit and benefit of his death and suffering for sin, by the sacrifice of himself, and of his resurrection and ascension; in that he ever lives to make intercession for those, who are thus willing to come unto God by him. A man may yield an assent to all the great and solemn truths of Christianity,—the miraculous birth, holy life, cruel sufferings, ignominious death, and glorious resurrection and ascension of our blessed Redeemer;—he may believe in the abstract, in his inward and spiritual appearance in the hearts of mankind by his Holy Spirit; and yet he may fall short of the prize immortal,—unless he comes to witness the saving operation of the Holy Spirit in his own heart, and to know thereby, through faith in it, a purifying preparation for the kingdom of righteousness, peace, and joy in the Holy Spirit. How can I sufficiently appreciate or declare the extent of the endless mercy, which suffered me not to perish in the midst of my sins, when so many were swept away by the same pestilential disorder?

After having mentioned the facts connected with my sickness and recovery, it seems only due, however feeble on my part the effort, to endeavour to commemorate such gracious dealings with humble gratitude and reverence; earnestly desiring that no motive whatever may be allowed to prevail with me for making the attempt, but that of promoting the glory and honour of the great name; that others may know, and fear, and believe in the all-sufficiency of that power, which has “showed me the path of life,” and which alone can bless for their instruction what has been written, to press the necessity of contending for that saving faith “once delivered to the saints.” Without it, all religious profession is a dream, a shadow, and a doubt; but with it, a glorious reality;—yes, “the substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen,”—even the salvation of the soul, through Christ Jesus our Lord.

While the severity of the winter greatly facilitated the operations of the French army, by enabling them to cross the frozen rivers without difficulty, and at almost any given point; so it contributed most effectually to harass the diminished numbers of the retreating British forces. It was the more felt from the scarcity of provisions, occasioned by the inhabitants withholding from us every supply, in compliance with the intimidating threatenings of our victorious enemy; so that we frequently could not procure needful food even for money: while our opponents were supplied by the terrified householders at free cost. In some places, the inhabitants openly declared they were withholding their provisions for the supply of the French, aware of the cruel treatment they should witness at their hands, if unable to provide for them when they arrived; although they considered the British to be their friends, and were well treated by them.

Before I left the hospital at Rhenin, the French had approached so near, that the windows of the place frequently shook with the discharge of their artillery. Sometimes a waggon load of the wounded English would arrive at the hospital; when many, whose recovery would in a healthy situation have been speedy and almost certain, were carried off in a few days, by the infectious disorder which prevailed at the place; and from the disastrous issue of the campaign, however greatly this was to be deplored, it could not be avoided. We were not long permitted to remain at Kesterne, before being obliged to move towards the north of Holland; when the town of Rhenin with the hospital fell into the hands of the enemy. Soon after this event, the frost became more intense; and the Dutch could no longer make graves for the interment of the dead, but piled the coffins upon each other in great numbers, until a thaw took place.

Although my strength was considerably recruited before we left Kesterne, I was yet very unequal to the subsequent exposure, having to pass great part of the first night in the frost after leaving that place: but although I slept in a cart with a canvass tilt, I do not remember taking cold, or otherwise experiencing any injurious effects, either then or afterwards, beyond what might have been expected from great fatigue and improper diet, there being at that time little to be procured, but coarse black bread and ardent spirits. During this harassing march, at such an inclement season, many of the poor men lost parts of their toes, by imprudently sitting down in the frost for too long a time at once, and from not having their feet properly protected. I can well remember having been so wearied myself, as to come to the determination to sit down, and risk the consequence,—although fully aware of the danger of falling asleep in such circumstances; but I was prompted by a secret impulse to resist the inclination, although nearly overcome with fatigue: then after moving about awhile longer, I have again begun to give way, but still struggled on. And when at last, it seemed as if human nature must give up, the thought of relations in England, as if I had had a home, would cross my mind, and stimulate me to try again in hope, until something has occurred, to bring relief, and shelter, and repose. Perhaps, if more food could have been procured, the propensity to sleep, which exposure to cold occasioned, would have been irresistible.

In this manner the winter wore away: but at length we got so far out of the reach of the French, as to allow a longer space of time for rest at each place we arrived at. The cold weather continued, until we reached the banks of the river Weser; when the retreating wreck of our army was unexpectedly cheered with a sight of the mast-heads of the British fleet lying off Bremen-leke, and waiting to convey it from the shores of the Continent; where it had witnessed so much distress, wasting, and destruction,—to be attributed much more to hardship, fatigue, and pestilence, than to the sword of the enemy, although greatly superior to us in strength, and possessing local advantages, of which we were wholly destitute.³

[Here ends the Author's biographical sketch of his own life.]

Chapter IV.

Sails with His Regiment to the West Indies—Remarkable Preservation—Serious Impressions—Returns To England—Becomes Convinced of Friends' Principles—Received into Membership in 1797—Settles in Business and Marries—Acknowledged a Minister in 1816.

It is matter of much regret, that for many years subsequently to this period, no biographical memoranda appear to have been made by our dear father; and it is impossible at this distance of time, to supply any minute details of that important change in his sentiments and manner of life, which occurred shortly after the time to which the preceding narrative refers.

In the autumn of 1795, he obtained a commission in a regiment destined for the West Indies, and sailed with the expedition appointed to this service, under Sir Ralph Abercrombie. After a most stormy and disastrous passage they were once in sight of the islands, but were driven back by a dreadful hurricane: in which several of the vessels foundered, and great numbers of the troops perished. A malignant fever also raged with fatal violence among the crews of the fleet, and in the ship in which he had embarked, no less than twenty-seven fell victims to it, within a short space of time.

Our dear father experienced some remarkable preservations at this time, to which he often referred afterwards, as the merciful interpositions of an overruling providence in his behalf: of these, one in particular appears to have arrested his attention. The vessel in which he was appointed to sail, and which was considered a remarkably fine one, was exceedingly crowded, from the preference given to her by many of the officers. One morning after they had been some weeks at sea, a collier (being one of the vessels hired as transports,) coming alongside, he proposed to one of his friends, that they should go on board of her. His fellow-officers ridiculed the idea of preferring an old collier to the noble ship in which they were; but he and his friend persisted, and transferred themselves to her. The same evening a hurricane arose, and the vessel they had quitted was never heard of afterwards. In connexion with this period, he once remarked to a friend, on being questioned as to the means made use of in the Divine hand for effecting “a new birth unto righteousness” in his heart,—that he could not remember any outward means having been employed, unless, indeed, he might except a storm at sea, during which his mind was deeply affected; and when, under a feeling of his own lost condition by nature, he was mercifully enabled also to see the remedy, and the entire spirituality of the Gospel dispensation. In accordance with this feeling, he remarked,—'I was at this time convinced of Friends' principles, they being neither more nor less in my estimation, than pure Christianity. I remember when the Friends visited me on my application for membership, I told them I was convinced at sea; for I verily believed, in looking back, that this had been the case: no human means were made use of;—it was altogether the immediate work of the Holy Spirit upon my heart.' Under these feelings, he became dissatisfied with the military profession, and resolved that, if permitted again to reach the shore, he would endeavour to lead a life of more circumspection, and which should tend to the glory of that Being, who had thus so mercifully visited him by His free grace. To this resolution he adhered:—he quitted the army in the early part of the year 1796.

For some time subsequently, to this event, he became an inmate in the family of his eldest sister, Barbara Hoyland; who was settled in the neighbourhood of Sheffield, in Yorkshire. She had married a member of the Society of Friends; and before the period of my father's joining them, had herself become convinced of their principles, and united herself to them. While residing with these near relatives, his mind became renewedly impressed with the importance of Divine truth; and in the course of a few months, he was led openly to espouse those views of it, of which in after years, he was an unflinching advocate. The little meeting which he attended in the early part of his religious course, that of Handsworth Woodhouse, was usually held in silence; and he has been often known to refer to some of those solemn seasons, as times of peculiar instruction to his mind; in which the power of the Lord was sensibly felt, and his Truth revealed.

Being made a partaker of the great privilege enjoyed by those who are of the flock of Christ, in being enabled to distinguish between the voice of the Good Shepherd and that of the stranger, he was earnestly desirous that obedience should keep pace with knowledge. He waited patiently upon the Lord for instruction in his various stoppings; and being brought into a state of deep humility and prostration of spirit, he was made sensible, that the only path in which he could walk with safety, was that of self-denial. Much mental conflict was at this season his portion; but peace was only to be obtained by an entire surrender of the will: and in conformity with what he believed to be required of him, he adopted the plain dress. He once recounted to a friend in lively terms, the trial it was to him to put on a different hat to that which he had been accustomed to wear; especially as in going to the meeting at Woodhouse, he generally met a number of his former gay acquaintances, whom he crossed on the way to their place of worship, which he had himself previously been in the practice of attending. In this instance, it was hard to appear openly as a fool before men; he thought if his natural life might have been accepted as a substitute, he would gladly have laid it down:—but this was not the thing required. He diligently examined his heart, and believed he clearly saw his Master's will in the requisition; and that it was a discipline designed to bring him into a state of childlike obedience and dependence. In great distress he cried unto the Lord for help; and a passage of scripture was powerfully applied to his mind,—“whosoever shall confess me before men, him will I confess also before my Father which is in heaven: but whosoever shall deny me before men, him will I also deny before my Father which is in heaven.” His resolution was immediately taken:—he put on the hat, and with his mind staid upon the Lord, set out to join his Friends at meeting. His difficulties vanished,—sweet peace was his covering; and he was enabled experimentally to know the fulfilment of that declaration,—“greater is He that is in you, than he that is in the world.”

In the course of the year 1797, he was received into membership with the Society of Friends; and about the same time, he entered into business in Sheffield, in the seed trade. To this novel occupation he applied himself with that energy and assiduity, which characterized all his pursuits; and by the Divine blessing on his exertions, ho soon succeeded in obtaining a business fully adequate to his very moderate desires. It was striking to some of those around him, to observe how readily he adapted himself to this total change of habits; and with what true content and cheerfulness he engaged in the drudgery and toil of a retail shop;—the daily attendance in which, rested for some years exclusively on himself. He has been frequently heard to refer to this period of his life, as one of great peace and comfort; and it appears to have been a time, in which his experience of the reality and power of Divine grace was deepened and enlarged. It was his daily practice, at those intervals when the attendance in his shop could be dispensed with, if but for a few minutes at a time, to retire to a small apartment behind it, and in a prayerful spirit to explore the contents of the sacred volume: the light which shone upon many passages as he read, and the clear and strong views of religious truth which were then unfolded to his seeking soul, were such, as greatly to confirm his faith, and strengthen him to persevere in that strait and narrow path, into which his feet had been so mercifully turned. The study of many of the prophetical books of holy writ, was at this time the means of great comfort and encouragement to him; and the extensive and accurate knowledge of these parts of Scripture, for which he was afterwards conspicuous, was then chiefly acquired.

It was his uniform practice, from his first commencement in trade, to close his shop during the hours of worship on week days; and though this must have required a strong exercise of faith, at a time when his future support seemed to depend on his assiduity and exertion, he was never satisfied to neglect the worship of Almighty God, from the prospect of any outward advantage; and he has often expressed his belief, that a blessing had rested on this sacrifice of apparent interest to duty.

Soon after settling in Sheffield, the acquaintance with our dear mother commenced; and they were united in marriage, on the 13th of the Sixth Month, 1800. She was the daughter of Thomas and Rachel Brady, of Thorne; and her family had been connected with the Society of Friends almost from its rise. Being a person of peculiarly mild and amiable disposition, and fully devoted to the promotion of the views and wishes of her beloved husband, she proved a true help-mate for him; and their union was productive of much solid happiness to both. The great delicacy of her constitution, at times involved him in much solicitude, and seemed to give warning of an early termination of that domestic felicity, for the simple pleasures of which, few, perhaps, have ever possessed a keener relish than himself; but their union was mercifully protracted to the lengthened term of thirty-two years: through all the vicissitudes that were permitted to attend them, she evinced that deep and devoted attachment, which led her cheerfully to forego every other enjoyment, and cordially to unite in every step which he felt called upon to take, however great the sacrifice it involved to her gentle and retiring nature. She may be said to have possessed pre-eminently the ornament of a meek and quiet spirit; and notwithstanding the great mildness of her disposition, this was most happily tempered with a degree of firmness and moral courage, by which she was enabled calmly to meet those dangers and difficulties, before which a casual observer might have anticipated that her gentle spirit would have shrunk. As a wife and a mother, she has, perhaps, rarely been surpassed in disinterested affection, or in that constant and quiet consideration for those around her, which led her habitually to forget her own liability to fatigue, and cheerfully to put forth all her energies for the promotion of their comfort and welfare.

Although my dear father for a series of years subsequently to this period, was actively engaged in attention to business, he was watchful to prevent its engrossing more of his thoughts, than was consistent with higher duties. As a tradesman, he uniformly maintained an unblemished character for integrity and fair dealing; and his daily course of conduct was characterised by a habitual reference to a higher principle than that of mere interest; which insured for him, in no common degree, the respect and confidence of those with whom he was connected. At length his health began to give way, under the close attention which he had thought it needful to give to business; and about the year 1809, he removed to a short distance from Sheffield, for the advantages of greater quiet and more exercise in the open air. This proved a great relief to him; but some time afterwards, finding that his concerns in trade continued to increase upon him, and demanded a closer attention than he felt satisfied to give, he thought it his duty to relinquish a branch, and that a very profitable one, of the business which he had so successfully established. When his mind was once satisfied as to the path of duty in the case, he hesitated not to yield a full and unmurmuring compliance; although, with an increasing family dependent on his exertions, and the comparatively slender means which he possessed, this step must have required no small exercise of faith, and in the eyes of the wise and prudent around him, appeared a doubtful one. To him, however, it occasioned not one moment's regret; and as he sought not great things for himself, so the gracious and bountiful Master whom he served, failed not amply to supply his every need, and to grant him at the same time that blessing which makes truly rich, and whereunto no sorrow is added.

His attention was now a good deal turned to agricultural pursuits, in the management of which he took great delight: indeed, rural occupations and the simple pleasures of a country life, harmonized peculiarly with his pious feelings; and he loved to trace in the works and beauties of creation, the goodness and power of the great Creator. It appears to have been in reference to the step just adverted to, that the following note, addressed to some intimate friends, was written:—

“Forasmuch as it has pleased Almighty God, in his unutterable mercy and great condescension, in so eminent a manner to rescue my soul from the paths of vice and inevitable destruction, it seems incumbent upon me, in gratitude for such an unspeakable favour, to endeavour as much as in me lies, to make all the return I am capable of; and as much as possible, through His Divine assistance, to dedicate the residue of my days to so gracious and merciful a Creator. I have at seasons for some years past, when it has pleased the Lord to humble me and make me sensible of my extreme unworthiness, been made willing to make a surrender of my life and my all to Him and His divine disposal; and the query has often been raised in my heart, what shall I render unto the Lord for all his benefits towards me? As I have from time to time endeavoured to dwell near, and abide in and under, the calming influence of His power, I have been led to believe, that something sooner or later would be required as a sacrifice on my part: and having for a considerable time past, been fully convinced not only from my own feelings, but from impressions made upon my mind by several testimonies borne by exercised Friends, of the necessity of my separating myself as much as may be from the world and from the things of the world,—and having felt the force of our Lord's declaration on the Mount,—‘You cannot serve God and mammon’—I am sensible that the time is at hand, for me to put into practice what I believe to be an indispensable duty. After having experienced such a wonderful and great deliverance from the power of sin and Satan, even as a ‘brand plucked out of the burning,’ it cannot be supposed that the remainder of my life ought to be spent in the hurry and bustle of business of any kind, and particularly in one which has so much increased as to require more attention than I am capable of paying to it, even if I had no claims of a higher and more important nature to attend to. I have frequently thought of late, that taking an active partner might answer the end intended, and be a means of removing part of the weight and care from off my shoulders, and at the same time set me at liberty to attend distant meetings, and take exercise in the open air, which my health very much requires: but having given this a solid consideration, I have found that it would only be doing things by halves,—as great responsibility and anxiety would still rest upon me: it would seem also like making a reserve of the best of the sheep, and the best of the oxen, the bleating and lowing of which would be continually in my ears. I therefore fully believe, that it will be most conducive to my present peace, as well as future wellbeing, entirely to give up the trade I am at present engaged in, and retire with my family into a small compass. Not that I have acquired a sufficiency, without doing something for a livelihood;—far from it. I have still a prospect of maintaining my family comfortably, with care and industry, leaving the event to Him who knows the thoughts and intents of the heart: and though my income will be smaller than it is at present, my expenses will be smaller in proportion. It will no doubt be a matter of surprise to some, that one who has so young a family should think of declining so prosperous a trade, as many people, I believe, think mine is. To these I answer, that I have no desire to accumulate riches for my children; the blessing seldom attends it, and the baneful effects thereof are too often visible, even in our society. This is a matter of no small importance with me,—it is not a sudden thing. I wish to consult my friends, and to take their advice in it. It has been a long time growing with me, and latterly has scarcely ever been out of my thoughts; and not having frequent interaction with my friends, it seemed best for me to state in writing the principal grounds for taking such a step, which might be readily handed to those most likely to impart counsel.”

Perhaps the whole bearing of these impressions was never fully understood, even by himself, till some years subsequently; when he was called upon to make a still further surrender of his will to that of his heavenly Father, by quitting his native country, and the bosom of that society which he so much loved, and going forth at the call of apprehended duty to sojourn in a strange land. But to return to the period of which we have been speaking. Though he had been necessarily much occupied with his own concerns, he had not been a useless or inactive member of the religious body to which he was united. For many years he filled the office of overseer in the meeting to which he belonged; and in discharge of the duties connected with it, he was remarkable for his unwearied zeal and charity, his labour, his forbearance, and brotherly-kindness. The power of Divine grace having wrought so effectually on his own mind, his benevolence extended to the whole human family.

For a number of years, the impression was strong upon his mind, that he should be called to the work of the ministry; but in connexion with this feeling he was long harassed with doubts and fears. He was not rebellious, but his faith was weak; he earnestly desired to have indubitable evidence that such was indeed the will of his Lord and Master: but He who knew the sincerity of his heart, graciously condescended, in his own good time, to leave him without a doubt on this important subject. He underwent deep baptisms of spirit; indeed such were his mental conflicts, that his health materially suffered. In referring to this circumstance at a subsequent period, he remarked to a friend, that he regarded it as an especial blessing to him: for sometimes he slept little, and frequently his nights were spent in prayer; at other times, prayer being his last engagement previous to consigning himself to sleep, he found in the morning, (to use his own expression) his 'mind still covered with the same precious influence. I think,' he added,' I at that time knew in measure what it was to “stand continually upon the watch-tower in the day time, and to be set in my ward whole nights.” His mind at this time appeared to be particularly impressed with the feeling of the great uncertainty of time; so that he has been heard to acknowledge, that for months together he seldom lay down in bed, without endeavouring to commit his soul into the hands of the Lord; feeling it very uncertain whether he should be permitted to see the morning's light.

In reference to this period, a dear friend remarks:—'Of that time, and of many months previous to his appearance as a minister, my recollection is very clear. We were then confidential friends, and often together; and during the lapse of years that has intervened, I have frequently reverted to it. The exercise which then attended him, almost bore down the natural cheerfulness of his disposition;—he was so serious, so humble, so watchful, lest at any time he should be thrown off his guard in the freedom of conversation; and lest he should dissipate the influence of that heavenly love and goodness, which often filled his mind, and led him into holy covenant with his Lord. He one day took me to a small field nearly surrounded by trees, on the south side of his house, where he told me he was accustomed to retire alone at an early hour of the morning and late in the evening, and often at noon when at home; thus adopting the resolution of David:—“Evening and morning and at noon will I pray:” the spiritual communion he witnessed there, and at many other times, would strengthen him no doubt in his earnest endeavour to perform the will of his Divine Master. Yet it was only from his deportment that I judged my dear friend to be under preparation for the work of the ministry. He spoke of that exercise to no one, and when our friend, Sarah Lamley, who visited families in Sheffield in the summer of 1813, and in the sitting with his family, told him she was sensible that he was called to that important work, his dear wife heard it with extreme surprise.'

Sitting in meeting on one occasion, he was particularly impressed with the language of our Saviour, after he had cleansed the leper;—“Were there not ten cleansed, but where are the nine? I tell you there are not found that returned to give glory to God, save this stranger.” The remembrance that he had ever read such a passage in the sacred volume was entirely obliterated from his mind; he thought he felt the requisition of duty to address it to the meeting, but he was perplexed; he knew not at the time where it was to be found: he gave way to reasoning,—his dependence not being simply on the Lord alone; and in great distress of mind, he allowed the meeting to break up. He hastened home, and opening his bible, the first passage that met his eye was,—“were there not ten cleansed,” etc. He was deeply affected:—he entered renewedly into covenant with the Lord, that if He would be pleased again to visit him, he would be more faithful; and when again he felt the requisition, he was strengthened in much brokenness to comply. A sweet and inexpressible feeling of peace was mercifully permitted to follow this sacrifice; confirming to his mind that it was indeed a sacrifice prepared of the Lord. From this time he continued occasionally to express a few words in the line of the ministry; and not infrequently he was permitted to derive comfort from the united exercise of others engaged in this work, who were occasionally led to express the substance of the burden he himself was labouring under:—this was very confirming to his mind: and he has been heard to recount with gratitude to God, his condescension to him during this period of infancy in the work.

At one time, accompanying a female minister, who had appointed a public meeting to be held in a Methodist meeting house, he was prevailed upon to go with her into the pulpit. He had never spoken in a meeting of that description, and he had no apprehension that in such an assembly he should be called upon to take any conspicuous part. But his mind soon became involved in exercise; and being unwilling to yield to it, the Friend's way was quite obstructed,—no door of utterance was given. He saw and felt this, and arose, but under such conflict, as made him involuntarily cover his eyes with his hands; and in this attitude he addressed the meeting. His companion followed; and through the Divine blessing, the meeting was crowned by the sensible feeling of the overshadowing love of their heavenly Father.

He was acknowledged a minister in the year 1816; and shortly afterwards he accompanied another Friend in a visit to the meetings in Lancashire, and some parts of Yorkshire.

Chapter V.

Prospect of Duty in Russia—Offers Himself to the Russian Government to Superintend Agricultural Improvements Near Petersburg—Voyage to Cronstadt, 1817—Interview with Prince Galitzin at Petersburg, also with the Emperor—Voyage Homeward.

A New field of action was now about to open before him, for which his mind had been secretly preparing, until a willingness had been begotten in his heart, to follow the requisitions of his Lord, whithersoever these might lead him, or whatever sacrifice to his natural feeling, an acquiescence in them might involve.

For several years, he had an impression that it would be required of him to go abroad. This prospect frequently cost him much exercise of mind; and one day while pacing up and down his parlour, feeling unusually burdened under it, he was led earnestly to cry unto the Lord, desiring that he would be pleased to show him to what part of the world he must go. One of his children was in the room putting together a dissected map, and as his father approached him, his eye rested on Petersburg with such an intimation that there his Divine Master would send him, that, said he, in relating the circumstance many years afterwards to an intimate friend, 'I never afterwards doubted f he however kept the matter entirely to himself, believing that when the right time should come, way would be made for him.

Early in the year 1817, enquiry having been made, by order of the late Emperor of Russia, for a person to undertake the management of an agricultural establishment in his dominions, Daniel Wheeler believed it his duty to offer himself for this service. The Emperor, as the reader may recollect, visited this country, in the year 1814, and was much struck with the perfection of the English system of farming. His attention had been drawn in several ways to the Society of Friends; and a casual visit made to the farm of a Friend, on the Brighton road, had given him a favourable impression of their character as agriculturists. This impression, as the event proved, was not soon effaced; for having three years afterwards concluded on the drainage and cultivation of certain marshes and waste lands, in the immediate neighbourhood of Petersburg, and enquiry being made in England for a suitable manager for this work, the Emperor particularly specified his wish, that a member of the Society of Friends should be selected. The information was circulated in the Society, by the late Richard Phillips of Wandsworth; and the following extract from a letter received from a Friend of Sheffield, in reference to this subject, is inserted as showing the manner in which this undertaking was entertained by Daniel Wheeler.

Second Month 15th, 1817.

Little did I suppose on the receipt of your letter of the 22nd, that I should have occasion so speedily to reply to it. Soon after reading it, I observed to my wife, if such a Friend as Daniel Wheeler had believed it right to embark in such an undertaking, I knew of no person, that for all the purposes required, might be so fully recommended. But this idea did not at that time operate farther on my mind, than to induce me to conclude to take him into consultation, respecting some one well qualified. On the receipt of your letter, he was engaged in a family visit in a neighbouring meeting. In consequence, I was prevented from communicating the subject to him, until yesterday; when I perceived, to my surprise, that it made considerable impression on his mind, and that, from some questions he put to me, he was making the application to himself. Without noticing this, I told him, I wished he would give the overtures of the Emperor a place in his thoughts; and if any eligible person occurred to him, to inform me within a week. But my surprise was increased this morning, by his coming to inform me, that it would be mere form to defer acknowledging, that his mind was already made up to offer himself for the situation, for which it had been preparing more than two years. Great as the trial will be to many, to spare such a one out of our Monthly Meeting, there was an assent in my mind, like that of “you are the man.” I have often said, that in respect both to civil and religious attainments, I knew of no one, moving in a similar sphere, who is so much qualified for the superintendence and the direction of others. A novice as to the world, or one who had had little experience as to the ways of men, however much he might have had of agriculture, would lack many requisites, essential to the filling with propriety a station, designed to be under the immediate eye of an Emperor. In his character, so much of true dignity is united with Christian humility, as qualifies him to appear before princes.

After acquiring the first reputation in Sheffield as a tradesman, he took a farm, as if to give proof of his practical skill in agriculture; which has excited the admiration of the neighbourhood, and demonstrated that his talents in this direction are of a superior kind.

For a person of his qualifications, to come forward on the ground of religious sensibility, appears to me an extraordinary instance of devotedness; but he has been heard to say, he has been forgiven so much, that he cannot give too great proof of gratitude and attachment to the King of kings. If he enter upon this undertaking, it will be no small sacrifice in a pecuniary consideration, which he will have to make.

One of the first difficulties which presented itself, in regard to this movement, was that of mentioning his prospect to our dear mother. He believed her timid nature would be ready to shrink under such a requirement. His distress therefore on her account was great: but what was his surprise and comfort, when on informing her, and querying whether she could leave her friends and native land to go with him, she sweetly and calmly acquiesced; stating her belief, that if it was the will of the Lord, strength would be given them to bear the trial, as well as ability to perform the service required, whatever it might be.

His own explanation of the motives which induced him to enter into this engagement, is thus given by himself, in a paper addressed to an official person in Petersburg, during his first visit to that city, from which the following is extracted:—

Eighth Month 13th, 1817.

It seems altogether unnecessary to preface what I am about to state in this memorial, seeing that the truth never did, nor ever will need any apology. I shall therefore proceed by observing, that it is now two years and a half since the subject of visiting Russia, and rendering myself useful in promoting the happiness of its numerous inhabitants, was presented to the view of my mind, by that inward principle of light and grace, a manifestation of which is given to every man to profit withal, in which I believe; and Petersburg was the place pointed out to me as the scene of my operations. It was, I must acknowledge, a prospect at which I was ready to shudder: for, although we may at times feel a willingness, and even profess it, to go with our Lord and Master into prison and unto death; yet such is the frailty and weakness of human nature, that when the trying hour comes, like Simon Peter, we are ready to deny Him. But He who is touched with a feeling and compassionate sense of our manifold infirmities, I trust saw that it was not wilful disobedience, but human weakness; and He who only knows the thoughts and intents of the heart,—yes, from whom “the darkness hides not, but the night shines as the day,—the darkness and the light [being] both alike to Him,”—in adorable condescension and mercy, does at seasons qualify his poor, dependent, humble followers, acceptably to breathe the aspiration,—“Lord you know all things, you know that I love You.” However, I must honestly confess, that at the time I could not possibly devote myself to such an undertaking; for I am certain, that no earthly consideration whatever, could have induced me to leave my beloved wife and tender children: but He, who “blows with his wind, and the waters flow,”—at whose touch the mountains of opposition melt down and vanish, has by His wonder-working power, reduced my mind to a willingness to go, whensoever and wheresoever He is pleased to lead, and to do whatsoever he is pleased to call for.

Some time after this, as I was returning home late one evening, I had a sense of invitation after this manner, 'What if the Emperor of Russia should need a person for the superintendence of agriculture—at which time a willingness was begotten in my mind to go, if that should be the case; but when, or in what manner, this was to come to pass, was totally hidden from me. The frequent conflict of soul I had to pass through, none can conceive or have an idea of, but those who have been alike circumstanced; all which was permitted in infinite wisdom, for the subjection of the natural will, and is what I verily believe all must pass through, before they can in sincerity of heart say,—“Not my will, but Yours be done.”

In this manner I was prepared for this great event, and I cannot but record it, as a great and signal event in the life of a private individual: for when a letter was received from Russia by Richard Phillips of London, a copy of which was sent to a Friend in Sheffield, and by him handed directly to me, it did not create any surprise, as I was in a state of preparation to receive it, and in daily expectation of something important coming to pass. The circumstances which afterwards took place, are too well known to need enumerating.

I have had to leave my family for short periods of time, having been called upon to proclaim the glad tidings of the everlasting gospel, and to endeavour to stir up the pure mind by way of remembrance of those things that are most excellent, in visits to my brethren and sisters, in their separate churches, in different parts of England; and I humbly hope the day' s work was keeping pace with the day: but now a greater trial of faith was to be exercised, a greater sacrifice to be made;—I must not only leave my family, but my country also. The second letter arrived from Russia, and the time seemed fully come. Accordingly I drank the cup with all its bitter dregs of separation, and tore myself away.

If my proposals be altogether rejected, I do not know what I can do more. I have not stood at a distance, but have actually come into Russia, and offered myself, my family, and the sacrifice of nearly all the resources I possess. If this offer be refused, I humbly trust the will will be accepted for the deed, and that obedience will have kept pace with knowledge; for verily it matters little our knowing, unless we practise also. It is “not the hearers of the law, but the doers of it, that are justified” in the sight of Almighty God: it is “not every one that says, Lord! Lord! that shall enter into the kingdom of heaven, but they that do the will,” etc.:—and again, “If you know these things, happy are you if you do them.” In this case, I shall of course return immediately home, and resume my former occupations; committing myself to Him, who will not break the bruised reed, nor suffer it to be broken; and whom I earnestly desire to serve to the latest moment of my breath.⁴

To return to the narrative:—it was concluded that Daniel Wheeler should, in the first instance, visit Petersburg alone; and for this purpose he set out from his home, towards the close of the Sixth Month, 1817; and, after making a satisfactory journey, returned the same autumn. The following are extracts from memoranda made during this visit:—

On board the “Loft,” 115 miles from the Holderness Coast. Sixth Month 29th, First day.—My mind constantly bending towards home, and tracing the various situations and occupations of my dear wife and family, as the different periods of the day advanced, and I remembered my beloved Friends in their Meeting at Sheffield; but I had very little opportunity for retirement myself, the affairs of the ship being much unsettled on account of having so recently come from harbour, and the cabin subject to frequent interruption. Last night my mind was disquieted, and being very desirous of promoting the safety of the ship, I stayed on deck until after midnight; and when I lay down in my cabin, it was with reluctance, as if the ship was not safe, unless I was upon the look-out. I have felt deserted and uncomfortable a considerable part of the day; but have been this evening favoured to see that it arose from lack of holding fast my confidence,—from not being sufficiently resigned into His hands, “who sleeps not by day, nor slumbers by night,” and without whose protecting arm of help, “the watchman wakes but in vain;” and I believe that I have nothing to do but to be quiet, and endeavour patiently to trust in the all-sufficiency of His power.

30th.—As the forenoon advanced, the wind increased and the sea arose, and by degrees we were obliged to diminish our canvass. I have been a passive beholder of what has been going on upon deck, my mind now and then recurring to the cause of my being here; and I can, with humble gratitude, acknowledge that I feel myself free from any accusation, believing I am in my proper place; and truly nothing short of this will do to lean upon.

After a series of boisterous and contrary winds, we were favoured to anchor in the roads of Elsineur, about one o'clock, p.m., on the Second day, the 7th of Seventh Month, and the tenth day from leaving Hull. The captain going ashore to clear at the Quarantine Office, I accompanied him; and while he attended to his duties, I walked as far as Cronenburgh Castle, also to a royal palace and garden not far distant. Here I may remark the attention paid me by a young Englishman, an entire stranger to me, who was very desirous of going about with me. I soon found he wished to converse on religious subjects; and I gave him all the opportunity I could. Before we parted, I was strengthened to declare to him the way of life and salvation: and may He who has begun the good work in his heart, be pleased to carry it on, to the praise of His own great and excellent name,—for it is His own works only that can praise Him. I believe the language of our blessed Lord may be applied to this young man,—“you are not far from the kingdom of God.” We reached the ship in safety, between 11 and 12 o'clock at night, taking a pilot on board with us. If I should have been instrumental, in any degree, in fanning the immortal spark, which I believe to be mercifully kindled in the heart of this young Englishman at Elsineur, I shall think myself amply compensated for coming so far.

Seventh Month 8th.—I think the Danish coast surpasses all I ever saw before for beautiful plantations, interspersed with houses, from Cronenburgh Castle to Copenhagen: at this place, the devastations committed by the British fleet, under the late Horatio Nelson, are still visible, and are suffered to remain in nearly the same ruinous state as they were left by our shipping. The king's residence is principally here. I observed at Elsineur a few solid countenances; but I thought the generality of them seemed to be living as without God in the world, and the faces of many plainly show the low price at which spirituous liquors may be purchased. The pilot, who brought us through the grounds, appeared to be a thoughtful man, and conducted himself in a solid manner while with us; my heart yearned over him as he left the ship, and I could not help craving that the Divine blessing might rest upon him.

10th, Fifth day.—Fresh gales and fine weather; pressing forward before the sea and wind. I felt myself rather unwell this morning, and when I endeavoured to hold my solitary meeting in the cabin, I might have said, as Mary did,—“They have taken away my Lord, and I know not where they have laid Him.” But I trust I am endeavouring to learn in all states to be content,—a very necessary qualification (however difficult of attainment) for all poor finite beings. In the afternoon, saw the Island of Gothland, and hauled to the northward a little, to obtain a fresh departure from it. In the evening, poverty of spirit and indisposition of body were my portion; I retired to rest early, and in the morning was favoured to feel my mind quietly resigned and comfortable, and nature refreshed.

11th, Sixth day.—Off the east end of Gothland, still running before the wind and sea. One of our sailors had managed, while we were at Elsineur, to get a supply of Hollands, with which the poor fellow had kept himself in a state of intoxication, and was twice dismissed from the helm, for not keeping the ship in her course before the sea. This man when sober is an excellent sailor, and well knows how much depends upon the steering of a ship in these narrow rocky seas; but such is his love of liquor, that his own life, the ship, and all her crew may take their chance, if he can but get his darling grog. He looks very grave at the helm this morning.

12th, Seventh day afternoon.—Gulf of Finland. We are now very near a small island called Oxholm, on which resides a respectable English widow, who suffered shipwreck here about twenty years ago: her husband was captain of the ship, and perished at the time. She could never be prevailed upon to leave the island, and by the interest of Admiral Greig, of the Russian navy, and his friends, she was enabled to open a boarding school, to which the children of very respectable English families in Russia are sent: last year she had about forty scholars. There are few other houses, besides those belonging to her establishment. She has cultivated a piece of land as a garden; and from the view we had of it just now, it wears the appearance of management and neatness: she has also the care of the light-house close to her dwelling. The island is not more than from three to four miles in circumference, and only four leagues from the main land.

13th, First day.—Steering towards the island of Hogland, and expecting shortly to see it. I have had my silent sitting in the cabin this forenoon; but ships at sea are not very quiet places. I was however favoured with a sense of my own weakness, and humbled therewith. My mind has for these last two days begun to feel a burden upon it, which increases as we draw nearer to Petersburg; and He only, who sees the end from the beginning, knows what is to befall me there. But I am fully sensible, He will require no more than what strength and ability will be furnished to perform; and I have abundant cause to trust in Him, “who walks upon the wings of the wind, and makes the clouds his chariot”—who not only commands the storm, but at His pleasure rebukes it, and causes the undulating waves to be at peace: of which I have had renewed instances during our passage from England. I have this morning thought more than usual of my dear wife and family, desiring they might be comforted by the Great Comforter; and I have traced some of them to their seats in Sheffield meeting, among my beloved brethren and sisters; whom, though absent in body, my heart is often with, and on whose account, I have frequently felt, and still feel an affectionate interest, that every age and every class among them may come to know Him, “who is from the beginning,” and sit under His teaching; whose teaching remains to be excellent, to those who are happily found in the counsel of His will:—“bread will be given them, their waters will be sure,”—even that bread which the world knows not of, and that water which will be in them a well of water springing up into everlasting life.

Seventh Month 15th.—Arrived at Cronstadt. After the ship was secured, we went on board an old ship of war, fitted up as the Harbour Master's Office. In the places where the public business is transacted, are paintings of the saints richly ornamented, before which the members of the Greek church repeat their prayers: they make a point of bowing and crossing themselves as soon as they see them. I observed the people, employed in the office, stared very much at me, principally I believe on account of my wearing my hat. On going into the presence of the Port Admiral, of whom I had to obtain a pass. I observed he also noticed my hat; and finding he could speak English, on his coming to inquire my name, I said, I hoped the keeping on my hat would not be considered as intended disrespect, and entered into an explanation of my reasons, for not taking it off unto man; when he stopped me by saying, when it was omitted from any motive of religion, he did not wish it. I left Cronstadt in the steam-packet that afternoon for Petersburg, and on landing there I was met by one of the Bible Society's agents, who conveyed me to the Bible Office, the gift of the Emperor to the Bible Society; at which place I was treated with great kindness and courtesy, and found in it a quiet asylum for several days.

The next morning, I had an hour's conversation with Basil Papoff: he is called 'his Excellency,' and I think with some propriety, as he appears an excellent man. He thought my business would go on slowly, as the Emperor was so much engaged on account of the marriage of his brother, the Grand Duke Nicholas. I was introduced to the minister of the Moravian congregation here, also to William Glenn, who is going to Astrachan to translate the Scriptures into the Persian language. I have also met another person from Scotland, who I have since found is desirous of knowing the way of Truth more perfectly.

17th.—I traversed a considerable part of the city, and went up the country opposite the summer palace of Kamenny Ostrof, where the Emperor now resides. I think the generality of the soil is better than I expected to see it. I recognised clover and several kinds of grasses by the roadside, and abundance of weeds in the gardens, of pretty much the same kinds as we have in England. In returning, we passed the hut that Peter the Great at one time inhabited; and we saw the boat built with his own hands. We passed through the public gardens, which are beautiful. Most kinds of provisions are good here; but the water at this season is unwholesome. Thirteen cart-loads of Bibles and Testaments have been sent off today for Moscow.

21st.—Took possession of a room at an inn kept by an Englishwoman. Drank tea with an English family, and had a good opportunity of explaining to the head of it, the nature of our silent meetings, which was such as he had no conception of. He had an idea that Friends went to meeting to meditate, and he thought that might be done at home; and that on account of the young people, we should, at any rate, read the Scriptures. I told him we read the Scriptures to them at home. He then concluded, it must be the bias of education, that reconciled us to sitting in silence. I replied it could not be so, as related to myself, for I was brought up in what is called the Established Church of England. This led to many questions on his part, all of which I was enabled to answer; and best Help being near, I explained to him the nature of true worship, and that there was at seasons a power to be felt, which was before words were, and which will remain when words have ceased. He asked whether I came to a knowledge of the truth, while I was in communion with the Established Church. No, I said, never while I was pestered with words. I could not help inveighing against words, as they seemed to place all their confidence and dependence in them.

Seventh Month 23rd.—Received a message that I was to be introduced to Prince Galitzin today: I had little time to spare for preparations, but had not many to make, having no clothes but what I landed in, my luggage having been detained at the Custom house. I was accordingly conducted to the splendid mansion of the Prince, the entrance and marble staircase of which were well lined with attendants; in whose countenances surprise and anger were evidently depicted, at my assurance in keeping on my hat. We waited a short time in an open gallery, as the Prince was engaged; and took a turn into a spacious room, the walls of which were hung with pictures of all the imperial family of Russia, from the first to the last. In a short time a messenger came to say that the Prince was at liberty; when we were ushered into his apartment of ample size. The Prince came forward, and met us in a very courteous manner; and on _______ introducing me, he took me by the hand, and we retired to the back part of the room, and sat down at the end of a writing table. He asked many questions with great affability in Russian,—my companion interpreting between us. Amongst others, he inquired what family I had; which being answered, he wished to know whether I would bring them all with me, if I came to reside in Russia. I said, 'Yes; I should not leave a hoof behind; at which he seized my hand, and expressed his satisfaction. He then inquired, how I should do, as there was no place of worship for me,—no meeting—no society,—how was that? I told him the worship of Almighty God was not confined either to time or place,—that it is neither in this mountain, nor at Jerusalem; but in every place incense should be offered to His name, and a pure offering. After pausing a little, he desired the sentence might be thoroughly explained to him. He then seemed quite to understand it, bowing his head in a reverent manner, and appeared to ponder over it. In the midst of this, I found my mind drawn into silence; but the Prince kept asking question after question, as if afraid of losing time: my answers were now very short; and at last, I endeavoured to explain to my companion the situation I was in, but could not make him understand me.

The conversation then turned to agriculture, and the soil of the neighbourhood, and to the Emperor; but as a burden still remained with me, I cannot recollect all he said, or what answers I made him. At last, we rose from our seats as with one accord; but before the Prince had time to bid me farewell in his way, I found my time was come: and I was enabled to declare unto him the everlasting foundation,—even Christ Jesus, the rock of ages,—who was “to the Jews a stumbling block, and to the Greeks foolishness;” but to them that obey his gospel inwardly revealed in the secret of their hearts, Christ crucified, the power of God, and the wisdom of God unto salvation. As I stopped at the end of every sentence, my companion interpreted, as if he had been accustomed to the work, and might have known what he was going to do. After we had finished, we stood like statues for a short time; and on my moving, as if I was at liberty, the Prince took me by the hand, saying, 'although our languages are different, the language of the Spirit is the same.' He held my hand till we got near the door, when I bade him farewell, and departed, comparatively as light as a feather. I cannot but admire how I was guided; for in delivering what was upon me to the Prince, at the end of every sentence, all was taken from me, as if I should have nothing further to say; but when _______ had had sufficient time to interpret, then a supply was again vouchsafed. Whereas if I could have proceeded, as it were without stopping, I should have overpowered the interpreter, and the work would have been marred altogether. Thus the blind are guided in wavs that they know not, and in paths that they have not seen: but truly the pillars of my tabernacle were mightily shaken. May I ever be preserved in that humility, through which alone the grateful heart can bless His holy name; “who redeems our lives from destruction, and crowns us with loving-kindness and tender mercies.”

In the afternoon, I met with some very humiliating circumstances in the course of my business at the Custom-house, which helped to keep under the creaturely part.

[From this time to the 10th of Eighth Month, Daniel Wheeler was employed in examining the waste crown lands and the marshes in the vicinity of the capital, in preparing reports of his investigations, etc.]

Seventh Month 27th, First day.—After I had sat down in my room to hold my meeting, I was interrupted by the coming of an individual, whom I had before seen. He resides about twenty versts from hence, and had come on purpose to inquire into the principles of Friends. He had once had a sight of 'Barclay's Apology,' but was never able to get it a second time, and I much regretted I had not one to give him. He is well acquainted with the Scriptures, but very desirous of having them expounded and explained. After a long conversation, I referred him to the never-failing and only key, the Holy Spirit, by which they were given forth, and without which the natural man will ever read them in vain,—or when he has done, if he thinks he knows any thing, he knows nothing as he ought to know. He gave me a kind invitation to his house, and we parted in a friendly manner.

Eighth Month 3rd, First day.—I spent the day at home in retirement. In the evening the city was illuminated, and I understand there was a great display of fire and water-works at the country palace of Peterhoff, on account of its being the saint's day of the Dowager Empress Mary.

On the 15th, I began a letter to my dear wife, and had finished two sides of it, when I seemed quite at a loss for a subject, which I could not account for. I went into the yard, and walked up and down for fresh air; but had not been there long, when I received a message, that the Emperor would see me that afternoon, and that I was to be at five o'clock at the lodgings of Prince Galitzin, which are close to the gate of the palace of Kamenny Ostrof. Having been kindly assisted in procuring a conveyance, I was there in time, and the Prince received me with his usual openness. In about half an hour a messenger came, and (bareheaded) conducted me through the garden, and the different guards, who stared at me not a little. At last we entered the palace, and after going through a range of rooms, I was shown into the apartment of the Emperor, who received me with more parade than I expected; but I thought afterwards this was only on account of the page, for as soon as the door was shut, he took me by the hand, saying, 'Sit down, sir.' I was not however, quite ready to sit down; for the salutation arose in my heart, of “Grace, mercy, and peace be multiplied, from God the Father, and our Lord Jesus Christ,” upon the noble Emperor, etc. As I proceeded I took off my hat, and the Emperor stood quite still, until I had finished; when we both sat down. He had several questions to ask, and expressed his surprise and satisfaction at the manner in which I had been led into Russia. I had a great deal to say to him, and full opportunity to express every thing that arose on my mind. He mentioned my memorial, and I think touched upon every particular head distinctly, and said he agreed to the whole. I then gave him a paper I had ready in my pocket book, which brought the peculiar principles of our Society into view; this he read, and questioned me about all of them; which gave time to clear myself fully. I had a good deal to say to him on silent waiting. I remember my last words were, the expression of a desire that attended my mind, 'that when time shall rob you of your earthly crown, an inheritance incorruptible and undefiled—a crown immortal, may be your happy portion.' He held my hand fast in his for some time, and did not utter another word. I then returned to Prince Galitzin, and on taking leave, I had a little matter to express to him, which, _______ who was present, interpreted. The next morning, I finished my letter to my wife, in time for the post, and thought myself clear of Petersburg: but in the evening, I found something like an invitation to such of the English people as inclined to sit down with me.

The next day, after dining with J. Paterson, he invited me to go to hear their sermon, which I declined; but afterwards I told him, that if his friends inclined to sit down with me in a large room at the Bible Office, if I had any thing for them they should have it, and if not, they must forgive me. It was accordingly fixed that we should meet at seven o'clock the next evening. I repaired there about the time, and found a larger number assembled than I had any expectation of, including four ministers of the Independent denomination. Scarcely an individual amongst them had sat in silence before, in this way: it was, however, exercising to me, and we had a solemn sitting. I was enabled to declare the truth amongst them about three-quarters of an hour, to the relief of my own mind, and the sitting ended well: there seemed something like an unwillingness on their part to break up: I was, I trust, thankful when it was over.

The forepart of the 18th and 19th instant, was employed in taking leave of my friends, and preparing for my homeward voyage. On the 20th, I went down to Cronstadt by steam-boat, and proceeded at once on board the Fortune, a fine ship, for Hull. I concluded to remain on board, although the ship was not quite ready for sea; and, as night came on, I began to be very uncomfortable, and was fearful I had been making more haste than I should have done, and that in my hurry I had not hit upon the right vessel. I walked the deck till late, and a willingness was wrought in my mind to quit the ship in the morning, if required. This exercise, being amongst entire strangers, made the pressure very heavy. I retired to my cabin, and got some rest, and when I awoke in the morning, I found my accusers were all gone, and tranquillity again restored; for which I was thankful. Going on shore in the course of the day, I found a long looked for letter from home, and thankfulness was raised in my heart to the Giver of every good and perfect gift, for the cheering account it contained.

Eighth Month 23rd.—We got out of the Mole this morning, and having been boarded by the guard-ship, by eleven o'clock all impediments were removed, and we proceeded down the Gulf, with a fair wind.

24th, First day.—When I awoke in the morning, I found the ship was rolling, which she would not have done if the wind had not been fair, and the sea following us; so that I got up cheerfully. I went into my state room in the forenoon; but found I could not get into any settlement of mind. The thought of proceeding homeward with a fair wind was too much for me to be able to keep out of view; but I trust the Father of mercies saw my weakness with his eye of compassion.

31st, First day.—Having no opportunity of sitting down in the cabin, I held my sitting upon deck; and though I met with many interruptions, yet I was favoured with settlement of mind in a good degree. In the afternoon, rounded the Falsterbo Reef, on which lay the wreck of a large ship, and at five o'clock made a signal for a pilot to carry us through the grounds; but could not perceive one coming off to us. As I was walking the deck, it just passed my mind, how soon our prospects are blighted; and going to the quarter-deck, I heard the sailor who was heaving the lead cry, 'by the deep four, a quarter less four,—by the mark three, a quarter less three,'—and immediately after I felt the ship strike on a rock; in a few seconds she struck a second time, and then stuck fast. The crew were of course all in a state of consternation, and the captain was almost speechless; and indeed it was a serious moment, for the ship was under full sail when she struck, and on a lee shore too. The first thing was to take the sails off her; then the boats were lowered, and two anchors carried out with strong hawsers. During this time several ships passed, to whom our captain waved his hat by way of signal to keep off; and very mortifying it certainly was, to see the different ships take in their pilots, and make sail. Soon after, a large boat full of men approached, with whom, the captain agreed, after hard bargaining, to carry out a large anchor for us: this took up some time, and as night came on, the wind rose, and things began to wear a gloomy aspect. I was favoured however to feel quietness cover my mind like a canopy; and a petition arose in my heart to the Father of mercies, to bless the endeavours of the toiling crew. While the Danish boat was receiving the anchor and cable, finding I could be of no use, I went below, and stretched myself on the locker, with my arm supporting my head. I continued in this position till the sailors began to heave upon the cable; and, at length, I plainly felt her keel grate upon the rock. Being fully satisfied that she moved, I hastened on deck with the pleasing intelligence. Shortly after one in the morning the ship floated, and was soon in deep water again, which was cause of humble thankfulness. We anchored in Elsineur roads the same afternoon.

[The voyage to England was completed in safety.]

Chapter VI.

Removes with his Wife and Family to Russia—Voyage There, 1818—Settlement at Ochta Near Petersburg—William Allen and Stephen Grellet—Agricultural Success—Visit from the Emperor, Etc.

During the ensuing winter, Daniel Wheeler was actively engaged in winding up his affairs preparatory to leaving England. Ample provision of agricultural implements, seeds and cattle, was also made; and, at length, all being in readiness, he embarked for Russia, with his wife, family and assistants, in all twenty souls, on the 22nd of Sixth Month, 1818.

The following memoranda are from the pen of a friend, and refer to this period.

On the 18th of Sixth Month, 1818, we were agreeably surprised by seeing our dear friend Daniel Wheeler, come into our meeting at Sheffield; for he had taken leave of us, not expecting to meet us again before embarking for Petersburg: towards the close of the meeting, he expressed himself nearly as follows:—

'It has afforded me consolation once more to sit with my dear brethren and sisters, though in great weakness; and painful my feelings have been, when thinking that I may never have another opportunity of doing so; being with my dear family about to be removed from scenes like these, to a land of strangers, amongst a people whose language we know not. I do not wish to multiply words unnecessarily; but as there are perhaps few present who are acquainted with my motives for leaving, I have believed it would be right for me, near the close of this meeting to inform you, as ability may be afforded. Nearly four years ago, in the vision of that light in which I believe, it was clearly manifested that it would be right for me to remove with my dear family to that land. Many were the conflicts and deep the baptisms I passed through, known only to Him who sees in secret; but while abiding under these impressions, for he that believes makes not haste, I was brought into a willingness to give up thereto: and thanks be to the Preserver of men, I can now say without boasting, I am willing to go whithersoever He may be pleased to send me. With these feelings, I went over last summer to see this strange land; and though I met with many trials, my faith was not shaken, but remained fixed on Him, “who walks upon the wings of the wind.”

'Painful as the separation is to me, I would not have my dear friends think that I consider my lot hard; for in sincerity I can adopt the language of,—“What shall I render unto the Lord for all his mercies?” Few have received greater benefits from His hand,—few have experienced greater deliverances; and none more unworthy. I am weak and frail; yet in me you behold a monument of His everlasting mercy. He has kept me from the devouring sword;—He has preserved me from the raging pestilence, when thousands have fallen by my side;—He kept me alive in famine;—He saved me from shipwreck, when the deep was ready to overwhelm, and the briny waves to swallow me up:—but, above all, He has showed me his marvellous Truth.

'To this Power, my dear friends, I commend you, which is able to do all things for you. When we are far separated, we may still pray for each other; and perhaps those prayers may prove more availing, than while we have been together. In the words of the Apostle,—to His grace, which is able to keep and preserve you alive in the most holy faith, I commend you, together with myself and my dear family,—all that go, and all that stay; and in the love of the everlasting gospel, I saluto you, and affectionately bid you farewell.'

The last visit our dear friend Daniel Wheeler paid before leaving his native country for Russia, was at the house of Sarah Eglin of Hull, where he took his last meal on shore, the 22nd of Sixth Month. In a short opportunity, after dinner, he told us that his mind had been gratefully affected, in renewedly feeling the life giving presence of Israel's Shepherd, accompanied with a belief, that he should not be deserted in the time of need; but, that He who had been with him in six troubles would graciously preserve him in the seventh: under which precious feeling he had been ready to adopt the language,—“Surely goodness and mercy have followed me all the days of my life, and I shall dwell in the house of the Lord forever.”

[He proceeded on his voyage; in the course of which he addressed the following letter to his friend the late Samuel Smith of Sheffield.]

Sixth Month 26th, 1818.

My Dear Friend,

According to my promise, I have the pleasure of informing you, that we are now pushing for the roads of Elsineur, and expect to anchor in about two hours, having had a passage of four days and nights. It has been what the sailors call a fine run; yet some of my company have thought it rough enough. The supper-table was well attended the evening we left Hull, and sailing was talked of with the greatest enthusiasm: but a great alteration had taken place by next morning the land was out of sight, the wind had got up, and we found a tumbling sea upon the Dogger Bank. But little breakfast was wanted, and at dinnertime, I had not one guest to bear me company. The Arethusa has proved herself a noble vessel; and, although much weighted upon her decks with water-casks and cattle, she has borne her costly freight, (to me not only costly but precious indeed,) nearly seven hundred miles in this short time, without any leakage, though sorely buffeted by wind and sea. My dear wife has been very ill; yet through all has been favoured with calmness and resignation, and I fully believe has never once let in fear.

The sincerity and kindness of all our friends who have sheltered me and my family, serve to make us the more regret being thus torn away from them. But amidst these painful sensations, quietness has presided amongst us; and in our silent meeting in the cabin yesterday, some of our hearts were tendered, under a sense of the continued regard of the unslumbering Shepherd.

We were so amply provided with every article of provision which our Hull friends could think of and prepare, that our fare has been very different from what is usual at sea. In short, we have so many things to be thankful for, that there is some danger of our being deficient in gratitude to the great Author of all our blessings; but I humbly trust, we shall be preserved in humility and watchfulness, and in that fear which can alone entitle us to Divine protection and regard.

[After his arrival at Petersburg, he again writes to his friend Samuel Smith, as follows:]

Ochta, near Petersburg, Eighth Month 19th, 1818.

My Dear Friend,

I am fully aware that you have long before this time heard of our being favoured to land in safety, complete in number as when we left our native country. After replenishing our stock of hay and water at Elsineur, we proceeded on our voyage, and arrived at Cronstadt, on the 16th day from Hull: one day was lost at Elsineur, so that we could not well have had a more favourable and expeditious passage; for which, I humbly trust, all of us who are capable of reflection, are truly thankful. Several things combined to detain us at Cronstadt, so that it was eight days before we reached the habitation prepared for us, which is situated on the bank of the Neva, nearly opposite the Smolny monastery. It is a stuccoed brick house of two stories, with the necessary stabling and outbuildings; and we have now got it into tolerable order.

I have called upon my old acquaintances and friends of last year, and have met with the most handsome treatment from all with whom I have had to do; and I have found, to my great comfort, the greatest sincerity in all those who made profession last year. Sometimes I cannot avoid partaking of their sumptuous tables, which I can assure you is no treat to me, though I believe it has its use: and if so, however mortifying, I hope I shall be willing to bear the cross of it. I always look forward to such times, as if I was going to be tried by a court-martial, or something of the sort; but if it was not for these feelings, I should be afraid that the creaturely part would be in danger of exaltation, from the caresses of these people. So that although much strippedness and abasedness is my lot, I believe that there only is my safety. Truly there is a precious seed scattered up and down in this place; and I think it is very remarkable, that so many of those in high stations are not only great, but are sincerely desirous of doing good, and are so little in their own eyes.

The greatest part of the time we have been here, it has pleased Him, who best knows what is best for us, to dispense a season of poverty and barrenness, as far as relates to myself; and my dear wife has been pretty much in the same condition. At the same time, a ray of light has mercifully been permitted to shine upon the path, sufficient to strengthen the belief, that our being here is in the counsel of His will, without whose knowledge a single sparrow falls not to the ground. If it was not for a gleam now and then of this kind, though faint and transient, how deplorable would our prospect be,—separated from those we dearly love, surrounded by many persons disposed to take every advantage of us, with a dreary half-year's winter gathering round us.

We are now making preparations for the winter, and have laid in a large store of wood for fuel; much more than I should have thought we could possibly consume. But as many fears are entertained by our friends here, lest we should suffer from the cold, we are forced to comply with their advice. The Russians keep themselves much warmer than we shall like; and I think it will be better to wear a little extra clothing, than to keep our rooms so excessively heated.

We have lately had some frosty nights, which have obliged us to try the stove in one room; we are much pleased with its construction, and think it preferable to our open English tire-places.

I have lately been inquiring the manner in which the winter here begins; and am informed that, after some cold rainy weather, the English winter commences, which freezes over parts of the Lake Ladoga: these are soon broken up by the wind, when the ice comes down in large flakes, and blocks up the Gulf of Finland and the Neva. Shortly after this, the winter comes in reality, and fixes the ice, often in a very rough state, just as it has been hurried down by the current,—many of the flakes lying one upon another. Often, the whole becomes solid in forty-eight hours; after which roads are levelled over the rough ice, at those places where the pontoon bridges and ferries have been, which are marked out by fir trees set up in the ice. These crossings, frequently remain passable until the Fourth Month; for although the snow melts off the land three weeks earlier, yet the river remains frozen, owing to the frosty nights:—the roads are sometimes dusty before the ice breaks up in the river. This I believe is the season when people suffer the most, as the days are so warm that they change their clothing, while at the same time there are strong frosts by night.

Ninth Month 4th.—Finding I have yet time, I feel disposed to lengthen my already lengthened letter. I do not wish to tire my friends; but I believe they are so much interested in our welfare, as to accept it as an expression of that gratitude and love, which I trust will never cease to flow in my heart, while memory holds her place in this frail tabernacle, and however distant we and our little ones may be exiled. I alluded in the forepart of my letter to the stripped situation of mind, that had for some time been my portion; and have now, with humble thankfulness, to acknowledge the inexpressible comfort wherewith I am comforted; which nothing short of the great and promised Comforter could administer to the drooping mind. Last First day, in our little meeting, the Master was pleased to preside, and it was indeed “a feast of fat things;” and the language which arose in my heart was, “Take eat; this is my body.” I never remember being under such a covering, and my desire is, that I may never forget it: and oh! that the fear of the Lord may so prevail amongst us, as to entitle us to His love, which can alone enable us “to run through a troop, or leap over a wall;” and which at this time enables me to call every country my country, and every man my brother.

To Balby Monthly Meeting.

Second Month 17th, O. S. 1819.

Dear Friends,

In conformity with the desire expressed in your minute of the Fifth Month last, we have endeavoured to render an account of ourselves in the foregoing part of this letter. It was thought that by drawing up answers to such of the queries as were applicable to us, the most correct statement of our situation would be obtained.

In thus drawing the attention of the Monthly Meeting to its distant members, a belief accompanies my mind, that tender sympathy and feeling are excited on our account; and my heart is humbled within me, in the remembrance of the “goodly tents of Jacob, and the quiet dwelling places of Israel,”—of those dear brethren and sisters, with whom I can no longer assemble before the Lord, and from whom my dear family and self are far separated, as from the bosom and fostering care of the church. Yet amidst a dispensation so painful to human nature, I have abundant cause to acknowledge the continued regard of Israel's great and compassionate Shepherd; who fails not to care for His sheep, however widely scattered, and who at seasons is graciously pleased, not only to afford the healing balm of resignation, but to replenish with His love, which many waters cannot quench, nor distance diminish; but which at times is sensibly felt to flow towards the flock at home, even to the hindermost,—and to clothe with ability in secret broken aspirations to supplicate on their behalf, that “not a hoof may be left behind,” and that none may be missing in the great day; but that all of every age and of every class, may hear His voice, be known of Him, and follow Him: that when He, the Great Shepherd, shall appear, we may appear also, and be all bound up together in the Lord's “bundle of life;” which is frequently, fervently, and at this time, the desire of your friend,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To Mordecai Casson.

Third Month 19th, 1819.

I do not know that we have ever had more than 21 degrees of frost by Reaumer's scale, (16° below zero, Faht.)—indeed, but few of the Russians recollect so mild a winter. I think we never passed a winter in England with less sickness in the family: the merciful Dispenser of all our blessings has indeed done more than we could have thought or asked for. During four months of the darkest season, we have had the company, generally two days in the week, of our beloved friends William Allen and Stephen Grellet; through whom we have often been cheered and refreshed as with dainties from the dear Master's table. They have had a narrow path to tread in, yet are well satisfied with their labours here; though they have been in a different way from what is customary with those who move on such errands: they have truly been led in paths that they knew not, and in ways that they had not seen, to their own admiration, and to the praise of the great and excellent Name. They left us ten days ago, with minds full of peace,—beloved and regretted by all who had the happiness to become acquainted with them. The stream of gospel love, which was at seasons permitted to flow, when channels were open to receive it, has made, I believe, an impression on the minds of some, which will never be obliterated; and which has clearly evinced, “whose servants they are.” They were, I think, of all men the most fit to move in such a work, in such a place, and under such circumstances.

I saw them set off from the city, just at the edge of dark, in a covered sledge, in the midst of a heavy snow-storm. They are furnished with letters and documents, sufficient to open the way wherever they go: they have also a document called a podorojni, which obliges the post-masters to furnish them with horses as soon as they arrive at a station; so that they are not likely to suffer detention on the road. Their luggage is put in the bottom of the sledge; over it is a bed covered with black morocco leather, on which they can either sit or lie: they have also provisions with them; and a servant who can speak French, German, and Russian.

Since the departure of our friends, we have felt much poverty and strippedness; yet at times a renewed evidence has in unutterable mercy been vouchsafed to us, that the Rock remains, and that the Foundation stands sure: so that there is still encouragement, even amidst the gloom by which we seem surrounded, humbly to hope that we shall be preserved and enabled to maintain our ground; however feeble our attempts may seem, and however much our weakness may be felt. The responsible situation in which we are placed, is at times almost enough to overwhelm me with fear; lest I should let fall any of those precious testimonies given us to bear, and thereby bring reproach upon the blessed cause of Truth. I have however great consolation in observing, that my eldest son also begins to feel the importance of this; and it is a great favour when the eldest takes the right way, as there is then a hope that the younger ones will follow after.

—————

To Barbara Hoyland.

Ninth Month 22nd, O. S. 1819.

My Dear Sister,

Since I last wrote to you, our work has made great progress, and being now widely extended, is not likely to lessen my fatigue; but I am looking forward to a little respite, as the winter is expected shortly to be with us. Since the spring opened, I have been much harassed, having been engaged from four in the morning until late at night, except on First days, when I do not suffer any work to be done, and of course I have no occasion to go out myself. It is a common practice here to transact business, and hold the principal markets on First days; but I made a stand against it, as soon as I came, and have been under the necessity to this time strongly to object to it. On Fifth days also, I take the forenoons; so that our little meetings are regularly held, which is a great comfort to me, as well as a respite from toil, and when at seasons the Great Master is pleased to preside and own the slender few.

Since the spring opened, we have sown about forty acres with clover, and other grasses, also with some oats, but merely to protect the smaller seeds from drought; about four acres of potatoes have been planted, and ten acres of turnips sown with the Northumberland drill. On the whole, these have done well, particularly the turnips, which are bought up at a high price, as fast as I can get them into the market. But I am most surprised by the grass seeds, which in twelve weeks after the sowing were in full flower, looking like a full crop, the year after sowing in England; such is the astonishing quickness of vegetation here.

Amidst the numerous avocations of the Emperor, time has been devoted by him for a thorough examination of the work carrying on by us; which gave me full two hours' time with him alone, and another hour was occupied at our house: so that I had an opportunity given of clearing myself, and I hope nothing was kept back on my part. I rejoice in believing, that a spark remains unextinguished in his noble bosom, which I trust will never be suffered to go out or diminish; but may be permitted increasingly to brighten, even unto the perfect day. Yet I cannot help fearing, when dwelling on the critical situation in which he is placed, the exalted station he fills, and the many besetments by which he is surrounded. I will content myself with reviving his own expression;—when speaking on the subject of war, I alluded to the vast army in this neighbourhood, and the state of mankind in general; he replied,—'the things that are not possible with man, are possible with God.'

We have also had a visit from the reigning Empress: she is a very amiable woman,—so unaffected and unassuming, that our fears of being embarrassed in her presence were soon changed into admiration and regard; and though she manifested great condescension and affability, true dignity still appeared. She came to the house, and afterwards went to view the work; and I showed her every thing that I thought would please. She walked for a considerable time on the land, and was much gratified with its being so dry, as well as with the apparent change in the face of the country. The Empress speaks a little English, and had with her a companion who understands it well.

I remain, etc.

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To David Mallinson of Sheffield.

Ninth Month 22nd, 1819.

How often have I thought of my beloved friend, and his dear wife and family, when in a situation in which I could not possibly address a few lines to them; and as often lamented and grieved, as month after month has rolled away, when they have been again brought to my remembrance.

In the winter, my time was much occupied in making preparations for the ensuing campaign; and since the ice left us, I have been constantly hurried and fatigued. This year my labour has been much increased, by my having been appointed to assist in the improvement of some land of the Dowager Empress, situated about twenty-four miles distant. I have in consequence seen the Dowager several times; and I find it a trying situation for a Friend, to pass through the apartments of a palace, amongst a host of servants and military, who stare as if I was not a fellow-man. I sometimes think no one was ever in a situation similar to mine, or so much like the pelican in the wilderness, or the solitary sparrow on the house top; and am ready to query, whether my being here, can answer any good end. Yet there are seasons, when I am comforted in the belief, that some minds are led to consider and to inquire our motives, for differing so widely from the rest of mankind; and I uniformly find, when opportunities of this sort occur, something like an assent in the minds of such, and a lamentation raised that a larger portion of mankind do not follow our example.—Alas! little do they know how frail I am, and how weak I feel;—often stripped of every thing that can afford any real comfort, and apparently left to myself to walk in slippery places. Sometimes my mind glances at my dear friends at home; but there I must not dwell, though I believe I shall always consider my country as my home,—and I trust my friends will ever remain dear to me, and that however separated or circumstanced, we shall be dear to each other in that love, which is not subject to change, but “hopes all things, endures all things, bears all things; rejoices not in iniquity, but rejoices in the truth”—which rests upon the meek as a diadem, and crowns the humble sufferer with eternal life, if constantly and earnestly laboured after and abode in. However we may be permitted to feel our nothingness, let us remember it is “by these things we live:” and truly, my dear friend, and but lately very often my companion in tribulation, I believe He is a strong rock and an irresistible fortress to dwell in. For my own part, I need not ask the question, “where shall I go;” having no choice left, and consequently no merit, if I should be found frequently turning unto Him, who only “has the words of eternal life.”

I know I am many letters in debt to many of my dear friends; and I am afraid I should not be warranted in saying 'have patience and I will pay you all:' and yet as it is really my intention to answer them, I hope they will be disposed to give me a little longer credit; at the same time to attribute my long silence to the true cause, and not that they are any of them blotted out of my memory, or that my regard is in any way lessened. For I think I may say, that all the members of your meeting, with whom I have been acquainted during the time I have been permitted to dwell amongst you, are frequently the objects of my remembrance and regard, from the oldest down to the little child. But when my time is so limited, that I cannot keep up a regular correspondence, even with those that I have had the most intimate acquaintance with, I hope the charity of others will lead them to put the most favourable construction upon my long silence in this way, and I really believe they will be disposed to do so.

Well, my much loved friends, it was once very pleasant to be with you and the dear children; but those days are over and past, when it was often my lot to drop in amongst you; they are departed as a shadow when the light is withdrawn; but the Ancient of days remains: He changes not, neither do His years fail. May He be your happy portion, not only through time, but, when the struggle is over and the warfare at an end, through the never-ending ages of eternity.

Believe me, though the restless Baltic rolls between us, your affectionate friend.

Daniel Wheeler

Chapter VII.

Severe Winter of 1819-20—His Affectionate Address to Balby Monthly Meeting—Sundry Letters to His Friends in England—Visit from the Emperor Alexander.

——————

To David Mallinson.

First Month, 1820.

My Dear Friend,

Annexed are the answers to the queries from our slender meeting at Ochta, which I hope will be received in time for the Monthly Meeting in the Third Month next.

We often wonder how you are going on in England, whether you are sharing in any degree our cold winter. I sometimes think yours must have been more severe than for several years past, as the wind has been between north and east for the greater part of the last three months. I cannot possibly describe what we have had to encounter here: the Russians say, there has not been so severe a winter since the year 1800. It came upon us all at once; in the beginning of the Tenth Month, we could not get the plough into the ground, and we were shortly driven off altogether. The quantity of snow is great, and where it has drifted, it is very deep indeed, and the frost has been intense. This night we have twenty degrees, and it has been as low as thirty-one degrees by Reaumur's scale (37° below zero, Faht.) I was in the city on the coldest day, and did not suffer; though when I shut my eyes, perhaps for half a minute, it was difficult to open them again. At one time our prospect was very gloomy, as the children seemed as if they could not bear it,—and the four youngest were ill at once with the scarlet fever;—but the Great Physician helped us. I did not like the idea of sending for a doctor; it seemed like distrusting the hand, that has so often been stretched forth for our deliverance: but one of our Russian domestics being ill, on his account a doctor was called in, and it was through him we learned what fever it was. They are now, through mercy, in usual health; and are all enduring the cold, I think as well as the Russians themselves.

We have abundance of wolves, which are drawn by the severity of the weather nearer than usual to the abodes of men. The intense cold sometimes drives them mad; six cases have occurred within our knowledge, of people being bitten by wolves in this state,—four of which proved fatal,—and in the other two, the parties recovered, having had the parts cut out, and the wound seared with a hot iron. One man had his face torn by a wolf close by our house, but he succeeded in killing it; we all saw it, and a terrible animal it is to encounter, I can assure you.⁵ When the frost is very great, the smaller birds fall to the ground; I have several times seen this. But though the wolf prowles round our habitation by night, we are favoured to be quiet and peaceful within, and to partake of many consolations.

—————

To Balby Monthly Meeting.

First Month 12th, 1820.

Dear Friends,

Through the continued mercy of Him, who “crowns the year with his goodness,” I am once more permitted to send you answers to the queries from our little meeting at Ochta.

As great poverty and strippedness of mind are often, and particularly at this time, my portion, I feel quite discouraged in attempting to take up my pen on the present occasion; but in these dispensations, I have frequently to admire, that a precious feeling of love towards my dear brethren and sisters at home, is vouchsafed and permitted to remain, when every other feeling of good is wholly withdrawn from me. This being afresh brought to my remembrance, a hope is revived and cherished in my heart, (although peculiarly situated, and at times made painfully to feel the prevalency of the power of darkness by which I am surrounded,) that a small spark of life is yet unextinguished; and which, while I am writing, kindles an ability, though under a humbling sense of great weakness, to hold forth a word of encouragement to the afflicted, and to those among you, unto whom it is not only given to believe in, but also to suffer for the name of Jesus; which may have a tendency to strengthen minds that are often drooping, and in their own apprehension, no longer able to sustain the seemingly unequal combat,—who know what it is to be plunged into the depths of indescribable distress;—for such I am persuaded there are. “Fear not,” was the gracious language of the Most High to “worm Jacob;” and it continues to be so, to all the Lord's children, who are endeavouring faithfully to abide under, and patiently to endure the turnings and overturnings of His holy hand upon them: and though for the present these trials are not joyous but grievous, yet afterwards the peaceful fruits of righteousness will be the blessed experience of all those who are exercised thereby. It is indeed no other than the suffering path that leads to blessedness, which the dear Master himself trod; and which all his tribulated followers must tread; for the disciple cannot expect to be above his Master, nor the servant above his lord. So that, my dearly beloved friends, there is no real cause to be discouraged or to marvel at these things; but rather to rejoice, in that you are counted worthy to suffer, and in that you are at times made sensible of pain: for truly, pain is a certain sign of life, as that which is dead can feel no more; and it brings with it a consoling evidence, that such are living members of one and the same mystical body, whose members suffer not alone; but whether one member suffer, all the members suffer with it,—or one member be honoured, all the members rejoice with it, of which Jesus Christ our Lord is the holy head. “Fear not, therefore;”—the kingdom is appointed unto you: it is those that endure to the end that shall be saved.

The trumpet has often sounded amongst us, my dear friends; but the alarming sound of late waxes stronger and stronger; sufficiently so, I trust, to arouse those who have long regardlessly heard it. I would happily dismiss this painful subject, but in attempting to do so, sadness covers my mind, and fear begins to show itself, lest I should be found lacking in my duty to any: if such there are, who have long been neglecting the great business of their lives, and instead thereof, pursuing with avidity those things which perish with the using. Alas! what will be the situation of these in a day that is fast approaching, when the heavens shall depart as a scroll when it is rolled together; when every false delight will appear in its true colours, and nothing will be left for the poor mind to rest upon, not so much as a small island in the midst of this sea of perplexity and trouble,—not a single act of dedication to the Lord's righteous cause of Truth upon the earth to reflect upon; when those things that have occupied the heart, will serve only as memorials of past folly. Let such be entreated by one who long hovered on destruction's brink, and who has known the terrors of the Lord for sin and disobedience; and under a sense thereof, is now most earnestly desirous that others may take warning, and thereby shun the fatal snares which keep the soul in bondage and in darkness. Let such be persuaded to seek the Lord, “while he may be found,” and endeavour to redeem the past and precious time,—to acquaint themselves with God and be at peace,—to come to the knowledge of Him in the secret of their own souls,—who is “the way, the truth, and the life,”—whom to know is life eternal; who wills not the death of a sinner, but that all should repent, return and live. Then let me beseech you, in the love of Him, who died for us and rose again, for the peace of your never-dying souls, to accept the gracious invitation, “be reconciled to God,”—before it be too late, and the things that belong to your peace are hid forever from your eyes.

There is another class to whom my attention is now turned, for whose best welfare I feel an affectionate and tender solicitude; in whose hearts the babe immortal has been mercifully begotten, creating therein new desires and breathings after soul-sustaining food; whose spiritual eyes are in a good degree opened to behold the beauty and excellency that dwell in the everlasting and unchangeable Truth. To you, my dear Friends, many of whom are young in years, my heart and pen are now directed,—earnestly desiring your preservation in the alone path, that most assuredly leads to peace in this world, and in that which is to come; may nothing be suffered to turn you aside therefrom, but may you be strengthened stedfastly to contend for the like precious faith, which was once delivered to the saints,—that inestimable gift of God—that life of the just—that substance of things hoped for and evidence of things not seen, “without which it is impossible to please God,” and of which Christ Jesus is not only the holy author, but the blessed finisher. Here let us make a pause,—lest any should spend their precious time, that treasure of eternal consequence, in vain. This most necessary and heavenly gift cannot be obtained from man, nor from the doctrines of any set of men. What says the great apostle?—“Faith comes by hearing, and hearing by the word of God.” Have not all heard? Yes, verily,—the blessed sound has gone forth from sea to sea, from shore to shore, and from the river to the uttermost ends of the earth. But let none be misguided by an imposing appellation given, I sometimes fear by design, to the Holy Scriptures, styling them “the word of God.” Although the Holy Scriptures are replete with the most sublime truths,—the book of books, wonderfully preserved from the earliest ages of time, “given by inspiration of God” and “profitable for correction, for reproof, for instruction in righteousness, that the man of God may be perfect, thoroughly furnished unto all good works,” and “are able to make wise unto salvation;”—yet let us mark what follows,—it is “through faith which is in Christ Jesus.”

For some of you this explanation may not be needful, but for me it is safe. Faith comes then by that all creative Word, which was with the Father before the worlds were; “all things were made by Him, and without Him was not any thing made that was made,” who in the beginning changed the wild chaos, when it was without form and void, into habitable earth; who spoke, and the worlds were made:—and it is by this Divine Word alone, that we must all be changed from a state of nature to a state of grace, and renewed again into the heavenly image that man was in, before he by transgression fell. Behold then the Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the end, the first and the last, the root and offspring of David, the bright and morning star! Behold the marvellous display of everlasting love! the all-powerful, saving Word, the blessed medium by which faith and hearing come, is nigh in the heart and in the mouth, as says the apostle. Search then, my dearly beloved Friends,—seek and I humbly pray the Father of mercies, that you may be favoured to find. Be of good courage;—humble yourselves before God: ask in the language of unceasing prayer, and you shall receive; knock, with earnest, faithful desires, and the door of boundless mercy shall be opened unto you. “For every one that asks, receives; and he that seeks, finds; and to him that knocks, it shall be opened.” Remember it is on you that the weight of the law and the testimony must devolve, when the faithful standard-bearers of the present day are numbered with the just of all generations: and that on your example greatly depends the future bias of the tender minds of the dear innocent little children. In so doing you will not only be a blessing to them, but they will bring down a blessing upon you; and the Lord Most High, in his infinite goodness and mercy will bless you altogether.

With the salutation of that love which desires the good of all,

I remain your affectionate friend,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To Samuel Smith.

Second Month 2nd, 1820, O. S.

Your account _______ of towards the close of his day was truly consoling; and I trust the retrospect of this period would have a tendency to comfort his dear widow in her affliction. We feel much for her; but she has a strong tower, into which the righteous have in all ages fled, and found refuge and safety,—even the power of the Most High God; who remains not only a judge for the widow, but will plead her cause himself, and be a Father to her fatherless children, if they are but willing to commit themselves into His holy keeping. In love and tenderness this is what I very much desire on their account,—that they may choose the Lord for their portion, and the God of Jacob for the lot of their inheritance; that so they may be taught of his ways, and walk in his paths: and then the great loss they have been permitted in unerring wisdom to sustain, will not only be sanctified to their dear bereaved mother, but to themselves also. And if happily the elder are good examples to the younger children, in humble walking with their God, and in uprightness and integrity amongst men, and by ordering their conversation aright,—they will be the blessed means of turning the feet of their dear little brothers into the paths of truth. The Lord himself will not be lacking to draw their minds into an early acquaintance with that light, which is the life of men, in their own hearts; which if attended to will lead them out of all error into all truth: in righteousness will they be established, and great will be their peace. Our love is to them all.

I will endeavour to give you some idea of a plan which opened in my mind last autumn; but I must in the first place make you a little acquainted with the state of things here. The land belongs principally to the nobles, who have immense estates cultivated by the peasants born on them, who are the absolute property of their masters, man, woman, and child alike. They either work for their proprietor, or they deliver to him a part of their earnings, liable to be increased at his pleasure. The result is, that they have no interest in any thing; and I have heard it said among them, that life is not worth a copeck, or the hundredth part of a shilling: this is a very affecting circumstance. My idea is, to make a trial of placing peasants in farms at a moderate fixed rent, on the land we have drained and cultivated; and if these are favoured to prosper, I have a hope that the nobles will see it their interest to divide their large estates in a similar way, and place their peasants on the same footing; and I am persuaded their incomes would be greatly increased. If when each peasant had paid his rent either in money or produce, the remainder was to be his own, he would be stimulated to industry; there would be something worth living for.

It was intended that the whole of the land which we drain and cultivate, should be farmed by us; but this is now in part set aside. The land is now to be divided into small farms, of from thirty to forty-five acres, to be let at a moderate rent, but sufficient to pay interest on the outlay for draining, cultivating, and building; the tenants to be under wholesome restrictions in the management of their land, that their farms may be taken proper care of. On each piece of land where there are farms established, a part will remain in my hands, as an example for the small farms, where a complete establishment for agricultural purposes will be built. I have been very busy constructing a model for a farm-house, suitable for the object in view; and it is expected that several of these houses will be erected next summer.

I had the happiness to see the land which has been drained, quite free from vapour, when all around it has been covered as with a cloud; so that the surrounding neighbourhood cannot fail to become more healthy from its expulsion. This would be a pleasant picture for the mind to dwell upon, if there was not mourning and lamentation on other accounts: but the state of things, in a religious point of view, is very affecting and discouraging; and the query often arises, what can be done for these people;—to which the answer at this time is, “vain is the help of man.” And truly I am often fearful that the creaturely activity of man, instead of helping, is marring the good work already begun in the tender minds of many; causing them to stop very far short of that undefiled rest, which is prepared for the people of God: but it is my most firm belief, that their earthly wisdom will be confounded, and that the Most High will scatter them as chaff is scattered before the wind; and that He will magnify His own glorious power in the hearts of his children, who in simplicity are turning their faces towards his holy mountain,—taking of the things of Christ, and showing them to these his little ones.

For my own part I am a very poor creature, and sometimes fearful that I myself shall become a castaway; yet after times of deep suffering, and self-abasement, love for the dear people here abounds more and more in my breast; and often is the desire breathed, that the cultivation in their hearts may not only keep pace with, but abundantly surpass and excel, that of the wastes, by which we are surrounded. Then would “the wilderness be as Eden, the desert as the garden of the Lord;” joy, gladness, thanksgiving, and the voice of melody would be heard therein.

The question—when shall we meet again? I should be glad to have it in my power to answer; but it is only known to Him who sees the end from the beginning, whether again in this world or not. Let us look up with humble confidence to Him, to enable us through every dispensation yet to come, to say—“not my will, but yours be done at the same time labouring with unremitting assiduity to know, what His righteous will is concerning us. Evening, morning, and noon, let us pray, my much loved friend; and He, who will not break the bruised reed nor suffer it to be broken, in his own time will not only reveal it to us, but will enable us to perform it, to the praise of His great and excellent name, and to our unspeakable peace. Farewell in the Lord, my dear friend.

—————

To Richard Cockin.

Doncaster, 21st of Second Month, 1820.

My Dear Friend,

Hearing by letters lately received from England, that affliction had visited your abode, I cannot help waiving all other considerations, however pressing at this time, and endeavouring to dip into sympathy and sweet feeling with my long loved friends; to whom my spirit is united in the binding influence of that love, which extends from the river to the uttermost parts of the habitable globe: humbly desiring that the God of all consolations may be with you, and comfort you together, with the riches of peaceful resignation to His righteous will; sustaining you in lowly patience, wrought by tribulation and suffering, in mysterious wisdom dispensed for sanctifying purposes, to His own glory, and the refinement of those who are precious in his Divine sight. “It is by these things men live;” they have led the righteous in all ages to blessed experience, being productive of that glorious hope which makes not ashamed, because the love of God is shed abroad in their hearts; which in the true dignity of its character, animates the Christian travellers with innocent boldness, to persevere in the tribulated path cast up for them, to meet with unshaken firmness the yet remaining storms of time, and to behold with the placid eye of faith, the “far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory” about to be revealed, and which awaits the ransomed and redeemed of the Lord in the kingdom of Christ Jesus, that will never have an end; where pain and sorrow cannot enter, and all tears are forever wiped away.

I well remember the dear young woman, who has terminated at an early period her innocent career, and entered into everlasting rest; and fresh in my memory is every part of the family, at whose hands I have so often had kindness shown me in simplicity and godly sincerity. These circumstances may not have been thought of by you; but in my memory they will long retain a lively and sweet fragrance. This acknowledgment will apply to many of my beloved friends, and I would gladly make it to all of them: very pleasantly can I reflect on the intervals which I was permitted to enjoy, when a sojourner amongst you, when my mind has been refreshed with the countenances of my friends, as “iron sharpens iron” with some of whom, though a weak and feeble helper, I have been engaged in endeavouring to turn “the battle to the gate” while united together in love, and harmonizing in sentiment, as “our bows abode in strength, the arms of our hands were made strong” by the mighty God of Jacob. But as a dream vanishes when the sleeper awakes, so are these seasons departed; leaving me to gaze in abasedness of self, to adore and tremble at the gracious dealings of that Almighty power, which has been with me all my life. Though few and evil have been the days of my pilgrimage, yet few lives have been more checquered with vicissitude and variety, since cast upon the wide world an orphan boy; then cradled on a boisterous element and nursed in the free-school of iniquity, with sinners my companions,—but myself the chief! Oh! wondrous mercy, signally displayed!—in saving from the fire a burning brand, and following up from time to time with judgment's rod, the far-fled wanderer!—flying still, and still pursued! until overtaken, and in matchless love obliged to yield, and reluctantly to retrace step by step destruction's mazy track,—and to stop at many a place; and, I hope in sincere repentance, made to dwell on scenes of mispent time and sinful deeds innumerable, “gone beforehand” (I humbly pray) to judgment;—not to “follow after,” or where would be now my hope at this late hour, if forsaken by that gracious Lord;—who in so great compassion, wrought the miracle, and in the greatness of his love and strength, has led my straying feet beside the still waters, and made me to lie down in the green pastures of life:—who brought me amongst the assemblies of his people, with whom I now feel precious unity of spirit in the bond of sweet consoling peace:—and though far separated from them, I am at this day, I trust, “sitting and clothed and in my right mind,” under a sense of my own unworthiness, and of such great and unmerited mercy.

When I began this letter, I had not the most distant thought of saying what I have done; but on looking it over, I believe they are words of truth and soberness, and I do not feel at liberty to alter them. Truly my mind is at this moment humbled as in the dust, in taking a retrospective view of the things that have been, and of our present peculiar situation. I think I never knew a time, when watchfulness and prayer felt so needful, in order not only “to strengthen,” but even to retain “the things that remain, that are ready to die.” It is like contending for every inch of ground in a well contested field, and being unable at night to discover whether the morning' s position has been maintained; so that we stand in need of the prayers of our brethren in old England, that we may be preserved watchful, humble and faithful, amidst the various snares and temptations by which we are surrounded. Believe me your truly affectionate friend,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To Balby Monthly Meeting.

First Month, 1821.

Dear Friends, I now enclose the answers to the usual Queries from our little company, and at the same time acknowledge the receipt of your certificate on behalf of S. K.

I trust that none of my dearly beloved Friends will attribute the brevity of this letter to any thing short of the true cause;—neither absence, nor distance, have in any degree lessened my love or diminished my regard for you. “Can the children of the bride chamber fast, while the bridegroom is with them? As long as they have the bridegroom with them they cannot fast. But the days will come, when the bridegroom shall be taken away from them, and then shall they fast in those days.” To you who have experimentally witnessed the truth of this saying of the Saviour of men, it is unnecessary to say more, than that these days are my days;—the days are indeed come, when strippedness and weakness are all that I seem to possess. Should there be any of my dear brethren and sisters alike circumstanced, it is with me to say, for the encouragement of such, (although destitute myself of any claim, and totally unworthy of partaking thereof,) that if this humiliating, though purifying dispensation be patiently abode under, the result will be unspeakably glorious. Mourning will be turned into joy; the painful and perhaps protracted fast, will become a precious and delightful feast,—even “a feast of fat things, of wine on the lees well refined:”—“do you know what I have done to you,” will be sensibly understood; and a language will be excited by gratitude and love, similar in kind to that of Simon Peter, when the dear Master silenced his objections by explaining the terms of apostleship, “Lord, not my feet only, but also my hands and my head.”

The tree of the field sustains no injury by the wintry season's rest, on the contrary, it is invigorated, if sap remains in the root: so the foregoing dispensation, if the precious life remains, however low and hidden it may be, tends only to strengthen and establish the humble Christian more firmly in the heavenly vine; and when the spring of life and love is permitted to return, buds and blossoms will again appear, and new fruit will be brought forth by these chosen ones, which will lastingly remain, to the praise and glory of the great and good husbandman, and their own eternal peace.

Let me remind my dear Friends of every age and class, that another year has passed swiftly over our heads; this intimation is accompanied by an earnest desire, that as days are multiplied and years increase, an increase of heavenly treasure may be ours, through an increasing knowledge of the only true God, and his Son Jesus Christ.

I remain your affectionate friend,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To John Hipslby.

Second Month 7th, 1821.

My dear Friend,

The prospect of approaching interaction once more with our beloved friends in England, through the medium of the shipping, administered comfort to my mind, as I was about to take up my pen to address you, and brings to my recollection, that this letter will probably reach you about the time of our Quarterly Meeting held at Leeds. This circumstance awakens a feeling, which humbles my heart, and afresh revives in my view days that will never return, and precious seasons, in which I was permitted to assemble with my dear brethren and sisters, and even to partake of the same food, though unworthy to gather up the crumbs that fell from the table. But from scenes like these I am now set apart, and can no longer behold the venerable towers of Zion, nor mark her bulwarks, nor consider her palaces,—except from the reports of others. The accounts that have reached us in the course of the summer, have excited painful sensations; lest any thing should tend to “divide in Jacob or scatter in Israel,” and cause a shyness amongst those who have been valiants in support of the law and the testimony,—or embitter the latter moments of any, who have laboured through a long life with uprightness and integrity of heart, for the welfare of Zion and the enlargement of her borders. I cannot contemplate these things, and divest myself of fear, lest a root of bitterness should spring up, and many be defiled. “Watch, stand fast in the faith, be men, be strong;”—is the language that presents itself on the present occasion; and if not applicable to others, I am well satisfied it is to myself. For the older I grow, the more needful I find the watch: there is no other safe dwelling place;—there is no cessation of arms; the warfare is continual, and must be continually maintained, or there is no standing fast in the faith. But to such as endeavour, through watchfulness and prayer, to quit themselves like men, strength will be administered in due time, not only to stand fast in the faith, but to become strong; yes, they will be “strong in the Lord and in the power of His might.” So that I very much desire, that the minds of all may be clothed with the invincible armour, wherewith they will be “able to stand in the evil day, and having done all to stand.”

The winter with us is considered a mild one. I do not know that we have at any time had more than twenty-five degrees of Reaumur's scale, (24° below zero, of Faht.;) but there have been frequent changes, and I think we have all suffered more from the cold than heretofore, owing partly, we suppose, to the high winds which have prevailed with little intermission all the season. The roof of our house has been much damaged, and at this time at least thirty square yards of it are uncovered; and we are told it cannot be repaired until warm weather comes again, as being made of sheet iron, the workmen cannot well handle it during the frost.

—————

To S. Smith.

Third Month 12th, 1821.

Having now dwelt among these dear people nearly three years, I think I can say with truth, that my love for them has not diminished, but on the contrary greatly increased, particularly for those who are of least account among men: their simplicity and sufferings, which I often witness, render them dearer than ever to my heart; though I have often to turn aside, and lament in heaviness and mourning. My heavenly Father has been pleased of late, in retirement, to clothe me more and more with ability to pray, not only on account of the many evils that are in the world, but for His little ones wherever scattered; and, forever blessed be His great and adorable name, to pray for one who seems to need help more than they all—even for myself; whose backslidings cannot be numbered for multitude, and whose sins and transgressions are more than the hairs of my head, twice told;—whose day's work is drawing fast towards a close,—yes, the shadows of the evening are beginning to appear. Can it be any thing but Almighty love, that thus awakens and makes sensible a poor frail mortal? “As an eagle stirs up her nest, flutters over her young, spreads abroad her wings, takes them and bears them on her wings,”—thus preparing them for flight; so does a compassionate and ever merciful Lord God, nourish, cherish, and strengthen in the tenderest manner, his unworthy and often ungrateful children. How often would He gather them;—but oh! they will not. How often in love unutterable does He strive to save, by convincing their understandings, in the most indubitable manner, that “there is a reward for the righteous, and a God that judges in the earth,” and, unwilling “that any should perish, but that all should repent, return, and live,” how often does He alarm and shake the false rest of those, who are dwelling carelessly and at ease, and thus warns them of the uncertainty of their continuance here. By His judgments, all in mercy and in truth, how often does He fill our hearts with sorrow, which works repentance never to be repented of, to reduce and bring us into humility; that He may draw us nearer and nearer into acquaintance with Him, in whom humility and meekness are personified;—who said “no man comes unto me, except the Father, which has sent me, draw Him;—no man comes to the Father, but by me;—him that comes to me, I will in no wise cast out.”

Oh! that there was a willingness wrought in us to bear the turnings and overturnings of our heavenly Father's hand:—what blessedness would accompany that simple child-like state! The dear Master would have many things to say unto us, but we cannot bear them now,—we are unprepared to receive the sayings of the heavenly guest. Then what abundant cause there is for the tribulated weary soul, to come unto the meek and lowly Jesus; and in humble resignation, to receive His yoke, and learn of Him, whose teaching is ever sublime and excellent;—peaceful and easy is His yoke,—light the burden,—sweet the rest. He can teach us to pray “in faith, even unto Him, who sees in secret,” and who will condescend to hear from heaven, His dwelling place, and to accept the broken, humble, contrite breathings of the soul.

I perceive that much of what I have written, applies to myself, which is often the case with what I write to others; my friends will, therefore, have the better opportunity of knowing and feeling the true state and condition of a poor shattered vessel, that has partaken of a tolerable share of buffeting (great part of which might have been avoided) through the voyage of life; and is now drifting with a fleet of many others, that are endeavouring to reach the same port, but into which it is impossible to enter without a pilot. Some knowing the danger of delay, and the difficulty of obtaining a pilot, unless timely and earnestly sought after, prudently hearken to counsel, and provide at setting out. Such steer along safely, with wisdom at the helm; but too many neglect this, till near the end of the voyage, when, as they begin to discover their great risk, by certain indications of danger which cannot be mistaken, they are continually making signals to other vessels, by way of warning them. To some who follow, the warning may be quite unnecessary, as such may be amply prepared, having a glorious prospect of an entrance being abundantly administered unto them.

—————

To Richard Cockin.

Tenth Month 3rd, 1821.

It is necessary to make great allowances for those in high stations in every country, but particularly in this, which is but just emerging from a state of barbarism. The difficulties by which a few virtuous individuals here are surrounded, make it a matter of astonishment to me, how such are enabled to persevere in a tolerable degree of well doing, amidst such a host of corruption and opposition. Scarcely a day passes over but we have cause to mourn and lament: but although there is much to grieve for, there is also a great deal to love and pity.

There are a number of foreigners here, and not least my own countrymen, who have done a great deal of harm, by flattering some truly worthy characters; and from self-interested motives, making them think more highly of their religious attainments, than otherwise would have been the case. This helps to keep such wrapped up in false garments, and renders the language of simple and undisguised truth more harsh and impalatable, when they do meet with it. Some time ago, a person of consequence and his secretary, visited the land we are cultivating on this side of the city. The crops were at the time in a very luxuriant state, with which they were much pleased. They wished to ascertain what the people about thought of the improvements, and asked several of them what they thought of it. These all expressed their approbation; at last, one was asked, who said, 'if the Lord had not given the man wisdom to do it, it would have been a morass still.' With this answer they seemed much pleased. The secretary said, 'our people have always faith, they ascribe every thing to God.' I said, 'I often hear them mention His name.' 'Always,' said he. 'But, I said, I am sorry to hear them call the great name to witness what they say in the markets, and in their trade.' It was easy to perceive he did not like my remark. Almost invariably the people here, in asserting the price of an article, which is often a great falsehood, call upon the Almighty as a witness:—when rather than lose a customer, they will come down to one-half the price they first asked. Now, if I had assented to the observation of the secretary, and called them' a good people,' (which is a common mode of expression here,) he would have been delighted. In short, they are so used to adulation and flattery, that they look for it every where, and from every person; which makes the way more difficult for those who are not satisfied to feed them in this manner.

I had a conference with the Emperor a short time since, and was never so much satisfied with any previous interview. He has passed through much conflict of mind within the last twelve months; the state of political affairs and many other trying circumstances combined, have served to reduce him both in body and mind. A knowledge of his peculiar situation renders him in my estimation, an object of commiseration and sympathy. Few, I am persuaded, are really aware of the difficulties by which he is encompassed, or of what he has to contend with; and when I consider the education he has had and training up altogether, I am more than ever surprised that he should have any relish for serious things. He had been absent about ten months at the Congress; and on my telling him, he had been a long time away from his large family, he said, 'I have had a great deal to do. It is a very difficult thing to act for a nation, but I hope I have acted under God; and the measures I have taken I hope are approved by Him. I am encouraged to believe so, because not a drop of blood has been spilled. When the nations were in great distress and suffering during the late calamitous war, they then prayed to God: but they are like the Jews of old, they have now forgotten Him. There are societies of men in different places, who are disseminating bad principles under the cloak of bringing in Christianity: they are in many parts of Europe,—they are every where.' I told him I had often thought of him, and that a petition had been raised in my heart on his account. 'Yes;' he said, 'and I have often thought of you; there has not been one day, not one day, but I have thought of you and of Messrs. Allen and Grellet, and always felt myself united to you three in spirit.'

Previously to this conversation, we sat down in silence before the Lord; and in the course of our sitting, my mouth was opened to declare unto him the goodness of God, and His great mercy, variously displayed to the children of men; and to speak of the precious promises, which the humble heart only can sensibly partake of. After which, we continued our sitting until I had cleared my mind a second time; in this I had to recite the invitation of the dear Master;—“Come unto me, all you that labour and are heavy laden,” etc. After having sat some time in silence, feeling myself at liberty, I told him my mind was relieved; when he gave me his hand, and attempted to describe his feelings, but was unable to utter any thing, except 'I have felt it,' laying his hand on his heart: I never saw him so brought down before. He stayed with us, I think, nearly three hours, and then left us in an affectionate manner, saying, 'I must leave you. I hope this is not the last time that I shall come: remember me in your prayers.' I attended him to his carriage, and as it drove off, he said, 'God bless you.' Our large family Bible lay in one of the rooms; on seeing it he opened it, and readily turned to the 119th Psalm, which he said he had read that morning. He had a copy of the Scriptures in the carriage, which he always carries with him. My mind was so covered with sadness during the remainder of the day, and at intervals long afterwards, that my dear wife said, she thought I must have said too little or too much to the Emperor. I told her, no;—I felt satisfied as to that: but I could not help lamenting, that such a man should be in such a situation.

Chapter VIII.

Address to Balby Monthly Meeting in 1822 and in 1823—Visit from the Emperor, etc.—Great Flood at Petersburg.

To Balby Monthly Meeting.

First Month 20th, 1822.

Dear Friends,

Being once more permitted to send you the answers to the queries from our little company in this land, my mind is renewedly and affectionately turned towards my dear brethren and sisters, whom I have long and tenderly loved; for whose welfare every way, an unabated solicitude remains, and I trust will ever have a dwelling-place in my heart.

Great indeed is the weakness, and painfully discouraging the feelings I am under, on the present occasion. “What could have been done more to my vineyard,” than has been done unto it, is the language that presents itself to my mind. In the breast of every individual capable of reflection, I believe the acknowledgment will be found—'Nothing, Lord.' None can say, knowledge has been lacking; for “the grace of God which brings salvation has appeared unto all, teaching” all: “precept upon precept, line upon line,” have been abundantly administered. How unavailing and ineffectual will be the feeble efforts of one, who feels himself less than the least of all the flock and family, to stir up the pure mind in any, to a remembrance of things that are excellent—things that accompany life and salvation; when so many dignified servants have hitherto pleaded the blessed Master's righteous cause in vain. How many of the Lord's deeply baptized, faithful messengers have been sent from time to time, to “cry aloud and spare not,”—clothed with indisputable authority to preach, rebuke, exhort;—and in that love which causes joy in the presence of the holy angels, beseeching us to be “reconciled unto God.” What could have been done more, that has not been done? We ourselves must testify against ourselves, to the truth of this.

Dearly beloved Friends, consider what I say; and the Lord give you understanding hearts, rightly to estimate the greatness of His love and mercy. “May the Lord direct your hearts into the love of God, and into the patient waiting for Christ,”—strengthen your faith in Him, and enable you to obey His voice; lest His glory should depart from Israel, and nothing be left but a name.

Be pleased, O Lord! to remember them that sigh. Be with your little ones, wherever scattered; who for Zion's sake cannot hold their peace, and for Jerusalem's sake cannot rest; “until the righteousness thereof go forth as brightness, and the salvation thereof as a lamp that burneth.” Strengthen them to cry day and night unto you: sustain, support, and comfort them. Bless them, and continue with them to the end; and crown them with everlasting glory.

So prays your affectionate Friend and brother,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To Elizabeth Robson.⁶

Tenth Month 27th, 1822.

My Dearest Eliza, Notwithstanding I have hitherto been silent, the affecting events which have taken place since we last saw each other, have not been suffered to transpire unregarded; on the contrary, they have only served to heighten that love and affection, which have long dwelt in my heart towards you, and your dear brothers and sisters. Believe me, my dear niece, that through all, you have had my nearest sympathy; and that I have participated most feelingly and sincerely in all the painful afflictions, which “the Father of mercies and God of all comfort,” has in His unsearchable wisdom been pleased to dispense unto you; although I have been dumb as to the expression of it by letter.

Often has a secret petition been raised in my heart for your protection and preservation, to Him, whose Almighty power can sustain our minds through every conflict;—who will not break the bruised reed, nor suffer it to be broken. When contemplating your situation, I am often comforted by a knowledge of the many near and dear relations and friends who surround you, who are affectionately careful and solicitous for your welfare every way; but my greatest consolation arises, from a firm belief, that you are indeed the peculiar objects of Divine regard. Ah! my very dear Eliza, what a blessed privilege to be under the superintending care and oversight of Him, who slumbers not: such, though cast down, are not forsaken in the day of trouble;—resignation's healing balm, which soothes the keen anguish of an afflicted mind, in purest love is given:—not a tear, not a sigh, escapes His ever-watchful eye, in those who strive to bow in meek submission to His holy righteous will. How do I long that I could find words to convey the sweet consolation which pervades my mind, when turned towards you: it cannot be expressed. “Behold the tabernacle of God is with men,”—is the language that arises in my mind, while dwelling under the precious influence of this feeling; and I humbly pray that it may be richly verified, to your inexpressible comfort and delight, and to the admiration, gratitude and praise, not only of yourself, but of all your dear connexions and friends. It is the broken, contrite spirit that the Lord regards;—it is the heart that wears the costly robe of sweet humility, in which the lowly Jesus makes His blessed abode. O the riches of His grace! it is peace, joy and love;—that precious peace, which the world with all its perishing enjoyments, however splendid and specious in appearance, cannot give; and, blessed be the name of the Lord the only Giver, neither can it take one particle away:—that joy, in which the ransomed and redeemed only can rejoice,” unspeakable and full of glory—that love, which enlarges the heart, and casts out all fear,—even the love of God, through Jesus Christ our Lord, to the children of men. “He will dwell with them, and they shall be His people, and God himself shall be with them, and be their God. And God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes; and there shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying, neither shall there be any more pain: for the former things are passed away.”

—————

To a Friend Under Affliction.

Eleventh Month 22nd, 1822.

I have been for many months desirous of writing to you; and be assured that my silence has not arisen from any diminution of love or regard. On the contrary, the fight of affliction you have had to pass through, since we last exchanged letters, has rendered you more than ever the companion of my thoughts, with increased affectionate solicitude; and yet it is only of late, that I have come to the determination of addressing you.

Now, my dear friend, I hope I shall not awaken feelings of a painful nature, as from my own weakness and poverty I feel more than usually incapable of administering the smallest ray of comfort, or of lulling them again into quietness and repose. But, while it is not in my power to strengthen, I trust I shall be preserved from weakening or lessening, in any degree, your confidence in Him; who has been pleased to strip you of, I believe, your greatest earthly treasure. How mysterious to our poor finite comprehension, are the ways of Infinite wisdom, to prepare and purify us for an inheritance, incorruptible and undefiled, and which will never fade away! How difficult it is for us, in the hour of dismay and extremity, to distinguish, that the arm of everlasting mercy is still underneath for our support: but as humble resignation and submission to that Holy Will which cannot err, are patiently sought after, the poor tossed mind becomes mercifully strengthened to look unto Him, who gave, and who has been pleased to take away;—and to say in the depth of humility, Amen,—Blessed be the name of the Lord! This, I trust, has been your sensible experience, my very dear friend, long before this time; and that patient fortitude has conspicuously shone forth to your sympathizing relations and friends: that they who have been eye-witnesses, may also have been partakers with you of that tranquil and peaceful resignation of mind, which sheds a lustre, consoling, comforting, and animating to all within its sphere. It is this that designates the true Christian,—rising with increased brightness through the gloom of affliction,—lowly and weak in self-estimation, and poor indeed,—disrobed of self and what self most delighted in;—but ah! how rich in heavenly garb, attired and decorated with the costly gem of sweet humility, which has been won by keenest suffering, and which suffering alone can purchase!

These last seven weeks I have suffered from rheumatism in my right arm, which has deprived me of much sleep: while it takes from my rest, it allows a larger portion of time for reflection, and I hope will teach me to number my days; and if happily I am found applying my heart unto wisdom, it will be a blessing indeed; that so the day's work may be finished, when the night draws nigh. For truly I am often filled with fear on this account, finding yet much to do, and many things alive, which ought to have been long ago slain. And O! the weakness and poverty that I daily feel! and the absence of that ability, which can alone qualify for every good thought, word and work! If under feelings of this kind long dispensed, there be no cause for discouragement, then may I hope yet to praise Him, who was the health of David's countenance and his God.

—————

To Friends of Balby Monthly Meeting.

First Month 23rd, 1823.

Dear Friends,

I herewith enclose our answers to the queries which are usually considered at the Spring Quarterly Meeting, and at the same time am desired to acknowledge the receipt of your certificate on behalf of _______.

On looking towards my dear brethren and sisters, I am thankful in feeling a degree of that love, which alters not by separation, neither is subject to change amidst the vicissitudes of time; in which I once more salute you, with desires for your present and eternal well-being. Under a humbling sense produced by the recollection of those precious seasons, when I have been permitted to assemble with you, previously to the Spring Quarterly Meeting in each year, I am induced to bring to your remembrance the days that are over and past. Nearly five years have glided away, since I saw the well-gathered assembly on such an occasion; at that time there were many vacant seats, which had been occupied by faithful labourers in the Lord's vineyard both in word and doctrine, and by those who were in their day and generation fathers and mothers in our Israel. During this period, others also of blessed memory have been called away, who “rest from their labours, and their works do follow them.” In thus calling to mind a succession of Friends whom I knew and loved, who have sooner or later finished their earthly course, fought the good fight, and kept the faith, for whom a crown of righteousness is prepared; I feel an engagement of mind, that those who are left a little longer in this scene of conflict, may be thereby encouraged and strengthened to persevere in following Him, in whom they have believed; that they also, at the end of their race, may obtain the immortal prize. And Oh! my beloved Friends, upon whom the weight of the precious cause of truth and righteousness must soon devolve, when the few remaining pillars of the present day are gathered to their everlasting rest, how earnestly do I desire that you may be aroused to preparation, by a deep sense of the important station that awaits you. Let me entreat you seriously to consider, how far the time and talents, so richly and so mercifully bestowed, are employed and devoted to the service of the Most High God; and whether the many vacant places would have remained unfilled up to the present day, if obedience had kept up with knowledge, which has been from time to time vouchsafed. To the just witness in every heart I appeal, and in tender love I refer you.

And dear brethren and sisters, I wish to press it not only upon heads of families, but upon all who are capable of reflection, to lay these things to heart; for it is a glorious cause in which all are or ought to be concerned, inasmuch as all are called to glory and virtue. Let these things sink deep in your minds,—let them have a place equal to their vast importance. How great is the responsibility, how awful the consideration, that by the influence of your example in faithfulness and upright walking, and by your religious care and oversight, the precious young people may be induced to choose the “Lord for their portion, and the God of Jacob for the lot of their inheritance.” Of ourselves we can do nothing;—but dear Friends, help is laid upon one that is mighty to save and to deliver:—unto Him all power in heaven and on earth is given; even our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ,—the blessed medium of access to God! He has graciously declared,—“Him that comes unto me, I will in no wise cast out.” All things are possible with Him: counsel is His, and sound wisdom:—He is understanding:—He is strength. What then remains, but for us, in humble prostration of soul, to draw nigh unto Him? By yielding simple obedience to His Divine requisitions, this work of eternal consequence begins. It is not limited to a chosen few; it is extended unto all:—“What I say unto you, I say unto all, Watch.” The watch, with constancy maintained, will lead to prayer. Praying always with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto, will lead the soul to God; to whom all power belongs. “Blessed will be those servants who arc found so doing.” Great will be their peace while here; glorious their reward hereafter. They will be numbered with those, that shall shine as the brightness of the firmament, and amongst them, who, turning “many to righteousness,” shall shine as the stars forever and ever.

I am your affectionate friend and brother,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster.

Eighth Month 6th, 1823.

Day after day passes away, leaving accumulated cause to regret how much I am indebted to you, my dear and long loved friend; without being able to give you an assurance of my unabated love, or to acknowledge the receipt of many affectionate tokens of remembrance, which have from time to time been conveyed in your acceptable and welcome letters; all of which, though unreplied to, have been regularly received with gratitude and renewed feeling of affection. I have long meditated writing to you, but have always been prevented; now, however, I have once more taken up the pen, and must endeavour, in some degree, to account for such apparent neglect.

Laying aside all other causes, which time and paper will not permit my bringing forward, I must inform you that sickness has hung about our dwelling since the middle of last winter. The severity of the weather laid us all by for a time; but as spring opened, all the invalids came about again, with the exception of my dear wife and my Joshua, who lingered on until the fine weather fairly opened, and seemed likely to recover; but great heat coming suddenly upon us, their already weakened frames could not support it. Every means was tried which a skilful physician could devise, without any material benefit being visible: returning to England seemed the only alternative he could point out. I believe nothing could have induced my wife to leave us, but the hope of the change being beneficial to her son; however, she at length came to the resolution to make the attempt, and accompanied by my daughters, they sailed for London, on the 18th of last month. I was three days on board the ship with them, previously to their sailing, but was obliged to return home the evening before they got to sea: although this was a disappointment, I was very glad I had been with them, as the first night they slept on board, there was the most dreadful storm of thunder and lightning I ever witnessed. I felt thankful I was with them, for I think they would have been quite terrified, if they had not had somebody to cheer them a little. I hope by this time they are in sight of the 'white cliffs,' and I shall rejoice to hear of their safe arrival.

I am grieved to find the character of our Emperor does not stand so high with many in England as it did; and fully believe he has been prompted by evil-disposed persons to do things that he does not approve of, and would not have done, but at their instigation. We know of no difference here, in respect to the government of the internal affairs of this country. I think his judgment has been biased by some of the other crowned heads, with whom he has of late associated: at the same time there is reason to believe, he has seen through some of their devices. I only wonder how he bears up, amidst the many difficulties that surround him; and the constant exercise of moderation, patience, and forbearance, he is in the daily practice of, is to me extraordinary. The manner in which he is imposed upon by many who enjoy his confidence, would scarcely be believed in its full extent. With my work, and as regards myself, I find no lack of assistance, when any thing that requires his aid is brought to his knowledge. I have frequently seen him passing on the road, since he returned from Verona. A few weeks ago, I was looking at some oats pretty soon in the morning, in the neighbourhood of a pavilion to which he was going with the Dowager Empress to breakfast; and they passed close by me in a low carriage with a pair of horses. He looked very well; and I observed he pointed me out to his mother. I am at present much occupied in the neighbourhood where he mostly resides in summer, about seventeen miles from Petersburg; and ten days ago, while laying out some ground in a wood, which is preparing for cultivation, a carriage stopped near the part where I was. My William was near, and called to me that it was the Emperor. On seeing him alight and spring over the ditch towards the place, I went to meet him. He gave me his hand, and immediately entered into conversation with his usual freedom. One of his Generals followed him; but it appeared to make no difference in his manner. He remained for some time, made many inquiries about my family; and having no doubt remarked our hay crops, he said,—'You will have more hay than all the people in the neighbourhood.' I mentioned the indisposition of my family, and that my wife was gone to England: he seemed a little surprised, and directly asked if she would return. I said she intended it. He appeared greatly interested in my report of the abundant crops upon the ground. Last year there was quite a dearth of fodder in this neighbourhood; a large number of cattle were lost for lack of food. After explaining to him what were my plans relative to the parcel of land on which we were standing, he shook me by the hand, and said, 'I will let you do what you like.' I understand that the next day he made some inquiry as to the cause of the sickness among us, and having learnt that it was occasioned by the coldness of the house in which we live, he gave orders that it should be altered immediately. On the third day after the interview, an architect arrived, to ascertain what was needed; and we are now well stocked with bricklayers, carpenters, and the like.

I believe I have long been partaker of the tender sympathy of my friends in England; but I think I never knew a time when I stood more in need of it, than the present. Exclusive of domestic enjoyments, I have long ceased to have any delights, the loss of which would give me an hour's pain or thought: in the bosom of my family was to be found all that could afford me gratification or comfort. With them about me, I had every thing I could wish for or desire, in this state of mutability. The compact is, however, unexpectedly and suddenly dissolved, and one-half diminished as in a moment. I have, however, one consolation, which is, that they will not feel it as I do: they, if permitted to reach their native land in safety,—strengthened, I humbly hope, through heavenly goodness and mercy, by the sea air, and their health in some degree restored, will be cheered and comforted by the countenances of many dear relations and friends.

I confess my prospects here wear a very different aspect; but I trust I have in some degree learned in all states to be content. There is, my dear friend, and without any inclination to boast,—I believe I may say, I know there is,—a soul-solacing presence to be felt in a retired and lonely mansion, as well as in a place where large assemblies crowd; which, unbounded and unlimited by time and space, extends to every clime, to every place, to every heart:—and O! says my soul in humble prayer, may it be felt by us all!—that all our hearts may be so cleansed, so prepared and purified from every defilement, as to be in constant readiness to receive the heavenly guest. That the whole human race may be brought to the same blessed experience, is the earnest desire of your tribulated friend at this moment of time; that all may have life, that all may be washed, that all may be sanctified, that all may be “justified, in the name of the Lord Jesus, and by the Spirit of our God.”

I must now come to a conclusion, after saying, that although my dwelling is in low places, I am frequently favoured to feel humble resignation of mind; at the same time believing, that the hand of the Lord is in the present dispensation, I can freely commit my all to His divine disposal, who I am persuaded will not break the bruised reed.

To your dear wife and family I beg to be remembered in love unfeigned, and assuring you that you are included in the same. I remain your affectionate friend,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield.

Second Month 16th, 1824.

Your last letter came duly to hand, and was welcome indeed: my beloved invalids, it is true, had furnished me with repeated accounts of their improving health; yet to receive a confirmation from an affectionate eye-witness of the same, demands every acknowledgment of which I am capable, for your kindness in thus adding to our comfort and consolation. You have no doubt heard before this time, that a variety of circumstances combine to prevent my projected visit to England, which I most sincerely regret: although it must have been short, and professedly to accompany my dear family back to this country, as I could but have had a short space of time to perform it in, and of course should have seen but few of the faces of my Friends, and comparatively for a moment only; yet this would have been very precious to me. Our present solitary situation may be better imagined than described; I need not advert to it, except to acknowledge with gratitude and thankfulness, the preservation and support we have witnessed. I hope most sincerely, that the journey of my dear wife and children to England, will be productive of much future comfort; not only through the restoration of the health of the invalids, but by causing a renewal of affectionate regard and interaction with our friends; which, I trust, will be strengthened and increased, by a more frequent interchange of letters, which will have a tendency to keep alive feelings of love and sympathy for each other. I remember very well, it was the advice of our dearly beloved friend, Stephen Grellet, when in this country, that we should make a great point of keeping up a correspondence with our Friends in England.

I am quite aware, my dear friend, that you must sensibly feel the loss, when your beloved niece is removed from under your roof; but you need not fear, you will be cared for: you have cared for many; her place will be filled, I believe, to your comfort and admiration. I sometimes think that heavenly goodness and loving-kindness are plainly evinced in these things, and all in love and mercy to us poor creatures, gradually and progressively to separate us, and more perfectly to wean us, from every sensible delight, even from things which may at one time have been graciously dispensed, and whereon our affections may have been properly and lawfully fixed. In infinite wisdom they are withdrawn, for our farther refinement and purification, that our minds may become unfettered and loosened more and more from the things of time and sense; that nothing may hinder or stand in the way of the complete removal of all that can be shaken, that those things only which cannot be shaken may remain, which are founded on the immutable Rock; and that the great and good God may be all in all. So that we may not only have our lamps trimmed and lights burning, but, like the wise virgins, we may be ready and looking for the coming of the heavenly Bridegroom; at the same time prepared to wait, should the time be prolonged, having a supply of “oil in our vessels with our lamps.”

[In the following letter he speaks of the safe return of his wife and party from England.]

To John Hipsley, Hull.

Fifth Month 31st, 1824.

I have now the pleasure of informing you, that we were much surprised by the arrival of the Fanny, after a passage of sixteen days, as we had had a succession of easterly gales. She was quite unlooked for on our part. A little before bedtime, on Fourth day, we were roused by the sound of wheels; but had not the most distant idea who our guests could be. There were only a few moments to think about it, before the whole party were in the house; and our surprise and joy may be more readily conceived than described.

As I have once more got them safe at home, I may now tell you somewhat of the trial of faith, patience, and feeling, under a lengthened-out sickness, which I have had to pass through for several months. It is near four months ago that I became seriously ill, and at one time there seemed little probability of my struggling through, until my wife could reach her home; but as I could not bear the thought of making her uneasy while in England, and without a possibility of getting to me or affording any relief, I took great pains to keep it from her, either in letters from us, or from any other person that I knew was writing. At times, when at the worst, I blamed myself for having withheld the information, as it seemed almost presumptuous to suppose I should recover; but at seasons I had hope: and I trust I can in some degree adopt the language of the Psalmist, and say,—“The Lord is my strength and my shield; my heart trusted in Him, and I am helped:” and great cause I have to ascribe all to his goodness and mercy, and to put my trust and confidence in Him.

I had intended visiting England this spring, attending the Yearly Meeting, and bringing home my family in the summer; but the Lord prevented me, and not man, as I had every permission that man could give me. This reconciles all, and raises consolation in my mind, and a hope that I am still an object of his divine compassion, although under a humiliating sense of my unworthiness.

—————

To David Mallinson, Sheffield.

Tenth Month 25th, 1824, O. S.

According to expectation our dear friend Thomas Shillitoe arrived about seven weeks ago, and seems very comfortable amongst us. All who have seen him are much pleased with him; and his having brought no books with him has prevented much trouble, and removed all suspicion far away. He is remarkably furnished with a sense of things in this place, and acts with the greatest prudence and caution. The more we know him, the more we love him; his conduct and conversation are altogether consistent with his profession, without which he would make little impression on the minds of the people, whose views and expectations are altogether outward; and they take more notice of external appearances perhaps, than the people in England or in other nations further advanced in civilization and religious sensibility.

—————

[The awful visitation upon the City of Petersburg, by the great inundation in the Eleventh Month, 1824, is thus described:—]

To John Hipsley, Hull.

Eleventh Month 11th,1824, O. S. As it is probable that accounts of an alarming nature, relative to the situation of this neighbourhood will shortly reach England, and knowing from experience the lively interest which yourself and family at all times take in our welfare, I thought I would prevent your being disturbed with unnecessary fears, occasioned by imperfect statements, as to our personal safety.

On the 7th inst., the inhabitants of Petersburg experienced the most awful visitation that has ever occurred within the memory of the oldest person living, by a deluge, which threatened for several hours the destruction of the city and suburbs. A dreadful tempest came on during the night of the 6th from the south-west, and continued to rage with unabated fury nearly the whole of the next day. Two days previously, an unusual roaring of the sea had been noticed about the head of the Gulf of Finland, and at Cronstadt. On the morning of the 7th, the sea began to rise, and shortly afterwards to push its waves into the heart of the city. The people at first supposed it would only be one of the floods which have frequently occurred, and manifested no particular alarm; but before noon, they became convinced of the necessity of flying for their lives. The road we live on exhibited a scene of terror and dismay not easy to describe: every one anxious to save himself and his cattle. As our situation is somewhat higher than the city itself, we had many applications for food for the cattle and shelter, which of course we were glad to comply with. Our neighbourhood was protected from sharing in the general calamity by the bank of the Ligofsky canal, which is raised above the regular surface of the country; but from the upper part of the house we could see over this bank, which discovered to us the city, standing as it were in the open sea.

The water continued to rise until three, p.m., when the wind shifted to the north-west, and although its violence continued, it prevented the water from rising any higher. At that time the water was twelve feet deep in the main street on Vasily's Island. Buildings consisting of only one story were of course filled; and the frightened occupants obliged to take refuge upon their roofs. In the afternoon, we made some attempt to go towards the city; but found it unsafe to try much further than the bank of the canal just mentioned. The land under our care, between this and the city, was nearly all under water, so that we could hear nothing that night of the distress which prevailed there.

By the morning of the 8th, the water had subsided so much, that it could only be seen about the low places; in the afternoon I went off intending to see how our friend Sarah Kilham had fared, but after passing the barrier, I was compelled to return, as all the bridges were carried away by the force of the water. The 9th (a First day) arrived, and brought only our dear friend Thomas Shillitoe to meeting; who, although he knew enough of the general suffering to prevent his speaking for a short interval on first coming into the room, yet knew almost nothing in comparison of what has since been unfolded. The part where dear Thomas lives, stands pretty high, but in those streets the water stood only eighteen inches below the lamps. For three hours, a general silence prevailed in the city; and from Thomas Shillitoe's windows, which command a view of four streets, nothing was to be seen but one poor struggling horse, and the police rowing about in boats to see where any assistance could be rendered.

Our land before hinted at, is covered over with timber, boats, dead horses, cows, barrels of fish, crosses from the grave yards, parts of coffins, and other articles, and I regret to add, with many human bodies, drowned by this disastrous flood; one is a female with a child under each arm, which she was endeavouring to save.

It is now Third day night: I have been both today and yesterday in the city, and have heard such accounts of accumulated suffering, as are impossible to be set forth. I fear the number of lives lost will amount to ten thousand, and the loss of cattle and property is estimated at 20,000,000 roubles, (£800,000 sterling.) Whole squadrons of cavalry horses were drowned in their stables, and many saved by being led up stairs. One Englishman, a horse dealer, has lost all his horses.

When the water began to rise above its usual height in floods, the Emperor went in person, and ordered the sentinels away from the different posts. When the palace became surrounded by water many feet deep, he appeared with the Empress on the balconies, encouraging the people to exertion, and offering rewards to those who would endeavour to save life, wherever he saw any particular danger: by this, many were saved, who would otherwise have been inevitably lost. A subscription has been begun today for the benefit of the sufferers, to which the Emperor has given 1,000,000 roubles (,£40,000 sterling;) and he has ordered the military governor to take care that the poor people are furnished with food. Yesterday, it was difficult to procure bread, as the bakers' ovens were mostly deluged by the water; today, there is a supply. All the sugars at the Custom-house are melted, and all goods that will damage with water are spoiled. The shops in many places were full up to the ceilings: oats which have been under water in the stores, are selling at two and three roubles (from 20 to 30 pence) the chetvert of five English bushels. The inhabitants and houses of three villages near the Gulph, are with their cattle, said to be entirely swept away. The Emperor has been today to several places, where the greatest suffering has occurred, to devise relief for the people.

However affecting this visitation may appear, I cannot but view it with a hope, that it may yet prove a blessing in disguise, to those that remain: and I very much desire that it may have its proper and lasting effect upon all our minds; that so all may repent, and turn unto Him, with whom is mercy and plenteous redemption; lest a worse and more terrible warning should follow. There is, I think, reason to fear that another woe will succeed that which has now passed over, I mean the occurrence of pestilential disorders, which the dampness of the houses may bring on; particularly, if intense frost should succeed, before they are in some degree dry and aired: last night it froze hard; at present there is less frost, but with the appearance of more snow.

Our friend Sarah Kilham, is likely to suffer less than we feared, although her furniture was floating in her parlour. Her day scholars were in the house when the water rose, so that she was obliged to lodge them as she could.

We scarcely know what to conclude about our friends at sea, as so much depends upon the situation of the different ships: we hear that some have been wrecked, and others have returned to Cronstadt. This island has been entirely under water.

In the midst of the general distress, we have been permitted to partake of peace and quietness, of which we seem altogether unworthy. I sometimes fear we are not making an adequate return for the numerous comforts and blessings we enjoy; and were it not to acknowledge with gratitude the loving-kindness and mercy which surrounded us, I should willingly omit saying any thing about ourselves: all belonging to us seem to shrink into nothingness, when we behold the surrounding scene of woo and misery.

Chapter IX.

Visits England, 1825—Returns to Russia—Death of the Emperor Alexander, and Occurrences Consequent Thereon—Address to Balby Monthly Meeting, 1826—Extensive Fires, etc.

In the early part of 1825, Daniel Wheeler visited England. He took the overland route, in company with Thomas Shillitoe, and landed at Harwich after a fatiguing journey of thirty-six days. His stay did not much exceed three months: during this time, he attended the Dublin Yearly Meeting, to which he had felt his mind drawn before leaving home; also the Yearly Meeting held in London.

The following extracts are from letters written on, and after, his return to Russia.

To John Hipsley, Hull.

Alster, off the Spurn, Sixth Month 23rd, 1825.

The pilot being about to leave us, I hasten to inform you that we shall shortly shape our course for the Naze of Norway. The vessel, I believe, will be very comfortable, when we get fairly out to sea, and the decks cleared up.

It would have been very pleasant to have assembled once more with my dear Friends on shore, if it had been permitted; as it is, I have great cause to be thankful, for having been allowed at seasons to partake, while on this side the Baltic, of the streams of that river, which makes glad the whole city and heritage of God. At the same time my heart is filled with gratitude, at the prospect of returning to my dear wife and family, with my health so much restored and renewed; which cannot fail to raise in all our minds, the tribute of thanksgiving and praise to the great and good Shepherd; unto whom not only every sheep, but the most helpless lamb, of the flock is known, wherever situated, or however hidden.

————

To One of His Family.

Alster, Seventh Month 13th, 1825. In sight of Hogland.

My Dear _______,

Within the last twenty-four hours we have only got about as many miles to windward; but we must learn in all states to be content. I little thought when I wrote from Elsineur, that another fortnight would elapse without my reaching home,—and several days may yet intervene. There is, however, abundant cause for humble gratitude and thankfulness, that we have been so far preserved from accident. One night, since we have been in the Gulf, we drove very near the rocks on the Finnish coast. I had been up till after twelve o'clock, which is my usual practice at sea, as midnight often decides the weather we are likely to have: the mate had had the first watch, and when he called the captain at twelve o'clock, he asked whether the ship should go about. The captain said, 'No; let her stand on.' I did not feel satisfied with this, particularly as the mate went to his berth, and the captain did not turn out: but I lay down in my cabin, and kept myself awake, as it was highly needful that somebody should be ready, if needed. Before one, a.m., a sailor discovered the rocks, and had the captain alarmed, who without waiting to put on his clothes, went on deck, and immediately the sailors were called out, and the ship's head laid the other way. Had it been much darker, we might have gone ashore, before the ship could have been got round. But our great and merciful Helper was nigh to deliver; to whom belongs all praise.

Seventh Month 21st.—After beating about two other days with a contrary wind, in the night of the 14th the wind altered, so that the vessel could lay on her proper course: the captain carried as much sail as she could bear, and at six in the morning we hove to, off the guard-ship; and as soon as they had boarded, we filled sail and stood in for the Mole of Cronstadt. I succeeded in getting a passport without delay, and proceeded in the afternoon steamer, and was favoured to find your dear mother and all the family in good health. I trust we rejoiced together in humble thankfulness for being permitted to meet once more.

Now, my dear child, I must bid you farewell. Unite with me in grateful thanksgiving to the Lord Most High, for all His gracious mercies to us, and in humble prayer that he will be pleased to keep us meek and lowly in His fear, watching continually; that so we may be favoured to discover and escape every temptation, and be preserved from the many evils that are in the world, and alive unto Him who lives forever, through Jesus Christ, the Saviour of men: whose blessed Spirit dwells in the contrite and humble heart.

—————

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster.

Moscow Road, Ninth Month 26th, 1825.

My late visit amongst my dear friends in England, very frequently furnishes us, when the family is collected together, with a pleasant theme for conversation; and when absent from them and alone, it is often with me the subject of contemplation. But while it serves to revive affectionate feelings for those I love, a sting of regret remains behind, at having enjoyed their company for so short an interval, and being again so widely separated from them, as has been my allotment for the last seven years. But, I trust, I have no disposition to murmur or repine;—on the contrary, I am often favoured to feel that resignation of mind, which, as it is abode in, has for its companion a feeling of sweet peace, of more value and more to be desired than the wealth of nations.

No part of the journey leaves so much solid satisfaction when brought to remembrance, as my visit to Dublin. This was not a matter of choice, but undertaken and performed in the cross to my own natural will and inclination: and, although I am unworthy to be trusted with a sling and a few small stones, yet was I permitted to see how my brethren fared, and to take their pledge,—a pledge of love, which I believe will be long treasured up in my heart, and cannot diminish; being impressed with a belief, that it sprung from an inexhaustible source, a fountain of eternal duration, constantly flowing through innumerable channels, but still full to the margin of mercy and truth. There are several dear Friends in that land, with whom I feel a precious unity; and whether they ever remember the stranger or not, he often thinks of them, with feelings which time and distance only serve to heighten.

From what I have said of Friends in Dublin, my dear friend must not suppose that those in England are forgotten, or that any thing like a transfer of affection has taken place on my part. Such is the transcendent quality of true love, that while it embraces new objects, it does not lessen for those, on whom it has long and deservedly been fixed. Be assured my attachment has not lessened for those whom I have long known and loved; on the contrary, it is strengthened by the renewal of interaction.

I am informed on good authority, that John Gossner, the reformed Roman Catholic minister, is now allowed to preach in any part of the Prussian dominions. He has lately had an opportunity of preaching before the Crown Prince of Prussia, and also before another great personage at that court, who was so much affected, as to faint in the course of John Gossner's discourse. The wife of the latter personage, it is said, has long been a serious character; so that one cannot help rejoicing in the hope, that the great and good work is going forward in the hearts of some, and perhaps in the hearts of many, where least expected or looked for by poor short-sighted man.

————

To Samuel Stanbfield.⁷

Fifth Verst, Moscow Road, Tenth Month 19th, 1825.

You will soon have been twelve months in England, and by this time canst form a judgment of the state of things in the meeting at Sheffield. I shall much rejoice to hear that there is a prospect of the younger branches coming forward to advocate the precious cause. The burden-bearers are thinly scattered in that large and once flourishing meeting; and some of those who yet remain on the watch-tower, cannot be expected to continue much longer, before they are called to receive the reward prepared for all, who have fought the good fight, and kept the faith. It so happened that I was not at a week-day meeting at Sheffield, when last in England: there seemed no deficiency on First days as to numbers; but, then, numbers do not always add to strength: on the contrary, large meetings are often painfully laborious, as it frequently happens that but a small remnant are rightly concerned in endeavouring to roll away the stone from the well's mouth; and there is reason to fear, on these occasions, that many return home without having been sensible that any of the assembly have been feeding upon that bread, which alone can nourish the immortal part. I think I have witnessed, in the course of my pilgrimage, that the most favoured meetings I have been permitted to share in, have been those held in the middle of the week, or on other days than First days.

At our little meeting here, seven or eight is the greatest number that now collects, only one or two individuals besides our own family, ever attending. We often sit as in low places; yet at times are permitted to feel that power, which can subdue all things unto itself, and enable us to draw near in the silence of all flesh to the “fountain,” which is “opened to the house of David and to the inhabitants of Jerusalem” to wash and to bathe in. What a favour it is, although far removed from the fostering care of the church, not to be deprived of the privilege of worshipping Him, whose watchful unslumbering eye beholds the feeble endeavours of all, who desire to seek his face in sincerity of heart; and who, in matchless and unmerited love, has provided the blessed means to help our infirmities, which, though unutterable, are understood even in sighs and groans.

[In the next letter, he gives an account of the death of the Emperor Alexander in the south of Russia, and of the occurrences at the capital consequent upon that lamented event.]

————

To John Hipsley, Hull.

Twelfth Month 13th, 1825.

When the intelligence of the death of our much lamented and justly beloved Emperor was made public in the city, consternation soon spread among all ranks of the people. At first, I thought it possible there might be some mistake, as the health of the Empress had been for some time declining, and had occasioned her journey to the south of Russia; but the military being called upon to swear allegiance to the new Emperor Constantine, removed every doubt.

I was favoured with peaceful quiet and resignation on this mournful occasion, and felt but one desire—that the death of Alexander might have been a fair one; and we have the most indubitable proof that it was unattended with any of those horrible circumstances, which, in some instances, have terminated the existence of the crowned heads of this country. I have often put up a feeble petition that the hand of violence might never be permitted to touch him; and although I cannot help deploring, with the many millions of Russia, the loss of such a man,—yet a secret joy triumphs over every selfish feeling, and raises in my heart a tribute of gratitude and praise to the great Preserver of men, who has been graciously pleased to remove him in so remarkable a manner, from this scene of conflict and trouble. We could scarcely have desired more than has been given: I believe it has been the lot of few monarchs to end their days, while in the meridian of power, in a retreat so quiet, and so distant from all the pageantry of a court: it may be Baid, that he died in the bosom of his family. It appears, for the first two or three days of his indisposition, that he considered it of no importance, and could not be prevailed upon to take any medicine,—he had a great aversion to medicine at all times. It is thought by some here, that if he had taken timely precaution of this kind, the fever, which is very prevalent in that part of the country, might have been kept off: it is probable, its effects might have been less violent, and its progress impeded in some degree; but we learn from those who are acquainted with that neighbourhood, that strangers seldom if ever escape an attack of it, and it is often fatal to them. The climate immediately round Taganrog, where the Emperor died, is considered very healthy; but at a very short distance from it, it is considered quite the reverse; and it seems that Alexander had been beyond the healthy boundary, and had taken cold on the south coast.

It is very consoling to find, that his mind was so peaceful, as appears, when he was persuaded to take what is called the sacrament: it is probable that delirium came on afterwards, but towards the last he was perfectly sensible. On the morning of his death, the sun broke through the clouds, and shone into his room; when he remarked, 'how beautiful the weather is'—and the manner in which he committed the Empress to the care of Prince Volchonsky, his faithful adjutant, although done without the assistance of words, plainly shows that he was collected, though deprived of speech.

From concurring circumstances of late date, my hope is greatly strengthened that he has exchanged an earthly crown for one immortal, that will never fade away. He had reigned about four months less than twenty-five years. The Russians say he was too mild, and too good for them.

I enclose some translations of letters relating to the illness and death of the Emperor. The two first are from the Empress Elizabeth. Some of the expressions in them are not just such as we should use, but we must make allowances, for education. They were written to the Empress Dowager. [See Appendix A.]

This event will naturally bring about many changes. I have endeavoured to look round as to myself and family, but all is at present enveloped as in a cloud. Every thing here has been conducted quietly. The army have all sworn allegiance to Constantine.

First Month 1st, 1826.—Before finishing my letter, another proof of the uncertainty of all human affairs is handed to us. I shall insert the copy of a letter I received the day after the foregoing was written.

St. Petersburg, December 14th, 1825.

Little did I think of giving you today such weighty news, as that of an accession to the throne of the Emperor Nicholas, who is proclaimed today; and we are going to take the accustomed oaths, as the Grand Duke Constantine has entirely renounced the crown. I have not read the manifesto; but those who have seen it say, that amongst other things, the Emperor tells the nation, that he will reign as his brother did; and that his reign will be only a continuation of his brother's. The Minister of the Interior, whom I saw this moment, says that the Emperor has verbally assured them of the same. Let God's will be done on earth, as it is in heaven. Wishing you well, I am

Most sincerely yours.'

This letter I received about two, p.m.:—before five o'clock, the scene was entirely changed, and rebellion most artfully contrived, had thrown off the mask. As the army about us had most willingly declared for Constantine, only ten days before, some hesitation in several regiments became visible. This moment seemed favourable for the wishes of some who were aiming at a general overthrow; and they artfully spread a report among the troops, that Constantine was only two hundred versts from hence, but was prevented from coming forward; and that the newly declared Emperor was only a usurper. This had the effect of drawing several large bodies of troops into the snare; and I believe many of these poor fellows considered they were only acting faithfully to the oath they had so recently taken: it was very evident they had no pre-concerted design against the government. However, an armed force collected in the neighbourhood of the Senate House, and were joined by a number not in military garb, and a mob of intoxicated rabble, who had been stirred up to act on the occasion. In vain did the new Emperor send to them, to endeavour to persuade them to peace and quietness. At last, the military governor, an old soldier and a popular character, went to harangue them; and might probably have prevailed, but the real plotters amongst them, fearing the soldiers would become reasonable, had the audacity to fire upon him. This poor Count Myloradovitch, who had been unhurt, it is said, in thirty-four engagements, was now mortally wounded. He rode off towards the Emperor, but soon fell upon his horse's neck: he was carried home in a sledge, and died in the night.

This circumstance led to a dreadful carnage. The Emperor was very unwilling to resort to force, and at first a volley of blank cartridges was fired; but this only causing the rebels to advance, a fire of grape shot was opened upon them with terrible effect, followed by a charge of cavalry. As most of the rebels who were able fled towards the river, the cannon were pointed in that direction; and the Academy of Arts on the other side of the river was struck with the shot. The carnage in the neighbourhood of the Senate House was dreadful, but all was cleared away before morning, except the blood upon the snow, which bore testimony to the great slaughter of the preceding day. We cannot ascertain the number of poor creatures who were thus hurried into another world; it is believed, however, that several hundreds perished. The city barriers were immediately closed, and no person allowed to leave the city, in order to secure all those implicated in this diabolical plot: the fort is full of prisoners.

My feelings on this night were such, as no one need or would envy, except perhaps some of the wounded who were groaning in agony, exposed to the frost. The night was long and dark enough; but we were favoured to pass through it, without the slightest molestation, in quietness, and, I trust, in confidence.

The next morning, we found the whole of our neighbourhood patrolled with soldiers. As it was reasonable to suppose we should not long remain without visitors at our house, I had a little prepared my dear family for this; and about one o'clock, p.m., a colonel with four other officers and seventy hussars entered our premises. These poor fellows had been summoned from a distance the day before, and were stationed on the roads near our house: they had been twenty-four hours in the frost, having passed the whole night in scouring the country to pick up the flying rebels. They were almost famished with hunger and cold. It was very well they came to us, as there was no other house in their whole range, that could have provided food for both men and horses. They behaved with great civility and thankfulness for their needs being supplied: they had only a confused idea of Friends, and inquired whether we came from England or Pennsylvania. There was only one line of conduct for us to pursue in this situation of affairs; as it was difficult for us to come at the truth, whether these men were confederates in the plot, or faithful adherents to the government. If the government had really been overthrown, we should not have fared any better for having entertained a loyalist party; and, on the other hand, if these men had been accomplices in the plot, we might have been censured by the government. In either case, we could do no less than relieve the great distress they were in: and we have every reason to believe, they were true to the government, as they talked amongst themselves very freely on the subject of the revolt in French, which they supposed none of my family understood. They had not been more than two hours with us, when the appearance of a Cossack riding in haste along the high road, caused their speedy departure. We had no further visit, although the roads were patrolled for several days and nights afterwards.

Thus we have abundant cause to bow in reverent and humble gratitude, to the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, for mercies innumerable, and blessings which have from time to time been graciously showered upon us, far beyond what we can ask or think. In the midst of a convulsion which has caused such a waste of life, and which will in a few days terminate the existence of others only waiting to receive their doom,—and which, from its extent, must prove the ruin of thousands who have been implicated and connected with the rebellion, we have been permitted to remain undisturbed, and almost as if nothing had happened;—favoured with resignation and peace of mind, and supported and comforted beyond the reach of fear. What can we render in return for such unmerited favours? In this there is just cause to fear, lest we should fall short in gratitude and humility of heart; and on this account, I believe, I daily fear, and daily feel the necessity of prayer, and am fully persuaded that I stand in need of the prayers of my dear friends in England, that I may be preserved in watchfulness and faithfulness unto Him, whose wondrous mercy has never been withheld, from the days of my youth unto the present hour. [See Appendix, B.]

—————

To Balby Monthly Meeting.

First Month 19th, 1826, O. S.

Dear Friends,

In forwarding the annexed answers to the queries at this time, my heart is bowed down under a sense of the continued loving-kindness of the Lord, and my own unworthiness to partake of the least of all His tender mercies: yet I have abundant and renewed cause, to exalt His great and ever excellent name, and to commemorate His wonderful works to the children of men. “Who can declare the mighty acts of the Lord? who can show forth all His praise?” Truly, in vain would such an attempt be on my part; but duty, gratitude, and humble admiration prompt me to acknowledge His might, to magnify His power, and to celebrate His praise, who has been graciously pleased, in unmerited compassion and mercy, to preserve us in peaceful quiet and resignation of mind, beyond the reach of any fear, except the fear of Him,—at a period replete with events unusually affecting and appalling, which have swept many away from this stage of existence, as in a moment, and plunged thousands into inconceivable anxiety and fearful suspense. Blessing, and glory, and wisdom, and thanksgiving, and honour, and power, and might, be ascribed unto Him, who sits King forever,—by all those who live in His fear, and place their trust and confidence in Him.

And now, my beloved friends, in a feeling of that love which would gather all to blessedness, my soul salutes you once again; desiring for all, as for myself, an establishment on the everlasting foundation, even Jesus Christ, by and through the revelation of his Holy Spirit, in the secret of every soul.

Although deplorably deficient in this important knowledge, which I daily feel and daily mourn on my own account; yet I am fully and awfully persuaded, that nothing short of this inestimable treasure can purify from every defilement of flesh and spirit, and can restore again that heavenly image, defaced and lost by sin and transgression, in which man was originally created. Nothing but this can reconcile the trembling soul to God. Conscious of its own sad need, my longing heart most ardently desires that all mankind were brought to feel the force of this great truth, and to behold its vast importance in the same unflattering mirror which presents it; but without the same lamentable cause, which makes it doubly precious in my view. Strong is the desire I feel for myself, and for every member of our highly professing and highly favoured Society, that we may so sanctify the Lord God in our hearts, as to be ready always to give an answer to every man that asks a reason of the hope that is in us, from sensible conviction, with meekness and fear.—not from traditional report, nor from education; nor like those of old, who were such strangers to the Lord of life and glory, that “some said he was John the Baptist, some Elias, and others Jeremiah, or one of the prophets;” but from the same living and eternal source, that enabled Simon Peter to say,—“You are the Christ, the Son of the living God. Jesus said unto him,—Blessed are you Simon Barjona, for flesh and blood has not revealed it unto you, but my Father which is in heaven: and I say also unto you,” continued our gracious Lord,—“you are Peter; and upon this rock I will build my church, and the gates of hell shall not prevail against it.”

If what I have written has the effect of awakening in any of my dear friends a serious consideration of this important subject, such as are building upon the immutable rock will not be discouraged or dismayed, but rather strengthened and confirmed in the hope of a sure and eternal reward. And should there be any who have neglected to examine the foundation on which the hope of their everlasting happiness is laid, let me warn these in the tenderest manner no longer to delay, not only to enter into a heartfelt inquiry, but to begin an earnest search,—if happily they may find the chief and precious corner stone, elect of God,—while the day of visitation is mercifully lengthened out; lest the night approach, when no man can work; and the language of our blessed Lord, be sorrowfully applicable,—“if you had known, even you, in this your day, the things which belong unto your peace; but now they are hid from your eyes.” But seeing the arms of wondrous and boundless mercy are ever open to receive the returning penitent, and the grace of our Lord is indeed exceeding abundant,—none need despair, who are willing to come unto God by him. It is indeed a “faithful saying and worthy of all acceptation, that Jesus Christ came into the world to save sinners; of whom I am chief.”

In the love of the gospel, I remain your affectionate friend and brother,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster.

Dated about Fifth Month 30th, 1826.

In the first place, I sincerely congratulate you on the recovery of your dear wife, and in the prospect of her being spared to you and to her friends a little longer. I am satisfied there is nothing in this scene of conflict and trial worth remaining for, but that the will of our good and gracious Lord God should be perfected in us,—excepting also, the company of our near and dear connexions, to whom we have been long and affectionately attached: with every thing else I could readily shake hands, and bid them a farewell forever; if but happily in a state of preparation to meet the great and awful event. On this head, I have many fears, as regards myself, from a knowledge of my own unworthiness; and I am thoroughly persuaded, that if an attainment so high should ever be my happy experience, it must be through the great and unmerited mercy of God in Christ Jesus.

What a change a few months have produced in this country! The late reigning Empress has only survived her much lamented husband five months and fifteen days; she died at Beliof, between Taganrog and Kalouga, about 280 versts south of Moscow. Her death has been as private, as her life was retired and hidden from the world. She had arrived at Beliof much exhausted the preceding evening, and retired to rest pretty soon, and about eleven o'clock at night became seriously ill. Her physician was sent for, but from some unaccountable circumstance, could not be found. On her being informed of this, and that they were about to send off to some distance, where he was expected to be, she desired them to desist, saying, 'it is of no consequence.' She then requested to be left alone; and nothing further transpired, until three o'clock in the morning, when her confidential attendant went softly into her room, to see how she was, and found to her great astonishment, that nothing remained but the frail tabernacle; the countenance retained its usual composed and serene appearance, but the spirit had returned unto God who gave it. Her many virtues will long live in the memory of those who knew her worth; and, although she has passed away as one almost unnoticed and unregarded, yet her memorial is on high, and will never perish. Her body is expected here about the middle of next month, and will be laid by the side of her late husband in the Fort. She had many enemies, but they were only those whose luxurious habits and vain inclinations were exposed and restrained by her humble, simple, and virtuous example. It may be said, she died generally beloved and regretted, and very deservedly so. Her decease took place on the 4th of Fifth Month, O. S.

—————

To One Of His Family.

Moscow Road, Ninth Month 13th, 1826, O. S.

My Dear _______,

I have spent great part of this season on the bogs of Shoosharry, returning home only on Fourth and Seventh day evenings, and leaving it again at noon on Fifth, and in the morning on Second days. I hope that all the drains will be cut before the winter drives us from the work; but we look for an early winter after so unusually long and hot a summer. On the 9th instant, we had a frost which froze the water in the drains, and on the 11th, there was a considerable fall of snow, but it did not lie long. We have had the advantage of being allowed to burn all the surface rubbish, moss and brushwood: the large roots are preserved for fuel. But owing to the uncommon dryness of the season, we have been unable to burn until lately, for fear of setting the soil itself on fire, as has been the case in many places around us. The damage done by fire in the course of the summer is incalculable. The woods have been on fire for fifty versts together; in the neighbourhood of Ijora many regiments of soldiers have been employed, in endeavouring to save the towns and villages: several of the latter have been destroyed by the devouring element. At times, we were alarmed for our own buildings:—in vain we tried to arrest the progress of the fire, when at a considerable distance from us; but this could not be done, as the heat and smoke prevented the people from working when near it;—so that we were obliged to content ourselves with forming a defence, in advance of the fire, at a sufficient distance from the buildings that the flames might not endanger them. This was done by removing the tree-roots and sods, in short every thing of a combustible nature, from the surface down to the clay, in the shape of a semicircle, about three-quarters of a mile in length, to the edge of which the fire actually came. Even with this precaution, it was necessary to station watchmen, as the sparks flew over the barrier and set the earth on fire in several places; and our safety depended on extinguishing these places immediately, for if they had once gained strength, it would have been impossible to check them, as every pool in the neighbourhood was dried up by the long continuance of heat and drought. For several weeks we were threatened by this formidable enemy; but were favoured to escape without accident.

Latterly we have had some fine rains, and have been burning in the fields at every opportunity. The rubbish is piled up in lines a fathom wide, and nearly the same in height. The other day, we had upwards of a mile of them on fire at one time, which made a singular appearance when night came on.

It is very pleasant to us to hear that the coronation has been attended with great satisfaction, far more than was expected. The unexpected appearance of the Grand Duke Constantine at Moscow seems to have diffused quietness over the whole empire. The generality of the people had an idea, that it was without his full concurrence, that his younger brother was proclaimed Emperor. We have heard from very good authority, that the first interview between the two brothers was very affecting; the behaviour of the Emperor was truly amiable and conciliatory, while that of Constantino gave ample proof of a noble and generous mind.

As they rode together through the streets of Moscow on horseback, the population of the place were witnesses of the cordiality that subsisted between them; and shouts of joy resounded through the city. In the course of a day or two, a review of the troops took place. The army has been most of all dissatisfied, and were generally of the mind, that Constantino had been forced aside to make way for his brother; but when the two brothers made their appearance in front of the troops, these were fully satisfied, and their shouts of approbation continued an unreasonable length of time. It is now generally supposed, that things will go on smoothly, and that every spark of sedition will be extinguished; the Emperor will begin to feel himself more firmly seated on his throne, and will doubtless assume a more decided tone of character: it will soon be seen what he is; from his abilities, much may be expected that is good. Much blood was shed on his ascension to the throne; and it is really wonderful how his life was spared, when surrounded by violent and desperate men. I most earnestly desire that he may lastingly remember his then humiliating situation, and may be disposed to keep near to that power, which so evidently and remarkably directed his steps, and delivered him from the hands of his enemies.

—————

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster.

Twelfth Month 14th, 1826, O. S.

In vain would it be for me, to attempt to recount the multiplied favours and blessings that have been showered down upon us, since I last wrote. Perhaps, some might be disposed to think many of these circumstances too trifling to be noticed, or if noticed at all, only as things which happen in the common course of events. But upon my mind they make a different impression; and I cannot but record them as so many additional instances of the mercy and protecting care of Him, without whose knowledge a single sparrow cannot fall to the ground. At the same time, it is only proper that the effect should be more striking with me, as few others have witnessed so many great deliverances; and none so unworthy, in my own estimation, as myself. I know not how it may be with others, who like myself are past the meridian of life, and in the common course of nature, cannot look forward to many days in this state of mutability; but on looking over the actions and transactions in which I have been engaged in the course of my pilgrimage, few indeed are to be found, that can bear examination when brought before the penetrating and impartial glass of truth, and which are altogether divested of selfish motives; although perhaps at the time, when performed, they may have afforded sufficient satisfaction to feed the creaturely part, and keep that alive which ought to have been slain. But what an unspeakable privilege it is, that none of these things are permitted to pass unnoticed or lie concealed, but are from time to time brought into remembrance; whereby self may be abased, and judgment set over the transgressing nature; which must not only be brought under condemnation, but must actually die in us, before the lowly and precious seed can live and reign; which delights in purity, and which will, if suffered to rise into dominion, wash, sanctify, and justify the believing heart, that is made willing to submit to the precious influence of its power. Verily, herein is the love of God manifested, “in the name of the Lord Jesus, and by the Spirit of our God,” through the one, great, sinless, spotless offering, which has perfected forever them that are sanctified.

I regret it is not in my power to gratify you with any information as to our future prospects; but things remain to the present time in the most clouded uncertainty. My dear friends and my native land are often the subjects of my thoughts. Sometimes I cannot help cherishing a hope that I may once more be permitted to return with my beloved family, and pitch a tent for a short time among them; but I find it will not do to dwell much upon what I earnestly desire, as it has only a tendency to unsettle the mind, and disrobe it of that peaceful resignation, which I can thankfully acknowledge is often my favoured portion.

The nature of our employment, and the wide field of labour before our view, in which at times it appears as if we should be called to assist, create a feeling of dismay; but again circumstances occur, which for a season, darken any probability of this being the case: so that which ever way I look, it is but toiling in vain. “He that abides of old,” only knows what is in store for us; and unto Him I commit myself and my all: well knowing from long experience, that a way can be opened, when perhaps there may be less expectation than at other times.

Chapter X.

Address to Balby Monthly Meeting, 1827—The Emperor Nicholas—Address to Balby Monthly Meeting, 1828—General Correspondence.

—————

To Balby Monthly Meeting.

First Month 26th, 1827, Dear Friends,

Our little meeting being now reduced to only six members, who are those of my own family, and three of these in their minority, we have of late been brought more closely into the solid consideration of our humiliating and stripped condition. At our last meeting, under a painful sense of this, and in a feeling of our peculiar situation and weakness, we were unitedly of the mind, that the Monthly Meeting would not expect answers to the queries in the usual manner: as in our apprehension it would be presumptuous to attempt it, and too much like upholding a lifeless form. I am therefore requested to give the Monthly Meeting some general information of its distant members, in the hope that our dear Friends will not only approve of this conclusion, but that they will feel as we have felt on the occasion, and concur in its propriety.

But although the answers are not furnished as formerly, the queries have nevertheless been duly read and considered; and I trust we have endeavoured, by individually applying the comprehensive particulars contained therein, seriously to reflect and examine how far we are fulfilling the important duties required at our hands, in the faithful support of our different Christian testimonies.

Notwithstanding our depressed and disqualified situation, our meetings are regularly kept up as heretofore; and although some of us may feel at seasons as “the owl of the desert,” or the solitary “sparrow on the house top,” yet there are intervals, when that gracious power is witnessed, which can set bounds to the tumultuous sea of thought, and arrest the wandering imagination;—which can not only command the storm, but at his pleasure rebuke it, and cause the restless waves to be at peace. It is, my beloved Friends, a sensible evidence of this sustaining help, that diffuses comfort to the mind in our exiled allotment; and renders the lonely habitation a peaceful abode; wherein we are permitted to dwell together in love and harmony, while widely separated from the fostering care and bosom of the church, and excluded from a share of that tender counsel and advice, of which others so frequently partake in our highly favoured native land. And although subject to many privations, and often under feelings of extreme poverty, weakness and dismay; yet such is the mercy, the goodness and compassion of a long-suffering and all-gracious God, “who makes his sun to rise on the evil and on the good, and sends rain on the just and on the unjust,” that all our needs are and have been abundantly supplied, through Christ the ever-blessed and only Saviour; to whom be the glory and the praise forever!

Lest I should be found deficient in love, gratitude, thankfulness, and devotedness to the great and bountiful Author of such multiplied and utterly unmerited favours, the lovingkindness of the Lord makes me even afraid, from a deeply engraven sense of my own unworthiness. In this state I earnestly desire to be preserved; for this, my spirit often breathes in the language of prayer. I find it, my dear Friends, a safe hiding place; it is indeed that food which is most convenient for me, and daily needful, because it leads into lowliness of mind; and while it chains down self in every appearance, the tribulated soul is preserved near to the innocent harmless life, which, dwelling in the light, recoils at the slightest impurity. Then our needs may all be plainly felt and seen; how great is the need not only to implore for daily bread, but for a qualification and disposition to forgive those who trespass against us, that we also may be forgiven; and that we may be permitted to feel a portion of that love, which would gather all into the heavenly garner of rest and peace,—even the love of God shed abroad to comfort and strengthen our hearts.

I trust in a degree of this love, I once more salute my dear brethren and sisters, and remain their affectionate Friend,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To John Hipsley, Hull.

First Month 29th, 1827. The Emperor Nicholas is indefatigable in his exertions to support the interests of his people throughout the empire, by strictly insisting upon the most rigid adherence to justice in all causes; which has given great satisfaction. His leisure hours, at least those absolutely necessary for exercise, he makes subservient to the general good, and is daily going about to inspect the hospitals and other public institutions, in the most minute manner, which has already had a salutary effect.

I may be mistaken, but I think that he is almost the first crowned head that ever entered the doors of a prison, with the benevolent object of inquiring into, and improving its state: this he has lately done, and not in a superficial manner; having, in many instances, entered closely into the examination of particular cases with great interest, and caused many to rejoice in being set free. This work is carried on without any parade; he just steps into a sledge with a single horse, and no one knowing where he is going, of course there can be no preparation made to receive him; in this manner all are taken by surprise, and the real state of things fairly developed, whether rough or smooth. He has a great work before him; and stands in need of that wisdom, which is better than rubies, to direct and support him in such an arduous and responsible station.

—————

To David Mallinso, Sheffield.

Twelfth Month 7th, 1827. I have duly received your letter of the 13th ultimo, which was truly acceptable; and particularly as it conveyed a more favourable statement of the health of yourself and your dear family, than has been transmitted to us by any of our correspondents for a considerable time past; and we shall rejoice to hear, that this inestimable blessing is continued to you all. It is indeed a blessing we cannot too highly appreciate, or be sufficiently grateful for; as it enables us to bear the changes and vicissitudes incident to this state of probation, with greater calmness and fortitude, than when both mind and body are suffering at the same time; which is sometimes in best wisdom permitted to be our portion. We have also great cause to number our blessings in this respect, as we have been favoured to enjoy an almost uninterrupted share of good health for many months past; which I desire to be found daily sensible of, and humbly to acknowledge.

Your mention of having visited the Isle of Man, and of its having been of use to you and your dear _______, is very pleasant intelligence. The benefit, I trust, will be lasting to you both. It brought afresh to my remembrance its rocky coast; although it is more than forty years since I traversed its bays and harbours. I was fourteen months on the station in a man-of-war cruiser, and have good reason to remember Douglas, having been there in a heavy tempest, when the light-house and eighty feet of the pier were washed away by the force of the sea. I was also riding in the bay, when the Hawk packet of Liverpool was driven in by rough weather; though at that time a stranger to the treasure she had on board,—having for a passenger, that dedicated servant of the Lord, Sarah Grubb, on her way to Ireland in 1785. (See her Journal). But she had finished her glorious career and received the crown immortal, some years before I heard of her name, or knew the Society of Friends. Ramsay bay was another sheltering place, in which we occasionally anchored. We sometimes stood in close to Castletown; but could not go in for lack of water. At other times, we looked at Peel and Port Iron on the opposite side of the island, ranging on both sides, from the Point of Aire to the Calf of Man. But I need not recount particulars, which will afford you no satisfaction, nor yield myself any other than painful reflections, in the consideration, that so much valuable time was wasted, which ought to have been employed in a more noble and important pursuit; the fruits of which, I should not now be ashamed of, nor have to remember with vexation of spirit.

Our dear Friend Jane Doncaster, is greatly to be felt for in the loss of her son, who was a hopeful young man when I saw him last; and I rather looked at him, as one likely to be a comfort to his poor mother in the evening of her tribulated day: she has had many trials, and has borne them with that Christian fortitude and meekness; which plainly evince in what school she has been taught, and that her standing is on that sure and eternal foundation, against which the storms and afflictions of time can make no impression, beyond that of producing a renewed strain of acceptable devotion, in the sublime language of “Your will be done.”

—————

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster.

Eleventh Month 16th, 1827.

It is long since I gave my endeared friend a proof of affectionate remembrance in this way, yet he may rest assured, this has not arisen from lack of inclination. On the contrary, it is often cause of regret, that I cannot more frequently enjoy a privilege so congenial to my feelings, as that of maintaining through this medium, a more constant social converse with those I dearly love; and with whom I am favoured at seasons still to feel a precious unity, although not dwelling amongst my brethren in religious fellowship, but in a land where nearly all around me seem insensible to such a source of comfort, consolation, and strength. This circumstance perhaps, only serves to render that unity doubly precious to my often drooping mind, imparting to it a refreshing fragrance, as of the “ointment poured forth” for which my heart rejoices with humble thankfulness. It is true I have numerous engagements, which naturally occupy a considerable portion of time, and not a little thought. But when at liberty from these things, there are hours afforded, upon which my beloved friends in England have a claim; and in which much might be done in the way of correspondence, if it were not for the valley of humiliation in which it is frequently my lot to dwell; where the past and the future are amply sufficient to constitute the distress of the present, and from their vast and awful importance, cannot fail to absorb in the most appalling manner, every faculty of sense and feeling in a poor worthless mortal; and to bring down self into such a state of nothingness and abasement, that the tossed mind is left almost without a ray of hope, and ready to doubt whether the smallest progress has been made towards “the city which has foundations, whose builder and maker is God.” In these stripping seasons, I feel a total incapacity for letter-writing or any other thing that requires application of the mind; which would gladly remain in a state of oblivion, rather than again emerge, and take a part in the things of time.

These dispensations are far from palatable to the creaturely taste, yet I believe are very wholesome and absolutely needful for all, who like myself are encumbered with dross and tin; in order that every thing that cannot stand the fire, may be removed out of the way, and the vessel be cleansed from those impurities, which render it unfit to contain heavenly treasure.

But if these times of proving and trial, are permitted in the end to rank amongst those afflictions, of which the Apostle speaks, that work out for the tribulated soul “a far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory,”—then, indeed, they will appear light and momentary; and they will be commemorated with humble gratitude, as the choicest blessings of redeeming love, administered in unutterable mercy to the sons and daughters of men for their eternal welfare: greatly do I desire to be patiently resigned to these and all other dispensations yet in store, however painful to human nature to endure.

Your letters are at all times very acceptable to us, and if deprived of such a source of information, we should remain strangers to much that is passing relative to the movements of our Friends. Your accounts of those dedicated servants, who are labouring in the excellency of the gospel, for the restoration of backsliders, and the general promotion of truth and righteousness in the earth, as well as for the strengthening and comforting of the faithful, afford much heartfelt satisfaction. I trust we shall ever feel a lively interest in them, although excluded from partaking of the refreshment which others are permitted to enjoy, who have the privilege of picking up the crumbs which fall from the Master's table.

I should greatly rejoice, if I had it in my power to render you any satisfactory information, as to the probability of our labours terminating in this country. It is a subject on which my mind could dwell with great delight; but when I have suffered myself to indulge in such a pleasant prospect, I have felt a restraint which has compelled me to desist. I have however been mercifully favoured with resignation, in the midst of trials which have befallen us, since our lot has been cast here; and when from peculiar circumstances, home and dear relatives and friends have revived to my recollection, under feelings which made them doubly dear, I have, I think, uniformly endeavoured to commit myself to the Divine will, and to behave in some degree “as a child that is weaned of its mother.” But I must ever remember, with longing desires, those ties of love and long continued friendsbip, that neither length of time nor absence can efface or obliterate; and of late, I have felt my mind in an unusual manner drawn towards my Friends in England, in the binding influence of that love, which seeks the good of all mankind. So that I have been almost ready to cherish a belief that the day is not far off, which may produce a change, and liberate us from these frozen regions; but when I look around, it is beyond my finite comprehension to conceive how such a change is to be brought about. Yet I have abundant cause to know from marvellous experience, that all things are possible with Him, who blows with his wind, and the waters flow into every creek and inlet; and when we are reduced to a thorough sense of our own weakness, He is sometimes in gracious condescension, pleased to magnify His power, and show forth His strength, to our humble admiration, far beyond our conception, and still further beyond our deserts: and, therefore, I desire to wait in patience, whether it be our lot to depart hence, or to remain in exile.

We have heard no particulars of the death of dear Mary Fairbank; who, having lived the life of the righteous, has finished her course with joy, we cannot doubt. We have just heard of the decease of dear John Kirkham,—another standard-bearer, summoned from works to rewards. How many seem to be removed from our poor Society, and others in readiness to depart! And when we look around for those who are to fill their places, they seem very thinly scattered up and down. The prospect is to me very discouraging and gloomy; but although the fathers and the mothers may be taken away, and the prophets do not live forever, I am consoled with the recollection, that a gracious and compassionate Lord God remains; whose years fail not, and whose power is the same today as yesterday, and will forever endure. He can at his pleasure hasten the day, when a language formerly adopted, may again be truly applicable;—“The anointing which you have received of him abides in you, and you need not that any man teach you.”

—————

To Balby Monthly Meeting.

Second Month 4th, 1828.

Dear Friends,

Being permitted to witness the dawning of another year, I am desirous of again renewing a correspondence, so justly due to those with whom I am united in the bonds of Christian love and religious fellowship; and unto whom I feel accountable in the same degree, as if dwelling under their immediate care and oversight, as was once my favoured portion, in days that are over and past. Frequently, and I trust fervently, a petition is raised in my heart, on my own account and on that of my beloved family, that we may be preserved blameless in life and conversation; lest by any means, through us, the precious cause of Truth should suffer, and the important testimonies borne by the Society, of which we enjoy the privilege of being members, should be neglected and laid waste in a distant land.

Our meetings are kept up as heretofore, and although mostly held under feelings of great discouragement and sensible weakness,—yet there are seasons when a precious solemnity is witnessed amongst us, which sustains a humble hope, that the loving-kindness of our gracious Lord is not withdrawn from us, in this forlorn and solitary situation, unworthy as we are of partaking in the least of all his tender mercies.

Although it is still my lot to be absent in body from my beloved brethren and sisters, they are often the endeared companions of my anxious thoughts. On the present occasion, my heart expands with a renewed feeling of earnest and affectionate solicitude for their present and eternal welfare. “I write unto you little children, because your sins are forgiven you for His name's sake. I write unto you, fathers, because you have known Him that is from the beginning. I write unto you, young men, because you are strong, and because you have overcome the wicked one.” This apostolic language, has unexpectedly fastened upon my mind; I would to God that it was truly applicable,—comprehending, not only every member of our religious Society, but every age and every class of professing Christians, the world over; then indeed there would be joy and gladness, and a good day, as “when the morning stars sang together, and the sons of God shouted for joy.” Mourning and heaviness are the present covering of my mind, arising from fear and jealousy on my own account, which produce a like feeling on account of others; lest the day's work should not be keeping pace with the day of merciful visitation, and that woful night of darkness overtake any of us, when the Spirit of God ceases any longer to strive with his creature man. “How often would I have gathered your children together, as a hen does gather her brood under her wings, and you would not,”—was the language of our ever-blessed Redeemer, when lamenting over the inhabitants of Jerusalem: and such was his unutterable love and compassion for the rebellious children of that city, that on beholding it, he wept; saying, “if you had known, even you, at least in this your day, the things which belong unto your peace; but now they are hid from your eyes.” By this, it does evidently appear, that we may withstand the continued offers of Divine love and mercy, until we are left desolate, and the day of our visitation is passed forever away. “If the tree fall toward the south or toward the north, in the place where the tree falls, there it shall be.” As death leaves us, judgment will find us; “for there is no work, nor device, nor knowledge, nor wisdom in the grave,” where we are all hastening, and some of us apparently with lengthened strides. While reviving these awful and momentous considerations, I feel their vast importance, and therefore long to impress others with a sense of the necessity there is for us without procrastination, (for we know not what a day may bring forth,) to “use all diligence to make our calling and election sure,” before we go hence; that so we may be amongst the happy number, who have an entrance ministered abundantly into the everlasting kingdom of our Lord and Saviour, Jesus Christ.

Strong is my belief, that there are many amongst my dear Friends, to whom it may be said, “your sins are forgiven you, for His name's sake” who by patient submission to the cleansing and sanctifying operation of Divine grace in their hearts, are born again,—are “become as little children,” meek and lowly; whose eyes behold their heavenly Teacher, who seek to know His will; and in humble resignation of soul, endeavour to perform it. These can testify from blessed and living experience, that peaceful and easy is his yoke, light the burden, sweet the rest: continuing in dedication and obedience to the pointings of duty, these grow “from strength to strength,” from the state of little children, to that of young men, strong in the Lord and in the power of his might; because “the word of God abides in them, and they have overcome the wicked one.” Standing fast in the faith once delivered to the saints, a more perfect stature is attained, even to that of fathers in the church, because they “have known Him that is from the beginning.” It is this knowledge that I greatly desire for my dear Friends, as for myself; and I believe, that those who have been happily favoured to make the greatest advancement in this spiritual work, still find their safety dependent only upon watchfulness and prayer: nothing else can sustain the life of faith. The soul cannot be nourished today with manna gathered yesterday; the brightest gleam of hope soon loses its lustre, unless renewed again; and no past experience can support the drooping mind, when fresh trials are permitted to assail us. It is the Lord alone who can renew and increase our faith, and preserve that alive in us, which is “born of Him.”

I feel a desire which words cannot fully express, that my dear young Friends may be entreated to engage in this work of such great and individual importance. A sacrifice in the morning of life is made with much less difficulty, than if deferred till the day is more advanced, and the mind encumbered with the things of this transitory world. There are many things which although harmless and lawful in themselves, indispose the mind for the simplicity of the gospel, keep alive the evil propensities of fallen nature, and if suffered to occupy that time and those talents afforded in tender mercy for the most noble purpose, will have to be remembered at a future day, with “vexation of spirit.” Be willing then, my beloved young Friends, to retire more frequently than the returning morning, from the perishing things of time and sense, to the precious “gift of God” in the heart; and although you may have to descend again and again into the humiliating depths of painful reflection, there be willing to abide. It is in the deep, that “the mighty works of the Lord” and his wonders are beheld. It is here that the mind can clearly discern those things which serve God, and those which serve him not; and here, under the weight of trouble and affliction for the past, and anxiety for the future, the acceptable cry is raised unto Him, who delivers out of every distress. The Lord alone is exalted in that day, and the creature brought low and reduced to that humble childlike state, wherein only, the knowledge of “Him that is from the beginning” is revealed. Without this saving knowledge, the ever blessed name of Christ can only be mentioned from hearsay or report; but with it, you will be enabled to say from heartfelt experience, that “Jesus is Lord,” even your Lord, and that “by the Holy Spirit.” “This is life eternal, that they might know you the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom you have sent” who is the beginning and the end, the first and the last.”

I remain your affectionate friend and brother,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster.

Plains of Shoosharry, near Petersburg, Tenth Month 14th, 1828.

Your welcome letter forwarded from the Autumn Quarterly Meeting, reached me last evening in safety; and although the perusal of it is not without administering cause for mourning and lamentation, yet many parts, at the same time, convey comfortable and consoling information, and call for thankfulness.

I do not remember hearing, at any previous time, of so many of our dear Friends moving to and fro with certificates. There ought to be fruit appearing in many places, for truly much seed has been sown; and I long that nothing may be permitted to stop its growth, or prevent its flourishing, to the praise and glory of the great and good Husbandman; who has not been lacking in adorable condescension and mercy, to prepare and qualify, and send forth to labour in his vineyard, both at home and abroad, many faithful servants, whose reward will be sure and everlastingly joyful:—for “he that reaps receives wages, and gathers fruit unto life eternal; that both he that sows, and he that reaps may rejoice together.” I think I may say, “would God, that all the Lord's people were prophets;” then, whether they are ever called upon to prophesy or not, the feet of all would be “shod with the preparation of the gospel of peace which, it is my belief, all ought to be, and is the case with all who faithfully maintain the Christian warfare, and obtain the blessed victory.

Our present residence would be thought by most a lonely one, as it is several miles from any other house in the midst of a wild country, and on the margin of a huge bog. We have no water fit for use, but what is supplied from rain or snow; and I have several times remembered the many draughts of pure water that I have enjoyed when at Doncaster, a glass of which would now be a treat indeed. We have bored to a great depth in vain; and from the nature of the sub-soil and other local circumstances, it is not probable, that any spring will be found in our neighbourhood. A very bad and almost unfrequented road leads to our habitation, so that we seldom see the face of a visitor of any kind. When it was fixed for us to remove here, I had the offer of some soldiers to guard the premises, but declined it; as I consider that watchmen selected from our workmen are quite sufficient. It is necessary to keep a good look out, as the whole of the premises are built of wood, and are consequently very inflammable; and as the property belongs to government, proper precaution is needed both against fire and robbery: but I trust that my confidence in the all-sufficiency of the Divine arm (which has so often and so eminently preserved and supported us,) will never be at so low an ebb, as to induce me to place dependence upon the arm of flesh for protection. Notwithstanding the dreariness of our abode, I should be deficient in gratitude, if I were to omit saying, that to myself it is a peaceful retreat. We have been here about four months, and I do not recollect having been permitted to enjoy so much solid peace and comfort, since my lot has been cast in this land, as has been at seasons graciously vouchsafed within the wooden walls of our solitary mansion; and I believe my wife has partaken equally with myself in this comforting and precious privilege. So that our greatest difficulties, which might appear to others like mountains, are happily nothing but mole-hills, and not worth recording for a moment in our remembrance; except as they serve to keep us in a humble and dependent state of mind, and produce the grateful tribute of thanksgiving and praise to an omnipotent, omniscient, and omnipresent Lord God, for all the blessings, comforts and benefits, which are permitted to descend upon the heads of such poor unworthy creatures.

I often feel a longing desire that a path would clearly open, which would lead to a peaceful departure from this our exile; but, I trust, that such a desire is never cherished, or dwelt upon, without being accompanied by a willingness to submit, in humble resignation, to the Divine disposal of Him, who knows best what is best for us; who knows our frame, that we are but dust, and who pities our weakness. If I know my own heart, no earthly motive, no plans for the future, induce a desire to be released from this country; but I do most earnestly desire that the remainder of my days, whether many or few, may be devoted to the glory of God, and the exaltation of my dear Redeemer's kingdom in the hearts of mankind,—I need not add—and to the eternal welfare of my fellow-creatures, because the last must be the result of the first. Ease and indulgence, I think, I despise; although I sensibly feel the decay of this frail tabernacle. My sight has failed considerably since I was last in England, my limbs are stiffened by the damp to which I am daily exposed, and are subject to pains on every approaching change in the weather; and I find my strength is unequal to the fatigue, which but a few years back, I could bear with cheerfulness, if not with pleasure. But in the midst of all, my soul ventures to hope in the goodness and mercy of God, and that, through the merits of a crucified Saviour, my sins—even mine—will be blotted out.

—————

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield.

Twelfth Month 15th, 1828.

Although no great length of time has elapsed since some of my family wrote to you, yet I feel inclined to renew an assurance of unabated love and regard; which, though not often expressed, never ceases to dwell in our hearts towards you. I desire to record with humble thankfulness to the All-merciful Dispenser, the inestimable blessing of health, which is at this time our portion; and I trust that you are permitted to partake in the same enjoyment.

You are probably aware, that we have changed our residence to a greater distance from the city, than where we lived for the last eight years. This has had the unavoidable effect of dividing our family, and depriving us of the constant society of each other, which is a privilege we have greatly enjoyed. From the extent of our work, it was necessary, in order to keep all the branches in proper motion, to station some one in a central position, and William being in all respects the most capable, remains at that post. Although thus circumstanced, and living in a most dreary situation, we are favoured with resignation and contentment of mind; which sweeten the cup of solitude, and make the frozen desert a peaceful abode. The longest span of life is short; and to such as like myself cannot look forward to the addition of many years, it is of little moment where we are scattered: and if we bring into view the humiliating situation of the Lord of life and glory, who “had not where to lay his head,” a quiet dwelling place in any part of the habitable earth is more than a poor sinful mortal is entitled to, and much more than he deserves.

I am now more than a month entered into my 58th year; and I think that you, my dear friend, are as far, or perhaps farther advanced towards the end of the race. I often look round at my contemporaries, particularly those whom I have long known and loved; but am placed beyond the practicability of any thing like comparing notes with them, on a subject in which we are all so deeply interested, and on which nothing less is depending than the prize immortal. If a sensibility of weakness, and a consciousness of utter unworthiness, under a feeling of increasing bodily infirmity, can entitle any one to boast, then I think it is allowable for me; for truly I am a very poor creature every way. But when I contemplate the glorious gospel dispensation, and reflect that a thoughtless being like myself, nurtured in the very school of vice and folly, should ever have been brought, in any degree, under its benign and saving influence,—it is marvellous in my view, and none other than “the Lord's doing.” It is easy for me to say, what can I render to Him? But the question is, what have I rendered to Him? Here is an appalling query indeed,—the consideration of which, makes me shrink into nothingness, and into fear of having fallen short of making an adequate return, not only of humble adoration, gratitude and praise for such amazing mercy, but lest dedication and obedience have not kept pace with the knowledge that has been from time to time bestowed upon me. At times, a ray of comfort is permitted to glimmer on my drooping mind for a short duration; but soon it is again veiled by self-abasing clouds of suspense, which darken the whole atmosphere of hope.

But although I have thus to go mourning on my way, yet a testimony lives in my heart to the all-sufficiency of that Divine grace, by which “I am what I am,”—though nothing but a worm; and with my latest breath, I would commend all mankind to seek after this pearl of endless treasure.

It appears to me, that there are many in the present day, whose minds are constantly kept afloat by the great variety of publications almost daily issuing from the press. Many of these that I have seen, although replete with moral sentiment and learned remarks, which are not without Scripture foundation,—although very wide of the true intent and meaning of the text,—are strongly calculated to keep their readers in search of the lifeless shadow, and to divert their attention from the living and eternal substance. There are other persons again, who hare actually commenced a reform in great sincerity, and have been drawn into solid and serious reflection; but these unhappily, frequently fall into the way of a class of people, whose writings and conversation lead them to expect, that when they embrace the religion of Jesus, they will immediately witness some delightful sensations of heavenly joy. But, alas! they calculate on the reward before the warfare is begun. If such, for a short season persist in communing with their own hearts, and are, through condescending love and mercy, favoured to draw near to the Saviour of men, their expectation is disappointed; and they find that “He is without form or comeliness,” and has no “beauty” to make him desirable. There is nothing to feed and support those airy and fantastic notions, which their minds have previously and so perniciously imbibed. Thus the inestimable pearl is overlooked, or set at nought;—the language of the prophet is verified, and the blessed Master is, I fear, at this day, by too many in this way, “despised and rejected of men.”

I am apprehensive, that the enemy of mankind was never more effectually served than at the present time, and in a way most admirably adapted to the refinement of the age in which we live. The facilities for holding up the letter of the gospel, were perhaps never before equalled at any period; nor greater eagerness generally evinced to peruse and swallow the fascinating baits, (particularly when garnished with declarations from the undefiled lip of Truth,) which serve to amuse and allure; and by their painful and deadening effect upon the mind, prevent its coming under the influence of that pure and “quickening Spirit,” which only gives life. By this stratagem, an easy and broad way is open for the poor deluded traveller, so well accommodated to flesh and blood, that there might seem to be no necessity for any to “strive to enter in at the strait gate,” and yet the exaltation of the Saviour's kingdom, is professedly the object of many of these authors, without pointing out where it is to be found, and the terms on which only it is to be obtained. Regenerating grace is hinted at; but self-denial, and the daily cross, are seldom heard of. I am often bowed down under the consideration of these things, and of what will be the end thereof; and am sometimes ready to conclude, that a day of calamity will come, when these chaffy imaginations and beguiling inventions will be dispersed like withered leaves before an autumn blast; when the minds of men will be brought low, and humbled under the necessity of turning to Him, who has been so long smitten and afflicted, and be made willing to sit under His holy teaching. That so all men may be brought to know Him in all His heavenly offices, not only as a reprover and convincer of sin, but as a Comforter, and a gracious Redeemer indeed: and may the Lord hasten the dawning of that glorious day, when He, who “was despised and rejected of men,” shall become the chiefest of ten thousand and altogether lovely, says my soul.

I should much like to know how you fare amid the storms of time; your day, I am aware, has not passed over without its trials; but few persons have moved on more quietly and uncomplainingly than yourself, and I trust the evening is peaceful and serene.

From the long continuance of severe cold, which we have witnessed, I think it must have been felt in every part of Europe. There has not been so intense a frost for so long a time together, since we have been in Russia. It was really impossible to make the house sufficiently warm; so that we have had a suffering time, but have been mercifully supported through it, and have renewed cause to be humble and thankful.

I don't know whether you will be able to make out this scrawl; but I cannot see to mend pens as formerly, and in other respects the earthly tabernacle is failing; which must be looked for as the awful moment draws nigh, which I desire daily to keep in view. No prospect of liberation⁸ yet appears; perhaps it is too much longed for; and the will of the creature must be slain, that the will of the Lord may be done, and His name glorified.

Farewell, my dear friend; may heavenly goodness encircle, and comfort, and strengthen your heart.

—————

To a Friend.

Shooshany, Third Month 15th, 1829.

Our mutual friend _______, who went last spring to the South of France and Switzerland, for the benefit of his health, has lately returned to this neighbourhood, quite recruited. He says, that in several parts where he has been, there are many people seriously disposed, and hungering after substantial food; but it appears from his description, that they are nearly all looking outward for that which can only be found within. Many or most of them are expecting the millenium shortly to come; and I believe none are so difficult to persuade as these, where this peaceful reign is to take place; for their expectation is altogether outward, and they consider the idea of looking into their own hearts, to find it there, is quite presumptuous. Nothing short of a great out-pouring of the Holy Spirit, it is said, will do for them; but it is my belief, that nothing but a day of calamity will bring these and many others to their senses.

I find, by a letter lately received from England, that an eventful period is thought to be at hand for Christendom; and perhaps the bringing forward again of the Catholic question, in the House of Commons, may add a little to this apprehension. The signs and seasons most certainly indicate great events; but while pride, hardness of heart, excess and luxury, so generally prevail, to which may be added the almost universal disbelief that the kingdom is within, what can be expected but desolation? Our blessed Saviour foretold, that many should come in his name and deceive many, with, “Lo, here is Christ, or lo, he is there.” I cannot help thinking, that the signs of the present times bear a striking resemblance to what was thus foretold: for truly, there is great profession of religion in the present day; and amongst the various professors, scarcely any but who recognise the name of our blessed Lord; but how few the number of those that are his followers upon the terms He prescribed,—in a life of self-denial, and the daily cross; or that can believe in that faith, which works by love, to the purifying of the heart. We often hear of declensions in the church, which are said to have occurred in the long dark night of apostacy; as if that night had passed away, and the true gospel light now shone, and that day had dawned, which has restored all things to their primitive beauty. But, alas! I cannot help fearing, that the apostacy still continues; only the shade of darkness is a little varied from what it was, and things rendered more plausible by this variation. I verily believe, that the light of the glorious gospel would shine forth abundantly in the present day, if man would but look where it is to be seen; but instead of this, how many, by not keeping their spiritual eye turned towards it, behold nothing but the shadow, and yet think they are in possession of the substance. For true it is, as regards the sun or moon in the outward firmament, so long as we look directly towards them, we see no shadow; but if we turn a little on one side, immediately the shadow begins to appear, and if we turn our back on them altogether, it is all shadow, and the substance is lost to our view. I remember a simile of this kind, drawn by an eminent servant of the Lord in his day, who has long since been numbered with the just of all generations, very descriptive, and very applicable and beautiful.

There is no part of our dear Redeemers doctrine, in my estimation, more plain, simple, and easy to be understood, and less wrapped up in metaphor or parable, than that the kingdom is within. When he was demanded of the Pharisees, when the kingdom of God should come, he answered them and said, “The kingdom of God comes not with observation, neither shall they say, Lo here! or lo there! for behold the kingdom of God is within you”—again, “and I will pray the Father, and He shall give you another Comforter; that he may abide with you forever: even the Spirit of Truth, whom the world cannot receive, because it sees him not, neither knows him; but you know him, for he dwells with you, and shall be in you. I will not leave you comfortless, I will come to you.” Can there be any thing more clear and decisive than these assertions? And yet if we read over the modern writings of men in high esteem for learning and piety, we can scarcely find any allusion to them. Much is said about fundamental doctrine and faith; but in many instances, true faith seems altogether lost sight of, and what are called the doctrines of the gospel brought into view, and I had nearly said, substituted in lieu of faith.

Every sect of Christians seems to have its own peculiar faith or belief; but the apostle tells us only of “one Lord, one faith, one baptism” and all who profess any other faith than that of the apostle's, must certainly be in a state of apostacy from the true, living, gospel faith. Now until mankind are brought to an acknowledgment of the one true and holy faith, it is no wonder that things remain in their present state; and while they are thus permitted to continue, in my apprehension “the abomination of desolation” is still set up, and stands where it ought not,—even in the holy place, or in the place where true and vital religion ought to stand, instead thereof. It is no marvel then that the earth is so destitute of the presence of the Lord, in whose presence only there is life.

I have no doubt that many are acting in great simplicity of heart and sincerity of intention, but certainly without proper reflection and due consideration, on a subject of such eternal consequence. If people were but willing to “cease from man, whose breath is in his nostrils,” and turn inward to the unflattering witness for God—the precious gift, which as “a light in a dark place,” shines more or less in every heart, they would certainly be favoured in due time to discover where they are, and in what they are trusting. But poor finite man, in his natural strength and wisdom, can never effect this: nothing short of an Almighty power can open the blind eyes, and change the stony heart to a heart of flesh, capable of receiving the impressions of the everlasting and unchangeable Truth.

—————

To John Hipsley, Hull.

Fourth Month 2nd, 1829. The signs and seasons with us are very appalling, and strongly indicate an eventful period. Some think that there will be a great outpouring of the Spirit; others are looking for the millenium; but in the present state of affairs, a day of calamity, to bring the unstable world to their senses, in my apprehension is likely to take place, to check the torrent of vice and dissipation, to silence the “Lo! here,” and “Lo! there”—and banish from the earth those desolating scourges, which make it so destitute of the presence of the Lord.

—————

To David Mallinson, Sheffield.

Shoosharry, Tenth Month 11th, 1829.

The removal of my beloved sister, Barbara Hoyland, has been very affecting, and the more so, because our situation precluded our hearing of the awful event, until several weeks after it took place. Mary Hustler has kindly transcribed and forwarded to me the expressions, which dropped from her lips at different times during her last days, many of which are deeply instructive. Her trials and afflictions have been many; but there is strong consolation in believing, that they have worked for her “a far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory” and that through the mercy of God in Christ Jesus, her tribulated spirit now rests in the joy of its Lord. What poor short-sighted creatures we are! I little thought, when parting with my dear sister in Liverpool, on my return from Ireland, that it was a last farewell: but I desire to bow in humble resignation to His Divine will, which is ever excellent; and reverently and thankfully to bless His holy name, who by the powerful operation of His all-sufficient grace, made her what she was.

What a variety of changes we have both witnessed, since children together under the parental roof, from which we were severed at an early age, by the loss of both father and mother, and left in an orphan state to struggle in a wide and wicked world. Many years have now passed away, since we found a shelter in the bosom of our highly favoured Society; but still changes have been our portion, though of different kinds, yet all permitted in wondrous mercy, and ought to be sufficient abundantly to show, that here there is “no continuing city.” My beloved sister is now beyond the reach of conflict, where pain and sorrow cannot come; and as she drew near the boundary of time, she was mercifully supported by the everlasting arm of strength, that sure foundation and eternal rock, Christ Jesus, in whom she had believed. She is gone! but I am left a little longer, a living monument of the same matchless mercy: and although encompassed by human frailty, and conscious of manifold deficiencies, yet I am enabled to testify for the encouragement of others, that beyond the shadow of a doubt it is no “cunningly devised fable” which we have followed, but a glorious reality; of which I feel more and more anxious that all should come to the saving knowledge, and partake of the blessed and peaceful enjoyment thereof.

Since taking up my pen to address you, I have felt particularly interested on behalf of the dear young people of your family, with whom my heart seems interwoven, with an affectionate solicitude, which words fall short either to express or convey to its full extent; that they may unceasingly labour to know and experience for themselves individually, the secret working of that power in their hearts, which is Divine; and may be willing to dwell under its purifying influence, until all things are subdued and brought into subjection to His holy will, whose exclusive right it is to rule and reign in the hearts of the children of men:—“of the increase of His government and peace there shall be no end;” for the kingdom of Christ Jesus is an everlasting kingdom, and the covenant made with the house of Jacob an everlasting covenant, universal and ever new, in and through its blessed and holy Mediator. There can be no stronger proof of sincerity in those who desire to fear, love, and serve a good and gracious God, than their perseveringly endeavouring to wait upon Him, in a watchful humble state of mind; not only at set times and on particular occasions, but making it at all times the chief business of their lives. His unslumbering eye is ever open to regard the most feeble effort of the weakest child: every gracious promise will be fulfilled for His great name's sake;—“They shall renew their strength,”—“they shall not be ashamed;”—the cry of wrestling nature will be heard on high, by Him “that speaks in righteousness, and is mighty to save,” and “able to deliver.” He will deliver from the horrible pit of sin, and from the things of time, which cling like the adhesive miry clay:—yes, He will set their feet upon an everlasting rock, against which the combined powers of darkness in vain may beat:—He will establish their goings, and put the new song of praise in the mouth of all who diligently and patiently wait for Him. The heart is the field in which the hidden treasure lies; and such is its inestimable value, that nothing short of all that a man has, can purchase it. All must be surrendered to obtain the heavenly pearl: the whole is required without reserve. And what is all that we possess, when compared with the stupendous act of suffering love, that purchased our redemption? it lies in a small compass, yet it is capable of frustrating the Divine intention, and therefore is of vast importance; and I believe the unsubjugated will of the creature comprehends the whole. Not a word or an action, which fills the catalogue of the deeds of the body, can be conceived and performed without the assent and will of the creature,—all have their origin in thought; and therefore the ever-blessed Master at once pointed out a remedy against every temptation to which we are liable, in the general injunction,—“What I say unto you, I say unto all, watch.” Here then is the Christian's only tower of safety, and the path that leads to prayer. Oh! that I could induce all to this engagement of mind: the tendency of every thought would be discovered by the light which shines in darkness; whatsoever is earthly and sensual, and even the tendency of the heart in the natural state, would be exposed;—“the lust of the flesh, the lust of the eye, and the pride of life,” would be clearly distinguished to be “not of the Father, but of the world,”—which “passes away, and the lust thereof: but he that does the will of God, abides forever.” Those who steadily and carefully maintain the watch, will be strengthened to suppress every intrusive thought, and will be more and more placed in a capacity to wait; for there cannot be a true waiting, without a ceasing from our own imaginations, that God may be all in all: in whose presence only there is life, and love, and peace, and joy,—the blessed reward of all those, who fear, serve, and love Him, in his inward appearance.

I was not intending to say so much, when I began with this subject, but I think my pen could not be employed in a better cause, or for a better Master: at the same time believing, that it will be accepted in the same love, that prompted me to write it.

—————

To a Friend, (residing In Finland.)

Shoosharry, Eleventh Month 29th, 1829.

I enclose the Yearly Meeting's Epistle, and trust the perusal of it will afford you satisfaction, as it appears that assembly was owned by the great Head of his church, to the consolation and comfort of the upright and faithful standard-bearers. But O! my dear friend, I am fearful lest you should suppose, that the number of those to whom is committed the weight of the law and of the testimony, is larger amongst us, than is really the case. It is a sorrowful fact, but not the less true, that there are but “two or three berries in the top of the uppermost bough, four or five in the outmost fruitful branches thereof,” in the present day of our once flourishing Society: it is indeed a truly mournful consideration, when we look back at what it was, in the day when it first came forth. If we look at the ancient writings of Friends, we shall find that originally the Society consisted wholly of such as had joined by convincement, and were actually in possession of what they professed to be led and guided by. When these were gathered to their everlasting rest, their children became the burden-bearers: many of whom stood firm to the principles of their fathers, and the cause of Truth was precious in their eyes. As this generation passed away, others sprung up, who entered into the privileges, to procure which their worthy predecessors had laboured and suffered: thus the Society gradually became composed mainly of members by birth-right. Then persecution ceased in great measure, and worldly prosperity, accompanied with ease and indulgence followed: combining to induce a relaxation in their vigilance against the attacks of the great enemy of man's happiness; who did not fail to avail himself of the opportunity, more widely and cunningly to spread his snares and baits against a people, who, perhaps, of all others, had the most contributed to undermine his kingdom; as it is always his aim to attack those from whom he is the most in danger of being kept at a distance. There is no need for him to be jealous of such as are the “children of disobedience,” in whose hearts he already rules and reigns: they may go on their way quietly, as he has them safe enough. In this manner, things have been getting worse and worse, until unhappily it may be said, that, to a great and lamentable degree, the glory has departed from our Israel, and little is now left us but a name.

The picture which I have laid before you is a very discouraging and appalling one; but I was afraid of your being dazzled by that which only glitters, and is not the pure gold that has been tried in the fire. Notwithstanding things are in this deplorable condition, “the foundation stands sure,”—the Rock of ages remains unimpaired, and cannot change; the precious seal is yet unbroken,—“the Lord knows them that are his;” and there is a little remnant yet preserved alive in that which lives forever, who are enabled to call Jesus their Lord, and that by the Holy Spirit.

The present state of our religious Society, in my apprehension, very strikingly resembles that of the Jewish nation in former days:—they were a highly favoured people; and our Society has been favoured in a very eminent degree:—both have proved themselves unworthy of the tender regard and mercy of a long-suffering Lord God. I need not mention the final overthrow of the Jews to you, who are so well versed in these things; but it is my belief, that unless the Father of mercies is pleased to stretch out his everlasting arm, either to produce a thorough change in the hearts of our members, or to send a day of winnowing that will scatter and disperse the chaffy spirit that so widely and alarmingly prevails, so that none can stand but such as are upon the true foundation;—I say, I believe, that unless there is an interference superior to the power of man, the major part of our members will be amalgamated with the general mass of the people, when a few more fleeting years have passed away. But as in the destruction of Jerusalem, there was a place of refuge provided for the faithful Christians; so I humbly trust, that if the bulk of our Society should be scattered, there will be a Pella⁹ cast up for the honest-hearted amongst us: for the Lord will never forsake those that put their trust and confidence in him.

I remember a remark once made to me by an honest Friend in London, during the time of the Yearly Meeting; he was probably lamenting the low state of things, when I said, 'What would have become of me, if it had not been for our Society? To which he replied, 'What would have become of the Society, if it were not for those who have come in by convincement.' I have since thought there is a great deal in what he said; for I believe, many who have come in by convincement, have been greatly instrumental in keeping the building together. An individual thoroughly convinced of our principles, and keeping close to that which has convinced him, will undoubtedly, as he continues faithful, be converted by it; and one such person is certainly of more value in the Society, than many who are mere nominal members by birth-right only. Such as these have bought the Truth, at the price of becoming fools before men for Christ's sake: they have believed in the sufficiency of His power revealed in the heart, to cleanse and purify them from all sin; and although they may have had to pass through many conflicts, occasionally for several years, without appearing to gain any ground, they have been strengthened to persevere, and still to wait for Him. The weight of former sins and transgressions has been long and painfully felt to rise in humiliating retrospect before the view of the mind, time after time, in terrible array; working for each, true sorrow and repentance never to be repented of. But although at seasons he is ready to faint, when faith and hope have been reduced to a low ebb, yet the invisible arm of strength is still underneath unseen and unfelt, supporting the tribulated traveller in the apparently unequal warfare: until every sin has passed before-hand to judgment; and at last the glorious day begins to dawn, when He, who has been “as a refiner's fire, and like fuller's soap,” before whom nothing can stand (of a transgressing nature) “when he appeares,” or can “abide the day of his coming,”—is now discovered to be “the sun of righteousness” arisen “with healing in his wings,” to the joy and comfort of the wounded soul. Then the love of God is truly known; and until this blessed day is felt in the great and heartfelt work of regeneration, none can experimentally and truly say, that “God is love:”—they are mere words to all who have not witnessed the inward workings of his power in their heart:—but now, they feel him to be a God of love and mercy too, and are renewedly made willing in the love of Him to wait for Him. In this waiting, watchful frame of mind, we come to the place where true prayer is able to be made; which rises as sweet incense before the throne of grace, because not of our creating. Here is the Christian's watchtower,—his only place of safety, which was pointed out by our ever blessed Lord to all,—“What I say unto you, I say unto all, watch:”—again, “watch and pray, lest you enter into temptation.” The soul that faithfully watches, cannot be long without praying; although but in the language of a sigh. It is enjoined also by the great apostle, where he says,—“praying always with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto with all perseverance.” Here every thought is detected in the light of Christ, and brought to judgment, and into the obedience of Him, who casts down every imagination, and every high thing that exalts itself against the knowledge of God,—to the pulling down the strong holds of sin and Satan.

It is such as these, my dear friend, who have thus far advanced in the heavenly race, that have had their hearts directed “into the love of God, and into the patient waiting for Christ;” which, I trust, you have in part, if not wholly, witnessed: and I think you will agree with me, that a single individual coming into our Society thus convinced, and thus converted to the true faith in Jesus Christ, is of more value to it, than a hundred members who have nothing to show but a birth-right. And it is these that have followed their Lord and Master in the regeneration, that are qualified from heartfelt experience to be employed in his service, if it be His will to call for them, and send them to speak a word in due season to others.

—————

To His Son Joshua.

Twelfth Month 12th, 1829.

What an unaccountable thing it is, that when such pains are being taken to educate the lower orders of the people, and such an earnestness apparent in pursuing plans of philanthropy and benevolence, as has never been equalled in any former age, and so many efforts made to spread the knowledge of the gospel; yet there should be so bold a front and an atrocity in crime, surpassing even barbarous and uncivilized nations! To me, it seems as if many people were sensible of the tottering situation we are in, and thought it necessary to be doing something that in their apprehensions will be productive of good.

As to the increased efforts to spread the knowledge of the gospel, but little fruit can be expected, so long as they continue to be so blended with the inventions and contrivance of man. I verily believe this is one great means of preventing the people from coming to a knowledge of the true gospel, which remains to be “the power of God unto salvation.” If the minds of the people were turned to an inward and vital knowledge of this work, there would be some hope; provided the teachers themselves were really called to and qualified for the work; and not, as is to be feared too many of them are, strangers to the inward work themselves.

In my apprehension nothing short of a day of calamity will bring the people to their senses, and reduce them to a state of simplicity and humility; which in the end would prove an unspeakable blessing, if happily it were the means of turning their attention to the true Teacher in their own hearts, who gives life to those that hear and obey him, and would cause them to “cease from man whose breath is in his nostrils,” by whom they have been so long kept in darkness. That so those abominations which are set up, and standing in the place of the true Christian religion, and which make the earth so destitute of the presence of the Lord, may forever be swept away from its surface.

Should such a day be permitted, it will certainly try the members of our highly professing Society, and show who are on the foundation that stands sure; these will be preserved as in the hollow of the Lord's hand, from “the blast of the terrible ones;” but the chaff,—such as have nothing but an empty profession to stand upon, will assuredly be scattered before the storm.

To hear of your welfare in those things that are of eternal consequence, is the principal desire of my heart for you; without this, worldly prosperity will avail nothing in the great day of account. But, little is enough, when our desires are bounded by moderation; and I am fully persuaded that no good and necessary thing will be withheld from them that walk uprightly. As for myself, I can truly say, that when I began business, I had no artificial needs, and my real needs were very few. I never studied to keep up appearances, and be like other people; all around me knew that I had but small means, and I made no other pretensions. I endeavoured, I think, to the best of my ability to seek the Lord, and positively did not look beyond a sufficiency of food and raiment; and although an utter stranger to business in every shape, yet my way was made prosperous; though perhaps what I thought prosperity, would be despised by most in the present day, and probably by many in that day also.

—————

To One of His Children.

Shoosharry, Twelfth Month 18th, 1829.

My Dear _______,

Truly there is nothing in this fading world to be compared with an inheritance in another and a better, which is to come, and into which we none of us know how soon we may be summoned. But if we be happily found amongst the number of those who “fear God and work righteousness,” we shall most assuredly “be accepted of him;” and shall praise His great and ever excellent name through the never ending ages of a glorious eternity: which is my frequent and earnest prayer for us all.

The great apostle also enjoins “praying always, with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto.” What a privilege it is that we have this in our power at all times, out of meetings as well as in meetings, and on all occasions whatsoever; and as we know for our encouragement, that we are constantly day and night in the presence of Him, “in whom we live, and move, and have our being,” who “knows the thoughts and intents of the heart;” we shall in this inward exercise be preserved in His fear and in His love: for the Shepherd of Israel neither slumbers nor sleeps,—His watchful eye is never closed.

You, no doubt, are present regularly during the family readings of the Scriptures; but I would advise you to read a portion in them every night before retiring to rest, with an earnest desire, that it may be given you to understand them: for they will be but as a dead letter, without the assistance of the Holy Spirit which gave them forth; with it, they will afford you great instruction and consolation, and you will be taught the true meaning and application of them. They are the only treasure worth storing in memory: this I can truly testify from long and sensible experience.

I have lately received a letter from your uncle Charles, giving but a poor account of his health, and that of your aunt: they, like myself, and your dear mother, are feeling the infirmities attendant on advanced age; and I hope these will serve as warnings to stir us all up, to endeavour to be prepared for the change, that will certainly overtake us; that we may be like the wise virgins, provided with “oil in our vessels with our lamps.”

—————

To Richard Cockin.

Shoosharry, Fourth Month 30th, 1830, O. S.

Your letter was, indeed, most heartily welcome to us all, and as the harbinger of another returning spring, afforded us much comfort and consolation, after the long winter that has just passed over our heads.

Our work upon the land was suspended by the frost six months and nine days; and if we reckon the rough weather previously to the setting in of the frost, with what we have lately had, the winter has been more than seven months in length.

At the time when I have usually written to Balby Monthly Meeting, I was not unmindful of my dear friends; but alas! we were all laid by with sickness just then. This, however, as to myself, was not of long duration; but I found my mind entirely closed up, not having a sentence of any kind to transmit to the meeting; and yet I never witnessed a greater weight of exercise than at that period, which remained with me for several weeks afterwards, and is yet at seasons my portion. Your letter has been particularly comforting to me on this head, because it is now very evident, that any communication from me would have been out of its place, and altogether out of season, and must have clashed with the address from dear Mary Hargreaves; and the blessed Master is not the author of confusion but of peace, and that in all the churches. I wish to enjoy the privilege of being a member of Balby Monthly Meeting, and therefore request on behalf of my family and self, that you will procure for us a copy of the address.

Chapter XI.

Visits England with His Wife in 1830—His Affectionate Address to the Members of the Church of England—Religious Visit into Devonshire, Cornwall, the Scilly Isles, etc.

This year (1830) the health of our dear mother having again failed considerably, she was recommended to pass the ensuing winter in England; and my father having concluded to accompany her, they came over together in the autumn. The interval of leisure thus afforded, was not suffered to pass unimproved. Besides the attendance of the various meetings that fell in his way, he wrote and published, during the winter, a pamphlet entitled, An affectionate Address to the Members of the Church of England; which it is believed was widely circulated at the time.

In the First Month 1831, he applied for and obtained a certificate from his Monthly Meeting, enabling him to visit parts of Devon, Cornwall, and the Scilly Isles. On the conclusion of this service, he attended the Dublin Yearly Meeting, and afterwards that held in London, returning to Petersburg in the Sixth Month following.

The succeeding extracts are from letters written during this period.

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield.

York, First Month 8th, 1831.

On Second day morning, the 3rd instant, I shaped a northerly course for Durham Quarterly Meeting, held at Darlington. We had a very solemn meeting for worship the next morning, in the course of which, the great cause was ably advocated by several present; and I had to throw in my poor mite amongst them, and in a particular manner to call their attention to myself, as one exhibiting, and that without boasting, the triumph of Divine grace, over human nature in its most depraved state. It was indeed a memorable time;—the Truth rose into dominion over all, and many minds were sensibly humbled under the power thereof. I stayed over their week day meeting on Fifth day last; and had again to declare of the goodness and mercy of our God. This meeting ended well, but was not quite so highly favoured as that preceding the Quarterly Meeting.

After meeting, I left Darlington for York; where I was favoured to find my wife better than when I left her. For this, and for all the blessings and favours I daily and hourly enjoy, what shall I render unto the great and bountiful Giver, but the acknowledgment of being utterly unworthy of the least of all His tender mercies. On the way from Darlington, during the half hour allowed for dining, I called on a person who has lately joined the Society by convincement: he has a daughter in a very delicate state of health. I was gratified with my visit; and have since felt such a draught of love towards this dear young woman, that I have had to address a letter to her father on her behalf, which, I trust, will be received in the same love in which it was written.

Yesterday I went to sit by the death-bed of a young man, who is not expected to be long on this side the grave. It was a season to be long and gratefully remembered; for the Son of peace had mercifully visited this habitation. I had to bow in thankfulness for the precious quiet vouchsafed, and to petition the Father of mercies, on behalf of the humble patient sufferer. I believe that many have been instructed by this bed-side.

My little address is now in the press, in York, as well as in London, so that I hope it will shortly appear at Sheffield.

—————

To His Absent Family.

York, Third Month 3id, 1831.

My Dear Children,

I find things, as I go on, much altered as regards our Society; but it is a great consolation that there are here and there a few, comparable to the odd berries on the uppermost bough and in the fruitful branch, who are preserved alive at the root, and I trust growing from grace to grace, and that they will continue to grow, until they attain to “the measure of the stature of the fulness of Christ.” There are others again, whom the everlasting Father is graciously drawing by merciful visitations to that Saviour, who will in no wise cast them out. In Sheffield, Doncaster, York, and Darlington, there are of this description, as well as at many other places, where my lot has been cast. It is astonishing what a striking difference there is between some meetings and others; but the

most barren sittings I have been at, were at _______. I found it my place to dwell low with the suffering seed, and was quite closed up in both the meetings there. “If any man serve me, let him follow me; and where I am, there shall also my servant be,”—was the declaration of the Saviour of men, when personally upon earth: and truly there is no alteration in the Christian course;—if we would reign with Christ, we must be willing to suffer with Him. We must indeed, according to our measure, drink of the cup which He drank of, and with the baptism that He was baptized withal, must we be baptized; or how can we know a fellowship with His sufferings, or witness the power of His resurrection? In some meetings I have had to deal very plainly, and to declare amongst them without reserve, that however they might disregard the precious gift in their own hearts, and keep aloof from its warnings and monitions, that the same would judge them at the last day, according to the words of our holy Redeemer, when he said,—“I judge no man,” but “the word that I have spoken, the same shall judge him in the last day;”—or to this effect.

There is a new work, published by a minister of the Independent denomination of Sunderland, entitled The Book of the Priesthood, proving from Scripture, that under the gospel, the whole institution is at an end. I have procured a copy; also one of a smaller work, The Church in Danger from itself, and of another, Hurn's reasons for Secession from the Church of England. The author of The Book of the Priesthood, is now said to be employing his pen on the subject of tithes. In short, the nation seems at last to open its eyes, or rather to permit their being opened; and I believe that the day is fast approaching, when the hireling will flee, “because he is a hireling.” I have met with a work lately on Christian perfection, which has pleased me not a little, because there are so few of the different professing Christians who will admit this doctrine. I believe the author is a Wesleyan Methodist; and although he retains things which we do not deem essential, he very ably maintains the possibility and necessity of Christian perfection.

I have mentioned these things to show you what is doing in the world this way. It is wonderful to behold the great shaking there is in the minds of men at this time; all I hope indicating, that the day has begun to dawn, when “the knowledge of the Lord shall cover the earth, as the waters cover the sea,”—even the knowledge of that “word of God, which lives and abides forever;” and which in the days of the apostles so mightily grew and prevailed, to the utter exclusion of the earthly nature from every heart in which it is permitted to operate.

For some months past, I have been rather looking forward towards paying a visit to the Scilly Islands, and to the different meetings of Friends in Devonshire and Cornwall; and latterly, the track has been so defined, that there seemed no doubt in my mind respecting it. I was strengthened to cast the subject before the Monthly Meeting, held on the 21st ultimo, and was favoured to receive every encouragement that could be desired; and since taking this step, I have felt the reward of peace, for this small act of obedience to what I believe is required of me. I am now making preparations for leaving Yorkshire for a season. As I am very much a stranger to every one in those parts, the prospect at times feels rather heavy; but having been mercifully favoured to taste of that soul-sustaining food, upon which a man may [in a spiritual sense] travel forty days, I am encouraged to hope, that He, who has been graciously pleased to be with me in so many troubles, will not now forsake me.

I trust you will still continue to be cared for:—“as the mountains are round about Jerusalem, so is the Lord round about his people, from henceforth and forever.” Those who fear, love, honour, and obey Him, they are His people: and “the Lord will bless His people with peace;” and truly there is no peace like the peace of the righteous; no love like the love of God shed abroad in the heart; and no joy like unto the joy of God's salvation. Love was the distinguishing characteristic of the first and great commandment under the law: and it is the first fruit of the Spirit in the gospel dispensation; which is exhibited in love to God, and love to man. If we are but once favoured with this inestimable treasure, the whole train of Christian virtues will follow in beautiful succession,—joy, peace, long-suffering, gentleness, goodness, faith, meekness, temperance; against which there is no law. “Love is the fulfilling of the law,” and the end of the commandment. It is indeed the heavenly badge that designates the disciples of the one same compassionate Saviour; it outlives faith and hope; it casts out fear; and animates the Christian traveller to persevere in the tribulated path, which leads to life everlasting. Then let us individually wrestle for this unutterable blessing; for we are told that “God is love if we find it, we find Him. Let us press through the crowd of encumbering things, even things perhaps harmless in themselves, which serve to keep alive in us the evil and hindering propensities of fallen nature; that so we may happily come in heart to the Saviour, who only can enable us to banish the things of time and sense. Though they may compass us about like bees, in the name of the Lord? we will destroy them; for through Him we can do all things, but without Him nothing, as it should be done.

—————

Island, called St. Mary's, the largest of the Stilly group,
31st of Third Month, 1831.

My Dear Children,

I think my last letter mentioned the probability of my visiting the counties of Devon and Cornwall, together with these islands. At the last Balby Monthly Meeting, a certificate was granted me for this purpose. On the 5th instant, I left York, by way of Leeds, to Bradford, and was at both their meetings the next day; in which I had to labour amongst them, to my own comfort at any rate. When at this meeting, a few weeks previously, there seemed no door of entrance to be found amongst them, and I was shut up in both meetings. The next day I came on to Sheffield, and on the 10th attended the Monthly Meeting, and received my certificate. The same day, accompanied by _______, I went to Woodhouse, Hackenthorpe, Burleigh, and two places at Handsworth, to pay a small debt due from me to some invalids at these places,—two or three of them far advanced in years, who were absent when I visited Woodhouse meeting some time before. The next day I went in the mail to Birmingham, and proceeded the same evening towards Bristol; here we arrived early in the morning, and after some refreshment, went forward to Wellington; where I found Samuel and Maria Fox, (whom I think you know,) were intending to unite with me as far as our routes might continue together. I attended both their meetings on First day, and had a little to do amongst them in the morning; but in the afternoon was silent. On the 14th, we proceeded to Kingsbridge, where a meeting was appointed for the next day. I slept at _______'s, whose wife is an old acquaintance of mine. Our mutual satisfaction at thus meeting, was very much damped by the poor state of her health. The meeting was a highly favoured time, and we all had to labour together in love, unity and harmony. Next day we proceeded to Modbury, to another meeting; this was rather more dull at first, but was favoured to end comfortably. We reached Plymouth the same evening. At this place, Samuel and Maria Fox had a prospect of visiting families. It was I believe best that we separated; as when united, we seemed rather to depend on the strength of each other, and perhaps even felt a little too strong.

The next day, I proceeded alone to a newly settled meeting at Tavistock, consisting mostly of convinced Friends. I was a little disappointed to find this meeting flat and dull: at the first, perhaps I expected too much; but towards the latter end Truth rose into dominion, to our mutual comfort and consolation. I returned to Plymouth the same night.

As way opened, I accompanied Samuel and Maria Fox in some of their family visits. On First day the 20th, sat with two families, and attended both the regular meetings, in which I was enabled to obtain considerable relief: towards the close of my testimony in the afternoon, the way seemed clear for taking leave of Friends there, to some of whom I felt closely attached. In the evening, was at a public meeting, held in the Bethel at Devonport, at the request of Samuel and Maria Fox. It was well filled; and after the people were informed of the object of our meeting together, great solemnity prevailed over the assembly. Samuel Fox had to break the silence with the voice of prayer. I suppose almost the whole congregation, consisted of persons connected with the sea-faring life, with their families. My heart was greatly enlarged towards them, as companions and shipmates in the voyage of life; having the Lord God, merciful and gracious, and abundant in goodness and Truth, for our commander; and an all-sufficient Saviour and holy Redeemer for a heavenly pilot; who would never leave His vessel, but would safely conduct us through all the dangers and difficulties of time, and would remain with us through the never ending ages of eternity.

Towards the close, I had to call the attention of the meeting to myself, as an example for their encouragement, that none need despair; for in me they might behold a living monument of the Lord's everlasting mercy, and the triumph of Divine grace over human nature in its most depraved state;—in one, who, like themselves, had been cradled on the ocean, whom the everlasting arm had ofttimes been stretched out to save, when the briny wave had nearly prevailed against him. Maria Fox concluded the meeting in supplication. The people seemed in no hurry to leave the place, many coming to shake hands in a very friendly way. By what I have said, you will have some idea what sort of a meeting it was; and I think you cannot refrain from joining with me in the grateful tribute of admiration, gratitude, and praise, to Him who “sits upon the flood,” who “sits King forever;”—who only can “give strength unto His people,—who will bless the provision of Zion, and satisfy her poor with bread,—and fill with that peace, which the topaz of Ethiopia cannot equal in value.”

Being clear of Plymouth, next morning I crossed the Tamar in a boat to the Cornish side of Hamoaze, passing close under the stern of the Malta man-of-war. We proceeded to Looe, where a meeting was appointed: few Friends live here; but one of the few is that faithful servant, Sarah Tucket. We were favoured with a comfortable meeting, to mutual refreshment. After dinner, we proceeded to Tideford, and next morning attended their meeting. This was a memorable time from beginning to end: I can scarcely calculate upon being again permitted to partake of such another heavenly banquet in the course of this journey, if ever: but my soul right well knows that there is a power, in whom I am happily taught to believe, and with whom all things are possible; who can at His pleasure “bind the sweet influences of Pleiades,” loose the bands of Orion, “bring forth Mazzaroth in his season, and guide Arcturus with his sons”—“He that opens, and no man shuts; and shuts, and no man opens” the heavenly treasury of peace, love, and joy, which are at times revealed through the riches and glory of His grace, to His praise.

We dined at Liskeard. This meeting was appointed at six in the evening, and was much hurt, by the disorderly gathering of the town's people, attracted by the lights in the windows of the meeting-house, perhaps a rare thing. However, at last, we were favoured, and light sprung up, which brought weight and solemnity over all; under a feeling of which we separated. S. R., an elderly minister, appeared after I sat down, in a weighty and confirming testimony. The next meeting was at Austle, at three p.m. on the following day: it was small, but upon the whole, comfortable: after which I went on to Truro, and attended their meeting held in course next day. This proved a refreshing season to many present, and to some a time of rejoicing. In the afternoon, W. T. kindly accompanied me to Camborne; and the next day I proceeded to Penzance: the ground here was covered with snow, and the morning very cold and boisterous. I had hastened to be in time for the packet for Scilly, but found she had been detained by stress of weather five days behind her time. The next day was very stormy, and there was rough work among the shipping. An East Indiaman, the Andromache, put into Mount's Bay for shelter, and landed her passengers here from Calcutta.

On First day the 27th, I attended both meetings at Penzance, which were refreshing and comfortable seasons: Friends in these parts are not numerous. I was lodged at the house of J. S., who has kindly accompanied me to these islands. We sailed the next afternoon, and had a fine but tossing passage. It is not often otherwise at any time, as the set of the tide into the British and George's Channel, and the exposure to the Bay of Biscay and the mighty Atlantic, cannot fail to cause great agitation of the water, particularly when it has blown hard for several previous days together. The Wolf Rock lies in the run of the packet, and is only discovered by the breaking of the sea upon it. We bore up for it about ten, p.m., distant from four to five hundred yards:—I had just fallen asleep at the moment, and so missed seeing it, which I rather regretted, as I have formerly been several times near it, but have never seen it. In light winds it makes a roaring noise from being hollow, and the breaking of the sea into it may be heard at a considerable distance. At eleven p.m., we were in full sight of the fine revolving light on the island of (St.) Agnes; and in a couple of hours afterwards were anchored safely in the roads of (St.) Mary's.

We landed immediately, and were glad to get to an inn, where the people kindly made us a fire, as the night was cold. The next day, a meeting was appointed on the Isle of Tresco; the people were long in gathering, but behaved solidly; and I was favoured with encouragement to persevere with my engagement. Next day we had a meeting on Sampson's Island in the afternoon, and another on Boyer's Isle in the evening; both were satisfactory and comforting seasons, tending to administer an increase of strength, and begetting humble thankfulness of heart.

Fourth Month 1st. Last evening we had a meeting on Martin's Isle, which ended in a very solemn season. A class of Methodists called Bryanites abound here; their minister, and many that were present, made a continual groaning. One poor woman in particular, who seemed much struck with the solemnity of the occasion; I was upon my feet at the time, but was favoured with calmness. I could plainly hear the words, 'praises,' 'praises,' from the lips of the minister and others.

Fourth Month 2nd. Yesterday, we crossed to the island called St. Agnes, and found the landing rather difficult on account of the surf: in consequence of the great ebb and flow of the tides, few of these islands have proper landing places. It being what is called Good Friday, the people were mostly at home; and their Bryanite minister, knowing we were amongst the islands, had appointed a meeting for us at six in the evening, saying, that if we did not come, he would preach himself:—so that all was made ready to our hands. There is a good new school-house on this island belonging to the Protestant establishment; but the clergyman will not allow it to be used for any other purpose than as a school. He seldom comes near these people himself, although there is a regular church-house for his use; and yet he does all he can to make it inconvenient for Dissenters to come among them. Our meeting was necessarily held in a dwelling-house, in two lower rooms, which were excessively crowded; and after all, many had to stand outside the open doors and windows. You know that I can bear a tolerable portion of heat, but this was almost too much for me. There was much groaning around us; but no particularly wild extravagances were exhibited, and on the whole it was a highly favoured meeting. We drank tea at the same house with their minister; but carrying our materials with us, we made a distinct table. It was striking to see the homely fare ho partook of; in his absence, I inquired of our hostess how he was supported; she said, they could not afford to pay him much, so had agreed amongst themselves, that they should take it by turns to board him one day each, in the same manner as they lived themselves; so that he is at a fresh house every day: but that one person had agreed to find him a lodging at her sole expense; and that the society of which he was a member allowed him £8 per annum. He is a kind, sincere-hearted, and unpretending young man, and I felt a regard for him.

I am very thankful that I am favoured to have finished visiting all the straggling distant islands; and it is due from me to acknowledge the great support and strength that have been afforded me. It has blown strong ever since I have been here, so that getting about has been difficult, particularly embarking in the dark in strange places, amongst rocks slippery with oozy sea-weed; we could not avoid getting our clothes wet every day, and sometimes twice a-day. My companion is a plain, honest, worthy Friend, to whom I feel under many and great obligations for his kindness and attention.

After the two meetings in prospect on the island called St. Mary's, I know of nothing more to detain me here; but do not like exactly fixing my return to Yorkshire. I hope to be rightly directed, though but an unprofitable servant; but to be admitted a servant of such a Master on any terms, ought to be sufficient for any of us unworthy creatures.

I have lately received an extract from your last letter, and am sorry to find there is so much sickness near you, and that a fear prevails of the cholera approaching your borders. But we have “a strong city” and I humbly hope, we shall be mercifully prepared for an entrance therein, through the strait gate; that we may indeed be amongst the number of the few, out of the many called, who are happily chosen;—this gate of the Lord through which the righteous enter into the city of their God; all the inhabitants of which are “redeemed with judgment,” and converted with righteousness, even the righteousness of Him who died for the sins of all mankind.

Fourth Month 6th. Penzance.—On First day, we had two meetings on (St.) Mary's Isle: the first, at Holyvale, was a little disturbed by some rude people; I reproved them for it; and I believe many thought it a solemn time. The meeting in the Garrison town, was larger than any preceding it; and was a highly favoured time throughout.

—————

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield
Barnstaple, North Devon, Fourth Month 18th, 1831.

Presuming that my dear wife has before this time taken her departure from your hospitable dwelling, I am at a loss how to direct to her, and shall therefore be greatly obliged, if you will forward the enclosed letter, as you are doubtless in possession of the secret.

Since arriving at Penzance from the Scilly Isles, I have been searching out the infirm and invalids at Marazion, who did not get to the meetings when I was at Penzance, previously to embarkation. On the Sixth day following, went eighteen miles to sit with some Friends at Portreath, a small port near the entrance of the North Channel; and afterwards to Redruth, where a meeting was appointed for the next day. This was a comfortable time I trust to many present, and a relieving one to myself; which I desire to remember with gratitude of heart to the great Giver.

On Fourth day the 13th, the Quarterly Meeting was held: this was a favoured time; though in all these meetings I had some heavy work to do, but was strengthened to perform it faithfully. There seemed no getting out of Falmouth without holding a public meeting with the inhabitants, to which the sailors were specially invited. The house was well filled, and it proved a solemn opportunity; which I hope will be lastingly and profitably remembered by some present. I had to tell them, that like themselves, I had been cradled on the boisterous ocean: that the mercy of the Lord was unbounded as His love: that none need despair, for that Jesus Christ came into the world to save sinners, of whom I am chief, etc.

The time of liberation was now come, and I set out the next day for Plymouth, and finally for this place. Yesterday, I was at a meeting at Newton Tracey in the morning; none who attend it are members,—it was a refreshing season, and a thankful time for me. In the evening sat with Friends of this place; many strangers came in, and we were refreshed together.

I have lately been anticipating the pleasure of returning to my dear wife and all my friends at Carr Wood, intending to stop next First day at Birmingham; but what poor shortsighted creatures we are! I was on the morning watch yesterday soon after four o'clock, when the love of God filled my heart; and a public meeting with the inhabitants of this town presented to my mind. A willingness was wrought immediately on the opening: the Yearly Meeting in Dublin followed; and I bowed in humble resignation to what I believe to be the Divine will. In obedience to this, I have informed the Friends here; and the Wesleyan meeting house is procured for seven o'clock this evening. I feel that I am left single handed amongst strangers; but happily I know that there is a Power, which can yet enable me to “run through a troop, or leap over a wall” in whose blessed will I rest, and in whose mercy I trust.

After the Quarterly Meeting at Exeter, I must press forward with all speed to Bristol, as there will be barely time for me to get to Dublin, if I find a steam-boat starting the same day. It is very clear that this is not the place of rest for me, but I humbly hope it is a road that leads to it.

—————

To His Wife.
Dublin, Fourth Month 25th, 1831.

My Dearest Jane,

I have now the pleasure of informing you, that I arrived in this city early yesterday morning. I wrote to you last from Barnstaple, then looking forward to a meeting at that place the same evening, which proved in the end a truly comforting season: such a one as I have seldom witnessed. It was held in the Wesleyan meeting house, which was much crowded. The people were very quiet and attentive, and I had full opportunity to relieve myself among them, and have since been favoured to finish my visits to the remaining meetings in Devon, and to leave the country in peace; although humbled under a sense of my unworthiness to partake in the least of the Lord's mercies, and thus preserved by sea and land, and enabled to give the glory and the praise to Him to whom all belongs.

I left for Exeter the next day, and attended the Select Meeting the same evening, which to me was a heavy time. Here I again met with Samuel and Maria Fox. Next morning the Quarterly Meeting began with a meeting for worship, which was for some time very flat; but gradually improved, and in the end a relieving time was obtained, but not without plain dealing. The next appointed meeting was at Spiceland, about twenty miles distant, on the following evening; but it did not prove a land of spice for any of us. We had to experience the truth of the apostolic declaration, of the sympathy in the members of the mystical body: “if one member be honoured, all the members rejoice with it;” but our lot was to suffer together:—“whether one member suffer, all the members suffer with it.”

We reached Wellington the same night, and I had the pleasure of seeing my beloved companions restored to the bosom of their family, to the great delight of all around them. We were favoured to separate under feelings not soon to be forgotten, in that love which absence and distance only serve to strengthen. I pursued my course to Bristol, lodging at the hospitable mansion of Benjamin Thomas, and embarked the next day in the Killarney steamer, for Dublin; a very fine vessel, crowded with passengers, but all strangers to me. Our progress was impeded by contrary wind, and an old sea swell; so that although the vessel possessed the power by steam of 220 horses, we were several hours beyond the usual time of arrival. The two first inns were full of guests, but the third took in the stranger, but could only give him a bed in a double bedded room. You know I often say.—'any port in a storm' but I believe there was a secret hand in all this. The other bed was occupied by a stranger, with whom I had some satisfactory conversation before we got to sleep. It was renewed at an early hour next morning, and I never remember to have seen any person so completely overcome by the force of Truth. My feelings were such as led me to conclude, that if I had no other service in Ireland, this was enough, and my reward was ample for coming.

The meeting, so far, has been a solemn time: I have not had to open my mouth in any of the sittings. The disturbed state of this country is certainly appalling.

—————

Liverpool, Fifth Month 3rd, 1831.

My Dear Children,

Although I have had but rough doings on board the Etna steam-packet all night, yet I do not like the thoughts of letting this letter be sent off, without an assurance of dear love on my own behalf; at the same time not doubting that your dear mother has said all that is needful, in her letter.

We have had a very solemn Yearly Meeting, which continued nearly the whole of last week. The dreadful situation of the people in Ireland seems to have created very general apprehension in the minds of Friends, and I think very justly: in some counties open rebellion is the order of the day, and some bare-faced murders have been committed in broad daylight. These things, and the altogether appalling signs of the times, have combined to bring the minds of many into great humility and abasement of self. In addition to these outward circumstances, the general call from the ministry has been in effect, 'how long will you see the standard, and hear the sound of the trumpet? How long will you hear, and see, and disregard the loving-kindness of the Lord? It was rather remarkable, that the strangers present were all from places distant from each other; and yet all uniformly had to raise a similar language, and to warn the revolting, backsliding sons and daughters in our Society, of a day that is fast hastening upon them, that would shake every building not upon the true foundation—the eternal Rock of ages, Christ Jesus our Lord. I trust the call will sink deep into the minds of many, and bring into thoughtfulness, about their own soul's peace, such characters as the great Apostle describes, when he says,—“of whom I told you often, and now tell you even weeping, that they are the enemies of the cross of Christ.”

I understand that poor _______ was last week seized with illness, and died the next day: it was quite my intention to have paid him a visit, when I reached his neighbourhood; but I shall now be too late. I believe he has been much softened, since an illness which he had a few weeks previous to this last attack; and has been heard to lament the manner in which his family have been educated. We have but one instance recorded in Scripture of any being accepted at the last hour, that none may presume; but there is one, that none should despair.

Hoping shortly to speak to you all face to face, and to recount the mercies, the blessings, and the loving-kindness of the Lord to his poor finite creatures; I remain with full assurance of love, your affectionate father,

Daniel Wheeler

Chapter XII.

Return to Russia, 1831—Cholera at Petersburg, etc.—Epistle to Friends of York Quarterly Meeting, 1832 etc.

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield.

Sixth Month 28th, 1831, Ship Army, in the Cattegat.

I think I never witnessed greater variety and changes in the weather, than have befallen us since embarking on the 22nd. Each revolving day has been fraught with changes, again and again reminding us of the uncertainty of all things here below: each day has produced a calm, and each calm has been followed by boisterous winds. My dear wife has suffered greatly from sea sickness; I think I never before saw her so much reduced from this cause.

It has often been my lot, (and it seems as if the measure was not yet filled up,) to witness and to share many painful scenes; I sometimes think that a greater portion of suffering is necessary for me than for others, to hold in check and humble a disposition, which is naturally so prone to rebel. It is, at any rate, no more than I deserve, after the days without number that have been passed in folly and forgetfulness of that gracious Being, who has in unutterable condescension and mercy followed me from my youth up, even to the present day; and who, I humbly trust, will never forsake His poor unworthy creature: but by renewed trials and baptisms, will keep alive the vital spark, until He is graciously pleased to say, 'it is enough.' If I know myself, I think that I do not desire a life of ease; but I would gladly devote the few remaining days which may be my portion here, in declaring “the mighty acts of the Lord to my benighted fellow-creatures,” though unequal and unworthy to show forth half His praise.

[About this period the cholera prevailed with great virulence at Petersburg; the two following letters give some description of this awful visitation.]

To Sarah Backhouse, York.
Plains of Shoosharry, near Petersburg,

Eighth Month, 3Ist, O. S. 1831.

Let me acknowledge with reverent thankfulness and gratitude, that we are all in the enjoyment of the inestimable blessing of health, which nothing earthly can bestow; a high privilege at all times, but how much enhanced, when the earth has been opening around us, and swallowing up the people to a fearful extent from cholera, in some cases at the short notice of from two to three hours. Old and young, strong and weak, rich and poor, have fallen; but such as were in the constant habit of drinking spirituous liquors were amongst the first victims. Although we have had to stand as with our lives in our hands, yet we have been favoured beyond precedent; as out of our establishment, employing this year more than five hundred persons, not a single man has been taken off by this disease: when it is a well authenticated fact, that in one house in the city, (a large one of course, containing several families,) forty persons have died. What, indeed, can we render to the Most High, for such unmerited mercies showered down upon such poor unworthy creatures; while so many thousands have been hastily summoned hence by the undeniable herald of the grave!” Who can utter the mighty acts of the Lord? Who can show forth all His praise f Truly in vain is the attempt, my soul right well knows, for any of us to exalt and magnify His ever great and adorable name, without his strengthening aid; though glowing with renewed desires to proclaim to all mankind, if it were possible, his matchless and unutterable love.

From a variety of circumstances which occurred both before reaching the Sound, and after leaving it, our suspicions were awakened as to the state of things, in regard to the fatal disease at the place to which we were bending our course; but the weather threw us out of the track of the homeward-bound ships, and prevented our getting the least information till we entered the Gulf of Finland. From all the accounts we received from the vessels then spoken with, there seemed no doubt, but that the cholera was raging both at Cronstadt and Petersburg; and the nearer we approached to these places, the more alarming the reports became. One night, when off that part of the coast nearest to the seat of war, we were quite annoyed with the unpleasant state of the air,—although we were not in sight of the land, I believe, but the wind blew from that direction: it pervaded the whole ship, so that my wife, though in bed, discovered it, and thought it arose from something on board: the atmosphere seemed filled with tainted air. From this time our captain fumigated the ship daily, making free use of the chloride of lime, of which he had a plentiful supply.

The long continuance of contrary winds had hitherto tried our stock of patience rather severely; but now the time was at hand for a trial of faith, and of our resignation to that holy will, which is ever excellent, though it is beyond the reach of poor finite man to develope its ever merciful and all gracious designs. The captain had been told shortly after we sailed, that I had regularly arrived in Russia on one particular day; and he now began to talk of this in rather a sneering manner, saving, that my calculation had failed, for the ship was a long way off her port, and the wind still contrary. I told him we should be there soon enough in all probability, merely alluding to the sickness. When we had been twenty-two days from Hull, the wind changed, and once again blew a fine fresh gale from the westward, which, in ordinary cases, would have brightened every countenance on board; but such was the gloomy prospect before us, that even this, so often hoped for, had no power to charm. The breeze continued through the night, and the rising sun increased its strength; and our noble vessel seemed to rush onward with more speed than we desired, except as the recollection arose of the three dear children, whom we dared now only to look forward with a very trembling hope to behold again in mutability. As the day advanced, the wind became stronger and stronger, so that by noon we were favoured to anchor safely off the entrance to the Mole of Cronstadt, amidst a crowd of shipping. Is it not worthy of something more than ordinary remark, that we should arrive on the very same day, on which I had three times before been permitted to do so—the 15th of Seventh Month, N. S.? To me, this had a promising and strengthening effect; it was a pleasing coincidence, bringing to remembrance many great mercies and favours in times that are past, but now signally to be commemorated with admiration, gratitude, and praise to Him, who “commands the morning, and causes the dayspring to know its place.” It was indeed a day of humiliation, self-abasement, and bowing down amongst all around us, producing from the hardy captain the appropriate exclamation, 'there is nothing but the Almighty for it, at any rate:' and I believe he never spoke more strictly in adherence to truth in his life; for what could the possession of the whole world have done for us in this day of distress? The “secret tabernacle of the Most High” was the only hiding-place, the only pavilion of safety and refuge.

I would gladly impart to my dear friends, a share of the marvellous loving-kindness and tender mercy, which were so graciously displayed for our relief and consolation on this memorable day; but language is utterly incapable of conveying it,—words cannot set it forth. I think that nothing short of being placed in an exactly similar situation, could make it be felt and understood to its full extent. However much it may be thought an uncharitable desire, I cannot help craving, that all my beloved Friends were brought, by any means, under a similar state of feeling;—not a mole-hill to rest upon, humbled in the dust. How softened every heart!—how tearful every eye!—the Lord alone exalted! This is what I want all to witness for themselves; that they may indeed witness the power of everlasting love, to comfort and strengthen their hearts; and enable them to assert, in similar language with the great Apostle of the Gentiles, and from the same heart-felt knowledge, “we glory in tribulation.”

I have made a long digression from the subject of our arriving at Cronstadt, but my heart warms with the remembrance of the sustaining evidence, with which our minds were favoured in the midst of the scene of terror that awaited us. My poor wife was greatly supported, and only in one instance expressed any thing like discouragement, and that was at the thought of my having to expose myself amongst the people on shore. But it was not a time for any one to flinch, particularly when mercifully favoured, as was my happy portion, to banish all fear, and not experience a single desire to arise, to be any where but where my lot was cast.

On landing, some difficulties arose from a new law respecting passengers' luggage: the captain proposed applying to the British Consul for advice. I felt averse to this; but nothing else suggesting, it was attempted. It was soon ascertained that no person was admitted into his office; and that letters, etc., were received with a pair of tongs, for fear of infection. It seemed as if nothing was to be achieved by any contrivance of our own; but the very barrier which at first appeared insurmountable, proved to be the channel through which relief and comfort were to flow. This new law occasioned my having to go to a particular department of the Custom House, when I was accosted by a stranger with a letter in his hand, who asked if it was for me. The measure was now filled; the tide which had flowed in such an appalling current, was now at its height, and beginning to turn. The letter was in dear William's hand writing; and I had the joy of finding, that my children had wholly escaped the ravages of this awful disease; which was considered to be at its height, just about the time of our arrival. I hastened on board again with my letter, and will leave you to judge of what followed, and to partake of the joy which once more we were permitted to share together,—I hope with humble gratitude. I was on shore again until late; but every thing moved tardily, and no wonder, when the judgments of the Almighty were at the very doors of most, in so striking a manner. In this small town one hundred and fifteen died that day.

After another day unavoidably spent at Cronstadt, we got into the steam-boat on the 17th of Seventh Month, and reached the city about noon. It being First day, it was expected that a considerable number of persons would be waiting the arrival of the steam-boat, as in former similar instances, it has sometimes been difficult to get through the crowd. But the contrast was so remarkable, that I did not suppose we had reached our proper destination, as there were only three or four people belonging to the wharf to be seen, and not a single carriage standing for hire: scarcely any body was to be seen in the streets, and in some the grass was growing. We were at length favoured to reach our abode, and to find all well, to our mutual rejoicing,—such was the abundant and unmerited mercy bestowed upon us. William had anticipated our arrival, and thoughtfully got the letter conveyed only the day before, which afforded us so much relief. If it had not been for the new regulation, it is probable the letter would not have found me, as I should not have had occasion to go to the Custom House. How admirably things are brought about, and a way made, when to finite comprehension none could be expected.

I hope you are at seasons favoured sensibly to feel the presence of the ever blessed Master: do not suffer yourself to be discouraged, though He may seem to tarry long; but remember that “in due season we shall reap, if we faint not.” The path of suffering is that which leads to blessedness and glory; and it is only those who are willing to suffer with Christ Jesus, who can expect to reign with Him: therefore be not weary in well-doing. Let us humbly endeavour to dwell low, and abide with Him; being “buried with Him in baptism;” that so we may be among the happy number that shall rise with Him to life everlasting. I am more and more confirmed in believing, that nothing can separate us from His love; neither nakedness, nor peril, nor sword. Though we may indeed be as “killed all the day long,” and “accounted as sheep for the slaughter;” yet as we abide in His fear, “watching unto prayer,” “praying always with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit,”—the incense will be continually burning: and “in all things we are more than conquerors, through Him that loved us;”—to whom be the praise and the glory forever.

—————

To Richard Cockin, Doncaster.
Shoosharry Establishment, Ninth Month 22nd, 1831, O. S.

In my last letter, I could give few particulars as to the number of persons that has fallen victims to this disorder, nor will the total number ever be known or made public. I have heard through a channel that cannot be doubted, that on the day we landed, eight hundred died in Petersburg. The published accounts state the total loss throughout the empire, at fifty-two thousand; and, we may be sure, that this is a very moderate calculation indeed. Through mercy, this calamity seems nearly overpast; and how should I rejoice if it was in my power to say, that the inhabitants have learned righteousness, while the “judgments of the Lord” have been so signally manifested in the earth.

It is really astonishing what a degree of ignorance prevails, or what cause can have operated to deceive the people; many of whom at this day do not believe that such a complaint has ever existed; but suppose the mortality has been occasioned by poison administered by persons in the employ of the Poles. This delusion has itself caused a waste of human life. It would of course help to exasperate the public mind against the Poles; but this was not all, for it caused the lower orders to rise, and in their blind zeal, it is said, people were actually destroyed on suspicion of being paid agents: the doctors were implicated in this suspicion; and I believe at least one was killed by the rabble. The fact is, the doctors were altogether at a loss how to treat the disease: all their skill was baffled completely; and as almost every case was fatal to which they were called, when this awful visitation first commenced, it was considered sufficient proof that they were the authors of the mischief. When we arrived, not above five out of every hundred cases recovered. Some of these objects of suspicion were seized and searched, and compelled to swallow any article found upon them, supposed to be poison, in order to ascertain their guilt. We heard of one on whom a smelling bottle containing strong French salts was found; the test in this case, it is said, proved fatal. In another instance, the owner of a set of castors was compelled to swallow the contents; but by taking an emetic, he escaped material suffering. The rabble broke into some of the hospitals, and speedily liberated the patients: in one instance, they threw the doctor out of the window; he escaped being much hurt, and was actually carried up stairs and thrown out a second time, and fell a sacrifice to their fury. The confusion was at one time so great, that some people are said to have died of fear, and many fled from the neighbourhood. Others shut themselves up to escape this terrible malady, but in repeated instances, those who took the greatest precautions, were the first carried off.

We cannot wonder at every effort being used on the part of the government, to endeavour to check the progress of the disease; but these efforts were not always well devised or executed. The police very improperly took up every man, whom they suspected of having the complaint, and carried him off to a hospital; where, in spite of all he could say, he was immediately treated as a patient, and many such, perhaps from afterwards taking the complaint, never came out again alive. This treatment exasperated the people to such a degree, that they broke through all bounds, as they thought, in self-defence. One of our men was taken up, charged with having the disease; in vain he declared that he was in perfect health,.—nothing would serve but his going to the hospital, where he was quickly treated as a patient; but was released from his perilous situation by the multitude getting possession of the hospital, when he availed himself of the opportunity of escape, and returned to his work. With a view to prevent the contagion from spreading, the dead were hastily put into coffins, and it is very possible, that some were coffined before they were actually deceased,—of course unintentionally. However, some coffins were detected with living bodies in them; so that altogether the scene of confusion scarcely ever had its parallel.

Shortly after we arrived at Cronstadt, my attention was directed to a large open lighter, full of men and horses, crowded in all positions. These people were in the act of flying from the infection, hoping to reach the other side of the Gulf, and get off to the villages up the country. I think I never before saw such a closely stowed cargo of men and beasts, in all the course of my pilgrimage.

At one of the military colonies a dreadful affray took place, arising from a similar cause, in which the soldiers suspected their own officers: it is impossible to say how many, but it is reported, that a considerable number of officers were killed, and some of them with unheard-of cruelty. It really seemed as if the most trifling cause was enough to “turn every man's hand against his fellow.” I mentioned in a former letter, that no part of our establishment had lost a single man; but we afterwards lost a poor woman, who had been in the city, and fell ill the next day. Every thing in our power was done for her, but all was in vain. Two women were employed to attend on her; but it was quite needful to look well after them: as an instance, the poor creature had had a warm bath, and in getting her out, her nurses perceived that her countenance was distorted, which so alarmed them, that they let her fall upon the floor, and ran away from her; so that it was absolutely necessary to compel them to return, and stay with her. Now, what must have been the neglected situation of thousands of these poor people, when it was with great difficulty that we could procure tolerable assistance for even one.

The past has been a memorable year indeed; I seemed to partake pretty largely of changes, while hovering about my native land; and yet how much was to be passed through to complete a year, from the date of our leaving this country to its next anniversary.

I have brought back with me impressions, to which my mind continually reverts, when looking at the past; impressions strongly engraven on my heart by the love, unity, and, may I not say, godly sincerity, and kindness, of many of my friends in England and Ireland. Although deprived of all these as to the outward, the remembrance of them remains sweet and precious, and I trust will lastingly endure with freshness and fragrance, and brighten the days, that I may yet have to sojourn in Mesech, and dwell in the tents of Kedar.

—————

To Friends of York Quarterly Meeting.

Near Petersburg, First Month 25th, 1832.

Under a renewed sense of the Lord's manifold and tender mercies, which, to His praise and to His glory be it spoken, have compassed us about “as with a shield,” since we last saw each other; my soul feels bound thus to recognize the good hand that has led us, and to salute my dear brethren and sisters, in a feeling of that love which cannot change: earnestly desiring that “grace, mercy, and peace, from God the Father, and our Lord Jesus Christ, may be multiplied to them;” causing the hearts of the faithful to rejoice,—and joy, gladness, and thanksgiving to abound amongst them.

Although far separated from each other as to the outward, yet such is the glorious privilege of the least living member of the true church universal, that nothing can separate, or prevent us from standing fast in the one Holy Spirit, striving together in one mind, for the faith of the gospel;—“till we all come in the unity of the faith, and of the knowledge of the Son of God, unto a perfect man, unto the measure of the stature of the fulness of Christ.” For assuredly, my beloved Friends, a day of trial is approaching, yes, hastening upon the nations, when nothing short of an individual heartfelt knowledge of Him, in whom we profess to believe, will stand unshaken by the storm.

Great is the solicitude I feel on behalf of our highly favoured religious Society, that it may be preserved immovable upon this its ancient and sure foundation, Jesus Christ—“Christ in you the hope of glory” which never did, and never will, fail those, who in simplicity believe, and faithfully build thereon, nothing doubting. By diligently maintaining the watch in that holy light, bestowed in redeeming love on every individual of the human race, the snares of the insidious adversary, although laid in the most insinuating manner, will be detected and broken; the specious guise of a false religion itself will be penetrated. This has assuredly slain its thousands, who dazzled and distracted by creaturely activity and excitement, have thus been corrupted from the simplicity that is in Christ. “Watch therefore, and pray always; that you may be accounted worthy to escape all these things that shall come to pass, and to stand before the Son of man.” Blessed and holy injunction,—never out of season,—never more needed!

We may feel lamentably conscious of unworthiness, weakness, and incapacity from our manifold backslidings, to come up “to the help of the Lord against the mighty,” or to unveil the subtle workings of the mystery of iniquity to the sight of others. These feelings are painful; and how great is the need of circumspection under them, lest, in the impatience of our spirits, heightened as this too often is, by the ill-advised example and counsel of those about us, we should attempt to stay the ark with unsanctified and unauthorized hands; or lest we should countenance to our own condemnation willings and runnings, on the part of those with whom we may stand connected, which, however specious in themselves, nevertheless contribute most essentially and insidiously to promote the kingdom of anti-christ, already alas! extensive in the earth.

Frequently am I brought under appalling apprehensions for us, as a people, sought out and chosen of the Lord: for had we followed the footsteps of our honourable predecessors in religious profession, who bore the burden and heat of a day of deep suffering, in the faithful support, in their original brightness, of those principles, which they transmitted to us,—the spiritual beauty of the gospel church might have shone forth even through us, with a splendour which the different professors of the Christian name, could neither have gainsayed nor resisted. And it is awfully impressed upon my mind, I might almost say, it is given me awfully to believe, that if the “world, and the things of the world,” which “are not of the Father,” had not stolen away our hearts from His love, the glad tidings of that gospel, which is indeed “the power of God unto salvation,” would, long before this, have been proclaimed in remote, in heathen portions of the habitable globe, by instruments raised up from amongst us, duly prepared and clothed with the true baptizing authority of the Lord Jesus; whose “inheritance is the heathen, and the uttermost parts of the earth his possession.” He alone can endue His messengers with “power from on high,” in His name to open the eyes of the spiritually blind, to turn them from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God. Mark, then, the awful consequences of our short-comings as a people; and let us tremble, lest God should visit our iniquity upon us; and the awful language should be sounded in our ears:—“The kingdom of God shall be taken from you, and given to a nation or people bringing forth the fruits thereof.” “Watch, therefore,” and remember, “and pray always” for “the time is come that judgment must begin at the house of God what then shall the end be of them that obey not the gospel of God!”

“Fear, and the pit, and the snare are upon you, O! inhabitant of the earth!” from which nothing but a Saviour's all-powerful arm, can extricate and deliver. All are involved in the momentous consequences; yet it is an individual work, and admits of no delay. Then, dear Friends of every age and of every class, let us hasten to it in earnest: let us “humble ourselves under the mighty hand of God,” even to the state of little children; and turn inward to his pure unflattering witness, which cannot deceive, or be deceived. Let us accomplish a diligent search, and patiently examine how far those indispensable conditions are submitted to on our part, without which none can follow the blessed Jesus. Where is that self-denial and the daily cross He enjoins? Are we denying ourselves those gratifications of time and sense, which nourish sin, and keep alive in us the evil propensities of fallen nature? Have we taken up that daily cross, and offered all to Him, “who died for us and rose again?” It is not giving up this or that particular thing that will suffice: a full surrender of the will must be made to Him, “whose right it is to reign.” Let none plead for disobedience in what they may think little things, on the ground of their being so. If such they really are, they are the more easily parted with; and our tenacity in wishing to reserve them, assuredly indicates that they are of more importance in our practical estimation than we may be disposed to allow. Let no man deceive himself;—unqualified obedience is the necessary condition of discipleship. Without it we cannot be consistent followers of our Lord; and if not followers of Him, we cannot serve Him, be where He is, nor learn of Him that meekness and lowliness of heart, which draw down heavenly blessings and regard, and which he alono can bestow.

As the sorrowful declension which has so marred the beauty of our religious Society, may be traced to departing from this heavenly indwelling principle of light, life, and love; so our restoration to primitive purity can only be effected by returning unto the Lord with full purpose of heart, in the depths of humility and self-abasement:—yes, my Friends, nothing less than this will do. We must deny ourselves, take up our daily cross, and follow Him, who is “holy, harmless, undefiled, separate from sinners, and made higher than the heavens”—ever mighty to save, and to deliver; and who will deliver out of every distress the soul that in sincerity seeks Him.

Come brother—come sister—come all my dear Friends; let no earthly consideration whatever be suffered to hinder this important work: for “the night is far spent, the day is at hand; let us therefore cast off the works of darkness, and let us put on the armour of light” that we may no longer bring forth fruit, whereof we are ashamed,—for the end of those things is death; but that we may “be strong in the Lord, and in the power of His might, to stand against the wiles of the devil.” “For we wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against principalities, against powers, against the rulers of the darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high places.” Let us “pray always, with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, watching thereunto, with all perseverance;” striving together in one mind for the faith of the gospel, even for that faith which works by love, purifies the heart, and gives victory over the world. Thus shall we indeed be found with “our loins girded about, and our lights burning, we ourselves like unto men who wait for their lord, that when he comes and knocks, they may open unto him immediately” even unto Him who said—“Behold I stand at the door and knock, if any man hear my voice, and open the door, I will come in to him, and will sup with him, and he with me.” Then “lift up your heads, O you gates! even lift them up you everlasting doors! and the King of glory shall come in. Who is this King of glory? The Lord of hosts, He is the King of glory.”

In the love of the gospel, I remain your affectionate friend and brother,

Daniel Wheeler.

—————

To John Hipsley, Hull.

Second Month 3rd, 1832.

I sincerely hope that fruit will result from the labours of the Committees [of Yearly Meeting] in different parts of the country: it is high time for the Society to be roused, and awakened to a sense of its deplorable state, which appears to me, in too many instances, to be quite affecting and mournful.

I have lately written a letter and forwarded it to Sheffield, for the examination of the Friends of Balby Monthly Meeting, addressed to Friends of York Quarterly Meeting. I began it with the expectation of writing to Balby Monthly Meeting; but I found it must have a more general circulation than the Monthly Meeting could give it. If it should be approved and accepted, it cannot be too widely spread; and with its present address it may probably be sent to the different Monthly Meetings, and from there to the Preparative meetings, which would be a great relief to me. But whichever way it may terminate, I must rejoice; for if accepted, a great weight will be removed from my shoulders; and if thought objectionable, I shall still rejoice in having endeavoured to discharge my duty; which will enable me to bear the disappointment with patience and submission.

—————

To Elizabeth Backhouse, York.

Third Month 29th, 1832.

Although a very poor creature myself, and often bowed down under a weight of exercise, yet I am at times comforted to feel great love in my heart for my dear friends in England; greatly desiring that the present awful aspect of things may be an effectual means of driving every individual of us home to the precious principle of Truth, so mercifully implanted in every heart. The importance of this, as regards our own highly favoured Society as well as mankind in general, is more and more stamped upon my mind; believing that a great weight of responsibility will rest upon us, if instead of letting our light so shine, that others may see and glorify our heavenly Father, we should unhappily be found darkening by our conduct and conversation the path which leads to the kingdom; and thereby causing others to stumble and turn aside. Independently of this consideration, how great is the loss we are sustaining, in contenting ourselves with merely hearing of the inestimable treasure, instead of possessing the thing itself; which at seasons would fill our hearts with love, and peace, and joy unspeakable.

I cannot help mourning over some who are seriously disposed, and desirous of doing what is right; and yet suffer their minds to be led astray with a continued round of publications, containing accounts of the experience of others,—things perhaps valuable in themselves, but still only tending to keep the mind afloat on the surface; feeding upon visibles which can never nourish the vital part, which remains still unsatisfied and hungering: and all for lack of sinking down to the living and eternal substance; which if once tasted, nothing short of the same soul-sustaining food could ever satisfy again.

Now this is what I want all my beloved friends to enjoy, and to give up all to purchase; to offer up all in measure, upon the same cross to the natural will and inclination, as that on which the meek and lowly Saviour of the world was crucified; and I verily believe, that this must be the heartfelt experience of us all, before we can witness the fellowship of His sufferings, and know Him, and the power of His resurrection, being made conformable to his death. It is those only, who are buried with Him in baptism, that will rise with Him; it is only those, who are willing to suffer in this life with Him, who will reign with Him in life everlasting. There are none who can enter into this truly interesting employment, of engaging in the blessed and heavenly warfare, with the same advantages as those in early life; because the minds of such are undoubtedly much less charged and encumbered with the surfeiting cares and perplexities of this transitory and perishing world. To these, therefore, I would particularly address myself, with an earnest recommendation in tender solicitude, that they would look at the great and holy pattern; who, though the Son of the Highest, “made himself of no reputation, and took upon Him the form of a servant, and was made in the likeness of men: and being found in fashion as a man, he humbled himself, and became obedient unto death, even the death of the cross. Wherefore God also has highly exalted him, and given him a name which is above every name; that at the name of Jesus every knee should bow.” And greatly do I desire, that we may all be amongst the number of those that believe in his power; that so our hearts may be softened into the same child-like obedience, even to the death of every thing in us, that stands opposed to the Divine will. Then, indeed, with the heart shall we believe unto righteousness, and with the tongue confession will, unavoidably and involuntarily, be made unto salvation, even “that Jesus Christ is Lord, to the glory of God the Father.”

I hope that all your fears and anxieties are hushed at present, and changed into gratitude and thankfulness to Him, who has thus far conducted the steps of your brother in safety, and borne up his head upon the mighty ocean; enabling him to put full trust and confidence, in the Almighty and compassionate arm of never-failing strength, as an infant slumbers on the bosom of its mother. He is often present in my thoughts, and my heart often follows him in love and sympathy across the trackless deep; but thus far no feeling of discouragement as to his safety has dared to show itself. I do greatly desire that the work in which he is engaged may abundantly prosper, to the promotion of the Divine glory, the welfare of our fellow-men, and his own peace and comfort,—the blessed and sure rewards which crown the faithful labourer. For “he that reaps receives wages, and gathers fruit unto life eternal; that he that sows and he that reaps may rejoice together.” May that Almighty power, in whose presence is life, continue to surround him by night and by day, and strengthen him to proclaim the day of the Lord, even amongst those who are strangers to His ever great and excellent name; that glory to the righteous Lord may resound from far, and the voice of thanksgiving and praise be heard on high.

Chapter XIII.

Prospect of Distant Religious Service—Resigns His Appointment In Russia—Leaves His Family, and Sails For England, 1832—His Prospect of Visiting in Gospel Love the Inhabitants of Some of the South Sea Islands, etc., Laid Before His Friends.

[About this time, under a prospect of distant religious service, our dear father believed it right to resign his appointment under the Russian government, and to repair to his native country. The commencement and progress of this movement, are alluded to in the following extracts from his letters.]

To John Hipsley, Hull.

Seventh Month 5th, 1832, O. S.

I hinted to you some time back, the probability of a change being about to take place, as to our prospects in this country; which is now so far developed, as to enable me to inform you, with some little certainty, how things are going on.

For many months past, it has clearly appeared to be my duty to relinquish my engagements in this land; and as way has from time to time opened, I have gradually moved forward under this apprehension; and have been mercifully, peacefully, and abundantly confirmed in this step, by the difficulties, which at first appeared too mountainous to be overcome, having shrunk into insignificant mole-hills, as the time approached to encounter them. Now every obstacle seems to be removed: I have, I think, proceeded throughout, as things were opened before me, consulting with my beloved family, as each succeeding step has been taken; and in every instance, what has been proposed to them, has found a place in their minds, and been assented to. To break up all at once an establishment so extensive as that in which I have been engaged, would be attended with serious loss and inconvenience; and when the unbounded confidence which has been reposed in us is taken into view, extra care and caution seem the more needful, that there should be no unhandsome conduct to complain of; and I trust that I have always been anxious to avoid every thing, in the smallest degree calculated to cast a shade upon our religious Society, the principles of which, I have good reason for believing, are held in considerable estimation at this day by many high in office, as well as by others who have had more frequent interaction with us. After stating undisguisedly my true motive for wishing to retire, it was proposed that my eldest son should succeed mo as head of this concern; and that in all respects, every thing else should remain on its original footing.

Although this outline seems to occupy but a small space on paper, it has, from first to last, taken about seven months to bring all the particulars to bear; but the Ukaze [or imperial edict] is now actually signed.

I have frequently mentioned having arrived on the same day, when coming here from England, namely, the 3rd of Seventh Month, O. S.; and now it has come to pass, without the possibility of any contrivance, that on that very same day I am liberated from Russia. I have already had a parting and affecting interview with Prince Galitzin: he particularly stipulated that I should write to him, saying, 'What is good for your soul, is good for mine.' I feel thankful in being able to say, that there is no perceptible alteration in him, after an acquaintance of fifteen years. He has ordered a certificate to be prepared for me in English, for the satisfaction of my friends, which he will sign on behalf of the Emperor.

But although things seem to have been so far set in order, as to enable me to leave this country in a comfortable manner; yet the trial of faith, and patience, and of every affectionate feeling has still to be passed through, as regards my dear wife and family here: for though the way is clearly seen and opened for my going to England, yet I have not the slightest prospect of any settled residence there; but from the impressions which have been sealed upon my mind, by day and night for many months past, very different scenes are open before me. As I have from the first, made my wife acquainted with the uncertainty to which I am looking forward, she feels best satisfied to remain, for the present at least, in this country.

I have sometimes thought, as so great a willingness has been wrought in my mind to part with every earthly thing, that perhaps, when all was settled as to outward affairs, it might be only as a preparation for quitting this scene of conflict altogether: but I have been enabled to look forward to this result, with the same calmness and resignation, should it be the will of Him who has done so great things for me, and shown me the path of life; whose excellency is over Israel, and who gives strength and power to His people, to praise and “glorify” Him, even “in the fires.”

[Soon after the date of the foregoing, he took leave of his family, and set sail for England:—the following letter is written when on the point of quitting the port of Cronstadt.]

To His Wife.

Cronstadt Mole, Seventh Month 20th, 1832, O. S.

My Dearest Jane,

As the captain talks of getting out of the Mole in a short time, I think it is advisable to scribble a few lines before the scuffle begins, lest I should then be prevented.

I cannot, of course, have much to communicate as to fresh events, the time is so short since you and the rest of my dear family have been removed from my sight: I have, however, abundant cause to magnify that never-failing arm of power, which has so marvellously supported us through a dispensation, not of an every day sort; and which still continues to preserve in that lowly quiet of mind, which subjects the will of the creature to that of the Almighty Creator,—even to the binding of the sacrifice as to the horns of the altar, without reserving any thing which might, like the “bleating of the sheep, and the lowing of the oxen,” tend to self-condemnation, or open a door for reproach and accusation, wherein the enemy could exult or rejoice.

I hope we shall have rather more settlement when we get to sea, as the captain is now much harassed in concluding his arrangements with the Custom-house, etc. Last evening, both he and the mate stayed with us, while I read a psalm or two; but it seemed as if they could scarcely be still during the reading, and it was almost an impossibility afterwards. This morning we have had it to ourselves in a comfortable manner, as both captain and mate have been closely engaged. I find my fellow-passenger a very agreeable companion.

I regretted to find you had been writing so late the night I left home; although it was very consoling to me to receive your note, which I did not read till this morning, as I was not aware the packet contained any thing for me. It has been indeed a trying circumstance for a long time past to me, whenever I have looked forward to taking my departure from you, although I have endeavoured to keep it wholly to myself; but I am comforted in a belief that has been graciously begotten for some time past in my heart, that no less reward will await you and our dear children, in thus fully resigning me up in meek submission to the Divine will, than will be my portion, who have to leave you all, if found faithful to the farther unfoldings of it. A fresh evidence of this has been sealed upon my mind this morning, in an encouraging manner; and I do greatly desire that we may all, by keeping close to our heavenly Teacher in humble watchfulness, be favoured to witness that peace, which “the God of peace, that brought again from the dead our Lord Jesus, that great Shepherd of the sheep,” alone can bestow.

I am yours, very affectionately,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To The Same.

Seventh Month 29th, in sight of Gothland.

My Dearest Jane,

We have now been out of Cronstadt nine days, and with the exception of one day, it has been so far, I think, the finest passage I ever experienced, either of late or in former years. Almost every day there has been a fair wind, but gentle; and when against us, so light as scarcely to raise a desire for it to be otherwise. I have spent much of my time on deck, both by day and by night, and am thankful in being able to say, that I can look back with renewed satisfaction and comfort, at having thus far proceeded in an apprehended line of duty: although at times I feel as the lonely sparrow on the house top, or as the rambling swallow without a home, and still only preparing to take flight for distant climes, while pressing onward farther and farther, from all that I hold dear in this transitory world.

We have been thus far enabled to keep up our readings twice a-day in the cabin, although at times a little unsettled; the captain and mate mostly remain with us. On First day, I furnished each sailor with a tract; either Thoughts by the sea side, or The Lighthouse, with which they all seemed pleased; and the captain requested to have one of each for himself.

Two or three days after leaving Cronstadt, I began to suspect, from some remarks which I had made about the ship, that she was not quite so tight as had been represented. She had been pumped that morning in a superficial manner; but after a few hours I took an opportunity of sounding the well myself, when no one was near, and found there were twenty-two inches of water in it. I then told the captain, when she had been pumped, and what water was in her,—to his great surprise and mortification. This circumstance made no small stir, and every possible exertion was made to discover the cause, as it was no light matter. The ship's company, who sleep under the forecastle, declared that when she plunged into the sea, they could hear the water rush into her: this led to further investigation, and the carpenter cut his way down into the cargo so low, that no doubt remained but this was the case. Yesterday being fine, with little wind and a smooth sea, the carpenter went overboard on a stage, and actually found the leak under the surface of the water; but not deeper than he could get at, by sitting up to the waist in the water, except when she plunged him now and then up to the shoulders. It is a great favour this was discovered before a large quantity of water had collected in her, and the cargo damaged, if nothing worse. I intend, if permitted, to keep a sharp look out upon it still.

—————

To Sarah Smith, Sheffield.

Ninth Month 3rd, 1832.

Through that loving-kindness which is better than life, I am once more permitted to announce myself upon British ground, favoured with the rich blessing of health.

It is six weeks this night, since I left my beloved wife at Shoosharry, and, accompanied by my children, went down to Cronstadt to embark for Hull. My dear wife was as well as usual; but remained at home, as her going to Cronstadt would have been beyond her strength, particularly at a moment when every feeling was stretched as far as human nature could well bear; it would have been adding anguish to the cup of affliction and distress about to be handed. “Has God forgotten to be gracious? no verily, my dear friend; His mercies, unbounded as his love, enabled us to drink it with all its dregs, bitter indeed to flesh and blood: but if He has blessed it, it will—it shall be blessed. I am very thankful in being able to tell you, that my beloved wife was supported throughout the whole conflict in a marvellous manner; and she evinced to her dear family a calmness, resignation, and fortitude, not often equalled in like painful circumstances, and but seldom surpassed; giving me up without a murmur, though without a glimpse of when we shall meet again. Surely the incense is still burning, and I humbly trust the sacrifice will be accepted by Him, who more than thirty-two years ago brought us together; and who now in the excellency of His will, is pleased to separate us again from each other; and who alone can sanctify to us and our dear children, this and every other trial yet in store for us, to His own praise and glory.

I purpose returning to Doncaster in a day or two, where I think I shall be more secluded than at Sheffield, and out of the reach of numberless kindly intended inquiries, which are at present likely to remain unsatisfied; besides, my present situation renders me only fit company for owls and pelicans, and other inhabitants of the wilderness, to which the desert place is most congenial,—feeling as one born out of due time, and as an alien even in my father's house.

Daniel Wheeler

P. S.—What a favour it is, that my dear wife and family are strengthened, not only to rise above every disposition to repine, but rather to rejoice in that we are accounted worthy to suffer for the great name's sake,—in the promotion of the cause of truth and righteousness in the earth, according to the measure allotted us.

—————

To His Wife.

Sheffield, Ninth Month 5th, 1832.

My Dearest Jane,

The meetings in this town on First day were both heavy laborious seasons; but a public meeting held the following evening, was an open favoured time. Being again permitted to sit in the meeting house at Sheffield with many of our old friends, was a circumstance which had never formed a part of my finite calculations, when I left this neighbourhood last year; and more particularly in so short a time as has elapsed: it seemed for a season something like a dream. I had no share in the labour of the public meeting (appointed by Elizabeth Robson,) but the will of the creature was I think prostrated before its Almighty Creator: and being emptied of self, I was mercifully enabled to prefer a feeble petition on behalf of you and the dear children, under a sensible evidence of near access being vouchsafed to the throne of grace, in silent breathings for your preservation and welfare.

Ninth Month 22nd, 1832.

I informed the Select Meeting held at Doncaster on the 12th (nineteen persons being present,) of the object which has brought me to England. I had also to bear a short testimony to the worth of dear William Smith, who it appeared had been appointed a representative for the last Quarterly Meeting; but was prevented attending it by the sickness which preceded his death. His loss has been greatly lamented by people of various denominations, and I think it may be safely said, he was one in whom there was no guile. His end was truly consoling; although scarcely able to move hand or foot from extreme debility, his mouth was filled with praises to the Lord; so that the physician who was present, was quite struck with the scene. He was interred, I think, about six hours afterwards,—almost immediate burial being insisted on in cases of cholera.

Next day, the Monthly Meeting was held; at the close of which, members were requested to keep their seats. Ann Fairbank returned a certificate which had been granted her to visit the meetings in and about London. When this was finished, I was strengthened to spread before Friends, the prospect which had been presented to the view of my mind, of visiting in the love of the gospel the inhabitants of some of the islands of the Pacific Ocean, New South Wales, and Van Diemen's Land. I stood up with the words, “the cup which my Father has given me, shall I not drink it;”—and eventually laid the whole affair fully before the meeting. A very solid and solemn interval succeeded. I warned the meeting not to let affectionate sympathy bias their minds, and recommended that all should endeavour to sink down to the precious gift in every heart, that so a right judgment might be come to; seeing it was a subject in which much was implicated, not only as regarded myself and the Society at large, but the Truth itself. At length, a general expression of concurrence and near sympathy broke forth, from the head to the uttermost skirts of the garment, as the ointment poured forth, which draws down the heavenly blessing. Many vocal petitions ascended on the occasion, as well I believe as universal mental ones. It was, indeed, a memorable day, and one in which I most earnestly desire you may all be permitted to share, though far distant, through the influence of that Almighty power, which is omnipotent and omnipresent. A committee was appointed to prepare a certificate for me.

I do not know how I may fare in our Quarterly Meeting, but I feel resigned as to the result. I have enjoyed feelings, which are quite undeclarable, since my concern has been brought forward; and greatly do I desire, that all my dear family may come to the same blessed experience,—which will most assuredly be their happy portion, if they are but willing to resign all into the hands of the dear Redeemer, and not be ashamed of acknowledging Him before men, although they may be accounted fools by the worldly wise. But I am thoroughly persuaded, that nothing short of the whole heart, without the smallest reservation, must be offered, however great the cross to the natural will; for it is in little things that the enemy keeps the soul in bondage, which answer his purpose as well as greater matters, which would be too glaring to be submitted to. For the Lord of life and glory will not dwell in the same temple with idols, however insignificant such may be in our estimation; the day of the Lord “will not come, except there come a falling away first” from these little things, or a turning from them; “and that man of sin be revealed, the son of perdition:” for “he who now restrains will do so, until he be taken out of the way; and then shall that wicked be revealed, whom the Lord shall consume with the spirit of his mouth, and shall destroy with the brightness of His coming.” The heart thus cleansed, will become the secret place, or the holy place of the tabernacle of the Most High; through which the crystal river flows, and in which nothing but unmixed sacrifice is accepted: the least impurity in our affections will be beheld in its transparent stream.

I am obliged by the kind messages from _______ and _______; and feel greatly desirous that they may all be favoured to see beyond the shadows of things, to the living and eternal substance, which is durable as the days of heaven; that they may indeed be able to say, from living and heartfelt experience, “We know that the Son of God is come, and has given us an understanding, that we may know Him that is true; and we are in Him that is true, even in His Son Jesus Christ. This is the true God, and eternal life.” “He that believes on the Son of God has the witness in himself:”—yes, “he that has the Son has life; and he that has not the Son of God has not life.”

—————

To His Children

York, Ninth Month 28th, 1832.

My Dear Children,

On Fourth day, the 26th, the Quarterly Meeting was held. After a solemn meeting for worship, it was proposed that the women Friends should keep their seats. After the clerk had opened the meeting with the usual minute, and called over the names of the representatives from each Monthly Meeting, this large assembly again dropped into silence, which remained uninterrupted, until broken by myself nearly in the following words:—'No wonder if a trembling mortal feels appalled at approaching conflict, when the dear Son of God himself exclaimed, “Father save me from this hour:”—for although we may at times feel a willingness to go with our Lord and Master, as unto prison and unto death; yet such is the frailty and weakness of human nature, that when the trying hour comes, we are ready to deny Him. But we have a great and glorious High Priest, whose most precious attribute is mercy; who will not break the bruised reed, nor suffer it to be broken; who is touched with a feeling—a compassionate sense of our infirmities,—is mighty to save and to deliver, and who will deliver out of every distress, all those that put their trust and confidence in Him.' And thus, eventually, was laid the whole weight of the concern upon the shoulders of the Quarterly Meeting. As I thought you would like to have minute particulars, I have endeavoured to remember what passed, and I think the above is almost verbatim.

The meeting now began to feel the weight of the responsibility cast upon it, and again settled down in great solemnity. A considerable number of Friends expressed their unity and concurrence; and my dear wife and family had a full share in the prayers and sympathy of their friends, to my great rejoicing and thankfulness. After a full hour occupied in this manner, it was concluded that a committee should be appointed to express the sense of the meeting, in an endorsement of my certificate.

[The same letter contains the following account of a remarkable communication made in the Yearly Meeting of 1832.]

Thinking the substance of a testimony borne in the Yearly Meeting this year, will interest you, I shall transcribe it, as follows:

In a striking and awful manner Sarah L. Grubb adverted to the permitted visitation of the pestilence in this country; and afterwards she had a very close and powerful testimony to the meeting, on the present state of our religious Society, by way of solemn warning of the approaching judgments of the Lord upon us for the neglect of those things, which in a peculiar manner, were given us to bear in the early times of our Society, when Friends were called out from the world to be a separate people. Her concern was, that we should return to first principles; but her more especial warning was, that if there were not a coming down from the heights to which many have climbed, there were those amongst us who might be compared to the golden vessels of the temple, such as had really stood the fire, and had not only been rightly filled, but employed of the Lord to communicate to the people, who would be permitted to be carried away captives to Babylon. That there was and is amongst us, a Babel now building, whose top is intended to reach unto heaven, which must and will come down; that there is, (though not clearly seen by ourselves,) a peeling and scattering amongst us, which is clearly shown in the vision and light of the Lord;—and that if we did not repent and return, we should be left very few in number. But that the Lord would not leave himself without a people, etc. She spoke farther in reference to some, who had been rightly gifted to speak the word of the Lord as from the mouth of the Lord; but who for lack of dwelling low and deep enough, had had their brightness dimmed,—adding, “when Ephraim spoke trembling, he exalted himself in Israel, but when he offended in Baal, he died.”

It does seem as if what has hitherto been dispensed, had made but little impression on the minds of the people in this land; and I fear this is the case in many other places. What could have been done, that has not been done, to bring mankind to the knowledge of Him, who is the author of eternal salvation to all them that obey him? but if they will not hearken, how shall they obey? How ready and willing most are, to hearken to the teaching of poor finite man; but how reluctantly they will submit to hearken to the voice of God! Like the Israelites of old, they would rather hear the voice of Moses than of Him; and if we consider the hundreds who are busily engaged in turning the attention of the people to the letter, to the traditions and ordinances of man, “after the rudiments of the world, and not after Christ,” what must be the end thereof?

Sheffield, Tenth Month 8th.

I was at both meetings at Sheffield yesterday; that in the forenoon was large and satisfactory. I had to set forth the beauty, purity, and loveliness of the gospel church, and to put the people upon considering whether they were members of this glorious church, that is without spot or wrinkle, or any such thing; because if not attained to happily while here, it cannot be done hereafter; for as the tree falls, so it will lie, whether it be to the south or to the north:—that such a state is evidently attainable in this life, from the language of the apostle Paul to the Hebrews,—“For we are not come to the mount that might be touched, and that burned with fire, nor unto blackness, and darkness, and tempest, and the sound of a trumpet, and the voice of words;”—“but you are come unto Mount Zion, and unto the city of the living God, the heavenly Jerusalem, and to an innumerable company of angels, to the general assembly and church of the first-born, which are written in heaven; and to God the Judge of all, and to the spirits of just men made perfect; and to Jesus the Mediator of the new covenant, and to the blood of sprinkling, that speaks better things than that of Abel.” The blood of Abel cried from the ground for vengeance upon the offender; but, “Father forgive them, they know not what they do,” was the cry of Him, whose precious blood was shed for the sins of all mankind. I had to query of them, what they knew of “this blood of sprinkling,” which “cleanses from all sin;”—pressing the necessity of living faith, which could only be obtained by coming to Jesus, who would beget in them “the faith of the gospel,” and would be found not only the author, but the finisher thereof. Without this, the highest profession of the Christian religion is but a dream, a shadow, and a doubt; but with it, a glorious reality,—the life of the just, who “live by the faith of the Son of God,”—the very “substance of things hoped for, the evidence of things not seen,”—even the salvation of the soul.

On the 27th of Tenth Month, I returned to Tottenham, and attended both meetings there next day, as to myself in silence; but several others were engaged to advocate the great cause. The next morning the Committee of Friends appointed by the Yearly Meeting to revise the Book of Extracts sat down, consisting of some members from almost all the Quarterly Meetings in England, who with the members of the Meeting for Sufferings, formed a numerous body. My concern could not be brought forward till the regular time for the Morning Meeting to assemble, which was that day fortnight; so that I had to struggle on under its weight as well as I could. I have however great cause to be thankful for the privilege of attending so memorable a conference; particularly as it appeared that only one other individual besides myself had been at the last revision of that book thirty years ago. It is remarkable, that one so circumstanced as I have been, should have been permitted to share twice in so solemn and exercising an occasion.

After attending twenty-two sittings of the conference, also a Monthly Meeting, and six meetings for worship, the day arrived which brought the seal of confirmation to what had already been sanctioned by my own Quarterly and Monthly Meetings. But before entering on this description, I must tell you, that the conference, although at seasons truly painful on account of the visible and alarming stature of the uncircumcised in heart, was at times highly instructive and eminently favoured with the life-giving presence of Him, who abides of old, who did not fail to give power to the faint, and to increase the strength of those that have no power of their own; according to the prediction of the evangelical prophet, He was indeed, for a crown of glory, and for a diadem of beauty unto the residue of his people, and for a spirit of judgment to those that sat in judgment, and for strength to them that truly turned the battle to the gate; and to His own praise and glory did He marvellously enable them that fear Him, to display the banner which He had given them, “because of the Truth.” The conflict of mind which I had to pass through, early in the day that I had to stand before the Morning Meeting, is utterly undeclarable by the tongue of any mortal; and I could not at the time account for it: but I was afterwards favoured to see that this dispensation was highly needful for me. I stood up with the words,—“I have a baptism to be baptized with, and how am I straitened until it be accomplished adding,—'but the God of Israel is He that gives strength and power to His people,—blessed be God.' I then proceeded to state, that my mind had been long preparing, in order to loosen me from every earthly occupation, and to wean me from every social tie, of which I had been blessed with more than an ordinary share; and that shortly after my return from this country last year, to a land of desolation and sorrow, my heart was at times filled with the love of God in a remarkable manner;—that in one of those delightful seasons, a prospect was opened before me, the magnitude of which made human nature shrink. But He who had redeemed my life from destruction, and crowned me with loving-kindness and tender mercies, was graciously pleased to beget in me a willingness to go wheresoever He was pleased to lead. My engagements were at the time such, as seemed to preclude the possibility of my being extricated from them for this work; but the pathway was clearly defined, in which as I moved step by step, the mountains became mere mole-hills, and I was at length enabled to lay my concern before my own Monthly and Quarterly Meetings, etc.: and that although some relief had been obtained by casting a share of the weight upon the shoulders of my Friends, yet the burden still remained with me day by day, and at intervals in the night season; desiring that a right judgment might be come to, whether this thing was of the Lord or not.

After a long pause, it was thought that the Morning Meeting could not set me at liberty, without knowing what I expected to do in those distant parts. To this I replied, that no specific line of duty was pointed out to me, in this early stage of the business; but that what had passed in my mind led to a belief, that I should have to turn the people “from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God,”—and to teach them that they lived, and moved, and had their being in that God, whom they worshipped, it was probable, as at a distance:—that as to the missionaries I might meet with, I could embrace them with open arms, as fellow-men, countrymen, and labourers in the same great work, although, perhaps in a different stage of it.

The certificate will show how the matter issued. The meeting ended in a truly solemn manner. Our dear aged friend William Rickman, was constrained to declare, that 'the Truth reigned over all.' Many prayers were put up for you all, as well as for myself and others, who may be engaged to the same work.

Chapter XIV

Correspondence Attends Norwich Quarterly Meeting—Receives Intelligence of the Decease of His Wife and of the Severe Illness of Others in His Family—Letters to His Absent Children.

To Sarah Smith.

Tottenham, Eleventh Month 24th, 1832.

I have been told by a respectable ship-owner this morning, that I should not be later than the Second Month in leaving this country, or it will be too late to reach Cape Horn, before the winter sets in, when sailing becomes hazardous in those latitudes. He can speak feelingly on this head, having just lost that fine ship the Science, on her homeward passage, which carried out our friend James Backhouse and his companion. I should much regret, if this account should reach my beloved wife and family, lest it cause painful forebodings on my behalf; for believe me when I say, that the most painful feelings I have to encounter are on their account. I can look forward with composure to hardships and privations, as regards myself; but for them and over them I yearn, and reverently crave in humble prostration and brokenness of spirit the blessing of preservation and support, and that my ever-gracious Lord will condescend, in the multitude of his everlasting mercies, through the all-sufficient power of his grace, to be a husband and a father to them; and in the mysterious workings of His wondrous Providence, abundantly to supply all their needs, shedding abroad in their hearts a portion of that heavenly love, which banishes fear from the innocent habitation, and at seasons causes even the widow and the fatherless to sing, in praise of the majesty of the Lord and the glories of his kingdom.

Although surrounded with many dear friends, both brethren and sisters, yet I feel amongst them as one born out of due time, and wading in secret silence under a burden, known only to Him, who beholds the inmost recesses of the heart, and who with an invisible hand sustains under its heaviest pressure; while according to His loving-kindness, which is better than life, my tribulated soul is humbled into nothingness, and therein brought nearer and nearer to my meek and lowly Saviour, and taught from sensible feeling to magnify His all-redeeming power, and to bless his holy name in the depths of self-abasement. Thus my dear Lord and Master is leading me along, and I trust preparing me to do his righteous will, which can in no other way be accomplished, than by the total surrender of our all to Him, without reservation.

—————

To His Wife.

Cancood, Twelfth Month 11h, 1832.

My Dearest Jane,

At the close of the last letter, I mentioned having been invited to attend the remains of our late valued friend, Martha Smith, to their long home. I reached Doncaster the next day, and found a large number of Friends collected for the same object. Her long residence at Doncaster, and extensive acquaintance in the Society, to many of whom she had long been very dear, caused a large assembling; about sixty persons came from other parts, besides the Friends of her own meeting. According to instructions she had left, the coffin was taken into the meeting-house, agreeably with the ancient practice of the Society. It was truly a memorable and solemn opportunity, I believe both to her friends and to many strangers present. M. T. and another minister were engaged in the fore-part of the meeting, but the weight of the service pretty much devolved upon myself:—“Daughters of Jerusalem, weep not for me, but weep for yourselves and for your children,” were the expressions opened to my mind; after which I had to declare a belief that if the voice of our dear departed sister, which had so often proclaimed within those walls the wonders of redeeming love and mercy, could then be heard, the language of her purified spirit would be “weep not for me, but weep for yourselves and for your children;”—and as she could not return to us, but we must follow her, that we should endeavour so to follow her, as she had endeavoured to follow Christ, in the path of self-denial and the daily cross, without which there would be no crown. I had afterwards to declare at the grave side to a crowd of fresh faces from the street, the day of the Lord, which would assuredly try the foundation of all their works. The remainder of the day was I trust profitably spent.

I set off the next morning for Hull, in company with John Hipsley and I. Casson, who had also been invited to the interment: we were favoured to reach Hull in safety that afternoon. I attended their meeting next day to my comfort, and started for York the day following.

Tottenham, Twelfth Month 17th, Seventh day.—I have again taken up the pen to resume my delightful employment of conversing in this way with you, not I think without a degree of thankfulness, that such an alternative is permitted, however short it may seem of the reality so much desired, I believe by each of us.

I reached Nottingham on Fourth day evening as intended. We had a very comfortable meeting there next day: at this as at other places, the hand of time has swept away many, with whom I was well acquainted. It was a solemn meeting:—“He that abides of old,” was graciously pleased to crown the little company with His presence. Being the week-day meeting, it may be presumed that few were present, that had not made more or less sacrifice to attend it; and I believe all these were rewarded.

A Friend largely concerned in the South Sea fishery, has suggested a plan altogether unthought of by any of us; and that is, the purchasing a vessel in all respects adapted not only to the voyage out, but also to conveying us from island to island. He particularly recommends her being quite a small cutter, both for safety and expedition, and because capable from her small draught of water of running into shallow harbours and creeks, which a large vessel could not enter. He thinks a crew could be procured, who would be willing to substitute cocoa, tea, etc., for spirits, except for medicinal purposes; and that when no longer required, she would be readily sold in New South Wales. I quite approve of the plan, believing it would have many advantages; but particularly as on a moderate calculation, it would save a year in the time of absence, which is to me of too great importance, to allow the idea to be dropped without further scrutiny. It may yet be proved that much expense would be saved by it; and that the object in view would be more completely embraced in all its points.

Do not fail to write, that I may hear of you while I remain in the way of doing so. In dearest love, believe me, however circumstanced, or wherever placed, daily found in prayer to Almighty God for the preservation and welfare of you all. In truest affection,

Daniel Wheeler

—————

To His Children in Russia.

Norwich, Twelfth Month 29th, 1832.

My Dear Children,

Last Third day, the 25th, I attended the Quarterly Meeting for London and Middlesex, held in Devonshire House Meeting House, which was crowded to excess; many could not be accommodated with seats, although every avenue was furnished with temporary forms, and I understood that a considerable number could not gain admittance in any way. It fell to my lot to revive amongst them some expressions, which occurred at the memorable interview between the Saviour of the world and Martha, soon after the death of Lazarus;—opening the subject with—“Lord, if you had been here, my brother had not died: but I know that even now, whatsoever you will ask of God, God will give it you.” “Your brother shall rise again,” our Lord replied. “I know,” said Martha, “that he shall rise again, in the resurrection at the last day.” “I am the resurrection and the life; he that believes in me,” declared the Saviour of men, “though he were dead, yet shall he live; and whosoever lives and believes in me, shall never die. Do you believe this?” The explanation of these words was opened in this manner: he that believes in Christ, though he were dead in trespasses and sins, yet shall he live; and whosoever lives, after having been thus quickened from spiritual death unto life, in the hope of His everlasting mercy, and in the belief of His inward and spiritual appearance, and in obedience to His will therein made manifest, shall never die. “Do you believe this?”—They shall have part in the first resurrection; and the second death will have no power over them. They must share in the common lot of mortality,—the separation of the soul from the body; but they will never be separated from their God. For “neither death, nor life, nor angels, nor principalities, nor powers, nor things present, nor things to come, nor heights, nor depths, nor any other creature will be able to separate them from the love of God, which is in Christ Jesus our Lord.” After this, I had to branch out into the necessity not only of performing the Divine will, but also of endeavouring to prove what is that good and acceptable and perfect will of God: that knowledge however will verily profit us little, without obedience keeps pace with it, as it is not the hearers of the law, but the doers that are justified.

I went down by mail the same night to Norwich; and attended the Quarterly Meeting for Norfolk and Norwich on the 27th. After E. F. had appeared in supplication, I had to declare of the mercy and goodness of the Lord to those that fear him; and to point out the inhabitants of that heavenly city, Mount Zion, which he has chosen and founded, and which the poor of his people shall trust in,—all of whom are redeemed with judgment, and her converts with righteousness: the judgments of the Lord having been suffered to pass over the transgressing nature in their hearts, in order to redeem therefrom, and they having believed in the righteousness of Christ Jesus, and being converted by the sanctifying power of his grace. W. F. spoke for a considerable time after I sat down with instructive clearness. At the request of John Wilbur, [a minister from America,] a meeting was held the next day, and was well attended. I found it my place first to break through its solemnity, and to supplicate that the great Name might be exalted, and the kingdom of Christ Jesus established in the hearts of the people. John Wilbur had full opportunity to relieve himself, and stood nearly an hour and a half to the satisfaction of the meeting; and I trust to the peace of his own mind. He had in true gospel authority, like the well taught scribe, to bring forth from the treasury of wisdom and knowledge things new and old.

[The above was written at the house of Joseph John Gurney, at Earlham, where during some weeks of indisposition, he was attended and cared for with a tenderness of which he ever retained a grateful recollection. It was during this period, that intelligence arrived of the decease of our beloved mother, and the alarming illness of three other members of the family.

Perhaps it may be desirable, in order to elucidate some passages in the succeeding letters, to enter into a short explanation of the series of domestic afflictions, with which that part of the family left at Shoosharry was visited at this time; and the difficulty of making public the details of private sorrow, seems greatly diminished by the fact, that the parties to whom they relate are no longer our fellow-probationers; but were all called to precede our beloved parent to that better world, where we reverently believe their spirits are now eternally blessed.

About the 20th of Eleventh Month, our brother Charles was attacked with an inflammation of the lungs, which for a time threatened his life: the complaint had at length yielded to the means employed, when our dear mother and sister Jane were at the same time stretched on a bed of sickness. Our mother's disorder proved to be fever, and though apparently of the mildest kind, it terminated fatally within nine days.

At this time dear Jane was lying in a very alarming state from inflammation of the brain. For several days the issue appeared doubtful; but through mercy her life was spared, and space allowed her for the all important work of repentance and reconciliation.

At the time of our dear mother's death, our eldest brother William was suffering from an affection of the chest, which shortly afterwards reduced him to a state of great exhaustion. While both he and Jane continued unwell, and the former in a very precarious state, Charles was seized with the fever, which had already deprived us of our mother, and of two other members of the household. For three weeks his disorder raged violently, and when it had in some measure abated, while he was still extremely weak, all hope was again destroyed by the re-appearance of inflammation of the lungs. Once more he was permitted to rally; and after being forty-eight days entirely confined to his bed, he was gradually restored to a comfortable state of health. To him also, through the visitations of infinite love, the season of sickness was made one of deep instruction; and during the remainder of his brief career of life, he was strengthened steadily to pursue a heavenward course. It was after receiving the account of Charles being attacked with fever, that his father resolved on returning for a season to Russia. On his arrival there on the 12th of Fourth Month, 1833, he was favoured to find the invalids of his family gradually recruiting. But to proceed with the correspondence. The announcement of the decease of our beloved mother is thus described by himself.]

First Month 11th, 1833. Some days ago, when dear Mary Gurney came to my bed-side (a sweet spirited Friend,) I told her, that I quite enjoyed the rest I was permitted to partake of; that I had been looking towards home, and had been favoured with a peaceful feeling respecting you all; that I did believe all was right, and in the ordering of the Master, or something to that effect. When she replied,—'it is a rest of preparation.' I do not recollect that she added more at that time. On the 9th instant, several letters were brought into my room, when I said,—'No letter from Petersburg? to which I got no answer. In the evening, as I lay on a couch, J. J. Gurney adverted to the health of my family, hinting that later accounts than my own had been received. I heard it without much suspicion,—little expecting what was in store, and that a cup filled with the wine of astonishment, was about to be handed to me. By degrees something more was unfolded; until I requested to know the whole that awaited me. But who can picture my distress and anguish of soul, when the awful reality was discovered? But the everlasting arms of my Almighty helper were underneath to bear me up, that the waves of affliction should not overwhelm beyond the decreed limits, nor infringe upon the margin of mercy and compassion. After a time I was enabled to say, 'it is a bitter cup: but I accept it at the hand of the Lord; for I am sure there is a blessing at the bottom of it.' The whole letter was then read; and to my unspeakable comfort, I was enabled to perceive, that my peaceful feelings about you all, were abundantly confirmed by a consoling evidence, that everlasting love and mercy had conspicuously covered the judgment seat, even to a hair's breadth:—that the beloved and precious partner in all my joys and sorrows for more than thirty-two years had passed, not from life to death, but from death unto life eternal;—and that my darling Charles and Jenny are yet spared, I humbly trust and pray, (whether their time here may be longer or shorter,) so to believe in the Lord Jesus Christ, as to be saved with an everlasting salvation.—And may we all be enabled to say in the language of the apostle, “I am crucified with Christ; nevertheless I live, yet not I, but Christ lives in me; and the life that I now live in the flesh, I live by the faith of the Son of God; who loved me and gave himself for me,” that in the winding up of time, we may all be permitted to meet again, with the purified spirit now fled—of her we dearly loved, with palms and harps in our hands,—those emblems of victory and praise;—joining a numberless multitude in the never-ceasing anthem of “Hallelujah unto the Lord God and the Lamb, who lives and reigns forever,” who gives the victory, and to whom belong the praise and the glory!

I shall anxiously expect another letter.—I have been mercifully strengthened to say,—“the Lord gave, and the Lord has taken away, blessed be the name of the Lord.” Not a wish dares to intrude upon the peaceful resignation of my mind. I only regret that I had not a personal share in the general distress and conflict of the occasion.

—————

To His Children

First Month 19th, 1833.

My Dearest Charles And Jane.

When I quitted Shoosharry, I thought I had given up much; and when fairly away from Cronstadt, I seemed to have parted with every thing in this world: but I have since sorrowfully found, that there remained ties which bound the soul to earth, which were yet to be dissolved before the sacrifice was complete. The visitation was so unexpected and sudden, that for a time every effort to bear up against the overwhelming reality, seemed altogether unavailing. It is indeed a cup exceeding in bitterness all that had previously been handed,—filling my heart with anguish, indescribable and irresistible. Yet, blessed be the name of the Lord God of heaven and earth forever, He, who had commanded the storm, was, in gracious condescension and compassionate mercy, pleased to rebuke its raging billows, and to bear up my helpless head above them all; enabling me to glorify His holy name “in the fires” of this baptism of suffering, to His own praise. And although the dispensation is altogether incomprehensible at present, yet I firmly believe, the merciful design of the Divine Will, as it is patiently abode under, will be more and more developed to our understandings, and will not fail to raise in us a grateful tribute of thanksgiving. “What I do, you know not now, but you shall know hereafter:”—and O! that we may all be found worthy to be entrusted with the heavenly secret, whether it be to be laid up in our own hearts, or to be declared to many.

When I have been led to contemplate the suspense and anxiety, which my long silence must have unavoidably occasioned to your dear mother, when more distantly separated by mighty oceans, together with the expectation of my being amongst barbarous nations, and exposed to various hardships,—how often have I desired that opportunities might occur for me to send at frequent intervals, some even short account of my safety and preservation; that she might be comforted from time to time, and not be permitted to droop with hope again and again deferred;—feeling a willingness to suffer myself, and to trust her and my precious family to the tender care of our heavenly Father, though months and months might pass away without a probability of hearing of or from them,—if only they might be cheered and animated now and then with but a gleam. But while human nature deeply feels, and every chord of tenderness and affectionate remembrance vibrates at the recollection of what we have all lost; yet my soul does secretly rejoice and magnify my good and gracious God, in humble thankfulness, that her lamb-like spirit is now spared this painful dispensation; and that the suffering will be only mine; and, mingled with many other tribulations which may yet await me, serve to fill up the allotted measure; in which I humbly trust I shall be permitted to glory, from the certain knowledge that tribulation works patience and experience and that hope “which makes not ashamed,” nor afraid, “because the love of God is shed abroad in the heart.”

I think the finger of the Divine Artist may already be traced in the present afflictive dispensation, as regards us all; but more particularly in the effects which have already resulted, both to you and to dear Jenny, giving you to see in a remarkable manner and in wondrous mercy, that every thing in this world is but vanity, and will most certainly end in vexation of spirit, if we have not an interest in the Saviour, and if destitute of that knowledge which alone can save. It is therefore my most humble prayer, that you may both endeavour to the utmost, to keep near to that Power which has so graciously opened your understandings to perceive his tender mercy and loving-kindness, which is better than life, in thus gathering your beloved mother into everlasting rest and peace, removing her from the troubles of time to the enduring riches of eternity, in holy quietness, because death had lost its sting, and the grave its victory. I am very sure that you must both have had convincing proof of the necessity of seeking after an acquaintance with the precious gift of God, which is so mercifully vouchsafed in measure by Christ Jesus in every heart; and which is sufficient, if attended to, to restore every son and daughter of Adam from a state of nature to a state of grace, into the heavenly image from which man by transgression fell.

I think you must both have seen how insignificant this world and all that belongs to it appear, when the pale herald of the grave hovers around us. Nothing short of that Divine power, which thus shows us these things, can prepare and purify us for an “inheritance undefiled, and that fades not away:” and be assured of this, that however homely this unflattering Witness may appear, though it seem but “as a tender plant, and as a root out of a dry ground,” and when perceived there is no beauty to render Him desirable to the unregenerate mind; yet this, my dear children, is nothing less than a manifestation of the Spirit “of the Lord of life and glory, which is given to every man to profit withal;” and well will it be for us, if we are profiting thereby, and faithfully occupying therewith. This Holy Spirit has long been oppressed and afflicted in all our hearts, while we have been employed in perishing pursuits, and altogether regardless of Him or his secret touches and reproofs, until perhaps cast upon a sick bed, or brought into a situation where His voice will be heard. It is to this power that we must be willing to turn, and it is by this power only that we can be saved, seeing it is the Spirit of Him our dear Redeemer, whom “God has highly exalted, and given him a name which is above every name; that at the name of Jesus every knee should bow, of things in heaven, and things in earth, and things under the earth; and that every tongue should confess that Jesus Christ is Lord, to the glory of God the Father,” either in mercy or in judgment. And O! says my soul, that our confession may be to His wondrous love and mercy, and not in the acknowledgment of His just judgments for our hard-heartedness and unbelief in the day of his visitation, wherein he would have gathered us, “as a hen does gather her brood under her wings,” and we would not. For true it is, that if we are willing to attend to this in-speaking, heart-searching voice, to turn at its reproofs, we shall find that they are full of instruction, and the way to life everlasting. It will not fail to show us the deceitfulness of sin, the sinfulness of sin, and the wages of sin, which is death. As we patiently abide under the turnings and overturnings of the Lord's hand thus upon us, however humbling and painful to the unsubjected mind, we shall indeed know the Saviour of the world in all his offices; not only as a convincer and reprover of sin through His Spirit, but as a purifier and cleanser from it: and as the great work of regeneration gradually advances, our spiritual eye will at last be opened to perceive and to look on Him whom we have so long pierced, and to mourn in godly sorrow unto unfeigned repentance not to be repented of. Then indeed shall we bow to His name, which is His power, on the bended knees of contrition and self-abasedness; and be enabled from living and actual experience to say, “I have heard of you by the hearing of the ear, but now my eye sees you; wherefore I abhor myself, and repent in dust and ashes.” Here then is “repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ,” whereby we forsake sin, and believe in the efficacy of that power which alone can save from it. Then, indeed, shall we become willing to confess Him before men, not being ashamed to acknowledge His power and His might, nor afraid of being thought His followers, by the votaries of a world which “lies in wickedness;” but to boldly take up the cross—a daily cross to our own corrupt wills and inclinations, and follow Him whithersoever He may be pleased to lead; remembering for our comfort and encouragement his gracious declaration, “whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of Man also confess before the angels of God: but he that denies me before men, shall be denied before the angels of God.” This indeed will be confessing to His name in the belief of His power, and in the hope of His mercy; and a bowing in earnest in obedience to His holy will. But if unhappily unwilling to bow the knee of our minds, we should stubbornly resist the offers of unutterable love and mercy, refusing to confess with the tongue “that Jesus Christ is Lord,” by the acknowledgment of His power in our hearts to save, and by submissive obedience to it, in the way of the cross,—we shall one day find to our indescribable distress, when it is too late, and the language is uttered, “he that is filthy, let him be filthy still.”

But although it is with me thus to write, yet my prayers are incessant on your behalf for better things, even things that accompany life and salvation; that mercy and truth may meet together, that righteousness and peace may kiss each other, in our heart-felt experience; which most assuredly will be the case, if the fault be not our own. We shall find that watchfulness, prayer, and fasting, are the Christian's strength, his safe retreat, and never-failing weapons of defence; even a constant watch over all our thoughts, tracing from where they spring; for thoughts are the origin of all our words and actions. As we thus maintain the watch we shall soon begin to groan, being burdened with the frailty and helplessness of human nature; which unavoidably and happily for us, cannot fail to incite to prayer, though perhaps but in sighs and groanings which cannot be uttered; but which are accepted and recorded by Him, who is a God ever hearing prayer, and who will in tender mercy strengthen us, if on our parts we are but willing, to pray always, “with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, watching thereunto with all perseverance.” This will almost imperceptibly lead us habitually to fast from the gratifying things of time and sense, which do but serve, however insignificant they may appear in the world's estimation, to prevent the sacrifice of the whole heart; and as nothing short of this will be accepted, in the Divine sight, the enemy's purpose is still effected.

I have craved in the tenderest manner for you, that you may henceforth be preserved and strengthened in faithfulness to resist those things, whatever they be, that were burdensome to you when on a bed of sickness, the fruit of which is bitter indeed, and productive only of shame, remorse, and anguish of spirit. Let the time past suffice, and the future be employed not in living to ourselves, “but unto Him who died for us and rose again.”

First Month 30th.—I am thankful in being able to say that I am nicely recovered. I have met with such unfeigned love and kindness from the family here, as can never be repaid, either by me or mine. On First day afternoon, I found that the time was fully come for me to take leave of the Friends of this place; when they were commended in apostolic language “to God and the word of his grace,” in which all their beloved families as well as my own were included. The meeting concluded with earnest prayer, and we separated under feelings of thankfulness and praise.

I must now bring this letter to a conclusion, earnestly desiring that nothing may be permitted to prevent your unremitting pursuit after that kingdom, which our Lord declared to be within; and that “no man may spoil you through philosophy and vain deceit, after the rudiments of the world, after the tradition of men, and not after Christ,” is my earnest and constant prayer for you.

P. S.—Second Month 4th, Stamford Hill.—On arriving at this place, I found dear William's letter containing the painful intelligence of dear Charles being seized with the prevailing fever. My situation is very trying, seeing I have not the power of rendering the smallest assistance to the wreck of my family. I can only put up a feeble petition for him and for you all; and with you wait and lean on the bosom of the beloved and only availing Comforter, in humble prostration of soul; trusting that I shall be favoured to stand resigned, to whatever may be the Divine will.

—————

To One of His Children.

Stamford Hill, Second Month 20th, 1833.

My Dear S.

All the part that I seemed capable of performing during the turnings and overturnings of the Lord's holy hand upon us, has been, as it were, to turn my face to the wall, and labour after humble resignation and patient submission of soul, and therein wait until he should be graciously pleased to say, “It is enough.”

The interest that has been awakened amongst our friends in this country, has burst forth on all sides in letters of condolence and sympathy in our great bereavement, and in the accumulated affliction which has continued to press upon the wreck of my family: I believe that more heartfelt solicitude was never felt on an occasion of a parallel nature, when only individuals in humble life have been concerned; and I have no doubt that the prayers of many have been put up on our account, to the God of all comfort, for his Almighty help and deliverance: I humbly trust they have been permitted to ascend as sweet incense before the Lord Most High, whose ears are ever open to the prayers of His people; more especially of such as dwell continually in His temple, and behold His beauty in the holy place. And be assured that my feeble, though frequent petitions and aspirations have been mingled amongst others for your preservation, and for the restoration of the dear invalids, in this day of visitation and sore conflict. From an accurate knowledge of circumstances as well as place, I believe I have been enabled to travail with and for you, and to wade in the depths of distress in degree, through the same conflict,—not only as to the bodily sufferings of dear Charles and Jenny, having myself had to pass through sickness and distress, under circumstances of hardship which I am totally unable to describe, and when recovery was equally doubtful; but I have also had to pass through the same agonizing conflict of mind, heightened to a much more dreadful degree, because charged with sins of deeper dye, than I fully believe have laid at their door. And though I can say with the great Apostle,—“this is a faithful saying and worthy of all acceptation, that Jesus Christ came into the world to save sinners, of whom I am chief;” yet to the praise of the riches of His grace, I can also say,—“behold the Lamb of God, that takes away the sins of the world,”—He that speaks “in righteousness, mighty to save.” And I do most earnestly desire, that my dear Charles and Jane may not suffer themselves to lose sight of the wondrous mercy that has been so plainly and marvellously extended, nor let the remembrance of it depart from their minds; but that they may faithfully wrestle to maintain the watch, and may become of quick understanding in the fear of the Lord,—that fear which keeps the heart clean, and endures forever.

I do exceedingly crave, that if comfortable health is permitted to return, they will endeavour to keep low in their spirits, and dwell near the root of life, with Him who declared himself to be, “meek and lowly in heart.” And O! that they may not suffer doubtings to arise, as regards that power which has thus in matchless love and mercy said unto them “live;” or be disposed to question, or to say, is this “He that should come, or look we for another,”—like the disciples of John formerly. For surely their blind eyes have received sight, their lame ideas, notions, and comprehensions are changed; and the feet of their minds strengthened, and prepared to walk in a new and living path. Have they not witnessed the leprosy of sin to be searched into, and brought into view, in order to be cleansed by that which alone “searches all things?” Have not their deaf ears been unstopped, so that even the still small voice could be heard in the soul, and is found to be powerful, a mighty and irresistible voice, causing a guilty conscience to tremble; as described by the kingly prophet, when he said, “the lightnings lightened the world, the earth trembled and shook,”—when that “light which enlightens every man that comes into the world,” so shines in our hearts, as to discover the earthly nature, and make it tremble,—bringing all our sins in order before us in terrible and to our awakened understandings fearful array. When personally on earth, after He had said to John's disciples, “the blind receive their sight, and the lame walk, the lepers are cleansed, and the deaf hear, the dead are raised up, and to the poor the gospel is preached;”—He added, “and blessed is he whosoever shall not be offended in me.” So that I feel more than I can embody in words, that with those on whom such miracles have been wrought, who have been raised up as from the dead in sins and trespasses, as well as rescued from the grave, and who when brought low, humbled, broken, contrited, and made poor in spirit, have had the gospel preached to them, demonstrating in a manner incontrovertible, that it is “the power of God unto salvation,”—that nothing may be permitted to turn them aside from the blessing promised to those, who are not offended at this heavenly visitant. For this I pray; and that they may be strengthened, says my soul, to give up all to follow Him in the regeneration faithfully: for it is only those that endure unto the end that shall be saved, and it is only those that give up all, who can endure all things for his sake. Whatever interferes with His Holy Spirit, whose right it is to rule and reign in our hearts, must be given up, be it what it may. “He that loves father or mother more than me, is not worthy of me; and he that loves son or daughter more than me, is not worthy of me.” Whatever is suffered to occupy our attention, tending in any degree to draw aside from watchfulness, prayer, and waiting upon Him, beyond what is allowable and needful in our passing through this pilgrim state, either in thought, word, or deed,—robs us of a sense of His inestimable presence, and of a share of the soul-enriching peace which flows from Him, and lessens our love towards Him, to whom the whole heart belongs; who “will not give His glory to another,” nor His praise to graven or any other images, which we may suffer to be set up in our minds, however innocent and insignificant we may think such to be.

And though it may please Him in inscrutable wisdom for his own great purposes, to withdraw at times the sensible evidence of his life-giving Spirit, so that we may have to deplore with Mary, that “they have taken away my Lord;” yet as we remain steadfastly endeavouring to wait, and watch, and pray towards His temple, He will in his own time, most assuredly return to us, as the morning breaking through and dispersing the heaviest clouds that may have gathered, to the strengthening of our faith in Him, and the increasing of our love: proving himself the ever-blessed and ever-living Comforter, the Spirit of truth, and leading out of all error into all truth; whom the world cannot receive because it knows Him not.

I am not surprised to hear, that my dear William has been dipped again and again, into a state of feeling something like that of baptism, on account of the sufferings of others;—for unless this was the case, how should we be capable of entering into their joys and sorrows. And now that the whole weight of responsibility and care of the family devolves upon his shoulders, it is no marvel with me, that this increased burden should be felt. I think this has a very instructive and significant meaning; and although in degree inferior, is notwithstanding the same in kind, as that felt and witnessed by the several members of the gospel church, where all suffer, rejoice and sympathize with and for each other. I believe that the head of a family or tribe, when endeavouring to act under the guidance of Him, who was touched with a feeling and compassionate sense of our manifold weakness and infirmities, may be favoured to administer, according to the ability given, to the necessities of those about him, entering into their feelings, and sharing in whatever conflicts may be allotted to them.

I wish to make a grateful return to all those kind friends in Petersburg, who have lent their aid in any shape in the day of your distress. I am indeed one of those who owe much unto their Lord, both in these respects, and in things more nearly connected with eternal consequences; and having nothing to pay with, I do humbly trust, that as he that administers a cup of cold water only to a disciple, in the name of a disciple, shall in no wise lose his reward; so also that all who have administered to the necessities of these little ones that believe on Him, will witness the Divine blessing to rest upon them; inasmuch as they, however unconsciously, “have done it unto me,” was the declaration of our Lord himself.

As to myself, I have truly little to communicate, for since it has pleased our heavenly Father to magnify his power in the midst of our long unbroken and highly favoured circle, but little has transpired with me. I told the Committee under whose care I move along, at their last meeting, that in consideration of the state of my family, I should be best satisfied to lie upon my oars at present, until these calamities are overpast; of which I think approval was expressed. I have attended the meetings in and about this metropolis, in all of which, I have had to proclaim the spirituality of the dear Redeemers kingdom, and to direct the people to the Holy Spirit in their own hearts, of a crucified, risen, and glorified Lord. It is indeed a day of lamentation, mourning, and woe,—for the expectation of the people is almost altogether outward, from man, although vital Christianity was never more talked of.

Chapter XV.

Journey to Russia In 1833—His Return, and Preparations for His Long Voyage—Sails from the Thames the 13th of Eleventh Month, 1833—Detention Off the Isle of Wight From Adverse Gales—Letters and Extracts from His Journal.

[Several circumstances having combined to delay the projected voyage to the South Seas till the succeeding autumn; our beloved father felt himself at liberty to employ a part of the interval thus occasioned, in visiting his family at Shoosharry.

The following letter describes some of the hardships of travelling between Holland and Russia in that day: since that time, however, macadamized roads and good post-houses have been constructed along the whole line from Hamburgh to Petersburg.]

To One of His Sons.

Memel, Fourth Month 1st, 1833.

My Dear Joshua,

I was favoured to reach Hamburgh in safety, after a cold rough passage. There was only a small number of passengers; but amongst these was a German family, consisting of a mother and two little girls, and her brother, on their way to Memel, where they reside. We soon formed an acquaintance, and it afterwards appeared, that we had almost from the first kept an eye on each other, as likely to continue companions in travel; this has now been fully and agreeably realized, confirming a belief which had fastened on my mind previously to setting out, that I should be provided for on my long and weary way. Though Germans, they speak English so well, that I have had no difficulty as to language, as we have passed along. We purchased a carriage in Hamburgh for about £20 sterling, which when divided was easy; and our expenses have amounted to little more than they would have done by diligence, of which there are none running at this time of the year between Hamburgh and Berlin. It is a britchka with a good head, and a leather covering from the head, fastened to iron stanchions in front. The mother and children were of course placed under the head, as the most comfortable and secure place, while J. J. F. and myself occupied the front seat the whole way:—on it, however, the man must be weary indeed who could get much sleep. The roads through the Mecklenburgh district cannot easily be described; but I can tell you, that many articles of clothing were actually chafed into holes. I ought however with thankfulness to add, that we were not once overturned, though we frequently expected it. We reached Berlin after thirty-nine hours travelling, and were accommodated at the King of Portugal hotel. The falls of sleet now seemed over; but the cold was still very piercing. We started the next day, and, with the exception of two intervals of four hours each, travelled on for five days and four nights. Two stations on this side of Friedeburgh we seemed again to overtake the winter, and have kept possession of it ever since. Even to this day, those parts of Prussia which anciently belonged to Poland are distinguishable: the people still look different from their neighbours, and their houses and modes of living are quite peculiar. At one place they gave us the flesh of the wild boar; but hunger reconciled us to it pretty well, though otherwise it would have gone slowly down.

At Custrin, we passed the Oder, which was free from ice, but some huge blocks were lying about the shores of the Vistula; and we were informed, that the bridge had only been passable one day, so that had we reached it earlier, we must have been detained. We crossed the Nogatt at Marienburgh, and the Vistula at Dirschau, where in 1825, I crossed it with dear Thomas Shillitoe; and the mercies of the Lord so compassionately bestowed upon us at that time, were renewedly brought to my remembrance. From the advanced stage of the season, and the state of the roads, it seemed dangerous to attempt going round by Tilsit, as the river (Niemen) generally overflows the surrounding flat country, to the prevention of travelling in the spring. The only alternative was, to travel along the Courish Nerung, a strip of land separated from the main land of East Prussia by the Haafe, a navigable bay or arm of the Baltic.

On returning to England in 1825, I promised your dear mother, that I would not go over this sand on that journey, and the recollection of this was trying to me; but the advantages in the present case were so great, that at length I agreed to venture. No sooner had we left the regular post road, than the roads became heavy, and were at last so bad, as to make it doubtful whether we should be able to proceed by this route. As night came on, our situation became more critical, and the carriage seemed every few minutes in danger of being dashed to pieces against tree-roots, stones, or frozen masses of mud and snow. On reaching the next station, a fifth horse was yoked, unasked for by us, and uncharged by the keeper, but a fearful omen of the road to come. Having now additional strength of horses, the carriage seemed the more certain to be destroyed, having to pass through a forest amongst many obstructions; frequently we were thrown almost from our seats, and the shock so violent as to produce pain in the head. Sometimes we hove down on one side, then on the other; and again for short intervals, rumbling with great rapidity over a frozen level surface, which generally concluded with a violent concussion against some hard substance. As we had only one driver to our five horses, his principal business seemed to consist in cracking his long whip, which, performed with great dexterity, made the forest echo and re-echo with the sound. Late in the night we reached a lonely dwelling, and, to our surprise, without any damage done to the carriage. Here we waited till day dawned, and after a comfortless repast of coffee and black bread, again proceeded. From the nature of the quicksand of this part of the Nerung, we could only travel close to the margin of the sea, where it is the most solid. On our right hand were masses of ice, thrown into piles higher than the top of the carriage, by the force of the sea during the late gales. At first the sea was pretty smooth; but the wind soon shifted dead upon the shore, and as the gale increased, the surf broke violently on the beach, occasionally forcing itself many yards higher up the shore than our carriage, so that we seemed at times to be travelling actually in the sea, until it again recoiled and showed the naked strand. In this manner several hours passed, until at length we began to edge away from the cutting blast, amidst a heavy fall of snow, until we finally reached the Niemen or Memel river. We were favoured to land in perfect safety on the quay of Memel,—though such was the fury of the gale, that the carriage, after it had been lashed in its chucks, had to be lowered to the bottom of the boat, for fear of being upset in crossing.

Thus have loving-kindness and tender mercy still followed me; and I actually feel better in health than when I left London, though my legs and hands are somewhat swelled, probably with the cold.

[He returned to this country in the Sixth Month following, where he was shortly afterwards joined by our brother Charles, who had believed it his duty to offer himself as a companion to his father, and was finally accepted in that capacity by the Meeting for Sufferings. In a letter written on this subject, dated the 2nd of Sixth Month, 1833, Charles Wheeler says,

“Though by no means unconscious of my incapacity to act in a concern of such importance, and however inexpedient to the eye of mere reason such a step may be in a temporal point of view; yet I cannot omit offering my assistance in any way which shall be deemed best to promote the object, allowing that it shall ultimately be deemed proper. Nature, as might be expected, shrinks from a step which involves such important consequences, and which in itself simply considered, is by no means such as I should have chosen; yet my only wish in the case is, I trust, to act faithfully the part designed for me by that gracious Being, who has an undoubted right to dispose of his creatures according to the good pleasure of His will; and keeping my obligation to do so in view, I do not see how I can do other than make the offer which this is intended to convey.”

After the concern of our dear father had received the sanction of the Morning Meeting of ministers and elders in the Eleventh Month of 1832, as it appeared a question of some intricacy, how such an undertaking, requiring many voyages from island to island, could best be accomplished, a Committee of the Meeting for Sufferings was appointed to take the subject into consideration, and to make such arrangements as might appear requisite for the object in view. Having devoted much time and attention to the investigation, after consulting several persons likely to give accurate information, and after very mature deliberation, the Committee came at length to the conclusion, as recommended by those whose local knowledge enabled them to form a correct judgment, to purchase a small vessel for the purpose, not only as the most suitable, but probably in the end, the least expensive mode of conveyance.

During the following summer, an opportunity occurred of purchasing, on reasonable terms, the Henry Freeling, lately a post-office packet, of 101 tons register. A number of Friends generously came forward, not only to pay for the vessel, but at a considerable expense to prepare her for the voyage. This offer the Committee gratefully accepted.

The necessary arrangements having been completed, they sailed from the river Thames on the 13th of Eleventh Month, 1833, and were proceeding down the English Channel, when on the 21st they were overtaken by a heavy storm, which induced them to seek for shelter near the Isle of Wight. The following extracts are from his journal and letters written at this time.]

To a Friend.

Mother-bank, Eleventh Month 21st, Six o'clock, p.m.

Some ships that sailed with us have already reached the Mother-bank; but it is thought that many will have to return to the Downs, as the weather is now becoming very stormy, and the wind directly opposed to our course down the channel. It is indeed a great favour to be enabled to find a place of safety, and demands our humble gratitude and thankfulness to Him who presides over every storm, whether of outwardly contending elements or of spiritual conflicts; and though the present dispensation may impede our progress towards Cape Horn: yet it is my belief, and I am comforted in it, that all will be well at last, because ordered by Him in whose will I desire to rest, and in whose tender mercy I trust.

—————

To Mary Backhouse.

Henry Freeling, Spithead, near Portsmouth,

Eleventh Month 22nd, 1833.

You wouldest perhaps hear from some kind friend, how much I had been engaged previously to taking a final departure from London; so that I could not write to any one, my time was so fully occupied day by day, in rendering what assistance I could in the outfit of our little vessel. In addition to the bodily fatigue which pressed upon me, you will, I am sure, be at once aware and capable of entering into the state of mind of one about to leave almost every thing near and dear on earth, and that one already stripped of the crown, far beyond the “price of rubies” but who can know it, like him that has to bear the loss of a virtuous woman: truly her children have abundant cause to “rise up and call her blessed, her husband also, and he praises her.” But however I may desire to be preserved, and to strive against a disposition to murmur at the dispensations of an ever-gracious and most merciful Lord God: yet I cannot cease to feel as one born out of due time, and as standing alone in many things amongst my brethren and sisters, and even as an alien in my Father's house.

And now being far advanced in years, and on the point of quitting these shores for remote climes, can it be wondered at, if nature shrinks at the prospect before me; and were it not for a knowledge in some degree of that Almighty power, whose arm of strength is made perfect in weakness, often to our humble admiration, and whose saving grace is at all times sufficient for us, what would be my situation at this day? But blessed be the Lord God of heaven and earth forever, He has sustained me in a marvellous manner, and borne up my head at seasons, when the waves and the billows have swelled and threatened to overwhelm my soul. And now in mercy He enables me to look forward with calmness and resignation to His holy will; shedding abroad in my heart the constraining influence of that love which makes not afraid, but which, in the true dignity of its character, casts out fear, and enables the Christian traveller to persevere in the path that leads to blessedness. Having been strengthened thus far to come up in the obedience of faith, that justifying heavenly principle, I think I may say without a disposition to boast, (for truly all boasting is excluded, and the creature laid low as in the dust,) in the words of the great Apostle,—“we have peace with God, through our Lord Jesus Christ; by whom also we have access by faith into this grace wherein we stand, and rejoice in hope of the glory of God. And we glory in tribulation also, knowing that tribulation works patience, and patience experience, and experience hope, which makes not ashamed;”—a hope full of immortality, through the mercy of God in Christ Jesus: which has been hid from ages and generations, and is still hid from the great bulk of mankind because of unbelief.

Our little Henry Freeling being nearly equipped and ready for sea, I took leave of the Committee of the Meeting for Sufferings, about a fortnight ago. It was a solemn interview, in which all were encouraged in the belief, that Friends had adopted the best mode that could be devised for accomplishing the service which I have in view, which was very satisfactory to many minds. From one circumstance or other, I was detained in the neighbourhood of London until the Morning Meeting held in course on the 11th instant; when I found that I was not clear without bearing a testimony to the alarming state of things amongst us, in a very close manner, and with a warning voice. But although my exercise was great, great was my consolation and peace after this was accomplished; my way then seemed to open with clearness to depart.

On the 13th, accompanied by several Friends, we took passage in a steamer to Gravesend, where the vessel had preceded us; and on account of the unsettled state of the crew, it was judged proper that we should repair on board that night. Before separating, we were favoured with a parting opportunity truly precious, and like an earnest of Divine regard; in which our minds were united and solemnized together by the overshadowing of everlasting love. It was as if the blessed Master was graciously pleased himself to preside, and to sanctify the offering which he had called for; and under the consoling, contriting influence of this merciful visitation, we bade adieu. A coach was ready to take our Friends back to London, as soon as they had seen us down to the beach, where dear Charles and I embarked; and after a long row in the dark, we found the Henry Freeling lying at the Lower Hope. The next morning we sailed for the Downs; but the wind being contrary, we did not reach our anchorage till the 17th instant.

The next day, we sailed with light airs of wind in our favour; but after having served us a little further than Dover, they forsook us, and from that time we had to beat down the channel. On the 20th, the weather assumed a threatening aspect; and yesterday, it became so boisterous, with such strong and never-failing indications of tempestuous westerly gales, that it was deemed most expedient to bear up for the nearest port. A signal being made, we were favoured to obtain a pilot, as we stretched in upon the Isle of Wight; soon after this it blew violently, and we were happily permitted to find shelter here, about an hour after night-fall. It has blown a tempest all the night, which still continues, so that at present all communication is cut off between us and the shore; but last night I dispatched a few lines for the information of the Meeting for Sufferings.

[On the 31st of Twelfth Month, he writes;] in two days more we shall have been six weeks hereabouts, and I am sometimes ready to think our dear friends will be weary of hearing again and again, that we are still buffeted by adverse gales at the Mother-bank; but the will of the Lord must be done: and I endeavour to wait patiently to see what He will be pleased to do for His great name's sake; for He knows my downsitting and my uprising, and understands my thoughts afar off; and that the sole cause of my being here, is no other, than that I may be found coming up in the path of obedience to what I believed to be required of me. The consciousness of not being here in my own creaturely will and activity, reconciles me to all the turnings and overturnings of His holy hand; and that He will continue to bear me up, is my humble prayer, until He shall be pleased to say, 'it is enough.'

—————

To Hannah Breary.

Henry Freeling, 22nd of First Month, 1834.

Still at the Mother-bank. I look round at others, but feel myself a close prisoner; and forlorn indeed would be my condition, were it not for a most merciful and heavenly Keeper, whose unslumbering eye beholds the most solitary dwelling of his poorest creatures, and regarding all their needs, He opens his bounteous hand and “satisfies the desire of every living thing.” I have written very few letters of late, for my mind has been otherwise engaged, and often not a little depressed: but as regards our delay here, although trying to the will of the creature, I am comforted by a consoling evidence of having done all that I could to forward the work, to which I believe myself called; and therefore I can rest peacefully amidst the restless waters, which incessantly burst and foam within a few inches of my pillow.

It is now thirty-eight years since I was witness to a season similar to this for south-westerly and westerly gales; but with this difference, that the greater part of the winter was then spent at sea, instead of at Spithead, and much more disastrously; for after having been at one time seven weeks out of sight of land in a leaky ship, we were driven back to Spithead at last, with the loss of twenty-seven of our people. Should the present season be permitted to resemble that I allude to throughout, we have now been only half the time that we have to be detained.

My dear Charles is as well as can be expected, but looks thin, and although he says little, it is evident he feels the time long; but he bears up with a good degree of Christian patience. My heart often yearns over him, having some knowledge of the bitterness he feels, and gladly would I share in his conflict to spare him; but I am sometimes reminded of those expressions—'Heaven tempers the wind to the shorn lamb and it may be added,—'Shorn indeed, and to the quick.'

On Fifth days, we regularly sit down together in my cabin, to wait upon the Lord; and though frequently feeling something like what is described as the solitary “sparrow on the house-top,”—yet we know that even these poor outcasts are cared for; and are sensible that strength is renewed, though perhaps, but in small degree.

[During the detention of the vessel, it appeared that advantage would arise from a change being made in the person who had the charge of her; and while the Committee were looking out for a more suitable one to supply his place, Daniel Wheeler thus writes, under date of 15th of Second Month, 1834.]

In treating with a person to take the command of our vessel, there are many stipulations which ought to be made and insisted upon, besides nautical skill and other qualifications. In the first place, it should be understood by the person in treaty for the station, that we are a Temperance vessel;—secondly, that the crew are regularly assembled in the cabin twice on every First day, for devotional purposes; and also that the Scriptures are read every morning and evening in the cabin on other days, when both the captain and mate are expected to (and now do) attend; thirdly, that as much as practicable, all unnecessary work is dispensed with, as regards the sailors, on the First day of the week, to afford them a portion of time for themselves. These things ought, I think, to be thoroughly understood in the outset, so that nothing unpleasant may afterwards occur, when perhaps it would be too late to make them obligatory and bring about their establishment. My motive for mentioning these particulars, is not to make the way more difficult for my dear Friends; but in order to save both time and trouble, and perhaps prevent much disappointment and uneasiness in future.

[Owing to a succession of contrary winds and boisterous weather, very unusual for such a length of time, their vessel, with many others, was detained until the 10th of the Third Month, 1834, when they set sail. On the 14th, Daniel Wheeler writes,]

It is more than three months since I had my foot on the shore; but if I had not persisted in remaining on board, I should not have been in possession of the true character of our seamen, nor of every minutiae of the state and condition of our vessel. We have put her in the best trim which we are capable of doing, and must rely on One who is Almighty to help; and if He is but with us, we shall have nothing to fear. Good indeed, [he adds,] has it been for me to be here; and true it is also, that sufferings and tribulations have only been permitted in boundless mercy to draw me nearer and nearer to the bosom of my Lord, the only but never-failing source of consolation in every time of trial and distress: however dark the hour of conflict, the entrance of His word is light and life. [He further observes,] that the present great object of my life, the service before me, revives at seasons with increasing and encouraging brightness to my view.

[The same day, being that previous to their sailing, he addressed a farewell letter to the Committee of the Meeting for Sufferings, as follows:]

Henry Freeling, Mother-bank, Third Month 14th, 1834.

Upon reference I find that it is now considerably more than three months since I began a letter for the information of my dear friends, when anticipating that before long we should be permitted to direct our course across the trackless ocean to the southern hemisphere; but I had not completed more than half a sheet of paper, when the progress of my pen was arrested, by circumstances which have prevented any further addition being made until this day, when the way seems to open for resuming the subject—our departure being at hand.

Among the many multiplied mercies and blessings which unceasingly flow from the bounteous and compassionate hand of Him, who “crowns the year with his goodness,” and “satisfies the desire of every living thing,”—I feel bound to acknowledge with humble thankfulness and admiration, our long detention on these shores. Notwithstanding there have been many gloomy days, and days of darkness, “as the morning spread upon the mountains,” and many long and dreary winter nights to pass through, when the raging storm has again and again whitened with foam the surface of the agitated deep around us; and not only the strife of elements to witness without, but a conflicting and spiritual strife within, “tossed with tempest and not comforted;” yet how unspeakably great the faithfulness of our good and gracious Lord God!” His compassions fail not,” but have been, and still continue to be, “new every morning,” as the returning day; for in moments of the greatest conflict and trial there has been something permitted, like the “bow in the cloud,” for the poor mind to look at, to animate, and cheer, and to strengthen with hardness to endure and to stand firm.

But although moon after moon has waned, and faith and patience have been beset as on the right hand and on the left, and the afflictions of the gospel have at times been permitted to abound; yet to the glory, and honour, and praise of Him, whose name ever excellent and adorable, shall be great among the nations, from the rising of the sun to the going down of the same,—the consolations of the gospel have also abounded, in a degree of the fulness of that heavenly blessing which makes truly rich, and whereunto no sorrow is added; when faith has been mercifully strengthened, and patience renewed under the tribulations of the day. And notwithstanding an untrodden path has been my portion, yet after all, though weakness and fear are my constant companions by the way, safety and peace have been hitherto found. I would, therefore, encourage all my beloved friends to keep near to their heavenly Teacher and Leader; who, if faithfully followed, will not only conduct their steppings to a hair's breadth, but will preserve and keep the mind in calmness and serenity, securely as in a pavilion, from the strife of tongues.

In addition to the marvellous loving-kindness I have thus endeavoured to portray, many other mercies and blessings have been showered upon our heads, during the apparently long and unaccountable detention of our little bark upon our own coasts; these I have often had to number with grateful sensations, when the light has shone brightly, and manifested clearly to my finite understanding how much we should have missed, if our progress had not thus been arrested. So that with myself, instead of this delay having been productive of regret, or the cause of letting in fear or doubt, to stagger or depress my tribulated mind,—I do, my dear friends, hail it with gratitude and thankfulness, as the gracious and compassionate dealing of my Lord and Master; not only as a time of Divine favour and condescension, but as an earnest of His love and mercy, for our encouragement, instruction, and future benefit, graciously vouchsafed,—a time of preparation for the important work before us, and of weaning from every dependence and guidance which are not of Him, to strengthen our confidence in His power to help and deliver out of every distress; who not only commands the storm, but at whose rebuke the mountain billows cease to undulate, and lo! “there is a great calm.”

Within the last two or three days, the prospect of liberation has begun to dawn with clearness; but I trust, that if even a further detention should be meted out to us, either here or in some other port, the same resignation to the Divine Will, will be vouchsafed: for although I have for more than two years past, felt anxious to move forward in a work, which has yet to begin when the decay of nature is visible, and the shadows of the evening proclaim, as they lengthen around me, the steady decline of life's setting sun; yet I have been frequently comforted by a renewed evidence, that we have not yet been here one day too long.

It will, I feel assured, afford my dear friends much satisfaction to know, that the crew of the vessel, notwithstanding the frequent though unavoidable communication with the neighbouring shore for so great a length of time, have given no cause for uneasiness by improper conduct, and that they have at all times behaved, with scarcely an exception, in an orderly and agreeable manner: the captain now provided for us seems to be judiciously selected, and the man who, beyond all expectation, is admirably adapted to aid and assist, by example and experience, in the accomplishment of the important object before us: so that I hope what has passed, and what may yet be in store for us, will be found and acknowledged to be among the “all things that work together for good.” I must not omit adding, that the solemn covering frequently witnessed in mercy to prevail and preside over us, when sitting together before the Lord, is worthy to be commemorated with humble gratitude, as the strongest and most indubitable evidence for our encouragement, that at seasons “He is with us of a truth.”

As it is now a period of the year when ships seldom sail to those parts to which we are destined,—whether we proceed by the Cape of Good Hope, which is most probable, or by Cape Horn, in either case a wintry season awaits us; but my trust is in the Lord, not doubting but that we shall have the privilege of the prayers of the faithful for our preservation: and though conscious of our own weakness and utter unworthiness, and often under a feeling of being less than the least of all my dear brethren and sisters that are alive in the unchangeable Truth; yet I think I can say that these things trouble me not, nor move me, neither count I my life dear unto myself, so that I might finish my course with joy, and the ministry which I have received of the Lord Jesus, to testify of the gospel of that grace, “which brings salvation, and has appeared unto all men,” teaching all; that so from the uttermost parts of the earth songs of praise may be heard, and the grateful tribute of “thanks be to God for his unspeakable gift,” may resound to his glory: for it is not of him that wills, nor of him that runs, but of God that shows mercy; it is “not by might nor by power, but by my Spirit, says the Lord of Hosts.”

And now, while my heart is bearing towards the isles afar off, the same constraining love which wrought the willingness to leave all for my gracious Lord's sake and His gospel's, extends its binding influence to all my dear brethren and sisters, of every age and of every class, wherever situated, and however circumstanced; desiring in tender and affectionate solicitude, that they may be found steadfastly following the footsteps of those honourable and worthy predecessors in the same religious profession with ourselves, who have long since rested from their labours, and whose memorial is on high; who bore the burden and heat of a day of deep suffering, in the faithful discharge of their duty, for the support of those principles in their original purity and brightness, which have been transmitted to us. If any should feel sensible of having fallen short in this important work, let me in tenderest love encourage such to be willing to humble themselves under the mighty hand of God, even to the state of little children; and to turn inward to the pure, unflattering Witness, which cannot deceive nor be deceived; to be willing to enter into a diligent and heart-felt search, and patiently and impartially examine how far those indispensable conditions are submitted to on their part, without which none can be followers of the meek and lowly Jesus. Where is that self-denial and the daily cross He first enjoined i Are we denying ourselves those gratifications of time and sense, which cherish and keep alive in us the evil propensities of fallen nature, that separate man from his Maker, and like the little foxes which spoil the tender vines, designed in richest mercy to bud, blossom, and bring forth fruit, lastingly to remain to the praise and glory of the great Husbandman? Without faithfulness, there will be no fruitfulness. It is not giving up or forsaking this or that little thing, to part with which is little or no sacrifice or privation, that will suffice; a full surrender of the whole will in all things, must be made to Him, whose sovereign right it is to rule and reign in our hearts. Let none plead for disobedience in these little things, on the ground of their being such; for if such they really are, they are the more easily dispensed with, and not worth retaining; and a tenacity in wishing to preserve them, assuredly indicates, that they have more place in our affections than perhaps we are aware of: “he that loves father or mother more than me, is not worthy of me; and he that loves son or daughter more than me, is not worthy of me; and he that takes not his cross, and follows after me, is not worthy of me.”

And now, my dear brethren and sisters, “may the God of peace, who brought again from the dead our Lord Jesus, that great Shepherd of the sheep, through the blood of the everlasting covenant, keep all your hearts and minds” and “make you perfect in every good work to do His will, working in you that which is well-pleasing in His sight, through Jesus Christ; to whom be glory forever and ever.”

In the love of the everlasting gospel, accept this expression of farewell, from your affectionate friend and brother,

Daniel Wheeler.

15th of Third Month, at Sea, and clear of the Needle Bocks, all well.

[During their long stay at the Mother-bank, Daniel Wheeler says in his journal.]—It has been our usual practice, except when prevented by particular and sufficient causes, to assemble the crew in the cabin twice on every First day of the week with the captain and mate, to read to them a portion of the Holy Scriptures, and to sit together before the Lord in solemn silence. The first time of our assembling in this manner, it was my lot to break in upon the silent solemnity which prevailed in a remarkable manner over us, and to call their attention to the magnitude of the voyage in contemplation; feeling no hesitation in believing, that every individual present was desirous that it might be prosperous; and the desire of my heart was, that it might be so in reality, not only as regarded the safety of the ship and of ourselves, but that it might prove a voyage towards the kingdom of heaven, into which nothing that is unclean or impure, “nothing that works an abomination, or that makes a lie, can ever enter.” In order that this might be the case, we must do every thing in the fear of the Lord; and the way to prove we feared Him, was to keep a diligent watch over our thoughts, words, and actions, etc.

Although this was a novel scene to all of them, they behaved with great solidity, and becoming attention; and the peaceful covering so evidently manifest to spread and remain over us, was truly precious and worthy of commemoration. Although the weather was extremely rough and boisterous at the time, and the sea occasionally bursting over the deck, all was quiet and undisturbed below. On inquiry when we broke up, it was found that several of the men were not provided with copies of the Scriptures. They were of course, in due time, all furnished.

Chapter XVI.

Departure from the British Channel, with a Fair Wind, 15th of Third Month, 1834—Voyage to Rio Janeiro.

[The succeeding extracts are from his journal and letters, commencing with the last date.]

After despatching our letters by the pilot on the 10th of Third Month, we made sail into the offing at half-past four, p.m., and stretching from under the shelter of the Isle of Wight, soon partook of a strong and favourable breeze: great progress was made during the night; next morning brought an increase of wind along with it. From the state of the weather and the harassed situation of the crew and other circumstances, although it was the First day of the week, we were compelled to give up the idea of assembling together in the cabin, and to content ourselves with reading the Holy Scriptures twice in the course of the day with the captain and mate. At five o'clock, p.m. we were abreast of the Lizard light-houses on the Cornish coast, from which our final departure was taken: as the night approached, the land was lost sight of, and the wind being strong and fair, we launched rapidly away from the mouth of the British Channel.

On Second day morning, the 17th, the wind veered more to the southward, and considerably increasing, soon raised a heavy sea, which occasioned one side of the vessel to be frequently buried under water. Until now she had scarcely leaked at all; but it soon became needful to pump freely every two hours, and occasionally every hour. This was a little discouraging to most of us; but I recollected having heard from a carpenter who had formerly sailed in her, that she used to let in a quantity of water in rough weather, whenever on that tack. On considering the matter, and knowing the great pains that had been taken, by our friend W. T., to make her sea-worthy, and having witnessed the caulking, felting, sheathing and coppering that had been bestowed upon her, I felt satisfied that this leak did not exist in any part which is constantly under water, but could only be in her upper works. This conclusion, I have good reason to believe will be found correct, for as the wind and sea have been more behind her, and that side not so deeply buried, less pumping has been required.

Third Month 18th.—Our situation in the cabin was rendered more uncomfortable, as from the frequent bursting of the sea over our deck, it became necessary to secure the sky-light to prevent accident. This reduced us into almost total darkness in the day-time, as no light could now penetrate, except through the thick glass bull's eyes in the deck, and these were covered with a body of water, which rushed continually from side to side as the vessel rolled; so that reading or writing, except by lamp-light, was laid aside altogether.

The 20th, being Fifth day, our usual meeting day when at home, my dear Charles and myself sat down together to wait upon the Lord; but although we were scarcely able to retain our seats from the motion of the ship, yet I humbly trust we were favoured, poor outcasts as we seemed to be, to look towards His temple,—to fear Him, and to think upon His name. Notwithstanding the weather became more and more tempestuous, yet the fair wind never once forsook us; but on the 22nd the sea ran so high, that it was dangerous for any one to be upon deck, and Captain Keen began to fear that we should be under the necessity of turning the head of the vessel towards the sea and wind; accordingly the storm canvass was prepared in readiness to use, when it should become no longer safe to run before a sea, which now followed in mountainous succession, rising to an alarming height above the stern of our little flying bark, and threatening at times to overwhelm us altogether.

23rd.—From the boisterous state of the weather, although First day had again revolved, we were prevented from collecting the crew for devotional purposes; and could only read some portions of Scripture as before. By this time our little vessel had been pretty roughly handled and tried, and had given full proof of her capability. The captain acknowledged that she had done wonders, and had greatly surpassed the idea he had formed of her, and the crew to a man expressed their satisfaction; and I saw myself no cause to alter the favourable opinion that I had constantly entertained from the first sight of her. We are all aware of the advantage which would have resulted, had she been large enough to have carried a greater supply of fresh water and coals, without being so deeply buried in the water, which continually exposes us to the drench of the sea, even in what may be termed favourable weather; and in rough, we are frequently debarred from all exercise upon deck in fresh air, to avoid the risk of being injured by the wash of the sea. I feel, however, grateful and thankful in my present allotment, and for the accommodation thus rendered by my dear friends; humbly trusting that we shall be sustained through all to declare the mighty acts of the Lord, and to show forth His praise in the presence of a people who have not heard His fame, nor seen His glory, neither conceived the majesty of His kingdom within, of “righteousness, and peace, and joy in the Holy Spirit;” which stands mercifully revealed in the hearts of those, who are concerned above all things to seek first this heavenly kingdom, and to believe therein, to the saving of the soul.

On the 24th there was an evident change in the temperature of the atmosphere; the sun shone brightly, and its warmth gladdened our hearts, as we sat on a small space near the stern of the vessel, which had been preserved pretty free from the spray of the sea: the wind, although still favourable, had lessened; the white-topped billows had considerably diminished, and our deck was this day more free from water rushing from side to side, than had been the case for more than a week past. Some turtle were seen floating near the ship, and things altogether around us began to wear a brightening aspect; but what tended most to enliven and make all things smile, was the marvellous condescension of my dear Lord and Master, who, in the greatness of his love, was graciously pleased, for the first time since I had offered up my all to follow Him in this untrodden path of apprehended duty, to open my spiritual understanding, and permit me to behold, to a certain extent, the nature of the service upon which I should have to enter, in some places where my lot may be cast. I now plainly saw that before leaving England, I was not fit to be entrusted thus far with the secrets of my Master. I believe I could not have refrained from imparting them in degree to some of those whom I dearly love; but happily I am now beyond the reach of such a temptation. Perhaps I was not then sufficiently reduced into a state of preparation suitable for the reception of so much of the Divine Will being revealed, nor sufficiently humbled into a state of abasedness of self. Greatly do I desire for myself and all my dear friends, that we may be brought more and more into such a state as to be fit and able to bear further portions of the many things which our great and heavenly Teacher, in his wondrous and never-erring counsel, has to say to such as fear, and love, and follow Him in the great work of regeneration:—“I have many things to say unto you, but you cannot bear them now:” and if we were but sufficiently willing to hearken to his voice, He would still, I am persuaded, not only have many things to say unto us as individuals, but unto the church also, by that “Holy Spirit which searches all things, yes, the deep things of God.” Then may all our hearts be so cleansed and purified through the efficacy of his grace, as to be prepared to receive the promised and ever abiding Comforter, who “will take of the things of Christ, and show them unto us,” yes, “He will show us things to come.”

Third Month 30th.—The weather beautiful, and wind favourable. Assembled the ship' s company both morning and evening in the cabin. While sitting together in silence in the forenoon, I felt an engagement of mind to magnify the lovingkindness of our good and gracious helper, and to turn their attention as witnesses to the unmerited mercy and favour bestowed upon us, by the Lord's having so evidently and eminently prospered our way; desiring that gratitude and thankfulness might be felt by every individual; and declaring, unhesitatingly, that if we fear and love Him, He will bless and prosper us altogether. It was also with me to remind them, that although from circumstances of one kind or other, we might not be able to collect together in this way, yet nothing should prevent us from fearing and loving the Lord; that in the darkest night, our thoughts were not hidden from Him: quoting that expression of the Psalmist, when under a constraining sense of the omnipresence of the Deity, “Where shall I go from your Spirit?” etc. May the Lord be pleased to lay his Fatherly hand upon them!

Fourth Month 7th.—The sea being tolerably smooth, the cabin sky-light was opened a few inches, as our health began to suffer from lack of air. The sun being almost vertical, has been very hot and scorching. The effect of being transported in about three weeks from the cold winds which blew at the Mother-bank, to the burning heat of the sun near the equator, can be estimated only by those who have witnessed such a change in so small a vessel as the Henry Freeling. The night air seems to come off the heated deserts of Africa, charged with dampness most unwholesome.

21st.—After having been nearly twelve whole days and nights within five degrees of the equator, we were favoured to get to the southward of it at an early hour this morning.

Fifth Month 5th.—Although hitherto favoured with a passage, such as no person on board had ever before witnessed for favourable winds and weather, yet it now became considerably lengthened out from the prevalence of calms and light airs of wind, not only while in the neighbourhood of the equinoctial line, but at a later period. This circumstance seemed to point out at once the necessity of our abandoning the intention of aiming at the Cape of Good Hope for a supply of water, etc., on account of the advanced state of the winter season, and the probability of not being able to reach that place before those heavy gales set in, which render its approach so difficult: it was also remembered, that if we once made the attempt, there was then no alternative left to us, but that we must continue to hover about until we did accomplish that object, let the weather be ever so tempestuous, as we must undoubtedly perish at sea for lack of water before we could possibly reach Van Diemen's Land, a distance from the Cape of Good Hope of more than 6200 miles; and from our present situation to the Cape it is full 3500 miles. After deliberately weighing these considerations, it seemed expedient (however contrary to our wishes, to visit a place where superstition and slavery appear with open face,) to bear down towards the South American continent for Rio de Janeiro, and there procure the needful supplies, if permitted to reach it in safety.

10th.—At sun-set a brig was seen upon our lee quarter, steering the same course as ourselves, perhaps three or four miles distant from us; she was soon covered up by the night, and no more thought of. Being upon the deck, (an usual practice with me the fore-part of the night,) between nine and ten o'clock, the carpenter suddenly exclaimed, 'Why here's the brig!' Upon looking, I saw the vessel at a considerable distance from us; but soon perceived by the stars, that she was approaching with uncommon rapidity in a most suspicious direction, as if intending to cross our fore-foot, and cut us off. We watched her very narrowly, expecting every minute she would open a fire upon us. She continued to haul directly across our head at a very short distance from us; but we steadily kept our course, without the slightest variation, or manifesting any symptoms of hurry or fear, or noticing her in any way. I felt our situation to be at the moment very critical, knowing that these latitudes, and particularly this neighbourhood, are exceedingly infested with piratical vessels, which find shelter in the Brazilian harbours as traders, where they fit out occasionally for Africa with merchandize, and return with whole cargoes of oppressed Africans for sale, landing them on private parts of the Brazil coast; at other times, they act as pirates, when it suits their convenience, or are in need of stores. This was indeed a trial of faith of no common kind; but my mind was staid upon the Lord, feeling a good degree of resignation to his Holy will, whatever might be permitted to befall us.

After watching the vessel with anxiety for some time, she passed away, without making the least apparent stop. On considering the matter, we concluded, that when she saw us at sun-set, we were taken for a Dutch galiot, that might fall an easy prey to her; but when she came up to us in the dark, near enough to examine with telescopes the real shape of our vessel, we were found of such a suspicious build of a non-descript kind, not seen before in these seas, as led to the supposition that we were intended as a decoy; and though very tame looking without, yet perhaps fiery hot within, if meddled with. From the position she took, there is no doubt she expected to throw us into confusion by firing into us, and then, in the midst of it, to have boarded us on the weather side. There was not the least glimmer of light to be seen on board of her; while the Henry Freeling was well lighted up in both cabins and the binnacle, and the reflection from our skylights was well calculated to puzzle and intimidate the crew, as this circumstance would be sufficient at once to show that we were not a common merchant vessel. The captain, cook, steward, Charles, and myself, were all additional persons upon the deck, besides the regular watch, which would give an idea of strength, unusual in so small a vessel as the Henry Freeling. Every thing was conducted with great quietness, not the least hint given to any one on board to prepare for an attack: the watch below was not even informed of what seemed to await us. The Lord only was our deliverer, for she was restrained from laying a hand upon our little bark; and to Him alone our preservation is with gratitude and thankfulness ascribed. The crews of these pirates consist in general of desperadoes of all nations, who frequently commit the most dreadful atrocities on board the ships they seize, putting to death all those who oppose their boarding them: they are mostly crowded with men amply sufficient in number to take and destroy some of our large armed traders. This vessel was doubtless a selected one for the work: we thought she actually sailed twice as fast as the Henry Freeling, which is far from being a slow vessel. We saw no more of her, and after midnight I partook of some refreshing sleep.

[It may be here observed, that during their stay at Rio, an American captain, who had seen them at a distance at sea, going on board, he was asked what he thought of the Henry Freeling, when he saw her and his own vessel becalmed, near the equator: his answer was, that he did not like the look of her, and was glad when he could get farther away from her. There is little doubt that we were taken for a pirate by all that saw us, which perhaps might be of advantage, except that it deprived us entirely of sending letters by any homeward-bound ships, as none would have liked to come near, to ascertain what we really were.]

11th, First day.—The weather being beautifully fine, the crew were collected upon deck twice in the course of the day, for devotional purposes, etc.

12th.—Fine weather, with a fair wind all the day, and a prodigious swell of the sea from the south-east. The swell was so immensely large, that we concluded that the summit of one wave was at least half a mile distant from that of another. A little before five o'clock, p.m., land was proclaimed by the man at the mast-head; shortly after, we were able to behold from the deck the lofty cliff of Cape Frio on the coast of Brazil, about sixty miles east of Rio de Janeiro, just in the position and about the distance it was calculated to be, from the true time of our chronometers, the lunar observations, and the dead reckoning; all combining to prove the accurate navigation of the vessel, and the nautical skill we possess on board of her. Although we seem to be destitute of all interest upon this coast, beyond that of the welfare of mankind the world over; yet, after being fifty-eight days from England, during fifty-seven of which, nothing was to be seen but water and sky; without having spoken another vessel, or even seen more than six, the sight of Cape Frio was cheering and animating, and raised in my heart a tribute of thanksgiving and praise to our never-failing Helper, who has in mercy sustained us in perfect safety, across such a prodigious expanse of mighty waters.

Fifth Month 13th.—The wind continuing favourable, although not very brisk, the whole of the night, considerable progress was made to the westward; but when the day broke, it was discovered that a strong current had swept us farther off the land several miles than was the case the preceding evening. Every possible exertion was made throughout the day, and the different headlands and rocky islands upon the coast were so far recognized as to enable us to steer with confidence towards the mouth of the river, which we entered about three o'clock, p.m. We had intended to run up the harbour of Rio till nearly opposite the town; but soon after passing the fort of Santa Cruz, from which several questions were asked, we were compelled immediately to anchor, by an order from the guard-vessel. In a short time after this, a bill of health was demanded, and a certificate, signed by the Brazilian Consul in London, but as neither of these could be produced, the vessel was at once declared under quarantine; and as it was in vain to remonstrate, quiet submission was all that was left in our power, which was manifested by our immediately hoisting a yellow flag. Although somewhat prepared for this event, I was a little disappointed, having anticipated that we should be once more enabled to stretch our limbs upon the shore, an exercise from which we had long been debarred. For my own part, I had not landed or been absent from the vessel for upwards of six months, except the short interval of enjoyment in the company of our dear friends of the Committee from the Meeting for Sufferings at the town of Ryde, in the Isle of Wight; but I trust, whether we are permitted to land or not on these shores, that the same Almighty arm of strength will continue to uphold us, which has been hitherto so marvellously stretched out for our support. For although we have been fifty-nine days from the Mother-bank, yet out of that time twenty-one days have been expended in calms and light breezes, fifteen of which occurred, while near the equinoctial line, without intermission. But the most remarkable thing is, that we have never made one tack, from the time of leaving England to our anchoring here this day, notwithstanding we have passed over more than fifty degrees of north latitude, and twenty-three degrees of south, (at sixty miles to a degree,) with upwards of forty-three degrees west longitude. Would it then be accounted presumption in any one to hope, that He, under whose constraining influence, in love unutterable, this voyage was prompted, will be graciously pleased to prosper it, from the beginning to the end, and cause it ultimately to tend to the advancement of the Redeemer's kingdom, in the hearts of some of the benighted sons and daughters of the human family; although such blessed effects may never be permitted to come to our knowledge or to gladden our hearts.

[Here they performed a quarantine of five days.]

24th of Fifth Month.—Today several hours have been spent on shore by Charles and myself, for the purpose of expediting the shipment of the needful supplies; in the course of which we had much satisfaction in unexpectedly becoming acquainted with two serious persons, both natives of Scotland, at the house of James Thornton, a relation of our kind friend William Tindall, whose family is one of the solitary few in this place, who are desiring to do the thing that is right. Although we were amply provided with introductory letters, etc., to all the ports of importance throughout the whole voyage, namely: the Cape of Good Hope, the Derwent or Hobart Town, New South Wales, Lima, Valparaiso, Coquimbo, and others; besides letters from the London Missionary Society's Secretary William Ellis, to that Society's correspondents upon many islands of the Pacific Ocean, where missionaries are established; yet at last we were in some measure compelled to enter a port for which, with all our contrivance, we do not possess a single document, and are even unfurnished with a bill of health. After considering the subject, I told my son Charles, that I thought our coming here would not be without answering some good end, though at the time there might be nothing in view, nor had any thing occurred to give rise to such a supposition; but on our meeting with the two serious persons above-mentioned, an opening for some service presented to my mind, and from the conversation which took place while we were together, it seemed pretty clear to me that we should see each other again. Before we parted, I was invited to attend a meeting, which is held by the well-disposed English of this town every First day evening at seven o'clock, which by them is termed a prayer-meeting. I told them, after acknowledging their kindness, that I could not give an answer at the moment, that I must wait to see what tomorrow would bring forth; and that if the way opened for me to accept the invitation, I would take care to be in time. Although it was very evident to me that it was no light thing for a member of our religious Society to attend such a meeting, and faithfully support the different peculiar testimonies given us as a people to bear, and which to some might appear like opposition to or slighting the forms and ceremonies which they have been trained, perhaps from early youth, to the daily practice of, yet it did not seem a time for me to shrink or hold back on that account: leaving the matter altogether unfixed, we returned to our vessel for the night.

25th.—Both forenoon and afternoon the crew were assembled in the usual manner: at both seasons a quiet feeling seemed to prevail. In the course of the day, the prospect of attending the meeting on shore, as a burden upon my shoulders, increased as the day wore away; and believing that I should not be clear without giving up to it, accompanied by Charles, I set forward, and reaching the shore just as it became dark, repaired immediately to the house of James Thornton, where the meeting was to be held. I thought there would be a propriety in speaking to some of the principal persons privately before the meeting commenced; so taking them aside, I told them, that although we might have the same great and important object in view, yet it was probable that we might not all see exactly alike, and therefore I should prefer their going on with their meeting as usual; and if, after it was over, we might be allowed to come in and sit down amongst them, it would perhaps be the most agreeable on both sides; at the same time, I candidly stated, that we could not engage to kneel when they did, neither was it our practice to sing: and that we were desirous to offend neither Jew, nor Gentile, nor the Church. After some further conversation, it was concluded that they should proceed as usual, and that we should sit by, and act, as was most easy to ourselves. Accordingly, at the time appointed, the company repaired to another room prepared for the occasion, where some others were seated in readiness; and amongst these, were several young black people that understood English. It was previously arranged, that when the meeting was quite over, the certificate furnished me by my dear friends of the Morning Meeting in London, should be read, in order to account to all present for the appearance of strangers, and to open the way for any communication on my part that might arise.

We retained our seats the whole time, and my mind being under considerable weight of exercise, it was a relief to be left, as it were, in the quiet. The meeting being concluded, James Thornton read the Morning Meeting's certificate; and after commenting awhile on its contents, we were favoured to drop into solemn silence, which continued until interrupted by my having to state, that it had never been contemplated before leaving England, that we should have to touch at a place where bigotry, superstition, and slavery stalk unmasked with open face, particularly as it had not come within the range of the prospect before us. I acknowledged having mentioned to my son some days ago, that I thought our coming here must be for some object unknown to us at that time; but since we had been sitting together, I found that the Lord had a seed, even in this place, that fear Him and think upon his name; and unto these in an especial manner, my heart was enlarged in the love of the everlasting gospel, that love which would gather all mankind into the heavenly garner of rest and peace. I had not proceeded much farther in the expression of a desire that their “faith might not stand in the wisdom of man, but in the power of God,” before I had to turn their attention to the solemnity so evidently spreading over us, as the crown and diadem of every rightly gathered religious assembly; a feeling not at our command, nor in the power of man to produce, and which could only be felt, when the Great Head of the church fulfils his gracious promise,—“where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them.” After this the way seemed fully opened, and a door of entrance also for the doctrines of the gospel in plainness and freedom. I had particularly to speak of the nature of true spiritual worship, and waiting upon the Lord,—the necessity of knowing for ourselves the great work of regeneration to be going on,—the true faith of the gospel as it is in Jesus the Author and Finisher thereof, which works by love, purifies the heart, and gives victory over death, hell, and the grave;—stating that I had nothing new to offer,—that “other foundation can no man lay, than that is laid, which is Jesus Christ;”—reviving the terms prescribed by Himself to those who would become his disciples and followers:—“the poor in spirit,” were reminded, that to them the blessing appertains, and the kingdom belongs:—the woful sentence to the unprofitable servant, was contrasted with that of the faithful occupier of his Lord's talents;—the beauty, purity, and spirituality of the true gospel church, and the necessity and practicability of becoming members thereof, while here on earth, was held up to view. Considerable brokenness appeared in some individuals; and I believe it may be said, that Truth rose into dominion, and reigned over all. For my own part, I never recollect being more sensible of continued weakness and fear from the beginning to the end; the creature was laid low, and I trust was only desirous that all praise might be ascribed to Him to whom it belongs forever. This was indeed a precious opportunity, and although not obtained without ploughing a furrow six or seven thousand miles in length, across the unstable surface of the ocean, yet the love, joy, and peace that remain, are a rich and ample reward. We reached our little bark in perfect safety, with hearts full of comfort, pretty soon after ten o'clock at night, while a torrent of rain was falling; in the midst of which the water was so remarkably luminous, that every stroke of the oars seemed to dash the fire about us, and the tract of the boat was like frosted silver. The boat was manned with natives of Africa, now held in cruel bondage in this place; they are, however, treated by us as fellow-men and brethren, and truly my heart abounds with love not easily to be described, towards these poor creatures.

Fifth Month 27th.—We were invited to meet some of the individuals, with whom the meeting had been held the preceding First day evening, at the house of one of them, to afford them an opportunity of asking some questions on particular points of Scripture doctrine. To this there was no difficulty on my part in complying, feeling more than usual freedom towards these people.

After having previously taken what exercise on foot the interval would afford, about the time fixed upon we repaired to the place appointed. One of those whom we thus met, is an individual of ardent and capacious mind, and of a most amiable and benevolent disposition; possessing at the same time all the advantages of a scholar being acquainted with several languages, and well versed in the Sacred Writings; and yet with all his good qualities and talents, he is lamentably bewildered and carried away by enthusiastic ideas of the time being near when the Messiah will reign personally upon the earth. He brought forward several texts of Scripture to prove the correctness and solidity of the argument upon which this hope was established, which, according to the impressions upon my mind, simply relate to the great and important work of conversion and regeneration in the hearts of all true believers, and which all have to pass through according to their measure, who are washed, sanctified, and justified, “in the name of the Lord Jesus, and by the Spirit of our God.” It was with me to show him the snare by which he was so thoroughly entangled, and the effect which it had of causing him to be altogether looking without for that kingdom, which can only be found, and must, as an indispensable duty first be sought for, “within.” It occurred to me as a suitable opportunity to bring forward the subject of the Scriptures being so frequently termed by professing Christians 'The word of God,' that although many persons might not be in danger by this practice, of attaching more to the letter than belongs to it, yet it was much to be feared that its tendency was highly injurious, and opposed to the spirituality of the gospel dispensation. I found there was an openness to receive this remark, which was not confined to this person alone, but extended to another present; and that they had previously felt some doubts on this very important point. At last one of them, as if at once convinced in his understanding, exclaimed in the words of the apostle Peter, “And this is the word, which by the gospel is preached unto you.” Several other questions were put to us, which I believe were answered satisfactorily to them. I trust that the time expended was to some edification, and that the noble cause did not suffer, though in the hands of such feeble advocates.

A copy of Bates' Doctrines¹⁰ and a pamphlet were thankfully received by an individual of the place, who, I am persuaded, will not be disposed to keep them to himself. I was in hopes while here, of having an opportunity of distributing part of our stock of Bibles in the Spanish language; but I could not find any person willing to undertake the risk of their being found in his possession. In the course of inquiry on the subject, it appeared that a considerable number of copies of the Scriptures in the Portuguese language were at one time brought into this country, and it is supposed were destroyed, under pretence of their being too imperfect a translation to be circulated.

29th.—Having informed Captain Keen last night, that we were ready for sea, at an early hour this morning, every preparation was made for our departure, and a countersign obtained from the commandant of the uppermost fort in the harbour, to enable us to pass the outermost fort of Santa Cruz. At this place our shackles were all struck off, and the ocean set open before us. When we arrived within hail of the fort, some questions were asked, amongst others, 'where are you bound?' To Tahiti was the reply, which, agreeing with our entry outwards at the Custom house in London, was accepted. The countersign was then demanded, and which was immediately given by us. This was demanded and answered a second time, when 'I wish you a good voyage,' closed the ceremony. Our captain having acknowledged the good wish, we took in our boat, again trimmed the sails to the breeze, and bidding farewell to the coast of Brazil, stretched into the southern ocean. As rounding Cape Horn was my first intention, it has at times passed before me, that if on our leaving Rio de Janeiro, the wind should be strong and favourable for steering towards it, I should feel a little difficulty in deciding which route to aim at; but I believe I have felt desirous to be guided aright in this particular.

It being Fifth day, Charles and myself sat down together in the cabin as usual; and after deep wading, a degree of that spiritual strength was graciously vouchsafed, by which only the thoughts and imaginations of the heart can be cast down and subdued.

We were informed on respectable authority, that two-thirds of the population of the neighbourhood of 'St. Sebastian,' consist of coloured people, and that nothing could keep them in such a state of cruel and abject slavery, but their having been taken from different tribes in Africa, amongst whom a most inveterate enmity has constantly existed; and care has industriously been taken to keep perpetually alive such a spirit of revenge against each other, as cannot be destroyed even by slavery itself. This is spoken of as a politic measure, lest they should unite and set themselves free: dreadful indeed would the day be to the majority of their white masters, should such a thing come to pass, unless controlled by a higher power. The slave-trade, though nominally abolished, is still carried on to a dreadful extent, in an underhand manner. Many ships go away loaded from hence to Africa, and return with large cargoes of these unhappy victims, which they land on distant parts of the coast, and then come into the harbour, with perhaps a few elephants' teeth, as if from an unsuccessful voyage. This is well understood, and winked at. We were informed, that five hundred newly imported negroes, might be purchased in the neighbourhood at any time. Although our tarriance at Rio do Janeiro was little more than a fortnight; yet many of the poor negroes who had been connected with us by employment or otherwise, had become much attached to us: and some hours after having left the coast, it was fully ascertained that only a very slight occurrence had prevented three of these people from being secreted on board our vessel.

The Roman Catholic religion appears to be rapidly declining in Brazil; but alas! the religion of Jesus is still afar off to the human eye. In two of the principal orders of friars, we understood that no vacancy occasioned by death is permitted to be filled up, so that these must finally die away altogether in a few years; and they are now compelled to render an account of their finances, as the property of the monasteries (at one time immensely rich) is undergoing a regular transfer to the public treasury, in proportion as the original holders diminish.

Chapter XVII.

Departure from Rio Janeiro—Proceed by the Cape of Good Hope for Van Diemen's Land—Heavy Seas and Stormy Weather—Remarkable Preservation—Continuance of Stormy Weather—Lightening the Vessel—Hurricane—Frequent 'Lying To'—Tremendous Storms.

Sixth Month 2nd, 1834.—Since leaving the land, the winds have been so strongly opposed to our going round Cape Horn, as nearly to put that course out of sight: today we are so far off the coast of South America as to be exposed to the swell of the great South Sea, which is no longer kept from us by a point of land which forms the projecting Cape; this swell is prodigious, and plainly shows the turbulent state of the weather in that quarter; it seems like a final settlement and removal of any thing like a doubt in my mind, as to our being in the right track at present. After midnight the weather became very rough, and the wind inclining more and more southerly, rendered our position in sailing very critical. Before four o'clock, a.m., two heavy seas broke in upon us, one of which stove in a part of the bulwark on the starboard side: happily none of the watch on deck were washed overboard. From this time things got rapidly worse, and the only alternative now left was to bring the vessel to, with her head to the wind and sea, under suitable storm-canvass to maintain that position. In addition to the great risk attending at all times any circumstance connected with 'lying to,' it was a position in which we had not yet tried the Henry Freeling. It was not indeed an everyday occurrence for a small vessel, which we have had hitherto no opportunity of proving under more gentle circumstances, to be brought round against a sea, which had nothing to break the range of its sweeping influence between her and the south pole. Captain Koen manifested great coolness and ability on the occasion; and soon after day-break all things were ready to accomplish our intended purpose: to effect which, an interval was waited for, when the blast should lull a little: and while much depended upon a timely re-action of the sails, so as to prevent the vessel from forcing herself with too great violence into the opposing waves, as her head came round towards them; at the same time it was indispensably needful to keep a sufficient quantity of canvass set, to guard against being overtaken and overwhelmed by the mountain waves, which in an awful manner were now threatening us behind. A few minutes relieved us from suspense and anxiety,—and although heavy laden, with our newly recruited stock of water, some of which encumbered the deck,—yet we had the comfort to see the vessel rise in a lively manner to the surface of the loftiest billows, before any material quantity of their contents had time to burst over her. As the wind blew directly from an immensity of ice, a change so sudden from the great heat we had so recently witnessed, to such a cold penetrating blast, was sensibly felt by all on board.

10th.—Towards evening it again became stormy with much rain; the sea breaking over us with great violence, scarcely any part, even below deck, could be preserved free from wet, and all our ingenuity was called forth to preserve our beds moderately dry. At times the weight of water seemed too much for our little bark to bear, from which she could scarcely extricate herself, before another deluge burst in upon her deck. A state of desertion was my lot throughout the day, and although at seasons I was ready to say, “Lord, do you not care that we perish?” yet I was not permitted in the darkest moment to castaway my confidence; although for many hours it seemed needful for us to stand as with our lives in our hands, not knowing how soon they might be called for. At midnight the scene was truly awful, the wind blew in a furious manner, and the sea raged with increased violence, with heavy falls of rain. The mercury in the marine barometer, which had been falling all the day, became lower, and the little vessel seemed to twist and bend beneath her heavy burden. At this moment of extremity, behold a shift of wind to the south-west, which instead of taking aback suddenly the little canvass we were scudding under, (which might have produced consequences above all others the most to be dreaded) came regularly round; and the captain, availing himself of this moment, directed that the vessel should be 'hove to.' Captain Keen came to me shortly after this circumstance had taken place, to acknowledge how providentially this change had been ordered, being sensible of the favour thus graciously bestowed upon us.

Sixth Month 13th.—This date has not failed to awaken feelings of painful reflection in reference to days which have long since passed away, it being thirty-three years since it pleased the God of all my mercies to bestow a crown upon the head of a poor unworthy creature, even the rich blessing of a truly virtuous wife, at the close of a meeting at Doncaster. Full well at this remote period do I remember the solemn and delightful season with which we were favoured, from the beginning to the end of the meeting. Dear Thomas Colley appeared largely in testimony on the occasion, to the tendering of many present. It was indeed an earnest of the heavenly Master's love; which never ceased to follow us through all the vicissitudes of time, during a life not a little chequered, for a term of more than thirty-two years and a-half, when He was pleased to deprive me of my greatest earthly treasure, and to take back that which He gave; but it was His own, I verily believe, even His, the same who enabled me to say, in the moment of my greatest distress, “blessed be the name of the Lord.” In looking over the different relatives and friends present on the above occasion, there is at this period scarcely one of those individuals, at that time about our own age, who now survives; and I find that many of them much younger than ourselves, have been summoned from works to rewards: thus, while many of my contemporaries have finished their earthly career, I am still spared a little longer, a living monument of the Lord's everlasting mercy,—for the purpose, I humbly trust, of declaring unto others what He has done for my soul, and to show forth the praises of Him, who has translated me out of darkness into his marvellous light. And although the sacrifice I am making may appear great, and be rendered more formidable by the late hour in the evening in which it has to be offered; yet in my estimation it is small indeed, and light as the dust of the balance, when the love and mercy, long-suffering and compassion, of my good and gracious Lord God, are brought into remembrance; who has redeemed my life from destruction, and crowned me with loving-kindness and tender mercies,.—to myself incomprehensible, and I am persuaded only known in the same degree, to those whose sin is blotted out as a cloud, and their transgressions as a thick cloud, by repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ, who came into the world to save sinners, of whom each of us, in the depth of self-abasement, can say, “I am chief.”

17th.—A considerable press of sail was carried in the hope of making the island of Tristan d'Acunha, and two others lying at no great distance from it. Next morning, the 18th, the weather was rough and threatening, with fog and rain. The captain considered it the more needful to obtain a sight of the islands; and relinquishing the design of passing to the northward of them, we bore up after day-break, in a southeasterly direction, to avail ourselves of the strong but favourable wind. As the day advanced, the wind and sea increased, and the fog was so dense close down to the horizon, that there seemed but little prospect of discovering the land, at a sufficient distance to prevent our running directly upon it. As the afternoon wore away, the danger hourly increased: but at this juncture, the Everlasting Arm of strength, in customary mercy and compassion, was signally displayed for our preservation, and in such a manner as wholly to exclude the slightest pretence of mortal man's having the least share in it. The mist cleared suddenly away; and though but for a short interval, yet it was sufficient to discover a lofty rocky island, about half a mile distant, standing nearly perpendicularly out of the sea, far above the mast-head of the Henry Freeling. We soon perceived that this was the island called Inaccessible, and appropriately so, as from its vast height and steep approach, no landing apparently on the side next to us, could possibly have been effected. This seemed at once to relieve our anxiety, and the captain now considered all danger as past, and that we should safely run between this island and another called Nightingale Island, although not able to see it on account of the fog, these islands being ten miles asunder.

Thus cheered, we pursued our course with great velocity, as the wind had increased in violence soon after the high rocky island was first seen. But in another hour, our prospect was suddenly clouded by the appearance of more rugged rocky land on the same side of us. This circumstance, for a time, staggered all our hopes, as it could not be accounted for; and of course we knew not how soon some unknown lurking reef might wreck our fragile vessel, which was scourged on by a hurricane-blast with greater speed, it is probable, than at any previous time. In this situation, the night was gathering blackness and darkness in the midst of a heavy tempest. The captain, though evidently unprepared for this mysterious circumstance, conducted every thing with calmness and composure, and concluded to haul two or three points to the southward, lest a shift of wind in the night should drive us back upon these desolate islands. He afterwards drew a sketch of these islands, with their respective latitudes and longitudes, showing the drift of the Henry Freeling, and the manner in which she had approached them in the night, and after day-break in the morning; plainly demonstrating the true cause which placed the islands in an apparently unknown position as we passed them, exactly showing why we did not pass between them, as he expected we should do, which merely arose from the course having been altered to a more southerly direction, unremembered in the moment of surprise. Although I have thus entered into the above details, yet it plainly appeared to me at the time, and is here recorded with humble gratitude to the great Preserver of men, that if the weather had continued so impenetrably thick and dark as totally to have hidden the islands from our sight, still we should have been guided past them in safety, as was evidently the case when first they were discovered, notwithstanding the alarming proximity of their lofty crags and precipices.

19th.—Before sunset we got sight of the island of Tristan d'Acunha. It is fifteen hundred miles from any other land, except the two small islands before-mentioned, and is said to be upwards of eight thousand feet above the level of the sea; though we are now fifty-seven miles distant, it is still plainly discernible, even to my imperfect sight.

20th.—It was observed that the mercury in the barometer, was this morning again on the decline, and by four o'clock, p.m., had fallen to 29-53. The wind freshened throughout the day, and at night blew with such tremendous violence, accompanied with heavy rain and some lightning, as compelled us again to seek safety by 'lying to;' but, however trying to be thus disabled from making use of a fair wind when it blows, I believe we are truly thankful in having such a source of relief from the terrors of the storm afforded to us, poor solitary wanderers on the mighty deep. It is three weeks today since we left Rio, and up to this time we have not seen another ship.

21st.—Still 'lying to,' in heavy gales from the southwest, with frequent squalls still more heavy, with rain and forked lightning: to use the expression of the carpenter who had charge of the morning watch, 'the lightning had been flying about like ribbons.' The weather was extremely cold and penetrating. Owing to the water searching through every little crevice from the working of the frame of the vessel, my berth has become so damp, as to compel me to have recourse to any part of the main cabin, where most free from dropping water.

Sixth Month 22nd.—'Lying to,' as yesterday; the storm still raging with unabated violence, squalls, heavy rain, and lightning through the night. The sea having risen to a fearful height, frequently inundated the deck of the vessel; and from the continual working of her whole frame, our bed-places have been unfit to sleep in, the water having found its way through numerous chinks. This morning early, a heavy sea broke into us, bringing a larger quantity of water upon the deck than at any time before. To myself a very remarkable and striking event took place this morning. Shortly after the vessel had shipped a heavy body of water, I went up the hatchway to look round for a short interval; at that moment the seas were running in mountainous succession, and I observed that some of the loftiest of the waves were very nearly prevailing against our little vessel; it seemed as if she could not much longer escape being overwhelmed by them altogether. I made no remark to any one, but soon after we tried to get some breakfast: while so occupied, one of the men called down to inform us that there was a sight worth looking at on deck; it was a large collection of a species of whale, close by the ship. I thought I should like to see them; there were perhaps more than two hundred of these animals close to us, each about twelve feet long. When I went upon deck after breakfast they were still close to our bows; and the man at the helm said, that they served as a breakwater for us: their being so was afterwards mentioned by some other person. At last my eyes were open to discover the protection they were affording to our little struggling vessel: they occupied a considerable portion of the surface of the sea, in the exact direction between the vessel and the wind and waves, reaching so near to us, that some of them might have been struck with a harpoon; they remained constantly swimming in gentle and steady order, as if to maintain the position of a regular phalanx, and I suggested that nothing should be done to frighten them away. It was openly remarked by some, that not one sea had broken on board us, while they occupied their useful post; and when they at last retired, it was perceived that the waves did not rage with the same violence as before they came to our relief. I give this wonderful circumstance just as it occurred; and if any should be disposed to view it as a thing of chance, I do not; for I believe it to be one of the great and marvellous works of the Lord God Almighty. These friends in need, and friends indeed, filled up a sufficiently wide space upon two of the large swells of the ocean, completely to obstruct the approach of each succeeding wave opposed to the vessel; so that if the third wave from us was coming in lofty foam towards us, by the time it had rolled over and become the second wave, its foaming threatening aspect was destroyed entirely, reaching us at last in the form of a dead and harmless swell. They are very oily fish, but seldom larger than to yield about two barrels of oil; they are commonly called black fish.

Sixth Month 23rd.—Still 'lying to,' sustained through another rough and perilous night; the wintry storm yet howling around us. We remarked, after having just passed the shortest day in this climate, that our friends in England had returned home from the Yearly Meeting, and were enjoying the delightful days of summer at their greatest length.

Sixth Month 26th.—The tempestuous weather, which our little vessel has had of late to contend with so largely, the great length of voyage still unaccomplished, at the most unfavourable season of the year, have frequently been a subject of serious thought, but more particularly from witnessing, since the last heavy gales, considerable and almost daily increasing leakage from different parts of the deck, owing to the great strain to which her upper works have been subjected, by the enormous weight of lumber, together with part of our stock of fresh water, upon the deck. After looking at the state of things on every side, and taking the different bearings of the whole into deliberate consideration, it seemed the most prudent measure, in the hope of contributing to the future safety of the vessel, and enabling her to perform the service looked forward to, in its fullest extent, to lighten her deck, by launching overboard, on the first favourable opportunity, every weight of spars, etc. that could be dispensed with. As this could not be done in rough weather, without the risk of injury both to the people and the ship; and there being less wind and sea today, than for some time back, it was resolved, if possible, to accomplish it. Accordingly, four heavy logs, an old spare squaresail-yard, a heavy spar intended for a top-mast, with many other cumbrous weights, which tended to increase the weakness of the quarters of the vessel, were cast into the sea without accident. It is truly cause of regret thus to sacrifice articles, which at a future day may be much needed; but the necessity of endeavouring to relieve the present difficulty and distress, compelled us to pass over that, which now can be looked at as remote, and may never occur. As this step has not been taken suddenly, or hastily determined upon in the moment of impending danger, when fear might have operated, but is the result of patient and deliberate observation, I trust that our dear friends in England will see the propriety of our so doing. Several of the articles thus thrown into the sea, belonged to the vessel when first purchased, and I believe the sum of five pounds sterling would cover the whole amount of such things as were afterwards bought and intended as extra stores. I was disappointed at finding on inquiry that the name Henry Freeling, which was deeply branded on each of the four logs, had not been previously cut out before they were thrown overboard,—lest this omission should give rise to a report of our having been wrecked, gone to pieces, or foundered at sea, if any of them should reach a distant shore, or be picked up by another ship.

Seventh Month 2nd.—Since the 26th ultimo, the weather has been very rugged. Tomorrow we expect to be abreast of the Cape of Good Hope, but more than one hundred and fifty miles to the southward of it, having kept aloof from the coast, in the hope of avoiding the currents and heavy gales, which prevail in its vicinity at this season of the year. To us, so far, it has not proved a Cape of Good Hope, but a Cape of constant anxiety and fearful expectation, having been marked by tempest after tempest, cold rain, hail, sleet, and lightning.¹¹

7th.—Still 'lying to,' the storm has continued all night, and the sea makes very heavy upon us. The mercury in the marine barometer sunk to 29° 30, then rose a little, and again sunk lower in the tube. As the night advanced, the storm increased with awful violence. The strength of the wind was incredible, and the lightning appalling, with a fall of rain and sleet; the sea broke in upon our little ship in an alarming manner. The poor men were lashed upon the deck with ropes, to prevent their being washed away; benumbed with cold, and at times floating with the vast load of water upon the deck—their sufferings are not easily described. The bulwark on the starboard side was damaged, and the spray reached more than two-thirds up the main-mast. In the morning, the seamen expressed considerable discouragement; and I observed a disposition rather to make the worst of things. The captain said, 'he hoped he should not see such another night in this vessel.' One person did not expect she would have kept up until morning. When assembled at the breakfast table, I had to tell them, with a degree of firmness, that a murmur ought not to be heard amongst us, but rather the expression of thankfulness, that we are as we are. On looking round at the ravages of the storm, I was surprised to find that so little damage was done; and the increase of pumping had been comparatively trifling to what might have been expected from the violent and frequent strokes of the sea, and the floods of water that had rolled over the deck of the vessel.

In the darkest part of the night, a distinct luminous appearance, or glow of light, remained at our mast-head; a phenomenon only seen in dreadful weather, when the atmosphere is highly charged with electric fluid. The sailors call it a corposant.¹² I think such an appearance is mentioned in John Churchman's Journal, or that of some other worthy. The countenances of our men were considerably whitened this morning, by the great quantity of salt, which having been deposited by the constant wash of the sea, had dried upon their faces.

8th.—Early this morning the storm abated, and at eight a.m. we bore away before it to the eastward. In the course of the storm yesterday evening, unusual darkness gathered round us, when suddenly the wind which blew with great violence, increased to a complete hurricane, and roared in a terrific manner, and for a while closely threatened our little vessel. The force of the wind was so great, that the waves for the time almost ceased to undulate, and the surface of the ocean became levelled and whitened with foam. At this juncture I was comforted in beholding the calmness and resignation with which my dear Charles was favoured. At one time he remarked, 'What a painful situation those people must be in, who have not a good reason for being exposed to similar distress, when they find themselves overtaken by it.' I told him it was formidable enough, even to those who felt themselves in the line of apprehended duty.

9th.—The wind moderate, but the swell of the sea caused by the late tempest continues to impede our progress; the motion however of the vessel is become greatly diminished: Charles remarked, “then are they glad, because they be quiet which truly was our case.

13th.—This morning the monsters of the deep seemed roused from their secret abodes, probably by the approach of elementary strife. Several whales were observed about us: a fine spermaceti whale followed for some time close to the vessel, exactly in her wake. This was a full grown female fish, and was thought to be nearly as long as the Henry Freeling. As night approached another storm began to threaten.

Seventh Month 14th.—At ten a.m., it was so tempestuous, that we again hugged the howling blast, by 'heaving to:' as the vessel came round with her head to the wind, one heavy wave broke on board, but happily none of the crew were lost. In the afternoon, when it was thought that the storm had arrived at its greatest strength, this hope was suddenly extinguished by the mercury falling in a short space of time down to 29-50. The captain said, 'We have done all we can,—trust in Providence only remains.' Heavy rain succeeded; but instead of the bursting forth of another hurricane, which the incessant thunder and lightning led us to expect, it was observed that the roar of the wind was lessening; it changed from northeast to north-west, but shifted so gradually in the right direction for the vessel, that the change was scarcely felt, and the sea fell in full proportion as the wind abated.

Two or three days previous to this tempest, I felt much depressed on account of my Charles, he having drooped more than usual, from the effects of the cold weather; the great length of time we had already been the sport of the winds and waves since leaving Rio de Janeiro, could not but excite a painful and discouraging fear lest his strength should prove unequal to the remaining part of the voyage, as we had only passed over about one thousand miles in distance, since beginning to traverse the margin of the Indian Ocean; and we are still greatly annoyed by the strong currents and heavy gales which prevail from the direction of Madagascar, and are probably attracted down the Mozambique Channel, which separates that island from the coast of Natal, on the south-east shore of Africa. But as the late storm approached, I felt, through unmerited favour, increasing peacefulness and tranquillity, which nothing during its whole continuance was permitted to disturb; and in the most awful moment of uncertainty and impending danger, fear had no place to enter; this was utterly banished by the love of the ever-blessed Master that flowed in my heart, and which in the true dignity of its heavenly power east it out: and the language which at intervals continued to prevail and occupy the inner man, with a soothing and encouraging sweetness, was that of the Psalmist,—“Delight yourself in the Lord, and he shall give you the desires of your heart.” Thus indeed was strength truly administered, according to the glorious working of His power, unto all patience and long-suffering with joyfulness, to endure and to give thanks to the Lord Most High. I should shrink from making any remark on the state of my own mind, while in the extremity out of which we have been so remarkably delivered, did I not feel called upon by a sense of gratitude to our compassionate Lord; at the same time a hope gleams through my heart, that it will tend to strengthen the faith of some hesitating and doubting fellow-travellers who may eventually peruse these lines, to “follow on to know the Lord” for themselves; and thus partake of His love, mercy, and life-giving presence, and be encouraged to forsake all and follow Him, “nothing doubting.” wherever He may be pleased to lead: for the declaration,—“Lo I am with you alway,” will assuredly be verified in their experience, and all earthly things will be estimated but as loss and dross, in comparison with the excellence of the knowledge of Christ Jesus.

Seventh Month 22nd.—While lying to in heavy weather the forepart of last night, (the fourth time within eight days,) I felt much exhausted for lack of rest, and not a little discouraged by surrounding circumstances. The almost incessant labouring of the vessel, and the heavy strokes of the sea, which have so often assailed her battered sides, could not fail to occasion extra pumping when it blew hard: although upon the whole, she had suffered little since her deck had been freed from dead weights; and yet every returning day seemed to bring a fresh tempest with it, which kept the sea unceasingly agitated. All these circumstances could not fail to occasion renewed thoughtfulness, more especially as we have still more than one hundred degrees of east longitude to run down, before reaching our intended port, and are so frequently compelled to 'lie to,' for our safety, lest the sea should overwhelm us altogether. Thus I was letting in fear and doubts, and listening to the tempter's insinuations, notwithstanding the multitude of mercies which have been showered upon us for our deliverance. Such is the frailty of human nature, that when we see the waves of adversity boisterous about us, we begin to sink, by letting in fear at the prospect, although fully sanctioned at setting out by the Lord himself: even the brightest gleam of sunshine soon loses its gladdening influence on our minds, unless again and again renewed by the ever-blessed Master, who having been touched with a feeling of our manifold infirmities, pities the weakness of poor mortal dust. After passing through considerable mental conflict, in contrition I went upon the deck, supposing from the great motion of the vessel, that the storm had continued all the night, and that we were still 'lying to;' when, to my surprise, I found a bright and beautiful morning, the weather apparently entirely changed, the wind fair, and the vessel gradually pursuing her route; but the great and diverse swells of the sea still occasioned her to labour hard, nearly as much as during the storm in the fore part of the night. I could not help feeling ashamed and mortified in abasement of self, in finding I had been thus duped by the grand adversary, who, ever on the alert and unwearied, had found the 'watch' neglected in a darkened gloomy hour of trial and perplexity; and thus he improved the opportunity to his own advantage, leaving me covered with self-reproach as in dust and ashes.

27th.—It is cause of humble admiration and gratitude to observe within the last few days, an improvement in the health of my Charles; considering the cold and damp to which he has been so long exposed, without having felt the glow of a fire the whole winter, and the small portion of exercise that can possibly be obtained, beyond what the motion of the vessel supplies, he is certainly sustained in a very remarkable manner. I have of late been much comforted by a circumstance brought to my recollection respecting him, I feel no hesitation in believing, by the good remembrancer,—although many years have passed away since it occurred; but a lively image of the whole event is now strikingly brought home to my mind. When he was about four years old, it was concluded that the time was come for him to begin to attend meetings; and I well remember sitting under the gallery in Sheffield meeting, about twenty-one years ago, when he was conducted by one of his brothers to a seat at the top of the meeting, for the first time. I had been in my seat a short time previously, and on seeing him led up the side aisle, it sprang up in my heart to offer him that day unto the Lord. Although at the time a pretty strong impression was engraven on my mind which yielded a peaceful review, to the best of my knowledge it has since been as much obliterated, as a thing that never took place, from that period until a few days ago, when it was recalled fresh and fragrant to my understanding.

Seventh Month 28th.—The height of the waves compelled us again to 'lie to,' under storm-canvass, for thirty hours. This gale increased to a violent degree, but differed in most respects from all we had previously been called to witness. In all the preceding cases there had been a change of a favourable nature to cheer us through the dreary tempest; but now every alteration appeared to be against us, serving only to render our situation more and more alarming. It did seem as if we were now cast off, and left to the fury of the wind and waves; and notwithstanding we had with our own eyes seen as it were Jordan driven back, and the waters of the Red Sea stand as on heaps, for our deliverance; yet now the glorious presence was withdrawn, and so completely hidden, that no trace could be perceived to administer one glimmering ray of hope in the midst of our complicated distress. On looking at our forlorn situation, and the overwhelming appearance of the storm, the fury of which had been only aggravated by every change which had so far taken place, it now seemed too late for any thing to occur that could operate in our favour, as the sea was running in confused heaps different ways in a frightful manner, caused by the wind having shifted to different points, and from each point blowing furiously. About three o'clock in the afternoon, the mercury fell lower and lower, when we were overtaken with a squall of wind, truly appalling and terrific, which in a short time afterwards was succeeded by a second still more violent; but, through the medium of these two dreadful blasts, which at first threatened nothing but destruction, our deliverance was marvellously effected. Such was the fury of these two tyfoons, that they actually, in a short space of time, changed the wild and disfigured surface of the troubled ocean from unruly mountains to a rugged level, by their boisterous breath, leaving nothing but a sea white as milk with foam. From this time the storm subsided, and at midnight we were again enabled to bear away for Van Diemen's Land, distant about four thousand seven hundred miles.

31 st.—'Lying to,' with an increasing tempest around us. Charles and myself sat down together, it being Fifth day; though “troubled on every side, yet not distressed; perplexed, but not in despair; persecuted” again and again, but verily “not forsaken; cast down but not destroyed”—however much like two poor outcasts tossing on the bosom of the restless waters, far from friends and native home, but under a peaceful feeling of resignation and poverty of spirit. The barometer was low yesterday, but had begun to rise a little: in a short time, however, it began again to sink, and dropped down to 28-50, being an inch lower than when we experienced the hurricane in the neighbourhood of the Cape of Good Hope. This circumstance spread a gloom over us; having witnessed such dreadful weather about three weeks before, when the mercury was at 29'50, and knowing the correctness of the barometer in former cases, our apprehensions were increasingly awakened; and under a sense that another close trial was not far distant, we endeavoured to wait patiently the event, though in painful suspense, with, I believe, a full surrender of ourselves to the will of Almighty God;—remembering my poor, scattered orphan family and dear relations and friends everywhere,—in earnestness and brokenness before Him, who knows the anguish of a tribulated soul. Towards evening the wind and sea increased in such a dreadful manner, that the horrors of the scene cannot be faithfully described. It blew a perfect hurricane; and although we had only sufficient storm canvass set to keep the vessel's head to the sea, yet she seemed in danger of being torn to pieces with the intense pressure, against which she had to struggle for some hours together. The captain was much alarmed, and said, 'If she gets through this, she will get through any thing.' The agitated waters broke in upon us on every side, like cascades, frequently loading the deck with their weight: the whole frame of the vessel trembled and shook with the strain in an unusual manner. This hurricane at length became a steady gale of wind, but very heavy.

Eighth Month 4th.—The weather very boisterous, although we were permitted to keep before the wind and sea. Today we were escorted by an unusual number of birds, such as the albatross, Cape hen, stormy petrell, etc. On the 5th we were compelled again to 'lie to' and this day, the 6th, we were again 'lying to.' At three o'clock, p.m., we were assailed by a most violent tempest, with heavy falls of rain, sleet, and hail; the sea curled in an unusual manner, and raging in opposite directions;—our little bark seemed as if she could not long sustain the unequal conflict, as the wind kept increasing to a degree almost inconceivable, except to those who may have witnessed the hurricane with all its furious and angry growl. Every thing was done that could be devised for our relief; but all our efforts seemed overpowered, and we could not wholly divest ourselves of an apprehension that she must eventually fill and founder by the lee with us at last, if the fury of the storm were not curbed; of this, however, there seemed no probability, and the approach of night served only to increase its horror, and renew its force. In this situation one would have supposed that no relief could have availed short of an abatement of the storm; but true it is, that an increase of its fury produced a circumstance, which at once enabled our little vessel to rise with comparative ease to every opposing mountain-billow.

At eight o'clock, p.m., the wind was so powerfully strong, that it blew our new storm-jib away from the duff or bolt-rope altogether. Every exertion was made to prevent the total loss of the sail, but it flapped with such violence as to shake the whole frame of the vessel, threatening destruction to all that came near it. At length it was lowered down into the water under the lee of the ship, and happily secured, but not without one man being hurt by it. For lack of this sail, it was now feared that the sea would make a constant breach over our deck; but before another sail could be prepared to replace it, it was truly relieving to find that the vessel bowed to the seas as they met her, in a much more lively manner without it, than she had done with it. Thus, in a very unexpected manner, was a way made for us to ride triumphantly through the remainder of the terrific storm, without any material injury to the vessel beyond the loss of part of her bulwark. “This poor man cried, and the Lord heard him, and saved him out of all his troubles and to Him be the glory and the praise forever. Every storm which we had witnessed previously to the last, had been more or less accompanied by thunder and lightning, sometimes in an awful manner: and although we left England without conducting chains; yet thus far, not a flash has been permitted to harm us. By way of precaution, the pumps have at times been stopped up, to prevent their being split. Such favours I desire to record with thankfulness, and to number them among the many blessings, which have descended upon us from our heavenly Parent times innumerable.

11th.—It is now more than ten weeks since we sailed from Rio de Janeiro; we are still more than three thousand miles from our desired port, and yet the winds have mostly blown from favourable quarters, but often with such violence as to render them unavailing, on account of the tremendous seas they have occasioned. A larger vessel would have profited by many of the gales, which have compelled us to 'lie to' until they have moderated; when, perhaps, a change of wind to a less favourable quarter has succeeded, our progress has been much retarded by the old swell yet remaining. What little we do gain seems like fetching water from the well beside the gate of Bethlehem, at the risk of natural life; yet I am fully persuaded that it has been “good for us to be here.”

10th.—The two last days the weather has been very rugged, but it became more gentle in the course of last night; and some heavy showers of rain have greatly assisted in stilling the swellings of the restless waters; which allowed our ship's company to sit down together in a good degree of comfort, it being First day.

14th.—Today we have again ventured before the wind. In the forenoon, it being the Fifth day of the week, Charles and myself were engaged in silent waiting. I sat under a painful feeling of great strippedness and desertion, which have frequently been my portion of late; but my Lord knows best what is best for me; and although His blessed will may not at all times suit the creaturely desires of a poor finite mortal, yet I think I desire to be patiently resigned, and to be able to say in sincerity of heart, “I have behaved and quieted myself, as a child that is weaned of his mother; my soul is even as a weaned child;” humbly praying, that at seasons an evidence may be granted that all things will work together for good, although the blessed Comforter, who alone can relieve my soul, may be so veiled from the view of my mind as to appear far from me. By noon the wind and sea had so much risen, that it became needful again to 'lie to,' without delay. Soon after the vessel was brought to the wind, every indication was exhibited of another dreadful tempest being close upon us. The interval of suspense was short before our fears were realized by being again surrounded with all the horrors of a furious storm, which continued through the night with unabated fury.

15th.—The wind shifted several points in the course of the gale, causing the white crested foaming billows to run one against another in fearful heaps, and breaking as they met in every direction, to exhibit one vast ocean of white foam in confused agitation, not to be described. As the principal weight of this mighty tempest was from the southward and westward, in the neighbourhood of the pole; the wind coming off such vast bodies of ice, brought with it most chilling cold, and heavy falls of hail or sleet, which added much to the already accumulated sufferings of our poor, drenched, and benumbed seamen.

16th.—After midnight the storm became less violent, and only blew a gale of wind, which gradually diminished before day-break this morning, and the mountainous waves having ceased from foaming, though still prodigious, about seven o'clock, a.m., we again put the head of our little bark towards the long desired Tasmania; although but small progress could be made, from the lofty swells which remained. During the tempest of yesterday, it was very evident that several on board were much discouraged at its awful strength. It was acknowledged by the captain, mate, and others, that they had never beheld such a dreadful sea at any time before; and yet the little Freeling was preserved through it all with comparatively slight injury. Such indeed have been the renewed extendings of abounding mercy, as ought to be sufficient to cause even those of little faith to be ashamed, and to cease any longer to doubt: but, alas! the rod once withdrawn, is soon forgotten; as is the loving-kindness of the Lord, when the danger is passed away: like Israel of old, we sing His praise, but soon forget His works.

17th.—The weather being more gentle the crew were assembled twice in the course of the day for devotional purposes. The evening was crowned with sweet peace.

At noon this day we have completed full 140° of longitude, more than 100 of these since leaving Rio de Janeiro by the way of the South American continent to the Cape of Good Hope; and we have yet about 46.5° more to accomplish before entering the Derwent river, besides several degrees of south latitude to fill up.

Ninth Month 6th.—Since the 17th ult. to this date, the weather has been more favourable, though often boisterous. Today strong gales and cloudy; but the sea although high, still admits of our steering a direct course: yesterday at noon we were about 340 miles from the southern promontory of Tasmania. If the weather be clear tomorrow, and the wind continue in this quarter with the same strength, we expect to see the land once more in the afternoon. This evening there is a rumour of land being in sight.

Chapter XVIII.

Van Diemen's Land—Anchor Off Hobart Town—Meeting With James Backhouse and George W. Walker—Aborigines—Illness of Daniel Wheeler—Sail for Botany Bay—Arrival at Sydney Interview with the Governor—Public Meeting at Sydney—Religious Engagements.

Ninth Month 7th.—After sailing rapidly with a strong breeze all night, the land was fairly in sight at day-light this morning; but it was too distant to be determined with certainty what particular part we saw. Towards noon the south Cape of Van Diemen's Land, with the land in the neighbourhood of Tasman's Head were distinguished; but the wind had shifted almost directly against our vessel, and a considerable swell of the sea had risen, although in the morning these were both in our favour. In the course of the day we had two satisfactory sittings with the crew, it being First day. About five o'clock, p.m., the atmosphere assumed a very threatening appearance. The sailors could scarcely get in the sails before it blew in a furious manner. Our hopes, which had previously brightened at the prospect of getting into port, were now unexpectedly blighted; and instead of a probability of this being soon realized, we had the mortification to witness a painful reverse; for before midnight we were literally blown off the land altogether, and our situation rendered hazardous by the neighbourhood of rocks and shoals. One of these rocks, from its exact position being unknown, caused more thoughtfulness than others. The storm lasted all night, and brought with it the swells of the Pacific; which meeting those from the edge of the Indian Ocean, together with the currents occasioned by New Holland, etc., soon raised a cross and outrageous sea. It was thought that our vessel had not sustained more real damage from any storm she had previously encountered during the whole voyage, except one, which exceeded it in violence. The sea ranged over our deck almost the whole night. She was struck several times in different parts by heavy seas, and part of the bulwark on the starboard side was driven on board.

Towards morning on the 9th instant, the strength of the wind was so greatly diminished, that by eleven o'clock, a.m., we made sail, and stretched to the northward again. Soon after noon the small islands of Pedro Blanco and the Eddystone were plainly ascertained; afterward the main land appeared, and we steered at once for Tasman's Head, entering Storm Bay just at nightfall. After beating about for the next forty-eight hours with contrary winds and great fatigue to the men, we entered the Derwent before dark on the 10th instant, and were at last favoured to anchor safely off Hobart Town at eleven, p.m., nearly opposite Mulgrave battery; and eventually moored with two anchors, close to the garden of the Lieutenant-Governor Arthur. Next morning I ascertained, that our dear friends James Backhouse and George Washington Walker were still in these parts and well.

[In a letter from Hobart Town Daniel Wheeler thus writes:]

My friends will bear with me while recapitulating the gracious dealings of our heavenly Father, as set forth in the extracts from my Journal. Though many storms and tempests have been enumerated, yet not one half of what it has been our portion to witness, has been told. It may suffice for me to say, that we have been compelled to seek refuge more than twenty times from the fury of the hostile elements by 'lying to,' with the ship's head to the wind and waves: and this has been resorted to only in cases of extreme danger.

[In the same letter, he alludes to one of the sailors, who, it appears, had been remarkably visited, and brought under feelings of deep condemnation, and who opened his mind to him in a letter:—of this man he remarks;] a lapse of two months had occurred from the time of his first impression, before he divulged the secret in that letter. I had perceived in his eye, the anguish of his wounded spirit, but knew not the cause until he wrote to me. He had several times been in danger of being washed overboard; and once nearly fell from one of the yards when aloft, but no outward danger was sufficient wholly to bring down his stubborn heart. But the power within was too strong for him, he could not resist it; thus verifying the assertion of the Apostle, “greater is He that is in you, than he that is in the world.” I think this circumstance cannot fail to animate the hearts of all our dear friends, particularly such as have been instrumental in any degree, towards promoting the great work in which we are engaged, and cause them to feel a lively participation in that heavenly joy, which welcomes the repenting and returning sinner to his Father's house.

[From a previous extract, it will be observed that Daniel Wheeler suggested,] that certain stipulations should be made with any person who might be engaged to take the command of the vessel; one of these was, that himself and mate should attend morning and evening, when the Holy Scriptures were read; this appears to have been attended to, and the sailors also enjoyed the privilege of hearing them read at suitable times. From a paragraph in one of his letters, it appears that he had been careful to inform them, that he did not consider such reading as a part of Divine worship; but that true worship is an act between man and his great Creator, and can only be performed acceptably in spirit and in truth.

[In a letter from Hobart Town, bearing date the 21st of Tenth Month, 1834, the following passages occur.]

Soon after my last letters were finally closed, our dear friends James Backhouse and George Washington Walker, returned to Hobart Town: as we had previous information of the time they were expected to arrive, we were at their lodgings in readiness to receive them. They were not strangers to our being here, as the arrival of the Henry Freeling had been publicly notified in the newspapers, in connexion with my name, as a member of the Society of Friends. Our joy at meeting so remote from England, I believe was mutual, and can be more easily conceived than described; and it has been since not a little heightened by our having been favoured and strengthened to labour unitedly together, for the promotion of the same great and glorious cause, in the different meetings which have been held at this place since our arrival, as also in opportunities of a more private nature.

On examination, after reaching this port, it was found that several repairs were necessary, both to the upper works of the vessel, and also to the sails and rigging, as might be expected from the long and tempestuous voyage which we had been favoured so safely to accomplish; but these are not of such magnitude as to require more than some blacksmith's work, and timber, in addition to our own strength, and stores. I think we are unitedly of the opinion, that she is as good a vessel as can be put together, and that if she had not really been such, she never would have been here.

With a little exception, our sailors have exceeded my most sanguine expectations as to behaviour and conduct in general; and I think no men could have suffered more hardships from the weather, than they have endured. For a time we gave them some wine, but whether from its becoming flat and vapid by washing about in the cask, when a quantity of it had been taken out, or with the change from cold to heat, and then to cold again, some of them declined drinking it, on account of its not suiting them; so that they had nothing but water for months together. It is a little remarkable, that, although they have been sometimes wet, and in wet clothes, not for a day or two, but for a week together,—when their teeth have chattered with cold, with no warm food,—the sea having put the fires out, even below the deck; and the water filtering through the deck on their beds below, and not a dry garment to change;—yet not a single instance of the cramp has occurred amongst them, nor the slightest appearance of the scurvy, even in those who have before-time been afflicted with it, and still bear the marks about them: and with the solitary instance of one man, who was forced to quit the deck for two hours during his watch, from being taken unwell, every man and boy have stood throughout the whole voyage in a remarkable manner. They have been plentifully supplied with fresh provisions and vegetables since we arrived, and with some malt liquor also; but their character for sobriety and temperance, and general good behaviour, has warranted every reasonable indulgence likely to conduce to their health and welfare.

My dear friends will perhaps remember, that the Society Islands have always been the primary object before my mind; and this originally gave rise to our making the attempt to reach them by the way of Cape Horn as the nearest route. And although Van Diemen's Land and New South Wales are also included in the certificates granted me, yet the Society Isles are still the object bright before me, as the first point of destination to be aimed at. It is expected that we shall be ready to leave this port in about a fortnight, and as it appears that our dear friends, James Backhouse and George Washington Walker, are now about closing their engagements in Van Diemen's Land, and will be ready to proceed hence at the same time, we therefore propose conveying them to Port Jackson; where it is my intention to call, for the purpose of recruiting our stock of coals, oil, etc., all of which, are extremely high in price at Hobart Town, and may be purchased in Sydney at a reasonable rate. As our course will be round the northern extremity of New Zealand, we shall have but a trifling distance extra to perform, by hauling in for the coast of New Holland.

[Soon after the foregoing was written, Daniel Wheeler was taken so seriously ill, with a complaint which settled on his lungs, that his recovery seemed doubtful; he remarks:] For a time it almost seemed as if I had come to Van Diemen's Land to lay down my head there; but in this prospect, resignation to whatever should be the will of my heavenly Father, was the stay and comfort of my mind; bearing it up above the bondage of fear, even to a degree of rejoicing in humble trust and confidence in the inconceivable love of Him, who “came not to call the righteous, but sinners to repentance;” permitting them to know and sensibly to feel the riches of that universal heavenly grace, which triumphs over all the depravity of human nature, where its operations are submitted to; begetting a faith, that can remove every mountain of sin and opposition, and can give the victory over death, hell, and the grave, to all who believe in its powerful and saving efficacy: who “live not unto themselves, but unto Him who died for them and rose again;” and “because He lives, they live also,” through the mercy of God, in their crucified and glorified Redeemer.

The season was particularly late and cold; deep snow was lying upon the mountains in sight; and cold rains almost daily falling in torrents, rendered the streets and roads in the town nearly impassable, excepting a few of the principal thoroughfares that are macadamized. No regularly formed footpaths are yet established in any part of the colony; so that getting about on foot was almost impracticable for invalids, even in an advanced stage of convalescence. But although our intentions have been thus frustrated, yet I am persuaded, that all things which have hitherto been permitted, have been mercifully dispensed, and have worked, and will continue to work together, for good; and that the lengthened continuance of cold winterly weather has been best for us, and will serve the more effectually to brace us, and prepare our constitutions for the relaxing and constant heat that we shall meet with amongst the Society Islands. Besides the advantages which have been thus derived, I am firm in the belief, that our protracted stay in this neighbourhood will ultimately be found to have been in the ordering of Divine wisdom; however apparently at the moment impeding the great object before me, which it has been my earnest and anxious solicitude to accomplish while the earthly tabernacle retains a good degree of strength. By this detention an opportunity was afforded for a complete and satisfactory arrangement, not only of our own affairs, but of those of our dear friends James Backhouse and George Washington Walker. The arrival of a ship in this interim, brought out for them a variety of books, tracts, kc.; these were much needed for distribution in Van Diemen's Land; so that it seemed to crown all their labours, and enable them to depart in peace.

During this time we were present at two conferences with members of the Wesleyan connexion; at the latter of these, most, if not all, of their preachers were collected. Some time back the Wesleyans were very favourable to our friends James Backhouse and George Washington Walker, and disposed to render them every assistance in their power; supposing, although they were walking among men under a different name from themselves, that still in Christian doctrine they were nearly agreed, or that the difference was so trifling, as to be unimportant. But finding that of late some of their members have become convinced of Friends' principles, a marked shyness has begun to show itself; and several attempts have been made to prove, that the principles which we profess, are not fully supported by Scripture authority. The perceptible guidance of the Spirit, it seems, they cannot believe in, notwithstanding they profess to be continually under its influence in all their religious proceedings: we cannot therefore wonder, that our mode of worship and silent waiting upon Almighty God, are disapproved of and incomprehensible to them. These conferences have served to show, that there is a much wider difference between them and us, than they had previously supposed. However we may be disposed to cherish Christian charity one towards another as religious professors, yet I am fully persuaded, that whenever the principles of our religious Society are thoroughly understood, they will always be found striking at the root of a tree, upon which most other denominations are feeding; and this must and will be the case, so long as the preachers and teachers of the people are paid for the performance of their offices, and are trained up for them. I am far from asserting, that there are not individuals of other societies, who are truly called to the work of preaching the gospel, and who are labouring in the noble cause from pure and disinterested motives; but I do fear that the number of these is comparatively small: and it is my belief, that if no money was permitted to circulate in connexion with the outward performance of any religious service, the religion of Jesus would soon shake off the defilements with which it has been sullied, and again shine forth in primitive purity and lustre, “clear as the sun, fair as the moon, and terrible” to sin and iniquity, “as an army with banners.” O! that men would come to that true teaching of the heavenly anointing within them, which would abide in them and teach them all things; and which is Truth itself and no lie. Then would they be sensible, that they needed no man to teach them; for the teachings of man would be to them as that water, of which “whoever drinks, shall thirst again” but when they have tasted of the water given them by the Prince of life Himself, which should be in them “a well of water springing up unto everlasting life,”—“whosoever drinks of this, shall never thirst.”

[After making several visits to take leave of their friends, previous to their departure, in company with James Backhouse and George Washington Walker, they weighed anchor in the evening of the 11th of Twelfth Month; having previously had a parting opportunity in the family of the lieutenant-Governor, George Arthur, who uniformly treated them with kindness and hospitality. They had however, no sooner left the quiet moorings of the Derwent river, than they had to encounter the buffetings of the stormy main. This was more or less the case, during the whole passage from the Derwent to Port Jackson. In the night of the 19th, they were in considerable danger of being driven amongst the rocks by some unknown current; but were favoured to discover and escape the danger in time, although the night was dark, and much rain falling. Daniel Wheeler adds, although the danger which threatened, was evident and imminent, yet our little company were preserved in quietness, and divested of fear. At eleven o'clock, next day, the 20th, they saw the light-house and signal-staff on the South Head, which forms one side of the entrance of Port Jackson.]

A timely signal having been made, we got a pilot on board on nearing the reef, and immediately worked up the bay towards the harbour. At two o'clock p.m., we were favoured safely to anchor in Sydney Cove, at a convenient distance from the shore; before anchoring, the mail, with which we had been entrusted from Van Diemen's Land, was duly conveyed to the post-office at Sydney.

[They met with a cordial reception there, not only from persons to whom they had letters of recommendation, but from many others also; marks of respect, kindness, and hospitality were also shown them by the Governor and local authorities. Meetings for worship, on First and Fifth days, were regularly held on board the vessel during their stay, which several persons usually attended.

[The deplorable situation of some of the aboriginal inhabitants, is thus described:]

Twelfth Month, 23rd.—After dinner, we landed on an uninhabited part of the coast, on the north side of the harbour, to obtain sufficient exercise; and accidentally met with an aboriginal family, consisting of two females, one of them far advanced in years, and three children, the offspring of the younger woman. There were two men not far off, who belonged to them, but they kept aloof. These women appeared to be in a poor state of health, and exceedingly shrunk: they could talk a little English, and on our making them some trifling presents, and saying that some of us would see them again, if they should be there tomorrow, one of them said, 'You welcome; come.' It was affecting to behold the degraded condition of these natives of the soil. The state of these poor creatures has been rendered abundantly more miserable, since the English have taken possession of their country, from the introduction of vices to which they were before strangers, particularly the use of spirituous liquors.

24th.—We sent some biscuit to the native family on the north side of the bay, by the mate and my son Charles; who saw two other families of these people in the course of their excursion. Their debased condition is greater than can well be conceived, and such as to render every attempt to assist them fruitless: if money be handed to them, it is immediately exchanged for rum; or if clothes, they are immediately sold or exchanged for whatever will procure strong drink: such is the curse entailed upon them since their acquaintance with the British; who are doubtless chargeable, not only on this score, but for much of the demoralization and degradation of these harmless people. While dining on shore today, we had both windows and doors open; such is the heat prevailing on this side of the globe, on what is commonly called Christmas eve.

26th.—This morning we received a visit from William Pascoe Crook, one of the missionaries that first went to Tahiti, in the ship Duff, many years ago. The letters he had very recently received from the Society Islands, enabled him to communicate much interesting intelligence, some of which was of an encouraging nature, although many mournful facts were at the same time related.

In the evening we went on shore for exercise. On returning towards the boat, we were abruptly thanked by a negro for what we had done for their colour. At first we did not understand what he meant, but soon found he was alluding to the exertions of our Society for the abolition of slavery. He had come from the Mauritius, on his way home to Jamaica, and was waiting for a ship bound for Europe or America, in order to get there. Although the abolition of slavery could never have been effected, but through Divine interposition, yet it was pleasant to find that any of the instruments employed in the work, were remembered with sensations of gratitude.

27th.—We called upon the Colonial Secretary, who accompanied us to the government house. We were kindly received by the Governor, Sir Richard Bourke; who, being informed that James Backhouse was desirous to visit the penal settlement upon Norfolk Island, readily gave his consent; at the same time saying, that no person was ordinarily allowed to go there, but under present circumstances there would be no objection. He lamented the low state of religion and morality upon that island. The account of the prisoners there, as furnished by Dr. Marshall, of the Alligator sloop of war, is truly affecting. About one thousand persons reside upon the island. When I first understood that it was the intention of our dear friend James Backhouse, to pay an early visit to the settlement upon that island, I shrunk at the thought of going there; a feeling which was, I believe, induced principally by the desire of hastening to Tahiti, without any further sacrifice of time. But, as the subject dwelt with weight upon my mind, and as I abode under it, without consulting any one, I had a clear and lively impression, that if I gave up to conveying our dear friends James Backhouse and George Washington Walker to Norfolk Island, at this time, it might be the means of preventing my having to go there at a future day; not doubting that my beloved Friends in England would unite in this measure, when all the circumstances of the case were considered. The Governor was therefore informed, that I proposed to convey them in the Henry Freeling; but not until he had made the inquiry how they were to get there, as no vessels are allowed to touch at that island, except those belonging to the government, which are but few in number, and seldom go there, and none of them were about to sail at the present juncture. It is therefore presumed, that ample time will be afforded to our friends, if conveyed there by the Henry Freeling, to perform what service may be called for at their hands, and be ready to return to New South Wales by the first government vessel which may arrive after their landing; or it may be, by the second, as duty may demand, or longer tarriance become needful. Before leaving the Governor, we had an assurance that proper documents and private signals should be furnished by the Colonial Office, to enable us to approach Norfolk Island without difficulty. An allowance of the usual rations for the subsistence of our friends during their residence at that settlement, was also mentioned. Since I have given up to convey our friends to Norfolk Island, my mind has been peaceful and easy, and the way has opened with clearness; a circumstance at once consoling and confirming. This island is no great distance out of our regular course to Tahiti, and bears from hence about east and by north half-north, distant less than one thousand miles.

30th.—At noon we received a visit from Samuel C. Marsden, who has been connected with this colony, in and out, more than forty years, as a Church missionary. He has been six times in New Zealand, and speaks highly in favour of its enterprising inhabitants, with whom he has so frequently resided in peace and safety, and amongst whom, he would have no fear whatever of dwelling again, if occasion required it. His great experience in these parts, the plainness and simplicity of his manners, and the abundant store of authentic information he possesses, made his company not only edifying but animating.¹³

[During their stay, they had several visits from this interesting individual, as also from some other pious characters, several of whom were occupying prominent stations in different religious societies.]

First Month 3rd, 1835.—Today a hot wind prevailed, which is common in this country, but almost insupportable. The thermometer in the cabin standing at 90°, but on shore at 100°, in the shade. A sudden change took place before two p.m., commencing with a tremendous squall of wind: the great heat was at once turned into cold. It is this peculiarity of climate which renders inflammatory complaints so frequent and fatal here, affecting the aborigines as well as strangers.

7th.—Having at times for the last two or three days, felt my mind drawn towards holding a public meeting with the inhabitants of Sydney, and dear James Backhouse unexpectedly inquiring whether I had thought any thing of such a meeting, I felt a willingness to unite with him, in the freedom of the gospel, to appoint one, and to take the necessary steps to procure a suitable place to hold it in. The old Court-house was obtained, and the meeting was held in the evening of the 11th; which appears to have been a satisfactory and relieving opportunity. Notwithstanding another meeting was to be held under the same roof at seven o'clock, appointed by a Baptist preacher, yet we had the satisfaction to witness a crowded attendance at ours, of nearly five hundred persons; and many that could not be seated, went away altogether, but a large number stood the whole time; perhaps from the novelty of its being the first meeting of Friends for public worship held at Sydney, and we hope, on the part of many from a desire to be benefited, the room was presently filled: several present were persons who held public stations in the town and neighbourhood. It was upon the whole, from beginning to end, a solid opportunity: James Backhouse and myself were largely opened in testimony amongst them: James Backhouse appeared a second time, and concluded the meeting in prayer. From the quietness and solemnity which reigned throughout the whole time of the meeting, it might have been supposed that the congregation consisted wholly of persons accustomed to stillness and silence, instead of an audience, of which scarcely an individual had ever before been present at a Friends' meeting, or was even aware of the manner in which they are usually conducted:—but the glory was and is the Lord's.

[The following Third day, the 13th, James Backhouse and himself, by invitation, paid a visit to the Governor at his house at Paramatta, on which he remarks:]—However humiliating such visits may be to myself, they may have a tendency to promote the great work, and open the way in the minds of those in power, to contribute to its furtherance; and this brings into a willingness to be held up as a spectacle before men for the great Name's sake. But on such occasions, great circumspection and watchfulness are increasingly needful, lest any of our testimonies should be let fall or compromised, and the enemy have to exult in the loss we sustain. [Daniel Wheeler adds:]—It was ascertained, while on this visit, that it is in contemplation to build a large hospital for insane persons in the neighbourhood, which afforded an opportunity for James Backhouse to furnish the Governor with Samuel Tuke's Account of the Retreat, and with his pamphlet, entitled Practical Hints; both these contain important information, highly needful for those who are about to establish such an institution.

First Month 21st.—I have found the advantage of placing our sailors, upon rather a different and more respectable footing than those of other ships; and the result has been, so far, that we have had comparatively no trouble with them. It is so common a thing for the shipping to lose their men here, that a few days ago, the question was put to me by General Bourke, the Governor, 'Have you lost any of your men?' and it is satisfactory to know, that some of the strangers who have attended our meetings on board, have, in more than one instance remarked, (as if of rare occurrence,) that our sailors look more like healthy, fresh-faced farmers, than men come off a long voyage: the generality of those we see daily, have a thin and worn-down appearance, particularly when they belong to ships that supply them daily with ardent spirits; our sailors have each a quart of beer per day, of weak quality, being brewed, as is customary here, with only sugar and hops, both of which are very cheap. I found it advisable to keep up a desire in the crew, to make themselves acquainted with the art of navigation; and this could not be done without their being furnished with materials for its accomplishment, such as quadrants, slates, pens, paper, etc.; and though the expense of such things ultimately devolves upon themselves, yet, at the moment of purchase, the advance of money has been unavoidable on my part.

23rd.—Captain Saunders, who commanded the Science, when she brought out our friends James Backhouse and George Washington Walker, came on board. He related to us the extraordinary escape from shipwreck he had experienced off Cape Horn, on his return from that voyage; when the Science by one stroke of a heavy sea was dismasted, and turned nearly bottom uppermost. The mate and part of the crew were washed overboard at the same time, and never seen again. Captain Saunders and his companions continued on board the vessel in this situation for six days and nights, when the floating hull was observed, and taken for a whale, by one of the South Sea whalers, which ultimately was the means of rescuing them from being wrecked on a barren and inhospitable coast, from which they were only about two days drift when discovered. The everlasting Arm was signally displayed on this occasion, as they were so near the coast, as to be quite out of the usual track of every description of vessel; and yet one was actually brought near enough to descry the hull, and save their helpless crew, though at considerable risk to themselves.

First Month 27th.—For the last three or four days I have been in a low and stripped situation; and while anxious to be getting on our way towards the islands, I could not come to any decision and clearness sufficient to enable me to fix the time for our sailing. This morning, dear James Backhouse asked me if I had felt any thing as to another public meeting with the inhabitants of Sydney. [This subject occupied their close and serious consideration, and they unitedly agreed that one should be appointed to be held the following First day evening, as the most suitable time, and that extensive notice should be given thereof. Daniel Wheeler adds:] I felt relieved, and willing to take a share with him in that exercise of mind; which, with me, at all times, precedes a prospect of such magnitude and importance.

[The old Court-house was again procured, and the meeting held on the evening of the following First-day, the 1st of Second Month, which was as numerously attended as the former one, and proved a relieving opportunity.]

Second Month 4th. (Fourth day.)—As James Backhouse has for a day or two been under no small concern of mind, from an apprehension that an attempt must be made to collect the sailors of the fleet now in Sydney, at this time very considerable; and as this is not likely to be accomplished, but on a First day; there seems now no probability of our proceeding towards Norfolk Island during the present week. The crews of the ships had not wholly escaped the notice of my mind, for several days previous to James Backhouse mentioning the subject to me; but not in any manner as of pressing obligation towards seeking a religious opportunity with this class of the people exclusively, but yet sufficient to raise a feeling of unity with him in the engagement. Upon inquiry, it seemed to be the general opinion that meetings were mostly best attended by sailors when held on board of ship; application was thereupon made to Captain John Hart, of the ship Henry Porcher, who readily granted the use of that vessel's deck for the intended purpose, in the forenoon of the following First day. [The meeting was held accordingly on the 8th, and was attended by about 130 persons, and is thus described:] James Backhouse was largely engaged both in testimony and supplication. It was my lot to keep silence, although I could spiritually unite in the labours of the day, under a sense of the states of some in particular, of those by whom we were surrounded. After the meeting, a large number of Friends' tracts, and those of the Temperance Society, were distributed, and received with eagerness as the company returned to their boats.

Chapter XIX.

Sail from Sydney—Arrive Off Norfolk Island—Parting with James Backhouse and George Washington Walker—Sail for the Society Islands—Equinoctial Gale—Enter the Torrid Zone—Maitea—Arrive at Tahiti—First Interview with the Natives—Visit from the King—Prohibition of Ardent Spirits—Meeting of the Missionaries and Natives at Papaoa.

The day we first landed in New South Wales, we were saluted by a most appalling volley of dreadful oaths and imprecations, from some of the poor intoxicated creatures, in the garb of sailors, who were standing about the stairs; but now, on quitting its shores, I am thankful in believing that we have the prayers and good wishes of many, however weak and feeble those are who offer them; and I think we can say, that under a deep sense of utter unworthiness, on leaving we were honoured with many honours, on the part of some.

We sailed on the morning of the 13th of Second Month, 1835, and at noon, we stretched off the land into the Southern Pacific, with a strong opposing wind, which increasing, soon raised a troublesome swell of the sea. From the 14th to the 20th, we continued to beat against adverse winds, although the weather remained fine for the most part. The heat below was oppressive, which kept all our passengers but myself in a sickly state for the first four days; since which, they have been far from well, as a considerable swell of the sea from the north-eastward kept up an incessant motion of the vessel.¹⁴

Second Month 22nd.—Yesterday the weather was fine and clear, but the wind contrary. Several flying-fish made their appearance; also an albatros and some smaller birds in the course of the day. Today the weather is still beautifully fine: our invalids pretty much restored from sea-sickness, and being the First day of the week, portions of the Holy Scriptures were read to the ship's company assembled upon the deck. During the time of silence in the morning, James Backhouse compared the management of a ship at sea with the spiritual progress of each individual, showing the constant attention at all times necessary in both cases, in order to be enabled to steer a true and steady course towards the great object of our voyage, both as regards an earthly and a heavenly port. The latter part of the forenoon we sat down together in the cabin; towards the conclusion, I thought I was made sensible of a renewal of strength to wrestle for the blessing.

26th. (Fifth day.)—In the forenoon we sat down together in the cabin, to wait upon the Lord: much poverty and weakness were sensibly felt. The wind still adverse, with considerable swell of the sea, but fine and pleasant weather.¹⁵

Third Month 1st. (First day.)—Today we assembled the crew, both in the forenoon and afternoon. James Backhouse alluded to a text of scripture which had been read,—“Except you eat the flesh of the Son of Man, and drink his blood, you have no life in you explaining the spiritual interaction and communion of the Holy Spirit with the soul of man, and that the blessed partaking of the flesh and blood of the Son of Man, 'can be witnessed by those only, in whom Christ dwells, and they in him,' etc. After dinner the wind became more favourable, and gradually increased to a fine breeze.

4th.—At day-light, we got sight of land, and gliding rapidly towards it, Mount Pitt on Norfolk Island and Philip Island, were both plainly in sight soon after breakfast. When near enough to the Penal Settlement station, we made the private signal, according to written instructions received from the government at Sydney. Soon after this, a boat was discovered coming from the shore, in the direction of our vessel, which at length arrived with a military officer; who brought us a hearty welcome from the commandant Major Anderson, accompanied by an invitation to his house. On ascertaining that, although the landing was dangerous, it was yet practicable in a suitable boat, James Backhouse and George Washington Walker concluded to make an attempt to return with this officer. When all things were ready, and my letters for England delivered to the care of James Backhouse, we were thus hastily and unexpectedly torn from each other, at a short notice; and although time was only afforded to take an abrupt farewell, yet we all keenly felt the moment of separation, but I trust with feelings that will lastingly remain, through the frequent renewal of Divine love. As the boat was not adapted for taking more than two or three passengers, it was agreed that upon its reaching the shore, if then practicable, a larger boat should be sent off immediately for the luggage.

5th. (Fifth day.)—The boat not reaching us yesterday in consequence of rough weather, at an early hour this morning we edged down towards the Penal Settlement, and a boat was shortly afterwards discovered making towards us from the shore, which eventually proved to be the conveyance for the luggage of our dear friends; being safely loaded, and a few lines written to James Backhouse, requesting him to acknowledge the kindness of the commandment on our behalf, the boat put off from the vessel; when we immediately began to beat off the coast in earnest, and passing between the islands of Nepean and Philip, at ten o'clock, a.m., once more launched forth on the capacious bosom of the Southern Pacific. Nepean Island is little more than a large barren-looking rock, but said to abound with rabbits: Philip Island exhibits more fertility, and abounds with hogs. The officer who came on board informed us, that a party had been sent from the settlement the preceding week over to Philip Island, and had succeeded in shooting and returning with eighty of these animals. Norfolk Island appears from the offing to be about half the size of the Isle of Wight, and is richly covered in places with a beautiful pine, peculiar to the island, which we had seen growing in the neighbourhood of Sydney, having been transported there by the Governor and other individuals. The valleys abound with lemons, limes, grapes, guavas, etc.

For some days previous to making Norfolk Island, my mind was at times drawn to consider, whether I might not have to land upon it myself, and remain a few days; but I believe I may venture to say, that I did not in the slightest degree perceive that it formed any part of my duty to do so; neither on receiving the commandant's invitation, nor afterwards on an expression of regret communicated by note from James Backhouse, did any thing arise in my heart, as if I flinched from that service. His note says, 'Much regret is expressed, that you did not come on shore, and I hope if you feel inclined to come, you will yet do so; though I do not regret you did not come with us, as we got a surf on our backs, and the boat's nose upon a rock: but though thus permitted to feel the danger of landing, by the good providence of our merciful heavenly Father, we were preserved from further suffering. If we do not see you again before you proceed to Tahiti, I will once more bid you farewell in the Lord. May He continue in condescending goodness still to be with you, and qualify for every good word and work, to His own glory and your peace; and may His good Spirit still more and more work into subjection to Himself the shipmen of your vessel, that you may have increasing comfort in them.' Having thus been favoured to accomplish the landing of our beloved friends and brothers, with their luggage, without a detention of more than twenty-two hours, however much their absence may be felt, the suspense and anxiety with which my mind had been filled, from a knowledge of the great risk which at all times attends such an undertaking, where there is no shelter from the surf of the wide ocean, was wholly relieved and removed.

It being our usual meeting-day, dear Charles and myself sat down together in the forenoon, and although stripped indeed as to the outward, yet comforted from a sensible evidence, that a most merciful and gracious Lord remains to be “God over all, blessed forever.”

Third Month 8th. (First day.)—Yesterday the weather continued unsettled and showery, and today the wind is contrary, with fresh gales and clear weather. We read portions of the Holy Scriptures twice in the course of the day in the cabin; as the state of the weather and a heavy swell of the sea prevented our assembling upon deck. At sun-set we fell in with a shoal of spermaceti whales, one of the largest in sight passed by the side of our vessel, at a distance of ten or twelve yards. This fish would contain about fifty barrels of oil. There were at least twenty of them within a small compass around the Henry Freeling, and it is probable they formed but a small part of the shoal.

10th.—Since leaving Norfolk Island, but more particularly within the last three or four days, it has been to me at times a trying, proving season. The loss of the company of our dear friends, with whom we had been closely and sweetly connected for more than five months, either by sea or land,—the steady opposition of the winds since we separated,—the great distance we have yet to go,—the advanced state of the season, towards the autumn in these regions,—and yet above all, the absence of Him in whom my soul delights,—combined to weigh down and oppress my poor, tossed mind, beyond the usual degree. But in the depths, although unable to draw nigh, I endeavoured to look towards the holy temple: I remembered the Lord, and my prayer was, I trust, permitted to come in unto Him; and He remembered a poor unworthy creature, and in His own way and time, was graciously pleased to speak comfort, and to seal instruction. The affecting instance of the dear Son of God himself, was brought to my remembrance, “who was made sin for us, who knew no sin,” and died, “the just for the unjust, that He might bring us to God;” when, in the very act of child-like and lamb-like obedience, and meek submission to His holy Father's will, from the extreme depth and weight of suffering upon Him for the sins of poor, lost, guilty man, He poured forth the agonizing query, “My God, my God, why have you forsaken me?” and I am renewedly persuaded that these present trials, and proving baptisms, are all in unutterable and inconceivable love and mercy, dispensed for the preservation of that precious life which is hid with Christ in God.

15th. (First day.)—Assembled the crew twice in the day, for devotional purposes. During the latter part of the interval of silence in the afternoon, petitions were raised in my heart to the throne of grace, for the best welfare of our little company. A whole year has now passed away since we sailed from the Mother-bank, and although more than seven months of that time have been spent upon the mighty deep, and with the exception of a few transient intervals, out of sight of land altogether; yet such is the boundless and unmerited mercy of Him with whom we have to do, that if the question were asked, 'Did you lack anything?' 'Nothing, Lord,' would immediately be responded.

Third Month 16th.—This afternoon we were in the latitude of Cartes Island, Macauley's Rock, and several others of recent discovery, extending from this latitude northward for more than 200 miles, and some of them level with the surface of the sea; therefore at six o'clock, p.m., we tacked, and stood to the southward, rather than risk being driven too near such treacherous neighbours.

Fourth Month 1st.—By nine o'clock last night, the wind became quite fair; but in a short time it began to blow strong, and the sea rose so rapidly, that at midnight we again hove to under storm-sails. As the mercury continued gradually to lower in the tube, and the storm to increase with appalling violence, there now seemed no doubt but an equinoctial gale had overtaken our often-tried little bark. It raged with great fury throughout the night, and returning day seemed only to increase its strength. At noon the sea wrought in an awful manner, and frequently the white crests of the mountain billows, were carried off by the sweeping and irresistible tempest, and uniting together flew in one continued mass of drift several yards above the rugged surface, with incredible force. Yet on this, as well as on former occasions, the Divine Arm of everlasting love and strength was not only near for our support, to compass us about as with a shield, but mercifully to overshadow us with a canopy of peaceful resignation. Not a sea was permitted to injure our vessel, and even the weaker part of her upper works remained unbroken through it all. How correct is the animating declaration of the Psalmist,—“The Lord sits on the flood; the Lord sits King forever.” And is it not encouragingly verified?” The Lord will give strength unto His people, those that fear, love, honour, and obey Him, these are his people; and “the Lord will bless his people with peace.”

Fourth Month 15th.—Fresh and favourable gales; we made great progress, and to all appearance, the wind we had been so long expecting was fairly set in, and we were once more venturing to look forward to a termination for a time, of our “perils by sea.” But the pleasant anticipation was shortly afterwards disappointed, by its being ascertained that from our present position a dangerous reef lay directly across our path; which, at the rate we were sailing, we should probably get close upon by the setting sun. As the sea was running pretty heavy it seemed doubtful whether we could pass to the southward of this reef, it was therefore concluded best, as suggested by my Charles, that our course should be quickly altered sufficiently to insure our passing it in safety to leeward, which was accordingly done. As the exact position of this reef cannot be fully relied on, any more than that of our vessel, owing to the clouded state of the atmosphere of late, we seem to have no outward prop to lean upon through the cheerless gloom of darkness; but we well know there is a Power almighty and all-merciful, whose compassionate eye never slumbers.

Fourth Month 23rd. (Fifth day.)—At two o'clock, p.m. yesterday, we passed the tropic of Capricorn, and entered the torrid zone. The latitude at noon was 23° 38' south: by lunar distance, well taken this morning, the longitude was found to be 142° 36' west. The latitude of Tahiti is 17° 29' south, longitude 149° 28' west. As the wind now blows, our being so far to the eastward is an advantage, in making it completely fair for us.

27th.—Yesterday, though heavy rain fell near us throughout the day, we were not prevented from assembling in the usual manner twice in the course of it, it being First day. At noon today, the island of Maitea was distant fifty miles. It would have been relieving to have come within sight of this island before dark; but although the horizon was pretty clear at sun-set in that direction, it could not be distinguished from the mast-head. Many birds have been daily with us latterly, a fact which strongly indicates our approach to land; and the course which these take for their evening flight, speaks in plain language where it lies.

28th.—At day-break this morning, Maitea was in sight; but the wind being light and fickle through the day, it was nightfall before we had fairly passed it by. This island is now used as a penal settlement for Tahiti. Last evening a sufficient number of albicoas and bonitos were caught by the sailors, to furnish the whole of us throughout the day with fresh meals; and as it was more than six weeks since we had had one, they proved very acceptable.

This morning, 29th of Fourth Month, about half-past one o'clock, the mountains of the long-looked-for Tahiti, were discovered through the gloom upon our lee-bow. It will be eleven weeks tomorrow since we left Sydney, and with the exception of the equinoctial gale, we have during the voyage, for the most part been favoured with fine weather, but with an unheard-of proportion (for these seas) of contrary winds during nearly the whole time, completely setting at nought all former experience. After leaving Norfolk Island we traversed from twenty-nine to forty degrees of south latitude, in the hope of finding the westerly winds, which usually prevail, to waft us to the eastward; but could never meet with them to any purpose, and since we entered the trade latitudes, to this day, we have been in constant expectation of meeting with the south-east trade-winds, to enable us to fetch the island of Tahiti, and have in this been equally unsuccessful. We have, however, after traversing various zigzag courses over more than 5000 miles of ocean by the log, since leaving Sydney, been guided to a hair's-breadth, in so remarkable a manner, as to get the first sight of the island when nearly dark;—the moon not being twelve hours old at the time. The darkness and the light are both alike to Him, who has been with us, to bless and preserve us; enabling us in degree to “glory in tribulation,” and even to bear privation for His name's sake,—indeed as not being worthy to be recounted, because of the love, and peace, and joy, which at seasons have been our happy portion.

30th.—At noon passed through Matavai bay. A canoe with four of the natives came off to us, bringing oranges, guavas, and other kinds of fruit; these we purchased, after much bargaining, for a hank of thread and three small needles to each individual, although the price they first asked was a dollar for each basket; there were five baskets of fruit. We were all pleased with the openness and simplicity of these people. At two o'clock p.m., we took the pilot on board, and immediately entered the channel within the reefs; but after getting through the most dangerous part, it fell calm, which obliged us to drop an anchor for the night, directly opposite the house of George Bicknell, so close to the shore, that a mooring hawser was made fast to one of his cocoa-nut trees. By this time our deck was covered with the natives. Just as we were ready to go on shore to take tea at George Bicknell's, to whom, as deputy Consul, the mail brought from New South Wales had been delivered, the young king (or perhaps it is more correct to say, the husband of the queen) came on board, with his younger brother and uncle, and several others; they behaved with great openness and cheerfulness, and seemed highly pleased to see us. Our captain was personally known to them already. They soon looked round the vessel, apparently delighted; left us a basket of oranges, and said they would come again tomorrow. To my great rejoicing, the pilot soon after coming on board, informed us of the entire disuse of ardent spirits in Tahiti; saying 'rum is no good here.' The total prohibition of spirituous liquors has been so strongly enforced, that they have taken them out of private houses without exception, and thrown them away; and the natives have carried it to the length of smelling the breath of people, to ascertain whether they had been used, and if found to be the case, a severe fine was imposed; so that a person well known to lead a thoroughly sober life was not allowed to have such a thing in his possession, but was liable at any time to undergo a search.

Fifth Month 1st.—At day-break the pilot came on board, and the breeze being favourable, the vessel was got ready, and run gently down to Papeete Harbour: the water was so clear, that the beautifully spreading branches of coral could be plainly distinguished as we passed over the most shallow parts of the reef. About nine o'clock, a.m., we took up our station in a well-sheltered cove or harbour, surrounded by straggling houses and plantations of the cocoa-nut tree, banana, breadfruit, orange, and sugar cane, ranging along the edge of the sea, on the level land at the foot of the mountains. In the forenoon, George Pritchard, the resident missionary came on board; for whom we were bearers of many letters and parcels, which proved very acceptable: in the afternoon we visited his habitation, and were kindly received by his wife and family. George Pritchard very kindly inquired whether I wished to be at the worship of the Tahitians, next First day; but I informed him that I believed it would be best for me to be with my own crew on that day.

Having endeavoured to keep my mind exercised to ascertain the will of my Lord and Master, it was with me to tell George Pritchard that the first step which I had to take, was to request a conference with the whole of the missionaries in this district; asking him if they had any stated times for meeting together by themselves: he said they had, but a special meeting could be convened for the occasion. On considering a little, he found that their next quarterly meeting in regular course was to be held the second week in the present month. As the month was already come in, I thought it would be unreasonable to subject the parties to the inconvenience of meeting on purpose, as their own meeting would still necessarily have to be held on the appointed day; more especially as I had several affairs to regulate, and preparations to make, to enable us to barter for supplies, etc. At present, I see no further than to attend this conference, and there produce the certificates furnished by my dear Friends in England; humbly trusting, that the path of my future proceeding will be graciously manifested in due time, and strength and perception mercifully afforded to enable me to walk faithfully in it. I had been unwell on the 12th instant, but having passed a more favourable night, on the morning of the 13th instant, I felt no hesitation about proceeding to Papaoa, as the day was fair overhead. George Pritchard called with a boat, to take Charles and myself with him,—he finding three natives to row, and myself two.

Having understood that on the present occasion, the principal chiefs from all parts of the island would be there, and a large muster of the inhabitants residing in this district, it occurred to my mind that it would be a favourable medium, through which my arrival might be publicly announced to all the distant districts, if at a suitable time my certificates were read. On mentioning this to George Pritchard, and showing him the translation so kindly made before I left London by William Ellis, he at once saw the propriety; but said it would be necessary to consult Henry Nott, the senior missionary, resident at Papaoa,—George Pritchard himself being a junior: this was a matter of course, and had I been aware of the distinction, I should myself have proposed it. From the wind having sprung up a fresh breeze against us, we were rather late in reaching our destination; and Henry Nott had taken his seat in the meeting before we got to it. We followed George Pritchard through a large number of people already assembled, until we got up to Henry Nott; who, on being consulted, immediately consented that it should be done, when their service was over. We then took our seats, having kept on our hats until that moment: but the heat of the climate renders it too oppressive to keep them on for any great length of time. We heard of no remark, how ever, having been made on this head, whatever might have been thought. They commenced by George Pritchard giving out a hymn, then part of the epistle to the Ephesians was read, after which George Pritchard kneeled down and prayed; another hymn was then sung, and was followed by the sermon, delivered by Charles Wilson, from a text out of the same epistle; when this was finished, another hymn was given out, at his request, and he afterwards finished with prayer. Some business then came on relating to the affairs of the Missionary Society, when the queen of the island took her seat as its president.

We merely sat as silent spectators through the whole of this, which from beginning to end was conducted in the Tahitian language. As only George Pritchard sat between myself and the queen, I observed that she was employed in reading my certificates, which had been previously laid upon the table. The whole of my certificates were then audibly read in the Tahitian language by George Pritchard; who took great pains to give ample explanation whenever needful. The marked attention and solidity of countenance manifested by the Tahitians, was both striking and comforting; and the solemnity which spread over this large assembly had previously covered my mind as with a mantle, contriting my spirit under a sense that the great Master himself was there. After the reading of the certificates was gone through, profound silence reigned. I asked if I might say a few words, which was at once permitted, and George Pritchard agreed to interpret for me. I requested him simply to repeat what I said, and I have reason to believe this was faithfully done; and was to the best of my recollection after this manner: 'I have no wish to trespass upon the time of this meeting. I was desirous that these documents might be read, which would account for a stranger being present, and inform all that I came not here in my own will, but in the will of my Lord and Master, whose I am, and whom I desire to serve to my latest breath; and would also let you know, that I came with the full unity and consent of that branch of the Christian Church in England, of which I am a member. And now, grace, mercy, and peace from God, the Father, and our Lord Jesus Christ, be multiplied upon all the inhabitants of this land; and may the God of peace, who brought again from the dead our Lord Jesus, that great Shepherd of the sheep, through the blood of the everlasting covenant, keep our hearts and minds,' etc.

After I sat down, a solemn silence again prevailed, until one of the natives, a supreme judge, broke it by addressing me by name, which he had caught from the certificates; and declaring on behalf of himself and the islanders, that the manner of my coming among them was very satisfactory, because what had been read and spoken, was in accordance with the gospel, which they had been taught, and were acquainted with. He also at considerable length touched upon the great distance I had come over the deep waters to see them, and to do them good; that in return, their hearts, and arms, and habitations, were open to receive me; duly appreciating the disinterestedness of the motive that had induced the step; having no trade, nor other object in view. He hoped I should visit all their schools, and stroke the heads of the children; that he should now deliver them all into my hands. I told George Pritchard to say, that the dear children would always have a strong hold, and a strong claim upon my heart. Much more transpired that was truly consoling and comforting; and the missionaries who spoke on the occasion, I truly believe, most fully and cordially co-operated in endeavouring to explain my views to the people in terms of strong approbation.

Although the above may not be exactly verbatim, it is the substance of what passed. When it was all over, Henry Nott kneeled down, and concluded the meeting with prayer in the Tahitian. The natives then generally rose from their seats, and began to flock round us, and to shake hands with Charles and myself in a very hearty manner, and without regard to order, age, or sex, from the humble peasant to the bronzecoloured queen, her two aunts, and the numerous chiefs, who, I think, are the stoutest, most giant-like men I ever saw assembled together. About 800 persons were collected at this meeting; but the house was so large that it seemed impossible to make any accurate estimate; for my own part, I should have supposed the number not less than a thousand. The judge before spoken of, in one of his speeches, (for he spoke three times,) hinted that they perceived I was not exactly of the same description of Christians that had hitherto come amongst them, or I belonged to a different body. This, however, did not seem to stand in the way. Some days previously to this meeting being held, the young king and several chiefs came on board to breakfast, six in number. After breakfast, our usual reading in the Holy Scriptures was introduced, during which they behaved with great attention and propriety; sitting as still, in the time of silence, both then and at the pause before breakfast, as if accustomed to it. When they were about going away, a telescope and a piece of handkerchiefs were presented to the king, and a shawl to each of the others; with which they seemed highly pleased. Through the medium of an Englishman, who had been sent for on the occasion, the king was told, that I had something in reserve for Pomare, the queen, expecting she also would pay us a visit. They behaved with much openness and affability, and told us in plain terms that they liked us, because we were like themselves, and did not make ourselves very high to them.

I had a conference with the missionaries of the Papaoa district, who, although only four in number, are capable of rendering me much assistance in forwarding my views, and interpreting to the people. I was fully aware the missionaries were under an impression, that I was come out to inspect the state of the missions, and particularly that of the schools; private letters had reached them some months ago to that effect from London; but they were informed that now the missionary meeting was over, I was waiting as at the posts of wisdom's gate, not knowing to what I might next have to turn my hand: this explanation at once placed me in a fresh point of view. An expression of desire to do all in their power to co-operate in the work, in any manner I could point out, was, I think, avowed by each individual; and we parted in brotherly love.

Chapter XX.

Tahiti Visit of Chiefs—The Young King—Meeting for Sailors—Distribution of Tracts, Bibles, etc. Temperance Ships—Introduction of Ardent Spirits—Visit to the Schools—Attend the Native Meeting Visitors on Board—John Davies—Meeting on Board—Importance of Translating and Circulating the Scriptures—Tahitian Council—Native Meeting.

Tahiti, 14th of Fifth Month 1835.—This morning, Tatiand his brother, two of the principal chiefs, and truly great in stature, with a grand-daughter of the former, came on board at breakfast time, bringing with them another person of note. They partook of our meal, and stayed over our usual reading in the Scriptures; during which, and in the time of silence, they behaved in a solid manner. These are the most elderly chiefs that we have seen, and perhaps the oldest upon the island; and they are said to be the principal support of the present government. They had been on board once before, but it being late in the evening they had not stayed long. I put a small cotton dress upon the child, and presented a shawl to each of the great men. They invited us to come with the vessel to Mairi Pehe, where they reside, and on leaving seemed well satisfied with their visit. It being Fifth-day, Charles and myself endeavoured to wait upon the Lord, but under feelings oppressively languid from the heat.

15th.—My mind having for some days past been brought into thoughtful solicitude for the best welfare of the crews of the vessels now lying at anchor about us, I mentioned it to my Charles soon after rising this morning; and seeing no way of being clear of the blood of these poor neglected people, but by appointing a public meeting, to be held next First-day, it was concluded to make the necessary arrangements for so doing. There was no doubt that the deck of one of the whaling vessels might have been procured for the purpose; but on considering the subject, it seemed best to have the deck of the Henry Freeling made use of, lest umbrage should be taken by the English sailors, if the meeting was held on board an American vessel; or by the American sailors, if held on board an English one, in the same calling; both parties considering our own as employed on very different grounds from any other in the bay. There were six American whalers, and one trading vessel, all large and well manned, in the bay; and only one English whaler, the Rover, of London.

I stepped on shore to inquire whether the eleventh hour, next First-day, would interfere with any arrangements the missionaries might have made; that the work of neither party might be marred, and that nothing on our part might appear as done in a corner. On learning at George Pritchard's, that nothing would clash if our meeting was held at that hour, and having invited him or any part of his family to attend it, we returned immediately on board, and were soon after visited by a serious and respectable person, who had been sent out in 1825, by the London Missionary Society to teach the natives the art of spinning and weaving.

The young king and his brother came on board in a private capacity: their visit was much more agreeable than when attended by several of the principal chiefs. They stayed dinner, and remained on board several hours. The simple habits, and gentle unassuming manner of this young man, do not appear at present to be liable to alter from his having become the husband of the queen. The amiable disposition he possesses, and which cannot be concealed, at once renders him an object of general esteem. He has evidently acquired considerable polish from the interaction with foreigners, of which he does not fail to avail himself at every opportunity; and although from this circumstance, his manners are much more civilized than those of his countrymen, yet now and then the wild nature of a South Sea Islander shows itself. They brought us some fine bunches of oranges, the largest of which contained eleven in a cluster, and the smallest seven. A sliding knife and fork were presented to each, also a three-bladed knife and a penknife. Shortly after these guests had left us, Paofai a chief, residing near Point Venus, came on board, and made signs that he wished to read my certificates, which were accordingly furnished for his perusal in the Polynesian language, although he could speak more English than any we have yet met with. He is considered a great man, and was more modest in behaviour than any we have yet seen of his stamp. Having observed, while he read the certificate, that his sight was impaired, I presented him with a pair of spectacles; at the same time a pocket-handkerchief and a small hatchet were given him; upon which he said he had no money to pay for them. Such an honest confession we had not before met with, nor with any person who mentioned payment for what they received. He left us with an acknowledgment of the kindness with which he had been treated, and I believe both parties were satisfied with the interview. In the evening, we were engaged in writing notices of the public meeting, intended to be held next First day.

16th.—After breakfast, my Charles went to distribute the written notices amongst the shipping. In the forenoon, a quantity of tracts were selected, and parcelled in readiness for distribution at the close of the meeting tomorrow.

17th. (First day.)—In the morning the prospect before us was rather gloomy. There had been rain in the night, and soon after daylight the Mariner whaling vessel put to sea; thus the seamen on board of her were prevented from attending the meeting: but I thought there was no reason why they should be deprived of their share of the tracts, which had been got ready for distribution the day before. As the wind was light, there was no difficulty in overtaking her before she got outside of the reef. Our mate was accordingly dispatched in good time, and succeeded in handing them on board. They were received with civility, and the requested application of them promised. By the accommodation of some planks kindly provided by the Emerald, our decks were extensively seated, and the planks were well covered with canvass, spare flags, etc.

At half-past ten o'clock, a bethel-flag, with which we have been furnished, was hoisted, as a thing understood by all sailors, and a little in their own way: this allowed half-an-hour for the boats to collect from each ship, in order that the time appointed (eleven o'clock,) might be kept to, and the quiet of the meeting preserved from late comers on board. Although the invitation, with the exception of George Pritchard's family, had not been extended by us beyond the shipping in the bay, several persons attended from the shore;—Doctor Vaughan, Captain Henry, George Bicknell, and some other white people with children, whose copper-coloured skins indicated that they were the offspring of Tahitian mothers. The meeting at length settled down into stillness beyond our expectation. I thought there would scarcely be a single individual then present, except our own crew, that had ever before been at a meeting held exclusively after the manner of Friends. In this, however, I found I had been mistaken, as the mate of the Lancaster came on board the next day, and acknowledged he was a member of our Society, though, as he stated, he had not kept close to it. He told us, that he little expected to see a Friends' meeting held amongst these islands; but seemed glad of having an opportunity to attend one.

However long the time of silence might be thought, there was no restlessness sufficient to disturb the quiet of the meeting. Unexpectedly to myself, I felt an engagement of mind to state to the meeting, that the religious Society of which I was a member, had, from its earliest rise, been called upon to bear a faithful testimony to the excellency of silent worship and waiting upon God: that it was a noble testimony to the all-sufficiency and teaching of that grace, which had appeared unto all men,—teaching all, and bringing salvation to all;—“for the grace of God that brings salvation, has appeared unto all men, etc., looking for that blessed hope and the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour, Jesus Christ,” etc., to the end of the text. “For God is a Spirit: and they that worship him, must worship him inspirit and in truth:” and we are told in holy writ, by the Son, that “the Father seeks such to worship him.” I was then carried forth on the nature of true, silent, and spiritual worship, to a considerable length; and had to state, that my head would not have laid easy upon the pillow at a future day, if the attempt had not been made to collect the seamen of the fleet:—that sailors were a class of men more than most others, separated from their homes and regular places of worship, particularly on these long voyages upon the mighty deep, for months and months together; but that the ample provision made by the glorious gospel for the restoration and redemption of mankind, boundless as its love, extended unto all: for He that said, “Let there be light, and there was light” even “God, who commanded the light to shine out of darkness, has shined in our hearts, to give the light of the knowledge of the glory of God, in the face of Jesus Christ.” I had largely to proclaim some of the principal doctrines of the gospel, and was helped through, to my humble and thankful admiration. It was indeed a glorious, and I trust to some, a blessed meeting. I had, I think, more than once to call their attention to the heavenly power that reigned over us with precious solemnity, as a crown and diadem: and before the meeting closed, I had to acknowledge the same with prayer and thanksgiving, to the glory and the praise of my God. After the meeting was broken up, I requested an individual out of each ship to step forward, when two hundred and twenty-nine tracts, principally those of Friends, were disposed of, including those sent on board the Mariner in the morning.

19th.—The Nassau sailed early this morning for the coast of California, to prosecute the whale fishing. The captain was furnished with six Bibles and six Testaments, in the Spanish language He said there would be no difficulty in putting them into suitable hands, he being well acquainted with those parts.

20th.—The American ship Emerald, being about to sail for Manilla and the Phillipine Islands, and Captain Eaglestone having kindly offered, on application being made, to forward our views, in circulating the Scriptures in the Spanish language, he being on a trading voyage, and of extensive acquaintance, this morning eighteen Bibles, eighteen Testaments, eighteen Letter by ________ on Christianity, with five copies of Wilberforce's Practical View, were got ready and delivered to that ship. We have met with great civility and willingness to lend a helping hand in many of the American captains: at the same time, we are frequently sensible of a mixture which cannot be reconciled. The foregoing remark has no allusion to the inconsistent conduct of the crews of many of the American vessels, which we have fallen in with here, that are called 'temperance ships.' At first I could not but view these with satisfaction, and with a degree of thankfulness, as likely to contribute by their example to the welfare of the islanders. But, alas! I now find, with horror and surprise, that the word 'temperance' applies only to the ships, and not to their crews, none probably of which are members of a Temperance Society; they are merely bound by articles, that the voyage shall be performed without any spirits being on board, except as medicine, and their sobriety only exists because they cannot get the liquor; when on shore, and unbound by these articles, they are lamentably, in many instances, notorious for drinking to excess; and their immoral conduct, at this place, makes me shudder for the awful and woful consequences, both as regards themselves, and the daughters of Tahiti. Although great exertion is made and promoted by the missionaries here to stop this overwhelming torrent of iniquity, yet all their measures are abortive, and can never be successful, unless co-operated with on the part of the masters of the shipping. Notwithstanding the disuse of spirituous liquors is rigidly enforced at Tahiti, and no person is allowed to have the article in his house; yet this bane of the human race is still to be purchased on shore, and the supply is kept up by the American ships; it is clandestinely landed amongst the supposed empty casks which are sent on shore for water, (an instance of this kind took place a few days ago,) and by other methods. A considerable quantity was brought in last week by an American schooner from Valparaiso, and safely landed; but has since been discovered, the casks destroyed and their contents totally lost. By what is said, I do not mean to imply that this gross immorality is confined solely to the crews of the American vessels, because those of the English are perhaps equally implicated, but with this difference, they do not assume the character of 'temperance ships.'

How dreadful and appalling the consideration, that the interaction of distant nations should have entailed upon these poor, untutored islanders, a curse unprecedented and unheard of in the annals of history; it is said that one-fourth of the whole population is miserably affected with disease brought amongst them, and kept up by the licentious crews of the shipping. Will not, shall not the Lord visit for these things?

22nd.—The American schooner Peruvian, came in before noon from Valparaiso, with horses. In the afternoon, went on shore upon the Queen's Island. On this small spot of ground much is concentrated: a small chapel, with sides of upright bamboos, (wicker-work,) is standing, with seats and a pulpit, at one time probably in use: there were also several pieces of cannon in a useless state, one placed on a platform, formed of loose stones and coral, and others lying about in a condition equally harmless. These have been left as presents by the ships of different nations, which have visited these seas, and stand as memorials against them, by showing that their dependence is upon the arm of flesh for protection: England, France and Russia seem to have been the donors of them. Part of one building is fitted up as an armoury, with an inscription to this import over the arms, which consist of three worthless muskets without locks. We cannot wonder at young and barbarous nations being eager to possess weapons of a destructive nature, when they see in what high estimation they are held by those who are called Christians; but, alas! their conduct proclaims aloud, that such are not the followers of the Prince of peace, nor are living under the blessed influence of the gospel.

[About this time, the following interesting letter was written by Daniel Wheeler to John Wilbur, an American minister in the Society of Friends:¹⁶]

To John Wilbur

From the Henry Freeling—Papieta Bay, Island of Otaheite, 5th mo. 21st, 1835.

My Dear Friend John Wilbur,

Although much time has elapsed since we saw each other at Norwich in England, and though many have been the turnings and overturnings of my heavenly Lord and Master's hand since that day, yet at seasons I have never ceased to remember you, in the fresh aboundings of that love, the precious influence of which, binds together in one, the disciples of the one crucified, risen and glorified Lord, however distant from each other their lot may be cast. You may probably have heard something, (though I doubt it as I write,) of the fight of affliction and distress which I had to endure, within the borders of my own beloved family, which deprived me of the beloved partner of all my joys and sorrows, and a faithful sharer in them for more than thirty-two and a half years. What my Master did, 1 knew not at the time, but have since known, to the comfort and consolation of my tribulated mind, and to the praise and glory of his grace. “What I do, you know not now, but you shall know hereafter.” And persuaded I am, renewedly, that every dispensation of his holy will towards me, was only to prepare me for the great work in which I am now engaged; and to set the captive spirit more and more free from every earthly care, and to wean it from the near and dear social tie, and render it more fit to be employed in the highest, greatest, and most noble calling upon earth, even in a cause, dignified with immortality, and crowned with eternal life.

In addition to this heavy trial, which took me back across the continent of Europe, a winter's journey, twenty-eight days in length, once more to behold the wreck of my precious family, and regulate their affairs, for their future well-being, the messengers of Satan, (for they were many.) were let loose to buffet me. After the vessel “Henry Freeling,” from which I now address you, was fitted out, we sailed from London on the thirteenth of eleventh mo., 1833, and joined her a few miles below Gravesend; and eventually proceeded from there to Portsmouth, in the neighborhood of which we were detained more than four months, by strong adverse gales, and other circumstances, but all tending eventually to promote the great object in view; and I fully believe, “working together for good.” During this long detention, in the winter months, our little bark, of about one hundred tons only, was often tempest-tossed without, and some on board often tempest-tossed within.

After having been here about a month, my mind was sorely exercised, and there was but one way for me to throw it off, to my relief; and this was by making an open avowal, that I was not satisfied to proceed any further, let the consequences be what they might, with the Friend appointed by the “Meeting for Sufferings” in London, as an assistant—or by some termed a companion, but not by myself. This circumstance seemed to raise a “hue and cry”—or something like it, against me in almost every part of England; and at length, drew down a committee appointed by the “Meeting for Sufferings” to visit me at Portsmouth, namely: Peter Bedford, George Stacey, Josiah Yorster of Tottenham, and Samuel Gurney; bringing with them the final determination of a Meeting for Sufferings specially convened on the occasion, which was—that I should be left at liberty to proceed on the voyage without any further companion than my son Charles, (about twenty-four years of age,) who believed it his duty to resign his situation in Russia, (all the living that he had,) and surrender himself to the Divine disposal, by making the offer of going with me, and of making himself useful in any way that might present, if approved by Friends in London; and this was accepted by the generality of Friends, as far as I know; but the conduct of Daniel Wheeler in this business was considered, from north to south, to be highly reprehensible, if not shameful,—to use the said Friend in the manner I had done. They wanted a reason, and I could give them none; but that I had acted under a sense of duty. This could not be reconciled. It was not understood by those who never heard the Master's voice, at any time, or saw his shape; and I fear it may be said, believe not in him. Of this description I am aware you are not ignorant; there are not a few in our Society in England. I think they cannot be better pointed out than by my saying, they were such as highly disapprove of “John Wilbur's Letters,” published by George Crosfield, of which I am thankful, in having several copies now along with me.

But what puzzled these people most of all, was that the Friend and myself parted in brotherly love. There had at no time been any difference existing between us, and I quite thought that he had been right in making the offer, at the outset, inasmuch as he had promoted my being set at liberty by the “Meeting for Sufferings,” which would not have been the case if another Friend had not offered himself, as neither the outfit nor the purchase of the vessel would have been entered into, until one had showed himself. When we separated at Portsmouth, he gave me as handsome a clearance in writing, as I could desire, or wish for; and in a letter to the Monthly Meeting at Balby, (near Doncaster,) to which we both belong as members, I had also given him full satisfaction, and the meeting too, as well as the “Meeting for Sufferings,” which had been furnished, by myself, with a copy of the said letter. Moreover, when sifted by some friends who wanted to get information from him, he, in the same noble manner, declared that if he had it to do again, he would still do the same; but even this could not satisfy. I received letter after letter reproaching me for my conduct, and declaring that my going had not their unity; and one Friend did not hesitate to express his belief that the Divine presence was withdrawn from me, that I was left to myself, and that the detention and other circumstances combined to declare it.

At one time I concluded to return to London, and meet these enemies face to face, but something continually occurred to prevent my taking this step, when ready to set out. Some of my true friends approved of it, and others dreaded the result. I was, however, favored to see through this snare of the enemy, for I fully believe if I had gone again to London, the voyage would have been set aside altogether; as I am satisfied that it would have caused a complete exposure of the principles of many among us, and a complete explosion also; and I was not desirous to shrink from going on this account, but the language in my mind was, “Let the dead bury their dead—but you go!” I believe many Friends could see the divine Hand in all this, as it occasioned my writing many letters, in support, I humbly trust, of the Truth as it is in Jesus. The detention also afforded time for our captain's character to be fully developed, and another to be appointed in his place. It was thought afterwards by many, and particularly by myself, that we had not been detained one day too long. I must pass over all particulars of the voyage; however, on leaving the neighborhood of Portsmouth, we reached our anchorage in the harbor of Rio de Janeiro in Brazil,—without making a single tack,—a thing, perhaps, never done before by any vessel.

Farewell, my very dear friend. My dear love awaits you and yours, and all those that in sincerity love the Lord Jesus, in which my Charles would gladly join, and believe me your affectionate friend,

Daniel Wheeler.

23rd.—The king came on board to breakfast this morning by himself, but departed as soon as our reading was over. As attending the Tahitian worship has been frequently the companion of my thoughts for several days past, it seemed best for me to be in readiness by having the way opened for the ensuing First day, (tomorrow,) should this be my portion. After communicating this to my son Charles, we concluded to go on shore, and mention the subject to George Pritchard. On seeing the latter, I told him that my mind had been drawn to attend the Tahitian worship tomorrow morning. He asked, if I meant to perform service there, or to sit as a spectator. 'To sit as a spectator,' I replied, 'but if required to speak, to have permission to do so.' He then said, 'You must not expect to find things in the same order as if you were at home and added, 'If you could come on shore about half-past eight o'clock in the morning, there would be time to look at the schools before the meeting begins: the meeting for worship begins at nine o'clock, but a prayer-meeting commences at sun-rise.' I cannot but admire, with reverential gratitude and thankfulness, how in every instance of this kind that has yet occurred, mountains have become mole-hills, as a willingness has been wrought to approach them: and if it were not fixing a very high stamp upon ourselves, I should say, surely the blessed Master, in like manner as when He sent forth His disciples two and two formerly to every place where He intended to come, is already not only come, but has condescended to go before, and prepare the way for us poor creatures in a remarkable manner, in the hearts of others with whom we have to do. In returning we walked along the edge of the bay, and were accosted by a respectable, clean-looking white man, who has resided here about fifteen years. He had been a sailor, but a severe hurt in his right hand and wrist had caused his being left at this place. It seemed that he had been told we were much at a loss for an interpreter: he wished to render us every assistance he could, and was willing to accompany us wherever we might have to go; wanting nothing in return, as he was comfortably off; and he was not one that stood opposed to the work in which we were engaged: as he had but a small piece of land, he was at liberty at any time to attend us. We acknowledged the kindness and disinterestedness of this offer, and told him, if occasion required it, we should make application to him. We think him a suitable person to have the care of some tracts for lending out to others, and one with whom some of the writings of Friends may be left.

On First day morning, the 24th of Fifth Month, we proceeded to George Pritchard's house about the appointed time. We were much too early for the school, owing to there being no regular time kept amongst the people; and some having to come from considerable distances, are the more likely to be out of season when they arrive. The principal teacher, who is a deacon in the church, made his appearance; soon after which we followed to the school-house. A considerable number of children were collected: the boys sitting at one end of a long building, and the girls at the other; the teacher standing on one side, about midway between them. He gave out questions to the boys and girls alternately, which were answered in the same way by a few of the elder children in a singing tone simultaneously, the rest seeming to take but little interest in what was going on. We were told, that when the queen resided here, the number of children was much greater than at present; but as she now lives at Papaoa, such children as formerly attended here, now go to the school at that place.

It was considerably more than half an hour after the fixed time, before we entered (what is called) the church, where a large number of persons were collected and collecting. The whole congregation were squatted on the floor, the building being in an unfinished state, and no seats as yet provided: they appeared to occupy the whole of the floor, which is very extensive. While they were proceeding in their usual manner, I endeavoured to draw near to the Fountain of Israel, whose God is, and ever will be, Him who gives strength and power to his people. My heart was softened in an unusual manner, and the creature was brought down into a state of nothingness: tears flowed beyond a capability of restraint, as “in the day of the great slaughter, when the towers fall,” (the towers of pride, high-mindedness, and self-exaltation,) and the will of the creature subjected to the will of the great Creator; as shadowed forth by the prophet, when pointing to the spiritual conflict, and the accomplishment of the great work of regeneration in the heart of man, at that day when the Lord alone is exalted.¹⁷ My mind was in a calm, and I was prepared to stand up when the proper moment arrived. At length the singing ended, and a universal stillness prevailed over the meeting, probably increased by expectation, which had for some time been stamped upon the countenances of the whole assembly.

“God is not the author of confusion, but of peace, as in all churches of the saints,”—were the first words uttered by me; which being interpreted, were followed by,—'it is not an every day circumstance for a stranger thus to speak amongst you, probably what you never before witnessed; but it is according to the true order of the gospel that the prophets should speak two or three, that all might learn and all might be comforted,'—with more of the text; repeating again, for “God is not the author of confusion, but of peace, as in all churches of the saints;” proceeding with,—'I have nothing new to offer: the way to the kingdom is the same now as in the beginning; there is no variableness or shadow of turning with that God, with whom we have to do. The things of time may vacillate and change; but the Rock of Ages remains unimpaired: it changes not,—“the foundation of God stands sure, having this seal, the Lord knows them that are his.” This foundation is Christ Jesus: and no other foundation can any man lay than is laid. Every man's work will be made manifest, the day shall declare it, the fire of the Lord will try it: that only will stand which is built on Christ Jesus the righteous, that tried corner stone, elect of God, and precious indeed to them that believe,—though to the Jews a stumbling block, and to the Greeks foolishness. But to them who are called, and who obey, “Christ, the power of God, and the wisdom of God.” For this cause “God gave his only begotten Son, that whosoever believes in Him should not perish but have everlasting life:”—with more on this important point. 'In looking over this large assembly, the love of God has filled my heart as I have sat amongst you:—may the Lord in heaven bless you, is the language that has arisen therein. It is this love that induced me to come amongst you; it is this love that would gather all into the heavenly garner of rest and peace. Endless in duration is the mercy of the Lord; free and unbounded is His love. His love has been long extended to these islands, and covered them as with a mantle. This island has had advantages beyond many others.' I reminded them that many years had now elapsed since the sound of the gospel was first heard in their land: they had long had many parts of the Holy Scriptures in circulation, which from their earliest pages point to the Saviour. It was promised soon after the fall of man, that the seed of the woman should bruise the serpent's head. Moses declared to the people in his day,—“A prophet shall the Lord your God raise up unto you of your brethren, like unto me; him shall you hear in all things;” and “the soul which will not hear that prophet, shall be destroyed from among the people,” which led to the query, what return had been made for all this, and wherein had they been benefited by these great privileges. They had run well for a season: what had hindered them? What had prevented them, that they should have turned again as unto the weak and beggarly elements? If they had obeyed the gospel, this would not have been the case: they would by this time have been a pure people for their God. That unless there was a thorough alteration and change, the blessing intended for them would be withdrawn; and the rod would be administered for their iniquity. Continuing,—“Be watchful, and strengthen the things which remain, that are ready to die; for your works are not perfect in the sight of God.” “Remember, therefore, how you have received and heard; and hold fast, and repent.” There is a great work to be done; for where is your hope when the present generation are summoned from works to rewards, if the younger children are not trained in succession? I had to call upon the parents to step forward before it was too late; they had all a part to take in it. Tahitian mothers had a large share devolving upon them; much depended upon their influence and example in endeavouring to train up their children in habits of civilized life, by letting them learn to read; (which at present is much neglected, and disliked both by parents and children;) that so they might partake in the advantages which are to be derived from the Holy Scriptures: reminding them, that “they that be wise, shall shine as the brightness of the firmament; and they that turn many to righteousness, as the stars forever and ever,” exhorting them, not to be overcome with evil, but to overcome evil with that which is good; that the promises are many, great, and precious, which are recorded in Holy Writ, to them that overcome, etc. Though, perhaps, more might be expressed than above noted, and with some variation as to the words; yet I believe that what is here inserted is the substance and principal part of what was uttered.

Having finished, I took my seat. Soon after this, George Pritchard concluded the meeting. When the whole congregation rose, the elderly people came forward to shake hands; but being pretty near one of the doors, we were soon carried outside by the current of people turning that way. There were upwards of a thousand people inside of the building, and a considerable number outside also: the doors and windows being all open, those without could hear about as well as those within.

28th. (Fifth-day.)—Soon after breakfast, Charles and myself endeavoured to draw near in silence before the Most High. Although under feelings of great weakness and inability of ourselves to maintain the watch against our subtle enemy, yet we must not shrink or be discouraged from using our humble endeavours to maintain the unequal conflict; seeing that He with whom we have to do, knows that we are but dust, pities our frailties and weakness, and regards with an eye of merciful compassion his poorest creatures; yes, even the lone sparrow on the house-top cannot fall to the ground without his knowledge.

Fifth Month 30th.—Yesterday, C. Wilson and son, from Point Venus, dined with us. They came to inquire for some articles for the latter, who is about to join the mission likely to proceed to the Navigator islands. In the evening, went on shore for exercise. William Henry having purchased supplies for our vessel, came on board this morning to procure sundry articles of barter goods. In the forenoon, had an opportunity of furnishing a respectable woman with a Testament, Selection of Advices, John Woolman's Serious Considerations, and nine tracts on religious subjects. This female was taken into William Henry's family when a child of four years old: she is well acquainted with the English language, and has a numerous family, which she is endeavouring to bring up in a praiseworthy manner. The influence of her example of industry and notability may be traced in the different appearance of the family from that of others; and the result is strikingly obvious in the behaviour and habits of the children. She is, doubtless, the offspring of one white parent. Her husband is a native, but we have not yet seen him: they reside in the neighbourhood of Mairi Pehe.

Yesterday morning, a native of Dundalk in Ireland, by name Murphy, lately arrived in the Peruvian, came on board. He stated that his coming here was solely for the purpose of procuring a passage to the Sandwich Islands; but that he is not suffered to remain here, for lack of proper credentials, which are required of such as come to reside on shore. It is one of those cases in which we can not render any assistance, there being a decided law in this country, that prevents strangers, under such circumstances, from coming amongst the people, and which applies to all foreigners. At the same time, it is pretty evident, that a fear of his introducing the Roman Catholic religion greatly operates against him; for which it is probable there may be some ground, as he acknowledges to have been six years at a college in Ireland, training for a priest; but says he never was ordained. He is now come from the Gambier Islands, where, he says, there are six French Roman Catholic priests and one English: whatever may be the real cause of his coming here, his present situation renders him an object of pity. As attending the public places of worship here, can only be done to purpose on First days, as it is only then that large bodies of the people are assembled; and as it is probable that I may have to see the whole population of the island before I can proceed any further; I have felt a little anxious to avail myself of these opportunities, so as not to protract the length of time we may have to remain here. In the afternoon my mind became more uneasy, and it seemed best to go on shore, and make inquiry as to the meetings to be held tomorrow; but I soon ascertained, that George Pritchard had been unexpectedly summoned to a distant district, and that notice had been generally given of this arrangement. I now found that I could not cut and contrive for myself, in my own will, way, and time; but that the Lord's time must be waited for: without His approving and sanctifying requisition, our creaturely performances, instead of procuring the blessed and joyful sentence of “well done,” may only place on the same woful level with the workers of iniquity, even though we may profess to have prophesied in His name, in His name cast out devils, and in His name done many wonderful works.

Fifth Month 31st. (First day.)—In the forenoon the decks being too damp, the crew were collected in the cabin, where we were joined by several strangers from the shore, including the family of the female who was on board yesterday, and some others. After having read the latter part of the epistle to the Hebrews, and a portion of the Psalms, we settled down into silent waiting, not aware that I should have any thing to offer. We continued to sit in this manner, deepening in solemnity; when I perceived that matter was gathering upon my mind, which, from, as it were, a mere blank, was now filling under a quickening influence, until utterance was yielded to.—“That which may be known of God is manifest in man; for God has showed it unto him,” as we are told in the epistle to the Romans;—“God has not left himself without a witness,” in the heart of every son and daughter of the human race, however circumstanced, or wherever placed, sufficient if attended to, and co-operated with on our part, to enable us to work out our salvation with fear and trembling.—“He has showed you, O man, what is good, and what does the Lord require of you, but to do justly, to love mercy, and to walk humbly with your God.” Thus was I led on step by step, until strengthened to show, I trust, that there was no occasion to look to this minister or that minister, for we all had the great Minister of the sanctuary, and of the true tabernacle which the Lord has pitched and not man,—the only true Teacher of His people; who continues to teach as never man taught. Declaring,—that this was “the grace of God that brings salvation,” which “has appeared unto all men, teaching us,” etc.;—that it was the poor in spirit, on whom the blessing was pronounced. In this manner, having turned the attention of the company to their heavenly Teacher, to an extent never contemplated when my mouth was first opened, we again settled down into solemn silence; and my peace flowed, under a consoling belief, that my remaining on board was in the ordering of the blessed Master. I have not met with a circumstance since leaving England, more truly cheering to my mind, than to find, that the Lord has even in this place, some of the seven thousand, that have not bowed the knee to the image of Baal. I pray that I may yet meet with many more like this dear woman:—before they went on shore, I had some interesting conversation with her.

Sixth Month 3rd.—For the last three days our time has been much occupied by persons coming on board, and in attending to the exchange of some of our articles for barter, to obtain the needful supplies of fresh provisions, fruit and vegetables.

While on shore yesterday for exercise, we met with an aged native, who remembered the first coming to these islands of Captain James Cook. It was clear that he was no stranger to the circumstances of his death at Hawaii, as he himself alluded to the place. Although we had the advantage of an interpreter being with us, yet the age of this man could not be ascertained, as no record of births is instituted amongst them. In the forenoon, a judge, with whom we were previously acquainted, came on board, bringing with him the queen's mother, and a third person, to us a stranger. It evidently appeared to be one of those visits made only with a view to extort something from us in the way of present; signs were made by the female of chopping with an axe; but as I could only talk to her in English, she found there was nothing to be got, and I did not consider it at all necessary to satisfy demands which were altogether unreasonable; and especially as I knew, that if her wishes had been complied with, numerous applications would be made by her colleagues, which would have been more difficult to refuse.

Sixth Month 4th.—The king and his brother came on board to dinner, but did not remain long; their coming now is in a plain way, they come and go as they please: we treat them with civility, but no longer as strangers, or they us. This seems to suit their habits and inclination, which, like their bodies, are not accustomed to restraint. They paddle themselves off in a canoe, with no other clothing than check shirts, with a loose piece of blue cotton tied round the waist, and low crowned straw hats on their heads, and a broad blue ribbon round them.

5th.—This morning a respectable Spaniard came on board, whom I had seen several times when on shore. He was presented with _______'s Essays in his own language, with which he seemed highly gratified. He had been an officer in the Spanish army, and was banished from his country at the last revolution in South America: he has resided here about three years, and bears a good character. He was promised a copy of the Holy Scriptures and other books in his native language: I never saw any person so much pleased and thankful at the prospect of having these books furnished him in this country. On inquiry, we found that there are three Manilla men here, one of whom was in the canoe at the time. This man read very intelligibly in _______'s Essays; and his willingness to receive any books we were disposed to give for himself and comrades, made us glad that we are in possession of such a variety in their language.

6th.—At George Pritchard's we met with John Davies, the missionary from Papara, who has been engaged here about thirty-five years; he is an intelligent elderly man. From his long residence he has acquired the greatest fund of information respecting these islands and their inhabitants, of any person we have yet met with; which he imparted in a manner to us highly interesting, and the more so, as its authenticity may be relied on. In speaking of the idols formerly in great repute here and in the neighbouring isles, he said, that when expostulating with the people, and endeavouring to convince them of the worthlessness of these wooden deities, which can neither see nor speak, nor stand, nor go; the most sensible amongst the natives would say, that they did not worship them as God; but that they served only to remind them of God, who is invisible, but in some manner connected with those images,—how they knew not. He considered that the received opinion of these islands having been originally peopled from South America, was altogether without foundation; indeed their having been peopled from Asia can be proved by striking facts. When traversing to the westward, the same language is invariably to be found on the islands, though, perhaps, in a variety of dialects; and this may be traced to Sumatra, Borneo, Malacca, etc.: and the same tradition as regards a deity may also be traced throughout them, more or less in degree, and varying in some particulars: but on going to the eastward, the language is less and less to be recognized, and eventually disappears altogether. The intelligent natives seem to be awakened to a confused idea of a general deluge having taken place at some time or other, from their having discovered, that upon the tops of the highest mountains in this island and others, the same marine substances are met with, as they are accustomed to find at the bottom of the sea. It has been the opinion of some, that the whole of these islands formed at one time a vast continent; but that by an unaccountable convulsion of the earth, this continent became water, except the tops of the loftiest mountains, which constitute the islands as they stand at this day.

7th. (First day.)—Notwithstanding some information had spread that I should be gone to Papaoa, yet the state of the weather perhaps induced some to come on board about the time that we usually assemble the crew together. We had not sat long before some others arrived. The forepart of the time the children were a little restless, owing to the great heat of the place below, the deck being too wet to allow us to sit in the open air with safety; but a solemn feeling spread over our little company, and remained with us. My mind was gradually drawn into exercise, and at last I had to break through the silence with the expression,—True it is, that “God is no respecter of persons: but in every nation he that fears Him and works righteousness, is accepted with Him.”—“It is a fearful thing to fall into the hands of the living God.” And, “If the righteous scarcely be saved, where shall the ungodly and the sinner appear?” Also, true it is, that no man can save his brother, nor give to God a ransom for his soul: the work is our own, etc. It was one of those favoured times, of which it may be said, that the latter end surpassed the beginning, “because of the Truth.”

10th.—This morning received information that a public meeting of the principal chiefs and people of the island was about to take place, to consider the case of the supposed Roman Catholic. Although I had not been invited to a missionary conference which had taken place on this subject, yet I felt my way more than usually opened to attend the council of the Tahitians, then about to meet. Accordingly myself and Charles hastened to the shore, and landed opposite to the building where the people were assembling. The queen with her mother and attendants were seated upon the floor, surrounded by the chiefs of seven districts. The sister of the principal chief, or king of Rarotonga, was one of the party. The business commenced with the examination of the Irish Roman Catholic; the place was now crowded with people, but the examination proceeded very slowly and unsatisfactorily; which I could not help perceiving was entirely for lack of an able interpreter, who thoroughly understood the English language as well as the Tahitian. The people were restless and unsettled from this circumstance, the most part not seeming to know for what they had come together. None of the missionaries appeared willing (for sufficient reasons) to have any hand in the business; and seeing the real cause of the dilemma they had got into was still undiscovered, it seemed best for me to step forward, at a suitable moment, and state plainly to the heads of the meeting, that it was impossible for the business to proceed satisfactorily unless a competent interpreter was appointed; and turning to Captain Henry, who stood near me, I requested him to inform the chiefs what I had said. This being done, the council agreed that Captain Henry should be chosen; and he having consented, things began to move more readily forward, until the Catholic made some assertions highly injurious to the missionary cause, and offensive to the queen and all her chiefs, who felt very indignant on the occasion; and which I knew to be incorrect. There did not seem any other part for me, however unpleasant, than publicly to contradict what he had said, and to declare that some of the language he had used, had never been expressed by the person whom he was charging with having uttered it. This for a time caused considerable altercation; but having three witnesses on my side, this difficulty was soon got over, and order again restored. The examination continued, until the Catholic, unable to prove the statements he had made on first coming to Tahiti, and finding himself foiled on every side, made a hasty retreat, to all appearance not a little offended. One of the chiefs then expatiated on the case, as follows:—'This man (meaning the Catholic) held out that he should not come to this meeting; and it is seen that he did come to the meeting. He declared that he had a letter sealed with King William's seal, and he had no such thing: that he had a letter from the British Ambassador at Paris, and he had no such thing; and now, by his running away, he has shown himself to be a deceiver.' Then turning the attention of the assembly to my Charles and myself, he said, 'On their coming amongst us, we had no occasion to ask for letters; they gave them themselves into our hands. It is known to every chief in the island there was no trouble with them, because they are not deceivers.' He finished his speech, by proposing that such a man should never be allowed to come amongst them. After this the queen's speech was delivered by a clear headed middle-aged chief; which concluded with a call upon all her faithful subjects to unite in never permitting this Catholic, or any other of the same profession, to come to disturb the peace and tranquillity of Tahiti. Another chief made a very animated oration, which we were informed contained a proposition, not only to banish this man forever from their shores, but to follow him on the sea, and not allow either him or his comrades to remain so near them as the Gambier Islands, but to banish them from there, lest the plague should come amongst them: throwing his long stick upon the floor, to describe them as trampled under foot, never again to rise.

11th.—Yesterday we went to George Pritchard's to become acquainted with Alexander Simpson, the missionary from the island of Eimeo. He had come over to attend the meeting that had been appointed for the missionaries of all the districts, to take into consideration the arrival of the Irish Roman Catholic, above-mentioned. Alexander Simpson's wife and daughter were with him. He seems kindly disposed to forward our views, when visiting the island upon which he resides. 14th. (First day.)—In the forenoon a few strangers assembled with our own crew. In the course of the time we were together, I had a short testimony to bear to the indispensable duty of loving one another. How can we expect to be forgiven our trespasses, if we from our hearts do not forgive every man his brother their trespasses. Soon after one o'clock, p.m., George Pritchard called, accompanied by Alexander Simpson's wife, in a whale boat, to convey Charles and myself to Papaoa. We reached in time for the meeting of the Tahitians, which consisted of a large body of the people. Throughout much of the day, and much of the time also that their religious engagements were going forward, my mind was under no small weight of exercise, and it seemed doubtful to myself whether I should have any thing to communicate or not; but towards the latter part, I only waited for a proper interval of silence to stand upon my feet. George Pritchard observing this, asked whether I wished to say any thing then, or after the next singing was over: but the present moment seemed the right one; which being signified, he exhorted the meeting to stillness and attention, and waited by my side for me to begin. [Daniel Wheeler then communicated what was upon his mind.] Shortly after this, the meeting broke up: when the people drew towards us, and commenced the usual ceremony of shaking hands. The queen was present; but I did not know it until afterwards. We called at her house on our way to the boat, but she was gone off on foot to Papoete.

Half-past eleven o'clock, p.m. My mind is peaceful and easy, and relieved; and the God of glory has the praise; who thus continues to bear up a poor tribulated way-worn traveller, renewing my youth as the eagle's, and as the day is, so causing my strength to be.

Chapter XXI.

Visit to Bunaauia—Native Meeting—Kindness of the Principal Chief—Point Venus—Perilous Situation—Meeting at Point Venus—Visit to Papara—Beautiful Scenery—School at Teahupoo—Meeting of the Natives—Letter from the Native Congregation—Native Meeting at Papara—Return to the Henry Freeling—Letter from the Queen Of Tahiti.

Sixth Month 16th.—Last night had some conversation with George Pritchard about accompanying me to Bunaauia this afternoon. It was proposed that we should lodge at the house of David Darling, the missionary at that station, in order to attend the Tahitian worship at sun-rise tomorrow morning. We set out in a whale-boat about three o'clock, p.m. our company consisted of Alexander Simpson and George Pritchard, with some other members of the missionary families, my son Charles and myself, with four Tahitians at the oars. We had a fine passage while within the reef; but on reaching the opening which leads out into the main ocean, the rollers broke with so much violence, that some of our company were discouraged from making the attempt to force a passage through it. At length it was concluded to run the boat on shore upon a sandy beach, near some of the huts of the natives, who sallied forth in a body, and soon hauled her up beyond the reach of the surf. Our party being all landed, we proceeded on foot, and should soon have reached the mission-house, and in good day-light, but having a considerable river to encounter, the night overtook us before we had all passed over it. This river is rapid, and of uncertain depth; and notwithstanding the bed of it is covered with loose round stones, the natives are so dexterous, that an accident but rarely occurs. A number of these people soon came to our assistance, and the company were all landed safely on the other side. Soon after dark we reached the hospitable mansion of David Darling, and were received with great kindness by his wife and family; himself being from home among the Marquesan Islands, where he had gone to assist in establishing a missionary. At this place we found the wife and three children of J. M. Osmond, the missionary at the Taiarapu station. They had been tossing about for a considerable time in a clumsy boat of their own, not at all likely soon to reach their abode, unless the wind should blow from a direction seldom witnessed at this season of the year. Being rather unwell in the evening, and having passed an almost sleepless night, I felt in poor condition when it was time to get ready to attend the sun-rise meeting of the Tahitians, on the morning of the 17th instant. A large number of the people collected together, and when the usual service of their own was gone through, I stood up, and George Pritchard interpreted for me, as at other times.

The principal burden that rested upon my mind, was to turn the attention of the people to the light of Christ Jesus in their own hearts, that their conversation might be such as becomes His gospel. I had to tell them, that although I did not understand their language, yet I was fearful for them, seeing that for every idle word a man shall speak, he must give an account in the day of judgment; for by our words we shall be justified, and by our words we shall be condemned: believing and declaring this belief, that a very loose and shameless conversation was a besetting sin amongst them. I had to remind them of the superior advantages bestowed upon these islands, over many others of this part of the habitable globe, by the introduction of Christianity amongst them. Had they obeyed the gospel, the effect of the evil introduced amongst them by distant nations, would have been prevented. That the Lord is looking for fruit; and “the earth which drinks in the rain that often comes upon it, and bears herbs useful for those by whom it is cultivated, receives blessing from God; but if it bears thorns and briers, it is rejected and near to being cursed, whose end is to be burned.” that the desire of my soul was, that the lamentation once taken up by the Saviour of the world, might never be applicable to them as a people:—“O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, etc., how often would I have gathered your children together, even as a hen gathers her chickens under her wings; and you would not!” That the love of God had overshadowed these islands in an eminent degree; and I never heard of an instance where the Lord in matchless mercy, was pleased to send any of his servants amongst a people, but that his love was still towards that people. That Christ Jesus had been often preached to them, but they had not obeyed His gospel: they must repent and obey; and the way to repent and obey, is to fear God, and give glory to Him. That it is the same gospel now, as was proclaimed by the angel, which John saw flying through the midst of heaven, having the everlasting gospel to preach unto every nation and kindred, and tongue and people; saying with a loud voice, “fear God and give glory to him; for the hour of his judgment is come: and worship him that made heaven, and earth, and the sea, and the fountains of waters.” Desiring that they might be sensible of that day, when the Lord's judgment is come upon all that is of a sinful and transgressing nature; that so they might indeed fear Him, and in thought, word, and deed, give glory unto Him; and thus be prepared to worship Him in spirit and in truth; for it is such the Father seeks to worship Him. That “God who commanded the light to shine out of darkness, has shined in our hearts,” and to this saving light I wished to turn them. The people were generally very attentive, and a solemn covering was permitted to prevail over us. On rising from our seats, they gathered around us in the usual way. Being previously acquainted with Utami, a principal chief in that neighbourhood, we met like old friends, who knew and loved each other, if his love for me was the same as I felt for him. We got out into the air as soon as we well could, in order to escape some of the usual greetings,—not feeling in a condition, from weakness and exhaustion, to accept of all the kindness intended by these people. It is indeed worthy of humble gratitude and thankfulness, to witness how my gracious Lord, from time to time, has opened the way for me amongst the missionaries.

The printing-office is established at this place: we looked into it, but as the principal conductor of this work, David Darling, was absent, the press was standing still. The organization of the language, so as to admit the translation of the Holy Scriptures into the native tongue, is a work, the importance of which cannot be duly estimated nor conceived, as to the happy result, under the Divine blessing, that is in store for generations yet unborn; any more than the extent can be defined to which they may be permitted to circulate and diffuse revealed truth in the language of holy inspiration. This work now considered to be near its completion, has been the labour of many years, in a climate wasting to the constitution of every European, being oppressively relaxing from the heat. Henry Nott has been a very laborious servant in this cause, without any regard to the many hardships and privations which the earliest settlers had particularly to encounter, and in which he deeply shared; his constitution is now sinking from long residence, and the effects of close sedentary application: who can doubt for a moment the devotedness of such a man?

While here, we were waited upon by Utami, in the capacity of chief, to request permission to feed us, as they term furnishing strangers with a supply of food; which with them is considered the greatest respect that can be shown to a stranger: but we were compelled to decline their kind attention, as the materials could not be procured from the different parts of the district before the morrow, and we were bound to return to the Henry Freeling that night, if practicable, as the chronometers from being locked up in our cabin, could not be wound up until we returned on board again. The quantity of food usually furnished at such times, is quite preposterous; consisting of a hog, fowls, fish, plantains, bananas, etc., with a quantity of cocoa-nuts, and if hinted at, there is little doubt that a dog would be prepared, according to the ancient custom of the island. As the chief Utami has undertaken to repair a building for a school, I agreed to furnish a few pounds of nails, and a lock for the door, for his encouragement in this useful work. In the course of the day, our boat was brought from the place where we landed the preceding evening; and after taking leave of this family, we again re-embarked, and in a short time got safely through the most dangerous pass in the reef into smooth water, and reached the Bay of Papeete before dark, not a little fatigued, and in much poverty of spirit, and unable to write for lack of sleep.

Sixth Month 19th.—Principally employed on board. Consulted in the forenoon with Samuel Wilson on the best mode of visiting the district of Point Venus, where his father resides, and that of Tiarei, the residence of William Henry. In the afternoon we went on shore for exercise until dark. Samuel Wilson, with whose plainness and simplicity we were much gratified, has kindly offered to accompany us to the distant districts as interpreter.

20th.—George Pritchard came on board in the forenoon, and assisted in arranging a plan for accomplishing our visit to the remaining and most distant districts upon the island of Tahiti. It was concluded best for us to set off this afternoon towards Tiarei. As the wind blew fresh, about sun-set was considered the proper time to proceed as far as Point Venus, presuming the strength of the wind would lessen as the evening approached. It was proposed that we should remain at Point Venus until two o'clock in the morning, and then push forward so as to reach Tiarei about day-break, before the tradewind set in, which is mostly pretty strong, and generally from the quarter to which we were bending our course. All things being ready, we left the Henry Freeling soon after four o'clock, the wind having materially lessened by the fall of some rain, and it still continued to get lighter as we proceeded. As there was every indication of clear and serene weather long before reaching the first place of intended destination, it was suggested by our native boat's crew, that we should not make much stay there, but push forward while the wind and sea were gentle. The principal motive for wishing to stop by the way at all, was to lessen the fatigue of these men by dividing the journey into two parts, so that they might rest between them: but they were well aware that the whole distance could be performed at once in calm weather, with much more ease than if divided and time given for rest, if the wind and sea should rise against them, although but in a moderate degree. Just before dark we landed upon the shore of Point Venus, the place from which the celebrated navigator Captain James Cook, observed the transit of the planet Venus on the disk of the sun. Opposite that part of the coast of Tahiti, which we had next to traverse, there is no sheltering coral-reef for its protection; so that the remainder of our journey was exposed to the whole beat of the Pacific Ocean, and can only be performed when the weather is moderate.

Having with us Samuel Wilson, we were readily conducted to the habitation of his father Charles Wilson, the resident missionary at this station, and were kindly entertained by the family. As the passage round Point Venus is very intricate, and the water particularly shoal, the boat was taken round to the other side, while we were partaking of some refreshment: we lost no time in preparing again to embark. The crew met us with a native torch, made of the dry branching leaves of the cocoa-nut tree; which with our own lantern, lighted the intricate narrow path among the bushes, and was particularly useful at the sea-side, the night being now very dark. As the night advanced, we were helped by a gentle land breeze, so that the labour of the oars was a little diminished. There was an experienced elderly native employed at the stern-oar of our whale-boat, whose course seemed to be principally directed by the white tops of the rolling surf, as it broke upon the coast, near to which he mostly kept. Off one rocky point of land it became needful to turn with a wide sweep towards the offing, to escape a projecting ridge of rocks, the outermost extremity of which was defined by the termination of breakers.

By ten o'clock p.m., it was declared that we were abreast of Tiarei; but the night was so dark, that the narrow entrance through the reef to it could not be distinguished even by the eagle-eyed Tahitians. The boat's mast was struck, and one of the natives stationed in the front with Samuel Wilson, to look out; and her head being turned shorewards, we edged gently down towards the foaming breakers, which were bursting on the rocky strand with thundering noise. As the rowing had now altogether ceased, the boat drifted only at the rate at which the swell of the sea hove her along; a measure highly prudent, until the dangerous pass we had to go through was clearly ascertained; as was afterwards sufficiently demonstrated, though at the moment such tardy proceeding might seem to protract the term of suspense. Having silently proceeded for some time in this way, and from the increasing roar of the restless waters, evidently drawing nearer and nearer to the margin of the crags, on a sudden there were symptoms of alarm, which could not be mistaken, on the part of the boat's crew; who now perceived that we had missed the only entrance that afforded a passage to the shore; and, from our present position, a large lump of rock was in the way to the mouth of the channel, which the boat could not possibly escape. Our poor Tahitians immediately jumped into the sea, and did all they could to save the boat from being dashed to pieces; but they could not prevent her from striking. She however only struck once, and lay quiet, the wave having so far receded, that she did not float enough to beat, and the next roller that came in, carried her completely over the obstruction. But it was difficult for some time to ascertain whether the worst was now over or not; for our men began to howl and shout, the meaning of which we could not comprehend: it afterwards appeared, that this was done to rouse the sleeping natives on the shore; who, well understanding this yell, shortly came running with lighted torches to our assistance, and a few minutes placed us once more upon terra firma. As the boat could not get close in, one of these men very soon had me upon his back, to prevent my getting wet: Samuel Wilson and my son Charles were landed in the same way.

The journey altogether had been more speedy, and in many respects more favourable than is often witnessed, until we came to the last pinch, when the never-failing arm of Almighty power was again displayed in the needful time for our relief. As we were strangers to the language of the people, and could render them no assistance whatever, and any attempt to direct their efforts must only have increased the general confusion, we therefore sat silent beholders of what was going forward; committing ourselves to Him, who saw our perilous situation through the darkened gloom, and did not suffer the briny waters to prevail against us; but in love and mercy and compassion, stretched forth his hand to save. As to myself I may say, my heart was fixed, trusting in the Lord; whose lovingkindness is better than life. He was with us of a truth, in fulfilment of his gracious promise, and we were not confounded. I desire to record this signal favour with humble thankfulness and reverence, to His praise and to His glory. We soon reached the mission-house where William Henry resides, to whom we were all personally known; by whom and his wife we were kindly accommodated for the night; although, from their secluded situation, but little in the way of receiving strangers, and at an hour so unseasonable they could not have had the least idea of our coming. Much sleep could not be obtained, but we passed the night in quietness, and we felt refreshed at rising.

Tiarei, 21st.—Previously to the commencement of the Tahitian worship at nine o'clock in the morning, our time was pretty fully occupied with the family devotion and taking breakfast; after which we repaired to the meeting-house, it being agreed if I should have any thing to speak to the people, that Samuel Wilson was to stand as interpreter. This was a relief to William Henry, (and also to myself,) as he had quite as much to go through as his strength was equal to, he being far advanced in years. After William Henry had shown us to a seat, he went into the pulpit, Samuel Wilson remaining not far from us. The difference in appearance and in the general deportment of the people, at this distance from the contaminating effects of the shipping, was discernible throughout the greater part of the congregation, which was large. Being comforted by the sensible presence of the great Master, my mind was strengthened in an unusual manner; but not until after a season of humiliating conflict had been passed through; in order, I believe that the excellency of the power might be felt and known, and acknowledged to be of God and not of us, nor of any thing that we can command or call our own. When the usual engagements of the meeting were gone through, I stood up, and beckoned to Samuel Wilson to draw nearer to me. We went into a position a little more central, near the table; and under a solemn covering, after a short interval of silence, I said:—'I am fully persuaded in my own mind, that you, my beloved people, will suffer a few words from a stranger, who is with you in the fear, and in the love, and I may add, in the will of God, and not in my own; and therefore I stand amongst you with innocent boldness, because I seek not yours but you, that immortal part in you which must sooner or later have a being in endless felicity or in endless misery.' Declaring unto them, that 'there is no alteration in the Christian course; the warfare is continual, and can only be maintained and accomplished with burning and fuel of fire,—by the cleansing operation of that burning, which the spirit of judgment produces, and that unquenchable fire of the Lord, which consumes the chaffy and transgressing nature in our hearts; and if submitted to, would prepare and purify us (even as He is pure) for a kingdom, consisting not in food and drink, but in righteousness and peace and joy in the Holy Spirit;—a kingdom, where nothing that is unclean, nothing that is impure, nothing that works an abomination, or that makes a lie, can ever enter. While I have been sitting with you, my heart has been filled with the love of God towards you; raising in it a fervent desire, that every individual, from the least to the greatest, might be numbered among the ransomed and redeemed of the Lord; who shall return and come to Zion with songs and everlasting joy upon their heads, from whom sorrow and sighing shall flee away.' But I had to tell them that a great and individual work must be accomplished before these gracious and prophetic promises are realized. The indignation of the Lord must be patiently borne for sin and for transgression; until He should arise and plead their cause, and execute judgment for them, and in his own time say—it is enough; and bring them forth to the light, even the light of Christ Jesus, in whom they will then behold the Lamb of God that takes away the sin of the world. This light shines in every heart, and is the true light that enlightens every man that comes into the world; in which only the righteousness of Christ Jesus is witnessed to be brought forth and beheld. When the precious blood of Christ was shed for the sins of all mankind, He ascended up on high; He led captivity captive, and received gifts for men, even for the rebellious also; that the Lord God might dwell among them, even among sinners, such as themselves and me. That a measure or manifestation of the gift of the Holy Spirit is given to every man to profit withal; and well will it be for those who are profiting thereby, and faithfully occupying therewith. I then had to remind them of the great things which the Lord had done for them: that the gospel sound had long been heard in their land; that many parts of the Holy Scriptures had been translated into their native tongue, which directed them to the Saviour,—to the Word, which was in the beginning, which was with God, and was God. After enlarging further, although I think what I have stated are the principal heads that were touched upon, I sat down poor and empty; yet satisfied with favour, and full with the blessing of the Lord. Instead of the congregation beginning to separate immediately in a hasty manner, as we have sometimes witnessed, even the dear children kept their seats, with the whole of the company; a delightful pause ensued, which was short, but crowned with that solemnity not at our command; during which I humbly trust the thanksgiving of many redounded to the glory of God. Silence was at last broken by one of the chiefs expressing, on behalf of the assembly and himself, their thankfulness and satisfaction, and how welcome my visit had been to them; because, he said, 'You have preached to us the everlasting gospel, and have shown to us the propitiatory sacrifice for the sins of mankind, Christ Jesus with something further, which when interpreted, I was fearful attached too much to the creature; and I requested Samuel Wilson to tell them not to look to the creature, but to their Creator. The whole of the people still continued together, about eight hundred persons; and seemed as if they knew not how to begin to separate, until some person proposed their shaking hands with us, which immediately commenced, and exceeded all we had before met with.

On our return, the difficulty of passing through the reef was trifling and insignificant; the light of day had dispelled all our fears and its terrors: we could now see what we were about to encounter. In a few minutes we were clear of the breakers, and spreading our sail, directed our course towards Point Venus; where we arrived in something less than two hours, the wind having kept on the increase the whole of the way; and having a fine lively whale-boat that could run from the swell, there was no danger to apprehend, so long as it continued to follow her. We were soon ready to go to meeting, but a very different scene awaited us, for instead of another feast of heavenly dainties, the Bridegroom was taken away, and a fast was proclaimed;—“then shall they fast in those days.” It was a time altogether the most discouraging that had yet befallen us. The continual talking and light behaviour of a large portion of the people were truly painful, although several attempts were made to restore order amongst them; and the sound of some sharp strokes of the long sticks, by the agents employed to keep order, was distinctly heard amongst the younger people. I requested Samuel Wilson to say, that although I had brought nothing with me, a little matter had arisen which I did not wish to take away. The attention of the people being somewhat arrested, I proceeded with—“Be not deceived; God is not mocked; for whatsoever a man sows, that shall he also reap. For he that sows to his flesh, shall of the flesh reap corruption; but he that sows to the Spirit, shall of the Spirit reap life everlasting.”—“The Lord is good unto them who wait for Him,—to the soul that seeks Him;” and eternal life is the reward of all those, “who, by patient continuance in well doing, seek for glory, honour, and immortality; but unto those who are contentious, and do not obey the truth, but obey unrighteousness, indignation and wrath, tribulation and anguish, upon every soul of man that does evil, of the Jew first, and also of the Gentile; but glory, honour, and peace to every man that works good.” I then had to turn their attention to the sure and only foundation, Christ Jesus; and to the necessity of their believing in his inward and spiritual appearance in their hearts:—that without faith it is impossible to please God; pointing to the holy author and blessed finisher thereof, from whom alone it is to be derived. Without they live by this faith of the Son of God, who loved them, and gave himself for them, all their profession of religion is vain. With some further additions, I sat down; and the meeting soon after closed. We called at the house to bid the family farewell, and immediately put off for the Bay of Papeete. We should have reached the Henry Freeling by dark; but having lost our pilot and interpreter, Samuel Wilson, who remained at home at Point Venus, we were twice entangled in the mazy reef, and forced to row back again each time to get clear of it.

Sixth Month 23rd.—Today employed in arranging matters to enable us to set out again for the Taiarapu journey, to visit the district where J. M. Orsmond resides.

24th.—A whale-boat having been procured last evening, we proceeded after an early breakfast to George Pritchard's; and from there accompanied by our kind friend Samuel Wilson, set forward towards Papara. We reached Bunaauia in good time, and were again hospitably received by David Darling's family at the mission-house, he himself being still from home. After resting our crew more than an hour, we were again seated in the boat, fearful of wasting time; as the difficulty in some parts of the passage, going out and in between the reefs, on account of the currents which prevail, renders daylight indispensable in passing through them. We landed at a place where a large English barque had been broken up. Here we met with three Englishmen, employed in preparing to build a new vessel, with part of the materials selected from the old one. These poor men seemed to be left in a very destitute and neglected situation; and it is to be feared, were strangers to the great work yet to be accomplished for the salvation of their immortal souls, if not altogether unconcerned about it. A parcel of tracts were left for their perusal, which was promised by one of them.

We reached Papara before sun-set, and on landing were met by Tati, with whom I was previously acquainted. This man is considered to be the greatest orator upon the islands, and one of the few who stand as champions for the general welfare of their country. After little more had passed than the salutations customary among the islanders, the natives began to flock round us as we stood upon the beach, when an interesting conversation took place in their hearing. Tati began by saying, that the peace and harmony which now prevailed, were the result of the gospel having come among them. I replied, that wherever the spirit of the gospel breathes, there must be peace; reminding him of the angelic chorus, that ushered in this glorious dispensation,—“Glory to God in the highest, and on earth peace, good-will towards men.” He said, that the wars which formerly were continually breaking out and depopulating the country, had nearly altogether ceased since the gospel had been brought to them by the missionaries. On this I queried,—'but did you not hear the sound of the gospel, before the missionaries came among you? I believe you did; and that many of you were sensible when you committed evil, and were stung with remorse for it; and also that a feeling of peace had been witnessed when a virtuous action had been done. Have you not been sensible of this? He replied, they knew it was necessary to offer sacrifices frequently for sin, to appease the wrath of an offended Deity. This, I told him, that had disquieted them for sin and transgression, though at the time they had not known what it was, was that gospel which had been preached in and unto every creature under heaven. After this, Tati invited us to his house, and refreshed us with the milk of the cocoa-nut. He said, that although many improvements had been introduced by foreigners coming amongst them; yet we might perceive they still retained many of their old habits and customs, alluding to their domestic arrangements, squatting upon the floor, etc. The house exhibited more of an air of comfort and industry than any we had before seen:—native cloth, fishingnets, etc., of their own manufacture were lying about. The approach of night occasioned us to hasten to the house of John Davies, a native of Montgomeryshire, one of the oldest missionaries upon the island, where we were kindly received and entertained.

Sixth Month 25th.—Rising by the break of day, and partaking of an early breakfast, we departed, as soon as the family devotion was over for Tairapu, the south-eastern extremity of the island. By the way we landed at Mairi Pehe and visited Samuel Henry and family; ho is commonly styled Captain Henry, from having been several years the commander of a vessel: he is the son of William Henry, the missionary at Tiarei. Here the whole process of making sugar was going forward, from pressing the juice out of the cane by rollers, and all the different stages that it passes through, until reduced to the granulated state fit for use. The sun was nigh setting when we reached the missionary station to which we were destined; but the beauty and various scenery of this part of the island served to enliven the last hour of a long day's exposure to the sun, and to quiet in some degree the sensations of hunger and weariness, by which we had long been assailed. The stupendous mountains, however steep and rugged, were clothed in the richest and fullest manner, with every kind of fruit and forest-tree which flourish in these tropical climates, where perpetual summer reigns; their luxuriance only now and then interrupted by falls of water hurrying down the steep declivities in beautiful cascades to the vales beneath: but the noise of these numerous cataracts is at once overpowered and lost in the roar of the mighty Pacific, whose waves incessantly thunder in endless succession upon the shores and reefs of Tahiti. The rattle of our oars on the ocean's glassy surface as we approached near the shore, soon drew forth the natives, with the missionary John Muggeridge Orsmond, who were ready to welcome and assist the strangers at their landing. We had before become acquainted with the wife of J. M. Orsmond at Bunaauia; this, together with the hearty reception now given us by her husband, produced feelings somewhat like those experienced on reaching a home: we were favoured to feel refreshed and well the next morning.

26th.—We went to look at the children who had assembled for school at sun-rising, with a considerable number of adults of both sexes. Every thing here looked clean and comfortable, as if under diligent care and superintendence, as did the different buildings, the whole being in a respectable state of repair. Being aware that the children would be gratified by notice being taken of them, I shook hands with every individual, both young and old, that was collected. While here, the people present exceedingly urged our staying with them over the next sabbath-day: but as my engagements were such as could not be altered, and would prevent my consistently complying with their request, I asked J. M. Orsmond to interpret my answer; and to tell them, that as the whole congregation was to meet me in the afternoon, I trusted that the Divine presence would be with us, and if so, we should be satisfied with favour, and filled with the heavenly blessing of the Lord. In returning from the school, we had to pass through a long train of provisions, which the natives had provided in readiness to present to us, and which, through the medium of J. M. Orsmond, we were informed were intended for our food and refreshment. Although this provision was as unnecessary as it was undesired, I felt sensible of the kindness and good-will of the people towards us, with which, at my request, they were made acquainted. The quantity of food thus furnished was enormous, sufficient probably to have sunk our boat, if it could have been taken into her. Besides large quantities of the mountain plantain, and a variety of other vegetables and fruits, there were several fowls; and I observed among them a black pig tethered. The native boat's crew, which had brought us from Papeete, fared sumptuously for two days on the occasion; and I believe the major part was consumed or carried off by them, as is customary and expected at such times.

At four o'clock, p.m., the people assembled in the meetinghouse; where I had full opportunity to clear my mind towards them. The district on this peninsula being quite distinct from those on the other, it was needful that my certificates should be read, as none of the people could have previously heard them. They were read accordingly, with ample explanation, by J. M. Orsmond, before I stood on my feet. The people were turned to the light of Christ Jesus in their own hearts. They were told that their being members of an outward and visible church, would not avail them in the great and awful day of account: that they must be members of the true gospel church, the church triumphant, whose names are written in heaven; and unless this was attained while here, it would be too late, for it cannot be done hereafter: there is no work nor device in the grave, etc. Showing them how the primitive believers, through the blood of sprinkling, that speaks better things than that of Abel, attained to it in their day; and that it is equally attainable at this day, through the purifying operations of the Holy Spirit. I urged and encouraged them to persevere in this great and important work, earnestly desiring that they might not rest satisfied with an empty profession; but that they might come into possession of the inestimable pearl, the pearl of great price, the truth as it is in Jesus. It was indeed a solid and solemn opportunity, and one of those which I afterwards learned left the people hungering, I trust, for heavenly bread; while to myself it was productive of that soul-enriching peace, which can only be purchased by sharing in the blessed Master's cup of sufferings, of which I had drank, and under which I had been heavily bowed down during the afternoon, before going to the meeting, and there also. And now how can I sufficiently acknowledge and declare the condescending mercy and loving-kindness of my gracious Lord God, who in a particular manner was pleased to warm the hearts of those dear people with his life-giving presence; which made it an occasion truly memorable, and caused many of them to rejoice and abound with thanksgiving to his praise and to his glory. The same evening the deacons of the church, Tetohi and Puna by name, came to J. M. Orsmond's house, and being seated with us, one of them produced a letter, written on behalf of the congregation at Tea-hu-poo; which, being directed to myself, I opened; it was found to contain the address that follows, as literally translated by Samuel Wilson.

'Tea-hu-poo, of June, 1835.

Dear Friends,

The ministers, with the Brethren and Sisters in London.

Peace be unto you, in the true God Jehovah, and in Jesus Christ his Son, who came into the world to save sinful men:—we indeed are sinful men. Here is Daniel Wheeler amongst us; and he has made known unto us all the good words of Jesus Christ. And comfort has grown in our hearts; and great pleasure has been to us from his words, concerning the words of Jesus the Messiah.

It was indeed very great pleasure in his saying to us, Jesus is the pearl of great price: it is a pearl good within and good without. And many have been the good words that he has spoken to us. Now indeed we know assuredly he has true love to the brethren and sisters in all places where the things of Jesus are held. In that love he has come amongst us: and indeed our love is grown towards him and his son, in their making known on their way the things of Jesus, and in their visit of love to all the brethren, and in inviting all to enter in to Jesus the Messiah.

Signed on behalf of the Church,

Puna.

At the breaking up of the meeting in the afternoon, I told J. M. Orsmond, that I felt so much love to these people, I thought I should see them again—when he proposed to meet me at the out-station on the other side of the peninsula next First day but one; where he said he would collect the whole of the people from this place, and from the two other stations. I could not speak decisively at the moment, though expectation was given that it might probably be so. Since this conversation I have recollected, that on leaving Tiarei last First day, we were told that the people from an out-station of that district had just arrived, in expectation that we should be again at the meeting in the afternoon. It seems right for me to go to the out-station on the other side of the peninsula, called Tautira; and I find, on inquiry, that the Tiarei outstation can be visited at the same time; but that it will require fine weather and a smooth sea to effect it. It must, however, be left for the present with Him, who knows the thoughts of all our hearts; before whom I desire to stand in humble resignation and willingness to go or to stay, as seems Him good. The two men who came with the letter before-mentioned, (Tetohi and Puna) remained with us until near midnight; and I think it may be said, that by the breaking of bread our spiritual eyes were opened to perceive, that the great Master was there in marvellous condescension and mercy to bless the opportunity. It was indeed a heavenly banquet: and some of us who had lain many days in the grave, were now, like Lazarus, permitted to sit at the table with their Lord. I was reminded of the passover, and was constrained to declare amongst them,—'This is the true supper—this is the sacrament indeed, as you call it:' it could not be denied, for the Lord's power was over all. One of those present observed more than once, 'This is what is so much lacking amongst us—spiritual religion: this is what is so much lacking.' [Daniel Wheeler then proceeds]—Hearken to the invitation of the Bridegroom of souls, held forth in the language of holy inspiration: “Eat, O! friends; drink, yes, drink abundantly, O! beloved.” Sweet is his voice, and his countenance comely. Let us hearken that so we may be favoured to hear it. Let us wait for it with our lamps trimmed, and our lights burning; with girded loins, like men that are waiting indeed for the coming of their Lord; for sweet is his voice, even the voice of Him, the same and no other, who said, “Behold I stand at the door and knock; if any man hear my voice, and open the door, I will come in to him, and will sup with him, and he with me.” Then let us hearken, so that we may hear; and be ready to open the doors of our hearts, that the King of Glory may come in. Blessed and happy are they that hear and obey; they share in the highest, greatest, and richest heavenly favour bestowed on earth, by the quickening Spirit of the Lord from heaven, upon poor, frail, mortal dust. These “behold the King in his beauty,” and cannot refrain from declaring to others, that sweet is His voice, and His countenance comely.

Sixth Month 27th.—Rose early, and after breakfast took leave of the family, and embarked quickly for Papara. We reached Mairi Pehe, (about forty miles,) before two o'clock, p.m.; Samuel Henry rode on horseback to the Mairi, while we pushed on in the boat, intending to meet together on the spot. This Mairi was, during the days of idolatry, considered the most sacred place upon the island: it is spoken of by Captain James Cook, who visited it when in its full splendour. At present it appears to be nothing more than a stupendous heap of stones, almost hidden with bushes and trees that have grown over it and the neighbourhood of it; where formerly human sacrifices were plentifully offered. Parting with Samuel Henry, we continued our course to Papara, and passed through the opening of the reef with a strong current, before the sun went down. At this place the boys were amusing themselves in the surf, by lying at full length on their backs upon boards, and letting the rolling, curling breakers whirl them precipitately down the liquid slope to the gulf below. Some of the boys best acquainted with this slippery sport, by watching the proper moment to launch forth, were hurled with great velocity to considerable distances, without being dislodged from their boards; while the unskilful would be impetuously rolled over by the curling wave, and for a time altogether hidden in the foam below. We were received with kindness by the ancient missionary John Davies, at whose house we passed the night.

Sixth Month 28th. (First day.)—At nine o'clock, a.m., the Tahitian worship commenced. John Davies had previously told me, that if I should have any thing to speak to the people, he himself would interpret for me. When the customary service was gone through, and he came down from his pulpit, I rose and stood near him. [When the attention of the people was attracted, and stillness prevailed, Daniel Wheeler communicated what was upon his mind; he adds,]—notwithstanding there was reason to apprehend that many would be able to collect but a small part of what was said, on account of the feeble state of the interpreter, yet it was so evident that the Divine presence and power reigned over all, that I had to appeal to the people as witnesses to the solemnizing influence with which we were favoured. I trust the Lord alone was exalted this day and magnified; and the people turned to their true teacher, Christ Jesus; whose name shall be great in every nation, from the rising of the sun to the going down of the same. What might be the feelings of others on this occasion, I am not aware; it was to myself a highly favoured, precious season, the sense and remembrance of which is relieving, and still abiding: and although some days have now passed away since this event took place, it yet raises in my heart a tribute of thanksgiving, and a song of praise to my great, and bountiful, and ever merciful Creator and Preserver.

One part of the return journey from Papara, was attended with considerable risk, by a violent current, occasioned by some alteration which had occurred in the wind, driving immense bodies of water from the ocean through the open parts of the reef, causing broken water in every direction; through the midst of which we were compelled to pass, surrounded by innumerable spires and stones of coral rock which presented themselves in every direction; and through the narrow winding intricacies of which, we were sometimes whirled in a frightful manner: we were however safely conducted through them all without any disaster; although the Tahitians were thrown into confusion, which added materially to the risk we were encountering, by their hastily rising from their seats.

We stayed a short time at the house of David Darling, and then proceeded with a fresh and favourable wind towards Papeete, where we were favoured to reach the Henry Freeling, about an hour after dark, and to find all well on board.

30th.—Yesterday employed on board most of the day. In the evening wrote late to bring up my Journal. Today still looking forward towards the Tautira journey; and I shall be thankful to feel clearness and strength from my heavenly Father, whether by staying or going.

[Literal translation, by Samuel Wilson of Point Venus, of a letter, received this day, from the Queen, in which she remits the port dues on the Henry Freeling.]

Tahiti, 30th of June, 1835.

I do away with the money for the anchoring of the vessel. This is the reason why I do away with it, because yours is a visit of love, and not a trading voyage. If it was a trading voyage, it would not be done away with: I would still demand the money for the anchoring: but because yours is a visit of love, I have not therefore demanded the money.

(Signed) Pomabe V.

Health to you and your son in your (two) voyaging.

Na Daniella Wira.

Chapter XXII.

Set Out for Tautira—A Native 'Feeding'—Meetings at Tautira—Visit to Hitea—Return to the Henry Freeling—Obstructions to the Progress of Religion—Visit to the Queen—Meeting for the White Residents on Board the Henry Freeling—Letters from Home—Distribution of Books.

1st of Seventh Month.—In the forenoon busily employed in preparing packages to send to the stations of Papara and Taiarapu, to make some amends for the trouble our late journey had occasioned. The eldest son of Tati, the principal chief at Papara, came on board to dinner. His behaviour throughout would have done credit to a people much farther advanced in civilization than the Tahitians. Before going away he was furnished with a razor, a pair of strong scissors, a pocket-knife, and a pen-knife for his father; and also with articles of the same description for himself, and a work-bag for the wives of both parties. Before he left us, George Pritchard came on board to bid us farewell, as the vessel in which he was about to sail was getting under weigh. He was going to visit the missions at the Leeward Islands, forming the Society group; intending afterwards to proceed to the Marquesas, to see the state of things there, and to bring back David Darling, who went there several months ago to establish the missionaries, Stalworthy and Rogerson, on those islands. Got on shore for exercise towards the cool of the day.

2nd.—Prepared ourselves, expecting that we should have to be in readiness to proceed on our way towards Tautira, either late this evening, or at a very early hour tomorrow morning, so that we might have a few hours to spare to contend with the wind, if it should prove too strongly opposed to us. A whaleboat and a crew of Tahitians were accordingly provided for our journey. After our interpreter Samuel Wilson came on board, we were soon convinced of the propriety of moving forward this afternoon, in order to make sure of the object before us, as much as lay in our power. With exertion we got off at half-past four o'clock, and were scarcely seated in the boat, when it was discovered, that the wind which had blown favourably all the day, was now changed against us. The men had a heavy pull up to Point Venus, (of late years called Matavai,) where we landed, and drank tea at Charles Wilson's. There was a little delay at the sea-side, while our men finished their vegetable meal; we then set forward again: but the wind continuing fresh against us, it was eleven o'clock at night before it was reported that we were abreast of the narrow entrance to Tairei; and the moon which had shone beautifully all the evening, was now sunk behind the island, just at a moment when most needed to light us through the difficult opening in the reef. But having witnessed beforetime the danger of missing the passage in the dark, and seeing the great utility of timely rousing the sleeping natives, I did not fail to urge this precaution being adopted, as soon as we began to steer shorewards. As we drew near the breakers, the crew shouted and yelled in true native character, until answered by one of the people on the shore, who was presently seen running with a lighted torch in his hand, and soon took up his station directly opposite the narrow pass through the reef. On nearing the coast, it was found that we were only a few yards to the eastward of it, and sufficiently distant to allow of the boat's head being turned in a fair direction, without touching the rock. A few surges hove us through this little gulf into smooth water; and the crew taking us upon their backs, soon placed their burden upon the sandy beach, beyond the reach of the agitated waters.

Upon arriving at the ancient missionary's dwelling, it was ascertained that the family were all asleep; and, however undesirable, there was no alternative but that of disturbing them, to afford us shelter for a few hours, as the boat's crew were too much exhausted, by having had so long to contend against both the wind and the swell of the sea, to proceed further without rest. William Henry himself soon gave us a hearty welcome, and allowed us to set out in the morning as early as we thought proper, without waiting for breakfast.

Seventh Month 3rd.—Rising before day, we departed without seeing any of the inmates of the house, and continued our course towards Tautira. As the morning advanced, the wind freshened against us, and before noon was so much increased, that it was concluded best to run in the boat at the first aperture that the coral clad shore should present for our relief: and just at the moment when the united strength of the men was scarcely able to impel her forward, we found ourselves opposite to a narrow passage, but sufficiently wide, with skilful management, to admit of our entering it with safety; and a native from the nearest hut placed himself as a beacon for our guide. On landing, the boat was immediately hauled up to secure her from the invasion of the breaking surf. From hence it seemed best to despatch a letter by a messenger to our friend J. M. Orsmond, at Tautira, to say that we had arrived at this point, and were only waiting for the force of the wind to lessen, when it was our intention to proceed, so as to reach the place of destination as early as might be, that evening; which would allow the whole of next day, (Seventh,) for the information to spread, in the hope that the meeting-house would be filled with people the next morning.

Having had but little to refresh us since leaving Point Venus the preceding evening, two o'clock the next afternoon was rather a late breakfast hour; the resident natives had, however, lost no time in preparing some food for us. After our arrival, they killed and roasted whole a good sized pig upon hot stones, covered over with leaves and then wood ashes, with bread-fruit, tarro, and the mountain plantain. When this 'feeding,' as they term it, was ready, and the floor covered over to a considerable extent with the large leaves of the purau-tree, it was presented to us in a formal manner, with a bundle of the island cloth, made from the beaten bark of the bread-fruit-tree, according to the custom of the country. The company then sat down upon the floor, consisting of Samuel Wilson, Charles and myself; with the boat's crew close to us, but according to usage, forming a distinct party. We had a solemn pause before beginning to dine, and all remained still until this was over. One of our men, who had acted the part of cook, cut up the pig, using a knife with one hand, and holding the victim with the other: when the carver had separated the pig into a variety of shapeless lumps, he threw some of them to us, and the rest to his comrades, and the whole was pretty soon out of sight. The milk of fresh-pulled young cocoa-nuts furnished our drink; and salt-water, in calabashes, fresh from the Pacific to dip the food in, was used instead of salt: this we found to be an excellent substitute. When nearly ready to depart, about six yards of a piece of cotton handkerchiefs was given to the man who had charge of the premises during the absence of the owner. It may be said that we dined in public, as the place was pretty well crowded with lookers on, principally women and children.

We got nicely out of the creek, and the wind, now much lower, although still opposing, allowed us to proceed with less difficulty. The day was nearly closing when we reached Tautira, situate at almost the easternmost end of the island; it is a straggling village, about ten miles distant from Tea-hu-poo, where we had been the preceding week; the whole belonging to the district under J. M. Orsmond's care. On approaching the mouth of the river, this active missionary was discovered in waiting to welcome our arrival. He conducted us to the residence (when here) of the queen, at which place we remained during our stay in the neighbourhood. In a short time after reaching these premises our attention was awakened by the voice of a person speaking aloud, in as high a tone as could be well imagined. This man, we were told, was the queen's speaker, who was come in her name, that of the church, and of the whole of the inhabitants, to welcome us to Tautira. On going to him at the door, he delivered a sort of congratulatory address, which happily was soon over, as he spoke so loud as to make it painful to our ears. After partaking of some refreshment, in true Tahitian style, the deacons and some others of the congregation assembled in the room, and one of them read a portion of Scripture, and prayed at considerable length. When this was finished, a general conversation followed, principally on our coming to visit them, and of a serious nature. We retired to rest about nine o'clock; J. M. Orsmond upon a strong bench with a back to it, something like a sofa, Samuel Wilson upon a mat on the floor, and Charles and myself upon a mat spread over a raised frame, and supported by open work, made from the bark of a tree, which I thought an excellent bed. At this place I found my gimlets particularly useful in keeping my clothing a considerable height above the floor, by which they were not only out of the damp, but avoided the vermin, which were very annoying, and of various kinds. A house-lizard was caught upon the wall in the course of the evening; the house had been built several years, but had never had doors, so that dogs, rats, etc., had free access to any part of it. It was however to myself a peaceful and comfortable asylum.

Next morning, the 4th, we visited the principal part of the village, after having been presented with an ample feeding in due form by its inhabitants, accompanied, as usual, by a bundle of island-made cloth, and many assurances of welcome. This feeding fell into the hands of our boat's crew. A quantity of vegetables were unconsumed when the place was left, and they took away with them at least seven fowls alive. In the afternoon the body of the congregation assembled to receive us, when my certificates were read, and three persons spoke in strong terms of approbation and thankfulness at our coming amongst them, and of the satisfaction that had been conveyed to their minds by the language contained in the certificates. I had to speak a few sentences to them in reference to the certificates, declaring that I had no other motive for visiting them, than that the fulness of the blessing of the gospel might be theirs; that some of them then present must have witnessed what the effect had been, as far as it had already been faithfully embraced; what then must be the result, when all the dreadful passions which pervade the human breast are brought under its benign and heavenly influence? nothing less than peace on earth, good will towards men: a prospect at which none of them could refrain from rejoicing, and uniting together in giving God the glory. On their being informed that my intention was to stay with them over the forenoon meeting tomorrow, and then endeavour to proceed to Hitea, they came forward, and in a pressing manner, desired us to stay over the Sabbath, and spend the whole day with them. This, however, I could not decide upon at the moment; and a reason being given, which made its probability doubtful, they were in measure prepared not to expect it. Some of the people seemed much disappointed at my not being willing to accept of small presents of shells, etc. I requested J. M. Orsmond to inform them, that I sought not theirs, but them; to bring their souls to God. I have taken care that the value of the feedings we have received, should be amply returned in nails, or other useful articles, as clothing, thimbles, slates, etc.

5th. (First day.)—It is a little remarkable, that today should be the opening of a newly erected meeting-house, of large dimensions, only finished yesterday. This building is erected upon the site of an ancient Marai, a place where preposterous scenes of idolatry and superstition had for ages been exhibited. At half-past eight o'clock the children of the school assembled to be catechized, and at nine o'clock the regular congregation gathered. The meeting was well attended; and Samuel Wilson performed the duties, which at other times devolve upon the resident missionary at each station. Towards the close of their meeting, I was strengthened to stand up, and to recite the query of our blessed Lord,—“Who is my mother? and who are my brethren?” which led on to the gracious answer given by Himself, after looking round upon His disciples; “Behold my mother and my brethren! for whosoever shall do the will of my Father which is in heaven, the same is my brother, and sister, and mother.”

The people near the place where I stood were very attentive, and full opportunity was afforded for me to clear my mind; and the everlasting blessed Truth was set over all. It had been previously fixed for us to depart for Hitea as soon as this meeting was ended, in order to reach that place in time for the afternoon gathering there; yet it did not seem as if I had fully done with Tautira. The morning had been rainy, with thunder, and the general appearance of the weather now became more threatening than before: the wind had shifted, and it was blowing strong from the point to which we wanted to go. Upon inquiry of those best acquainted with the distance from place to place, and the effect which the present strong wind and swell of the sea would have in retarding our progress, with the probability of our not being able to make much headway, in the heavy gusts which frequently broke forth, it appeared to be the general opinion, that it was not practicable for us to arrive in time for the afternoon meeting at Hitea. This, with the information that the natives never travel themselves in rainy weather, nor expect strangers to do so, determined me without hesitation to remain with the people of Tautira, and I had satisfaction in believing, that I should be in the right place; the tempestuous state of the weather, as the afternoon advanced, served to confirm the propriety of the measure adopted.

In the afternoon meeting, on standing up, I had to tell the people, that however contrary to my expectation, I was fully persuaded that my sitting amongst them again, was not only in the will of the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, but in his everlasting love to their immortal souls; in which my heart was greatly enlarged. Many solemn and incontrovertible truths were brought to my remembrance to speak before them, under a fresh and renewed influence of heavenly strength graciously vouchsafed; whereby I was enabled to sound an alarm, and to point out the repenting sinner's sure and never-failing friend and refuge, Christ Jesus, the Lord of life and glory: I humbly hope that the great and adorable name of the only true God, and our Saviour was exalted.

Just as the meeting was about to break up, the attention of the people was arrested by an individual asking me in English, whether I could speak encouragingly, and with confidence, as to the day not being far distant when the reign of the Messiah would be universal in the earth. I told him that I could speak with the fullest confidence of all the great and precious promises recorded in Holy Writ, connected with this important and interesting subject. As to the day being not far distant which he spoke of, I was one of those who believed, that it was already come in the hearts of all, who believed in the inward and spiritual appearance of the Lord Jesus by his Holy Spirit,—of those who loved Him, and obeyed His voice. The substance of what had passed was then imparted to the people at large. We then separated under a solemn feeling, better and more easily to be conceived than described. The weather cleared up in the evening; and a feeling pervaded, as if nothing had been lost by the delay, which it had apparently occasioned.

On the 6th, after a break-of-day breakfast of baked pork, the mountain plantain, and cocoa-nut milk, we took leave, and departed for Hitea with a favourable prospect. We had not rowed much more than an hour, when the trade-wind sprung up in our favour, and drove us along the coast so quickly, that by ten o'clock, a.m., we were abreast of the out-station about to be visited. On landing, we met with Etoti and Paofai, two brothers and principals amongst the island chiefs, then travelling towards Papara; with both of whom I had been acquainted from almost the first of our setting foot on Tahitian ground. We were informed that the people had been collected the preceding day, in expectation of our arrival; but that the weather had accounted for our absence. Having made two attempts to see these people, first at Tiarei, and now again on returning from Tautira, on each occasion prevented by the weather from seeing them assembled as proposed, I at first thought that I might venture to move forward towards the Bay of Papeete, where we left our vessel lying: but on being assured that if I would stay till next morning, a meeting would be held in due course at sun-rise, and that many people would attend, I found that I could do no less than make the sacrifice of another day, by remaining on the spot, however inconveniently circumstanced. The idea that I might venture to move on, and pass by these people, had been none other than a plausible suggestion of the grand enemy; but I was delivered out of his hand. This being agreed upon, we were shown to an empty house, like a large bird-cage in appearance; perhaps occasionally occupied, though but little trace of that was to be seen. It was built with open lattice-walls, and screens of cocoanut branches to keep out the wind. The floors were covered with withered grass, in a very dirty condition from long use, being laid upon loose earth, in a low and damp situation. There were latticed divisions which made four apartments; but not a door either within or without. The people soon brought us a supply of food, according to their custom of treating strangers; and in due time beds were prepared for us, consisting of frames of wood, supported on posts driven into the ground, and spread with clean mats.

We paid a visit to the resident chief, to whom I was no stranger, having seen him more than once on board the vessel. At his house a large 'feeding' was preparing, to which we were invited, but declined partaking of it. In the course of the afternoon we looked round the neighbourhood; and after the evening refreshment of ourselves and boat's crew, the governor and the elders or deacons of the church, with a native teacher, came to visit us. These were soon followed by a number of men, women, and children; and when the room in which we sat, was pretty well filled with guests seated on the floor, the adjoining room was occupied by others who were only separated from the rest by open lattice-work; through which however they could see and hear, and be heard, almost as well as if we had been together in the same room. On inquiring of the native teacher, through the medium of Samuel Wilson, our interested and highly interesting companion and interpreter, whether there was any indication that would encourage a hope that some few among the people were desirous to improve in those things that accompany life and salvation; he said, he thought, that there were instances where this was discernible, and that he himself was very desirous and anxious that this should be the case; that he laboured hard for it, greatly desiring to “work, while it is called today.” I said, where there is such a desire in the teacher, and a correspondent one in the object of his care, a happy result under the Divine blessing could scarcely fail to be produced,—or to this import. I told him, however, that although the text he had mentioned might in some degree be applicable to the work in which he was engaged, yet I did conceive it was more so, as regarded the great work of regeneration in the heart of man: that this great and important and indispensable work, could be done only while the light of the day of merciful visitation was extended; and if this unhappily were overlooked and neglected, a night of darkness would assuredly follow, in which no man can work. “If, therefore, the light that is in you be darkness, how great is that darkness.” That there was a day of visitation extended to every son and daughter of Adam, sufficiently long for them all to work out their own souls' salvation with fear and trembling; and it was also as certain, that this day might, from one cause or other, be overlooked and withstood, or suffered to pass away unimproved. That this was evident from the language of the compassionate Saviour, when he lamented and wept over the city of Jerusalem:—“If you had known, even you, at least in this your day, the things which belong unto your peace, but now they are hid from your eyes.” “How often would I have gathered your children together, as a hen does gather her brood under her wings, and you would not:”—which plainly shows, that her children might have been gathered; but, alas! they would not, because they knew not the day of their visitation;—their destruction was of themselves.

As we proceeded with this kind of conversation, the company more and more settled down into serious thoughtfulness. One person, however, seemed very desirous to understand what was my real object in coming to their island; several reasons were alleged, but they were evidently not comprehended or not satisfactory. The spirituality of the gospel dispensation was gradually brought before the view of their minds; and it was strikingly evident, that there was a fertile soil or good ground prepared by the ever-blessed husbandman, in the hearts of some present, for the reception of the sacred truths that were afterwards disclosed to their view. Some of them acknowledged that they had never seen things before in the same light, but at once yielded an assent from sensible conviction. The important distinction was explained to them, between the Word which was in the beginning with God and was God, and the Bible; a subject on which their ideas were confused, from having been accustomed to hear the Scriptures styled 'the word of God.' After alluding to the memorable conference between the Saviour of the world and the woman of Samaria, who, when told she had had five husbands, etc., left her water pot and went her way into the city, and said, “Come, see a man that told me all things that ever I did; is not this the Christ?”—I asked them, if they had not at seasons felt something within themselves, which brought to their remembrance sins and transgressions that had been long ago committed,—things which they would be glad to forget, much rather than remember with painful retrospect;—querying, whether they had not long been sensible of this, before they ever saw the face of a missionary, or heard his voice? On this some of them shook their heads, and answered in the most satisfactory manner, with unequivocal simplicity and sincerity,—yes, that they had, long enough ago;—proving a fact which I have never doubted, since the Lord Most High was pleased to reveal the Son of his love to my finite understanding, that the gospel has been preached in and unto every creature under heaven. I reminded them of the apostle's declaration to the Romans,—“That which may be known of God is manifest in them, for God has showed it unto them;”' and—“He has showed you, O! man, what is good.” This I told them was that gospel “which was preached to every creature which is under heaven,”—to every son and daughter of Adam. On their saying they had never heard of this before,—S. W. replied,—they had always been exhorted to pray for the Holy Spirit, to seek and they should find, etc.; but they said, 'never in this way.' Such a solemnity now spread over us as could not be mistaken, even had “the doors” been “shut;” for—“peace be unto you,” though not outwardly proclaimed, was known and felt to be amongst us, by some present. Under this precious, heavenly canopy, I told them,—now they might know for what I had come among them, in the love of the everlasting gospel;—that they might be witnesses for themselves of the blessings it conveys, and the glorious privilege to which it entitles, if faithfully embraced. Some of them could not forbear expressing their inward state, and their fear, from the uncertainty they were in, as to the future well-being of their immortal souls. It was indeed a season never to be forgotten; for it seemed as if some of their hearts were laid open by the Almighty Searcher, and a willingness wrought to confess their sins, and to call on the name of the Lord, through the powerful efficacy of redeeming love shed abroad therein, and working in them to will and to do of the Lord's good pleasure:—to the praise of the riches of his grace be it faithfully recorded, in characters which can never be defaced while memory holds her place.

At a late hour, we adjourned until sunrise next morning, the 7th of the Seventh month, when the people generally assembled in a commodious meeting-house. As this was a meeting held in regular course, the accustomed duties were performed by Samuel Wilson, who acted instead of their native teacher. My certificates were then read, which seemed to prepare the minds of the people for the solemn season, with which we were afterwards favoured. I had a fine open time amongst them, during which the path to the kingdom was set before them, wherein a wayfaring man, though a fool, cannot err: and the state of mind which must be attained to by all, before true spiritual worship can be performed, and accepted by Him, who is worshipped only in spirit and in truth,—was, I trust, declared in plainness. I had largely to treat on the all-sufficiency of the light, the grace, which has appeared to all men, bringing salvation to all; teaching all men, “that denying ungodliness and worldly lusts, they should live soberly, righteously, and godly in this present world,” and commending “them unto God and the word of his grace, which is able to build us up, and to give us an inheritance” amongst those that are already sanctified by faith that is in Christ Jesus. I sat down with a thankful and peaceful mind. Before we separated, one of the people stood up, and thanked me, in the name of the queen and of the church. I requested Samuel Wilson to say, that no thanks were due to me: I had done no more than that which was my duty to do, and was only an unprofitable servant. After taking some refreshment, we proceeded to Tiarei. Our stay here was limited, for fear of losing the wind, yet we did not like to pass by the mission-house altogether, whose inhabitants we might never see again. We had from hence a rapid passage, and were favoured to find all well and comfortable on board the Henry Freeling.

Seventh Month 9th.—Since returning from Hitea, my attention has been turned towards the white residents in this neighbourhood, and I have endeavoured to dwell under the prospect of collecting them together, with the crews of the different vessels now here, at eleven o'clock next First day.

11th.—After breakfast, went to inquire of Eliza Pritchard, (her husband having sailed for the Marquesas Islands,) whether there would be any meeting for the English tomorrow; for in the morning, matters had so far opened, that I found it best to tell my Charles, I did not see that I could do less than endeavour to meet the English residents tomorrow forenoon. But little information could, however, be obtained on the subject, until late in the evening; when a missionary from a distant station came on board to tell me, that he had given notice of a meeting to be held on his own account, but that he should be glad to turn it over to me. As he had appointed it himself, it seemed best to tell him that he must go on with it, but that I intended to be there; and if I should have any thing to offer, it would be only according to gospel order. Our captain took considerable pains, late in the evening, to spread the information, that all persons inclining to attend might have an opportunity of knowing there would be such a meeting held.

12th. (First day.)—Called at George Pritchard's house a little before the time appointed, to be in readiness, it being near the meeting-house. I met there with the missionary who had given notice last evening, who wished me (as he expressed it) to begin the service of the meeting. I was best satisfied to decline the offer, as he had personally given notice of it, and by those to whom he had spoken, it was certainly understood to be for himself: if it had been appointed for me, it could only begin in silent waiting upon God. It afterwards occurred to me, however, that at a proper time it would be safest for me, if found needful, to spread the subject before the meeting when collected together; and believing that I should have to speak to the people, I availed myself of an interval, after the reading of the 14th chapter of Luke, to step upon the base of the pulpit, and state,—that as this meeting was not specifically appointed on my account, it might be considered out of order to open my mouth in it; but as we might never have the opportunity of meeting together again, I had been made willing to attend it, and in the ability which might be given me to minister in it if called upon: that such a mode of procedure would still be only in accordance with the true order of the gospel: but, if any should consider it an intrusion, I hoped they would speak and object, and I believed I should be satisfied with having made this offer. No one spoke, until the missionary said, he believed there was not the least objection in the minds of any present. [In the course of the meeting Daniel Wheeler expressed what was upon his mind at considerable length. The people behaved in a solid manner, and a solemn covering prevailed.]

13th.—Employed on board most of the day. Omitted mentioning that last week a canoe from Tea-hu-poo, and another from Tautira, reached the ship: in both these canoes were persons with whom we had social and religious interaction at the places where they reside. Their coming afforded an opportunity to send clothing and slates for some of the most diligent children at the district schools in those parts; and nails suitable for general purposes, to the different congregations. As the dear people composing them had abundantly more than administered to my needs when amongst them, it was a relief to be enabled to return their kindness, and convince them that in my coming, I sought not theirs, but them. I do feel anxious, and I hope it is an allowable solicitude, that none may have it in their power to say, that we have in any degree been chargeable to them; and thus far I think there are none at whose houses we have been entertained, that have not in one way or other been remunerated.

There are so many aggravated circumstances which contribute to lessen the desire of the people for religion, that the present aspect of things here is truly discouraging; none of these seems to operate more powerfully to produce dislike and disgust, than the arbitrary laws that have been made to compel the people to attend the places of worship and the schools; the neglect of which has no less a penalty attached to it, than the forfeiture of their lands. So long as these things are suffered to exist, and the native authorities permit or wink at the landing of spirituous liquors from the English traders, from the colonies of New South Wales, and from America, (which are much more numerous than the former,) hopeless indeed will be every attempt to civilize, much more to christianize the natives of these islands; these are disadvantages which must ever impede the free course of the gospel.

15th.—This afternoon went up to Papara in one of our own boats, to take leave of Henry Nott. We found him alone, and in a very weak and feeble state. He has long been unable to attend the place of worship regularly, though near his own dwelling. On our return we called to take leave of the queen: we found her sitting on the step at the back-door, with several of her chiefs squatted round about her, one of whom had been reading to the others, until interrupted by our approach; the king was sitting on a wall, eating part of a cocoa-nut. For lack of an interpreter, I was unable to acknowledge the indulgence of the queen, in remitting the port charges on our vessel. Reached the Henry Freeling before dark. Soon after our return, the carpenter of the vessel was seized with violent inflammatory symptoms, which increased so rapidly, that a boat was despatched for Doctor Vaughan. One of our strongest seamen, has for some days been rendered totally unfit for duty by a similar attack, and the apprentice is nearly useless with an inflamed leg. Many persons on shore, both natives and foreigners, are in a weak state, occasioned, it is thought, by the coolness of the night air, while the sun by day emits a scorching heat. We have great cause to be thankful for the blessing of health so graciously bestowed upon us, while visiting the different stations on every part of the island, notwithstanding the great dampness of the lodging places which fell to our lot, and the variety of food, to which we were for the most part wholly unaccustomed; we had also been exposed to every sort of weather in an open boat, in heavy dews, at times for hours together. The distance travelled on these occasions exceeded three hundred miles; but for the most part, under the reefs of shelving coral, which skirt the island in many places in a wonderfully providential manner: where these do not extend, the swellings of the Pacific had to be encountered. The rapid eddying currents, in some places, rendered our situation perilous at times; but the Lord was nigh, sustaining us through all, and making our way prosperous, as already recorded in some of the most favourable interviews with the people, and, I humbly trust, to the exaltation of His own great and ever excellent name. Who would not fear Him? Who would not serve Him?

16th. (Fifth day.)—The fore part of the morning much unsettled, by the natives being more numerous on board than usual; but a large ship appearing in the offing, served to attract most of them away. This ship proved to be the Charles Carroll, Reuben Weeks, master; out twenty months from Rhode Island, in America. It was quite a relief to be permitted to sit down in silence this morning, although much was found still remaining to cause a painful struggle between flesh and spirit.

18th.—Yesterday, with the exception of taking our usual exercise on shore about sun-down, we were busily employed on board, amongst other things, in selecting copies of the Scriptures in the English, French, Spanish and Portuguese languages; also a large number of religious tracts, and some standard works and writings of Friends for Samuel Wilson. He leaves us next week, on a mission to the Samoas or Navigator's Islands. May the fear of man not be permitted to operate on his mind, so as to prevent his acting up to what he knows to be right; but may the fear of God more abundantly dwell in him, and prevail in him abidingly; and may the rich aboundings of His love in Christ Jesus be the comfort and strength of his heart, and his portion forever.

This morning, called on board the American ship Charles Carroll, for a short time. My mind has at times, both yesterday and today, been occupied with the prospect of holding another meeting with the white inhabitants residing in this neighbourhood, together with the crews of the vessels in the bay, and any other persons that understand English. On considering this subject, it seemed best to hold this meeting on board the Henry Freeling. It was late in the afternoon, before I ventured to disclose my prospect to my son Charles and Captain Keen, lest, instead of being found following my heavenly guide, I should be detected in having, though mistaken zeal, got before him, and missed the way.

Seventh Month 19th. (First day.)—Early in the morning, the deck of the Henry Freeling, with the assistance of some planks furnished from the Charles Carroll, and our own resources, was prepared with seats, in readiness for the intended meeting. At half-past ten o'clock, our boats and one from the American ship, were employed to convey the people on board from different parts of the shore, and soon after eleven, the meeting was comfortably settled. As there were a number of persons present who had never before attended a Friends' meeting, and were wholly unacquainted with the manner in which they are conducted, it seemed best, after we had sat for some time, to suggest the necessity of our endeavouring to restrain all wandering thoughts and imaginations, that we might be sensible of the Lord's life-giving presence, if peradventure we should be favoured therewith; and also be the better prepared to receive any thing He might please to give for expression, for our edification and refreshment,—or words to this import. A covering of solemnity now drew over the assembly, and continued in a precious manner; under which I was strengthened and raised up to speak of the ways of the Lord amongst them; repeating his expressions to the disciples, which so beautifully illustrate the immediate connexion between Himself and the church, under the similitude of the vine and its branches.—“I am the vine, you are the branches; he that abides in me, and I in him, the same brings forth much fruit: for without me you can do nothing.” And if we stand in need of help to wade through the common occurrences of human life, how much more needful then is the assistance of his Holy Spirit, when thus assembled together for the professed purpose of worshipping that God, who “is a Spirit,” and must be worshipped “in spirit and in truth.” After this, I had to speak of the excellency and efficacy of silent waiting upon Almighty God, in order to be qualified for the right performance of this spiritual worship; that mankind might be turned to the only true teacher of His people, Christ Jesus, without whom we can do nothing, but all things, by and through the strengthening influence of his Holy Spirit:—contrasting the worship under the law, with that under the present glorious gospel dispensation, unlimited as to time and place; but which can never be acceptably performed, while we continue in sin and transgression,—because it must be offered in the beauty of holiness, and in newness of life, through the blessed aid of the Holy Spirit, in spirit and in truth. I had strongly to press the necessity of every individual's turning inward, and of diligently seeking an acquaintance with the manifestation of the Holy Spirit, a measure of which is mercifully bestowed upon every son and daughter of the human race; and which, if sought unto, would set their sins in order before them, in love and mercy, that they might repent and be saved from them. Appealing to them, whether they had not been sensible of the strivings of this blessed Spirit, when sin had been committed: at the same time declaring, that it might be withstood and rebelled against, until it ceased to strive; and they themselves be suffered to go on, adding sin to sin, without feeling its reproofs and checks. If this light (of Christ) in you be darkness, how great is that darkness! Thus would the day of their visitation be passed over, and they know it not; and this light, if once withdrawn and extinguished in Divine displeasure, could never be rekindled, although before they might often have been gathered, like Jerusalem of old. The heads above quoted may suffice to show the substance of what I had to express amongst them, though but a small part of the whole. The Lord has been pleased to favour us with many blessed meetings; but this for solemnity and stillness excelled.—“Blessed be the Lord God, the God of Israel, who only does wondrous things; and blessed be His glorious name forever: and let the whole earth be filled with His glory. Amen, and Amen.”

Our two sick men continue in a precarious state; their absence from duty seems to protract our stay here: but I believe it is in the Divine will. Though sensible of almost daily increasing infirmities, arising from the decay of nature, yet I am mercifully supported in humble resignation to whatever may yet be in reserve for me; being fully persuaded and taught to confide in the all-sufficiency of that Almighty power, that can, at His pleasure, help me to run through a troop of difficulties and besetments, and to leap over a wall of opposition and unbelief. And as I believe it to be so, why should I not say, in the language of the apostle, “I can do all things through Christ which strengthens me.”

Seventh Month 20th.—Began to prepare the vessel for sea, in the hope that our two invalids will soon be restored to health, though at present extremely weak.

21st.—Received a packet of letters from London, which had been left at the island of Eimeo by the Ulitea, on her way from Sydney to Raiatea. Our joy may be more easily conceived than described, on finding an uninterrupted series of favourable accounts from home, as well as, in the general, from others whom we also dearly love: they did not fail to raise in my heart a tribute of thankfulness and gratitude to the great Preserver of men, our Almighty and merciful Benefactor.

23rd.—By the mission, which is nearly ready to proceed to the Navigator's Islands or Samoas, an eligible opportunity is afforded, for an extensive circulation of the sacred writings, and other books of a religious nature. We have accordingly furnished a supply of the Scriptures in the English, French, Spanish, and Portuguese languages. As many white people and Europeans are known to be mingled amongst the inhabitants of this extensive group of islands; a large quantity of Friends' tracts, and of those from the Tract Society, were also selected for distribution through this channel.

24th.—This forenoon the Harmony sailed for the Sandwich Islands. In this vessel, the mail brought from Svdney by the Henry Freeling, was duly forwarded. It would have been better for the people of Tahiti, if she had never entered the bay, having been a fruitful source of wickedness, from having landed a considerable quantity of rum; although spirits are strictly prohibited by the present laws of that island. If all persons who contribute to the destruction of their fellow-creatures, by this or any other evil practice, were publicly stigmatized as the agents of Satan, and at all times shunned by virtuous characters, as unworthy of being noticed while persisting therein, it might, I think, be a means of compelling some of them to desist and to be ashamed of their conduct, and deter them from further adding sin to sin, in causing others to sin by their means. The Baiatea, a vessel engaged to convey the mission to the Samoas, sailed soon after noon for Eimeo.

In the departure of Samuel Wilson for the Samoas, we have lost a most willing, competent, and faithful interpreter: but as he was provided for us in a manner altogether unexpected and unlooked-for, we may safely trust that we shall be cared for in this respect, while amongst the islands of the Society group, which we have yet to visit.

25th.—At the close of the public meeting on board the Henry Freeling, last First day morning, Reuben Weeks, the master of the Charles Carroll, expressed a desire that a meeting might be held on board his own vessel, when all the crew would be collected together: of this I was afterwards informed. This did not escape my recollection, and my attention was frequently turned to it in the course of the past week, though until this morning I did not mention it; when I did not see how I should stand acquitted, without availing myself of the offered opportunity, and to embrace it. Having mentioned the subject after breakfast to our captain and my Charles, I wished to ascertain whether if the meeting should be held on board the American ship tomorrow forenoon, it would be attended by the whole of the crew. There appearing no doubt on this head, I felt willing that Captain Keen should inform Reuben Weeks, that I had no objection to the meeting being held on board the Charles Carroll, provided the whole crew, without any compulsory measures being adopted, should be found willing to attend it; but that they should be left at their liberty to choose for themselves in this matter. It is a regular custom, on board whaling-ships, when lying there, to allow one-half of the seamen to be on shore daily for exercise; and therefore I am desirous that all who may attend our meeting should do it of their own accord;—it was known that only one-half of the ship's company attended our meeting last First day, the other half having claimed the privilege of their liberty. As this doubt was removed to my satisfaction, the meeting was appointed to be held at eleven o'clock tomorrow morning. Care was taken that this intention should be spread to all the vessels in the bay, and on the shore also. At noon, Reuben Weeks came on board to say, that William Henry, the missionary from Tiarei, (now here on account of sickness in his family,) had given notice that service for the English would be performed by him tomorrow, at their chapel on shore, at eleven o'clock. I did not see it my place to flinch from the arrangement which had been made as to our meeting, more especially as no invitation had been extended from the shore to the crews of the shipping. In the evening, I called upon William Henry, who having heard of our intended meeting, at once said that he should countermand the notice he had given, and would come himself to our meeting; not doubting but his hearers would be very willing to join him in so doing.

27th.—Yesterday morning, we repaired on board the Charles Carroll, in time to attend the meeting appointed. About fifty persons were assembled on the occasion, and the Lord was graciously pleased to give us a precious season together, and to magnify His ever great and adorable name. With those that attended from the shore, were the missionary and his wife from Rarotonga, Eliza the wife of George Pritchard, and William Henry of Tiarei.

After the meeting had sat a considerable time in silence, it was with me to make a few remarks, to wean the expectation of the people from words, and to prepare them for a longer time of silence, if that should be permitted. I had to tell them, that if I were to read to them, or to speak to them in my own strength, it would only be an act between one man and others; but that worship, for which very solemn purpose we were met together, could only be performed between man and his Almighty Creator, who is a Spirit, and must be worshipped in spirit and in truth, with our spirits, through the Spirit of his dear Son. A precious covering of solemnity now spread over us, under the feeling of which we continued until the time was fully come for clearing my mind amongst them, and declaring the mercy, loving-kindness, compassion, and faithfulness of my God; who wills not the death of a sinner, but rather that all should return, repent, and live forever. The means were amply provided by His sending His only-begotten Son into the world, that whosoever believes on him should not perish, but have everlasting life; who came not to kill or destroy,—He came, that we might have life; and that we might have it more abundantly,—declaring himself to be “the Way, and the Truth, and the Life:” He continues to be so to all such as not only believe in His outward appearance on earth, and in His sufferings, death and resurrection, but in his inward and spiritual appearance also in their hearts, and in the operation of his Holy Spirit there,—even that of burning and fuel of fire, to the consuming of the chaffy and transgressing nature therein; and if waited for, submitted unto, and abode under, this would prepare us for an inheritance incorruptible and undefiled, in the kingdom of Christ Jesus, that shall never have an end. I had largely to treat on the subject of Divine worship, and to point out the difference between that under the Mosaic dispensation, and that under the gospel: that, with the Jews under the former, was outward, ceremonial, and superficial; but under the latter, it was altogether inward, in the inner temple of the heart,—simple, but spiritual and substantial, in spirit and in truth. I had to declare the beauty, purity, and spirituality of the true gospel church, of which none are members, but the ransomed and redeemed of the Lord; who have passed through the great work of regeneration, and have been ransomed by the blood of Jesus:—with much more of warning, and exhortation, and encouragement, as ability and utterance were graciously afforded.

After I sat down, my heart was filled with humble gratitude; and a tribute of thanksgiving and praise was raised to the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, who had thus graciously condescended to make Himself known amongst us, what if I say, by the breaking of the bread of life: under a sense of which, I had publicly to acknowledge the same, and that the Lord should have the glory duo unto His holy name. The meeting held longer than usual; but the weight and solemnity so strikingly apparent, (as afterwards openly acknowledged,) remained to the last undissipated and undiminished. What, indeed, is man, or the son of man, that the Lord Most High is thus mindful of him,—that He thus visits him.

28th.—I may mention, for the encouragement of others, who at a future day may have to follow in a track similar to this, in which it is my highly-favoured and happy lot to tread, that previously to attending the meeting just alluded to, I had felt very poor, and empty, and disqualified: although without any particular feeling of discouragement as to the result. Wheu the time came for me to stand up, although weakness and fear were my wholesome companions; yet the further I proceeded, the more I was strengthened and furnished for the work before me, and was even to the end unexhausted. The remainder of the day, and through the night-watches, my peace flowed undisturbed and uninterrupted, as the stream of a mighty river; and a song of praise filled my heart: for I was indeed made joyful in the house of prayer, as on the mountain of the Lord;—to the glory of the riches of His grace be it spoken.

Chapter XXIII.

Visit from Missionaries—Baron de Thierry—Meeting in the Chapel—Sail For Eimeo—Letters from Home—Arrive at Eimeo School—Native Meeting.

Seventh Month 29th.—This day arrived the Frances of New Bedford, John Briggs master, whose vessel rode by our side, fourteen months ago, when at Rio de Janeiro: it is like meeting with an old acquaintance, as we were known to each other at that time. The chief Paofai came on board this morning; he stayed breakfast, and our reading. He was desirous to buy cloth, and to possess one of our iron boxes; neither of which could be spared to him. In the afternoon, Charles Pittman the missionary from Rarotonga, came on board. Our two invalids have been reported in a convalescent state.

30th. (Fifth day.)—In the forenoon, Charles and myself sat down in the usual way, but under a renewed sense of dryness and barrenness; which perhaps was the food most convenient for us, to keep the creaturely part in subjection. Charles and Elizabeth Pittman, Eliza the wife of George Pritchard, and Mary Darling, paid us a visit. The impaired state of the health of Charles Pittman has compelled him to quit his station at Rarotonga for the present, being no longer able to attend to the duties devolving upon him. His wife is also far from well. They have resided about ten years upon the island, where their united labour has been eminently crowned with success. The circumstance of there being no harbour for shipping, except for vessels of very small tonnage, and that insecure, although the means of subjecting them to many privations, is a great blessing to the people of that island; because they are thereby preserved from the contaminating example and effects, which the sailors invariably introduce wherever they go; and to this may, in great measure, be attributed the success of Charles and Elizabeth Pittman's endeavours: at the same time, it is only just to say, they are a truly devoted couple, and well qualified by example as well as precept, to fill the station they have occupied. They hope to return to the island in a few months; and being desirous that the natives might be furnished with cotton dresses, for lack of which they evidently suffer much in their winter seasons, it seemed a good opportunity afforded for me to furnish them with a stock of knitting-needles, as cotton grows spontaneously and plentifully upon the island: this was accordingly done, together with a knitted worsted vest, as a pattern to begin the work with. They need only to commence the work, and their needs will soon be supplied; industry would also be promoted, of a kind not too fatiguing, and which they are capable of sustaining: hard labour cannot be borne in this climate, and I think the ample supply of food provided for them by a bounteous Creator, plainly indicates it was never intended or required.

31st.—This morning arrived the barque Active from Panama. Wishing to ascertain whether she had picked up any letters for us on the road, and other particulars respecting her, Captain Keen went on board to make these inquiries; he soon returned, bringing with him Charles, Baron de Thierry, as he styled himself, who with his wife, five children, and servants, had arrived in this vessel, which had been chartered by him at Panama. The baron's object in coming with our captain, was to inform me, that he was going out to New Zealand, exactly as our predecessor William Penn, went to establish the government of Pennsylvania; but I found, on investigating his views, that he was a perfect stranger to the principles which actuated William Penn in his government of that colony: as he was taking with him a military force, with arms, ammunition, etc., and a Polish major, (Edward Fergus, formerly employed in the staff of Russia, and at Petersburg, with whom we soon became acquainted,) to organize these troops in New Zealand, and direct their operations as needful. I told the baron that I could enter into his plans, just so far as they went upon gospel principles, and no further; informing him that no weapon more formidable than a constable's staff, was made use of for more than sixty years, for the support of the government of Pennsylvania, or while the peaceable principles of William Penn and his friends were suffered to prevail.

Eighth Month 1st.—Today, I did not feel as if I dared omit endeavouring to hold another meeting on board the Charles Carroll tomorrow, if that ship's deck could be again procured: I did not mention this until the afternoon, wishing to try the fleece both wet and dry. On a request being made to Reuben Weeks, the master of the said ship, for the use of her deck, it was immediately granted, and the crews of the different ships in the bay invited to attend the meeting. In the evening the invitation was extended to the shore.

2nd. (First day.)—At half-past ten o'clock, a.m., a warning-flag was hoisted on board the Charles Carroll: and about eleven o'clock the meeting was completely gathered. The number of sailors who attended was considerably increased by those from the newly arrived vessels. Charles Pittman, Mary Darling, and Eliza Pritchard, attended from the shore, with Charles de Thierry, his wife, and the Pole, Edward Fergus. After the attention of the people had been arrested by the object of our meeting together being explained, a general silence prevailed. At length, I stood up with the words; “The wolf shall dwell with the lamb; the leopard shall lie down with the kid; and the calf and the young lion and the fatling together: and a little child shall lead them,” etc. After alluding to the fulfilment of this prophecy in the gospel dispensation, as shadowed forth by Isaiah, I had to tell them that these are the very days in which we live; every individual had a share in it, and a part to act in it, though of general application:—that the gospel was not a mere outward declaration of good things, but “the power of God unto salvation,” to all who believe, repent, and obey it; and that its privileges could only be attained through Christ: that the early promulgators of the Christian religion were constrained to turn all men to Christ. “We preach not ourselves, but Christ Jesus the Lord; and ourselves your servants for Jesus' sake,” was the apostle Paul's declaration to the primitive believers, on behalf of himself and fellow-labourers: but he himself had a more special and divinely authorized commission, communicated immediately by the voice of that Saviour, whom he had so long and cruelly persecuted, wherever His appearance could be found: it was stamped with a double seal, for a two-fold purpose, as a minister and a witness of those things which he had seen, and of things which were hereafter to be shown to him; in which his Lord would appear unto him, to open the eyes of mankind, to turn men from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God. That Christ was the Light, the true Light, that enlightens every man that comes into the world; unto whom all mankind must be turned, and must come, if they are saved, etc. etc. It was a highly favoured, solemn meeting, and owned by the great Master of assemblies; whose power reigned gloriously amongst us, causing thanksgiving and praise in many hearts.

7th.—Walked in the evening to George Bicknell's, and had an opportunity of seeing the master of the Olivia schooner of Boston, lately arrived from the Paumotu islands. He seemed in the last stage of consumption, was unwell when he left home, and has been exposed to great hardship amongst those islands. His complaint has been much increased and aggravated by having long to subsist on fish and cocoa-nuts. He appeared glad to see me; and after sitting awhile by the bedside, I began to advert to his appalling situation, winding gradually on as matter opened. On saying it was little matter how soon we leave this world of trouble, if we are but prepared for the event; he said, 'I am not prepared, and cannot prepare myself.' I told him I was even rejoiced to find he was thus sensible of his own inability and weakness, because it was a conscious feeling of the necessity of the Saviour's help. I endeavoured to turn his mind to the dear Redeemer; but he said, 'the time was too short to expect to accomplish the great work,' and spoke as if it had been too long deferred. I reminded him that the invitation was extended even as late as the eleventh hour; and then mentioned the thief upon the cross, with the words, “Today you shall be with me in Paradise.” He seemed a little encouraged before we parted. I was afraid of staying too long, and of causing too much excitement, but a prayer ascended in secret for him both then and since. When about to leave, he expressed a wish for me to come again, and I hope to comply with it. I was comforted in finding he had got into a place where he would lack nothing, and be well attended to. I consider it an act of true Christian benevolence in George Bicknell, with his large family, to take in, without solicitation, this poor, exhausted, sick stranger; and cheerfully to administer to all his needs, without any prospect of remuneration.

8th.—Busily employed on board, closing our letters for England, to be despatched this day by the Active, for Panama. Got some exercise on shore in the evening. It has occurred to me, since the last meeting held on board the Charles Carroll, that the chapel on shore would be the next place for me to be in; although I mentioned it to no one, desiring to see the way clearly open, before any steps were taken.

Charles Pittman came on board yesterday: and in the course of conversation said, that it had been thought whether I would not come on shore the next sabbath-day, to have a meeting; and that he himself was desirous that some arrangement should be made, in which he expressed a willingness to assist. I told him it was yet uncertain, but that I intended calling at George Pritchard's house in the evening. On arriving there, I found Charles Pittman under the verandah, talking to a sailor, who had belonged to the Charles Carroll, and had then come to have some conversation on the subject of religion. It appeared that this young man had been reached, at the last meeting held on board that ship, and was desirous of help and advice. He found it very hard work to stand against the strong current of evil, to which he was exposed on ship-board, amongst a rude and wicked company, who continually annoyed him in one way or other. He was encouraged to watchfulness, and to perseverance in resisting every temptation; and if faithful, he would doubtless overcome them all, through the strength of Him, who for our sakes “endured such contradiction of sinners against himself.”

While at George Pritchard's, I inquired whether any missionary was expected, or whether any meeting would be held there tomorrow, which was replied to in the negative. I said that I felt a little difficulty about their meeting-house, as it belonged to the people on shore, and they might be disappointed at not finding one of their own ministers there; and I could not answer, if I attended the meeting, but that it might be a silent one, which to some would be a disappointment; but Eliza Pritchard said, they know very well; I suppose she meant, the manner in which the meetings of Friends are usually held. Having believed it right for me to hold a meeting there, previously to leaving the ship, what had passed served only to show that the way was open before me; and going out, I said,—'Then I think we must venture to give notice to the shipping, that a meeting will be held at eleven o'clock tomorrow forenoon.' As we returned on board, some information of the intended meeting was given by ourselves, and our captain engaged at once to invite the crews of the shipping generally, and to spread the information more widely on the shore.

Eighth Month 9th. (First day.)—At the time appointed, repaired to the shore, landing at George Pritchard's, whose family with Charles Pittman and wife accompanied us to the meeting. The attendance was much larger than at any time before. The baron, his wife, and the Pole, appeared amongst others. We sat long in silence; when I stood up, with—“It was never said to the wrestling seed of Jacob, seek my face in vain;” “for the sighing of the needy now will I arise, says the Lord.” Let us remember the example of Jacob, who wrestled for the blessing until the break of day, although the angel said, “Let me go, for the day breaks;” but the patriarch refused to grant the request, saying, “I will not let you go, except you bless me.” The result of his faithful perseverance was, that his name should be no longer Jacob, but that he should be called Israel; for, said the angel, “as a prince you have struggled with God and with men and have prevailed.” After urging upon all present, the necessity of our wrestling for the blessing this morning, that so we might be numbered amongst the princes of Israel, and like him prevail, etc., with some further addition, I sat down. The meeting then settled down in quietness, and remained long under a solemn feeling; when I had again to stand up and declare the blessedness of those who trust in Mount Zion, the city which the Lord has founded, which can never be moved; whose children are joyful in their King; because poor in spirit, to whom the gospel was preached, and is still preached: these are filled with good things; but the rich and the full are sent empty away. It is the poor of the Lord's people—the poor in spirit, whose provision will ever be abundantly blessed. Yes, they shall be satisfied,—and no wonder, when made to partake of that bread which comes down from heaven,—whosoever eats thereof shall live forever; for this soul-sustaining bread is Christ, who said, “I am the bread of life: he that comes to me shall never hunger, and he that believes on me shall never thirst.” Thore is nothing in this perishing world to be desired, or worth hungering or thirsting after, by those who have tasted of this true and living bread that comes down from heaven. Who would not desire to be a citizen of that city which has foundations, whose maker and builder the Lord is?—this Zion, which he has founded for the poor of his people. There is no other way to accomplish this, but that of doing the will of God, and not our own, through Christ Jesus, by the help of his Holy Spirit in our hearts, etc. I was largely opened to declare many great and heavenly truths to these people for about an hour, under a weighty feeling of a power to myself irresistible; all seemed brought down and laid low under its dominion, and the pillars of my frail tabernacle were shaken. I had to rise a third time to say, that if words would avail any thing, I was willing to spend and be spent amongst them; for I had been poured out as water for their sake, etc.—turning their attention to the Word nigh in the heart and in the mouth, of which the apostle spoke;—commending them to God, and to the word of his grace, etc. Returned on board after the meeting. In the afternoon read portions of Scripture to our own crew, who had been on shore to the meeting in the morning.

14th.—Yesterday afternoon, Charles being too feeble to go on shore for exercise, I took with me a native boy, and went on shore. This boy was born at the Paumotu Islands, and had been very useful to us for several weeks, and ready on all occasions to plunge into the sea, or to bring down the cocoa-nut from its lofty tree; and never more delighted than when permitted to accompany us on excursions for exercise, or to search for shells among the coral reefs.

Eighth Month 27th.—For several days past but little has transpired to vary the customary routine of duties. As regards myself, I have not been able to discern any particular line of service called for at my hands; and hope to be preserved watching and waiting as at the posts of wisdom's gate. Vain, indeed, would be an attempt to move forward, while the cloud thus, as it were, rests upon the tabernacle. In the afternoon went to Taunoa to visit the American captain, who is not expecting to survive many days. Here is an affecting and mournful instance of the great business of life being neglected or little thought of, until brought upon the bed of death. The Olivia, of which vessel he is part owner, sailed yesterday, and I thought he would now have nothing left relating to worldly matters to harass him, which induced me to make the present visit. I humbly trust, yes, I pray, that this poor dear man may yet so bow in humble resignation to the name and power of Jesus, and from heart-felt conviction confess that He is Lord, to the glory of God the Father, as to obtain the salvation of his own soul. For, though he is now bowing, under heavy judgment, to this power, great is my desire, that he may yet bow to it under a sense of the Lord's everlasting mercy, and forgiveness; for mercy still covers the judgment seat, even to a hair's breadth: with God all things are possible to them that believe.

Ninth Month 10th.—I told the captain yesterday evening, that I did not see any thing to prevent our sailing this morning for Eimeo. At an early hour the pilot came on board, when the vessel was unmoored; and there being a light breeze off the land, the last anchor was weighed. We were towed out of the bay by a boat kindly sent by Captain Davies, of the ship Balance of Bristol, Rhode Island. Just as the anchor was weighed, a man came from the shore with a packet containing letters, the Yearly Meeting's Epistle, etc., from England, which had been brought by an English whaler, to the Marquesas Islands, from which George Pritchard had arrived in the night. We could not but admire how exactly we had been cared for, in being permitted to receive accounts from our beloved family at Petersburg, contained in four letters; which, though old dated, were truly acceptable, with letters also from some of our dear friends. Having discharged the pilot, cleared the reefs, and begun to'stretch away from the island, the delightful employment of reading our letters commenced. While sitting on deck, the vessel made a formidable pitch, which occasioned a loud and sudden crash, as in a moment. It was soon ascertained that our mizen-mast was gone by the board, and had fallen over the very centre of the stern. Not only the man at the helm escaped unhurt, but every other person on board; and nothing short of an Almighty, all-merciful, and all superintending Providence could possibly have screened and sheltered us from every harm. My Charles had been sitting for some time quite near the mast, but had removed just before from the place of danger. Our captain immediately represented the vessel as so crippled, that she would not stay, or tack, and wished to know whether I thought of proceeding, or of endeavouring to return to the bay of Papeete, which we had just left. I paused for a moment, and then signified that we might safely proceed, although at the time it was nearly calm, and a heavy tumbling sea heaving around us. In a few minutes, however, the regular trade-wind sprung up, with a fresh gale in our favour, which in a few hours drove us to the desired haven of Talloo; into which the Henry Freeling worked as well as could be desired, notwithstanding she had lost one of her wings; but it became dark before she reached the proper anchorage. The wreck of the mast, rigging, sails, etc., were all cleared away, and got on board, before the strength of the trade-wind set upon us, and before the sea had time to rise under it, which soon afterwards became unusually heavy. The great superiority of a small vessel over a large one was fairly proved today, as we were beating through a channel beset with coral reefs, in a masterly manner, our pilot frequently cried out 'Maitai, Maitai!' 'good,' 'good!' to denote his approbation; and would occasionally say, in tolerable English, 'She works well.' He told us, that one of the American ships now here, beat about for five days in the same place, and was towed in at last by six boats, when the wind died away. We just looked into the harbour, as we passed, where Cook had formerly anchored, but it is more exposed to the heavy seas, which some particular winds occasion at times on the coast.

11th.—Talloo Harbour, Island of Moorea, or Eimeo.—This morning sent on board the American ships, for assistance to repair the damage recently sustained in the loss of our mast. We were soon visited by the captains of those two vessels, who brought their carpenters along with them. It appeared that the dry rot, even with the deck, had been the cause of the accident. On examination, it was concluded best to make the same mast do again, which could be accomplished by making a tongue below the deck, and securing it with strong iron bands, which would only reduce its original height five feet. Though this reduction will not improve the look of the vessel, in other respects, it may be considered a decided advantage. In the afternoon we landed, and for the first time visited the school,—the residence of Alexander Simpson, his wife, and their little daughter. The children, about twenty-two in number, were at play upon the grass-plots in front of the house, which gave the place quite an air of English comfort:¹⁸ this ground is fenced in with strong stone walls. We did not purpose stopping long, not being acquainted with the safest landing places, nor sufficiently so with the road from Alexander Simpson's, to find our way back to the boat in the dark.

In one of our letters recently arrived from England, was found a copy of a short account drawn up at Shoosharry in Russia, by my beloved children, of that illness which deprived them of their sainted mother, intended to have a place in the Annual Monitor for 1835.¹⁹ The perusal of this document brought afresh to my recollection the days of distress and affliction, which my endeared family had to pass through in the loss of their precious parent, when already almost fatherless, from my having previously left home, to pursue the path of apprehended duty in the South Seas: a wound so deep, and but slightly healed,that it can never be forgotten when touched. But, I believe, that bitterness and anguish of soul is not offensive, when not accompanied with repining at the will and pleasure of my gracious and compassionate Lord; who when passing through the straits and difficulties of humanity, wept in love divine at the tomb of Lazarus. His compassions fail not; neither is the greatness of His faithfulness to a poor frail mortal one particle diminished; who, in the depth of affliction and anguish, still endeavours to breathe in humble resignation and sincerity, the language of “your will be done.”

12th.—This morning the natives began to visit our vessel, but only few in number. One man brought a hog, but seemed rather shy at first: taking but little notice of him soon brought him to reasonable terms. Having been paid for the hog, he went away; but he soon returned with bananas, guavas, ninitas, etc., in ample quantity, demanding for the whole, forty small sized clasp nails, which were given him with a little addition. When the heat of the sun lessened, we went on shore and drank tea at the school with all the children. When about to return on board, Alexander Simpson asked me if I would favour them with a few words tomorrow; meaning the sailors that might come on shore, the few white residents, and the school family. I said that I thought of being at the native meeting at nine o'clock, to which there was no objection; but he still urged my speaking to the English, after the native meeting was over. I told him I could not answer for that, even if there, as I had nothing, and was nothing; I said I intended to come in time for the native congregation, and then asked, if he would interpret for me, to which he at once assented. Thus my way is open and provided for upon this island, if it please my heavenly Father to qualify me for the work, and open my lips; that in the ability which He alone gives, I may show forth His praise, and cause the thanksgiving of many to redound to His glory: for truly without Him we can do nothing as it should be done.

13th. (First-day.)—Although we landed apparently in ample time, we found Alexander Simpson's house shut up, and the family gone to meeting; and when we reached the place of worship, the singing had already commenced. We remained at the door until this was finished, then went in and sat down on a form. When the Tahitian exercises were all gone through, Alexander Simpson began reading my certificates; when these were finished, I went and stood by his side, to be ready; and when all was gathered into stillness, alluding to what they had heard read, I said,—they were now aware that I had left all that was near and dear to me on earth, to visit them; that I had sailed over the trackless ocean, during many moons for this purpose, in order that I might be found standing in the counsel of that most holy will, which is ever excellent; and that the desire of my heart was, that the gospel might not be to them an empty sound, or a mere outward declaration of good things, but that they might believe, repent, and obey it; and that it might be to them indeed “the power of God unto salvation.” As I proceeded, I was strengthened as by “the mighty God of Jacob,” by the extension of that love which enlarges the heart, to declare to the people the unsearchable riches of Christ, and the necessity of their coming to the knowledge of Him in whom they believed, by the Holy Spirit: that nothing short of their being born again, not of corruptible seed, but of incorruptible, by this Word of God, which lives and abides forever, could make them members of His church, which is without spot, or wrinkle, or any such thing. That, unless they came to hear the voice of the true Shepherd, and know it for themselves, they could never be His sheep, nor be known of Him. “My sheep hear my voice,” said Christ:—“I know them, and they follow me; and I give unto them eternal life; and they shall never perish, neither shall any man pluck them out of my hand. My Father, which gave them me, is greater than all; and no man is able to pluck them out of my Father's hand;”—turning their attention more and more to the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, that great shepherd of the sheep, whose light shines in every heart; that so they might come to sit under His teaching, and know the voice of the only true teacher of His people, who speaks in righteousness, and is mighty to save His people from their sins, but never in them;—appealing to the islanders, if they had not heard his voice in their own hearts, reproving them when they had committed evil, etc. That they must be willing to hear it and obey it, and to bear the indignation of it for sin and for transgression; until their cause was pleaded, and judgment executed, and themselves brought forth to the light, the light of Christ Jesus,—“the true light which enlightens every man that comes into the world,” in the secret of the heart;—the Holy Spirit of Him that speaks in righteousness, mighty to save: that they might know Him experimentally to be the “Lamb of God that takes away the sin of the world,” from having witnessed their sins and transgressions to be washed white in his blood, and remembered no more, etc. etc.

The people were very attentive in the general; and although the house is large, and was more filled than usual by natives from distant parts of the island, and others from Tahiti, I felt as if I could penetrate its most distant crevices with comparative ease.²⁰ There might be twelve hundred persons present. A boat was waiting to convey us on board; but after having passed through the ceremony of shaking hands with a wholesale number, on retiring to the school, I did not feel altogether clear of the people; so concluded to send off the boat, and remained on shore to attend the afternoon meeting.

The meeting gathered again at three o'clock, and was well attended, though somewhat smaller than in the morning. An opportunity was afforded at this meeting for us to witness the ceremony of baptizing a new convert, who had applied for admittance into the church as a member. A child was also baptized, the offspring, it was said, of one believing parent, the mother being then present. When the proper moment seemed come, I placed myself by the side of Alexander Simpson; and when all was quiet, I began to inform the people, that a fear of not being clear of the blood of my fellow-creatures had induced me again to stand before them; but it was in that love, which would gather all mankind into the heavenly garner of rest and peace; testifying the endless duration of the Lord's mercy, and the unbounded extension of his love to all, by sending his only begotten Son into the world, that “whosoever believes in him should not perish, but have eternal life.” My mouth was again opened to declare largely amongst the people the truths of the gospel, and in a pressing manner to urge the necessity of the hearts of the parents being more and more turned to their children, in order to bring them up in the fear of the Lord; or else all the privileges and advantages which they had witnessed to result from the attempts to introduce Christianity amongst them, would in all probability be totally lost to their children, when their own heads were laid low. Without this care, things would soon be as bad as they had been formerly, when there was no place of safety nor of security upon the island; when every man's hand was against his brother, and the way of peace unknown. I had much to say to them of an arousing, encouraging, and warning nature and tendency, with the same undiminished strength as had been vouchsafed me in the morning,—to the comfort, peace, and relief of my own mind, and I trust, with humble thankfulness, to my Maker's praise.

Chapter XXIV.

Eimeo—Meetings with the Natives—A Marai—Return to the Henry Freeling—Native Meeting and with the Mission Families—Sail For Huahine—Prohibition of Spirits There—Social Meeting of the Authorities—Distribution of Tracts—Sail for Raiatea.

Talloo Harbour, Island of Eimeo, Ninth Month 18th, 1835.—Called upon Alexander Simpson to consult about going to the other side of the island, to Afareaitu, of late called Griffin's Town; but as he had a serious sore throat, it was not prudent for him to undertake the journey on the following day. I now perceived, that if I had not given up to attend the afternoon meeting at Papetoai last First day, when it opened upon my mind, that I must have waited a week longer for lack of an interpreter, on account of Alexander Simpson's present indisposition. Truly it may be said, that the present moment is all we have to trust to, or depend upon; the future may, to us, never come; and time, once past, can never be recalled. Then may we be diligently seeking to improve the present, with thankfulness for being strengthened to yield obedience to every pointing of duty.

19th.—Finding my attention turned to the children at the school, it seemed that tomorrow at eleven o'clock in the forenoon, would be a suitable time to propose for our meeting together, if no difficulty should appear. I accordingly mentioned to Alexander Simpson and wife, that if it would not interfere with any of their arrangements, I thought of paying a visit to the children tomorrow morning, at eleven o'clock. They at once expressed satisfaction with the proposal, and said it would be very acceptable. I said, 'Then we will sit down together, and see what will be done for us.'

20th. (First day.)—Landed in the morning, so as to have ample time to walk to the school, and afford an interval sufficiently long to allow us to cool before going into the meeting, the weather being extremely hot. When the time came we assembled, as proposed, the children and the family, at the school. I fully expected that we should sit down in silence before the Lord: but when all were seated, it was proposed that the children should read a chapter, and the first chapter of the epistle to the Romans was read accordingly. The children were then examined, by questions respecting the moral law, and the object of our Saviour's coming upon earth. After these were gone through, we were favoured to get into silence. Having sat for some time, I found my mind getting deeper and deeper under exercise, until the time came for me to rise, with the words, “We, through the Spirit, wait for the hope of righteousness by faith.” Sitting in silence may seem a little strange to those unaccustomed to the work; but it has been the practice of the religious Society of which I have the privilege of being a member, from its earliest rise, to wait upon the Lord for the influence of the Holy Spirit; to be taught by the great Teacher of his people, Christ Jesus, the minister of the sanctuary and of the true tabernacle, “which the Lord pitched and not man.” I had to tell them that there is no alteration in the Christian life; it is a continual warfare, but with the spiritual weapons of burning and fuel of fire, which, if patiently submitted to, would purify and prepare us for an incorruptible and never-fading inheritance. The universality of Divine grace was freely spoken of, and the necessity of watchfulness and prayer urged with earnestness, even unto “praying always, with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto with all perseverance.” The dear young people were tenderly invited to seek after that knowledge which is life eternal: to “commune with their own hearts and be still.” I wanted them to witness the gospel to be glad tidings of great joy to themselves, not a mere outward declaration of good things to come, but “the power of God unto salvation,” to every one of them. None could be insensible to the weight of solemnity which prevailed, and I had to acknowledge the condescending mercy of that Almighty power, which was pleased to own the work; and also to appeal to those present as witnesses to the circulation of that “life,” which is “the light of men.”

23rd.—With the exception of taking occasional exercise for the last three days, have been busily employed in preparing despatches for my beloved friends in England, information having been received that an English whaler, homeward bound, had arrived at Tahiti. On going on shore this evening, we found Alexander Simpson so much recruited, that it was concluded to set off tomorrow morning for the distant station of Afareaitu.

24tA.—Rose early, and left the vessel at half-past six o'clock, in the Henry Freeling's long-boat, with a hired crew of natives. We took in Alexander Simpson opposite the settlement, at seven o'clock, and immediately proceeded towards Afareaitu. Some parts of this passage are hazardous, owing to immense masses of coral lying near the surface of the water, upon which boats are not infrequently stove; but by keeping a good look-out, we were favoured to pass through the whole of these places, which extend several miles, without touching with much violence upon any of the rugged cones. About three p.m., we reached Afareaitu, and were kindly received and entertained by Thomas Blossom and his wife, the former originally came out of Yorkshire, and with some of his connexions I was acquainted in England. He came out in the Tuscan several years ago with Tyerman and Bennet, as an artisan belonging to the mission.

25th.—The bell for the sun-rise worship rung early, and when the people were collected, we went to the meeting. At a suitable opportunity my certificates were read by Alexander Simpson; after which I had a full opportunity to clear my mind amongst these people: and although I had had nearly a sleepless night, and felt in the morning sunk both in body and mind, below the usual level of depression in such cases, yet my Lord was to me in truth, strength in weakness, riches in poverty, and a present helper in the needful time; and I had largely to declare of his love, of his mercy, and of his Truth; and to show forth his salvation to the people, as it is wrought in the heart through faith in the operation of the Holy Spirit. I had also close things to say amongst them, and to show them the dreadful consequences of drawing down the Divine wrath, if their return for his love and mercy was only neglect, disobedience, and rebellion against his heavenly and righteous invitation, so largely extended towards them: and to point out the snare which had been laid by the great enemy, in the introduction of spirituous liquors amongst them, and how they had fallen under the temptation, from which, if they had obeyed the gospel, they would have been preserved.

Notwithstanding a messenger had been sent beforehand to invite the inhabitants of Matea, a distant village, said to be more populous than Afareaitu, yet I think it was reported that none had made their appearance at the meeting. On considering the subject, I thought that although they would not be at the trouble of coming to me, I should not fully discharge my duty without going to them. This circumstance seemed likely to bring upon us the sacrifice of another night's absence from Papetoai, which is by no means desirable on several accounts; yet I felt resigned to give up every selfish consideration, if I should only be found in the path of duty. It was at last concluded for us to proceed to Matea, about a league along the coast, but in a direction that our boat's crew did not approve, as they hoped we should have returned to Papetoai by a route several miles shorter, which may sometimes be taken with safety when the wind and weather are favourable. We got ready immediately, and set out, taking with us Thomas Blossom and wife, their little boy, and a daughter of George Bicknell's of Taunoa on the island of Tahiti, about ten years of age; they intending to walk home again in the cool of the evening.

Having reached Matea we landed, and soon met with the principal chief: some rather shuffling excuses were made on behalf of the people for not attending the meeting in the morning at Afareaitu; and upon being asked where the people were then, he first said, in the mountains, procuring food for the queen of Tahiti, who we knew had arrived at Papetoai: but when he found there was a disposition in us to go into the meeting-house and sit down, there being no seats in the house where we then were, he began to alter his tone. Whether he thought we intended to wait for the people, or from what other cause, I am not aware, unless he supposed the falsehood would afterwards be detected, but he then said, the people were all in their huts, and he would send round to them to meet us quickly. They assembled in as short a time as could be expected, and when well settled, my certificates were read by Alexander Simpson; who, when he had finished, and given ample information respecting me to the people, said, turning to me, 'If you have any thing to say to them, I am ready to interpret.' I drew towards him, and just stated that I hoped to have seen them in the morning at Afareaitu: but although this had not been the case, I was not willing to pass them by. I then told them, that I had brought nothing with me, and had neither store-house nor barn, but that whatever my great Master might be pleased to give me to speak, I hoped to do it faithfully amongst them. From this I went on step by step, until my heart was so enlarged, and my tongue loosed, that I declared the Truth amongst them for the space of an hour. I have since been comforted in believing, that although many slept at the time, yet there were many awake, unto whom my message belonged; and whose countenances bespoke that they were not only awake, but awakened to a sense (I humbly trust) of their situation;—that they had a soul to be saved, and that “no man can save his brother, or give to God a ransom for his soul.” When I sat down, I thought I was clear, but had to rise again in a while, and tell them, under its contriting influence, that I had felt the love of God since I sat down, to fill my heart; and that I never knew an instance, where a message had been sent to any people, but that the love of God was still extended towards them; adding, that I was not about to multiply words, but merely to express a desire that the Lord might direct their hearts into this love, and into the patient waiting for Christ.

The wind was against us, and the boat's crew very sulky at their disappointment in not going the shortest way back, as they wanted, supposing they should have had less work in rowing if they had taken that course. Presently the breeze died away, and I made signs to them that we should soon have a favourable wind, but one of them said, 'No,' in an unpleasant tone. In a short time, the breeze sprung up fair for the boat, when they became more cheerful, and before we had got many miles farther, they said, it was well for them to go with these strangers, for they had brought a fair wind with them. They then remembered, that we had a favourable wind the preceding day when going in the opposite direction, which is regularly calculated upon; but that we should have it fair again today was much more remarkable, because directly opposite the point from which the trade-winds almost uniformly blow. We were favoured to get through the most intricate and dangerous parts before it became quite dark, although we several times touched upon the reef: after landing Alexander Simpson at the settlement, we reached the vessel in safety, and I believe with thankful hearts, though from the lateness of the hour and darkness of the night, our return was not expected until the following morning.

On the passage from Papetoai to Afareaitu, we landed to examine the remains of the largest Marai (Orua) in the South Seas, and not so much dilapidated as many of them. Much of the hewn stone work is yet to be seen; and the upright stones are still remaining, placed in a position best adapted to accommodate the backs of the priests when praying, and from which they could witness the sacrifices of the wretched human victims.

Ninth Month 27th. (First day.)—This morning awoke early, and on endeavouring to ascertain what path I should have to move in, I found that the openings which had yesterday floated before the view of my mind, were now altogether out of sight; so concluded that I must remain on board the Henry Freeling. Just as we were about to assemble together in the forenoon, was seen on the shore: a boat was immediately dispatched for him, when it appeared that he was coming on board on purpose to sit with us. In the course of the time of our being together, my mind was brought under exercise, and I had a short and encouraging testimony to bear to the faithfulness of our gracious Lord; standing up with words to the following effect:—although our company is small, and in a remote corner of the globe, yet we have the word of a King for it, even the “King of saints,” that “where two or three are gathered together in his name, (in His power,) there He is in the midst of them.” But it is only such as are gathered under a sense of this constraining power and with sincerity of desire, who will be benefited. “The race is not to the swift, nor the battle to the strong.” “Not by might, nor by power, but by my Spirit, says the Lord of Hosts.” “Let not your heart be troubled, neither let it be afraid; you believe in God, believe also in me,”—was the language of the Saviour to his disciples formerly; and I trust, there are none among us but who believe in God and in his Son Jesus Christ. Then let us be willing to believe in the Holy Spirit of Christ Jesus. Let us believe his words—“It is expedient for you that I go away; for if I go not away, the Comforter will not come unto you: I will pray the Father, and He shall give you another Comforter, that he may abide with you forever,—even the Spirit of Truth; He will guide you into all truth.” There is nothing like an interest in the Master of the storm; if we have Him on board with us, though in the hinder part of the ship, asleep on a pillow, it is enough; for nothing then can harm us. In an earthly race, although many may run, but one obtains the prize, and that but a corruptible, perishing crown; but in the heavenly race it is not so, for all may run, and all may win a crown incorruptible, that will endure,—a prize immortal. “Then let us lay aside every weight, and the sin which does so easily beset us, and let us run with patience the race that is set before us; looking unto Jesus, the author and finisher of our faith: who for the joy that was set before Him, endured the cross, despising the shame, and is set down at the right hand of the throne of God;” where he ever lives to make intercession for those who are willing to come unto God by him. Even so run that you may obtain! While we continued in silence after I had sat down, I believed it required of me to attend the native place of worship at three o'clock in the afternoon.

Before two o'clock, Charles and myself landed, and reached the school just as the children were moving off in train towards the meeting. The school principally consists of the children and grand-children of the missionaries. We followed, previously telling Alexander Simpson, that if I should have any thing to say, when he came down from the pulpit, I would come and stand by his side. I found that I had a heavy burden to throw off; but my trust was in the Lord Jehovah, in whom alone is everlasting strength. I sat while they were proceeding with the regular service, in much conflict of mind; but as has often if not always been the case, casting a thought towards my dear brethren and sisters in England, as if they were in degree sensible of my situation: and I cannot help thinking that such is the precious unity in spirit of the faithful, that petitions are constantly ascending from one or other, as a lamp that burns and never goes out, to the throne of the Majesty on high, on behalf of a poor weak brother, separated as an outcast, almost as far from them as the east is from the west. For, however distant from each other the members of the mystical body may be placed, nothing can separate them from the love of God, as it is in Christ Jesus, their crucified, risen, and glorified Lord: and therefore, if one member suffer, all the members suffer; if one member be honoured, all the members rejoice in heavenly sympathy and joy, in which a stranger cannot intermeddle.

When Alexander Simpson came down from the pulpit, I went and stood by him; and shortly after he had prepared my way, by telling the people to be still, I said,—“Verily there is a reward for the righteous: Verily He is a God that judges in the earth.”—“Righteousness exalts a nation, but sin is a reproach to any people.”—“The work of righteousness shall be peace; and the effect of righteousness, quietness, and assurance forever.” 'I was not aware that my voice would be heard any more among you, but my Lord and Master has put it into my heart to stand before you once again. As what I speak must be in faithfulness before my God, so I must be honest, and deal plainly with you. I am come to warn you to flee from the wrath to come; and to show you a snare which the grand enemy, both to God and to man, that old serpent the devil, has prepared for you: he has tried it before, and found it to answer. It is that of throwing strong drink or spirituous liquors in your way. You have it in your power to resist the temptation; for no temptation will be permitted to assail us without a way being made for our escape. Then “draw nigh to God, and He will draw nigh to you: resist the devil and he will flee from you.” The scene of riot and confusion has already begun upon the sister island, Tahiti, and the poison will soon reach to this island: if you do not resist it, your destruction will be of yourselves. If those in authority do not know it, they ought to know it; and if the authorities do know it, and with those under them in power, are conniving at it or winking at it, or deriving emolument from it, most assuredly the Lord will punish these: He will visit for these things. “Shall I not visit for these things, shall not my soul be avenged on such a nation as this?” was the language of the Lord through his faithful prophet to a rebellious people formerly. Yes, He will sweep them from the face of the earth as with the besom of destruction. Nothing is so calculated to destroy the happiness of the people as this curse of the human race, and to aggravate that awful disease which is now rapidly depopulating these islands. If you do not set shoulder to shoulder in resisting this evil, what will you do when the wrath of the Lord is appearing? “He will laugh at your calamity, and mock when your fear comes;” and the denunciation of the prophet against a people that had revolted, and forsaken the Lord their God, will be applicable unto you: “Have you not procured this unto yourself, in that you have forsaken the Lord your God when he led you by the way? And now what have you to do in the way of Egypt,” in following the fashions and follies, and vanities of this world, and in drinking the dark and polluted “waters of Sihor,” etc.—“Your own wickedness shall correct you,—your backslidings shall reprove you: know therefore, and see, that it is an evil thing and bitter, that you have forsaken the Lord your God, and that my fear is not in you, says the Lord of Hosts.” Come, then, my beloved people, in the fear, and in the dread, and in the love, of the Lord Jehovah I warn you,—your only refuge is in Jesus: then turn inward, to his Holy Spirit in your hearts, to “Christ in you the hope of glory.” Submit yourselves to Him as little children, and He will leaven all in you into his own pure and heavenly nature, and prepare you for a kingdom “consisting not in food and drink, but in righteousness and peace, and joy in the Holy Spirit,” a kingdom into which it is declared that nothing that is unclean or impure, nothing that works an abomination, or that makes a lie, must ever enter: there, the wicked cease from troubling, there, the weary are at rest; there, the morning stars sing together; there, the sons of God shout an endless anthem; there, all is love and joy, and peace, and that for evermore.'

Several of the people went out when strong drink was mentioned, but the queen and her party, with all the principal authorities and judges from Tahiti, as well as those of this island, were present, and remained to the last. Alexander Simpson told the people that they must not consider me their enemy, for it was in pure love that I had spoken to them: and after he had put up a prayer on the occasion, he dismissed the assembly. Only one man and one woman ventured to shake hands with me. I told A. S. that I had placed him in an awkward situation, but the truth must be spoken: it was not a time to withhold it. He expressed his satisfaction at what had been done, and said it was much better for it to come from a stranger. I certainly did not know that so many of the authorities were present from Tahiti. I was aware that Pomare V. was in the neighbourhood; but though in the meeting, I did not see her, or know she was there. I was afterwards informed, that Paofai, one of the principal chiefs, was desirous to have spoken to me in the meeting by way of reply, but was deterred through fear of giving offence. When the meeting broke up he attempted to get to me, but could not succeed for the crowd of people. He told Alexander Simpson, my informant, that he wished, in reply to my testimony borne in the meeting, to have said, on behalf of the natives of these islands and himself, that “he hoped I would go to Britain, and beg the people to have mercy on them; and then go to America, and beg the people there also to have mercy on them; because it was these countries that sent the poison amongst them.” A fact not less true than lamentable.

Tenth Month 3rd, 1835.—Nothing suitable for recording, of a religious nature, has occurred since last First-day. In the course of the past week our stock of wood and water has been completed, but it is very difficult to procure a supply of vegetables, owing to Pomare and her numerous attendants remaining so long upon this island; and we are told they will not depart until they have consumed all the food in the neighbourhood.

8th.—From the 4th instant employed chiefly in preparing letters for England. In the forenoon today, Charles and myself sat down together as usual. Much oppressed with heat and heaviness in the forepart of our sitting. Towards the end more lively, and strengthened to maintain the watch, even unto prayer at times. Had close conversation with the heads of a family, where we afterwards drank tea.

10th.—My mind for the last two or three days has been looking towards fixing a time for sailing for Huahine, but nothing could be clearly discovered. While on shore yesterday, spent some time at the school. Today another opportunity with the children and family at that institution has come much before me, to take place tomorrow after the native meeting is over in the forenoon. After closing in with this prospect, the time appeared come for me to tell our captain, that if the deck of the vessel were all ready, and the spars secured in the course of the day, there would be no difficulty in being ready for sea on Second-day; which he readily admitted, and gave orders accordingly.

11th. (First-day.)—Much rain fell during the night, but after day-break the clouds began to disperse, and the day became fine as it advanced. This being the case, I felt liberty to convene the two families aforesaid. We proceeded to the shore in good time, expecting to have to wait for the breaking up of the native meeting; but we found, soon after landing, that the meeting was over, and Alexander Simpson had returned home. After sitting awhile, I told him, that we expected to leave the island tomorrow, and queried whether we could not sit down together once more, to which he readily assented. We then settled down into comfortable and silent waiting: at length the time came for me to stand up, though under a sense of much weakness. After the silence was broken into with a short remark, I told them there might not be many words, but the desire of my heart was, that we might be sensible of the power which was before words were, and would remain when words shall be no more: for words shall cease, and declarations come to an end; but the “word of our God shall stand forever.” I had to urge the necessity of seeking to know for ourselves the Divine Will, and then to do it: that this was the great business of life, etc. But knowledge only makes our condemnation greater, without obedience keeps pace with it: and truly this knowledge can never be attained in the noise and bustle and mixture of this world; nor while we are living in conformity therewith. Nor can we expect to be entrusted with such great knowledge as the will of God, while in a carnal, unrenewed state of mind,—according to the testimony of the apostle to the Romans, when beseeching his brethren, “by the mercies of God, to present their bodies a living sacrifice, holy, acceptable unto God,” as “their reasonable service.” “And be not conformed to this world,” said he, “but be transformed by the renewing of your mind, that you may prove what is that good, and acceptable, and perfect will of God.” I had to declare the blessed state of the inhabitants of Mount Zion, where every one appears before God: they go from strength to strength.—God is in the midst of her; she can never be moved:—He is known in her palaces for a refuge. The stream of gospel love flowed freely and largely to all present, and great was the solemnity that prevailed over us; such was the condescending mercy and loving-kindness of the Lord to his poor unworthy creatures. We then took leave of the whole, not expecting to visit them again; and we returned on board to dinner, under feelings of gratitude and thankfulness, and in peaceful serenity of mind, not being conscious myself of having any further service to attend to in this island.

12th.—The Henry Freeling being ready for sea, and the pilot coming off at an early hour, at five o'clock a.m. began to weigh the anchor, and at half-past six o'clock she was safely outside of the reef. Having discharged the pilot, we bore up and made sail, with a fine fresh trade-wind, for the island of Huahine. At four o'clock, p.m., this island was discovered, but as some part of the land is very high, and may be seen many miles distant, it was considered impossible to reach it before dark; on this account, it was judged most prudent to shorten our canvass, and haul to the wind in good time under easy sail during the darkness, with plenty of room to drift until the dawn of the morning. At day-break we edged away towards the island, and by keeping a good look-out from the mast-head, we were favoured to distinguish the outermost point of the projecting reef, upon which the white foam of the breakers served as a beacon for us to steer by with safety. We beat safely through the narrowest part of the channel, and about eleven o'clock on the 13th instant we anchored in Fare Harbour, and moored with a chain-hawser made fast to a cocoa-nut tree upon the shore, there being thirteen fathoms of water close in with the strand. Two American ships left this neighbourhood yesterday afternoon, one of them homeward bound: a sail had been seen by us the preceding evening before sun-down, probably the homeward bound vessel. The Zone, Captain Russel, only remained in the harbour.

Huahine.—Soon after anchoring in Fare Harbour, a well-dressed person came on board, as a constable, to prevent petty thefts and depredations being committed by the natives who came on board; but we did not consider such a person at all needful: and having never suffered any material inconvenience of the kind at the other islands, his attendance was declined; I thought it would look like distrust on our part, and might have an unpleasant, if not injurious, effect upon the people. In the afternoon, Charles Barff the missionary, came on board; he seemed very sociably inclined towards us, and disposed to render every assistance in his power, when I might feel inclined to see the people collected. He translated the queen of Tahiti's letter to two of the chiefs of the island of Huahine, then on board; who appeared glad at having an opportunity afforded to take off the port charges, saying, they should be sorry to have been worse thought of than the neighbouring islands. I told them it was a very trifling affair, but I thought it would not have been handsome treatment, if the option of choosing for themselves had not been afforded. At midnight there were tremendous gusts of wind from the mountains, with heavy showers of rain. We were informed, that a short time ago some of the principal persons who had given away to the temptation of strong drink, were the first to come forward to propose that its use should be entirely abolished; which eventually was unanimously agreed to by the inhabitants. The reason given for making this proposal, was the conviction, that it was taking away their lives. Captain Russel told us that there are no spirits to be found on shore. One part of his crew go daily for exercise, and return every evening in an orderly manner, which would not be the case if drink could be purchased. How I should rejoice to hear, that these islands are strengthened to stand firm against every thing of the kind being landed amongst them; which might easily be effected, by supplies being withheld from any vessel attempting to trade with it. Every Christian government ought to come forward for the protection of these defenceless islanders, from every cruel outrage of such vessels as might attempt to enforce by arms the exchange of supplies, for rum, muskets and gunpowder.

Tenth Month 18th. (First day.)—Last evening my certificates in the Polynesian language were handed to Charles Barff, to read at the native meeting this morning, if nothing should prevent my attendance. May the Lord be pleased to exalt his ever excellent name, and magnify his power amongst us, until the blessed Truth shall rise into dominion, and reign over all, to his glory. After an anxious, restless night, in which little sleep could be obtained, we arose early, and went on shore in good time, to look into the children's school before the meeting took place. All our sailors accompanied us, leaving only the Spanish cook and the captain, to take care of the Henry Freeling. The meeting was large; but the building would have accommodated a much larger assembly. The whole population is said to be, by a census lately taken, seventeen hundred and sixty persons, including every description; but I cannot suppose that many more than one thousand were present. I sat in much conflict of mind: it was a low time with me; and when my certificates were read, and Charles Barff came down from his pulpit, there seemed little before me to stand up with; but after the attention of the people was attracted, and a general stillness prevailed throughout the assembly, I expressed a desire that “grace, mercy and peace might be multiplied,” etc., upon all the inhabitants of this island; and then proceeded to declare, that for the sake of Christ and his gospel, I had been induced to leave all that is near and dear to me in this world, that “the fulness of its blessing” might be theirs;—desiring that they might not rest satisfied with making an empty profession of the religion of Jesus, but that they might come to the full possession of the Truth as it is in Him; that so they might be washed, sanctified, and justified by His power, in His name, and by the Spirit of our God: that Christ might dwell in their hearts by faith; that they, “being rooted and grounded in love, might be able to comprehend with all saints, what is the length, and breadth, and depth, and height;” and know for themselves, the “love of Christ, which passes knowledge, and be filled with all the fulness of God;” and not be members of an outward and visible church only, but of the new Jerusalem church—the church triumphant of the first-born: regenerated and “born again, not of corruptible seed, but of incorruptible, by the word of God, which lives and abides forever.” I had to point out the inward purity of heart that must be attained, and is attainable by all, through the precious blood of sprinkling, which cleanses from all sin; showing them, as ability was graciously afforded, the gradual and progressive work and nature of their being turned from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan to the power of God in their own hearts; earnestly appealing to them, if they had not at seasons witnessed the workings of this power, and the in-shinings of this light, that reproves for sin, and makes manifest every deed of darkness. When the meeting broke up, the people flocked round us to shake hands, with much apparent warmth and sincerity, of which we partook in a large degree. On parting from Charles Barff, I told him, that if I was there in the afternoon, I would endeavour to be in time. We returned on board immediately. In the afternoon, saw no other way than that of going again to the native meeting, and went early on shore for that purpose. Before going into the meeting, I mentioned to Charles Barff, that if I found any thing on my mind to say to the people, I intended to come and stand by him, at a suitable time. During part of the meeting, it seemed as if I should have something to communicate, but this prospect eventually closed up altogether. When the meeting was about breaking up, I suspected that Charles Barff was telling the people to stop, taking it for granted that I should have something to say, and catching his eye, I desired that he would not detain them on my account: he had then to tell them they might retire. I sat as a fool among them, though with a calm and peaceful mind. Some smiled; others said, 'poie,' i.e. 'it is over, there is no more.' I felt however, quite satisfied through all, and I trust that my apparent folly will be a subject long remembered and wondered at by many, and lead some to inquire into the cause.

22nd.—Early in the morning received a few lines from Charles Barff, accompanying a translated copy of a note, with the original, from Mauiui, our pilot through the reef, as follows:—

'As I know not the names of you two gentlemen, I address you thus generally.

'Dear Friends,—All peace to you after diving through the waves all the way to Tahiti. This is my little word, to which I desire you two to agree. Compassionate me, and come to my little dinner, about one or two of the day—a little friendly meeting. May you two be saved by Jehovah.

'Mauiui.'

An answer was returned to Charles Barff, that rather than disappoint the intended kindness of Mauiui, we purposed accepting the invitation.

It being Fifth day, we sat down together to wait upon the Lord. As regards myself, I thought I was sensible of something like a renewal of strength to struggle against the infirmities of the flesh, in drawing nigh to the everlasting fountain. About the time fixed, we repaired to Mauiui's house, and found the company assembled, consisting of the lawful queen of the island and her husband, the young queen Maihara, (who is to have full possession of the island next week,) and her husband, brother to the husband of Pomare the queen of Tahiti, also Mahine the governing chief and his wife, and the two chiefs next in rank upon the island and their wives, the king of Raiatea's eldest daughter, and several younger branches of the chief families. A plentiful supply of provisions was set before us, with a variety of vegetables, such as yams, plantains, sweet potatoes, bread-fruit, taro, etc.; cocoa-nut milk, sweetened lime-juice and water, with plain water, were the beverages made use of, though several flasks of wine were on the table. The company appeared upon the same level; no distinction of persons was visible: harmony and good will were the prevalent feelings throughout. The host and his wife waited upon their guests with much delight and unwearied attention. It was afterwards ascertained that this female had been brought up in the family of Charles Barff.

23rd.—The authorities of this island are in the practice of meeting together occasionally, and they usually solicit the company of such strangers as may be among them, taking care to fix the day for collecting, when these can attend. Several days ago we were informed that such a meeting was in contemplation, and today being agreed upon for holding it, Charles and myself were invited. The children were collected in the forenoon at the meeting-house, and afterwards formed no insignificant part of the guests at the dinner-tables. We dined out of doors, under the shade of large trees adjoining the queen's apartments. More than one thousand persons were present, including lookers-on, and the festival altogether was highly interesting. The company was exhorted by several of the principal speakers, and the dear children were again and again reminded of the privileges enjoyed by these islands in their day and generation. They were told, that in the days of superstition and idolatry many of them would have been offered as human sacrifices,—that some of the boys might have been permitted to live, if their parents were of high rank; but the girls were often sacrificed, and many of the boys thus preserved would be afterwards killed, being kept only for the purposes of war. But now look round, said one of these orators, at the comforts and blessings we enjoy; and how did they all come, but by the introduction of Christianity amongst us? It was all the goodness, and mercy, and love of Jehovah, in sending the gospel among us. Several of these speakers, on beginning, addressed themselves to us in terms of welcome and approbation. One said, alluding to myself, 'Your address to us last sabbath-day in the chapel astonished us: I thought you had got the bible in your head. We are happy to have a teacher come among us, then we have two teachers, one within and one without. You told us, that a mere outward profession of religion was nothing; that it would not benefit us. The Holy Spirit of the Messiah in the heart is what we must learn to be acquainted with, and that all the work is within ourselves,' etc. He said, 'We have formerly been a very wicked people; our island has been worse than any other island in these seas. Captain Cook said so: he found us so; we were the greatest thieves he met with. Captain Cook shot several of us; and if we had provoked him further, he would have shot more of us.²¹ But your visit to us is not like his; yours is in love to our souls,' etc. In this manner the time was occupied for the space of two hours, when a hymn was sung, and afterwards a short prayer made by one of the chiefs; when the company dispersed with as much order and quietness, as the breaking up of a Friends' meeting in England. I could have said on the spot, “It is good for us to be here,” for the love of the blessed Master flowed through my heart, and softened the creature, as into clay fit for the potter's use.

25th. (First day.)—For the last three days, at intervals, the prospect of attending the native meeting this morning has been heavy and humiliating; but there seemed no other way of clearing my mind, and of being at liberty to leave the island, than by standing resigned, and willing to be any thing or nothing; to go or to stay, according to the good pleasure of that holy will, in the counsel of which, I trust, it is my heart's desire to be found walking. Rose early to be in readiness, but for lack of the means of keeping to any fixed time on shore, we found on landing, that the children were coming away from school, although half-an-hour before the proper time for the meeting to gather. We remained outside until Charles Barff and his wife came. He asked, if I wished to have the order of things any way altered. I told him, no, but that if I found it needful, I should come and stand near him at a proper time. I sat under much exercise until near the conclusion, when I began to see my way sufficiently clear to encourage me to leave the seat, and go to the table; which Charles Barff perceiving, exhorted the people to stillness and attention. A solemn silence prevailed, until broken by my saying, “Blessed are they which have not seen, and yet have believed” in the only begotten Son of God;—enlarging on the love unutterable of our heavenly Father in sending his Son into the world, that “whosoever believes on him, should not perish but have eternal life.” I had largely to speak of the dear Redeemer's kingdom, and the necessity of every individual coming to the saving knowledge of it in his own heart; for it had been declared by the Saviour himself to be the thing above all others needful, and the righteousness thereof first to be sought for. He has also told us where it is to be found: the kingdom of God is within you: that all things needful should be added to those who obeyed this Divine command of—“seek first the kingdom of God and his righteousness.” I had to set before them the gracious dealings of the Almighty, and the blessings and privileges by which they are surrounded, and the return that is called for at their hands. Before sitting down, I had to speak in a close manner to the heads of families, respecting the rising generation; that their offspring might be placed in a capacity, to inherit the privileges and advantages which they themselves enjoy: being confident that if they, the parents, were so favoured as to be permitted to enter the kingdom of heaven, none among them could be found who would not desire to have their dear children there also:—therefore it was their bounden duty to lay these things to heart, etc. The meeting concluded in a solemn manner.

Tenth Month 2Qth.—The queen and her husband, with two of the principal chiefs, and several others, came to dinner; they remained until near five o'clock p.m., apparently well satisfied with their visit,—although to ourselves it seemed almost like a day lost; yet it is needful to bear and have patience with the childish behaviour of these people, however irksome it may be; it is more especially trying when much disposition to avarice is displayed.

27th.—Engaged on board until four o'clock, p.m.; many of the natives constantly with us, among them several young women and younger children of both sexes. They seem to enjoy themselves, and I like to see them so comfortable and unsuspecting, considering themselves quite safe on board. But I cannot help viewing their confidence with suspicion and fear, lest the treatment they meet with in our vessel, should induce them to venture on board of others at a future day, in the same unsuspecting and unprotected manner. In the afternoon, took exercise on shore, and ascended a considerable height up one of the mountains; Charles Barff having joined us, we accompanied him home to tea. In the course of the time we were together at his house, the circumstance of the females coming so freely on board the Henry Freeling was mentioned, and the fears that I entertained on their account; but he said, 'Yours is called the “Praying ship which is the reason of their venturing on board as they do.' However pleasant and satisfactory it is to know the reason why our decks are so crowded with this description of female visitors, yet we find to our great regret, that the practice of others in going off to the shipping is carried on to a greater extent than their missionary is aware of; although things in many respects are much better regulated at Huahine than in other places which we have visited. What can be expected, while these poor islanders are exposed to the notorious crews of the shipping, the vicious practices of whom cannot fail to subvert and banish every virtuous feeling; they are like a swarm of destructive locusts, that eat up every green thing wherever they come.

Although I was favoured with an open relieving season in testimony at the forenoon native meeting, on First day last, yet I did not feel myself at liberty to leave the island without attending one of their meetings, held on other days of the week. Although the number of persons who attend on those occasions, from various causes, is mostly very small; it appeared to me probable, that such as did get to them, might be considered the most valuable part of the community. Before leaving Charles Barff, I told him that I did not feel, as I had a little anticipated would be the case, at the conclusion of the meeting last First day morning; and that I believed it best for me to be at the meeting tomorrow afternoon. Both he and his wife gave me to understand that the company would be very slender; yet it did not appear right for me to hesitate on that account.

28th.—We repaired to the meeting-house about the time that the people assembled; and although but few were collected when we got in, yet the whole number at last was far more considerable than had been looked for or expected. I had to revive the holy promise to them “that feared the Lord;” that “spoke often one to another, and that thought upon his name.” “They shall be mine, says the Lord of Hosts, in that day when I make up my jewels; and I will spare them as a man spares his own son that serves him.” I expressed to the people my belief, that they who attend on all such occasions, are in general desirous to serve the Lord in their day and generation; and although the number may be few, I would not have them discouraged. “The righteous shall hold on his way; and he that has clean hands shall be stronger and stronger.” That much depended on their conduct and circumspect walking through life; as they would be looked up to by others, and therefore they had the greater need to take heed unto themselves. On returning to the vessel, I told Captain Keen that I knew of nothing to prevent our sailing for Raiatea on Sixth day, the 30th instant. The American ship, Commodore Rodgers, arrived today, after a passage of six weeks, from Oahu, one of the Sandwich Isles; a full ship with spermaceti oil, homeward bound; she had been out thirty months from New Bedford.

29th.—After dinner Charles Barff came on board: and towards five o'clock, p.m., we went with him to the shore, to take leave of his family, in the prospect of leaving them tomorrow. Charles Barff purposes not only accompanying us to Raiatea, but also to Tahaa and Bolabola: without this provision, our touching at any of the islands to leeward of this place would have been wholly in vain, there being no missionaries residing upon them. The wife and children of George Platt are now living at Raiatea, during his absence at the Samoas, or Navigator Islands, where he is gone with Samuel Wilson. The circumstance of Charles Barff going with us, I cannot but regard as a singular interposition of Divine Providence in our favour; as it came about without any intervention or contrivance on our part, but originated entirely with himself,—not a hint having been given nor a desire expressed that this might be the case: it is however in full accordance with the many great and marvellous works which our eyes have seen of Him, “who causes his wind to blow, and the waters flow.” A large parcel of religious tracts, and several of the writings of Friends, were selected this evening for Charles Barff, to be distributed as opportunities may offer; as the shipping in general are eager to receive every thing of the kind while on these long and tedious voyages.

Chapter XXV.

Raiatea—Native Meeting—A Place of Human Sacrifice—Bolabola—Desolating Effects of Intemperance— Meeting with the Natives—Meeting with the Rebel Chief and His Idolatrous Party—Wretchedness of the Inhabitants—Distribution of Clothing—Sail for the Sandwich Islands—Flint's Island—Oahu.

Tenth Month 30th.—At nine o'clock, a.m., Charles Barff having been summoned on board by our making the signal for a pilot, the Henry Freeling weighed and made sail from Fare Harbour. When clear of the reef, we 'hove to,' discharged the pilot, took in our boat, then bore up, and made all sail for Raiatea. Soon after one o'clock, p.m., we passed between the islands, which form the entrance to the roadstead; and at two o'clock anchored in eighteen fathoms water off Uturoa, the missionary establishment at the settlement on the north side of the island. Charles Barff went on shore to dinner, in order to announce our arrival, and be in readiness to attend a meeting which was to be held in due course that afternoon. As only a small portion of the people would be there, it was concluded best for me not to be present, so that the reading my certificates might not take place until the whole congregation was assembled, the day after tomorrow, First day. Towards evening we landed, and went to the mission-house, where we were kindly received and entertained by Judith Platt in the absence of her husband: she had a son and daughter at home with her, and her eldest son was expected from Bolabola. A considerable number of the natives, with Tamatoa the king, or chief of the chiefs, with some of the governors of the island, soon made their appearance. All the seats in the room, which was large, were occupied, and many of the guests were seated on the floor: they came to greet us on our arrival, and bid us welcome; at the same time it served as a plausible pretext for some to gratify their curiosity, and to scrutinize the strangers. We were, however, gratified ourselves, to find that many of them seemed alive to inquiry, and apparently desirous to improve. We have again been favoured to pass in safety from one island to another, and I trust, I have not left any thing undone that should have been done. Although desirous to move on, yet I am anxious not to be found imprudently hastening forward in my own will, instead of patiently and resignedly abiding the Lord's time. We brought with us from Huahine the son of one of the principal chiefs, whose mother is now on a visit to this island, attending the death-bed of her father.

31st.—In the course of the day I have been a good deal depressed, at the prospect before me of the native meeting tomorrow morning; but my trust is in Him whom I have been favoured to know, in whom I have believed, and who said, “Counsel is mine, and sound wisdom: I am understanding, I have strength.”

Eleventh Month 1st. (First day.)—Although half-past nine o'clock was the time fixed for the native meeting to begin, yet the people were observed moving along by the edge of the seacoast, in small parties towards the meeting-house, by half-past seven o'clock in the morning. On this account we landed earlier than the time agreed upon, that they might not have to wait long before our arrival, seeing they could not be blamed for not keeping near to the time appointed, not possessing the means of ascertaining the hour. On reaching the place we found the meeting nearly gathered, and Charles Barff at his post. Perhaps the number collected did not exceed materially one thousand persons. Charles Barff began at an early period of the meeting to read my certificates. I had been under a heavy load of exercise during the time we had been in the meeting-house, which indeed had been the case from an early hour in the morning: but now the cloud seemed, as it were, to rise from off the tabernacle, and my way seemed clear to stand up.

A profound silence reigned; when my soul saluted all present in the love of the everlasting gospel in the apostolic language: “Now the God of peace, that brought again from the dead our Lord Jesus, that great Shepherd of the sheep, through the blood of the everlasting covenant, make you perfect in every good work,” etc. A pause now followed, and when the attention of the people was firmly fixed, I proceeded with—“Launch out into the deep, and let down your nets for a draught,” showing the result of willing obedience to this, and every other command of our Lord, even though we may, as it were, have toiled all the night and taken nothing: such had been the case in reality formerly, as we may conclude from the reply of Simon Peter. That the blessing Divine might perhaps be witnessed amongst us this morning, if such a disposition was happily wrought in our hearts, and increase and extend, as from vessel to vessel, until all were filled. “I am the light of the world,” said Christ; “he that follows me shall not walk in darkness, but shall have the light of life.” To this I wish to turn the attention of all mankind, that Christ may dwell in their hearts by faith, which is in Him: then indeed would they be effectually turned “from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan” to the power of God; and witness for themselves the light of the knowledge of the glorious gospel of Christ so to shine in their hearts, as to be to them the power of God unto salvation. This was the most attentive audience that I have yet stood before as a spectacle: my heart was greatly enlarged, and utterance abundantly given me, far beyond what I can convey an idea of here; tending to turn the people more and more to the teachings of the Holy Spirit of the great, heavenly, and only true Teacher in their own hearts; which would tell them all things that ever they did, and by which they must be converted and born again, or they could not enter the kingdom of God. The solemnizing power of Truth with which we were highly favoured, and of which I trust there were many sensible witnesses, reigned over all: under the covering of which the meeting broke up, in great quiet and order.

When the people were fairly at liberty, many of all ages and both sexes crowded round us to shake hands, in numbers beyond all practicability of ascertaining. I scarcely remember any previous meeting after which I felt so much heated; and a long walk, exposed to the scorching rays of a vertical sun nearly at noon-day, helped not a little to increase this inconvenience. I told Charles Barff that I preferred remaining on shore, as I was looking forward to attend the afternoon meeting at three o'clock.

By keeping in the quiet, I was refreshed and ready when the meeting-time came. The people assembled early, and in number far exceeding what usually attend in an afternoon. I had again to turn them to that holy Word, which lives and abides forever, by which they must be born again. This was the hope of David; he waited patiently for it: he said, he waited for the Lord more than they that watch for the morning. “My soul does wait, and in his word do I hope.” After the meeting broke up, we were spared the ceremony of shaking hands by a discussion which took place among the people. As this was in a tongue unknown to me, and no interpreter came forward, I felt myself at liberty quietly to retire.

It afterwards appeared that a proposition had been made to provide a 'feeding' for the strangers on the 5th instant. Upon inquiry, I found that it is a voluntary and free-will offering of the people themselves, and not arising from any constraint or order of the chiefs. This being ascertained, I feel a willingness to accept the kindness intended to be shown, at the same time hoping that good may come out of it. As regards the body of the people at large, this 'feeding,' as it is termed, amounts to little more than the great bulk of the company bringing their vegetable food with them, and eating it when collected together, by general consent at the same time. The seamen of the Henry Freeling attended both these meetings in an orderly manner. Returned on board to tea, under a feeling of poverty and unworthiness.

2nd.—In the morning, engaged on board. Charles Barff came off, bringing with him John Platt, the eldest son of the missionary; he had returned late the preceding evening from Bolabola, to which island he had been with a small native-built schooner, to bring from there a part of his father's cattle, many of which are still remaining there. The mission is entirely withdrawn from Bolabola, the people having generally given themselves up to intoxication, converting even their bread-fruit into spirit by distillation. In the afternoon, went on shore for exercise: met with Charles Barff; and after going with him to see a patient labouring under a dreadful attack of the elephantiasis, went to look at the grave of the late James Loxton, with whom I became acquainted when in London about two years ago; he was then a fine young man. In this comparatively short space of time, a fourth part of which had been expended on the passage out in the Tuscan, or thereabouts, he had arrived at this island, commenced his work, and finished his course: his widow has since become a mother, and returned to England with her infant charge.

3rd.—Visited the ancient and extensive Marais at the east end of the island, accounted the most celebrated in the South Seas, and upon which the sacrifice of human life has been witnessed to a horrible extent. One of these was styled sacred to the god of wars, another to the god of thieves, etc. A native not far advanced in years, who accompanied us, had himself been twice present at an exhibition of these dreadful realities: many human bones were lying about. Tomorrow afternoon a meeting is appointed to be held on the island of Tahaa, not many miles distant from Raiatea, and sheltered within the same coral reef. It being the usual time for holding the native meeting, and notice having been sent yesterday of our intention to be there, it is hoped that those islanders will generally attend on the occasion. Tahaa is under the control of the government of Raiatea.

Tahaa. 4th.—After dinner set out in company with Charles Barff for Tahaa, in a whale-boat, with a fine breeze of wind. On landing, we stopped at the chief's house, while the people had time to collect. On repairing to the meeting-house but few had come; and for some time the prospect was discouraging, particularly to myself, as I felt much depressed, and in a state of more than usual desertion and barrenness. As the number of people increased, their general behaviour indicated them to be strangers to the important object for which they are in the common practice of assembling; a circumstance which may be readily conceived and for which allowance should be made, as they are seldom even visited by missionaries at the present day. Since the death of James Loxton, and the absence of George Platt on the Samoa mission, they have even been without a native teacher. After my certificates were read, I seemed to have little to communicate beyond remarking, that it would be understood by what they had heard, I had not come amongst them from any sinister or private motive of my own, but that I might be found standing in the counsel of the Divine will: that I sought not theirs but them,—the welfare of the immortal part in them. That the special object of my coming was to turn their attention to the power of Divine grace in their own hearts. That they were not beyond the reach of that eye, which neither slumbers not sleeps. “He that keeps Israel shall neither slumber nor sleep;” and although they were left without an outward teacher, yet if they turned to this light of Christ in their own hearts, in earnestness and sincerity, they would have a Teacher indeed, that teaches as never man taught; which could never be taken away or removed; and which, if sought after and obeyed, would make them the Lord's children, “heirs of God, and joint heirs with Christ” in his heavenly Father's kingdom. They would then be members of the Lord's church, because the Lord's children; all of whom, it is declared, “are taught of Him: in righteousness shall they be established, and great shall be their peace.” I had largely to speak to them on the great and momentous work of regeneration, and the only blessed means by which this can be effected; that of obedience to the manifestation of the light of Christ, which shines in every heart, through his Holy Spirit, by which we must all be born again.

I had also to speak on the incalculable value of the Holy Scriptures: that “all Scripture is given by inspiration of God; and is profitable for doctrine, for reproof, for correction, for instruction in righteousness,” etc.; and they refer to the Saviour of the world from the earliest ages of time, as the “seed of the woman, that shall bruise the serpent's head.” They show forth the gracious dealings of the Almighty, and testify his love to man, and are replete with heavenly precepts, examples, and parables: still the Holy Spirit that inspired the holy men, who in former ages gave them forth, is greater than the Scriptures. They are a blessed book, the book of books, setting forth the revealed will of God; but they point to the Holy Spirit, that takes of the things of Christ and shows them unto us. And truly there is nothing that can manifest and prove to the transformed and renewed mind, what is that good and acceptable and perfect will of God, but the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, which “declares unto man his thought.” It is not every one that says, “Lord, Lord, that shall enter into the kingdom of heaven,” said Christ, “but they that do the will of my Father which is in heaven;” and the will of the Father is, that we should believe in, hear, and obey the Son. “This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased, hear him.” The meeting at first seemed as if it would be unsettled, but it sunk down into quietness as I proceeded; and before it closed, was eminently owned by the Divine Master. I think I never observed more attention and interest exhibited; and the countenances of many bespoke the solidity of their minds. After noticing several of the people, we proceeded towards our boat, which the natives had tolerably well loaded with food. After taking a final leave, we were favoured to reach Raiatea before dark, and drank tea at the mission-house.

5th.—This morning our decks were crowded with the Raiateans, who began to bring on board an abundant supply of pumpkins, pine-apples, fowls, etc., for which they bartered at a low rate. At noon, went on shore to partake of the feeding at Tamatoa's new house, which was opened, for the first time, on the occasion of this public dinner. The building, although extremely large, was well filled; and the whole affair was conducted throughout in an orderly manner. Many able speakers among the people enlarged in an impressive manner upon the privileges they now enjoy; contrasting their present state, however much below the Christian standard of morality and virtue, with the state they were once in, when heathenism reigned unmolested, and every man did what was right in his own eyes. When these had apparently finished, I told Charles Barff that I wished to speak to the people at a suitable time; this he communicated to them, and a general silence soon prevailed: my mouth was opened freely to declare the day of the Lord amongst them, to the great relief of my own mind; standing up with,—“behold how good and how pleasant it is for brethren to dwell together in unity!” etc., declaring the blessedness of those that believe the gospel, that repent and obey it. Such find it not to be a mere outward declaration of good things to come; but the power of God unto salvation, from sin here, and to their everlasting comfort hereafter: it proved a solemn opportunity. May it long be remembered, to the Lord's glory and praise, by the humble thanksgiving of many. Under a peaceful feeling took leave of the people and the chiefs, and returned quickly to the vessel.

Found a canoe from Tahaa, with the native school teacher and family, who paid us a short visit, and to whom some trifling presents were made. The natives on shore perceiving our return on board, came off with every kind of supply in their power to offer, and kept us very busily employed until it was time again to go on shore to pay a farewell visit to Judith Platt and family, whose uniform kindness could not well be exceeded. At eight o'clock p.m. we took leave, and on reaching the Henry Freeling, prepared for sailing in the morning, if nothing arose to prevent. The natives were on board at an early hour of the morning on the 6th; and I felt desirous to accommodate them by taking their different articles that were at all likely to be of use to the ship. As soon as the signal was made for sailing, Charles Barff came on board, when all our payments were nicely arranged with the bartering parties; and having taken in the pilot, the anchor was weighed, and we proceeded from Uturoa towards the western passage through the reef. For several hours we were baffled between the two islands of Raiatea and Tahaa, the wind often light, and shifting from side to side every few minutes. At length a fresh breeze sprung up, and after making a few tacks we got clear of every shoal, and into the open passage; discharged the pilot, and made sail to the westward, with a fine trade-wind for the island of Bolabola, at half-past one o'clock a.m. Soon after five o'clock we entered a fine opening in the reef which encircles this island, and worked up into a beautiful and well-sheltered haven, sufficiently extensive to contain a great part of the British navy. Anchored in fourteen fathoms water, opposite the once flourishing missionary settlement at Vaitape, in latitude 16° 27' south, 152° 8' west longitude.

Bolabola, Eleventh Month 6th.—It was ascertained, after anchoring in the haven of Teavanui, that there is a pilot for the accommodation of such ships as may incline to enter; but as it seldom happens that this place is visited at the present day, he was engaged in fishing on the other side of the island when we arrived. One of the principal chiefs and many of the people have relapsed into their former idolatrous practices; and the intoxicated state of the people has latterly deterred ships from calling here, not only from a fear of receiving damage, but on account of the few supplies to be obtained. Such vessels as do come are mostly American, and they generally 'stand off and on,' at a distance, to dispose of rum, in exchange for what the islanders can furnish. There is, however, at present but little to be had, as the thoughtless part of the community (and these unhappily are in power) have converted even their bread-fruit into ardent spirits by distillation, and many families are now in an unclothed and famishing condition. Charles Barff has no doubt but they will be kindly disposed towards us; and I do not feel the least hesitation in coming amongst them.

We found here John Platt, son of the missionary family at Raiatea, who has brought over a small cargo of plantains, as food for the people. In the schooner with this young man, our kind friend and interpreter, Charles Barff, looks forward to return to his family at Huahine, after doing all he can for us: he is now on shore endeavouring to collect the scattered people at the meeting tomorrow. There is a little remnant of serious natives yet remaining, who have hitherto stood firmly against the practices of those in authority; and several of them are nearly allied to the notorious chief whose name is Mai, to which the letter O is often prefixed: this little band there will be no difficulty in convening. We could not have arrived here at a more favourable moment, as the stock of spirits is exhausted, and the growing crops are not yet ready for the process of distillation. May the Lord work amongst them, to the exaltation of his own great and adorable name: may now be the accepted time,—may now be the day of salvation to these poor people,—says all that is within me! In the afternoon landed with Charles Barff for exercise. Saw the relics of several Marais, where human sacrifices were formerly offered: continued our walk until a bay opened on the other side of the island. Passed by one of the dancing-houses, which has been established since the introduction of strong drink amongst them. A message was despatched in the course of the day to the head of the rebellious party, who has been their leader into every mischief and distress that has overtaken them of late; to invite him and his company to attend the meeting tomorrow. These people have now taken up a position in a distant valley, for the purpose of carrying on their abominable practices more free from restraint: the invitation was stated to be at the request of two strangers just arrived from the island of Kaiatea. They returned for answer that they could not come tomorrow, but would certainly attend on the following day. By this it was understood that they are in such a reduced, impoverished, and suffering state, from their evil habits and ruinous practices, as to be for the most part without clothing, and their resources exhausted by purchasing rum and other strong drink.

8th. (First day.)—From appearances upon the shore this morning, considerable hopes were entertained that the people in the neighbourhood of the settlement, would generally collect to attend the meeting. By nine o'clock went on shore, and on reaching the meeting-house, (a large and commodious building,) we found that the children were in school, and singing a hymn before separating. When they had finished, we went into the meeting-house, where about five hundred of the natives were soon assembled, but none of the rebel party were there.

When Charles Barff had finished and come down from the pulpit into the reading-desk, I took a station at his left hand. The house being very large, and the people seated in a straggling manner, I suggested their drawing nearer together and to us; which was immediately complied with in a very rough and disorderly manner: and, as they continued unsettled, and talking pretty loud, I said a few words, which produced a general silence. My certificates having been read, after a pause it was with mo to say:—Let us humble ourselves under the mighty hand of God this morning,—let us prostrate our minds before Him, as a people conscious that to us belongs only blushing and confusion of face: peradventure He may condescend to lift up the light of His countenance upon us, and bless us together; for “God is love.” “As an eagle stirs up her nest, flutters over her young, spreads abroad her wings, takes them, bears them on her wings,” so the Lord is with his people. I told them, that I had passed over many miles of trackless ocean to visit them; that I had come among them in the fear and in the love of God: in that love which embraces all, and would gather every son and daughter of the human race into the heavenly garner of rest and peace: that this love constrains us, “because we thus judge that if one died for all, then were all dead; and that He died for all, that they which live might not henceforth live unto themselves, but unto Him, who died for them, and rose again.” The burden which rested upon me was to turn them from darkness unto the Holy Spirit of Christ Jesus in themselves, to “that light which enlightens every man that comes into the world;” the same that the apostle John so fully mentions in his first chapter. That this light would show them where they are, and make manifest the state of their hearts, setting their sins in order before them; that so they might repent of them, and forsake them. That nothing short of “repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ,” will be availing. That this light is Christ: and if they believe in it, and have faith in its power, they should not walk in darkness, but should have the light of life, according to His word; “I am the light of the world,” said He; “he that follows me shall not walk in darkness, but shall Lave the light of life.” Have you not heard the voice of the Holy Spirit in the secret of your hearts? I know you have! I am sure you have! Which of you that has come to years capable of reflecting upon your past and present life, can say that you have not heard this in-speaking voice, striving with you, and reproving you, when about to commit sin, and for sin committed,—reminding of sin after sin, committed perhaps many years ago? This light not only discovers unto man his sins, but as he turns to it, and follows it in obedience and heartfelt repentance, his sins are remembered no more against him; they are taken away and forgiven, and though once of the darkest hue, are now made white in the blood of “the Lamb of God, that takes away the sin of the world.” And those who thus turn to hear and obey the voice of the Son of God in spirit, although dead in sins and trespasses, yet shall they live, and have a Teacher that cannot be set aside, or be removed into a corner; but their eyes shall see their teacher, and their ears shall hear a voice behind them, when about to turn to the right hand or to the left, saying in effect, “this is the way, walk in it;” such shall no longer walk in darkness, but shall have the light of life, etc. Although poor and low enough before standing up, yet now my tongue was loosed, and my heart expanded in that love and strength, which alone clothes with authority to set the truth over all, and cause even the earthly tabernacle to rejoice in the midst of the tribulations of the gospel; because its consolations are known and felt to abound, and create renewed sensations of gratitude and praise, to the glory of God the Father. It was a blessed meeting. When it broke up, the people crowded round about us in their usual way to greet the strangers. When going to the afternoon meeting, I told Charles Barff, from present feeling, that I believed I should have nothing to say to the people; and so it proved, for I sat as a sign amongst them; but peace and resignation to the Divine will were my dwelling-place. Our captain and seamen attended both these meetings.

Eleventh Month 9th.—A messenger was dispatched early this morning to ascertain whether the rebel chief and his party were likely to keep their word and come to us; as I had concluded, if they failed in fulfilling their promise, to visit them in their own valley. The messenger however reported, on returning, that the chief would come to us in the forenoon. By ten o'clock a.m., information was received that he was near at hand; when we, accompanied by Charles Barff, landed to meet the party. They soon arrived, and knowing that the chief had objected to go into the meeting-house, this was not urged; but we took up our station immediately under the shade of an immense tree, under the wide-spreading branches of which, several hundred persons could be sheltered from the scorching heat of the sun. The chief, at the head of a large banditti of females, first made his appearance; and on coming near to us, said, 'You are come at a good time, and I hope that one or both of you will remain with us and be our teachers.' I told him we were not at our own disposal; that we must go wherever it is the will of the Lord, and that I believed we had many places to go to beside that island: we then shook hands with him and all his followers. The females were decorated in the true ancient heathen style, with garlands of flowers upon their heads, and were persons employed to perform for their chief's amusement, those disgraceful and abominable dances practised in these islands before the introduction of the missionaries. A body of men then followed, each of them throwing one or more cocoa-nuts at our feet as they came up; and those couples which had them suspended from a pole, threw them upon the ground in a ludicrous manner, which kept the whole assembly, and the rabble that attended on the occasion, in constant laughter and confusion.

Upon the chief beginning to ask some questions about us, I proposed that my certificates should be read, which Charles Barff at once assented to, when silence was immediately proclaimed. Before the reading was finished, these wild, thoughtless people were measureably changed into an attentive audience. When the reading was finished, all remained silent; and after a pause, I exhorted them to let the Lord God be their fear, and let him be their dread.—“He is not far from every one of us,” said I; “for in him we live, and move, and have our being:” adding, that I had hoped to see their faces yesterday with the rest of the inhabitants of the island, who gave me their company; but as this was not the case, it was my intention today to have visited them where they dwelt, as I could not think of leaving the island without seeing them; for the Lord God, whom I serve, is a God of love and of mercy, and wills not the death of a sinner, but rather that all should repent, return, and live. For this he sent His only begotten Son into the world, “that whosoever believes on Him should not perish, but have everlasting life.” It is a fearful thing to fall into the hands of the living God; for if the righteous scarcely be saved, where shall the sinner and the ungodly appear. That for the sake of Christ and his gospel, I was come amongst them; for His inheritance is still the heathen, and the uttermost parts of the earth His possession. That I was a stranger, and knew nothing of the existing differences amongst them, and desired to know nothing amongst them, but “Jesus Christ and him crucified;” but this I do know, that you have not obeyed the gospel: “for if you live after the flesh, you shall die; but if you through the Spirit do mortify the deeds of the body, you shall live.”—“Be not deceived; God is not mocked; for whatsoever a man sows, that shall he also reap. For he that sows to his flesh, shall of the flesh reap corruption; but he that sows to the Spirit, shall of the Spirit reap life everlasting.”—“Turn, turn, why should you die?” Your only refuge is in Jesus; a measure or manifestation of His Holy Spirit is given to every man to profit withal; this is the light of Christ in your hearts, which if taken heed to, will place your sins in order before you, in matchless love and mercy, that you may repent of them, and be saved from them. But if you continue to disregard this light, and to rebel against it, it will be your condemnation; and the wrath of God will overtake you. He will laugh at your calamity, and mock when your fear comes: “the wicked shall be turned into hell, and all the nations that forget God.” I warned them, in the fear, and in the dread, and in the love of God, to flee from the wrath to come,—to repent, believe, and obey the gospel,—to seek the Lord while he may be found, to call upon him while he is near. “Let the wicked forsake his way, and the unrighteous man his thoughts: and let him return unto the Lord, and He will have mercy upon him, and to our God, for He will abundantly pardon.” They were warned of the judgments of the Lord that would overtake them if they continued in their wicked practices, and entreated to turn unto the Lord; to acquaint themselves with Him and be at peace,” etc. All was chained down and laid low; their haughty and airy looks were changed into those of serious thoughtfulness by that Almighty power, which controls the hearts of all men.

When we separated, the chief came to Charles Barff and told him, that old thoughts had been brought into his mind, and seemed kindly disposed towards us. We remained on shore while some medicines were prepared and administered to the sick, and on returning to the vessel, found the chief had got there before us, with two of his sons-in-law of the solid party, who stayed dinner. One of the females had the audacity to make her appearance in the cabin at dinner-time; but Charles Barff knowing the vileness of her character, she was quickly dismissed. The visit of this man was far from satisfactory, but it was submitted to, in the hope that hereafter good might arise out of it. Our decks were crowded in the afternoon by the natives, but we were favoured to pass through it without any unpleasant occurrence. They are a proud, haughty people, that delight in war; and since the introduction of strong drink amongst them, and the practice of distillation, the missionary George Platt deemed it no longer safe to reside upon the island, and removed with his family to Raiatea, as before-mentioned. It is affecting to witness the degraded and miserable appearance they now make for lack of clothes, etc. Fowls, hogs, cocoa-nuts, pine-apples, etc., were brought on board by the solid party in tolerable abundance. Towards evening we went on shore, and called with Charles Barff to see several of the sick people, of whom there are many, mostly wasting away by the disease brought amongst them by the licentious crews of the shipping.

10th.—Today our deck has again swarmed with the natives, and although the principal part of our crew with our captain are engaged on shore procuring water, (a scarce article here,) yet there was nothing to apprehend from their numbers. Perhaps the treatment met with in our vessel is such as they never witnessed before, and we were far from entertaining a thought of danger, although the average number on board was ten of them to one of us; but their deportment has hitherto been uniformly gentle and harmless. They are naturally a ferocious people, and when not at war with their neighbours, are frequently engaged in broils amongst themselves. Great is the love I feel for them, as a stream in my heart, and particularly towards the poor neglected children. Tomorrow morning a meeting is to be held, to which I have been looking at times since last First day afternoon. All my springs are in the Lord Most High: when He is pleased to shut, who can open? Unto whom shall I look, or where shall I go? for the words of eternal life are only with the Lord Jesus—the crucified, risen, and glorified Saviour.

Eleventh Month 11th.—Attended the meeting held at the settlement at nine o'clock this morning; but the persons present were few in comparison with those at meeting last First day. I was strengthened to declare amongst them, that one hour in the Lord's presence is better than a thousand elsewhere:—“I had rather be a door-keeper in the house of my God, than to dwell in the tents of wickedness;” for in His presence only there is life, and at his right hand are pleasures, durable as the days of heaven. I felt much for the upright-hearted little remnant amongst them, who are desirous to serve the Lord in their day and generation. I wished them to be encouraged to hold on their way, for in due time they will assuredly reap if they faint not; although they must expect many temptations and snares to be laid for them by the great enemy of God and man, and also by their brother islanders; for those that live godly in Christ Jesus, ever suffer persecution. The invitation of the Saviour, given when on earth, is still extended for us to come unto Him in Spirit: it is there we must learn of Him.—“Take my yoke upon you, and learn of me,” said he, “for I am meek and lowly in heart: and you shall find rest unto your souls. For my yoke is easy, and my burden is light.” We shall be taught how to pray to the holy Father in faith, believing in the name of the Son; and what we ask, when thus qualified and influenced, we shall most assuredly receive for Christ's sake; and we shall know from living experience, that peaceful and easy is his yoke, light the burden, sweet the rest. The watch tower is the Christian's only safe retreat, his only refuge from the enemy. It is the place where prayer is able to be made, appointed in love to man by Him who said, “What I say unto you I say unto all, watch. Watch and pray, lest you enter into temptation.” I had much more to express amongst them: it was to my own relief, and peace, and comfort; and I humbly trust, if none were benefited, that none would be hurt, for it was the Lord's doing, and to Him alone belongs the praise; man is altogether shut out and excluded.

Busily employed on board until evening, then landed and explored the neighbourhood for exercise. In the course of our travel, drank some excellent juice of a cocoa-nut, taken from a tree in our sight, which with three others, were planted about twelve years ago by George Bennet.

12th.—This morning our deck again teemed with the natives: they are so eager to obtain some article or other from us, that they bring with them for sale the very utensils out of their huts; useful to themselves, but to us of no value whatever. The poverty, disease, and wretchedness of many of them is truly affecting, and although mostly of their own bringing on, yet they are deeply to be felt for. It being Fifthday, we sat down together in the cabin, as usual; and although there was much noise upon the deck with these people, it served to make us sensible of our own weakness, and to awaken feelings of humility in commiserating the sufferings of others, in contritedness before the Lord. It would have afforded great satisfaction to clothe the poor naked children of this island, had I possessed the means; but the number is too great for my resources: it would have been a difficult matter to effect, without creating jealousy or envy between the two parties. The children of the most unworthy parents were the most destitute, as might be expected; and yet more seemed due to the children of those parents who are struggling to stem the torrent of iniquity and dissipation, so alarmingly threatening totally to lay waste the already much decreased and emaciated population. I was in great hopes that the children of sober parents would furnish a plausible pretext for being rewarded, by having learned to read and write; but this did not prove to be the case with such as came on board the vessel, except in one instance of a little girl, who came with her father to sell her own fowl; on trial, it was found she could write very well with a pencil on a slate. After having fitted her with a child's robe, she brought me the fowl as all she had in her power to make me recompense; but to her increased delight, I then bought the fowl for a thimble, two or three needles, and some thread. Dresses were also fitted upon two other children, the next deserving; but in order to select more objects suitable for our purpose, Charles Barff was employed, who readily undertook to procure a list of the most diligent scholars from a native teacher: forty-four garments were appropriated in this manner. In the evening visited the shore for the last time. Charles Barff being anxious to return to his family at Huahine, any further stay at this island would have been useless on my part without our interpreter: but its suffering inhabitants will not be easily effaced from my memory; for whose welfare my heart is deeply interested, and for whom I must long mourn in secret, not having at any time felt a greater drawing of love for any people, amongst whom my lot has been cast in this southern hemisphere, than for those of Bolabola. As we passed along the skirts of the harbour, we were followed by groups of the scarcely clad, famishing, dear children, who from their eagerness to get near enough to us, might have known that the time of our departure drew nigh: their pallid though quick and intelligent countenances met us in every direction. We returned on board at the close of day-light, and made some preparation towards sailing.

13th.—After breakfast, a chapter in the Testament was read, as usual; and having spent a short interval in retirement together, Charles Barff and John Platt prepared to leave us. As soon as the anchor was weighed, our kind friends pushed off for the shore; and, quitting the well-sheltered haven of Te-ava-nui, we stretched through the opening of the reef, and once more committed ourselves to Him, at whose command the vast Pacific rolls. After getting from under the lee of the island, the weather proved rugged, and the wind scant: this day two years ago, we embarked from London to join the Henry Freeling at the Lower Hope, about seven miles below Gravesend. Many have been our tossings, and buffetings, and provings, since that time: but through that loving-kindness which is better than life, we have been delivered out of them all; and are still left to acknowledge, in the grateful language of the Psalmist, that “the goodness of God endures continually,” and his love and his mercy unceasingly flow, “from the river to the ends of the earth.”

Eleventh Month 14th.—Today at noon the island of Bolabola seventy six miles distant. Strong breezes against us, with squalls and heavy showers of rain. The best hog in our stock was so tired of his situation, that he sprung overboard and was lost; there being too much sea running for a boat to attempt to save him. Towards evening strong squalls, with much thunder, lightning, and heavy rain. The foot-rope of our jib gave way, but was discovered in time to save the sail.

16th.—Yesterday the roughness of the weather and the harassed state of our people, (several of them still sea-sick,) compelled us to relinquish meeting together in our customary manner on First days. Today the weather boisterous, and the wind contrary; after dark, frequent flashes of lightning from east to west. Birds of two kinds settled on the mast and suffered themselves to be taken, apparently nearly exhausted with fatigue. The very unsettled state of the weather, the opposing blast, debility of body, and poverty of mind, seem to unite in producing fresh trials of our faith and patience; but I trust it will be seen hereafter that all things have been working together for good. Had we known what awaited us, it is probable we should have still clung to the shelter of Bolabola, although for lack of Charles Barff our situation would have been far from pleasant there. It is not long ago since an attempt was made by the rebellious party to seize a vessel, which had put into the harbour for supplies: this, however, was frustrated by the sober part of the community, who armed themselves, and came forward in time to prevent its success. While we were there, the natives came on board without restriction by forty or fifty at a time: they were received in full confidence; our boarding nettings were entirely kept out of sight, and we felt perfectly safe among them. Some trifling thefts were committed, not worth noticing, although a good look-out was kept by our men. The three chiefs next in authority to the present vicious ruler, Mai, are all his sons-in-law by marriage, and stand opposed to his shameful conduct; they are at present the means of preserving the degree of moral order still existing upon the island: they have been applied to, to destroy their father-in-law, and rule themselves; but they say, 'He is our father; we cannot do that: we must bear with him.'

18th.—Yesterday the strength of the wind abated, but it remains still contrary with a heavy swell. At noon our latitude by observation, 12° 54' south. Today the weather fine; but the wind still northerly. The Magellan clouds about the South Pole are seen every night, but visibly getting lower and lower. We hope soon to get in sight again of the North Pole star, which has for many months been hidden from us.

19th.—The wind still contrary. Endeavoured to commit my cause to Him who knows the depth of the motive that induced our steps being directed to the Sandwich Islands. The protracted adverse winds and humiliating state of mind at present my portion, could not fail prompting to a strict examination of the foundation cause of this movement. I had, previously to finishing our visit to the Georgian and Society Isles, looked different ways as to the next route to be pursued: Rarotonga, Tongataboo, and New Holland, seemed the places in regular course and succession in the nature of things; but the Sandwich Islands were often before me. However undesirable to the natural inclination of flesh and blood in this the evening of my day, the prospect might be, of adding several thousand miles to our already lengthened distance from home, which must be the result of our going there; yet, no light or brightness shone upon any other track: and therefore, without hesitating, as the time of finishing at the southern islands drew nigh, I took care that the vessel was provided with water, hogs, and vegetables, to be in readiness to proceed, as the way should open; and at length left Bolabola with a peaceful mind, under a belief that to proceed to the Sandwich Islands was the only safe path for me to pursue, and therefore we at once shaped a course towards the equator. This being Fifth day, it was a great comfort to have the privilege of sitting down to wait upon the Lord, who knows the secret exercises of my mind on the present occasion. After our sitting was over, I felt relieved; and, I trust, resigned to the dealings of our heavenly Father.

20th.—Last evening, being in about the latitude of Flint's Island, mentioned in Norte's List, a good look-out was kept for it during the night. This afternoon, just before sun-setting, the appearance of land was announced. Upon examining the latitude by observation at noon, and the course of the vessel since made good, there is no room to doubt that the land in sight is Flint's Island, in latitude 11° 30' south, and may be considered as accurately laid down. After dark edged away to give this land a wide berth, it being uncertain how far its coral crags may extend from the main body of it. This island bore from us, when last seen, east by north, about ten miles distant; and appeared in the form of three small islands close together. It is cause of humble thankfulness that we have not met with it in the dark, or under circumstances unfavourable and dangerous. Today abiding through favour in the low and peaceful valley; although under more than ordinary circumstances of discouragement, by reason of the increased swelling of the lower part of my legs and ankles, from the great and constant heat to which we are subjected, together with the lack of exercise, which the incessant motion of the vessel almost precludes the possibility of obtaining: but in my straits and difficulties, I am endeavouring to “set the Lord always before me,” believing He will not permit me to be greatly moved at what he may be pleased to dispense to a “worm and no man,” as is often my state of feeling and condition.

23rd.—The weather much the same since the 20th instant. Yesterday very wet and squally, and although the First day of the week, we were forced to let it pass over without assembling the people. As regards myself, poor and low; endeavoured to keep my mind staid, watching unto prayer towards the Lord. At our evening reading, my understanding was renewedly opened, to comprehend in a spiritual sense some texts of Scripture which were read, to my comfort and edification, and I hope to my Maker's praise. Today fair weather, which afforded our people an opportunity of drying most of their wet clothes.

26th.—Latitude 9° 44' south. Since Second day many changes have taken place; but we have only altered the latitude about two degrees. This forenoon we held our little meeting, and notwithstanding previously to sitting down I felt hemmed in outwardly and inwardly by discouraging circumstances; yet as the struggle was maintained, a gleam of comfort seemed to shine as from the Sun of Righteousness, which alone can avail and cheer the drooping traveller in the Christian course, and strengthen him more and more to walk by faith and not by sight; and less and less to look for support and comfort from the perishing “things that are seen” and only “temporal;” while the blessed realities which endure, are “not seen,” but are “eternal.”

27th—We were favoured this morning, soon after breakfast, with a sight of Caroline Island, about three leagues under our lee. Although from the present wind and relative positions both of the vessel and this island, we could never have touched it; yet it is comforting and relieving when permitted to have a distinct view of such lurking neighbours, as it at once places all risk of running upon them in the darkness of the night beyond the shadow of a doubt. Caroline Island, like many others of those beautiful spots which stud the capacious bosom of this vast ocean, is so low that nothing was apparent but the tops of the trees that grew upon its coral foundation: it is said to be uninhabited. This day my sixty-fourth year is completed; and when I look at the lateness of life's hour, and consider my present situation, contending with winds and waves on this side the globe, and my hands ready to hang down under a sense of weakness and increasing infirmities, it is truly appalling. I feel at times ready to faint at the magnitude of the prospect still widely spread before me, and certainly I should have fainted long ago, if I had not believed to see, and also been permitted to see, to my finite admiration, the mercy, the goodness, and the faithfulness “of the Lord in the land of the living.” He bears up my often drooping and helpless head above the strife of the mighty waters: He sustains and upholds me by the word of His power, for His great name's sake.

29th.—The weather still rough and unsettled. This is the third First day in succession that we have been prevented from meeting together in the usual way; a circumstance that did not occur during the long and stormy outward-bound passage from England. In this climate, such is the closeness and heat of the cabin below, that our toiling sailors soon become drowsy, which renders almost useless our assembling any where but on the deck, which the weather of late has not permitted.

Twelfth Month 4th.—Since the 29th nothing to record, (excepting those mercies which are new every morning,) besides a series of rough and unsettled weather; on the 2nd instant a sight of the sun was obtained, and our true latitude found to be 11° 46' south, having drifted about two degrees to the southward, owing to the prevalence of strong northerly winds, and the swell of the sea against the vessel.

Yesterday the weather and wind more favourable, which was succeeded by a calm. It being Fifth-day, we held our usual meeting in thankfulness for the quiet opportunity afforded by the more gentle movement of the vessel. Supported in humble resignation to Divine disposal. In the afternoon a shark was taken, about seven feet long.

10th.—No material alteration in the weather since the 4th instant, although some progress has been made. On First day, the 6th, portions of Scripture were read to the crew in the forenoon; in the afternoon, this was prevented by the state of the weather. Today we sat down together in the morning, and I was favoured to feel refreshed. We have now a steady trade-wind from the eastward, sufficient to allow our making a north course good against an opposing swell; but we are greatly annoyed by another swell more heavy upon the quarter, which makes the motion uneasy, and at times violent.

14th.—Steady wind from the east and fine weather. Yesterday, assembled the crew twice in the day for devotional purposes. About eleven in the forenoon, the Henry Freeling entered the North Pacific. At noon our latitude 0° 6' north of the equator; longitude about 147° west. This morning we have got through a strong current which in the course of a few hours had swept us twenty-eight miles to the westward, as indicated by the chronometers.

For more than three weeks after leaving Bolabola, our progress was greatly impeded by an almost constant succession of contrary winds and rugged weather; and yet I could never see my way to bear up and run back to the islands for shelter. I believed on setting out that the track towards the Sandwich Islands was the right one for me to pursue; and yet every thing combined to obstruct and frustrate our best attempts to persevere. Winds from quarters from which they are seldom known to blow in these seas, were permitted to buffet us at times strongly, with considerable sea: these, together with a succession of drenching heavy thunder rains, made the prospect additionally discouraging and gloomy to some on board. Although I never hinted it to any one, yet I had pretty much concluded that, on reaching the equator, if the northerly blast should then appear to be fairly established strongly against us, I should be satisfied to bear away before it for the nearest port; rather than any longer persist in beating our little vessel to pieces, by contending against its overwhelming force, as having done all I could to endeavour to follow the line of apprehended duty cast up before me; not doubting but the will would be accepted for the deed, by Him who knows the integrity of all hearts, and who had witnessed our faithful striving, week after week, to accomplish its fulfilment: but, on reaching the utmost bound of south latitude, yesterday, instead of boisterous and contrary winds, we were favoured to cross into the northern hemisphere with a leading breeze, and as beautiful weather as could be imagined: and such has been our progress through the night, that at noon this day, our latitude is 2° 28' north, and 146° 59' west longitude by lunar observation. This change in a prospect so lately and so darkly clouded, has brought with it comfort and strength, and caused gratitude and thanksgiving to spring in my heart to our all-merciful and faithful Creator and Preserver.

17th.—Continued to make rapid progress, since the 14th instant, to the northward with a side-wind. Yesterday the appearance of the weather became very threatening, and the swellings of the ocean much increased. A considerable quantity of rain fell in the course of the day; but the clouds most heavily charged rode past us altogether unbroken. Charles and myself sat down in the forenoon, and towards the latter end of our sitting, a small portion of strength was felt, to draw nearer to the Fountain of life.

Twelfth Month 21st.—The wind rather more in our favour. Our progress somewhat retarded by changing several of our sails, being too old and thin to trust to, when exposed to heavy gusts from mountainous land. Yesterday the assembling of the crew for devotional purposes was not omitted. At ten o'clock p.m. last night shortened sail, for fear of a supposed island being in our route, called Hirst's Island. This island is mentioned by Norie, in a chart published in 1833, belonging to our mate; while our own private chart, and the ship's atlas are silent on the subject. It is probable this island may exist, but certainly not in the place laid down; for we must have passed in the dark, nearly over the spot where it is said to be, and met with nothing. This circumstance cost us several hours of a beautiful wind, without the satisfaction of being able to establish the fact of there being such an island or its true position, for the benefit of other wandering pilgrims on this expansive watery waste.

On the 19th, did not fail, and, I trust, allowably so, to remember the mercifully-bestowed, and long-entrusted and beloved partner of my bosom;—a bosom friend indeed, guileless and faithful; whose loss to me was indeed great and irreparable, but her gain eternal:—humble resignation to the Divine will is as a canopy of peace around me, although the loss was such, that even time does not lessen its extent.

23rd.—Yesterday the wind fresh and favourable: we got on rapidly also through the night, and today are still hastening onward with a following sea. At noon the latitude 19° 41' north; at four o'clock p.m., longitude 153° 18' west. This morning hauled a little more to the westward, to endeavour to make the land. Just before sun-set, the sight of land was announced from the mast-head; but the haze about the water's edge made it very indistinct, and not visible from the deck to myself, until the sun had sunk below the horizon; when not only the stupendous mountain of Mouna Kea, with its snow-clad top, which is more than 13,000 feet above the level of the sea; but the lower land towards the north cape of the island of Hawaii could be plainly distinguished, at the distance of more than eighty miles. Here is a renewed call for thankfulness, after such a winding and intricate passage of six weeks, thus to be favoured with such a defined, and decidedly excellent land-fall before the night closed upon us,—which is now long and dark, the shortest day, in this region, being just over, and the moon but in an infant state at present. The mercies of the Lord are indeed from everlasting to everlasting, and blessed forever is He, the Lord God of Israel, who only does wondrous things; blessed be his glorious name forever, and let the whole earth be filled with his glory: and who can refrain from saying with David, “Amen and Amen!”

24th.—This sight of the land enabled us to run through the dark under whole canvass without fear, thus making great progress; and this morning the lofty mountain upon Hawaii, from our having approached at least fifty miles nearer to it, appeared twice as high as it did last evening. Before noon the island of Maui was discernible from the deck, and at sun-down Tauroa was plainly to be seen. At eight o'clock p.m., off the west end of Maui; reduced the canvass for the night. Our getting into Oahu tomorrow is at present uncertain; the day must declare it: at four o'clock p.m. this afternoon, we were one hundred and thirty miles distant.

[In a note subsequently written, Daniel Wheeler adds:] some of my beloved friends may be at a loss for the reason of our passing by some of the largest islands in the Sandwich group, (particularly Hawaii, formerly considered as the chief of the cluster,) and aiming directly at one, not one-third its size, and much less than Maui. This decision seemed to arise from the circumstance of Captain Keen's being a stranger to the other islands, and from the information obtained, that there was no safe anchorage for a vessel in the winter season, except at Honolulu, in the island of Oahu, where there is safety at every season of the year. It occurred to me at the same time, that if we should be favoured to reach Oahu in safety, and then find it necessary to proceed to the other islands, some person might be found well acquainted with their different bays, roads, coves, creeks, etc., and be easily obtained to accompany us on such a visit. These were my motives for what might seem, and did seem to some people, beginning at the wrong end of the work, by going to leeward, and having to come back again against the tradewind, which is no easy matter. But I have since found, that I should have been wrong altogether if I had stopped short of Oahu; for here I found the seat of the government of the islands; and also the head quarters of the American missionary establishment: in short, here was the only means of access to the authorities of the other islands, and to the missionary stations; and, in some instances, we could not have procured supplies for the vessel without an order from the government, or an agent of theirs sent along with us. I mention the missionary stations as needful to have access to, because it is only at them that I can look for an interpreter, and through him that I can speak to the native tribes. We therefore passed by Hawaii, Maui, and Morakai, at all of which are several missionary stations, except the last mentioned, where there is only one. And it now fully appears that the step of coming in the first place to Oahu, has opened the way in a most satisfactory manner in every respect for a visit to the other islands.

I feel it no light thing to be, as it were, upon the eve of again landing upon shores by myself as yet untrodden, amongst thousands and thousands of my fellow-creatures, in whose sight I must unquestionably appear, “as one born out of due time;” but when I trace the motive of my coming to its utmost source, I am favoured to find a foundation firm enough to bear me out: and the prospect of another opportunity being afforded me, for the exaltation of the dear Redeemer's kingdom, at seasons warms and gladdens the heart, rekindling a measure of that love which desires the welfare of all mankind the world over; many of whom have long since heard of the name of Jesus, the Messiah, at a distance, but know him not as a Saviour, nigh in the heart to save them from their sins.

25th.—The breeze continued until midnight, after which it gradually lessened, and at four o'clock a.m., we were becalmed. In the forenoon made some progress with light winds, and before noon got sight of Oahu; but the prospect of our getting in is now doubtful, the wind having become variable. Towards evening the breeze freshened, and enabled us to get considerably nearer to the island. The whole of the Sandwich group in sight, except Tauai, or Atooi, which lies ninety-four miles to leeward of Oahu. Before dark, a sail hove in sight from the westward, the first and only vessel we have seen at sea for the last eight weeks, or since leaving Huahine.

Chapter XXVI.

Sandwich Islands—Anchor in the Harbour of Honolulu—Native Meeting—Visit from the King—Meeting at the Mariners' Chapel—Distribution of Tracts, etc.—Native Meeting—Visit of the Governor of Hawaii—Half-Caste Girls' School—Meeting at the Chapel—Native Marriages—Meeting at the Chapel—Native Girls' School.

Oahu. Twelfth Month 26th.—Plyed to and fro during the darkness to windward of the island, and at the earliest dawn of day bore up for Diamond Hill. As we neared the entrance, several boats were seen coming out. The first brought two or three of the resident traders, the second brought the pilot and some others, and in the third came the British and American Consuls; the former bringing us a packet of letters from our beloved family, as might be expected, all of old date, but new to us, and truly welcome; and afresh claiming a grateful tribute of thankfulness to Him whose tender mercies extend to all His poor unworthy creatures, however widely separated. The wind, which at first was likely to prevent our getting in, now changed, and bore us quickly through the winding narrow channel, into the still harbour of Honolulu. The anchor was but just dropped, when Hiram Bingham, the senior missionary of the establishment at this place, came on board, and offered his services in whatever way we could accept them; at the same time inviting us to become his guests while here. We had on board a large packet of letters and parcels for him and his colleagues on these islands. It appeared that information of our being at the Georgian Islands had long since reached this place; and as soon as our vessel came in sight, there was no doubt, from her strange and novel figure in these seas, but that we were arrived: this was evidently the case, for the British Consul, Richard Charlton, brought off our letters without hesitation. The natives here being much accustomed to see shipping, in general take but little notice of them, and seldom visit them; but they soon swarmed upon our deck, attracted by the odd appearance of the Henry Freeling; and we afterwards understood that they gave her the name of the 'Mast-and-a-half.' We now find it needful to make an alteration in the day of the month and of the week, to accommodate the time in these islands. Yesterday was with us what is commonly called Christmas-day: but we find that today, (with us the 26th,) is here only the 25th, and is observed accordingly. To prevent confusion, we purpose adopting the day considered the sabbath here, instead of our own, while we remain among the Sandwich Isles; but the ship's log-book will still retain the dates and days as when we left England, and in it the change will never be observable.

27th.—In the afternoon landed and made our way to Hiram Bingham's habitation; but not finding him at home, we called upon the British Consul, who kindly accompanied us to obtain some exercise on foot, it being forty-five days since we had had an opportunity of walking more than a few paces at a time on the Freeling's deck. Returned to Hiram Bingham's about the time his return home was expected, and found him accordingly. Believing it safest for me not to miss an opportunity, if one could be obtained, of seeing a body of the natives collected together tomorrow, at their own place of worship, I mentioned the matter to Hiram Bingham, who readily made way for my accommodation, kindly offering his services to interpret if I wished to address the people. After partaking of an early tea with the family, we returned on board, at ten o'clock p.m. Mercifully supported to look forward towards tomorrow in humble confidence and hope of that help and strength which is almighty, and which has never yet failed to deliver me out of every trouble and distress. My trust is in the Lord, who alone can bless and cause his own works to praise his ever great and adorable name

28th. (First day.)—At nine a.m., repaired to the house of Hiram Bingham, who accompanied us to the native meeting. As the branch of the mission here consists of several families from America,²² who understand the native language but in a small degree, and as some other white people attending-the meeting are labouring under the same disadvantage, Hiram Bingham proposed that my certificates should be first read in English, and then to the people in the native tongue; and this plan afterwards appeared more eligible, when it was observed that other persons came into the meeting (probably induced by curiosity) who do not attend on other occasions, such as the foreign Consuls and others from the town. The service performed here by the missionary, somewhat differed from what we had seen among the Southern Islands. It commenced with a very short prayer, which we had previously been told was for a blessing on what was about to follow; a portion of the Scriptures was then read, and afterwards a hymn was sung.

When this was finished, the principal prayer, as before explained to us, was offered at considerable length, and then another hymn was sung, after which the reading of my certificates commenced. I had sat under a great weight of exercise, from a belief that I should have to stand up when the reading of them was gone through, and not without a humiliating feeling of weakness and fear at my own insufficiency. Not having for perhaps a year and a half heard my certificates read, except in the Polynesian language, I felt quite struck on hearing them in English; but I think the unity and sympathy of my dear brethren and sisters at home, never at any time felt so truly precious and strengthening to my bowed-down mind: and the expressions which they contain of my beloved family's concurrence with my leaving them, to attend to the call of apprehended duty, were so unexpectedly sounded in my ears, that the weakness of human nature could not be repressed, nor the tear of parental affection restrained. “Deep called unto deep;” the waves and the billows passed over, leaving me in a state of nothingness and emptiness; but, perhaps, never more fit to declare of the goodness and mercy of my Lord, in the ability he was graciously pleased to bestow. When Hiram Bingham had finished reading and explaining my certificates to the people, I went and stood by his side, as “a reed shaken with the wind.” A solemn silence now prevailed over us, until it was with me to say—'It is more than probable that the greater part of the company now assembled, never before heard of the existence of a Society under the denomination of Friends, (alluding to my certificates:) but my beloved people, all such as love the Lord Jesus Christ and keep his commandments, are friends,—friends universally to God, friends to one another, and friends to all mankind. “You are my friends,” said Christ, “if you do whatsoever I command you.” All such are members of the same society the world over.' Then, charging the people to endeavour to draw near unto God, that under the sanctifying influence of His power and life-giving presence, our meeting together might be rendered a blessing, I was largely opened to declare the everlasting Truth amongst them, and to turn them to its light in their own hearts,—to the Holy Spirit of Him, who is “the true light that enlightens every man that comes into the world;” in whom only there is life, and who is the only way to God the Father, as declared by himself:—“I am the way, the truth, and the life; no man comes to the Father but by me.” That a mere outward profession of religion would prove altogether unavailing to them; the great work of regeneration must be witnessed:—that to be members of the true church they must be redeemed with judgment from sin and transgression, and be converted unto God by the righteousness of Christ Jesus, believed in and submitted to through faith in the operation of the Spirit of God; who raised Him from the dead, with whom also they must be raised from death unto life. That we cannot worship God in the manner He requires, while we continue in sin and wickedness; for the prayers of the wicked are not heard,—they cannot pray acceptably in that state; their sacrifice is an abomination. The true and living worshippers of the only true and living God, are no longer dead in sins and trespasses; they are redeemed from these by the righteousness of Christ Jesus, who came to save his people from their sins, and never while they continue in them. That we must fear God, and in thought, word, and deed, give glory unto Him, before we can worship Him in spirit and in truth. For considerably more than an hour my heart was enlarged in the Sowings of gospel love, as a stream bearing down every thing before it. A more attentive audience can scarcely be conceived, than certain classes of this people, both natives and foreigners. The Lord's power had the dominion, and reigned pre-eminently, until the breaking up of the meeting. Every class and variety of the people flocked round us, scarcely affording us an opportunity of speaking to the members of the missionary establishment. Some of the natives endeavoured to thank me through the medium of Hiram Bingham; but I requested him to refer such to the great Creator, and not to the creature. One said I had brought them a blessing. A number of serious-looking women came round us, whose countenances bespoke the love that was in their hearts. Troops of the dear children gathered in their turn, and seemed delighted to find that they also might shake hands with the strangers: some of them would come again and again until they found their faces were recognized. We seemed to need more hands than we possessed, as frequent attempts would fail to shake hands with those that held theirs out to us, by others reaching forward and taking hold of ours before them, in quick succession. Thus has my gracious Lord been pleased to deal with a poor, unprofitable creature, but who is a living monument of His everlasting love and mercy; although he is unworthy of being numbered among the least of His servants. Truly His judgments are a great deep; but His love who can declare? It is unutterable, unfathomable, and unbounded as His mercy; whose is the kingdom, and to whom all power and glory belong forever. When we got into the open road, Hiram Bingham told us the bell was then ringing at the Mariners' Chapel, where the English and other foreigners meet, if I wished to go to it. I replied, that I believed I must go on board to my little family there.

31st.—Engaged on board during the forepart of each day, preparing despatches for England, and by the numerous callers to look at the vessel, and see the newly-arrived strangers: the governor of the fort, and some of the principal chiefs, with the governor of the island of Maui, were amongst them. In the afternoon took exercise on shore, and called upon some of the inhabitants; engaged in writing till late at night. This evening spent some time with the seaman's chaplain, a young man appointed and sent out by the Seamen's Friend Society in America, to preach at the Mariners' Chapel. While we were together, some interesting conversation took place on important subjects.

First Month 1st, 1836.—This morning a deputation of chiefs of the highest order came on board, bringing a letter, addressed to me, as follows:—

'Honolulu, January 1st, 1836. 'As an expression of friendly regard of Kinau and her associate chiefs to Mr. Wheeler, the friendly visitant, they beg his acceptance of a few supplies. They are the following:—five barrels of potatoes, five turkeys, five fowls, and one hog.

'Na' 'Kinau.'

Finding upon inquiry that to refuse this present, would create much dissatisfaction, because entirely intended as a good-will offering, the following acknowledgment was returned:

'Highly sensible of the kindness and hospitable intention of Kinau, the governing chief of the Sandwich Islands, and the constituted authorities of the same, I assure them of my Christian regard in the love of the everlasting gospel, which has induced me to visit these isles afar off.

'I feel and value this token of good-will, in their act of generosity, and I do freely accept the supplies so gratuitously furnished.

'With best desires for their present and eternal welfare, and that of every age and every class over whom they preside, I am her and their sincere friend.

'Daniel Wheeler.'

Henry Freeling, in the harbour of Honolulu,

'First Month 1st, 1836. 'To Kinau, the governing chief of the Sandwich Islands,' etc.

Before the business was fully arranged, and the parties gone from the cabin, the young king Kauikeaouli arrived, with several of his principal attendants.²³ He was escorted on board by the English Consul, accompanied by two other foreigners. It appears that the king, although the lawful ruler of these islands, has delivered up the executive power into the hands of Kinau, and takes no part whatever in the administration of public affairs. He is surrounded by a set of evil advisers, and there is every reason to apprehend, he leads a very unsteady, dissipated life, but is said to possess good abilities and an amiable disposition: he talks some English and understands much of what is said. He examined every part of our vessel very minutely, and might possibly have gone to the mast-head, (a common thing with him;) but our rigging being fresh tarred, deterred him from attempting it. An intelligent person, a native of Dundee, was on board at the time, though not one of the palace party. To this man I mentioned what I thought of the islanders; and as the king, who sat next him, appeared to listen attentively, I spoke freely and plainly of the ruin that awaited these islands, if the importation of spirits and the use of them were allowed to continue; and unless the private property of the poor inhabitants is protected by wholesome laws, firmly executed without partiality. At present these people are groaning under an arbitrary feudal system, kept up with shameful tyranny on the part of the chiefs. I may mention a recent instance that has come within our knowledge, which is only a fair specimen of the actual state of things here: an industrious native had grown a small plot of sugar cane, and when its produce was ascertained, his chief who had permitted him to cultivate the land, ordered the whole of it to be brought to him, except a portion of the molasses. This summons was duly obeyed, and the chief afterwards informed him by message, that the next year he should take the whole, both sugar and molasses. This however so damped the exertion of the poor man, that he did not attempt to grow any more; though, if his chief had insisted on it, he dared not have refused, as things now stand. This mercenary chief has been one of our visitors on board.

2nd.—In the evening called upon Hiram Bingham and Richard Charlton. On our way to the habitation of the latter, accidentally met with the seaman's chaplain, who accompanied us there. While together, I felt best satisfied to make inquiry as to the probability of the inhabitants being willing to attend a religious meeting held on a First day evening; and being assured that the foreigners would come more freely in the evening than in the morning, I believed it best for me to agree, that public notice should be given at the close of the morning meeting, that a meeting for worship after the manner of the Society of Friends, was intended to be held there in the evening of next First day, at the usual hour of the place being open: the use of the Mariners' Chapel having been previously offered at any time I might be ready to accept it, with every assistance that could be suggested, as likely to facilitate my object.

3rd.—Having prepared a number of written notices of the intended public meeting, we landed and took measures for their circulation. Called at the reading-rooms, and looked into the chapel, which is over them. Captain Keen was employed to spread the information of the meeting both on shore and amongst the shipping in the harbour. “The Lord is my defence, and my God is the rock of my refuge.”

5th.—Yesterday, as our people were left at their liberty to attend a place of worship on shore, Charles and myself sat down together in the forenoon: with the weight of the prospect before me of the appointed meeting to be held in the evening with the public, the quiet season we were favoured with was both refreshing and strengthening. We landed soon after dark to be in readiness for the time appointed, and repaired to the place of worship. The time no sooner arrived, than the people poured in from every direction, and soon filled nearly all the seats. The novelty of a 'Quaker's meeting,' and the first ever held on a Sandwich Island, might induce many to come out of curiosity, who at other times never think of attending a place of worship; and it is probable, that the whole of the white residents were present, besides those who came from the shipping, and a considerable number of the natives and halfcastes, with several of the highest authorities in the place; so that the house was crowded, we were informed, as it had never been before. Sitting in silence seemed quite incomprehensible to nearly all that were there. The first part of the time was unsettled by many whispering and talking, and an individual or two not quite sober, were a little troublesome and annoying; but I think I have witnessed in lands accounted civilized, a meeting, from one or other cause quite as unsettled, though altogether free from the disadvantages under which this was labouring. Having sat a considerable time in silence after the meeting was fully gathered, it was with me to say, that as the disciples formerly were incapable of feeding a hungry multitude, until the great Master had blessed and broken the bread, so it is at this day. Without Him we can do nothing as it should be done; and it is only when He is pleased to qualify any of his servants to proclaim his Truth, that the people can be availingly benefited. “Without me you can do nothing,” was our Lord's declaration; and true it is,—for without Him we can do nothing, not even think a good thought, nor restrain an evil one; the spirit truly is willing, but the flesh is weak. That the Society of which I have the privilege of being a member, has always borne a faithful testimony to the excellency of waiting upon the Lord, as the all-sufficient and only true Teacher of his people. After recommending that we should endeavour to wait for the influence of the Holy Spirit to solemnize our minds together, I sat down.

The meeting became much more settled after this, though doubtless the patience of many were tried before the silence was again broken. When the time was come, I stood up with these expressions: “I am no prophet, nor a prophet's son,” but in me you may behold a living monument of the Lord's everlasting mercy; and although, in my own estimation, less than the least child that is alive in the Truth, yet to me, even unto me is this grace given, that I should declare unto others the unsearchable riches of Christ. I have no sinister motive in thus coming among you; the comprehensive principle of the gospel, which would gather and embrace all mankind, enables me to call every country my country, and every man my brother. It is this that has induced me to leave a delightful home, and a numerous and endeared family, and every thing besides which a mortal need possess, and more,—to visit these “isles afar off;” well knowing, that whosoever loses his life for Christ's sake and the gospel's,” the same shall save it.” I have no new doctrine to preach; the way to the kingdom is the same that it ever was; the foundation is the same, “Jesus Christ himself being the chief corner-stone:”—“for other foundation can no man lay than is laid.” But although the foundation be from everlasting to everlasting, yet if the superstructure is not raised upon it, what will it avail? It is, then, of the greatest importance for each of us seriously to examine, upon what we are really building our hope of salvation; for a day of trial will come upon every man's work: the day will declare it, and the fire of the Lord will try of what sort it is; when nothing will stand and endure the trial, but what is built upon the same sure, immutable foundation, which the righteous in all ages and generations of the world have built upon,—even Christ Jesus the righteous, that tried corner-stone, elect of God, and precious indeed to them that believe and obey His gospel.

I had largely to declare of the universality of Divine grace,—that none are left short of a measure of it: it has appeared unto all men, and its teaching, if regarded, would bring salvation to all men. That “a manifestation of the Spirit,” which is no other than “the Spirit of grace,” is “given to every man to profit withal.” This precious gift was not limited to a few individual members of the church only, but extended to all men universally; first, when our holy Redeemer had suffered without the gates of Jerusalem on Calvary's mount. “He ascended up on high, led captivity captive, and received gifts for men;” not for an elect, chosen few only, to the exclusion of others, but “for the rebellious also; that the Lord God might dwell among them,” as by holy writ declared. So that every man has “a manifestation of the Spirit bestowed on him to profit withal;” however widely this Divine gift may be diversified in its operations, or its administrations may differ, it was obtained through the shedding of His blood, “who died for us, and rose again,”—“the just for the unjust, that he might bring us unto God.” All men have an opportunity of becoming members of the mystical body of Christ, the true church, if but willing to turn to the light of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, that shines in every heart,—“the true light, that enlightens every man that comes into the world.” Although many may think themselves dwelling securely, and spending their precious time, days without number, in dissipation, folly, and utter forgetfulness of God, rejoicing as in the days of thoughtless youth; yet they will be overtaken at last, when least expecting it, in the midst of their sinful course, and brought under judgment. “Rejoice O! young man, in your youth; and let your heart cheer you in the days of your youth; and walk in the ways of your heart, and in the sight of your eyes: but know, for all these things God will bring you into judgment.” Ask the votaries of dissipation and folly, after a dark season of sinful pleasure, or rather of wretchedness, if they have not felt horror, remorse, shame, and fear, the certain and constant attendants upon guilt, and which are nothing less than the effects of the strivings of the Holy Spirit, discovering unto them their deeds of death and darkness; and which, if attended to, would deliver them out of this miserable bondage of Satan, and lead them to the knowledge of the Holy Spirit of Him, who is the life and light of men. It is true that this light would make manifest all their evil deeds; it would set their sins in order before their guilty minds, in tenderest mercy and redeeming love; that they might forsake them and repent, return unto God and live. But, alas! how many turn away from these faithful reproofs of instruction, and join in fresh scenes of vice and wickedness; or with large draughts of strong and poisonous drink, endeavour to smother and drown the voice of this heavenly witness against sin. But this light will search them out at last, although but for their condemnation. To those who turn inward unto it, and are willing to bring their deeds to its shining, the exceeding sinfulness of sin will be discovered: that sorrow of heart will then be begotten, which never fails to work true and unfeigned “repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ.” It was the desire of my heart that all might be encouraged to repent, return, and live, by embracing the means so amply provided in wondrous love and compassion, for the salvation of all mankind. So great was the solemnity that continued to be spread over us, that I had to call the attention of the people to it, as beyond the reach and power of man to produce. The Lord alone was exalted; His own arm brought him the victory and the praise.

First Month, 8th.—Since the 5th instant, our time has been filled up in preparing letters for England, and in making a large selection of Friends' tracts, with several of their standard works, illustrating the principles of the Society; also numerous other tracts for depositing in the reading rooms, fitted up by the 'Seaman's Friend Society in America.' Some of the tracts were for general distribution, the others to lend out for perusal; a copy of each of the standard works to remain stationary at the rooms: the total number of the above was 1099. There is a large field open for the circulation of publications amongst the shipping, which touch here for supplies, etc.; there are at present twelve sail in the harbour. This morning furnished some Spaniards on board the Rasselas, (which sailed for China in the afternoon,) with two Testaments, and some other religious works in the Spanish language. English Testaments were given to two half-white girls, who had learnt to read in English.

10th.—I have several times throughout the week had to look towards the approaching First day, as if I might have again to go to the natives' place of worship, and, probably, hold another public meeting with the foreigners in the evening at the Mariners' Chapel; but I could not arrive at sufficient clearness, to warrant the necessary steps being taken to bring these things about. This afternoon, it seemed best for me to go on shore to Hiram Bingham, and say, that if I should come to the native meeting in the morning, I would endeavour to be at his house in time: this matter, though in degree arranged, was still left open. It was afterwards agreed with the minister of the Mariners' Chapel, that if I should have to hold another meeting with the foreigners tomorrow evening, care would be taken to inform him in time, that public notice of it might be given, at the breaking up of the morning meeting at his place. Satisfied with the steps thus far taken, I returned on board before dark, leaving the following morning to decide the work of the day; taking care to have a written notice ready, of the intended public meeting to be held after the manner of the Society of Friends, if the way should be clear to make use of it; but I was not satisfied that it should be forwarded, until after the native meeting, if I should have to be there.

11th. (First day.)—Awaking at an early hour with the prospect of the native meeting full before me, I made no hesitation about setting off to attend it. My Charles, who for some days past had had considerable irritation about his throat and lungs, was too unwell to accompany me, and it was rather a relief than otherwise, that he was prevailed upon to remain quietly on board. On reaching Hiram Bingham's, I found him also unwell with a similar attack of cold, and unable to act the part of interpreter for me; but he had provided Doctor Judd, the physician to the mission, who had studied the language, and at one time was intended for an ordained preacher in the establishment: on this head I was satisfied, if I should find occasion for an interpreter. A missionary from Hawaii, now here, was to supply the place of Hiram Bingham.

When going into the meeting, I felt a poor creature indeed, now entirely companionless, and in the midst of strangers: I was bowed down before the Lord, who comforted and strengthened my heart; and I felt resigned and willing, and in degree prepared, when the first proper interval offered, to stand up. I had not spoken to the stranger about to officiate for Hiram Bingham, previously to the meeting; but just at the time when he was about to commence his sermon, I got up, and with some difficulty waded through a dense body of the natives, who were seated or squatted so thickly on the floor in front of me, that I could scarcely avoid treading on some of them: I took a station in front of the pulpit upon the ground floor; and Doctor Judd observing this movement, came and stood beside me. We remained in silence, with the eyes of more than two thousand five hundred people fixed upon us, until my mouth was opened to declare the cause of my again standing before them; which was, that I might be found in the counsel of the Divine will, in order that the fulness of the blessing of the gospel might be theirs. That “Christ might dwell in their hearts by faith; that they being rooted and grounded in love, might be able to comprehend with all saints what is the breadth, and length, and depth, and height; and to know the love of Christ, which passes knowledge; that they might be filled with all the fulness of God.” That it was not to the high and the mighty that the gospel message was sent formerly, neither is it now; but to the “poor in spirit” the gospel was, and is still preached;—and blessed are they;—“blessed are the poor in spirit, for theirs is the kingdom of heaven:”—these shall be satisfied with favour; they shall be filled with good things, but the rich and the full are sent empty away.

For upwards of an hour I had to declare the glad tidings of the glorious gospel among them; the people were very solid and attentive: they were encouraged “to press towards the mark for the prize of the high calling of God in Christ Jesus:”—the Lord's love flowed richly in my heart towards these people. The meeting was unusually large, owing, perhaps, to the governors of three distant islands being there, namely, of Hawaii, Maui, and Tauai. A number of strangers came about me when the meeting separated; and Kuakini, the governor of Hawaii, (well known by the name of John Adams,) who speaks tolerable English, wanted to know when I should come to his island. I could only say that I was not my own master; but it was not improbable that I should visit Hawaii before leaving the group. I got off from them as soon as I could with propriety, as the way seemed now fully open before me to appoint a public meeting for the whites and halfcastes, to be held at the Mariners' Chapel in the evening.

Repaired to the shore before dark, in time to be in readiness for the meeting; but the approach of a storm, the thunder and lightning having commenced, it is probable prevented some from being there, as it was not so large as the one held the preceding week, but not the less comfortable on that account. After sitting long in silence, I had to express a desire, which had quickened upon my mind shortly after taking my seat, that it might not be said of us as of a people formerly,—“This people draws nigh unto me with their mouth, and honours me with their lips, but their heart is far from me;” and to explain the necessity of drawing nigh and waiting upon the Lord, and of persevering to wrestle for that spiritual blessing, which makes truly rich, and whereunto no sorrow is added. We again dropped into silence, during which, only one person went out. In a short time afterwards, I stood up with those expressions of the apostle, “We through the Spirit wait for the hope of righteousness by faith;” by which we are justified, and have peace with God the Father, through the Son, our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ;—even that peace, which the world with all its delusions cannot give; and, blessed be the name of the Lord, of Israel's God, neither can it take one particle of it away.

I had largely to speak of the beauty of true spiritual worship, and also of the life and immortality which are brought to light by the gospel; and of the possibility of the day of visitation passing over unheeded, and the things which belong to the soul's eternal peace being forever hidden from our eyes, for lack of walking in the light of the Lord Jesus: it was a solemn, comfortable meeting, yielding peace. When it broke up the rain fell in torrents, and the streets, in some places, were literally running in sheets of water: but for the friendly assistance of a stranger, who procured a lantern, we could not easily have found our way to the sea-side, so dark was the night. The rain fell in such quantities, that the water was about our feet in the boat, although she had been once emptied out after leaving the vessel. The captain only was with me; and I was thankful that my Charles had not ventured on shore that night.

12th.—In the morning, a native teacher called on board, named Tootee, (i.e. Cookee,) after Captain Cook. He was born at Huahine, and with another teacher since deceased, was sent to these islands several years ago: there was something agreeable about him; and we find that he is well spoken of by those who know him.

13th.—This forenoon, Kuakini, the governor of the island of Hawaii, came on board; he was proceeding homeward in his own schooner, but having to convey the princess Harrietta Nahienaena, the king's sister, to the island of Maui, was detained until her arrival on board his vessel, which was standing off and on, while he paid us a visit during the interval, to invite us to the shores of Hawaii. We had a good opportunity to show him what must inevitably be the dreadful result, if measures are not speedily taken to check the desolating scourge of rum, with which the American ships are deluging these much to be pitied islanders. He is an intelligent person, and speaks very fair English, considering it has been acquired only by interaction with the crews of the British and American whaling vessels. He said that the use of rum was prohibited at Hawaii among the natives, and that it was only in the hands of foreigners. We told him that the foreigners would be the certain ruin of these islands, if the government did not lay such a tax upon all spirit dealers, as would place this curse of the human race beyond the reach of the natives, and render it not worth any person's while to continue the sale of it. They have tried, he said, to abolish it here, (Oahu,) but could not do it,—adding, 'the king is fond of it;'—at the same time intimating that the princess not being ready this morning was owing to the king's being intoxicated last night. He said, the merchants here, (who are all Americans,) take good care to supply the king with money, and every other thing that he needs: by this plan they have him so completely in their hands, as to succeed in persuading him, that it is to the interest of the islands to allow the free use of spirits. Kuakini is about the largest man we have met with; but he seems to possess very little bodily strength in proportion to his ponderous bulk, and has very little use of his limbs: he is forty-five years of age. He could not climb up our little vessel's side without the assistance of two men, and a descent into the cabin was quite a serious fatigue: the passage down was certainly not sufficiently wide to allow him to make use of his unwieldly legs and arms. He told us his sight was failing, asking for a pair of spectacles, which were immediately handed to him: although very coarse articles and rusty from the dampness of the vessel, he seemed glad to have them. He would have stopped while some fish was prepared; but the arrival of his passenger summoned him away as quickly as he was capable of moving.

Yesterday, arrived the Thetis schooner, from Ascension Island. This vessel has had a mutiny on board: her captain and several of the crew were murdered by one man in the night, a Bengalee; who himself sprung overboard at last, and was shot by one of the surviving sailors. They suffered much from the natives, or rather from the runaway sailors, at Strong's Island, one of the Pescadores.

First Month, 14th.—In the evening met with an interesting young Spaniard and his sister, the wife of an English merchant of California. This young man had been in the United States, and spoke good English; but his sister knew only the Spanish language. In the course of conversation, I mentioned having some books on board in Spanish, and proposed to furnish some of them; at which they seemed grateful and gladly accepted the offer.

17th.—Yesterday visited the school for half-white girls, it being the anniversary of its establishment three years ago. To teach this class of children is a laudable undertaking, and highly needful on their behalf. These children are of a description calculated to do either much good or much harm upon these islands, from their knowledge of the native language, derived from the mother's side: this, in conjunction with a moral education, would tend to assist in the civilization of the people at large; at the same time there is much reason to fear their assuming a superiority over the natives, from their nearness of kin to Europeans or Americans from whom they have sprung. Although little to be proud of on this account, yet it mostly happens that they abound in pride and haughtiness; and the fathers of such being for the most part runaway sailors, rum-sellers, or other profligate characters, their offspring, from earliest age, are accustomed to scenes of vice and wickedness; the effects of which are not likely to be shaken off as they grow up, but rather to render them highly injurious to the natives around them, by their unrestrained, immoral, and base conduct and example. Not the least difficulty to be surmounted, is that of finding suitable employment to keep them out of mischief, having been trained in habits of sloth and idleness, and ignorance of every domestic and useful occupation whatever. We have had a visit from the surgeon of the British whaler Corsair, lately arrived from Ascension Isle. The Corsair was lost upon the Nautilus Reef, near one of the Kingsmill group. This young man, with five seamen, were saved in a whale-boat: after enduring great hardship for lack of food, they were favoured at last to reach the isle of Ascension, in the North Pacific. The Corsair was fitting out in the West India dock, at the time the Henry Freeling was equipping in the City Canal, in 1833.

18th. (First day.)—Having no engagement on shore, the day was spent on board with our own people. In the afternoon, two seamen from the Ganymede, of London, on her way to the Hudson's Bay Company's settlement on the Columbia River, north-west coast of America, attended with our men. I had a few words to utter in testimony to the light of Christ Jesus, which shines in every heart: and the necessity of bringing our thoughts, words, and actions to it. Before leaving our vessel, these men were furnished with tracts of different kinds.

24th.—In the course of the week, a prospect of holding another public meeting with the foreigners and half-whites in the Mariners' Chapel, has at intervals crossed my mind; and yesterday afternoon, accidentally meeting with the missionary from the Columbia River, (at present here on a visit,) who occasionally officiates as pastor, he asked me in plain terms, if I would occupy the Mariners' Chapel next First day, either in the morning, afternoon, or evening. I told him that I had thought a little about it; but it seemed to pass away at the moment, and nothing was fixed, although I was not quite clear of the subject. Today it seemed best for me to see this young man again, and to tell him, if right for me to do so, I would send him a written notice to be read at the close of the morning meeting, which would serve as an invitation to all present to attend a meeting in the evening, held according to the practice of Friends.

26th.—On Seventh day evening, having prepared written notices of the intended meeting before-mentioned, in readiness for distribution on First day morning, and finding freedom to circulate them when the day opened, Captain Keen was commissioned to do the needful, in order to spread the information that a meeting for worship would be held in the evening, after the usual manner of our Society. In the course of the day our crew assembled for devotional purposes. The weight of the prospect spread upon my mind, was as a heavy burden through the day, raising in me strong cries to Him from whom only comes help and strength, for ability to do His will, and to exalt His ever great and excellent name. We repaired in time to the shore, and were the first that took seats in the meeting. The people gathered slowly, but with quietness; and the number was probably as large as at any time previously. After a considerable time of silence, beyond all expectation solid, I had to supplicate Him who only has immortality, and dwelling in the light;—that every thing in us that stood opposed to His righteous principle of light, life, and love, might be shaken and removed out of the way; that that only which cannot be shaken may remain,—to the exaltation of His own great name, and the establishment of the kingdom of Christ Jesus, which shall never have an end. Afterwards the people sat as if accustomed to silence. The first expressions with which the silence was broken, were;—As “no man can save his brother, or give to God a ransom for his soul” so no man can perform for another the solemn act of worshipping the Almighty Creator. If I were to speak to you, or read to you for an hour, it would only be an act between a man and his fellow-creatures, and not worship; for worship can only be performed between a man and his Maker, who is a Spirit. “God is a Spirit: and they that worship Him, must worship Him in spirit and in truth.”—“The Father seeks such to worship Him.”—“Our fathers worshipped in this mountain” said the woman of Samaria to our condescending Lord; “and you say, that in Jerusalem is the place where men ought to worship. Jesus says unto her, Woman, believe me, the hour comes, when you shall neither in this mountain, nor yet at Jerusalem, worship the Father. You worship what you do not know: we know what we worship; for salvation is of the Jews. But the hour comes, and now is, when the true worshippers shall worship the Father in spirit and in truth; for the Father seeks such to worship Him.” This is the will of the Father, that we should hear His beloved Son, Christ Jesus:—“I am the light of the world,” said He, “he that follows me shall not walk in darkness, but shall have the light of life.” The same eternal Power who said, “Let there be light, and there was light;”—even God, who commanded the light to shine out of darkness, has shined in our hearts, to give us the light of the knowledge of His own glory, in the face of Christ Jesus: it is to this light that all men must be turned, and to which all men must come if they are saved. This is the condemnation, that light is come into the world, and men are not willing to believe in it, because it makes manifest their dark and sinful state: they love darkness rather than light, because their deeds are evil. “For every one that does evil hates the light, neither comes to it, lest his deeds should be reproved.” Such continue under the power of Satan; “but he that does truth comes to the light, that his deeds may be made manifest, that they are wrought in God;”—he is turned from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God:—he receives forgiveness of sins, and inheritance among them which are sanctified by faith which is in Christ Jesus, the life and light of men. The people were very attentive, and such a solemn stillness prevailed the greatest part of the time, that if they could not have been seen upon their seats, it would have been difficult to ascertain whether any persons were present. It was the Lord's doing; and as is His name, so is His praise forever!

27th.—Yesterday had a satisfactory visit from the Canadian missionary stationed on the Columbia river, north-west coast of America. He was desirous of information respecting the principles of our religious Society, and of possessing a Book of Extracts; from having only one on board the Henry Freeling of the new edition, a copy of the old edition was given him, with a copy of Bates's Doctrines, etc. I look forward to furnishing him with some religious tracts, which may be useful to the North American Indians, amongst whom a mission is established; although the result is hopeless indeed, as these poor people are too often paid in rum by the trading vessels, both American and British, for their beaver skins, etc.; which, with other causes, is fast sweeping from the face of the earth this injured race of mankind. Muskets and gunpowder are among the principal articles of barter goods taken to them.

This afternoon I received a letter from the senior missionary here, of which the following extract is part:

'I am happy to inform you that today we commence a series of meetings with the people for their spiritual benefit. The hours of service for five days will be sun-rise, ten o'clock a.m., two o'clock p.m., four o'clock p.m., in the natives' chapel; and a meeting at one of our houses at half-past seven o'clock p.m. Probably there will be present some hundreds of the people more than usual, possibly a thousand: perhaps our chapel will be filled: several of my brethren will be present from the other stations on this island. If you will favour us with your assistance tomorrow at ten, or at four o'clock, I will gladly interpret for you, Providence permitting. Shall be happy to see you and your son at any of our meetings,—the field is white.'

I called the same evening at the writer's house; and having considered the subject, acknowledged the receipt of his letter, and told him that I had felt nothing upon my mind towards the meetings tomorrow, which he had mentioned. All that seemed safe for me to say was, that I had a desire to be present when the largest body of the people was collected together. It appeared to me that the forenoon of the following First day would be the right time for me to be there, which was at last fully agreed upon. While at this house, five marriages were solemnized at seven o'clock p.m., in the room where we sat. This ceremony to four couples was performed in the native language, and in English to the fifth, the man being an American negro. One thousand five hundred and forty-six marriages have taken place upon these islands within the last year. It is hoped that the institution of regular marriage will be of use to this people; but it is greatly to be feared, from what the missionary himself said, that their solemn vows and promises are soon forgotten.

First Month, 30th.—On Fifth day our meeting was held as usual. Yesterday employed in selecting various books and lessons for the use of schools. For the last two or three days, the prospect before me of attending the native meeting has been more formidable than usual, from the apprehension, lest I should be found running, if not altogether unsent, without an evidence sufficiently strong, that it is my duty to be there. I have endeavoured to keep close to the exercise, though in much conflict of mind.

31st. (First day.)—Had an almost sleepless night, but towards morning the way seemed to open with relieving clearness for me to attend the native meeting: landed in due time, and called upon the missionary, who accompanied us to the meeting. When on the way, Hiram Bingham asked whether I would prefer speaking to the people before the service began, or after it was over. This question was so unexpected, that I replied without proper consideration, that I had rather wait, I meant in silence before the Lord; but he supposed until their service was gone through, and of course matters went on in their usual way. I felt regret afterwards that I had not more fully entered into explanation at the moment. It was afterwards proposed by Hiram Bingham that I should go into the pulpit with himself and another missionary, saying, that the crowd would be so great that he should not be heard if he interpreted from the floor. This proposal was declined at first; but on getting into the place, I was convinced that if I did not go then, it would scarcely be possible afterwards should it be needful, as the floor was already almost a solid mass of people; so we proceeded accordingly without delay. I sat as one who had the sentence of death in himself, and felt so much depressed, that at one time I thought of telling Hiram Bingham that I did not expect to have any thing to say to the people, but was withheld from doing so. In addition to their usual services on these occasions, a child was baptized, and it seemed long before all was finished, and general silence prevailed. After a short interval I stood up, when Hiram Bingham exhorted the people to stillness. I remarked on taking up the time of the meeting, which had already sat long; but that I was induced to stand before them once more to communicate whatever might be given me on the occasion. The attention of the people seemed now fully arrested, and after a solemn pause it was with me to express the encouraging language of the Lord's prophet,—“Arise, shine; your light is come, and the glory of the Lord is risen upon you. For behold, the darkness shall cover the earth, and gross darkness the people: but the Lord shall arise upon you and his glory shall be seen upon you.” Thus was announced by holy inspiration, the light of that glorious gospel morning, then preparing to dawn upon the benighted regions of the earth, to dispel the mists of darkness from the mind of man; that sin should no longer have dominion over the human race, but that mercy and truth should meet together, and love, and joy, and peace through righteousness, should prevail from the river to the uttermost parts of the earth: that as sin has reigned unto death, so now might grace reign through righteousness, unto eternal life, by Jesus Christ our Lord. There is no other way by which mankind can participate in the life and immortality that are brought to light by the gospel, than that of believing in Christ Jesus, and turning to the light of His Holy Spirit, which shines in every heart. I was sure that these beloved people (telling them so) were no strangers to the name of Christ: but that the bare name is not enough; I wanted them to become acquainted with His power, to save them from their sins: without this He would be no Saviour of theirs. The number of people present was computed at four thousand and upwards, and being placed above them, the heat was almost insupportable: they stood in crowds outside of the six double doors, and about a window that was open at the back of the pulpit. The building is one hundred and ninety-six feet long, and sixty-eight feet wide, and was, to all appearance, as full as the people could pack together. The mercy of the Lord is from everlasting to everlasting, and His truth to all generations of them that fear and love Him. We sat a few minutes with Hiram Bingham's family after the meeting concluded; and then returned on board to our own crew, who were assembled in the cabin in the afternoon.

Second Month 9th.—While at the Consul's yesterday evening, with eight or nine other persons, and a general conversation going forward in which I had taken little or no share, I felt my heart attracted by that power, at whose approach the earth is silent; and abiding under it, I thought that something might arise towards the company present, but in that was mistaken. Remaining for some time under sensible weakness and fear, a public meeting next First day forenoon, at the Mariners' Chapel was presented to the view of my mind; to which I was favoured to feel resigned and willing, keeping the matter closely to myself.

13th—Not able to take any exercise on shore since last Second day, until yesterday evening, on account of the extreme wetness of the weather, it being the rainy season in this region. In the course of our walk, called upon one of the missionaries for the translation of an article relative to the arrival of the Henry Freeling at Oahu, that had appeared in the Hawaiian Teacher, a semi-monthly periodical, printed at the mission press, and edited by a regularly ordained minister. When coming away, without any previous hint on my part, he kindly proposed that I should have the Mariners' Chapel tomorrow, (First day,) either in the forenoon or evening, or both. I parted from him with saying, I should turn the matter over and let him know, in order that timely notice might be given, if the meeting was of my appointing, so that the people might be fully aware of its being held according to the established practice of Friends: but I thought it well to wait a further time before giving a decided answer, lest it should not come to pass; although the prospect had been again and again before me early and late, at intervals, since I first got sight of it.

This morning, being Seventh day, it seemed best for me to move forward by having notices prepared, that information might be well spread in good time, both on the shore and on board of the shipping. While these were preparing, I went on shore to the missionary, and told him that I believed it safest for me to hold a meeting tomorrow in the forenoon: the way was now thoroughly cleared for the distribution of the notices; and I endeavoured to dwell under the weight of the responsibility of this important engagement, which seemed fastened upon me as a knot not easily untied. My mind is often turned to the Lord with secret cries for help: greatly do I desire that the noble cause of Truth may not be tarnished in my hands; but that His ever great and adorable name may be exalted, and the people turned to the power of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, and the creature laid low and kept in dependence on Him alone; that the work and the praise may be His, unto whom the kingdom, and the power, and the glory, forever belong. In the afternoon spent some time with the manager of the book-binding department of the American printing establishment: his wife superintends a school of the native children, and with her husband appears to move in much plainness and simplicity.

15th.—After a restless night, landed in good time yesterday morning in readiness for the appointed meeting; which was well attended by the residents and strangers from the shipping. After a time of silence, it was with me to revive among them the Divine command, “Be still, and know that I am God;” and that this command must be obeyed before we can come to the blessed knowledge of the only true God, and his Son Jesus Christ, whom to know is life eternal:—desiring that we might humble ourselves before Him, and in the silence of all flesh “be still” peradventure He would graciously condescend to overshadow us with his heavenly presence. After recommending that we should endeavour to settle down in stillness of mind before the God of the spirits of all flesh, I again resumed my seat. A comforting solemnity soon spread over us, under the precious covering of which we sat, until the time was come for my standing up again, when it seemed increasingly to prevail. I reminded them of the expressions of those formerly, who were struck with the display of the Divine power of the Saviour of the world when personally upon earth,—“What manner of man is this, that even the winds and the sea obey Him!” and that the solemnity then so evident was not at our command, but came from Him, unto whom all power in heaven and earth is given. Man cannot cause it: has he “commanded the morning since his days, or caused the day-spring to know his place? No, verily, no more than the leopard can change his spots, and the Ethiopian his skin;”—it is in the power of Him only, who “declares unto man what is his thought,” to do this. We must all pass through the great work of regeneration, before the kingdom can be entered; it is wrought in the heart through the faith of the operation of God, who raised from the dead our Lord Jesus, that great Shepherd of the sheep; by whom, and with whom, we must also rise from death unto life: but before we can rise with Him, we must be willing to suffer with Him; we must know what it is to be crucified with Him,—the lust of the eyes, and the pride of life, totally disregarded and set at naught. But these things, which war against the soul, must be removed, before we can know and be admitted into the fellowship of His sufferings; and we must witness the power of his resurrection, before we can adopt for ourselves, from heart-felt living knowledge, the apostolic language of—“I am crucified with Christ; nevertheless I live, yet not I, but Christ lives in me: and the life which I now live in the flesh, I live by the faith of the Son of God, who loved me, and gave himself for me.” There is no obtaining and wearing the crown, but by the way of the cross: we must be willing to suffer with our suffering Lord; and it is only such as suffer with him, that shall reign with Him in glory. We must be willing to bring our deeds to the light of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, which shines in every heart, and to bear the indignation of the Lord, because we have sinned against him;—to sit alone and keep silence, ashamed and confounded, as in the dust, because of the reproach of our youth: and it is only while we have the light, that we can thus bring our deeds to it, and walk in it. He that walks in darkness knows not where he goes: and if by neglect and disobedience, the light in us be darkness, how great is that darkness! We may sin out the day of our visitation; then the candle of the Lord is withdrawn, or put out; for He has declared, “My Spirit shall not always strive with man.” These visitations are the merciful tokens of the Father's love, to draw man to the Holy Spirit of His beloved Son in the heart, “the life and light of men;” unto whom, although shining in all, none of us can come in our own will and strength, or by any inherent righteousness of our own. “No man comes unto me,” said Christ, “except my Father which has sent me draw him; and I will raise him up at the last day.” As no man comes to the Son but by the Father, so no man comes to the Father but by the Son; according to his word, “No man comes to the Father but by me.” By grace are we saved, and that not of ourselves; it is through the boundless mercy and everlasting love of God in Jesus Christ. After this manner was I strengthened to declare that loving-kindness which is better than life, and to testify of that grace, which comes by Jesus Christ. The meeting held longer than usual, but ended well: I trust the Lord magnified his own power in the hearts of some; who is blessed and worthy, and God over all forever. Most of the missionary families were present.

16th.—Visited the school for native girls, under the superintendence of a missionary's wife; which, for good order and general quietness, is the best conducted establishment of the kind we have yet seen. For some time after the formation of this school, the children could not be prevailed upon to go forward with the regular duties, without an adopted child of the queen's led the way, and had the preference shown to her. When ordered to break up at noon, or in the afternoon, they would all retain their seats; and when the reason was asked for this, would say, 'Let the queen go first;' although she was a mere shrimp, in size, compared with many of the other children, and not more than six years old. The school-mistress has taken much pains to abolish such an unnecessary and invidious distinction, and has not hesitated to punish this child when in fault, like the other children, without showing any partiality because of her patronage; for a time this gave great offence, but by firmness and steady perseverance the difficulty was at last completely surmounted. Most of the children have now got the better of yielding such undue servility, although it is said that some of the timid still consider this child's word as law.

Chapter XXVII.

Interview with the Queen—Public Meeting—Half-Caste Boys School—Address to the Rulers of the Sandwich Islands—Visit from the Mission Families—Meeting at the Chapel—An Infidel Ship's Company—Appointed Meeting—Departure from Honolulu—Hawaii—Anchor in Kalakakua Bay—Public Meeting—Interesting Opportunity with the Mission Family—Proceed to Kailua—Native Meetings—Visit of the King—Departure for Waimea.

Second Month 17th, 1836.—This evening repaired to Hiram Bingham's by appointment to meet Kinau, the reigning chiefess, or queen. Her husband Kekuanoa was there, and Kanaina another principal chief and his wife, a woman of higher rank than Kinau on her father's side. It proved an interesting season; they were desirous of being instructed in the best mode of governing the islands, and benefiting the people. I told them, there is but one way to effect this, and that is upon the principles of the gospel; nothing else will stand. Kinau has long been desirous of prohibiting the importation and use of ardent spirits altogether, and requested some advice upon this head. It would require caution, I said; but that the first step would be to stop all further importation; and that they themselves had better become purchasers of the stock on hand, and empty the ram into the river, than that the people should be destroyed by its effects; the dealers would then have no cause to complain: that best wisdom should be sought for to direct, and that all these things should be conducted throughout in a Christian spirit. It is high time something was done to remove this evil from amongst the people. They expressed satisfaction with the interview, and suggested that we should meet again for the further consideration of this important subject, namely, the best manner of governing the islands and benefiting the people. Both these females are tall, portly women, of shrewd understanding, and have a gentleness in their demeanour not usually possessed by others of the same rank, though on first appearing they assume much reserve and austerity.

18th.—Some time back my mind was attracted towards preparing something like an address, to be left with those that bear rule over the inhabitants of these islands; which might serve to remind them at a future day, that I had not omitted to warn them of those evils, which, if suffered to continue, will undermine every effort to improve their condition, both civil and religious. The conversation which took place last evening seems to have opened the way for something further, and confirmed me in believing myself required, as ability may be afforded, to draw up and leave some written document for the clearance of myself towards them.

20th.—Before retiring to rest, I began to feel a little towards the evening meeting at the Mariners' chapel tomorrow, and the love of the gospel flowed in my heart so encouragingly, that a willingness was at once begotten, to give up to a meeting being appointed on my account.

21st. (First day.)—This morning I received a note written at seven o'clock a.m., from the American preacher, offering his place of worship for an evening meeting. On solidly considering the subject, I believe, with an honest desire to do the will of my gracious Master, I did not feel easy to let the opportunity pass away without availing myself of it; and therefore, in due time sent written information, in order to insure its being held as a Friends' meeting. In the course of the day our sailors were assembled twice for devotional purposes; and in the evening they attended the public meeting at a quarter past seven o'clock, an hour best adapted to the climate and the people. The meeting was larger than looked for, as the weather was showery; a number of strangers were present, who had arrived two days previously from Boston, also the most seriously inclined of the residents, several branches of the missionary establishment, with an increased number of sailors, and many of the islanders.

We sat long in silence, but under a feeling, solemn beyond expression, which chained down opposing spirits. When the time came for me to stand up, I had to contrast the worship of Almighty God under the Jewish dispensation in the outward temple, with that of the gospel in the inner temple of the heart; the latter altogether spiritual, because “God is a spirit, and they that worship him, must worship him in spirit and in truth.” How can we so expressively manifest our fear and love in approaching the presence of infinite purity, as in solemn, awful silence, in humble watchfulness of mind, endeavouring to detect and suppress every creaturely desire? Words are inadequate, and not essential in the performance of worship to Him who is a Spirit, for his Holy Spirit searches all things; the most hidden and secret thought is known to this all-penetrating, all-searching Power. No offering is acceptable to Him, but what He himself prepares; for “the preparation of the heart in man, and the answer of the tongue, is of the Lord,” and the entire prostration of the will of the creature, under the preparing sanctifying influence of his Almighty power, constitutes the pure, unadulterated offering; which, free from human contrivance and performance, rises a spiritual sacrifice, acceptable to God, through the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus Christ, the great and everlasting high priest of our profession.

The people were called upon to behold what manner of love the Father has bestowed upon his creature man, that we should become his sons: for who can comprehend the greatness of that love, wherewith “God so loved the world, that he gave his only begotten Son, that whosoever believes in Him should not perish, but have everlasting life;” who can contemplate the fulness and extent of love like this, and not feel a grateful tribute to arise, of “thanks be unto God for his unspeakable gift?” My soul longs that all mankind may become acquainted with the preciousness of this costly gift. It is the same which was testified of in the memorable and instructive conference of the blessed Saviour with the Samaritan woman, when He condescended to answer her question, “How is it that you, being a Jew, ask drink of me, who am a woman of Samaria? for the Jews have no dealings with the Samaritans.” “If you knew the gift of God,” our Lord replied, “and who it is that says unto you, Give me to drink; you would have asked of Him, and he would have given you living water.” “The woman says unto him, Sir, you have nothing to draw with, and the well is deep; from where then have you this living water? Are you greater than our father Jacob, who gave us the well, and drank thereof himself, and his children, and his cattle? Jesus answered and said unto her, Whosoever drinks of this water shall thirst again; but whosoever drinks of the water that I shall give him, shall never thirst; but the water that I shall give him, shall be in him a well of water springing up into everlasting life.” The poor woman perceiving the great advantage of possessing water, of which “he that drinks shall never thirst,” said, “Sir, give me this water that I thirst not, neither come here to draw.” Her expectation was thus raised, and her understanding opened more and more to discern, from what followed, that she had met with one, from whom nothing was hidden, and that knew all that was in her heart; and perceiving that He was a prophet, and by inquiry having elicited for the lasting benefit of all mankind, the declaration, that the hour was come, “that the true worshippers shall worship the Father in spirit and in truth;”—confounded and self-convicted, she concluded by saying, “I know that Messiah comes, which is called Christ; when he is come, he will tell us all things.” Then the Lord of life and glory was pleased to reveal himself, telling her, “I that speak unto you am he.” From what she had heard and felt, she could not for a moment doubt; and leaving her water-pot, went her way into the city to proclaim his power, and declare Him to her brethren;—“Come, see a man which told me all things that ever I did: is not this the Christ?” I was strengthened to make a solemn and confident appeal to all present, who had attained to years capable of serious thought and reflection, if they had not at seasons heard the voice of this “unspeakable gift,”—bringing to their remembrance “all things that ever they did,” in order that they might repent, return unto God, and live forever. This is the grace that brings salvation,—in this we must all believe,—to this we must all come, and hearken and obey its teachings. The above is the substance of what was declared amongst them: the people were very attentive, as has been uniformly the case at every meeting.

Second Month 24th.—This afternoon the Columbia barque and Beaver steam-vessel prepared to proceed to the Columbia river. Before sailing, they were furnished with a supply of tracts, i.e. those printed for Friends, for the Religious Tract Society, and a number of temperance tracts, which were received with apparent kindness. The crews of these vessels are amongst the most profligate that have visited the port of Honolulu since our arrival; they are both in the employ of the London Hudson's Bay Company.

While on shore this evening in the direction of Diamond Hill, I was suddenly attracted by an appearance of light over the hills, which I supposed to be the rising moon; but I soon found it was a beautiful meteor, appearing like two splendid bars of light, parallel to each other, travelling towards the north. The natives shouted on seeing it, considering it a forerunner of the death of one of their principal chiefs.

25th.—Held our week-day meeting as usual, which proved a low, stripped and barren season; but we must be content to suffer with a suffering Lord; and truly the state of the people in this place is affectingly dark,—the prince of darkness reigns unmasked,—the lives and conduct of the major part of the white residents declare it openly, to whom these remarks principally refer.

26th.—Today visited the school of half-white boys. As our calling was altogether unexpected, there could have been no contrivance whatever to show off to the best advantage. Sixteen boys were present: we heard them read, spell, and answer a variety of questions, and saw specimens of their writing. This school has been established rather more than three years, and although no great progress has been made by any of the scholars; yet when we consider the habits in which they have been trained, and the baneful examples to which they are daily and almost hourly exposed when at home, of drinking, swearing, gambling, and every evil that can well be imagined, it is surprising that they are as they are. Several of the parents are grog-sellers, and keepers of gambling-houses. Some of the children are the offspring of the principal inhabitants, American or English, on the father's side, who live with native women, but unmarried. In point of intellect these children are equal to any in the world, and some of them particularly quick and intelligent; but none more so than one trueborn native boy, adopted by a white resident, from supposed motives of policy.

On hearing them read some manuscript verses on 'a little boy that never told a lie,' also a paper against committing sin, I perceived something gathering upon my mind, and told the master that I wished to say a few words before we separated, as we might never meet together again. I wished them fully to understand, that the knowledge they were acquiring would in reality be of no benefit, but render their condemnation greater, unless obedience kept pace with it; reviving the Saviour's words,—“If you know these things, happy are you if you do them.” That those verses on 'a little boy that never told a lie,' or those 'against committing sin,' even if they had them by heart, would be of no avail to them, if they gave way to telling lies, or to committing any other sin: for “nothing that is unclean, nothing that is impure, that works an abomination, or makes a lie,” shall enter the kingdom of heaven. That the only way to escape falling into temptation, is at all times, as much as may be, to consider ourselves in the presence of Almighty God; who sees and knows all our actions, and the most secret thoughts of the heart, by His Holy Spirit, which searches all things, even the deep things of God; every imagination of our thoughts is known to Him, nothing can be hid. That some of them were old enough to know when they did wrong, either in telling untruths, or when in any other way they committed sin; they then felt uncomfortable and unhappy in themselves: that these are the reproofs of the Holy Spirit for sin and disobedience, and if attended to would lead to life; and to these I wished them to take heed. That the Lord loves an early sacrifice: He delights to regard it: that they must have heard what the voice of wisdom says in the Holy Scriptures; “I love them that love me, and they that seek me early shall find me.” That they could not begin too soon to seek an acquaintance with the Lord's Holy Spirit in their hearts, that so they might become truly wise. That the great end and object of all teaching and all learning, should be to make wise unto salvation. The boys were very attentive, and behaved in a solid manner. We remained until the school was dismissed, and then returned on board. In the evening we were again on shore, and were detained there until after nine o'clock, by a violent storm of thunder, lightning, and rain.

29th.—Yesterday, First day, collected the crew twice in the cabin for devotional purposes: our intervals of silence were solid and consoling. This afternoon came in the Gryphon, from St. Blas, bringing intelligence from America, via Panama, in sixty-eight days, of the destruction by fire of a large portion of the city of New York.

Third Month 1st.—Having completed an address to those who bear rule over the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands, it seemed best to consult the senior missionary on the subject of getting it translated into their language. After having perused it, he very kindly undertook to translate it, in readiness to lay before the king and chiefs when convened for the occasion, in the course of a day or two.

11th.—This morning Hiram Bingham came on board to say we were expected this evening at his house, as Kinau the governing chief, with her associates, and the king himself, would be there; and that my address would probably be read. May the Lord incline their hearts to render unto him His due.

12th.—Soon after sunset last evening, we repaired to Hiram Bingham's, where the whole of the expected company assembled, with some others. After tea the address was introduced, and read in the native language: the greatest attention was manifested by the principals present, and a solemn feeling prevailed over us. Shortly after the reading was finished, one of the females proposed that it should be printed, which was confirmed by Kinau, and it appeared to be the mind of all the parties concerned: unless this were done, it is scarcely probable that the end intended would be answered, as to the future rulers of these islands. Kinau remarked, that it was very easy to be understood. Having done what I believed to be my part, I can peacefully leave the result to Him, who alone can make it subservient to any purpose for his own praise and glory, and the well-being of the workmanship of his hands. The following is a copy of the address:—

Address to the Rulers of the Sandwich Islands.

As the present and eternal well-being of the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands, is often the fervent and ardent desire of my heart, my attention has of late been arrested by the belief, that it will be best for me to leave behind a written memorial; which, under the blessing of the Almighty parent of the whole human family, “the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ,” may have a tendency to remind the governing chief and her associates in authority, or those into whose hands the government of these islands may be entrusted at a future day, of their great responsibility and indispensable duty to God, to themselves, and to the people over whom they preside.

In order to draw down the Divine blessing both upon prince and people, or upon rulers and people, let it never be forgotten, that “he that rules over men must be just, ruling in the fear of God.” The fear of God is the foundation-stone, upon which every Christian government ought to be erected: upon this only it can stand secure and prosper. This fear at once makes it safe and permanent, because it “is clean, enduring forever” for where the true fear of God prevails over every other consideration, the heart is kept clean and watchful against every temptation to let self-interest or partiality bear sway, either in the case of ourselves or others, when decrees or laws are made or enacted, or when judgment is called for between man and man. Impartiality is the life of justice, as justice is of government.

When every thing is conducted in this fear in the sight of God, divested of partiality and every sinister motive, without feeling any painful sense or evidence of condemnation after a decision of importance is come to, (and every case is important because it demands strict justice;) then have we confidence towards Him, inasmuch as our duty is performed towards Him, and justice has assuredly prevailed; and having done our duty towards God in this decision, it is done also to ourselves and to the people. “But if our heart condemn us, God, who knows all things, is greater than our hearts” and we may rest assured, that such a decision is not in righteous judgment: it has not been come to in His fear, nor in that love which is first of all due to Him, and then to our neighbour or brother, as unto ourselves. This love would not fail to prompt us to do unto others, as we would that others should do unto us; and for lack of this, an unjust decision has been made, for which we are condemned by the Lord's holy and pure witness in our hearts; it has been made contrary to the commandment in the old law, and also to the benign principle and precept of the glorious gospel, both which are distinguished by the heaven-born characteristic of love to God, and love to man. “God is love, and he that dwells in love, dwells in God, and God in him.” Such are the excellent of the earth, and they compose the blessed in heaven: they are come “to the spirits of just men made perfect,” and are fit to rule over men: their judgment is just and righteous; they rule “in the fear of God.” The religion of Jesus at once qualifies a man for every station of life, in which it pleases Almighty God to place him; but it is the ever-blessed truth in possession, in the inward parts, which alone can safely guide out of all error into all truth, and make us to know wisdom. A mere profession only will avail us nothing, if we are destitute of the true fear and love of God, demonstrated by good works: and faith is the root of all, for without this we cannot please God; nor can we fear and love that, in which we do not believe. The Saviour of the world was holy, harmless, humble, meek, and lowly, just, merciful, and full of love; yes, love itself personified, when among us to teach what we should do when He was gone. But He is amongst us still, and in us too, an ever-living and perpetual preacher of the same grace, by His Holy Spirit in our consciences; and by this alone kings and others, whose province it is to rule over men, are qualified to promote amongst the people whatsoever things are true, honest, just, pure, lovely, and of good report; and where these are the fruit and works produced, such a government and such a people must be lovely indeed to every beholder. But now let us examine whether our justice is complete in the fear and love of God, and to our fellow-men, lest we should be deceiving ourselves, and endangering the well-being of our own immortal souls; while those we are ruling over, shall be finally admitted, with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, into the kingdom of God, and ourselves thrust out: “For whosoever shall keep the whole law, and yet offend in one point, is guilty of all”—in like manner, “he that is unjust in a little,” is at once upon a level with him who is unjust in much. And although we may be faithful and strictly just in the administration of the laws themselves, without partiality or respect of persons; yet, if these laws are such as to sanction covetousness on the part of rulers, and to allow them to grind the faces of the poor by unwarrantable oppression and extortion, or to uphold and support themselves in vice, luxury, and extravagance; then this calculation may be safely made, that sooner or later the oppressed people will take the reins of such a government into their own hands, and rule in their turn after the example of injustice and oppression, which has been set before their eyes, and under which they have so long groaned and suffered, unheeded and unregarded; unless the merciful and righteous Lord should please, in great compassion, to gather them to Himself from the face of the earth, and permit strangers and foreigners to possess these fruitful islands, who for lack of firmness and justice on the part of the rulers, towards God, to themselves, and to the greatly injured aborigines of the soil, are rapidly establishing themselves upon it, and prosecuting commerce, some branches of which are obviously pernicious. Therefore, they who rule over men must be just, ruling in the fear of God: and where they are happily thus ruling, they will be truly great, and their reign glorious; every act of injustice will be avoided: love, joy, peace, and comfort will prevail in the land; the population, instead of diminishing, will increase and multiply abundantly, and the blessing of the Lord will rest upon it.

'Happy those rulers,' said a wise man, 'who are great by justice, and that people which is free by obedience:' and they who are just to the people in great things, and humour them oftentimes in small ones, are sure to have and keep them from all the world. The members of an obedient well-regulated family, treated with every act of affectionate kindness, never meet with any home so sweet as their own; besides, long experience and holy example tell us, that goodness raises a nobler passion in the soul, and begets and gives a more exalted sense of duty, than cruelty, oppression, and severity.' Sore and heavy judgments are denounced by the Most High in the Scriptures of truth, against oppression, and oppressors of the poor and of him that has no helper,—“He that oppresses the poor is a reproach to his Maker; but he that honours Him has mercy on the poor:” and the justice and mercy of rulers should shine conspicuously in all their actions. The wicked and unjust man and his oppressor, have their portion and inheritance appointed of the Lord, and it is declared, “they shall receive it of the Almighty: if his children be multiplied, it is for the sword, and his offspring shall not be satisfied with bread; those that remain of him shall be buried in death, and his widows shall not weep: though he heap up silver as the dust, and prepare raiment as the clay; he may prepare it, but the just shall put it on, and the innocent shall divide the silver.” The Israelites were sorely oppressed in their day, but what was the result? the destruction of Pharaoh and all his followers. If the poor people of this island and the surrounding ones are grievously oppressed, either by burdensome claims or taxation, they that rule over them cannot be just, ruling in the fear of God; and however they may reconcile these things to their own consciences for a time, the Lord's righteous judgments will assuredly overtake them: He will plead the cause of the poor and of the oppressed with a mighty hand and stretched out arm; and will rid them of their oppressors, for His great name's sake. Now, that justice and judgment in which the Lord delights, would at once loose the bands of wickedness, undo the heavy burdens, let the oppressed go free, and break every yoke of exaction and extortion. The people would then enjoy the comforts and blessings, which the Lord in mercy has bountifully showered down upon them; they would then feel an interest in the welfare of their neighbours, and in their country at large: but if afflicted by the pressure of heavy burdens, every feeling of sympathy and social interest is benumbed; they have nothing to loose and nothing to gain, and it matters little to them who are their rulers; they can scarcely be worse off than they are. If their privileges as men and brethren be not consulted and respected, the profession of Christianity is but mockery; instruction only serves to show them, that their rulers are not just, nor ruling in the fear of God: and the pretensions of such rulers to religion are vain, more calculated to produce disgust and abhorrence at its restraints, than piety, virtue, and holiness.

Although much has been said, and might still be said, yet it all centres in one point at last;—“He that rules over men must be just, ruling in the fear of God.” Such as are desirous of ruling in His fear, can only be advised to take council of Him on every occasion, by invariably consulting the holy witness in their own hearts, which will neither flatter nor deceive. If we are truly desirous of obeying the royal law, of doing to others as we would ourselves be done unto, let us endeavour to place ourselves in the situation of others, and act for them as if acting for ourselves, in all cases and at all times, without partiality, or respect of persons, whether rich or poor, high or low, bond or free, old or young, stranger or friend;—for the same justice is due to all. It would be as presumptuous and assuming, as it would be altogether in vain, for any individual to take upon himself to advise in a matter, which involves so great a responsibility as that of ruling over men;—beyond simply referring all parties to the righteous and only true and safe principle of justice in the fear of God. To fear God and keep his commandments, is the whole duty of man in every station upon earth, from the loftiest prince to the humblest peasant; and the way to fear Him is, for all of us to bring every thought, word and deed, to the light of his Holy Spirit in the secret of the soul; and to watch and pray, and wait in this light, to know His holy will, which would clearly discover whether the action or transaction we are about to undertake or engage in, or decide upon, (whether we be rulers or people, for the question bears on all, and the light shines in all,) is done or committed in the fear of God, and in obedience to His commandments,—which are, that we should love Him above and before all, and our neighbour as ourselves. If we do not act upon these manifestations, in faithfulness and truth, our heart will condemn us; because what we do, is not done in the fear of God, who is greater than our heart, and knows all things. But if our heart condemn us not, then have we confidence toward Him; and whatsoever we ask we receive of Him, because we are walking in His fear, and keeping His commandments, and doing those things which are pleasing in His Divine sight. From the best observation I have been able to make, while hearing the sentiments of persons high in authority over these islands, in addition to an evidence upon my own mind abidingly sealed, I am thoroughly convinced by their own remarks upon things of the highest concernment, that they know [what is right] well enough: “for that which may be known of God is manifest in them, God has showed it unto them,” to the praise and glory of his grace. All that is lacking on their part, is a constant dwelling near to this precious gift of God in their own hearts, watching unto prayer; “praying always with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto with all perseverance.” Then their councils and deliberations will be blessed: they will be qualified to judge righteous judgment at all times and in all cases, against every false tongue, even to the giving “the living child to its own mother,” and no weapon formed against them by Satan or his agents, shall be suffered to prosper; for the Lord Most High will be their “shield, and their exceeding great reward.”

It is an evident sign of a corrupt and unchristian government, when any of its subjects are permitted to suffer persecution, either directly or indirectly, on the score of religious dissent from any particular established form, so long as the public peace is undisturbed; as the “sword of the magistrate should be a terror only to evil-doers, but for the praise of them that do well:”—“by their fruits you shall know them.” To persecute others, because they do not see or think as ourselves, is the sure and hateful mark, which can never be mistaken, of the false church, over which the devil presides in full power: but the true church, whose holy head is the Lord Jesus Christ, never persecuted any; but “suffers long, and is kind; bears all things; believes all things; hopes all things; endures all things; rejoices not in iniquity, but rejoices in the Truth,” its sure and immovable foundation: love and mercy being the chief corner-stone, upon which no other principle shall ever be displayed, than that of “doing to others as we would that all men should do unto us.”

Let none consider me an enemy, because I have spoken the truth. I pray that the foregoing hints may be accepted in a measure of the same love in which they are written, by one who desires the eternal salvation of all mankind.

Daniel Wheeler.

On board the Henry Freeling, in the harbour of Honolulu, the 1st of Third Month, 1836. Sandwich Isle, Oahu.

13th. (First day.)—Remained on board through the day with our own people. Strippedness and poverty of mind are my present portion, and perhaps, food of all others the most needful for me.

18th. It having been a subject of consideration, whether there would not be a propriety in our showing kind attention to the American mission, by inviting some of each family on board the Henry Freeling, as best suited their convenience, lest by an apparent non-interaction of a social kind between us, malicious reports might get circulated by the white residents, calculated to injure them in the estimation of the natives;—and also, in the hope of setting aside some false impressions detrimental to their interest, of which there had been already no slight indication;—it was concluded to adopt such a measure: we therefore called yesterday evening upon the two oldest families, who readily accepted an invitation to visit us. When leaving the senior missionary's habitation, a newspaper was put into my hand, said to contain the great 'Missionary Question,' accompanied with a desire that our sentiments might be given on the subject. On examining the paragraph alluded to, when returned on board, I found this question had been propounded by the said missionary himself to the American board, in these words: 'We are often led to inquire (can you tell us?) why it is that so few who hear the gospel in Christian countries, and in the fields of missionary labour, are savingly converted to Christ?' querying, if the cause of this acknowledged and deplored evil arose from such and such circumstances as he enumerates at full length. Both, or parts of both families came on board the 19th instant, as invited. The weather boisterous, with frequent heavy rains.

22nd.—Yesterday and today some of the members of the missions, both male and female, came on board, but the roughness of the weather necessarily shortened their visit. In the evening attempted to take exercise on shore, and although we reached the landing-place, the rain fell so heavily, that we did not quit the boat, but returned to the vessel again. In the night heavy gusts of wind from the mountains; at one o'clock a.m., the brig Bolivar drove down upon us, but no injury was sustained. Two vessels from Boston are now at anchor outside the reef; this is the third day of their being in this exposed situation, and the wind is still so strongly opposed that they cannot enter the harbour.

26th—But little communication with the shore since the 22nd instant, owing to the state of the weather. By a newspaper brought out by one of the vessels just arrived from America, we are furnished with the Epistle of the Yearly Meeting, held in London in 1835, of which a present has been made to us in great kindness: it was a treat no less welcome for not having been anticipated, and to myself particularly consoling, being replete with explanation of the principles and views of our religious Society, as held by our worthy predecessors when they first came forth; and declaring them to remain unalterably the same at this day. I trust the pure mind will be stirred up in many of our members to a serious consideration, whether we are endeavouring to uphold them in their original purity and simplicity, to the eyes of the world, and in faithfulness and gratitude to Him; who called and separated those ancient worthies from the many “Lo here's,” and “Lo there's” of their day and generation, to be a people to His praise. We also obtained a copy of an article contained in a late Petersburg Journal of Agriculture, in which our own name is mentioned in connexion with the improvement of the lands in the neighbourhood of that capital, etc. To hear of my beloved family being still there, at least when the account was printed, which was much later than any tidings we had ourselves received, although nothing could possibly be gleaned of their present state and welfare, yielded a satisfaction, which those only can appreciate, who have been long and distantly separated from all most dear on earth to memory and life.

27th. (First day.)—The weather still very boisterous. Assembled the crew in the cabin twice in the day. In the forenoon it was a dull, heavy season; in the afternoon more lively. I have been much cast down of late by several discouraging circumstances. The continuance of heavy rain not only confines us more on board, but within the narrow limits of our little heated cabin below deck. In addition to this, I do not see my way clear for leaving the island of Oahu; while most persons around are impatient to be gone, and cannot exactly enter into my feelings. The Lord alone knows, and to Him I commit my cause, and desire to bow in humble resignation to His holy Will: if only now and then favoured with a glimpse of His heavenly, life-giving presence, (however short, if certain,) it will be enough.

Fourth Month 21st.—Received a visit today, by invitation, from a white resident and his wife; whom we were desirous of noticing, on account of the good example they hold forth to the other white residents, their neighbours: his wife is a native of the island, and of good character. They have been regularly married, a very rare occurrence here in such cases; and what is still more rare, they are in repute for their moral and orderly conduct, while most of the white residents are a disgrace to a skin of any colour, and frequently have three or four native women as wives. Of course I do not include the mission families in these remarks.

23rd.—In the afternoon the king came on board to take leave of us, being about to sail for the island of Maui, and his vessel at the time waiting with her canvass spread, in readi ness to convey him away. He gave me a pressing invitation to visit him at Waiaruku on the other island: the shores were crowded with natives to witness the departure of their king. The artillery of the fort announced his final embarkation; while the shipping in the harbour, and his own brig, kept up an occasional firing, as she passed through the channel between the coral reefs. One hundred and fifty persons accompanied him as retinue. No exhibition equal to this, we are told, has occurred since the departure of Rio Rio for England.

24th. (First day.)—In the morning wrote a note to John Deill, enclosing a written notice, which he was requested to read to the people at the breaking up of the forenoon meeting;—that a public meeting for worship, after the manner of the Society of Friends, would be held in the Mariners' chapel that evening, at the usual hour; to which the company of all persons who inclined to attend was requested. Our captain delivered this note to John Deill, and no difficulty appearing on his part, notice was then personally given in such directions as seemed most likely to insure full publicity. Read portions of Scripture to our seamen twice in the course of the day. At the time appointed, landed to attend the meeting: it gathered slowly, but in the end was well attended. After sitting a while in silence, it was with me to point out the desirableness of our endeavouring to get into a quiet state of mind; that we might be sensible of the influence of the Holy Spirit, to solemnize our minds together, if He should be graciously pleased to lift up the light of His heavenly countenance upon us, and bless us therewith: we then settled down into silence before Him.

After a time, one or two persons went out, but stillness generally prevailed over the company. When the time came for me to stand up, I told them that I had had no expectation of my voice being heard again among them;—that my mouth had for several weeks been closed up, and that a heavy burden had rested upon my mind;—to what shall I compare it, but to “the roll that was written within and without, with lamentation, and mourning, and woe,” for the inhabitants of that place; who are crucifying to themselves the Son of God afresh, and by their example putting him to open shame in the face of the benighted islanders among whom they dwell. It was probable that those who were the principal causes of this travail of soul, were not among that company; but I could do no less for the clearance of my own mind, than publicly advert to this lamentable state of things; lest I should be found short of doing my own duty, though the cause of suffering might not be removed: but the disciples of Christ must be willing to suffer with their suffering Lord, and to fill up that which is behind, that which remains of the afflictions of Christ in the flesh, for his body's sake, which is the church. Notwithstanding the extent to which sin and iniquity abound, such is the wondrous love of God to his creature man, that he wills not the death of a sinner, but that all should repent, return unto Him, and live forever: for this, He gave his only begotten Son, that whosoever believes on Him should not perish, but have everlasting life; and blessed are they that have not seen, and yet have believed in the only begotten Son of God. I trusted that there were many such believers then before me, who profess to be His followers: but a bare profession only of Christ would do little for any of us; nothing short of the possession of the unspeakable gift of His Holy Spirit, will avail us. It is no matter under what denomination of religion we are walking before men, or to what outward and visible body of professing Christians we may belong, if we are not members of the mystical body, of which Christ Jesus is the holy Head and everlasting High Priest,—the church triumphant, whose names are written in heaven: and there is no other way of attaining to this, but by and through Christ Jesus,—by receiving Him in the way of his coming. We must be willing to take His yoke upon us, and learn of Him meekness and lowliness; we must be willing to submit to the restraining yoke of His Holy Spirit upon us, and to bring our deeds to its light, which will show us our sins, and our exceeding sinfulness, and cause us to feel our miserable condition. As this yoke is patiently abode under, the effect will be godly sorrow unto repentance, never to be repented of: the glories of eternity will be gradually opened to our view, and we shall be permitted to behold the blessedness of those, who have found rest in Jesus. Our sins will be removed from us as far as the east is from the west, and blotted out forever for His sake; and we shall be numbered among those who have returned, “and come to Zion, with songs and everlasting joy upon their heads,”—ransomed and redeemed from our sins by the blood of Jesus, the new and living way, and the only way of initiation into membership, with those whose names are written in heaven. Unless we witness this for ourselves, and know from heart-felt experience Christ Jesus to save us from our sins, He is no Saviour of ours: and if we die in our sins, where He is, we can never come.

I stood long among them: and although in the forepart of the time it seemed heavy getting on, yet towards the end, the life spread over us in an eminent manner, and reigned over all. The people seemed as if riveted to their seats, instead of rising up and hasting away, when I sat down. After this I had to appeal to themselves as witnesses of the power which prevailed over us. They still remained stationary after I again sat down, until informed that the meeting was over. Such was the renewed goodness and mercy of Him, to His poor unworthy creatures: but He is “God over all, blessed forever.” Amen.

25th.—The way seemed now clear for me to direct that the vessel should be completely furnished with wood and water, and prepared for sea. In the evening, I went to Hiram Bingham, to say that I wished to see the people once again collected; at the same time querying, whether, if the meeting in the middle of the week was held in the evening, there would not be a fuller attendance, especially if the occasion was made known. He immediately proposed, that as their week-day meeting consisted principally of Church members only, they should come together as usual on the Fourth day; and that he would then give notice of a meeting to be held on the Fifth day evening, at half-past seven o'clock. This proposal was gratefully accepted on my part.

On observing the _______ of Boston preparing for sea, our mate was dispatched with a parcel of tracts, etc., for the use of the ship's company; when he got upon her deck, the chief mate came forward, and seeing what he had in his hand, said, 'We do not receive any of those things; we are all infidels: we do not want any thing connected with the Bible: but if you will bring us any of the writings of Voltaire, Tom Paine or Rousseau, we shall thank you for them: give Captain 's compliments to Mr. Wheeler, and say we don't want any thing of the kind; and if you persist in leaving them, they shall be thrown overboard.' Our mate returned on board quite disconcerted, having never before met with such a reception in the Pacific. There is great reason to fear that there are many of this description in these parts; but such an open avowal is rarely to be found. Upon inquiry, it appeared that no sailors are admitted on board this ship, but such as deny the existence of an Almighty Being.

26th.—Receiving stone-ballast, to supply the weight of iron, hardware, tin, and nails, disposed of from time to time. As soon as our needs were communicated to the government, without waiting for an arrangement being made by our captain for the stone, and its transport, eight canoes of large dimensions were loaded and dispatched to our vessel. Writing-paper and nails were sent in return for this accommodation, to the full extent of its value; it had been previously ascertained that writing-paper was very scarce with those in authority.

27th.—Until now, every thing like a present to any of the parties with whom we have been connected, was studiously avoided on our part, as gifts often open a door to blindness and perversion; but the time of our departure being at hand, several articles likely to be useful were selected and presented to Kinau, and her associate chiefs, as a token of esteem and gratitude for the uniform kindness shown us while in the port of Honolulu; these were courteously received. With the assistance of the British Consul, a pilot well acquainted with all the principal bays, coves, and creeks of the islands was procured to accompany us. He could talk a little bad English, was a native of Oahu, and went by the name of Sugar-Cane.' Being an elderly man, and very asthmatical, one of his sons was brought to assist in caring for him, and to take his share of duty with our crew.

28th.—Felt much depressed at the weight of the prospect of meeting with the natives in the evening, as before appointed; but endeavoured to bear up in humble reliance on the everlasting Arm of strength; which is magnified in proportion as the creature is laid low, and made sensible of its helpless condition and utter inability.

Sat down together in the forenoon as usual; in the afternoon a native schooner through mismanagement ran directly against our vessel. Serious injury was anticipated on all sides, but it was so ordered that the violence of the shock was broken by first one rope giving way and then another, as the pressure increased; until her stem came in contact with one of our main shrouds, which made such a powerful resistance before breaking, as materially to check her progress, when about to strike our hull; so that the whole damage was comparatively trifling. Her commander came on board immediately, with tears in his eyes, in great fear lest any on board of us should have been killed. This man and his people so fully expected that one or both of the vessels must be sunk, that he dispatched a man to the shore for boats to save the crews; this messenger immediately sprung overboard, and swam so quickly, as to reach the shore before the two vessels began to show signs that they were not seriously injured. The spectators could scarcely believe that we had sustained so little harm.

After taking tea at Hiram Bingham's we proceeded to the meeting appointed the preceding evening, and found a large concourse of people assembled in readiness. As this was an extra meeting appointed on my account, the people were informed that it would commence with silent waiting, and were exhorted to stillness. Although it is probable more than three thousand persons were present, and many of them strangers to the practices of Friends; yet such was the solemn feeling graciously vouchsafed on the occasion, that the greatest order and quietness prevailed. However long the interval of silence might seem to others, to myself it was remarkably short; before I was strengthened to set forth the necessity of silent waiting upon God for the sanctifying influence of His Holy Spirit, to enable us to worship Him acceptably, “in spirit and in truth.” I had also to bear testimony to the all-sufficiency of that “grace which brings salvation, and has appeared unto all men; teaching us that, denying ungodliness and worldly lusts, we should live soberly, righteously, and godly, in this present world; looking for that blessed hope, and the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ, who gave himself for us, that he might redeem us from all iniquity, and purify unto himself a peculiar people, zealous of good works.” I was enlarged and strengthened to testify the gospel of this grace of my good and gracious God, which brings salvation, and has appeared unto all men; a word of encouragement was strong in my heart to the dear people, and I had to remind them, that it was not the rich, nor the mighty, nor the noble to whom the call was limited; not many of these were called,—nor many that were wise; but the poor, simple-hearted and unlearned, and fishermen like themselves; and that they were the people unto whom the call is still extended. After having sat down awhile, it was with me to endeavour to make them sensible of the power, that so eminently reigned over all; recommending them to keep close to it, and it would be with them forever; because it is “the power of an endless life.” None attempted to rise up when the meeting was over: I requested Hiram Bingham to dismiss them, but they still kept their seats, and the same precious solemnity prevailed. When we left our seats they began to draw round us to shako hands, and bid us 'farewell.' Most of the missionary families were present, and five of their preachers.

29th. Believing myself clear of the island, every exertion was made to be in readiness to leave the harbour on the morrow; and although much impeded by persons coming on board, we persevered in making the attempt. Towards noon, Kiuau, the reigning chiefess, sent on board, to ascertain what supplies we were most in need of; and her husband, the commander of the fort, seemed a little disappointed, on finding that hogs and goats were already purchased. They provided us, however, with eggs, cabbages, water-melons, onions, turkeys, and fowls, sending them off in good time. In the afternoon, saw all our accounts settled: drank tea at the Consul's, and called upon the whole of the mission, to take leave of them.

30th.—Made the signal for a pilot, according to the rules of the port, and at eleven o'clock a.m., slipped off under easy sail. The morning had been cloudy and squally, but the trade-wind was now steady, though strong and scant for our purpose. The motion of the vessel was soon sufficiently violent to make almost all on board sea-sick. For my own part, although not sick, I was otherwise unwell. Towards evening the wind forsook us, when we had Ranai Point, and the islands of Morakai, Maui, and Tauroa in sight. Calm most of the night, but we had the mortification to find that our vessel required much pumping to keep her clear of water, owing to her having been so long in a heated and dry atmosphere, although almost constantly covered with awnings.

Fifth Month 1st. (First day.)—Early in the morning a strong trade-wind set upon us, and soon raised a heavy sea. From the state of the crew and other circumstances, the usual practice of assembling together was necessarily abandoned; the vessel still continued to require considerable pumping.

2nd.—Strong gales all the day, with a heavy breaking sea, which kept our decks in a constant wash, and rendered it impossible to secure and preserve the things in the cabin from the salt water. Towards nightfall, we had an indistinct view of the island of Owhyee, now called Hawaii.

3rd.—Notwithstanding the scantiness of the trade-wind, we had the satisfaction to find, soon after day-light this morning, that there was a probability of our fetching into the neighbourhood of Kalakakua Bay. About three o'clock p.m., we dropped an anchor in ten fathoms water, close in with the shore, and near the place where the affray occurred, in which the British commander, James Cook, was killed. This bay is exposed to the sweep of the Pacific, from south to west: but there is a marvellous provision for the safety of vessels which touch here, and for enabling the natives to procure a plentiful supply of fish. A sea-breeze sets in almost as regularly as the day revolves; but before the swell of the sea has time to rise to any material height, the land-breeze comes off the mountains, and restores order again upon the ruffled surface: at some seasons of the year, it would, however, be very unsafe for a vessel to anchor here; a few hours is generally sufficient for those which do come, to obtain a supply of hogs, goats, etc. No canoe came near us for a considerable time after the anchor was down, and then they came off very sparingly; but when the first adventurers had had time to return to the shore, and report that they had been invited on board, and that we had articles for barter, our deck was presently crowded with almost all ages and sizes, of the male natives, bringing with them pineapples, pigeons, bananas, ninitas, etc., with the different varieties of shells which this part of the coast furnishes. They remained with us until sun-down, and seemed well satisfied with their visit. It appeared that it would be best to visit the missionary station without delay, and to request that a meeting of the islanders might be convened purposely, without waiting for their usual meeting-day, as a few yards of cotton print would be an ample reward for those who took an active part in this business, for the extra fatigue it would occasion. By this step a much larger attendance would be secured, besides the saving of time, which was now particularly important, as the missionaries were shortly to leave all the stations upon this island, to attend their annual meeting at Oahu, which holds three weeks or more; and generally, from one or other circumstance, nearly two months are required to restore the parties to their respective stations again.

4th.—Our deck was crowded in good time this morning by the natives, bringing with them abundance of their simple varieties for barter. In the forenoon we landed, and ascended a steep more than two miles in length, and by places almost inaccessible. The great heat of the sun, reflected from a nearly black surface of volcanic rock, smooth, and glassy, was almost insupportable. The native boys and girls were very desirous to help me up the hill: some pulled me forward by the arms, and others pushing behind, contributed to lessen the fatigue; although this had a ludicrous appearance, I could not well reject their kindness. On reaching the mission-house, we were welcomed in a friendly manner by Cochran Forbes and his wife, who occupy this secluded habitation. As the native meeting was to be held in regular course in the afternoon, it was concluded that notice should be given of a public meeting to be held tomorrow morning, for our accommodation, in the hope of collecting a large number of the people together; but a chief woman who sat by, stated, that as the king and his large retinue were at Kailua, (the next station,) the people who were now at home, in their huts, would be engaged in procuring a supply of food, and in transporting it to these visitors both tomorrow and the next day also. On this account it seemed best to hold the meeting this afternoon, and to take measures to spread the report of our being come to attend it. A considerable number of the people were collected at the hour appointed, and in due time my certificates were read, and translated by the missionary; and after calling their attention to the importance of the object for which we were assembled, ability was afforded me to declare the Truth amongst them, fully and freely, for the space of an hour; directing them to the light of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, which shines in every heart; which would not only show them their sins, but would, if taken heed to, save from them, with an everlasting salvation. That as no sin is committed without the thought of the heart for its origin, it is the heart that must be watched over; because every thing that defiles a man comes from there. First of all, before wickedness is committed, proceed “evil thoughts,” and if these are cherished, then sin follows, and darkness and death reign; but if the watch is faithfully maintained, it will lead unto prayer, and that light which is “the true light, that enlightens every man that comes into the world,” will make manifest the tendency of every thought, from what root in us it springs, whether good or evil; and as we choose the good and refuse the evil, we shall be strengthened more and more to watch and to pray, even always, “with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto with all perseverance;”—the light will shine brighter and brighter,—we shall no longer walk in death and darkness, but shall have “the light of life.” In this way the glad tidings of salvation were proclaimed amongst them in gospel love. Nothing could exceed the attention and solidity manifested by these Hawaiians, I humbly trust to the glory of Him who wrought and crowned the work by his solemnizing presence. On the left of the ascent to the missionary station, about half a mile from the rocky margin of the sea, stands a rough but substantial monument, erected to the memory of the late James Cook, with the following inscription. 'In memory of Captain James Cook, R. N., who discovered these islands in the year of our Lord 1778; this humble monument is erected by his fellow-countrymen, in the year 1825.'

5th.—This morning the natives thronged the deck of our little vessel. We had agreed to visit the missionary station again this afternoon; but the violent exertion of yesterday rendered my dear Charles unfit to risk another such fatigue in the heat of the day; and I thought it best, in order to prevent suffering myself from the same cause, to submit to being conveyed upon the shoulders of the people, in the same manner as they are accustomed to transport their chiefs on particular occasions. Having landed by myself, and procured some willing natives, upon promise of rewarding each of them with some blue cotton print, I proceeded on my journey. On reaching a very steep part of the road, and making signs that I wished to walk, they at length consented to set me down; but they seemed quite uneasy until permitted to resume their toil. This I did principally on their account, to make the work lighter; but I found it very difficult to persuade them to do it a second time at the next steep, until a determination was manifested to get down, when I was reluctantly permitted to alight: they then would not allow me to climb the hill, without some of them pushing behind to help me along. I succeeded in getting set down four times: at last my entreaties were altogether disregarded, and they persisted in hurrying along, until we reached the missionary door. My labour was richly rewarded by a truly interesting opportunity with these newly acquired acquaintances, whose minds were open to receive all that I found in my heart to communicate to them. They expressed a desire to understand the principles of our Society, and inquired if we had any writings of the Society in our possession: they were satisfied on this head, with a promise of being well supplied, before we left the Bay. The evening proved very wet; but several serious women came and took their stations on the floor in the usual way.

6th.—Today the natives seemed to bring on board, to all appearance, all that they possessed, in their eagerness to obtain some of our useful articles: their poverty and lack of clothing are extreme. I purchased many things from them of no use whatever to myself or the vessel, rather than send them away empty-handed. The missionary family came on board about noon, and were furnished with some of our books. A variety of things calculated to be useful for children's wearing apparel, etc., were presented at the same time, and gratefully received. May the Lord direct their hearts into the love of God, and into the patient waiting for the Lord of life and glory, until they know him indeed for themselves to be in them, the blessed hope. After they returned to the shore, the number of natives began to diminish. In the evening we got all secure to be ready to avail ourselves of the land-breeze in the night, to enable us, if permitted, to stretch along the coast towards the Bay of Kailua, the next missionary station. Various specimens of native cloth were procured today: even the frames and implements used in making it were brought off, in the hope of their being accepted in barter.

As the king, Kauikeaouli, has arrived in Kailua Bay, the body of the people will be necessarily attracted towards that neighbourhood from hence, and many of them engaged in keeping up a supply of food and transporting it there, for his large establishment; on which account several hundreds will assemble at the place of worship next First day, on the occasion of his being there: my mind is bending towards that spot, in the anticipation of being strengthened to declare the mercy and goodness of my Lord amongst them; and it is my soul's desire that His heavenly presence may be with us.

At nine o'clock, p.m., got under weigh with a fresh land breeze, and stood off from the coast to secure an offing sufficient to warrant our steering with safety shore-ward in the dark, clear of all crags. Heavy rain fell just after leaving the bay of Kalakakua; but the rising of the moon soon after midnight dispelled every cloud, and the weather continuing beautifully clear, favoured our design. About eight o'clock a.m., on the morning of the 7th instant, we anchored near the king's brig, which, with three native schooners, was lying in the roads of Kailua. This anchorage is more exposed to the swells of the ocean than that of Kalakakua, having twelve points of the compass without a sheltering point of land. In the forenoon, the resident missionary, Artemas Bishop, came on board, to welcome us on our arrival; we returned with him to the shore, and on reaching the mission-station were kindly received by the family. Here we found a Dr. Gardner, in a declining state of health, who had been in the employ of the Hudson's Bay Company, on the Columbia river, but had retired in the hope of being benefited by the mildness of the air at Hawaii. In the afternoon we called at the residence of John Adams, alias Kuakini, the governor of the island, with whom I became acquainted at Oahu; but he had not returned from his favourite employment of fishing, at which he is considered very expert. On our way back we sat some time on the floor with a chief's widow, who was sick. On the fort established by Tamehameha are yet remaining two enormous idols, which were formerly worshipped by these people. They have been evidently cut out of the solid part of two immensely large trees, and carved into forms hideous and disgusting, and truly gigantic: and they must have cost excessive labour. Several pieces of heavy cannon were lying about, with the G. R. upon them, which could only be viewed with regret. While together, Artemas Bishop very kindly tendered his services, placing every thing, as regards the meeting tomorrow, at my disposal, and declaring his willingness to act as interpreter.

On the passage from Honolulu, although our little vessel became more leaky than at any time since leaving New South Wales, (excepting during the heavy tempest encountered on the voyage from Sydney to Tahiti,) we were in hopes that the leaks would close up in a few days, but it was discouraging to find it still necessary to have recourse to our pumps. Whether the Henry Freeling was more injured than appeared at the time when the schooner ran into her, before leaving Honolulu, or whether the leaking had been occasioned by a seam just above the margin of the copper, which may have opened from long exposure to the sun in still water, is uncertain; we cannot, however, take any measure to ascertain this, until again sheltered from the never-ceasing swells of the Pacific; but our hope and trust are in the Lord alone. It was remarked this morning, although riding in about thirteen fathoms water, that the rocky bottom might be plainly distinguished intermingled with patches of what was to all appearance hard, solid, white sand, supposed to have coral underneath: our anchor had fallen upon one of these white places, and as it could be seen plainly that the bill had made scarcely any impression, nor perceptibly sunk, they were thought to be beds of white coral, free from sand.

8th. (First day.)—Reached the shore in good time, and accompanied the missionary and his family to the meeting; it was held in a large temporary building close to the seashore, open on all sides, and widened for the purpose, with rows of pillars on the longest sides, supporting the thatched roofs of this extra skirting. Large as it was and well packed, it could not accommodate the people, and dense bodies were ranged quite without the shelter of the roofs; but being open on all sides, those without could hear almost as well as those within. When all seemed gathered, the people were informed by Artemas Bishop, that if we should remain silent, they were to keep themselves quite still and quiet. As I have uniformly witnessed the beneficial effects of my certificates being read, I had previously handed them to the missionary, who read them audibly in English, as many of our nation were present, and afterwards translated them, I believe very ably to the islanders, who were very attentive. A salutation in the love of the everlasting gospel was in my heart to every individual present, when I stood up; desiring that the dew of heaven might rest upon them, even unto life, and that for evermore. After declaring the fulness of the blessing of the gospel of Christ Jesus, if they turned to its light and obeyed it, I had to speak of the nature of that true, spiritual worship, which only is acceptable in the Divine sight. Vain is the attempt of any to draw nigh unto God in praise and prayer with the lips, if the heart is not prepared by the Holy Spirit; pointing out the necessity of our waiting for this preparation, in humble, reverential silence before Him, who is a Spirit, and discerns the thoughts and intents of every heart, before we can “worship Him in spirit and in truth;” this He requires in this gospel day, which long since dawned upon benighted man. It was the travail of my soul that they should all come unto Christ, who is “the true light that enlightens every man that comes into the world; and is given for God's salvation unto the ends of the earth.” We had a highly favoured season together, and the language of “peace be unto you,” flowed in my heart richly towards these dear people. When the meeting was well gathered, the king and some of his followers came in, and stayed the whole time, behaving in an orderly manner. When the meeting broke up, those with whom we had been previously acquainted at Oahu flocked about us, and many others followed their example of shaking hands. Being informed that a bible-class was about to assemble in the same building, we resumed our seats again: it was conducted on the system of learning one verse each day, through the week, the whole to be repeated on the First day of the week. The children and adults repeated the same words aloud at the same time. After this, questions were asked by the teacher, to which all the parties answered with one voice.

Not feeling any warrant to request that the afternoon meeting should be held exclusively on my account, it took its usual course, although it did not seem safe for me to omit attending it. I sat near the missionary, and when the usual services were gone through, I told him that I wished to say a few words; on standing up, he rose to be ready to interpret, which arrested the attention of the people. After a pause, the way opened for me to declare the necessity for “every one that names the name of Christ, to depart from iniquity,” without which the highest profession of the Christian religion is in vain; and that nothing short of the regenerating power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus in the heart of man, can cleanse and purify, and prepare him for that kingdom which shall never have an end. It is in the heart that sin has its origin and root; and where the disease is seated, there the remedy must be applied. Out of the heart of man proceed “evil thoughts” and it is these that must be watched for and detected in the light of the Holy Spirit. I stood up in much weakness, but was greatly strengthened, and largely opened before sitting down, to testify the gospel of the grace of my God, and to ascribe all to the Lord God and to the Lamb, who sits upon the throne; who loved us, and washed us from sin in his own precious blood, to whom dominion, and glory, and praise belong forever.

9th.—This morning Kauikeaouli, the king, came on board, and fixed to come again in the afternoon to dinner; this he did to our great satisfaction, bringing with him a confidential person of respectability. Every opportunity that could be desired was afforded to put the king in full possession of our opinion as to the real state of things upon the islands, and to apprize him of the artful designs of those persons who are constantly endeavouring to prejudice him against the missionaries, by raising evil reports against them on every trifling occasion, under pretence of being his best friends; while they are at the same time his worst enemies, and those of his people. They would rejoice to see the missionaries banished from the islands, the latter being the only persons capable of counteracting their desire to reduce the people to a state of slavery: by introducing an extensive growth of sugar-cane, and permitting the chiefs to share in the profit with them, they would at once compel the natives to labour for them, or in other words, to be slaves to their sordid avarice, while a set of mercenary foreigners would be enriched, altogether regardless of the waste of life they occasion. The king listened with great attention, and from the questions he asked, there is no doubt, but that he thoroughly understood the substance of the whole matter. Although Kauikeaouli does not speak English with facility, yet he understands it tolerably well; and the young man who accompanied him, having had a good education, was able to give every explanation required.

In the evening we drank tea at the mission-house, where again Kauikeaouli was one of the company. I sat next to him, but he was now like another person, and took no interest in any thing that went forward, seeming quite absorbed in thought. During the day, the natives were bartering their shells, fowls, and vegetables upon the deck, for our knives, handkerchiefs, needles, and fish-hooks. The weather was very hot, and the incessant tumbling about of our little vessel, from the swell of the ocean unceasingly rolling into this exposed bay, contributed to render it very exhausting and fatiguing to attend to the needs of the natives; upon whose well-oiled skins the heat seemed to make no impression. The number assembled at the meeting yesterday was more than 2000; but many of them had come from the neighbourhood of Kalakakua Bay.

A large stone building, for a place of worship, is nearly ready for roofing at Kailua: on my remarking the very great thickness of the walls, I was told, that unless this was the case it could not stand, on account of the violent shocks which earthquakes frequently occasion: at times the tables and chairs rattle on the floors of the missionary dwelling.

10th.—Our deck again crowded with the natives. The missionary with his wife and two children, accompanied by Kuakini, the governor of the island, paid us a visit in the forenoon, and stayed dinner on board. In the evening went on shore; and seeing nothing to prevent our proceeding to the eastward, took leave of those we knew, and returned on board after dark. Preparation being made for sailing, and the landbreeze springing up, we left the bay of Kailua about midnight, and stretched off under easy canvass, not having the advantage of moon-light. In the morning of the 11th instant, the weather clear and hot, with light breezes, but not from a favourable quarter. Low in mind, but in the enjoyment of peaceful poverty, trusting in Him who only knows the extent of what is before me. My desire is, to be found in the way cast up for me, and that I may leave nothing undone, and no place unvisited where it is His will that the ever-blessed Truth, by the power of the Holy Spirit, should be proclaimed, though it be in weakness and in fear, by such a one as myself, frail indeed, and my days fast numbering to a close: but the strength of Israel is sufficient for all things required at our hands; and if we are faithful, I am persuaded, that as our day is, so shall our strength be.

12th.—From the lightness of the wind, and the adverse set of the current, at sun-set last evening we had nearly drifted to the bay of Kailua. The wind having freshened and become more favourable, we are this morning in sight of Towaihai Bay. In the forenoon we anchored as near the coast as seemed prudent, with a heavy swell setting into the bay. With the help of 'Sugar-Cane,' our pilot, a native was despatched to the missionary station at Waimea, with a letter to make arrangements with Dwight Baldwin and Lorenzo Lyons, the resident missionaries, for collecting the people together as early as might be, in order to expedite us on our way to Hilo, in Byron's Bay, situated at the southern extremity of the island of Hawaii; and that our vessel might be no longer exposed than was absolutely needful, to the risk of encountering, what are called by the islanders, Moomookoo. These are furious blasts which run between the two lofty mountains, with irresistible force, turning the surface of the sea into a white foam, and blowing a vessel entirely away from the coast; and though perhaps not producing any serious results, yet it may require several days to get her back into the place from which she was driven. As the distance over the mountains from the coast to Waimea is more than fourteen miles, the return of our messenger cannot be looked for till tomorrow morning.

On reaching Kalakakua Bay, several days ago, we were informed that the station of Waimea, near which we now are, was vacant, the missionaries having sailed away for their annual meeting; so that there seemed a probability we should have to pass by it: but at Kairua we learned, that the vessel they were in, had met with such boisterous weather, that she was compelled to put back again; and the indisposition of one of the parties prevented their making a second attempt at that time. On inquiring of a native this morning through the pilot, this report was found correct; and that the two families, had again returned to their station at Waimea, and were now there. This evening the master of the missionary packet came on board, and said he was to proceed towards Hilo tomorrow, to bring away the missionaries: that he was to call here on his return for the two families at Waimea, and then to call at Kailua for the family resident there; but that he could not execute the order he had received, as there were five families at these places, and he had only accommodation for three. I told him, that if the missionaries at Waimea could stay to render me the needful assistance here, I should then proceed immediately to Hilo, and after I had visited the people of that place, we would then transport the two families from there to the island of Maui; from which place they would have no difficulty in getting to Oahu, as vessels are frequently passing to and fro between those two islands. Tomorrow it is probable this matter will be decided; I desire to stand resigned to whatever is the will of my heavenly Father, believing it will not be required of me to go to any part, where there is no one capable of interpreting between myself and the natives. From what we have seen of the people hero in the course of the day, they appear to be more haughty, and more exorbitant in their demands, than at either of the two bays we have previously anchored in; owing perhaps to their having had more interaction with foreigners, and more frequent communication with Oahu.

Charles and myself sat down together in the forenoon as heretofore, and I believe shared together in a long, heavy, lifeless season: but I humbly trust that I have, in some degree, learned in all states to be content, and desire to bear cheerfully every dispensation of the Divine Will; a knowledge of which, when moving along in the counsel thereof, is at once the strength of my life, and food, administering consolation and comfort to the wayworn traveller.

Chapter XXVIII.

Waimea—Native Meeting—Sail for Koala—Volcano—Byron's Bay—Native Meetings—Sail with the Mission Families for Maui—Island of Maui—Anchor at Lahaina—Proceed to Wairuku—School—Meetings at Lahaina—School—Sail for Oahu.

Fifth Month 13th, 1836.—The messenger dispatched yesterday to Waimea, returned at an early hour this morning, bringing a letter from Dwight Baldwin, (with whom we became acquainted when at the Georgian Islands last year,) which contained a welcome message, and stated that a horse was sent down for my son Charles, and a sufficient number of the natives to transport myself upon a sort of litter to the station; at the same time informing us, that a meeting might be held with the people in their district the same evening, if we left the coast in good time after receiving the letter. This being ascertained, we hastened to the shore, taking with us 'Sugar-Cane' the pilot, who, from his knowledge of the neighbourhood, could point out a landing place most free from the breaking surf. Having accomplished our purpose in safety, we soon found the natives who had been engaged as burden-bearers, and there seemed every probability of our setting forward without delay; but when all seemed ready and I had taken my seat, some demur began to show itself on the part of the natives; and we began to discover, that nothing would satisfy them but the sight of the cloth, which they were to have as payment, and a knowledge of the quantity that each man was to receive for his labour. Supposing that these matters had been fully arranged for us by the missionaries as had been requested, we were quite unprepared to answer this demand; and as far as we could understand, the parties were determined not to proceed, without it was complied with: as the affair could not be adjusted, I left my seat again, expecting to have to return on board. A number of the natives by this time gathered round us, and amongst them was an American sailor; and finding that he understood a little of the language, I requested him to inquire whether any other persons then about us would undertake the work. After much debate some consented, and being informed that whatever the missionaries decided upon as their wages, they should be fully paid, a sufficient number came forward, and we soon began to move on in earnest. The sun by this time had become very hot, and the journey altogether extremely fatiguing, from the road passing over mountain after mountain with continual ascent nearly the whole distance of fourteen miles. I was desirous to lessen the labour of the people as much as was in my power; and walked perhaps more than was prudent for a stranger in such a climate at noon day. It was late in the afternoon when we arrived at Waimea; and on reaching the mission-house were kindly received by Lorenzo Lyons, and Dwight Baldwin and their families.

Feeling much exhausted with the heat and the harassing journey, I should have rejoiced if the meeting had been appointed for the next morning: but found on inquiry, that the people would soon begin to collect, and that if postponed until tomorrow, but few persons would be able to attend, as they would necessarily be widely scattered in collecting food for the First day of the week, so that they might have nothing to prevent their attending the places of worship. I was informed, that on First day the meeting would be larger if the weather proved fine; but if wet, the people would not come. These things considered, it seemed best to take the opportunity which now presented, rather than by delay to run the risk of faring worse, or perhaps losing my labour altogether. After some refreshment we repaired to the meeting, which proved quite as large as was expected. The senior missionary thought it unnecessary to do more than explain the nature of my certificates, and this in a brief manner; but perhaps sufficient for the understanding of the people. When he had finished, I stood up in great weakness, desiring that we might endeavour to draw nigh unto the Lord in humble reverence of soul. The people were very solid and attentive; and although I do not remember having felt less ability to minister, or having less matter in prospect, as I proceeded, strength sufficient was mercifully and timely afforded, to endeavour to turn them from darkness to the light of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus in their own hearts,—that they might know Him to be a Saviour indeed, to save them from their sins; that so He might be theirs, and they might be His, through the never-ending ages of eternity: it is He who brings unto God the Father, and raises up at the last day. I stood long among them, and though to myself the life never seemed to rise and spread, as at some favoured seasons, and my own exhausted state of body was sensibly felt,—yet I afterwards found, from the testimony of others, that the power of the blessed Truth had been felt amongst them: let the Lord be glorified and let them rejoice: but the feelings and the sentence of the unprofitable servant most certainly were mine.

Spent an agreeable evening with the two families. From the vast quantity of rain which falls on this side the island of Hawaii, the dampness of every thing in and about the houses is extreme: the bed we lay on would have been very justly considered in England, not fit for those who have any regard for their health, but we had no alternative; and after using all the means we possessed to prevent being injured, we were favoured to witness no ill effects in the morning, though our clothing was as if it had been hung in the midst of steam during the night. We were, however, glad to see the light of the returning morning to liberate us from the consequences which threatened.

14th.—Being desirous of returning to the coast as soon as circumstances would allow, we rose early in the morning, and after breakfast it was concluded by the missionaries (who had the direction of the movements of the Missionary Packet,) that instead of proceeding round the southern part of the island to Byron's Bay, where Hilo is situated, she should sail immediately for Kairua and Kalakakua Bays, and return with the mission families from those stations back again to Kowaihai Bay; when, if the two families residing here were ready, they would accompany their brethren to the island of Oahu, to be in readiness for the approaching annual meeting of the whole mission about to take place. By this measure, the missionary families at Hilo were left entirely at our disposal, which at once removed every doubt of being able to speak to the people. How bountifully are we dealt with by Him, who “opens His hand and satisfies the desire of every living thing.” At nine a.m., taking leave of Waimea, we made the best of our way to the coast, expecting to put to sea the same evening; but the night proving rainy and rough, it seemed best for us to remain under the shelter at present afforded by the projecting land in the neighbourhood of Koala.

15th. (First day.)—From the state of the weather, it is probable if we had remained at Waimea, but few of the people would have attended the meeting today. Twice in the course of the day our seamen were assembled for devotional purposes, as we had no communication with the shore; although I thought if an interpreter had been present some of the straggling natives might have been collected together. At sun-down got under weigh, and proceeded towards Koala with a light breeze; but on opening the mouth of the passage, between the islands, we found plenty of wind and sea. We stretched off the land until two o'clock in the morning, and then stood towards Hawaii again, under double-reefed canvass, anticipating that before we could possibly reach any of its stupendous crags, the day would have sufficiently dawned to expose them to our view.

16th.—Employed through the day endeavouring to beat through the passage formed by the islands of Hawaii and Maui, about twenty miles wide, with rough blowing weather, and the trade-wind directly opposed to our course. Maintained a central position between the islands during the night; but gained very little ground.

17th.—Early in the morning stood in for Hawaii,—the weather rainy through the day; at six o'clock P M., stood off again for the night. Torrents of rain appeared to be falling all the day upon the mountains of Hawaii: twenty-six different cascades were counted at one time rushing towards the ocean down the rocky cliffs: every part of the island which we have seen seems to consist of huge masses of volcanic substance, and the leeward side is truly dreary and barren in appearance.

18th.—After beating to and fro through the night, the weather became more gentle; but the wind was so fickle that there seemed no probability of our rounding the point that forms one side of Byron's Bay, at the bottom of which stands the village and missionary station of Hilo. In the course of the day, made several advantageous tacks close in with the shore, there being no appearance of broken water on the margin of the coast. The weather proved much more bright and favourable than we had anticipated: we heard a well attested fact related by a missionary who had formerly dwelt some years at Hilo, that while residing at that station there were only six days wholly without rain during the space of two years, as by record duly kept of the weather. Fifty-six cascades of water pouring off the land into the sea were in sight at noon today.

This evening, while under feeling of poverty and weakness, I was reminded that this day the Yearly Meeting of Friends at large sat down in London. This brought afresh my dear brethren and sisters, who are endeavouring to do the will of our heavenly Father, very near to me in the covenant of life and peace; and a belief that we ourselves shall not be forgotten by some who compose that large assembly, when drawing nigh in spirit to the footstool of mercy and love, is very precious and animating, though removed from them almost as far as the east is from the west. But although thus outwardly severed from each other, we have a never-failing source of comfort and consolation, in knowing, that the one great and heavenly Parent of the universe is equally near unto us all,—that in Him we live, and move, and have our being,—and that His tender mercy is over all His works; of which my only earthly treasure, and my all on the solitary Plains of Shoosharry, form a part. May the blessing of the Most High be felt, through the power of the Holy Spirit, to rest richly upon us all; then shall we be in that glorious unity, which inherits life and that for evermore; from which nothing can separate, because it is in the love of God, in Christ Jesus our Lord.²⁴

19th.—Towards midnight, the flashes from the great volcano illumined the atmosphere, and at times had the appearance of a stationary light on that part of the coast. At three o'clock a.m., it visibly spread and increased its light; but was eventually lost sight of in the beams of returning morning. Having made a successful in-shore slant during the night, at breakfast-time weathered the northernmost point, and edged away for Byron's Bay,—the wind now shifting more and more in our favour. At half-past two o'clock p.m., dropped an anchor in seven fathoms water, behind a small reef, which affords a good shelter from the swell occasioned by the usual trade-wind, which though constantly blowing in during the day, through the wonderful provision of an all-wise Providence, never is permitted to blow hard for at least nine months out of the twelve, which seasons are pretty well ascertained. During the intervals of unsettled weather, no vessel would be warranted in attempting to seek shelter here. In the afternoon, a double canoe came off from the shore, and returned again loaded with stores, which our vessel had received from the Missionary Packet at Kowaihai Bay, and collected at other places since leaving Oahu. Taking our pilot 'Sugar-Cane' for a guide to that part of the strand the most free from surf, Charles and myself landed and made our way towards the mission-house, meeting with David B. Lyman and Titus Coan before reaching their abode. Both the families assembled at David B. Lyman's, where we partook of some refreshment.

20th.—This morning the principal chief and his wife came on board to breakfast, and stayed our reading. This chief is descended from the late Tamehameha, and certainly, if bulk and weight can add dignity to high birth, his wife must also be a first-rate personage; and we are told, that her rank is considerably higher than that of her husband. On leaving us, she very uncourteously took to herself the power of proclaiming the Henry Freeling under Tabu, when the natives who had come on board with shells, eggs, etc. to barter, immediately sprung into their canoes, and pushed off from the vessel. Through the medium of Sugar-Cane,' we were made to understand that all traffic could now only be carried on at a sort of market upon the shore. On inquiry made afterwards, it appeared that this woman had not the power of preventing the natives from trading; and that she had ventured to usurp this authority, in the hope of monopolizing the whole traffic herself. It happened, however, that we were not in need of many supplies, as we were not intending to recruit our stock of fuel at this island, on account of the extra risk to the vessel which delay might incur in such an exposed roadstead. In the afternoon David B. Lyman and Titus Coan came on board; we returned with them to the shore, and after a walk to an old crater not far distant, took tea at Titus Coan's, where the other family joined us. At nine o'clock in the evening, the flames of the volcano gave the atmosphere an unusually bright tinge of light.

21st.—This morning the circumstance of the vessel being 'Tabued,' was fully ascertained to be enforced with a view to exclude the natives from a share in the traffic, and no other than an unauthorized violation of their privileges; against which, we thought it right to make a stand. A person who could speak a little English came on board at an early hour, with a present of a fowl and some potatoes from the chiefess. I told him it was a pity she had been at the trouble of sending them off, as presents were things we did not accept, and therefore must pay for what he had brought with him. This man was told to inform us, that if we accepted the present, it would be considered that the chiefess was entitled to furnish what supplies might be needed; but if these terms were not acceded to, and the present was declined, he was then to return to the shore to know its value, and the price was to be sent off by a native then upon the deck, who was pointed out, that he might be known again by us; word was soon brought that the price was a quarter dollar, which was paid quickly, to preserve peace and put an end to the matter. The man who brought off the present was highly gratified at our declining the terms altogether; and there is no doubt but the affair soon gained publicity, as canoes kept coming through the day with fowls, turkeys, cabbages, bread-fruit, pine-apples, watermelons, etc., in an undisguised manner. We afterwards fully ascertained that this arbitrary proceeding was a violation of the laws of the island, no person whatever, but the governor John Adams, alias Kuakini, having the power of interfering with the traffic carried on by the inhabitants; yet such is the servile state of these poor people, having been trained from infancy to view their chiefs as a race of beings superior to themselves, that they would patiently have borne this act of oppression, if it had met with our sanction.

Drank tea at David B. Lyman's, who has kindly undertaken to accept the office of interpreter between myself and the people tomorrow. Notwithstanding I have now stood before so many thousands of these islanders on both sides the Equator; yet the prospect of tomorrow is formidable in my sight. If the weakness of human nature was not thus felt, there would, I believe, be a danger of our not sufficiently and devotedly seeking after, and imploring the strengthening influence of that power, without which “we can do nothing,” but with it all things. May the Lord be our helper, and cause his own works to praise Him, to the glory of the riches of that grace, which came by Jesus Christ.

22nd. (First day.)—This morning I felt as has uniformly been the case, when about to meet for the first time a large body of the people at a fresh place; but I was comforted from believing that we should be remembered by some at a time and “place where prayer is customarily made;” where the Lord is in the purified temple, the earthly nature silent, and the heavenly Intercessor's only availing help experienced. Attended the meeting at the time fixed: sat as one that had lost all strength, until David B. Lyman had nearly finished reading the Morning Meeting's certificate, when I seemed ready, and only waiting the termination of the concluding paragraph to stand upon my feet, with my mind centred and the fear of man banished far away. After the people were requested to settle down in stillness, and endeavour to draw nigh unto the Lord with humble reverence, I was strengthened to declare amongst them the way of life and salvation, in the word of the truth of the gospel, in the love of which my heart was greatly enlarged. Repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ, the only way to obtain forgiveness of sins that are past, and freedom from the thraldom of sin in future, were largely pointed out, and the light of the Holy Spirit of Christ Jesus, which shines in every heart, as the only blessed medium by which this path is made manifest; by reason of the darkness which prevails in man, while held in a carnal, and unregenerate state, in bondage to the power of Satan, the prince of darkness. The burden which rested upon my mind was, that they might be delivered from the power of darkness, and translated into the kingdom of the dear Son of God, through the shedding of whose precious blood our redemption is sealed, even forgiveness and remission of sins that are past, and an interest mercifully granted in that Holy Advocate, always present to plead with our heavenly Father, the weakness and infirmity of our nature, for the time to come, for all those who, in belief and obedience, are willing to come unto God by Him. Such, and such only, are turned “from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God.”

The meeting was not so large, we were told, as at some other times; but the people were very attentive, and bowed down under the mighty hand of Him whose power reigned over all. After the meeting broke up, we attended a Sabbath school for Bible scholars, of all ages and both sexes. It commenced with a prayer by a native teacher, and finished with another from one of the missionaries.

We partook of some dinner with Titus Coan and wife, as I felt an engagement to attend the native meeting again in the afternoon. It began at three o'clock, and I had again to testify of the gospel of grace and truth which came by Jesus Christ, from which, such is the universal love of God, none are excluded.

23rd.—By a canoe that came paddling round the vessel, it was ascertained that the tabu was still enforced; and the natives, though invited on board, thought it safest to keep aloof. Before noon a person was sent to inform us that sundry articles were in the market for sale; but as they belonged to the chiefess as before, he was told that nothing would be purchased belonging to her, at the same time it was stated, that if the natives had anything to sell, we would buy from them what was needed. In the afternoon landed, and visited a magnificent and stupendous waterfall, called the 'Cascade of the Rainbow.' The sun was hot and the walk fatiguing; but the exercise was needful before again putting to sea, as from the wetness of the weather since anchoring in the bay but little had been obtained. We passed by three distinct craters, situated in a line stretching inland from the shore, apparently at exact distances from each other, and the same size and shape in every particular, all declaring the wonderful works of the same Almighty power. The cascade of the rainbow exceeds the description given of it, and at once excites wonder and admiration, exhibiting a mighty torrent of foaming water in perpetual roar, rushing down a perpendicular steep of more than one hundred feet into a basin of sufficient magnitude to receive this never-ceasing deluge. At the back of the fall, towards the bottom, a large arch is formed probably by the rushing torrent; and the enormous weight of water falling such a depth, caused a mist to arise two-thirds of the whole height of the surrounding cliffs, which with the sun in a certain position, gives rise to the name of the cascade, by displaying a beautiful rainbow. While Charles was taking a sketch of the outline of this sublime spectacle, I placed myself on a stone in its front, surrounded by nine of the natives, who seemed not fully satisfied without being so near as to touch me occasionally. One of the oldest of them took no small pains to make me understand that in former days, when there was plenty, plenty of water, (probably after great rain) little native children were hurled by their parents into this rainbowed gulf to check the increase of population. Afterwards, on mentioning to the missionary, Titus Coan, what I supposed this native meant, describing as well as I could some of his actions and words, he said, that the construction I had put upon them was correct.

Not feeling any thing to detain me further upon this island, we look forward to leave this interesting bay tomorrow night, when the land-breeze comes off the mountains, for the island of Maui, and expect to take with us the two missionary families so far on their way to the annual meeting at Oahu: they will probably escape a portion of sea-sickness by not coming on board until near the time of sailing, as the motion of our vessel is incessant, from the constant swell of the ocean, which ranges round the reef into the bay. It compels us to keep every thing secure nearly as much as at sea.

24th.—Today procured what supplies were needed. In the afternoon took exercise on shore, and towards sun-setting the baggage was embarked in a double canoe, which, with the assistance of our boat brought off both the families and ourselves with two native servants. About eight o'clock p.m., the mountain breeze sprung up, when the vessel was got under weigh, but the wind soon became lighter, and the great wash of water off the land and out of the rivers, combined to sweep us towards the reef: before ten o'clock the water began to grow shallow, and diminishing from ten to three fathoms, obliged us to anchor for the night. The hollow ground swell upon the edge of the reef caused violent and constant rolling, without a possibility of preventing it in that position.

25th.—Soon after eight o'clock a.m., the sea-breeze made its appearance, but before setting in, a canoe came paddling off in great haste to reach the vessel, with a couple who were desirous of being married before the departure of the missionaries; but having neglected to obtain the permission of the principal chiefess, this could not be accomplished. There was no alternative but that of returning again to the shore about three miles off, to obtain the needful sanction; and having been told that we should not wait for them if the wind should spring up in our favour, they paddled off again with all the speed in their power. Before the wind was strong enough to warrant the risk of getting under weigh and clearing the reef, this canoe was seen again returning to the vessel from the shore. They would gladly have been married in their canoe, but the motion was so violent that the parties could not possibly stand upright while the missionary performed the usual ceremony. They were then taken on board, and to make it easy to both parties, were brought down into the cabin, where the rite was performed by one of the missionaries demanding answers to several important questions; the other offering up a prayer. The captain, mate, and ourselves, were witnesses of this curious exhibition, the vessel rolling about in such a manner that they were forced to hold themselves by the table and each other, when they stood upon their feet: they were both so drenched by the sea that had washed into the canoe, that measures were necessary to clear the cabin floor from the quantity of water on it, after the ceremony was concluded. The husband was clothed in a European shirt, with a belt round him; and his wife in a loose cotton robe, reaching nearly to the floor, which comprised the whole attire of the parties. I felt a degree of satisfaction at what had transpired, and to myself, our detention last evening was accounted for. Nothing short of a fear let in by some on board, of losing the vessel upon the reef, would have induced a willingness to anchor for the night to avoid the apparent danger that seemed to threaten. On looking over all the circumstances of the case, there seemed a providence in it that these poor people might be saved the temptation of violating the laws of their country by an illegal procedure, without waiting the return of the missionaries, which might be most of two months. A marriage thus consummated upon the mighty waters, is not an every-day transaction, and especially, as I humbly trust it may be said, in a place of worship, which the cabin of the Henry Freeling has been in many instances, as well as a place of prayer and praise; from which the spiritual sacrifice has, we hope, at times acceptably ascended unto God through Jesus Christ, though we be as nothing in his sight, and in our own, utterly unworthy of the least of all his tender mercies. As soon as the married couple had left the vessel, we at once made sail, with a delightful breeze in our favour, for the island of Maui.

We witnessed last evening a scene, in the embarkation of the two missionary families, both affecting and highly interesting. When the moment for their leaving their habitations approached, the natives crowded into their houses to take leave of them; and as the train proceeded towards the beach, the company increased to a large number, perhaps hundreds. When arrived at the edge of the cliff, there was a solemn pause, and a prayer was eventually offered up by D. B. Lyman; after which, the final separation took place. The people seemed to consider us also as friends about to leave them, and extended their good wishes, shaking hands very freely as we retired to the boat. Some of them assisted us to launch into the surf, and I have no hesitation in believing, that they would have risked their own lives to save ours. How different their present state to what it was, when these shores were visited by the first navigators of the Pacific: but what might the situation of these simple hearted natives have been at this day, if only men of Christian principles had trod their soil, instead of the wicked and barbarous crews of the shipping; who have committed every possible excess and outrage, shameful and brutal, upon these helpless islanders, to the lasting disgrace and infamy of the white skin.

Before leaving England, I was applied to by our mutual friend Thomas Bigg, to make inquiry, should opportunity present, for an Englishman supposed to reside on the island of Hawaii; and a letter from his poor mother was committed to my care for him. It appears that the individual in question lived in the neighbourhood of Kalakakua Bay, and obtained a livelihood as a pilot to the vessels, which occasionally come to that side of the island for supplies. He died in the fall of 1832, leaving a native widow and two children, who, I should suppose, were afterwards supported by her relations. The youngest child died last year, and the eldest has since been carried off, say stolen, by the captain of an American whaler, who pretended to have received orders from the god-parents (so called) to bring these children to them in America. It is probable that this impostor was aware of the lad's abilities; and that by this fabricated tale he might be obtained without any cost, now that he had lost his father. In this manner was this poor helpless boy torn away, in spite of his tears and entreaties to remain with his mother, under pretence of being provided for much better in America, than would be the case here. The whaler has never returned to this neighbourhood since the theft was committed. This account has been principally given me by one of the missionaries; and I cannot for a moment doubt that it is substantially correct. The injured native mother is now removed by death, beyond the reach of the monsters who perpetrate these horrible deeds of cruelty and injustice; but their day will also come, and will not tarry.

26th.—In hauling round the point of the island, the wind became light; but a fresh breeze springing up from the southwest, enabled us to stem the current and reach the roads of Lahaina, soon after twelve o'clock; we anchored near the American ship Newark, a whaling vessel put in for fresh provisions and vegetables. The smooth water having recruited our passengers, the men went on shore, but soon returned, bringing with them the resident missionary, William Richards. The captain of the whaler coming on board at the same time, kindly made the offer of his boat, which conveyed all our passengers on shore at once, with ease. In the afternoon Charles and myself landed, and remained at the mission-house until sun-down. It appeared that William Richards and family had intended to leave Lahaina on the evening of the following day for Oahu, in a small schooner lying near at hand; this being the only opportunity likely to offer for their conveyance to that island in time for their annual meeting. Although I had not disclosed what was upon my mind to any one: yet I had long believed that I should not be clear of the Sandwich Islands, without making an attempt to see the whole of the missionary families, when collected together for their annual meeting at Oahu; and it now sprung in my heart to tell William Richards, that if he would consent to remain at Lahaina, and assist me over the approaching First day, I should feel myself bound to convey himself and family, in time for their meeting at Oahu if practicable, in the Henry Freeling. These terms being accepted, it was with me to inquire whether the missionary at the station of Wairuku, on the south side of the island, had sailed for Oahu; and finding there was considerable probability of his being still at his post, it seemed best to make the necessary arrangements for proceeding there without delay. A messenger was quickly dispatched with a letter, requesting that the inhabitants of that district might be collected tomorrow at the place of worship, as early in the day as could conveniently be done. A whale-boat was procured from the governor Opeli, as the conveyance best calculated to accomplish our object, in contending with the wind and weather in rounding one point of the island, where strong blasts prevail from the set of the trade-winds, during the greatest part of the year.

27th.—By two o'clock a.m., the whale-boat manned with a native crew came alongside; and at the cock-crowing as agreed upon by all parties, we left the vessel properly equipped for the journey. The morning was serene and beautiful, and when the day broke the wind began to rise, and to increase as the day advanced. On reaching the most critical point, the wind was so strong and the water so rough, that for a time it seemed doubtful whether the strength of our rowers would hold out: they succeeded however in getting under the shelter of the coast; but not without all of us being well drenched by the spray of the sea. By eight o'clock, we reached the boundary aimed at, beyond which the boat was of no further service; here we landed and hauled it up; and the men corded the oars to a chair we had purposely brought with us. I was thus speedily furnished with a land conveyance, and Charles being provided with a horse, we pursued our route towards Wairuku, about eight miles distant; he on horseback, and I riding and walking alternately, for the relief of my bearers, as well as for a change of position. We got to our destination about noon, and were kindly received by the missionary family. While some refreshment was preparing, we visited the school, consisting of a large number of children of both sexes. The meeting gathered at three o'clock, which we attended accordingly,—myself in much weariness and emptiness; but I was strengthened to stand up shortly after the reading of my certificates, and remind the people that we were in the presence of the Most High God of heaven and earth; before whom “the nations are as a drop of a bucket: He takes up the isles as a very little thing.” He not only sees all our actions, but knows the most inward thoughts and imaginations of every heart. I was carried forward to unusual length, and without any prospect of drawing to a conclusion; the blessed truths of the gospel unfolding in continued succession to the view of my mind for about an hour and a-half: I afterwards found that the meeting had kept increasing, far beyond what was anticipated. It was to me a very memorable season, the Lord's power was over all; and I humbly trust His name was honoured and exalted, and the kingdom within proclaimed to the dear Redeemer's praise. The desire of my heart was, that the gospel message might be “glad tidings” indeed—“of great joy” to these people, through “repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ,” wrought by believing in the appearance of His Holy Spirit in the heart, and by the operation thereof cleansing and purifying from every thing that is offensive in the Divine sight: that thus they might be made meet to be partakers of an inheritance with the saints in light, in the everlasting kingdom. My mind felt peaceful and refreshed, and the fatigue of the journey was remembered no more.

We had to shake hands with a large body of the natives between the meeting-house and the missionary's dwelling. After spending some time with the family, and the night drawing on, we were compelled to renew our travel towards the place where the boat had been left in the morning; and though it soon became dark after leaving Wairuku, we succeeded in getting to the right spot. After the people had rested themselves, the boat was launched, and we were favoured to reach our little vessel about half-past one o'clock in the morning. It was to me a memorable day of goodness and mercy, and the more so, as it was the anniversary of my dear William's birth, which kindled in my heart towards our heavenly Father, renewed desires for the welfare of my precious family.

28th.—Engaged on board until afternoon, then landed and arranged with the missionary to meet the people, at nine o'clock on the following morning; at the prospect of which, I felt as a worm and no man: but where could I look for help, but unto Him, who has so often covered my head in the day of battle, for His great name's sake.

29th. (First day.)—Got some rest in the night; but was awakened early by the remembrance of the great weight of responsibility resting upon me; but the voice of my supplication was heard, and my prayer was not permitted to return again into my bosom in the hour of trouble. At this place we found a noble meeting-house, teeming full of people, both in the galleries and upon the ground-floor, more in number than two thousand, according to the missionary's statement: the will of the creature was laid low as in the dust; but I felt the comforting influence of that power, whose “strength is made perfect in weakness,” to be nigh, though the earth trembles and shakes at the presence thereof. Though a stranger to the language of these people, I was sensible that my kind and willing interpreter took more than ordinary pains to impress their minds with a belief, that I had brought with me well attested letters of recommendation; and as the name of William Ellis was well known and remembered among them, he took care to state that I had a letter from him also, among others; his competent knowledge and fluent expression of the language, while it at once commanded attention, raised a degree of confidence, both in them and myself, which was of a strengthening tendency.

On standing up I told them, although for the most part we were strangers to each other, yet we were all of one blood and members of the same great human family, and in the presence of the Almighty and everlasting Parent of the universe, “who sees not as man sees; for man looks on the outward appearance, but the Lord looks on the heart:”—pointing out the necessity of our endeavouring to get into a humble waiting frame of mind, and be still; that His power might be known and magnified, and felt as a crown of solemnity over us:—that I had come amongst them in the love of the gospel,—that same love of which the great apostle spoke, when he said, “the love of Christ constrains us; because we thus judge, that if one died for all, then were all dead: and that He died for all, that they which live should not henceforth live unto themselves, but unto Him which died for them, and rose again.” Strong desires were raised in me and expressed, that these people might be brought to an acquaintance with the Holy Spirit of Him, who thus “gave his life a ransom for many.”

I had to lay open some of their besetting sins as a people, and to point out the only way for their deliverance from the power of darkness by which they are bound,—which is, to believe in the light of Christ Jesus, which shines in every heart; for this indeed is He, who by His Holy Spirit, speaks unto them, and tells them all things that ever they did;—who convinces the world of sin, and by His light makes manifest every evil deed, every evil thought and word, and leads man to repentance, whereby he is strengthened to forsake sin, and to live unto Him, who died for us and rose again. It was with me to tell them, that the day of their visitation was come; and that salvation by Jesus Christ was freely offered to them who believe and receive it, and who open the door of their hearts that the King of glory by His Holy Spirit may enter in. Ability was richly afforded to exhort, warn, encourage and beseech them to turn from darkness tothat light, which would show them their sins, and bring them unto God the Father; and which would raise them up at the last day, to an inheritance with those that are sanctified by the like precious faith in His beloved Son. It was indeed a high day, a day of light and joy and gladness of heart, as when the Bridegroom's voice is heard. The meeting held long; and when over, we were invited to attend an English service to be conducted by Titus Coan; which I was most easy to decline, and return quickly on board the Henry Freeling, to collect our own sailors. Some of the seamen of the American whaler were present, and my mouth was again opened to speak of the way of life and salvation by Christ Jesus, to this little gathering.

Soon after three o'clock p.m., we again returned to the shore, to attend the afternoon native meeting. Not more than half the number of the people were present who had assembled in the morning. I had again to minister unto them; but the current of life was weak in comparison to what had flowed so freely and strongly in the first meeting. The “gospel of the kingdom,” was again declared to them; and I trust the great name was magnified, by the praises of His own works, to His glory. After taking some tea at the mission-house, we again removed to our vessel for the night, as to myself, under the feelings of the unprofitable servant, being lamentably deficient in too many instances, and in having done that which was my duty to do. Blessed be the Lord God, the God of Israel, who only does wondrous things: and blessed be his glorious name forever; and let the whole earth be filled with his glory; Amen, and Amen.

30th.—In the forenoon landed to purchase fruit, vegetables, etc., in the market appointed for the sale of these articles. Made a present of a small sized telescope to governor Opeli. William Richards having kindly furnished a light waggon, Charles and myself proceeded to Lahaina Luna, where the high-school is established; we were kindly received by the principals of this institution, who are missionaries; and specimens of the books which have been printed here, charts of the Sandwich Islands, and a general atlas, (the plates which these were taken from, being the work of the native scholars at this school,) were presented to us. The buildings were undergoing alterations and repairs during the vacation, on which account the scholars had been dismissed some days previous to our arrival. Returned on board soon after noon, but had some difficulty in getting safely through the surf, which had greatly increased since the morning, owing perhaps to its being about high tide. At four o'clock p.m., the missionary families came on board, consisting of William Richards and wife, with eight children, David B. Lyman and wife, and two children, Titus Coan and wife, and an unmarried female in the employ of the mission, who, with the native servants, and their wives, and young children, amounted to twenty-three in number: the whale-boats of the American ship were procured for their embarkation. At five o'clock the Henry Freeling left the island of Maui; after reaching the Morakai channel, the breeze forsook us, and we were left to tumble about all the night in a heavy swell. Nearly the whole of our passengers were sea-sick; several of the females had with them sofa-beds, which were fixed upon the deck, and in which they remained the greatest part of the time they were on board.

31st.—Having the advantage of a fine trade-wind in the course of the day, about five o'clock p.m. we anchored outside the reefs at Oahu in ten fathoms water. Having previously announced by a white flag at the mast-head, when passing Diamond Hill, that missionaries were on board, a fine doublecanoe belonging to the king soon reached the vessel, sufficiently large to convey all our passengers to the shore at once, with their luggage, besides a number of the natives who worked the paddles, and had been employed on the occasion. Just after the canoe left, a shark from eight to nine feet in length was taken by our sailors; a large portion of which was sent on shore by the pilot, 'Sugar-Cane,' for the use of his family. These islanders are so fond of the flesh of the shark, that it will always fetch a high price in the Oahu market, when offered for sale.

Chapter XXIX.

Oahu—Annual Meeting of the Missionaries—Meeting with the Members of the Mission—Addressed by the Senior Missionary—Sail For Tauai—Native Meeting at Koloa—Waimea—Oppression of the Natives—Final Departure from the Sandwich Islands.

Oahu, Sixth Month 1st.—Early in the forenoon, the British Consul came on board in a whale-boat, and conveyed us to the shore, as our own small boat was in such a shattered condition from exposure to the sun, as scarcely to be fit to trust to for so considerable a distance, as from our present anchorage without the reefs, to the town of Honolulu. After landing, proceeded to the missionary establishment, and had an interview with the three missionaries from the island of Tauai, about ninety miles to leeward of Oahu, who had arrived yesterday in the Missionary Packet. Our situation was fully explained to them, and it was I believe understood, that unless one of them would kindly accompany us to that island, our making an attempt to visit the people would be useless. We remained on shore until near dark, but were favoured to reach the vessel without difficulty, she having displayed a light as a beacon to guide us. While on shore we were informed that the neighbourhood of New Zealand had been visited, in the First Month last, with an awful tempest, in which much damage had been done to the shipping; that Captain Russel, of the American ship Zone, with whom we were personally acquainted, and to whom we were much attached, in endeavouring to save one of the sailors, had himself been washed overboard and lost. We met with him last year, at the Society Isle Huahine, and were much pleased with his serious and steady deportment. Several books and tracts were furnished for the use of the crew of his vessel, by whom he was much beloved. We were informed by the missionary family, that he had been much interested at the meeting that was held there with the natives, which he had attended. He had determined that that should be his last voyage, and so it has proved. I humbly trust he has safely entered a haven of eternal rest; where storm and tempest cannot come, nor pain nor sorrow find place.

2nd.—During most of the day I had to struggle with discouraging circumstances; all perhaps needful, to keep the creature in its proper place. In the afternoon, landed with a view to ascertain from Hiram Bingham, whether one of the Tauai missionaries had consented to accompany us to that island as interpreter. Hiram Bingham said an adjourned annual meeting was about to assemble, and it would afford a good opportunity of getting to know what had transpired on that subject. The bell soon rang, and we repaired to the meeting. At a vacant opportunity the subject was brought forward by Hiram Bingham, but nothing came of it, as several of the parties were absent. I was afterwards informed that one of the Hawaii missionaries was kindly disposed to accompany us, which I rather viewed with regret, from being aware that he would expect to be brought back again by our vessel. Our suspense was at last relieved by a proposition from one of the Tauai missionaries to go with us, and an assurance that he would be ready to depart before the final conclusion of the annual meeting. Although this might occasion ten or twelve days' delay, yet the saving of time would be considerable, when compared with the first offer, which would involve our having to return again to Oahu, against a relentless trade-wind, the effect of which had been fully tried. The circumstances of the case in all its bearings considered, it seemed prudent to take the Henry Freeling again into harbour, rather than risk her any longer outside the reefs. It is no small trial to be thus delayed; but as it is not to gratify self that we linger on the way, the Lord knows, I trust we shall yet be able to redeem this apparent loss of time, and be favoured to improve the future to his praise.

Although the prospect which had been spread before the view of my mind, for some weeks previous to our return to Honolulu, of seeing the whole of the missionaries and their families when collected at their general meeting, still remained strongly with me; yet the time did not seem come for me to take any steps to accomplish the same, until we had ascertained that the whole of them had arrived. Those who were present at the opening of this general meeting, concluded I was detained until an interpreter was ready to accompany us to the island of Tauai, and in a very kind and brotherly manner invited us to attend the several sittings of that meeting. The manner in which the affairs of the mission to these islands is conducted, could not fail to excite much interest in our minds; and although well aware that in our attendance at the meetings we should be subjected to witness many things that we could not unite in, yet, as they had always allowed us to do that which was most easy to ourselves, without a single remonstrance or the slightest appearance of dissatisfaction on their part, I was not satisfied to let such an opportunity pass away, however painful it might prove, without availing ourselves of it: at the same time, the unmortified part would gladly have been excused altogether.

3rd.—This morning, one of the Tauai missionaries came on board to say, that he hoped to have his business in such a state of forwardness, as to enable him to return to that island before the final conclusion of the general meeting. A light breeze having sprung up from the southward, soon after breakfast the Henry Freeling got under weigh, and made sail for the harbour; before ten o'clock she anchored off the fort of Honolulu. Being desirous of going to the mission-station at Eva next First day, application was made to know whether a missionary would return there to meet the natives on that day; but it appeared that the whole of them will remain here, on account of its being the usual time for the celebration of what is called the 'Lord's Supper.' We were informed that so few of the natives would remain within the compass of their own station, that a visit would be better deferred until next week. In the evening attended one of the general meetings, and had to wade through a painful season therein.

4th.—The leak before alluded to in our vessel still continuing, although considerably lessened since our getting her into still water, it was deemed prudent that such parts of her should be well caulked, which were supposed to be the cause of her requiring so much pumping; while at the same time the needful repairs of the sails and rigging were going forward, in the expectation of again crossing the Equator, when altogether clear of these islands.

Sixth Month 5th. (First day.)—Remained on board through the day with our own people. In the evening repaired to the Mariners' place of worship, where a time of suffering was my lot.

10th.—Since First day my time has been pretty fully occupied in attending the different sittings of the general meeting of the members of the mission, as they came in course, and in procuring the supplies needful for the vessel, in exchange for such articles of barter remaining in our possession, as were most in demand. Having deferred going to Eva last week, as no interpreter could be procured, today I went in search of the missionary belonging to that district, and found that he had procured a large canoe, with the intention of setting forward tomorrow morning at the proper time of the tide, to enable us to pass in safety over the shallow places near the shore, and thus preclude the necessity of our being exposed to the swell outside of the reef.

11th.—In the afternoon left the vessel and proceeded towards the Pearl river, at the head of which lies the station of Eva; we were favoured to reach it in less than five hours, though our progress was for some time impeded by the giving way of the outrigger; but the natives soon sprung overboard and put it in order again. At this place, a prayer-meeting has been instituted among the natives, and sixteen of them collected in the evening at the house where we lodged: this station has been but recently organized.

12th. (First day.)—Having retired early to rest last evening, we were seated at the breakfast table by six o'clock this morning. The horn was blown in good time to collect the people, and at ten o'clock we met about seven hundred of them in a shed open on every side, there being as yet no place of worship erected. I had largely to declare among them the glad tidings of the gospel, turning their attention, as ability was afforded, to the just witness for God in every heart. Although under feelings of great weakness as to myself, yet the deportment of the people afforded an encouraging evidence that the great Master was near to own the work. The afternoon meeting was not quite so numerously attended, but it proved even more solid than that in the morning. In this meeting I had to turn them from the teachings of men, to that power which alone can save. For “none of them can by any means redeem his brother, nor give to God a ransom for him.” Hut the Almighty Father of love and mercy has amply provided for the salvation of all mankind by his Son Jesus Christ, who came into the world to save sinners; “he was made sin for us, who knew no sin, that we might be made the righteousness of God in Him who died to obtain for us the Holy Spirit, that we might live and come unto God by Him. The countenances of many of these dear people, spoke louder than words what they felt: weakness and poverty were my close companions; yet I was favoured with peaceful tranquillity of mind.

We left Eva at three o'clock this morning, the 13th instant, and got well on our way an hour before day-light, through the narrow rushy channel, which in places is overhung by the spreading boughs of large trees. Although there was very little wind, we were annoyed by the swell of the Pacific; but were favoured to reach the Henry Freeling by eight o'clock. It had been to me a time of favour, and a day to be remembered among the memorable ones of my chequered life; and the more so, when on looking back, it was discovered according to the time of England, to be a date on which I had more than once had to record the tender mercies of the Lord, for signal and crowning loving-kindness bestowed upon a poor unworthy creature. In the course of the day it was ascertained that the last of the missionary families had arrived to attend the general meeting in a small vessel from Wairuku; and that the other family residing at Waimea, on the island of Hawaii, were prevented from attending by an increase of family since we were at their dwelling. The time was now fully come for me to request an opportunity with the whole of the members of the mission; and in the evening I stated my case to the senior missionary, who appeared quite disposed to make way for it, by consulting his brethren at a meeting then about to collect, to which we repaired. Most of two hours elapsed before a suitable opportunity presented to spread the subject before the meeting; but when once understood, my request was immediately granted, and the next evening was fixed for us to meet together.

14th.—Employed on board through the day. In the evening, called upon Hiram Bingham who accompanied us to the meeting. I was shown into the moderator's seat, and the company was soon gathered together. After some time in silence, it was with me simply to state, that on leaving Honolulu a few weeks ago, I had no expectation of returning to it again; but some time afterwards I found that I should not be clear of these parts, without endeavouring to see the whole of the missionary establishment in its collected capacity. At that time it seemed difficult to comprehend how it would be brought about, but I felt a willingness and resignation on my part towards its accomplishment:—He that causes his wind to blow, and the waters flow, directed our steps and brought it to pass. As it is probable, (I continued) that all are present who will be on the occasion, I would suggest that we now endeavour to sink down in humble reverence of soul before “the Judge of all the earth,” to wait for the counsel of His will; and, if graciously favoured therewith, endeavour to do it, to his praise and to his glory. The meeting then settled down in silence and remained for a considerable time under a solemn covering; until I had to speak of the order in the church of Christ, and of the preparation of heart which every member must pass through by the operation of the Holy Spirit, before he can become a part of this glorious body, which is without spot or wrinkle; and the necessity of our individually knowing for ourselves the hope of our high and holy calling. It was afterwards with me to state, the opportunity I had had of seeing them in their different, distant, solitary and secluded allotments, and of witnessing their patient endeavours to promote the work in which they were engaged. Having myself dwelt amongst those whose language I could not understand, I was the better able to feel for them on this account with brotherly sympathy; and I was no stranger to the many obstacles thrown in their way, and the numerous difficulties that they had to encounter; but their only refuge was Christ Jesus the Lord; if He was with them, they had nothing to fear. I had no desire to discourage any, but while beholding the vast importance of the work they had taken in hand, I was ready to tremble at the awful weight of the responsibility which rested upon them. It was not for me to judge whether they had been called and chosen for the work, or not. I knew that our Lord had declared, “this gospel of the kingdom shall be preached in all the world for a witness unto all nations; and then shall the end come.” Their being called or not called to the work, rested with themselves. It is, however, possible for a man to have a zeal for God, but not according to knowledge; and while earnestly endeavouring to lend a hand of help to others, he may be neglecting the all-important duty of coming to the knowledge of the Lord for himself. I believed that many of them were truly and earnestly desirous to know the Lord for themselves, and I wished to encourage such to follow on to know Him: to seek Him, and not to rest contented, until they found Him who said, “seek and you shall find.” “The Lord whom you seek, shall suddenly come to His temple,—even the messenger of the covenant, whom you delight in: behold, He shall come, said the Lord of Hosts. But who may abide the day of his coming, and who shall stand when he appears!” Nothing that is of man, or in man,—that is earthly, sensual or unclean, can stand before Him: the heart must be cleansed and purified from every thing that defiles, before it can become the temple of a holy, pure, and just God: and none is sufficient for these things but He, unto whom all power in heaven and earth is given; who, the prophet declares, is “like a refiner's fire, and like fuller's soap; and He shall sit as a refiner and purifier of silver.” This heart-searching process we must all pass through: and by yielding in meekness and submission to the baptizing operation thereof, we shall in due time be given to know and to feel it to be the “messenger to prepare the way of the Lord” before Him, who will not dwell in the defiled temple of an unclean heart. This ordeal all have to pass through in a greater or smaller degree, before they come to that knowledge which is “life eternal,”—even the knowledge of “the only true God, and Jesus Christ whom He has sent;” who once visited the earth in a body that was prepared for Him, but who now visits by His Holy Spirit the heart of man: who is indeed the heavenly messenger of the covenant, to all that seek him, and delight in him, and whose coming is sure, because the Lord has promised. But to those who are called and chosen to speak to others in the name of the Lord, and to proclaim the glad tidings of that gospel which “is the power of God unto salvation, to every one that believes,” a larger portion of the “refiner's fire” is often needful, to purge them as gold and silver, and prepare them for the great work of declaring “the truth as it is in Jesus,” from their own blessed and sensible experience. Just in proportion as the Lord's messengers are qualified and taught of Him, when commissioned to go forth in his name, may we expect that the people will be benefited: if our eyes are not first opened, vain is the attempt to open the eyes of the blind, and turn them from darkness to light. I was largely drawn forth to speak of the vast importance of the work in which they had engaged, and to arouse them to a sense of the responsibility it involved; recommending them to take counsel of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus,—for the same shall judge us at the last day. I had much to express to them in great plainness of speech, under the overshadowing power of that love which makes not afraid; reminding them of the many blessed seasons we had been permitted to witness together, on the different islands, when the Divine presence was as a crown and diadem over those large assemblies of the people. That “faith which works by love,” and the true supper of the Lord, were also largely held up to their view.

15th.—Taking the necessary measures to prepare the vessel for sea. In the evening met the whole of the missionary establishment again; when the senior, on behalf of his brethren and himself, delivered an address, on the subject of our visit to these islands; in which he expressed their satisfaction in terms of applause, perhaps, better forgotten by us, than remembered. I was silent among them; but when the meeting broke up, I told the speaker, I could have added, “Not unto us,” etc.

16th.—In the morning, Charles and myself took an early opportunity of sitting down together and were favoured to get into the quiet, although all was bustle around us. In the afternoon went on shore to settle our affairs, and take leave of those with whom we had now been several months acquainted, and for whom an earnest solicitude was felt. Soon after returning on board, we embarked the baggage of Peter J. Gulick the missionary, who had engaged to accompany us to the island of Tauai, and who resides at the station of Koloa; he, his wife, and five children, with the British Consul and the master of the free school, were our passengers. The tradewind being fresh in our favour, and having our pilot 'SugarCane' in readiness, at five o'clock we quitted the sheltering harbour of Honolulu and stretched well into the offing, in the hope of a permanent breeze at a good distance from the land. Having only ninety-four miles to run, an expectation was raised of our being in the roads of Koloa by ten o'clock the next morning, but the wind forsook us before midnight, and the island of Tauai was not discovered until too late for its accomplishment.

17th.—Got sight of the island at three o'clock p.m., and at six o'clock, anchored in the open roadstead of Koloa, just in time to land our passengers before the night came upon us. Our vessel being observed approaching towards the roads, a large canoe belonging to the missionary, was sent from the shore; which, by making three journeys to and fro, succeeded in carrying the family, and the major part of the baggage, in safety to the land. Peter J. Gulick, with his wife and five children, remained on board, until their luggage was sent off, and were at last placed in the canoe, which, from the rolling of the vessel, and the incessant swells of the ocean, was no easy task. The father having one of the young children to care for, could not render his wife the slightest assistance: the child cried, and he seemed very anxious lest an accident should happen: but his wife, (while hanging suspended, watching for the right moment, when the canoe coming up, borne by the swell, should rise high enough for her to get foothold sufficient to induce her to let go all hold of the vessel,) calmly cried out to him, 'we must be patient, my dear.' After two or three efforts she ventured, and was received in the arms of two of the natives, and placed in tolerable security. The youngest child, which had for some time been held by the rough grasp of one of our sailors, and unconscious of the risk to which it was exposed, was now handed, with smiling face, over the side of our little reeling bark, in safety to its mother. Although this appeared a hazardous enterprise, demanding the utmost care, yet I believe they were all safe, as in the hollow of the Divine hand.

Sixth Month ]8th.—Landed on the island of Tauai, and made our way to the missionary station. Having made the needful arrangements relative to meeting the people of this district tomorrow, I left my certificates with Peter J. Gulick, who kindly undertook to convene the natives. After visiting a sugar plantation in the neighbourhood conducted by Americans, we returned on board.

19th. (First day.)—Repaired in good time to the shore, having two miles to go to the native meeting in the heat of the sun. By nine o'clock, about eight hundred of the people were assembled in an open shed. I was poor, and under feelings of great weakness amongst them; but after reminding them of the solemn purpose for which we were brought together, when the missionary had finished reading the translation of my certificates, the way was opened for me largely to declare the glad tidings of great joy to all that repent, believe, and obey the gospel; and to make a solemn appeal to the just witness for God in every heart. I felt an earnest engagement to turn the attention of these dear people to the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, which would discover to them “all things that ever they did,” would set their sins in order before them, and save them from sin with an everlasting salvation. The people were very attentive, and under a solemn feeling the meeting broke up; when they flocked round us in the usual manner. I found that on account of the weak state of the health of the missionary, no afternoon meeting was held; but the school was largely attended: on this occasion, however, the people were again assembled for worship, at three o'clock p.m. I felt little on my mind towards them, but was fearful of withholding that little, and stood for a time under much discouragement; strength was, however, in due time graciously afforded,—and I was enabled, to my admiration, to set before the people “life and death, good and evil,”—and to encourage them not to be overcome of evil, but to overcome evil with good. “Let every one that names the name of Christ depart from iniquity,” and “live unto Him who died for them, and rose again;” and who now by the grace of His Holy Spirit, brings salvation to all men, has appeared unto all men, and teaches all men, etc. Although the number present was less than in the morning, yet the meeting was no less solemn. Returned on board before dark to lessen the risk of staving the boat against the vessel, as the constant swell of the sea renders access and egress at all times difficult, but much less hazardous by day-light.

21st.—Yesterday and this morning pretty fully engaged in procuring vegetables, Indian corn, etc. In the afternoon went up to Koloa, to take leave of the missionary's family, he himself being about to accompany us to Hanarei, a station on the other side of the island. Towards evening the needful supplies were obtained, and Peter J. Gulick, Richard Charlton, (the Consul) with three or four natives were embarked. At seven o'clock we loosed from the roads, and stretched away into the offing for the night, with a fresh gale, but directly opposed to the course we were desirous of steering.

22nd.—On approaching the land again this morning, it was found that but little had been gained through the night; and unless the wind veered a little in our favour, there seemed no probability of our rounding the head-land which obstructed the passage to Hanarei. Employed in plying to windward all day, and by midnight our position was such, that day-light only was needed to sanction our taking the advantage of the bending of the coast to steer for the entrance of the bay. But when our object was nearly accomplished, the wind died away, and a strong current set the vessel so rapidly to leeward, that for a time there seemed no prospect of our getting in at all: the breeze, however, rallied again, and helped us round the point of the reef; and by nine o'clock a.m., an anchor was dropped in ten fathoms water in the midst of heavy rain.

23rd.—As vessels seldom touch here, our arrival soon brought off a number of canoes, and a supply of fresh fish; butter and milk were quickly furnished from the estate of Richard Charlton, who had sent an overland messenger from Koloa, to keep a good look-out for the vessel, and have these articles in readiness on our arrival. After breakfast, our kind interpreter Peter J. Gulick went on shore to examine into the state of the people, their own missionary and his family being absent at Oahu, attending the General Meeting of the mission. Some of our people were employed on shore in the forenoon, slaughtering a bullock from the stock of Richard Charlton, kindly provided for our accommodation, in the expectation that the Henry Freeling would return towards the Equator before many days.

24th.—Our missionary friend came off from the shore at an early hour, to inform us that the natives would be collected about half-past nine o'clock. We landed with him in a large canoe, conducted by skilful natives, which carried us comfortably through the surf. As we approached the strand, the people collected in a body, and watching the return of the roller which bore the canoe a sufficient height for their purpose, it was placed in a few moments very safely out of the reach of the breakers upon dry ground. The conch-shells were immediately sounded; and after waiting some time at the missionaryhouse, we proceeded to the meeting. Here we found, perhaps, seven hundred people, all squatted upon the ground in stillness, (as no seats were provided,) waiting for the strangers. After a time my mind was opened to declare amongst them Christ Jesus the Lord; the light of the knowledge of whose Holy Spirit visits every heart, to give the glory of God in the face of Jesus Christ, and if believed in, and walked in, to restore man from a state of sin and death to holiness and newness of life. Strength and ability were richly afforded me, to testify the love and the mercy of God in Christ Jesus to the children of men; and the people were exhorted to turn to His light while the day of their visitation was extended, lest they should be overtaken by the night, wherein no man can work.

Although the people were very attentive, and great solemnity prevailed on the occasion, yet after the meeting broke up, as was the case with those held at Koloa, the sentence of death in myself was my only portion: at its conclusion they flocked round us in the usual way,—many of them, I believe, with love in their hearts. At least one hundred and fifty accompanied us down to the strand, and saw us safely launched again into deep water. In the afternoon landed on the other side of the bay, and had full opportunity of witnessing the very low state of these poor degraded people, and the filthy abodes of several of them. I exchanged needles and fish-hooks for any thing they could furnish, even for broken shells, as they seemed to have nothing to part with, to purchase such articles as they stood in need of, and which they were very desirous to obtain. At seven o'clock p.m., departed from the bay, and made sail to the eastward with a fair breeze, and heavy showers of rain falling.

25th.—In the course of this day, we were much baffled with variable winds and strong currents; towards sun-set we anchored in five fathoms water, in the road of Waimea, opposite a fort formed some years ago by the crew of a Russian vessel. Soon after arriving, Peter J. Gullick went on shore to arrange for a meeting with the people tomorrow. In the evening, some milk was sent off from the missionary station; its occupants, Samuel Whitney and family, are now absent at Oahu, with the rest of the mission.

26th. (First-day.)—Landed in good time to attend the meeting. Richard Charlton undertook to conduct us through the surf with the natives, having acquired their language from long residence among these islands; we soon met with Peter J. Gulick, and proceeded to the meeting together. By nine o'clock about one thousand persons were collected, who filled every part of the house, except a narrow gallery intended for singers, at the lower end of it. I felt as one stripped of every thing but a sense of utter weakness and inability, which has been the case for several seasons of late; and although the Lord was again pleased to try my faith, that my trust and confidence might be centred in Him alone, He again condescended to clothe me with strength and power, to declare amongst the people the unsearchable riches of Christ. Soon after Peter J. Gulick had read my certificates, I stood up; and having awakened their attention and directed them to Him, unto whom the cattle on a thousand hills belong, I told them I had no desire to multiply words amongst them, lest I should be found darkening counsel; but that my desire was to turn them from words to the power of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus in their own hearts. My tongue was loosed to declare freely the things relating to the gospel of the kingdom, for upwards of an hour. No people could be more attentive; my prayer is, that many of them may be enabled to say, from heart-felt living experience,—“Now we believe, not because of your saying: for we have heard him ourselves, and know that this is indeed the Christ, the Saviour of the world:”—unto whom be ascribed glory and dominion forever.

After the meeting was over, I found that my interpreter was greatly exhausted by the fatigue he had had to pass through, although he offered to attend again in the afternoon, but added, that the number of people would be much reduced, as no afternoon meetings are held in the absence of the resident missionary; and when at his post, the Bible class system is usually adopted. I told him, that if I came with a view to see the people again, I should take care to be on shore in time in the afternoon. The surf had increased since our landing in the morning; but we were assisted as before, by experienced and skilful managers. The weather becoming wet in the afternoon, seemed to decide my remaining on board, having been informed that the islanders do not like to go out in the rain themselves, nor do they expect strangers to do it; but more especially, from not feeling it binding upon me to return to the shore again that day. On looking at the subject after the time had passed by, although in poverty and depression, I did not feel as one that had held back. Had there been a probability of a meeting being held, I was scarcely fit to attempt a second landing, from pain in my head. In the afternoon, read portions of Scripture to our own crew. Late in the night, made a fair copy of a short address to the members of the mission, in the Sandwich Islands; at the same time acknowledging the receipt of a joint communication from them in their general meeting capacity, signed by all the members.

27th.—Engaged in procuring yams, pumpkins, with other vegetables, and live stock, in the prospect of again steering towards the Equator. Found it expedient to hire from the natives a strong canoe, to assist our operations, as our own jolly-boat is now old and very crazy, and altogether unfit to contend with the surf upon this side of the island, even when in her best condition. On landing we found a considerable body of the natives collected together, with a prodigious quantity of various sorts of vegetables, fruits, fowls, etc., intended as a present to our vessel: the missionary being present, there was no lack of an interpreter between us. I told him that we could not accept of any thing as a present from these poor people; and even if we could, that the quantity before us upon the beach was greater than our vessel could take in with convenience; at the same time I would not object to take what might be useful to us, provided they would allow us to make a suitable return. It appeared from the statement of the missionary, that the people were intending to build a new meeting-house at Koloa, by voluntary contribution, and that as this was the case, the difficulty could be at once surmounted by the appropriation of the amount of the supplies which might be taken by us, to that purpose. To effect this, the articles we needed were to be valued in dollar money, which enabled us to pay for them in such commodities as could be used in the building in question as materials, or in the payment of workmen employed in erecting it: articles of clothing were much in demand for the latter purpose. The people, particularly the females, brought with them on this occasion many of the simple native productions of the island; with small quantities of shells, and other ornamental trifles in use among them in the days of gross idolatry, but now laid aside. These articles were intended as presents from individuals then present, so that each person received an equivalent for what he had to offer on the spot; and care was taken that an ample return was made to each of them. Needles, fish-hooks, and pocket combs, were eagerly sought after in exchange. Some native dresses were brought in the shape of a morning robe for a female, made from the bark of the paper mulberry tree, and with thread of their own manufacture: this circumstance accounted for the brisk demand for large sized needles, to enable them to use their own thread, while a very small quantity of our thread was taken. These dresses were mostly purchased for scissors; but knives, combs, and other articles were in demand, for native cloth of stained colours. We returned on board to avoid the hottest part of the day, as the heat was extreme, and the reflection from the white sand on the beach almost insupportable. As the sun declined, we landed again and pursued our barter trade, until the natives began to retire from the shore for the night: crossed the river by canoe opposite the fort.

Some years ago, the chiefs of this island had been prevailed upon by the Russians to place themselves under the protection of that nation, and on that score had ceded one-half of the island over to them. After this, the fort was erected; the step altogether was found to be obnoxious to some other powers, and the Russian government disclaiming the action, as having been committed without any sanction on their part, the scheme was abandoned altogether, and the blame cast upon its supposed projectors: be this correct or not, the fort is still in existence. Cannon of other nations are to be seen in it, besides those of Russia; and several may be distinguished to have come from England, by the G. R., etc. upon them. It is probable these may have been procured by the chiefs, or their own king, with a view to strengthen this place for the security of the island.

28th.—Today, for the most part employed in embarking yams, sweet potatoes, water melons, goats, etc., which had been purchased with barter goods. Some molasses had been spoken about to a Chinaman who is engaged here as an agent to an American master residing at Oahu; but finding that this article was entirely the gain of oppression, we declined taking it on that account.—A few gallons were purchased at last from an American, who had produced the sugar cane by his own labour, which wholly removed all difficulty on this head. On this island, it is said that the poor natives are more oppressed by the chiefs, than on any other of the Sandwich group. The introduction of two establishments for making sugar, with which the chiefs are connected, it seems probable, will eventually be the cause of promoting a state of slavery, as oppressive as that which has existed in the West Indies: the population, from this, and other much to be deplored causes, is rapidly decreasing these sugar plantations were set on foot by two Americans. In one instance, the chiefs find all the labour, and have one-half of the profit; in the other, the scheme is more plausible, as the natives are paid a small pittance for their labour: but the chiefs are compelled by contract to furnish a sufficient number of labourers for their share of the profit; for the sake of which, the contract is more rigidly enforced. This was spoken of as being conducted upon a fair principle; but we told them, nothing compulsory could be just. Our friend the missionary having left us and returned to his family at Koloa, we found the kind assistance of the British Consul very useful in our transactions with the natives.

At the edge of dark, we had all on board, and only waited the land-breeze to waft us from the island. At nine o'clock P. M., Richard Charlton left us, into whose hands were committed our letters for England, to be forwarded from Oahu, by the first eligible conveyance which might offer after his arrival there. Our pilot “Sugar-Cane' was now paid off, and all things being settled, we took a final departure, and stretched off a south and by east course; leaving these interesting isles of the ocean, amongst which, more than half a year of our time had been expended. The best welfare of the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands will be an object ever near and dear to my heart, and which, however distantly separated as to the body, my spirit will earnestly crave.

Extract from a letter of this date written to an intimate friend in England:

Time would fail me to tell of the everlasting mercy and compassion that have been extended to us-ward, in that love which has compassed about as with a shield, during our recent operations in dangerous bays and roadsteads, lying open within a very few points of the compass, to the whole beat of the Pacific. In most of these places, we have had to land amidst a breaking surf, sometimes in our own boat, and at others in canoes, which when managed by the natives, are by far the safer, although subject to frequent drenchings from the sea.

Some years ago, the chiefs of this island had been prevailed upon by the Russians to place themselves under the protection of that nation, and on that score had ceded one-half of the island over to them. After this, the fort was erected; the step altogether was found to be obnoxious to some other powers, and the Russian government disclaiming the action, as having been committed without any sanction on their part, the scheme was abandoned altogether, and the blame cast upon its supposed projectors: be this correct or not, the fort is still in existence. Cannon of other nations are to be seen in it, besides those of Russia; and several may be distinguished to have come from England, by the G. R., etc. upon them. It is probable these may have been procured by the chiefs, or their own king, with a view to strengthen this place for the security of the island.

28th.—Today, for the most part employed in embarking yams, sweet potatoes, water melons, goats, etc., which had been purchased with barter goods. Some molasses had been spoken about to a Chinaman who is engaged here as an agent to an American master residing at Oahu; but finding that this article was entirely the gain of oppression, we declined taking it on that account.—A few gallons were purchased at last from an American, who had produced the sugar cane by his own labour, which wholly removed all difficulty on this head. On this island, it is said that the poor natives are more oppressed by the chiefs, than on any other of the Sandwich group. The introduction of two establishments for making sugar, with which the chiefs are connected, it seems probable, will eventually be the cause of promoting a state of slavery, as oppressive as that which has existed in the West Indies: the population, from this, and other much to be deplored causes, is rapidly decreasing; these sugar plantations were set on foot by two Americans. In one instance, the chiefs find all the labour, and have one-half of the profit; in the other, the scheme is more plausible, as the natives are paid a small pittance for their labour: but the chiefs are compelled by contract to furnish a sufficient number of labourers for their share of the profit; for the sake of which, the contract is more rigidly enforced. This was spoken of as being conducted upon a fair principle; but we told them, nothing compulsory could be just.

Our friend the missionary having left us and returned to his family at Koloa, we found the kind assistance of the British Consul very useful in our transactions with the natives. At the edge of dark, we had all on board, and only waited the land-breeze to waft us from the island. At nine o'clock p.m., Richard Charlton left us, into whose hands were committed our letters for England, to be forwarded from Oahu, by the first eligible conveyance which might offer after his arrival there. Our pilot 'Sugar-Cane' was now paid off, and all things being settled, we took a final departure, and stretched off a south and by east course; leaving these interesting isles of the ocean, amongst which, more than half a year of our time had been expended. The best welfare of the inhabitants of the Sandwich Islands will be an object ever near and dear to my heart, and which, however distantly separated as to the body, my spirit will earnestly crave.

Extract from a letter of this date written to an intimate friend in England:

Time would fail me to tell of the everlasting mercy and compassion that have been extended to us-ward, in that love which has compassed about as with a shield, during our recent operations in dangerous bays and roadsteads, lying open within a very few points of the compass, to the whole beat of the Pacific. In most of these places, we have had to land amidst a breaking surf, sometimes in our own boat, and at others in canoes, which when managed by the natives, are by far the safer, although subject to frequent drenchings from the sea.

I brought with me from London, as recommended by a dear friend, a patent water-proof belt, or life-preserver, made by Macintosh, of Cheapside; but I have been ashamed to make use of it on any one occasion, and when we have been going to land, I have uniformly left it on board the vessel. How could I now begin to doubt the loving-kindness of Him, whose goodness has followed me all my life long; and dare to distrust that never-failing arm of strength, that has been so often and eminently stretched forth for my preservation, by night and day, by sea and land, amongst strangers and foreigners, where no man cared for my soul,—in cold and heat,—in hunger, thirst, and weariness,—amid the din of arms, the noisome pestilence and the destruction that wastes at noon day: how often from boyhood to the present day have I been sheltered from the rage of the angry tempest; and how was I supported in the iron grasp of affliction, when week after week, tidings of family distress assailed me, without the power to lend a hand of help,—the parent stock smitten and removed, and the branches withering. And after all this, shall I now, when old and grey-headed, begin to doubt the heavenly source of help, that still strengthens me to proclaim the unsearchable riches of his love, to the tribes which inhabit his possessions in these uttermost parts of the earth; when the feelings of decaying nature are lost sight of, and the inner man strengthened by the might of the Lord's glorious power and sensible presence, to my humble admiration. “To whom shall we go,” when He only has the words of eternal life? to whom all power in heaven and earth is given.

Sixth Month 29th.—There being no probability of further interaction with the natives in these parts of the globe, we now return to the true time of England, from which we digressed on our arrival at Oahu, to prevent mistakes: but the log book of the Henry Freeling underwent no alteration, and is now dated the 30th of Sixth month, 1836. (Fifth day.) This morning, being fifty miles from Tauai, the loom of the island under a bank of clouds was but just discernible. Cloudy weather, but we had a wind that enabled us to steer a steady course to the south south-east.

When on the point of leaving the harbour of Honolulu, at Oahu, when there could be no further communication between us and the parties concerned, a letter was received from the general meeting of the American mission, signed by all the members; of which the following is a copy.

Honolulu, June 16th, 1836.

Daniel Wheeler, Dear Friend,

We, the missionaries of the Sandwich Islands, feel ourselves happy to have the opportunity of reciprocating the kindness and sympathy, which you and our young friend, your esteemed son Charles Wheeler, have manifested to us and our families, during the period of five and a half months, while you have sojourned and laboured with us. We have hailed your arrival in this country with gladness, and welcomed your visit to our stations with much pleasure. We have read your credentials from York and London with care; and have been cheered by the Christian spirit which they breathe. We have been refreshed by your interesting account of the origin and progress of your enterprise, and by your earnest and repeated evangelical appeals to our people. You have seen with what readiness of mind we have interpreted your discourses to the people, and endeavoured to facilitate your work. And we now tender you our thanks for your kind co-operation in our work, with which you have been enabled, by the great Head of the church, to favour us. Your design to preach “the unsearchable riches of Christ” in the isles and on the shores of this great ocean, for an indefinite but protracted period, at such a remove from the comforts of home and all you held dear on earth, must, we are aware, (for we are acquainted with the nature of the service,) be attended with sacrifices, toils, and cares, in which none but the Divine arm can sustain you; but this arm Divine has thus far sustained you. For this we would unite with you in thanksgiving “to the Father of lights, from whom comes every good and perfect gift;” and with you would we rejoice in the assurance, that it will sustain you still. Take courage, dear friend, and go on with your good work. Do what is in your power to pour the light of the sun of righteousness upon the people which sit in darkness, upon the tribes on whom the star-light of nature nightly shines, and upon the isles over which the day-star of grace has arisen. Accompanied and aided by your own beloved son, sustained and guided by the adorable Spirit of God; may you be enabled to do much to dry the fountain of intemperance and licentiousness, which threaten such desolations in every quarter of the globe, and to hasten the universal diffusion of revealed truth. We bid you God speed, while you proclaim to perishing men the glad tidings of salvation, through a crucified and exalted Saviour; while with self-sacrifice and devotedness to Christ, you labour “to turn men from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God.” Pray for us, that we may be found faithful in this work, and that the gospel may have free course, and be glorified. And now, as you are convinced that our Master calls you to leave us, to prosecute the service you have to perform for Him in other isles and coasts, we bid you and your son an affectionate farewell; and part with you as with valued friends, whom we hope to meet in peace, when the sacrifices, and toils, and trials of a missionary life are ended. “The Lord bless you and keep you. The Lord make his face to shine upon you, and be gracious unto you. The Lord lift up his countenance upon you, and give you peace.” Not unto us, but to God be the glory. Your affectionate friends.'

Signed by: Asa Thurston, Hiram Bingham, Samuel Whitney, William Richards, Levi Chamberlain, Artemas Bishop, Lorrin Andrews, John Smith Green, Peter J. Gulick, Ephraim W. Clark, Gerrit P. Judd, Dwight Baldwin, Reuben Tinker, Henry Dimond, Sheldon Dibble, Titus Coan, Henry H. Hitchcock, John S. Emerson, David B. Lyman, Ephraim Spalding, Richard Armstrong, Cochraine Forbes, Wm. P. Alexander, Edmund H. Rogers, Lowel Smith, Benj. W. Parker, Edwin O. Hall.

An acknowledgment of the receipt of this document was sent to Oahu by the British Consul, Richard Charlton, as before hinted at; a copy of which now follows, with the substance of what quickened upon my mind to the members of the mission.

To the Members of the Mission at the Sandwich Islands

Dear Friends,

Your joint communication, replete with the expression of brotherly kindness and regard, was put into my hand just as we were quitting the shores of Oahu. Although utterly unmerited on my part, yet I feel compelled to accept it, from a belief in the purity of those motives by which it was dictated; while, at the same time, the feeling is awakened, that to me belongs only “blushing and confusion of face.” I rejoice in the opportunity so soon afforded me to acknowledge its receipt, and more especially because I had felt my mind drawn towards you, before I saw its contents; desiring more and more that you may individually become acquainted with the binding influence of that love, which many waters cannot quench, “unto all riches of the full assurance of understanding, to the acknowledgment of the mystery of God, and of the Father, and of Christ; in whom are hid all the treasures of wisdom and knowledge.”

I desire for you, my friends, all that you can possibly desire for yourselves; believing that your principal desire is to be true followers of Him, who said,—“If any man will come after me, let him deny himself, and take up his cross daily, and follow me.” These are the express and explicit terms of discipleship, to which unqualified obedience is required; and from which all reservations are inadmissible: let us examine then how far these indispensable conditions are submitted to on our part. If we profess to follow the great and heavenly example of “Him who died for us and rose again,” in which all the graces of earthly perfection are combined, in all our actions before men, let us, my friends, be complete, and do it also in all our words: let our language to and before men be like His. Surely we ought to be content to use the language which he himself uttered and accepted of men. His words are pure words: they are wholesome words: and we ought to consent to the words of our Lord Jesus Christ. Then let us be willing to follow the Lord of life and glory: if we carry His example fairly out, our speech will bewray us and show that we are his disciples indeed: we shall find that this brings us at once to the foot of the cross—the daily cross: without this we are strangers to the self-denying holy cross; and if we do not bear the cross, we can never wear the crown. Then let us not fear to confess our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, nor be ashamed of Him and His word before men; remembering the awful declaration which bears upon all, and applies to all,—“Whosoever shall deny me before men, him will I also deny before my Father which is heaven;” and “whosoever shall be ashamed of me and my words in this adulterous and sinful generation, of him also shall the Son of Man be ashamed, when he comes in the glory of his Father with the holy angels.” This has been put into my heart in love towards you: in the same love it is written, and in which I trust it will be received, from your affectionate friend,

Daniel Wheeler.

My son Charles unites with me in an assurance of grateful acknowledgment and regard for your kind remembrance of him.

P. S.—The oppressed condition of the natives of this island is truly affecting, and prompts me to remind my constant friend Hiram Bingham, of the address that was presented to the king Kinau, etc., at his house, to whose care the printing of it was committed.'

Henry Freeling, in the road of Waimea, Isle of Tauai, 27th of Sixth Month, 1836.

Chapter XXX.

Re-Cross the Equator—Hervey Islands—Visit the Island of Rarotonga—Friendly Reception—School—Native Meetings—Kindness of the Natives—Sail for the Friendly Isles.

Without entering into the particular details of this voyage, which can be but of little interest to those on shore, we directed our course towards the equator, endeavouring as much as circumstances would permit, to keep to the eastward, in the hope of fetching the island of Rarotonga, one of the Hervey Isles, in latitude 21° 31' south of the line, and longitude 160° west. After witnessing the usual variety of changes in the winds and weather, and the thunder-storms to which these latitudes are subject, we were favoured to cross the equator about three o'clock in the morning of the 19th of Seventh Month, in health and safety, and at noon were in latitude forty miles south; longitude by lunar observation 160° west. Not a single vessel was seen during the whole passage; and although we must have passed near several of the islands scattered upon the surface of the ocean, both north and south of the line, yet none of them were sighted until First-day, the 31st; when at day-break in the morning the island of Rarotonga was discovered about seven leagues to windward of us.

The morning was then calm, but at nine o'clock a.m. we stretched away to the east north-east, with a light breeze, there being no alternative, but that of endeavouring to beat up to it; although it was a little mortifying to perceive, that the settled trade-wind blew directly from it. Having by dint of exertion gained ground, one of the missionary stations could plainly be discerned to leeward on Second day afternoon. This was known by the appearance of a large building, which, with some others about it, was whitewashed, and had a neat appearance. We then stood to the southward until the other missionary station was open to our view, and near enough to observe a number of the natives upon the look out, who had no doubt descried the approach of a strange vessel to their shores. As the wind still blew strongly against us, we could not get sufficiently near the coast to entice the canoes to come off before the night closed in; so we hovered within a short distance of the island until the next morning, the 2nd of Eighth Month: when, at an early hour a boat was seen coming from the shore, from the first station observed yesterday, which in due time reached the Henry Freeling. We were enabled to understand from our visitors, that we were off the station of Charles Pittman the missionary, with whom and with his wife, we became acquainted at the island of Tahiti last year. They were at that time in a weak state of health, and it seemed very doubtful whether they would ever be able (particularly Charles Pittman,) to return to the island of Rarotonga. It was very satisfactory to find they were restored to their duty in improved health; more especially as our way seemed at once fairly opened to enter upon this new scene of labour, by the means being thus marvellously provided, as there was no other resident missionary at that time upon the island.

I sent a note back by the boat to say, we were now permitted to greet them from the very edge of Rarotonga; and only waited information, as to the practicability of our vessel finding a place of safe anchorage. This boat was soon discovered to be again coming off, and on near approach, Charles Pittman himself proved to be on board of her. We had scarcely time to congratulate each other after he had reached the deck, before he became sea-sick from the tossing of our vessel. As he was unable to converse, we concluded to return to the shore with him immediately: he remained in the air while we threw off our sea-garments, and we then put off together for the shore. He began to revive as we got into smoother water, and after landing he soon came round again.

As we drew nigh the strand, it became densely covered with an innumerable host of children, who at once hailed us as their friends: it was with difficulty that we could pass along for them, as these delighted little naked fellows completely choked up the avenue through a grove of bananas, which leads to the mission-house, struggling who should first get hold of our hands; and if but a finger could be laid hold of, it seemed quite to satisfy them: this banana grove was of Charles Pittman's own planting. Soon after reaching the house, the floor was studded over with natives squatted on every side, the elders of the people coming forward to salute us, and welcome us to their island. After some consideration and inquiry had taken place, it was concluded that the people should be generally convened tomorrow morning in that district, and a meeting held at eleven o'clock a.m. The afternoon, towards sundown, would have been preferred on some accounts, but this would unavoidably have thrown us into the dark, and thereby rendered our return to the Henry Freeling doubly hazardous.

After partaking of some simple refreshment, we looked round the village of Gnatagnia, and then prepared to return to our vessel. When leaving her in the morning, we took with us an English union jack, for the purpose of hoisting upon a lofty bamboo, or cocoa-nut tree, as a signal for Captain Keen to stand in as close to the reefs as was prudent on seeing this flag displayed upon the shore, to save the labour of the people in the boat, and to afford us every chance of smooth water. When this flag was put up, we were told that it was the first time the English flag had been planted upon the island of Rarotonga; very peaceable possession had been taken of the island on this occasion at any rate, and one in which a most cordial reception was strongly evinced, in a degree of that love which casts out fear from every breast, and makes every man a brother. We were favoured to get well on board, and then purchased a few fowls and vegetables of the native crew, more with a view to please, than from a lack of fresh provisions. Our meeting with the natives tomorrow is now entirely dependent upon the elements, a shift of wind may compel us to seek safety, by flying from the island before the returning morning; but having done our best, we must cast all our burden and all our care upon Him, who alone can bring it to pass; before whom my mind is humbled and bowed down, imploring help and strength; that the righteous cause may not be tarnished in our feeble hands, but rather that the Lord's name may be exalted and glorified, and the gospel of the dear Redeemer's spiritual kingdom faithfully declared to these people; until the thanksgiving of many shall redound to the glory and praise of the riches of that all-saving grace and truth which came by Him, bringing salvation unto all mankind the world over.

Eighth Month 3rd.—The morning was beautifully fine, but having crept a long distance from the island during the darkness, and the breeze now being very light, our progress shoreward again was very slow. Although about one-half of our masts only could be seen above the horizon when the day broke; yet the natives had the sagacity to perceive, by the position of our sails, that we were steering towards the shore, and immediately put off with Charles Pittman's boat. Our own boats had been too long in a dry state, to be trust-worthy; and as there was no harbour that could be entered with prudence, all our hands were required on board, as the vessel was liable to be blown off to sea at all times. Charles Pittman's boat, although a clumsy one, was therefore regarded as a privilege and addition to our comforts. From our distance in the offing, it was nearly nine o'clock a.m., before this boat got to the vessel; but desirous of rendering every assistance in his power, Alexander Cunningham (a person whom we had known last autumn at Eimeo, and now endeavouring to establish a sugar plantation on his own account at Rarotonga,) came off in her: having some knowledge of the language, he came principally to interpret between us and the natives, should occasion require it.

While the breeze freshened a little, and the vessel was enabled to steer towards the mouth of the channel through the reef, we kept on board; but on approaching the coast the wind began to die away, and we then proceeded more rapidly in the boat. On landing we were met by several hundreds of the natives, a large proportion of them boys; and after remaining some time at the mission-house, we looked into the school for the least scholars: some of whom read to all appearance very readily. In the large school we heard several of the boys and girls read verse after verse alternately in one of the Evangelists; and were informed that fifteen hundred copies of the Four Evangelists, had been recently received from England, via Tahiti: some of these were read audibly, and we were told correctly. After some further examination by catechising, a hymn was sung; the schools then broke up in an orderly manner, and proceeded towards the meeting-house.

While a silent spectator in the schools, the love of the Divine Master flowed in my heart towards these dear children,—an encouraging and sealing evidence, that strength and ability would not be lacking to proclaim the glad tidings of his gospel, in his time. The house was filled, and held upwards of two thousand people. We remained upon the floor of the building, while Charles Pittman read my certificates, and explained to the people the nature of my visit, I believe to the utmost in his power. During this time it was very evident, that if Charles Pittman had been speaking by my side, half of the people at least could not have heard him, and therefore I thought it best to promote his remaining in his pulpit by joining him there. I remained quiet, however, until he had thoroughly finished, and then went up and stood in silence by his side, for a short interval: when it was with me to turn the attention of the gazing islanders to the “God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ”—that the great object of our thus being permitted to assemble together, might be fully realized, and the blessing which prevailed to the utmost bound of the everlasting hills, might rest upon us.

After this, I had largely to declare the things which belong unto their peace, and to turn them to the “Lamb of God which takes away the sin of the world—that they might know Him to be so in blessed reality, by believing in the light of the Holy Spirit, which shines in every heart, as a light in a dark place; that by taking heed thereunto, they would be made sensible of the darkness of their own hearts. It was for this the Saviour died, that mankind might no longer walk in darkness, but in the light of life; that as sin has heretofore reigned in us unto death, so now might grace reign through righteousness unto eternal life, by Jesus Christ our Lord. It was a solemn season; the power of the Lord reigned over all, and his own works rendered living praises unto Him and the Son of his love. After the meeting broke up, some time was occupied in noticing the people, who remained in crowds about us. It was agreed with Charles Pittman, that the people at Aaron Buzacott's station, about eight miles distant, should that evening be informed of my intention to visit them tomorrow; and that the meeting should be requested to gather at an early hour in the forenoon, to allow sufficient time for my return to the vessel. While we rested and refreshed, the preconcerted signal was made, and the Henry Freeling coming pretty close to the island, we got safely on board before dark.

4th.—Having an overland journey to perform, I repaired to the shore in good time, and with the assistance of eight stout natives, to bear me alternately four and four upon their shoulders when wearied, this journey was accomplished with comparative ease. The great heat of the sun when it shines, renders the exercise of travelling on foot too fatiguing to the European constitution, and highly imprudent to be persisted in beyond short distances. At this station (Avarua,) we had a fine meeting, more than 2500 persons being present. My certificates were read as usual, and I had largely to publish the glad tidings of the everlasting gospel amongst them, to my own peace. Although at first standing up I was much depressed, as one that had no might and was ready to faint; yet as I endeavoured to keep close to my heavenly guide, strength proportionate to the day, and confidence, were graciously extended, to my humble admiration. Many blessed and encouraging truths were given me to spread before the people, to the exaltation, I humbly trust, of the Most High God; and his name and power were magnified, who in the greatness of His love and strength came to seek and to save that which was lost,—if believed in, looked for, and yielded unto, in the obedience of faith.

The meeting held late, and the people were very solid and attentive; my sympathizing and faithful interpreter could not help acknowledging the blessing, with which we had that day been favoured, as a crowning evidence. The people seemed reluctant to separate; and many of them followed us to the dwelling of the absent missionary, where we partook of a repast, which had been kindly prepared for our accommodation. The king or principal chief Makea, joined us; he was desirous of making a present of supplies for the vessel; this however was declined, and his kind intention acknowledged with gratitude. This chiefs sister, once dined on board the Henry Freeling, with Pomare the queen of Tahiti, when we were lying in the bay of Papeite at that island a year ago; and she was mentioned in my Journal of that day, as the sister of the king of Rarotonga. She was at the meeting, and came to me in a very kind and agreeable manner before it commenced, and after it was over; Charles Pittman gave me a pleasing account of her stability of conduct and example. Several questions were put to us on religious subjects through Charles Pittman, by Makea and others who attended; and I had an opportunity of telling them what great things the Lord had done for them, and that the principal work they had to do in return, was to labour in the vineyard of their own hearts, etc.

We got back to the Gnatagnia station before sun-setting, when for the first time I found that there was an out-station twelve miles distant on the other side of the island, the people of which had not been at either of the meetings that had been held. I rather shrunk at the receipt of this information, principally I believe owing to the continued exposed situation of the vessel, and perhaps the weak state of my Charles might throw an additional weight into the scale of discouragement on the occasion. Without making any remark, I concluded not to stop over the tea which was then ready, but return immediately on board, under a faint expectation of being on shore again tomorrow, and perhaps getting to the out-station in question, called Aroragne, on the Seventh day; to be in a state of forwardness to leave the range of the island altogether late in the evening, if that was permitted, which on many accounts appeared desirable at the moment. I was favoured to reach the vessel at the edge of dark. As the evening advanced, blackness and darkness began to gather to the southward, incessant lightning followed with distant peals of thunder; at the same time the wind began to freshen from the westward, a very unusual quarter, as the regular trade-wind almost constantly prevails from the south-east, over all others. It was now apprehended that this unexpected change in the weather, and the wild appearance of the atmosphere, would prove the forerunners of a heavy tempest; the captain thought it advisable, under these circumstances, to haul away from the island under a press of canvass, which would at any rate remove every apprehension of suffering from its crags and reefs. We passed a very rugged night, and at four o'clock in the morning, were assailed with a tremendous squall of wind, which seemed to dispel in great measure the most threatening indications of the atmosphere.

5th.—Heavy rain and rough weather ushered in the new morning, and when the day was thoroughly established, we were found to be so far off the island, as to render the whole length of day insufficient for us to resume our former position, so as to have the usual interaction with its inhabitants. This being conclusive, the day was expended in preparing and collecting many commodities wanted as presents, and to purchase supplies of some articles the most needed; also in searching out a stock of clothing and materials, for the purpose of relieving the needs and sufferings of the poor naked children, who were often shivering with the present cold. The climate of this island is stated to have become much cooler within the last three or four years than it was formerly: the heat of the sun is excessive during the day, but the nights and mornings are chilly, and the dews very heavy.

6th.—After a very tossing and almost sleepless night, I felt much cast down at the situation of things around us, and seemed inclined to lay aside every attempt to effect a landing upon the island today, although we had got into an eligible position for the purpose during the night. I did not feel clear of this out-station at Aroragne; and yet there had been no opportunity for an arrangement to be made for it, or the needful notice given of an intended meeting; but before getting up, the way was made plain before me that would lead to peace and tranquillity of mind; to insure which I found that I must land today at Gnatagnia, attend the meeting there tomorrow, and on Second day go off to the out-station at Aroragne: to this I felt resigned, and told Charles, that this was the only way for me to proceed with safety. Every exertion was made to push the Henry Freeling within the range of tolerably smooth water; and the natives who had been anxiously watching our motions, on seeing this, launched the boat and put out to sea to meet us. The health of my Charles was so favourably restored, as to allow him to accompany me; and having got our stores, etc. safely into the boat, we again pushed off for the shore, and on landing were welcomed by the cheerful countenances of the islanders as usual. On reaching the missionary dwelling, I told our kind host and hostess, that we were now come to take up our abode with them in earnest. On explaining the prospect then before me, Charles Pittman expressed much satisfaction at the probability of the Aroragne people being visited. I left directions with Captain Keen, to stand close in with the island once every day if practicable; and when we were ready to embark, the flag should be hoisted by us as before agreed upon. The remaining part of the day was fully occupied among the people, in making trifling purchases and bestowing rewards, etc.

7th. (First day.)—After breakfast this morning, the Bible was laid before me, according to the usual practice of giving preference to the stranger, who at once undertakes to read a chapter, and afterwards to go forward with a prayer. When I had finished reading, we remained in silence. I had a secret hope this circumstance might lead into serious consideration at a future day, as to the practice of Friends on these occasions; and perhaps point out the difference between those whose time is always ready, and others who can only move in the ability given by Him, who said “without me you can do nothing.” I sometimes feel much for some of the former, from a conviction that they themselves are at seasons brought under a very humiliating sense of being numbered with those who “ask and receive not but while anxious to be found in the path of my own duty, my desire is to be clothed with the heavenly garment of charity towards others in these matters.

The time of the native meeting now drew nigh, at the thought of which my mind was greatly cast down; and yet I felt a sustaining confidence that my being here was in the right ordering, for if my own inclination could have been gratified and followed, we should have been this morning out of sight of the island altogether. Charles Pittman might have observed my sunken condition: for previously to setting out for the meeting, he seemed desirous to ascertain whether I should speak to the people or not. I told him this was very uncertain; but from the manner in which this thing had been brought about, which was certainly not in my own will, it was by no means improbable that I might have something to say to them. The house was well filled when we reached it, and Charles Pittman at once ascended the pulpit, but I remained on the ground floor, as one having no part to take in the matter; and, I trust, in a state something similar to that of passive clay, willing to be any thing or nothing, to do or to suffer in secret with the suffering seed. Charles Pittman went on with the usual services, as if he had little expectation of any interference on my part; but when the second singing was concluded, the way seemed at once to open for my going to him. On my getting into the pulpit, such was my blank condition, that I told him we must proceed slowly; for I should have to look well for the stepping stones to get along with safety. We stood some time in silence together, when my mouth was opened with our blessed Lord's declaration,—“there is joy in heaven over one sinner that repents, more than over ninety and nine just persons that need no repentance.” Such is the everlasting mercy, and boundless love of God to his creature man, that he wills not the death of a sinner; but rather that all should repent, forsake the evil of their ways, return unto Him, and live forever. For this the Saviour came; not to condemn, but to save a guilty world:—Jesus Christ came into the world to save sinners from the wrath to come; that we might have life, and that we might have it more abundantly. He purchased for poor, lost, finite man, the unspeakable gift of the Holy Spirit, by the sacrifice of himself on the blood-stained cross, “the just for the unjust, that he might bring us unto God;” who “so loved the world, that He gave His only begotten Son, that whosoever believes in Him, should not perish, but have everlasting life.” But none can be benefited by the coming and sufferings of the Lord Jesus, without an implicit belief in him. A mere belief in the outward fact of His coming in the flesh upon the earth, will not suffice: we must believe in the coming of His Holy Spirit into our hearts, and in His power to cleanse and save his people from their sins. How many in this our day, fall short of the knowledge of the only “true God and Jesus Christ, whom he has sent,—which is life eternal,”—through an evil heart of unbelief! When the Saviour of men was personally upon the earth, and men beheld his glory as of the only begotten of the Father, full of grace and truth, his mighty works were few in some places, because of the unbelieving hearts of the people; and he had frequently to upbraid the doubting, unbelieving multitude, for their hardness of heart; there were also found among his own disciples, those that were slow of heart to believe respecting Him. “Except you see signs and wonders you will not believe,”—was his language on one occasion; “but blessed are they that have not seen, and yet have believed.” Great indeed was my desire that these simple-hearted islanders might not be faithless, but believing,—that joy unspeakable and full of glory might be theirs,—that Christ might dwell in their hearts by faith,—even He, whom not having seen, they yet desired to love. For about an hour and a-half, I was drawn forth to plead with these dear people, in the love of the gospel; that they might be reconciled to God, for Christ's sake, for their own souls' sake, and ours also, because of the Truth as it is in Jesus. It was indeed a glorious meeting, and ought to be commemorated with humblest gratitude and praise.

My faithful interpreter was almost overcome with the sense of the working of the Lord's almighty power. When the spring was closed up, he spoke to me in allusion to my having said, on first going into the pulpit, that 'I should have to look well for the stepping-stones to get along with safety,'—saying, that he soon found I had got upon good ground, from the feelings he experienced. But the sentence of death was mine; and though I have truly nothing to boast of but weakness and infirmity, both of late much and evidently increased, yet how can I do less than cause the voice of the praise of my God to be heard, by faithfully testifying to that loving-kindness, which is better than life: His work is honourable and glorious,—His righteousness endures forever. I sat down in nothingness and weakness; the creature was laid in the dust, as one that owed unto his Lord, far more than “five hundred pence” many times multiplied, and who had nothing to pay with;—self-convicted too, and as one to whom all that had been spoken most fully applied. Although the meeting had held long, before I took any part in it, and was then prolonged to an unseasonable length, the people retained their seats, as if fearful of disturbing the covering which was permitted to overshadow us; and they continued in stillness, after we came down upon the floor to them: but on my remarking to Charles Pittman, that they did not seem willing to go away, he said a few sentences to them, after which they quietly withdrew.

8th.—Rose at the earliest cock-crowing this morning, and prepared to set forward for Aroragne. The night having been squally, and the morning opening with showers of rain, it was thought the exposure and fatigue would be more than my Charles could support, as the present state of his health rendered unwarrantable any thing bordering on risk; it was therefore concluded best that he should remain at Gnatagnia. Charles complied with this determination rather reluctantly, being desirous of rendering assistance in any way within his power, and not liking to be so separated from the scene of duty. Charles Pittman and myself moved forward, he on horseback, and myself in the usual way, with a body of natives, ten in number. In the morning the rain made the work cooler, and seemed to make no impression, as it fell on their well-oiled skins: the burning and dazzling white sand on which we travelled, was nicely cooled by the showers, and retained a refreshing temperature while the atmosphere remained cloudy; but on our return in the afternoon, the sun was burning hot, and the weather totally changed.

Notice having been timely given, we found the people prepared to receive us, and the meeting was soon collected, to the number of fifteen hundred persons. Being a stranger on this side the island, my certificates were read as usual at the commencement; an arrangement always preferred by myself, from having so often witnessed it to bring the people into stillness and attention, and also to renew a fresh feeling of the precious unity and sympathy of my dear brethren and sisters far away; the remembrance of them under these circumstances, in the love and fellowship of the gospel, brings strength, while it softens the heart. I remained upon the floor, with a crowd of natives squatted about me, and having now no one near me, that I had ever seen before, I felt like a stranger indeed. When the time arrived, I went to Charles Pittman, and eventually broke the silence, by reminding the people of Him, who knows our down-sitting and up-rising, and understands our thoughts afar off; yes, there is not a word in our tongue, but He knows it altogether: “all things are naked and open to the eyes of Him, with whom we have to do.” “None of us can by any means redeem his brother, or give to God a ransom for him;”—our salvation must be wrought out by ourselves, and that with fear and trembling. But sinful and impotent as we are, the means for the accomplishment of this great work, are mercifully placed within the reach of all, through the unutterable love of God, in Christ Jesus, our crucified, risen, and glorified Lord. In order to partake of this great and universal salvation, conferred upon mankind by the “God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ,” we must come to the experimental knowledge of Him, who is the eternal author of it all. He tasted death for every man; and by the awful sacrifice of himself, not only procured for a guilty world the remission of sins that are past, but the unspeakable gift of the Holy Spirit. “I am the light of the world,” said Christ; “he that follows me shall not walk in darkness, but shall have the light of life.” Those who believe in this light, and walk in this light, who bring their thoughts, words, and deeds to it, and obey its manifestations, are they who love Christ and keep his commandments; for Christ is the light: and in thus doing, they love God,—for God is light:—“I and my Father are one.” “If we walk in the light, as he is in the light, we have fellowship one with another, and the blood of Jesus Christ His Son cleanses us from all sin.”

The spring of the everlasting gospel flowed freely to this people, and in its authority I was enabled to appeal unto themselves, and make them their own living witnesses to the in-shining of “the light of the glorious gospel of Christ” in their own hearts. That although it was their lot to dwell in a remote part of the globe, on a small spot in the midst of the ocean, they were alike the objects of everlasting and redeeming love, with those who inhabited every other part of the Lord's earth; and for them the precious blood of Christ was shed, as for me, and mine, and all mankind. The people were invited to repent, believe, and obey the gospel, and they would find it to be the power of God unto salvation, through the Holy Spirit. And as they came to enjoy the blessedness of those who believe in Jesus, and walk in His light in obedience to its discoveries, their hearts would be changed, and become more and more turned towards their dear children, than is at present the case, that they also might with them partake in the joys of God's salvation. It was a memorable season, and I trust will not soon be forgotten. After noticing the people we repaired to a native teacher's house, and partook of some cooling refreshment of which we both stood in need. On our return to Gnatagnia, we stopped to examine a new place of worship, sixty feet square, which is building of coral, or agglomerated sand and shells, and is nearly complete to the roof. This structure is carried on under the direction of A. Cunningham. We reached the mission-house too late to embark, on account of there being several matters yet to attend to,—though the Henry Freeling was at the time hovering pretty near the southernmost end of the island.

9th.—Several articles being now needed from the vessel, in order to discharge the debts contracted, and yet to be incurred, for hogs, vegetables, and labour in the overland journeys and in the boat. etc., it was concluded that Charles should go on board to procure these things; while I, with the assistance of Charles Pittman, endeavoured to procure what was lacking, and made every arrangement calculated to forward my intention of quitting the shores of Rarotonga towards evening. I cannot omit mentioning the kind behaviour of the natives last evening after our return from Aroragne: they were probably aware that the time was at hand for our final departure from the island, and the house of the missionary was like a fair the whole time; they seemed to vie with each other in doing any thing they thought would please. Several of the young women applied, through Charles Pittman, for permission to rub my feet, legs, and knees, in the manner in which they are accustomed to perform the operation on the persons of their chiefs, when greatly fatigued; saying, that I had had a very long journey that day, and must be weary, and in need of what they could do. I was not very partial to this method of relief, but did not like to appear to slight their simple offer; but I was afterwards surprised to find in how short a time all aches and pains of weariness were entirely removed by their persevering diligence,—several of them were at work at the same time, and trying who could do the most. On this island we had the satisfaction to see a great increase of population, the children swarmed about its shores like bees, and I think Charles Pittman said, the schools were attended by 3000 of different ages and both sexes. The houses of the natives are mostly constructed with some degree of uniformity, neatly white-washed, with roads to many of them made of broken shells, and a public road for travelling upon; and the people seem to live generally in a state of enjoyment. The fruit and vegetables usually found upon the isles of the Pacific abound, as the island is like a well-watered hot-bed. The lofty mountains in its centre, obstruct the passage of the clouds, and cause an abundant supply of rain. But what conduces most to the comfort and real happiness of the people, and causes an increasing population, is the circumstance of there being no good harbour for shipping; they have, consequently, very slight interaction with the English and American sailors, and are therefore free from that dreadful disease, the blasting influence of which, is fast depopulating every other isle which our footsteps have traversed: to this truth may be added another, originating in the same cause,—there is no rum dealer upon the island; ardent spirit is a curse entailed upon most others by these scourges of the human race, either publicly or privately introduced by the shipping.

The remains of the wreck of the Charles Doggett, an American vessel, were lying upon the reefs of Rarotonga; it appears that no lives were lost; the cargo, consisting principally of pearl shells, and cocoa-nut oil, was saved by the natives, and the crew had been happily shipped off shortly afterwards. This vessel we met with at Tahiti last year, she put in twice, and was then in the very act of diffusing her rum, muskets, and gunpowder, amongst the islands, for cocoa-nut oil, pearl shells, arrow root, etc. She was prosecuting another voyage, and had been fitted out at Sydney, New South Wales, where one or more of her owners reside, and where many others reside who are accumulating wealth by a traffic which promotes the destruction of their fellow-men. After discharging all our debts, and affording as many supplies to our friends, and for the benefit of the dear children, as we could spare, we took our last meal with Charles and Elizabeth Pittman; we then bade a final adieu to the shores of Rarotonga, and its swarthy tribes, as to the outward, but to memory lastingly precious, though as far distant as the east is from the west.

The Henry Freeling anticipated our movement, and stretched in upon the coast, when the boat made its appearance; and we were favoured to get safely on board at half-past three o'clock in the afternoon. A. M'Donald, and Alexander Cunningham accompanied us, and returned with the boat again to the shore. We got in our numerous articles without being materially injured by the spray of the sea, and at four o'clock filled our sails and bore away to the westward; cleared the southernmost point and its crags before dark; and at midnight, were at least fifty miles from this interesting and highly favoured little island. Besides Rarotonga there are four small islands inhabited, which comprise the Hervey group; but not one missionary amongst them all. Our friend, Charles Pittman, feeble as he is, would, I have no hesitation in believing, have freely devoted his remaining strength to our service, and united in a visit to them with us, had his fellow-missionary Aaron Buzacott been at his own station at Avaruu; but the absence of the latter deprived us of an interpreter, without which, such a visit would have been in vain: I think I should not have been satisfied to pass them by, could one have been obtained. The names of these islands are, Mangaia, Atiu, Aitutaki, Mitiaro, or Mauki; their population is estimated at 5900 people. These islands are now and then visited by a missionary from Rarotonga; such a circumstance must, however, be very rare, as it can only occur when a vessel comes down from the Georgian or Society group, to range amongst them, and collect cocoa-nut oil, arrow-root, etc.; there are, however, some native teachers distributed among them from Rarotonga. This group was first discovered by our countryman Captain Cook, and was afterwards named the Hervey Islands. It is with much satisfaction I have learned, that our valuable interpreter Samuel Wilson, who accompanied us round Tahiti, in 1835, is now an appointed missionary by the London society to the station of Aroragne, on the south side of Rarotonga.

Our visit to Rarotonga cannot, I think, on various accounts, be soon obliterated from our minds, or pass away as a tale that is told: the retrospect of the highly favoured seasons, so condescendingly permitted to crown the different assemblies of the people, only brightens the more, as the days are increased which throw the scene of such love and such mercy still further and further behind. The circumstance of the Henry Freeling having to beat about during the whole time, rendered it doubly hazardous on her account, and made our different trips to the shore much more difficult and protracted; the boisterous state of the weather, and the trade wind coming round both ends of the island, and then meeting, placed the boat and ourselves in a precarious situation, when getting in or out of the vessel; and the wet necessarily encountered in passing to and fro by boat; these are occurrences, which, although at the time somewhat irksome and hindering, when over, are not worthy to be recorded;—such was the peace, and love, and sweetness that flowed from the everlasting fountain and source of all our sure mercies, which even exceeded the hundred fold promised to those that leave all for Christ's sake and his gospel:—to the praise of Him, whose faithfulness fails not, be it spoken. Before leaving Rarotonga, I received several letters from some of the most capable scholars in the school at Gnatagnia, which were literally translated to us; one of which I subjoin as a specimen, which will suffice for the whole, as they are nearly in the same strain. It is from Tekori, a boy of about sixteen years of age.

This is my speech to you, Daniel Wheeler,

Read it, that you may know great is our joy in seeing your face, and in knowing your speech of God's great kindness to you. Attend,—I will relate to you the coming of God's word to us. We were heathens formerly,—we did not know the living God Jehovah. At that time the devil was our god;—we worshipped him, and did that which is agreeable to his will:—that was our condition formerly, Daniel Wheeler. Attend,—then arrived the season in which the word of the great God came to us—even of Jehovah, and the word of God spread among us in that season;—still listen,—God sent his servants to us, to inform us of the true way. Then the light sprung up in the midst of us. The word spoken by Isaiah the prophet was then fulfilled, chap. lx. verse 1. “Arise, shine, for your light is come, and the glory of the Lord is risen upon you.” Behold, the light of Jehovah came to this land, and the light of Jehovah dawned upon us: then the word of God spread on this land. The children know the word of God. Pittman taught us unweariedly, and in this likewise, behold the love of God to us.

Our friend and brother, Daniel Wheeler, I think of the kindness of God in conveying you from your land—from Britain. You have been directed by God to this land and that land; you have witnessed his loving kindness,—you have seen what has occurred in the deep,—the mighty power of God. He will not forsake those who put their trust in Him. Friend, when you go to visit this land and that land, we will pray to God, that he may safely conduct you to the land where you wish to go, and that He may carry you safely to your own land. Friend, now go; we have met,—you have seen our face in Rarotonga, and we have seen your face. Observe, one thing yet remains. When we shall be assembled with the word of God, of the blessed—in that world of joy, the good people of Britain will know those of Rarotonga, and the good people of Rarotonga, will know those of Britain; and then will be known the true state of that land, and this land. This is a little speech of compassion toward you: may you be preserved in your voyaging. And now, may the grace of God be granted to us—even so—Amen.

From Tekori: that is all I have to say.

16th.—Since quitting the neighbourhood of Rarotonga, our course has been directed, when the weather would permit, towards the Friendly Islands, which lie in a westerly direction from the Hervey group, at a distance of from eleven to twelve hundred miles; but having now to traverse near the edge of the trade latitude, the winds became much more unstable; sometimes they are directly opposed to our proceeding, and often boisterous, with as much sea as our little vessel could at times well bear. Nothing material occurred on the passage from Rarotonga: our devotional duties were attended to as usual; and though Charles and myself had much to contend with, from the heat of the climate, and our narrow limits in the cabin, during our endeavours to draw nigh unto the Lord,—yet there is ample encouragement, notwithstanding human weakness and frailty, and the hindering things to which these poor bodies are subject, for all to persevere in wrestling for the blessing, with the noble resolution of the patriarch, “I will not let you go, until you bless me.” It was expected I believe by all on board, that we should steer for the island of Tongataboo, but a variety of circumstances operated upon my mind, to produce a determination to aim in the first place at the northernmost island, Vavau: this was so fixed with me, that I told Captain Keen, before we lost sight of Rarotonga, the conclusion I had come to; he made arrangements accordingly to accomplish the object in view. At noon today, it was found from accurate calculation, that the island of Vavau, was only distant about 102 miles. As we were now making rapid progress towards our destination, rolling away before a strong wind and following sea, it was thought that the distance was too short, to warrant running on through the night, and the more so, as the moon was too young to afford any light, when that would be the most needed. Our canvass was accordingly reduced, and at nine o'clock p.m., we hove to for the night.

17th.—At five o'clock a.m., bore up and made sail to the westward. At nine o'clock we were cheered with a sight of the island, and immediately stood for the northernmost bluff, with a fresh trade-wind in our favour. At noon, we were abreast of the bluff, and hauled round the different headlands as close as was prudent, with a good look out from the mast-head for the breakers. Although furnished with an ample number of nautical charts, yet none afforded specific directions for approaching these shores; and it was perplexing to find that a rough sketch printed by Mariner, (who long resided among the Tonga Isles, and published a history of them,) in our possession, disagreed in toto with two first-rate charts we had on board; and yet this imperfect sketch furnished to all appearance, the best directions for entering Port Refuge, although certainly never intended as a seaman's guide. On reaching a head-land which we expected would form one side of a spacious bay, in which we were hoping to find shelter, it was found on rounding it, to our great consternation, that island after island began to show itself; until every prospect of finding a port seemed closed up: it remained to be determined, whether we should run out to sea again, or risk an attempt to find shelter, by working into the heart of the group at a venture. Every precaution was used to avoid sunken rocks and shoals, and the colour of the water was our faithful guide. In the course of a few tacks, we seemed to be completely embarrassed amidst this host of enemies; we looked in vain on every side for an opening to the place, which we had before anticipated finding without any difficulty.

At last, as the sun was rapidly setting, there seemed no chance of success, or option left, but that of taking refuge at sea, instead of in the port that bears the name of Refuge. Our captain would gladly have relinquished this hazardous pursuit, and made off while there was day-light to see the way out again; but, we had still some hope left, that the design would be accomplished, and when as the day-light receded, that hope sickened within us, the sight of a ship at anchor renewed it again like a charm, and stimulated to more persevering exertion. A second ship was now soon discovered near the first, and seeing an English jack flying for a pilot, they both displayed the American flag. It soon became dark, but there was as yet no anchorage, we had sounded in vain; and though surrounded by islands on every hand there was no bottom to be found. The place where these ships were seen, was now our aim, and at length we succeeded in getting near enough to hail the Pacific, of Nantucket, at anchor in twenty-eight fathoms water; but by running a little nearer the shore, we found a sandy bottom, with sixteen fathoms upon it, which, after tumbling about for two months since leaving the roads of Waimea, at the Sandwich Isle Tauai, was accepted with thankfulness. What shall we render unto the Lord Most High, whose goodness and mercy still follow us in the way that we go?—Yes, he delivers the poor, and him that has no helper. What shall we say, or what shall we do, but wonder and adore, in humble prostration of soul, the fulness and extent of that love, which no tongue can set forth or declare: it is boundless, as His everlasting mercy,—filling all space, and unfathomable as the ocean we traverse.

Chapter XXXI.

Vavau—Wesleyan Missionaries—Native Meetings at Neiafu, Feletoa, And Haalaufuli—Appointed Meeting for Seamen—Visit to the Island of Otea—Meetings At Hihifo—At Matika—Embarkation of the Mission Families—Sail for Lifuka.

Vavau, Eighth Month 18th.—This morning the natives began early to visit us, flocking on board with their simple articles of shells for barter. Although we usually hold our little meeting on this day of the week, yet the unsettled state of our affairs compelled us to relinquish the attempt, from the confusion around us, produced by the novelty of our vessel, and the unfitness of our own minds. At noon, left the vessel in quest of the missionary station. On reaching the head of the bay, two missionaries were observed coming towards us in a canoe; and on seeing our boat they returned again to the shore, to point out the most suitable place for landing, and to conduct us to the settlement at Neiafu. These were Stephen Rabone and John Spinney, who had lately arrived from England, via Sydney, with their families. In a short time we reached the habitation of John Thomas, the senior missionary, who has been for several years engaged upon these islands. Here we met with a kind and friendly reception, and the same offer of assistance as had been extended towards us at other places. We found the whole mission belongs to the Wesleyan Missionary Society exclusively; these individuals are the first of its members whom we have met with in the Pacific. I left my certificates with John Thomas for translation; and after having been cheered by hearing of our dear friends James Backhouse and George W. Walker, and of others whom we had known at Sydney and Hobart Town, at which places the recently arrived missionaries had spent some time waiting for a conveyance to the Friendly Islands, we returned on board.

19th.—Notwithstanding the weather was so wet as to confine us on board, yet the deck was crowded with the natives from morning until evening. Small hogs, vegetables, and abundance of shells seem to be the whole of their saleable property. They are a fine manly race of people, of the most perfect form we have yet seen; and having as yet had but little interaction with foreigners, they are not the victims of wretchedness and disease, which the seamen every where introduce. Their skins are clean and well oiled, and in general appearance they are healthy. The length and roughness of their hair, which is uniformly black, gives them rather a wild and ferocious appearance; but they are in reality as gentle and docile as little children. With the exception of an apron of long wiry grass about the waist, they are mostly naked. Taofaahau, on whom the title of King George has been conferred by the missionaries, is now absent at Lifuka, one of the Haabai Islands. He is spoken of very highly, and declared to be a preacher of the gospel to the people; and the queen, Charlotte, fills the station of class-leader among the female part of the community. It is said, the whole population of the group Haafuluhau, (pronounced Haah-foo-loo-how,) of which Vavau is the largest island; of the Haabai group, of which Lifuka is the most considerable, and a part of Tongataboo, have embraced Christianity; the remainder upon this last island are still called heathens. John Hobbs and William Allen Brooks, missionaries from the station at Feletoa, came on board this afternoon to make our acquaintance.

Went on shore this evening, principally to inquire at what time I could see the people collected tomorrow morning, my mind having been turned towards a meeting with them. Finding no difficulty in the way, and having the promise of John Thomas to interpret for me, we returned on board. The evening proved wet, with thunder and lightning; and the vermin, which have greatly increased since we have been in these hot climates, being joined by a fresh supply of mosquitos from the shore, annoyed us extremely, so that there was but little rest to be obtained; to which, the prospect of having new ground to move upon, did not fail to contribute.

21st. (First day.)—Got ready in good time this morning, and taking the mate and four men in the boat, proceeded to Neiafu. On reaching the meeting-house, it appeared that the native worship had commenced much earlier than usual, to allow of more time for what might succeed it. We remained outside the building, lest our appearance should tend to confuse, until it was finished, when John Thomas came out and took me to his seat. After my certificates were read and explained, I had, after a pause, to turn the people to the great Teacher of all mankind—Christ Jesus; who, when on earth, spoke as never man spoke, and taught as never man taught: the light of whose glorious gospel brings salvation to all that believe in and obey it. I had been induced to leave all to bring them the glad tidings of this gospel, which is the power of God unto salvation from sin; that the fulness of this heavenly blessing in all its riches, might be theirs forever. I was abundantly strengthened by the might of my ever gracious Master, to proclaim to these noble islanders, who form but a small portion of His “inheritance,” the grace and truth which came by Him. Under a feeling of great solemnity their attention was riveted, while listening to the endeavours of a way-worn stranger, to turn them from darkness to the light of Christ in their own hearts, and from the power of Satan unto God; whose mercy endures forever.

22nd.—In the forenoon, John Thomas, Stephen Rabone, and John Spinney came on board; and the afternoon proving very rainy, we could not get on shore. By their coming, however, arrangements were made for attending a meeting at Feletoa about noon tomorrow. This evening we were informed that the Active schooner, a vessel well known to us, had been wrecked upon a reef among the Fiji Islands. The captain and three others escaped with their lives; but the remaining four who were saved from the wreck, were afterwards stripped and murdered by the natives. Their destruction appears to have resulted from their harsh and imprudent conduct towards the islanders. They are said to have been four very wicked people. The Fiji group is considered as part of the Friendly Islands. This vessel was in the employ of the Wesleyan Mission, and had brought out missionaries from Sydney to this place but a short time before we arrived; and from hence proceeded to land missionary stores at the Fiji Islands, and was expected to return again shortly to Port Refuge. This dreadful circumstance will tend to stagnate for a time the affairs of the mission, as regards their supplies on these islands; and may possibly retard the intended establishment of a mission at the Fiji group.

23rd.—This morning John Hobbs arrived in good time, bringing with him two canoes with six natives, who were to paddle the Henry Freeling's long boat to Feletoa for the purpose of conveying us to the intended meeting there. We were late in reaching our destination, owing to a strong current setting against the boat. John Thomas was preaching to the people when we arrived, and when he had finished we went into the meeting, and sat down. When John Thomas had finished his explanation of my certificate, I stood up in great weakness and fear, and solemn silence prevailed over the assembly, which was large. I had to declare unto them the truth as it is in Jesus, even in Him who in due time died for all, that all might live;—the same blessed Jesus, who came on earth in the greatness of his love and strength, to seek and to save that which was lost;—who once taught the people in a body of flesh, but now teaches all mankind by His Holy Spirit of grace, and is the Saviour of all that believe,—the life and light of men;—mighty to save the soul from sin, and lead it up to God the Father. I seemed to have little or nothing before me but the supply of the moment, from the time of standing up to the end. After dining and spending some time in the family of John Hobbs, we returned to the boat which was left about a mile off; but the declivity of the foot path was much worse to descend than I expected, though its ascent had been hard work in the morning. All the missionaries, except John Thomas, accompanied us down towards the bay; but they were put on shore before we came in sight of the shipping. On arriving at Port Refuge, we were cheered by the sight of an English flag, on board a vessel coming in from sea, which proved to be the Lady Wellington, whaler of Sydney, out three months on a whaling cruise.

27th.—Most of yesterday engaged in bartering with the natives. The king's brother, who is a useful man to the missionaries, dined on board with us. Today, cloudy weather; heavy rain fell in the night with strong squalls from off the high land: the John Adams, of New Bedford, drove from her anchorage, and was compelled to let go a second anchor. Our vessel was moored with two heavy anchors. The afternoon again showery. The natives brought several hogs in the course of the day, and a tolerable supply of yams and cocoa-nuts. Having been confined on board several days by the state of the weather, which of late has precluded the performance of any distant visits, and nothing having arisen in this immediate neighbourhood, it has been a time of something like resting on the oar.

28th. (First day.)—Long before daylight my mind was engaged to examine whether there was any particular track for me to move in, as regarded the natives' meeting on shore; but I felt, as the morning opened, a poor forlorn creature, enfeebled and ready to droop by the way, as one that faints, though without having any defined prospect in view; but abiding under the humbling influence of that power which softens the flinty rock, I have found it to be a place of safety, and one that prepares the tribulated mortal to partake of a blessed portion of that strength, which is perfected only in weakness; while it prompts to watchfulness and resignation to the Divine will. For the last two or three days, while most on board are gladdened with the hope of soon seeing the coast of New Holland, and entering again the port of Sydney, I cannot discover the probable time of our leaving this place, nor what may be our next destination: on which ever side I look, obstacles of no small magnitude present themselves; but I am desirous to leave all to Him, who alone can make me quick of understanding in His fear. “My soul, wait only upon the Lord.” Spent the day on board with our own crew, in the usual way.

31st.—Yesterday arrived the American ship Wiscasset, of Wiscasset, Captain Macey, from a whaling cruise, to secure her oil by coopering, etc. In the afternoon, some steps were taken towards prosecuting a visit to one of the smaller islands, which the weather had prevented our attempting last Fifth day. We found today, that John Thomas had ascertained from some of the most intelligent natives, that the tide would flow tomorrow, sufficiently early to allow us to pass over the flats and reach the meeting in seasonable time: we were also informed that general notice had been given to the people of two other stations, namely, Tanea and Eueiki, to assemble at the central station of the three, called Haalaufuli, where the meeting is appointed to be held.

Ninth Month 1st.—Left the vessel before sunrise, and called upon John Thomas, who accompanied us through the journey. We proceeded across a neck of land to a sandy bay, where two canoes were soon in readiness to convey us forward; but as the wind blew strong against us, the natives very kindly suggested the propriety of a third canoe being procured, to divide the weight more equally; and by rendering the canoes lighter, to lessen the danger of our getting wet by the feather tops of the little waves blowing on us from the stroke of the paddle: this occasioned some delay, but was no doubt a saving of time in the end. At length, however, we were equipped, and proceeded with three skilful natives in each canoe, which contained one of us; the canoe with John Thomas leading the way. The first object was to cross an arm of the sea, to obtain the shelter of a high bluff on a headland which we had to pass, with numerous islands on our right, which broke off the swell of the ocean almost entirely from our route: some of these islands are inhabited.

About ten o'clock a.m., we landed again on the island of Vavau, after a very circuitous passage, but the only one by which the extremity of this island can be got at from Neiafu. We were soon met by the principal chief, Daniel Afu, and several of his people, who welcomed us to their neighbourhood; and after spending a short time at the chiefs house, the meeting was assembled by the sound of heavy strokes upon a hollow piece of wood, a sort of native drum, which may be heard at a great distance. The people were soon collected, and after John Thomas had opened the meeting in the usual way, and read one of my certificates, all became silent. I had largely to declare amongst them the “unsearchable riches of Christ,” the beloved Son of God, and Saviour of men; whom all men are commanded to hear: whose Holy Spirit speaks in every heart, to bring us to repentance and amendment of life in the fear of God. To this heavenly Teacher I was concerned to turn them, and to exhort them in the love of the gospel to “believe in the Lord Jesus Christ and be saved;” to believe in the power of His Holy Spirit in their hearts, and wait for it there: we were favoured with a solemnity, which nothing short of this irresistible power can produce.

Many of the people came to us in a loving manner, when the meeting broke up, and hung about while we remained in the neighbourhood. It was matter of very painful regret to us to find, that these dear people are in the practice, as they feel their minds affected, of breaking out into clamorous groaning, and saying 'Amen' with a loud voice; until a stranger is at a loss to conceive in what this dissipating practice may end: it is evidently encouraged by their teachers. They were this day turned to the teachings of that grace in their own hearts, by which all such as happily take heed to it, will learn to “worship God in spirit, rejoice in Christ Jesus, and have no confidence in the flesh.” May the Lord hasten the dawning of that day, when true spiritual gospel worshippers shall abound in the earth to the glory and praise of Him, who is alone worthy to be worshipped in spirit and in truth; when living spiritual sacrifices shall ascend, acceptable unto Him by Jesus Christ; and in every place incense shall be offered to his ever great and excellent name,—even the sacrifice offered in the “beauty of holiness and newness of life,” from the pure, contrite, and humble heart, produced by the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus.

After meeting we partook of some refreshment at the chief's house, in true native style upon the floor on mats, with the milk of the cocoa-nut as a beverage, and the pulpy shoots of the banana bruised between the fingers, to answer the purpose of washing the hands; some native cloth from the dress of the chiefess served for a towel: this was found a very needful and agreeable part of the entertainment, having had literally to tear the food to pieces with our fingers. When our repast was finished, we took leave of the chief and his family and others present, and returned to the sea-side, and were safely paddled back again to the sandy bay near Neiafu. On the way from the canoes to the mission house, we called at the king's habitation; his daughter, usually styled the Princess Charlotte, was at home, a young woman about sixteen years of age, with an intelligent countenance; she was seated on the floor in simple native attire; her brother, a boy, perhaps twelve years old, was playing about. When returning to the vessel, it occurred to me that some of the ships now in the harbour would soon be ready for sea, and I felt as if I should not be clear of the crews, without endeavouring to collect them together next First day forenoon: to this I stood resigned, in hopes of feeling some further impression in the morning, if it should be required.

3rd.—Yesterday, the subject of a meeting with the seamen still rested upon me. On awaking this morning I endeavoured to watch over every thought that arose; and after remembering my great Creator in humble gratitude for the mercies of the past night, my mind seemed as a blank, until the prospect of holding a meeting with the seamen of the fleet came before it; this was not a little in the cross to the unmortified part, which seemed now ready to shrink. I kept the matter close until after breakfast, and then told Charles that I believed it safest for me to appoint a meeting for worship tomorrow, at eleven o'clock a.m., to be held in the native chapel at Neiafu, if that could be obtained. On stating this to John Thomas, he said that a missionary was coming down from Feletoa, to preach at the hour proposed for holding our meeting; but that he had no doubt of his being willing to accommodate me. In that case, I told him that I should give notice to the shipping, that they might know what to expect; as the meeting would be held after the manner of the Society of Friends, and would not commence with singing; but we should wait in silence for the influence of the Holy Spirit upon our minds, before we could move. In the afternoon a sufficient number of written notices were prepared and distributed amongst the shipping, leaving the result to Him who knows all things; desiring that His great name alone may be exalted, and the gospel of the heavenly kingdom may be proclaimed in the heart of man to the Saviour's praise.

4th. (First day.)—This morning much cast down and a poor creature, but as one bound to the work of the dear Master; from which I dared not hold back, however human nature might be ready to shrink, as the hour of trial approached. Landed in good time, and proceeded to the meeting-house at Neiafu. I felt depressed from a sense of something like a spirit of opposition being present; but was soon comforted by an evidence which I could not mistake, of that power being nigh to strengthen the inner man, the all-sufficiency of which to sustain in time of trouble I have so often witnessed. I had to sit long in silence, but eventually stood up with those instructive expressions of our Lord to his disciples,—“Herein is my Father glorified, that you bear much fruit; so shall you be my disciples.” “He that abides in me and I in him, the same brings forth much fruit; for without me, you can do nothing.” From this I was enabled to show, that without the blessed influence of the Holy Spirit of the Son, we can do nothing,—much less be capable of bearing that fruit, by which the holy Father is glorified; and the impossibility of performing that worship which only is acceptable in the sight of Him, “who is a Spirit,” without the help of the Holy Spirit: that therefore it is indispensable, in order to the performance of true spiritual worship, to wait in reverential silence for a renewal of that strength, which is mighty through God to the casting down imaginations, and every high thing that exalts itself against the knowledge of God,—to the “bringing into captivity every thought to the obedience of Christ,”—even to the obedience of the Spirit of Truth in our hearts, without which none can worship God in Spirit and in truth. It is this influence which can alone prepare our hearts to worship, praise, and glorify the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ; who is a Spirit, and must be worshipped in Spirit and in truth.

I had to set forth the admirable adaptation of the glorious gospel dispensation to the condition of man the world over, and the blessed superiority of true spiritual worship in the inner temple of the heart, over that which is left in the outer court to be trodden under foot. My mind was particularly turned towards those “that go down to the sea in ships, that do business in great waters,—that see the works of the Lord, and his wonders in the deep.” Although such may often feel excluded from their fellow-men, shut out from every opportunity of religious instruction, and destitute of the 'means of grace;' this is evidently not the case, but a delusion of the great enemy of God and man; although it may be often held out by those who have a zeal for God, but not according to knowledge, of whom the great apostle speaks. For notwithstanding it is the lot of seafaring men to spend their days in roving upon the mighty ocean, yet the only true and blessed means of grace are still within their reach,—even that grace and truth which came by Jesus Christ, which has appeared unto all men, and teaches all men that believe in it. No class of men have a better opportunity of attending upon the means of salvation; and although their allotment may be thought solitary, yet they are saved from many temptations, and out of the reach of the contaminating example of wicked men, to which those on shore are daily exposed. They have less to draw their attention aside from the great work, and more time to work out their souls' salvation, than many of their fellow-mortals:—their nightly watches may be turned to everlasting account, in waiting upon the Lord, in looking for the blessed hope and glorious appearing of the great God and Saviour, by His Holy Spirit of grace. No men have greater need to acquaint themselves with God and be at peace; they are in jeopardy every hour, which plainly bespeaks the necessity of their being prepared to meet their God, as with their lives in their hands. The Lord most High, in his infinite goodness and mercy, has vouchsafed a day of visitation to all men, for the salvation of all men; and it is this visitation that preserves the life of the spirit in man. “Your visitation,” said Job, “has preserved my spirit.”

The meeting held long, but proved a searching solemn season; and although at first a gloom seemed to hang over it, eventually every cloud, or feeling of this kind, was scattered by that power, whom winds and waves obey; and it ended well. A considerable number of seamen from the different ships with their captains attended, also the whole of the missionary families here, and one from Feletoa, with many of the natives, and some New Zealanders connected with the shipping, who understand English pretty well. Two of the ships in the harbour had intended sailing this morning, but were prevented for lack of wind. The crews of both were furnished with an ample supply of tracts and Friends' writings, with two Spanish Testaments, for two men of that nation employed on board of them.

7th.—Notwithstanding the security of the harbour in which we are privileged to ride, yet the scanty supply of fresh water is a serious inconvenience, the nearest spring being four miles off, on an island where the empty casks have to be rolled up half a mile; and when filled, which requires much time to accomplish, they are rolled back again to the water's edge, and towed on board as a raft. Having had no opportunity to procure any of this most necessary article since leaving the last of the Sandwich Islands until today, the stock on hand is very small, and can only be recruited by small quantities once in the day. Since First-day, we have arranged for a visit to the two congregations at the island of Otea tomorrow; it being agreed that they shall meet at the same time under the same roof. May the Lord be graciously pleased to go before, and open the way in the hearts of these people, to receive the ever-blessed Truth in the love of it; and through the workings thereof, bring forth fruit that shall lastingly remain, to His praise and their peace.

8th.—As our vessel was anchored in the track from Neiafu to Otea, we waited the coming of John Thomas; who arrived before ten o'clock, bringing with him John Spinney and six natives, who were then taken from the canoe and placed in our boat with their paddles, for the better accommodation of the whole party. On landing at Otea, we proceeded towards the other side of the island where the meeting was to be held. In crossing the sandy beaches, two of which were in our route, exposed to the full blaze of the sun nearly at noon, the heat and glare of light were almost insupportable, and the lack of air when passing through the bush was still more oppressive. We stayed a short time at the house of the chief, whose name is Lazarus, a steady going man among the people; and when cooled a little, proceeded to the meeting, where the natives were assembled in readiness. Exclusive of the pulpit, there did not appear to be a seat in the whole neighbourhood except on the floor; some of the people at last brought part of an old canoe into the building, for Charles and myself to sit upon. I felt in a very low and feeble condition, both as to body and mind; but when my certificates were read, I stood up with a salutation of love in my heart to the people; which having expressed, I had to turn their attention to Him, “Who sees not as man sees,” but who is a Spirit, and looks on the heart: He searches all hearts, and understands every imagination of the thoughts; and to this man will He look, even to him that is poor and of a contrite spirit, that trembles at His word. The Christian religion is a heart-felt work; it is in the heart we must work out our own salvation with fear and trembling, through submission and obedience to the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, which dwells in the contrite and humble heart, without respect of persons or of the colour of the skin. “Cease from man whose breath is in his nostrils, for wherein is he to be accounted of:”—man cannot save his own soul, nor blot out a single sin; and can he do the work for another, which he cannot do for himself? My heart was greatly enlarged towards the people; and they listened with apparent attention: but there was a feeling of deadness over the meeting, greater than we had yet witnessed on these islands.

After remaining some time at the house of Lazarus to refresh and rest, we again crossed the island, and resumed our station in the boat: we proceeded round the northern part of the island, and visited a splendid cavern, into which we rowed with the boat, having a canoe to lead the way, conducted by Noah, one of the chiefs of Otea, and two chosen natives also well acquainted with the position and entrance of this wonderful place. The great height of the vaulted arches above our heads, which are almost of gothic shape, from which are suspended a variety of huge spiral masses of ponderous weight, apparently ready to fall,—the amazing depth and clearness of the water under us, together with the dark and deep recesses, which could not be explored for lack of a light, exhibited a sublime and magnificent spectacle and a specimen of those great and marvellous works, incomprehensible to mortal man. Fish of large size swam about beneath us, without the least appearance of being disturbed by the boat, so great was the depth of water between us and them. In knocking off some of the spiral crags within our reach to bring away with us, the echo produced was alarming, and as if the whole roof was in danger of falling upon us.

9th.—King George having arrived from Lefuka, one of the Haabai Islands, this morning paid us a visit: a Saul-like man in truth, being higher than the rest of the people perhaps by the head and shoulders; he was naked, with the exception of some native cloth round his waist. His moral character is highly spoken of, and the great prosperity of the Christian profession here, is said to be owing to his promptness in the due observance of its rites and ordinances: the laws are said to be good, and he insists upon their being executed with rigour. If any disobey, or in any way are guilty of a misdemeanour, they are severely punished. It is much to be regretted, that the punishment of flogging should have been introduced here: it has been inflicted lately on several offenders, including one woman. This barbarous practice, we have been told, has proved beneficial to the people in a moral point of view; but I believe its tendency is rather to blunt the feelings, and harden the heart. In the afternoon took exercise on shore until dark. Captain Macey of the Wiscasset, a serious man, drank tea with us.

11th. (First day)—Spent a peaceful day on board, collected the crew both fore and afternoon for devotional purposes;—none of them seemed disposed to attend the meeting on shore.

13th.—Yesterday sailed the brig Lady Wellington: previous to her departure, the crew were furnished with a set of Friends' tracts, and a Summary of our principles. This morning, John Thomas came on board at eight o'clock; when we immediately proceeded down the harbour in the usual way, and landed on the western coast of Vavau. The meeting was to be held at Hihifo, about a mile from the landing-place; where we went, and met with the chief Solomon, at his own habitation; and as soon as the people were collected, repaired to the meeting-place. The places of worship at the stations distant from Neiafu are like large sheds, standing upon props, and open on both sides; but the ends are made tolerably close with coarse matting. As there was no seat in the meeting, I remained near John Thomas, who occupied a considerable time in the native language, before reading my certificates.

When he had finished we stood by each other in silence, and the people seemed unsettled, as if they did not know what to expect next, or to whom they should hearken, first looking upon one of us, and then upon the other; until it was with me to caution them against a dependence upon the creature, but to endeavour to fix the attention of their minds upon the Creator, who is a Spirit and knows all things. The darkness hides not from Him,—the darkness and the light are both alike to Him, before whom the night shines as the day. My desire was, that nothing might be permitted to beguile them from the simplicity of the gospel of Christ,—that they might not rest satisfied with a mere hearsay knowledge of his name, as a Saviour, but come to the knowledge of his Holy Spirit in themselves, and know for themselves His gospel to be the power of God unto salvation. It was with me to query, what a profession of the Christian religion had done for them? There had been time for some of them to have witnessed something like fruit to be brought forth in themselves; for without a change of heart is known, their religion will profit them nothing. I felt an earnest engagement of mind to turn them to the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus in their own hearts; which would, if believed in and obeyed, cleanse them from sin, create in them a clean heart, and renew a right spirit within them. Although I had full opportunity to clear myself, yet so great was the stream of love that flowed towards the people of Hihifo, that after the meeting was over, I found no relief: the desire of my heart was as strong as ever, that they might not be beguiled by lifeless forms and shadows, from the simplicity that is in Christ, the living and eternal substance. After spending some time with Solomon, the chief, who spread a table plentifully for our refreshment, according to native custom, we repaired to the boat, and proceeded quickly to the Henry Freeling.

15th.—It was with difficulty that an opportunity could be found, on account of the increased number of natives upon the deck, to sit down together; notwithstanding which, the way opened to our comfort. We understand that earthquakes frequently occur among these islands, at times so violent as to stop the clock at the mission-house. On First day last, while in the meeting appointed for the seamen of the fleet, and before standing up amongst them, a considerable shock was sensibly felt by the missionary families then present. Of this, I was not myself aware, although the frame work in the roof of the building we were in was heard to make a cracking noise at the time. Last Second day evening, about nine o'clock, another shock was witnessed at Neiafu, but was not perceived by us upon the water: we are told, however, that they are sometimes felt on board the shipping, and occasion a rumbling noise, as if the vessel was passing over a rugged rock, and sufficiently loud to alarm the crew.

16th.—Remained on board the fore part of the day, while Captain Keen and Charles, accompanied by Philemon an intelligent native, ascended Talau a considerable hill on the island of Vavau, to form a plan of Port Refuge, for the benefit of those who may follow us at a future day. From this point they were enabled with sufficient accuracy to describe the position of this group of islands, which are said to be one hundred and two in number, known by the name of Haafuluhau; so that any stranger may direct his course to Port Refuge in perfect safety, by keeping a good look out, which is of course one of the means dictated by common prudence in such cases. The depth of water varies at the anchorage from sixteen to thirty-six fathoms, with holding-ground of sand and coral. From the direction in which the trade-winds usually blow, a vessel has generally to beat against it as soon as she comes round the southernmost bluff upon the main land of Vavau. The deepest water appears to be on the left hand, the whole way up to the port; the distance from the entrance point may be from ten to twelve miles, and there is ample room for the largest ship to work with common care. In the evening went on shore to consult with John Thomas on the subject of leaving our cook, Pedro Nolasko, a Spaniard, who is desirous of getting to the Fiji Islands, having heard of the probability of meeting with a vessel bound to Manilla, his native place. As he is a man of good character, and not likely by his conduct to injure the natives, and there being no objection in the minds of the missionaries and the authorities of the place, there seems no good reason for refusing to discharge him, agreeably with his wishes; more particularly, as we have just taken on board one of the survivors from the wreck of the Active schooner: this man was intended to work for his food while with us, but he will now come in for regular wages, by filling up the vacancy which the discharge of Pedro Nolasko will occasion.

19th.—On Seventh day, with the exception of taking exercise on shore towards evening, we were employed on board through the day; yesterday, (First day,) remained on board all day with our own people, having no attraction to the shore. It was a season of self-abasedness and poverty; but however humiliating, I trust not altogether unprofitable, and one that I have found not infrequently to precede, and perhaps prepare for further service in the Great Master's time; for which the prayer of my heart is, that I may be ready; confiding in Him, whose power can raise up from utter weakness, and make strong for His use. Today sailed the American ship Wiscasset, Captain Macey. This vessel was supplied with some tracts and writings of Friends. This evening it seemed best to arrange to attend a native meeting at Matika, a few miles from hence; the greater part of which distance can be performed by boat. As John Thomas was not likely to be at liberty, John Hobbs kindly offered to supply his place as interpreter; but the situation of the neighbourhood is such, that the weather must be consulted in the first place.

20th.—The weather apparently likely to answer for our going to Matika; and John Hobbs having arrived with a suitable crew of natives, by nine o'clock we proceeded on our way, and landed at Feletoa before eleven o'clock a.m. Here we got a cool resting place, and after an early dinner proceeded to Matika. Feeling unwell soon after, I was not in very good trim for moving forward in the hottest part of the day, nor for attending the appointed meeting; but I well knew that He who had sustained me thus far, could strengthen me at his pleasure, to stand before the people for His great name's sake. Having now an interpreter, to whose abilities and qualifications in the native language I was a stranger, it seemed like venturing upon untried ground. I soon found that I had no cause to fear on this head, but rather to dread the quickness with which he at once comprehended the drift of what I had to say, and interpreted it to the people; however, although every sentence as soon as uttered, was rapidly conveyed to them without hesitation on his part, yet with thankfulness I can say, that I never felt less difficulty in getting on. I had to caution them particularly, not to be deceived in looking without for that which is only to be found within; that so they might come to the knowledge of Christ, the light of whose Holy Spirit shines in every heart; and that they might believe in it to the saving of the soul,—that so Christ may dwell richly in their hearts by faith,—that He might be theirs, and they might be His, in His Father's kingdom forever. It was a comfortable meeting, and ended well. Great is my desire for these people, that their hearts may be directed to the love of God, and to the patient waiting for Christ. How great the responsibility of those, who take upon themselves to introduce the religion of Jesus amongst a simple-hearted people, lest its beautiful simplicity be hid from them, by forms and shadows of man's own invention!

21st.—This morning the Mary Anne, of London, sailed for the whaling grounds; sundry tracts were furnished for the crew, also a French Testament for one of them, a native of France. A few days ago a native offered amongst other articles for sale, a copy of the Holy Scriptures in English. I found on examining it, that it had been given by the Seamen's Bible Society in London, probably to some ship's library. I purchased this book for about eightpence, merely to show the necessity of inserting, not only the donor's name, or that of the institution by which it had been bestowed, but the name of the person to whom it was originally given, or the ship's library to which it belonged: it would, I think, help to deter from such a misapplication. It is very probable that this bible had belonged to the library of the Mary Anne, of London, but this was not specified, or it might have been returned to that vessel before she left the port, and have served to prevent a similar occurrence in future. We find that sailors, our own not excepted, regardless of the future, do not hesitate to give articles for a shell or two, far exceeding the value of them; they will part with a woollen jacket, as a thing perfectly useless to them, because at that particular time, in a hot climate, it is not needed; and the natives will accept of almost any thing for their shells. If books of a pernicious tendency in the English language are found in the hands of the natives, such are immediately destroyed; and books of various kinds fall into their hands when bartering with the shipping; they are pleased when they can obtain writing paper, pen and ink, or a pencil.

Ninth Month 22nd.—Although many natives were on board, we were enabled to set aside our bartering, and sit down to wait upon the Lord, but it required firm struggling to get into quiet introversion of mind; towards the end a little of that strength was witnessed, by which only the foes of a man's house can be cast out, and himself left in peaceable possession.

24th.—Both yesterday and today, with the exception of taking the needful exercise on shore, as the sun declined, we were engaged on board getting things into train, with the prospect of shortly sailing for the Haabai group of Tonga isles. Since it has come to my knowledge that the strength of these islands is to be assembled at Lifuka with king George of Vavau, and Josiah (Tubou), the king of Tongataboo, I have not seen the way open for me to move in any direction but to Lifuka; and the more I have dwelt upon this subject, the more it appears to be the right track for me to pursue. Owing to existing circumstances connected with persons and places, it does not seem practicable for me to complete the object which brought us to Vavau, of visiting the people, before the end of this month; and allowing that it could be satisfactorily accomplished at an earlier period, it would be useless to sail for Tongataboo, as those competent for the important office of interpreter, will have left the island to join their brethren at the general assembly about to take place at Lifuka. My earnest desire is, to be found in the counsel of the will of our heavenly Father, to be preserved in faithfulness and humble resignation thereunto, and favoured to possess my vessel in patience to the end of the race. Could I have contrived for myself, I should certainly not have selected Lifuka, as the Haabai group is a dangerous archipelago of small islands, shoals, and reefs, without any secure place of shelter from every wind that blows, and not the least dependence can be placed on the published charts of it. But if He that “blows with His wind, and the waters flow,” is graciously pleased to direct our way amidst the lurking dangers of the deep which await a stranger vessel, who has so mercifully and so often in appalling seasons said in effect, “It is I, be not afraid,'”—and this too accompanied with an evidence so indisputably strengthening, that a poor helpless mortal could exclaim in that humble faith and confidence which condescending heavenly love alone inspires, “It is the Lord,”'—all fear is then cast out, except what is filial.

26th.—Yesterday (First day,) spent the day on board. Collected the sailors twice in the course of the day for devotional purposes. Engaged the fore-part of today on board, and in the afternoon went up to Neiafu, to endeavour to arrange for visiting the natives on the north shore. The weather sultry and rainy, making the clay soil, of which the neighbourhood of the landing place is composed, almost impassable; and the steep descent down to the boat extremely difficult and unsafe.

27th.—Much rain during the night and this morning, which prevented my going on shore; Charles landed for a short time opposite the vessel, but was soon compelled to return. About nine o'clock this evening, a shock of an earthquake was sensibly felt on board by the trembling of the vessel; Captain Keen stepped upon one of the chain cables, by which we were riding at the time, when the shock was more evident, from the connection of the anchor with the earth at the bottom of the sea. This is the fourth shock that has been felt since our arrival at Port Refuge. Would that the earthly nature in the hearts of all around us, yes the world over, were so shaken, that that only which cannot be shaken might remain, to the praise and glory of God.

Ninth Month 28th.—Still rainy weather. John Hobbs called on board today, with whom an arrangement was made to visit a native meeting tomorrow afternoon, should the weather permit us to proceed and the people to collect. We learn from John Hobbs that the shock of the earthquake last evening, was the most severe he had known since his coming to these islands; it was felt on board the American ship Mussel, quite as much as on board the Henry Freeling.

29th.—In our solitary sitting this forenoon, we were favoured to witness a degree of strength sufficient for the day, to wrestle for the blessing. Soon after three o'clock, John Hobbs and ourselves set forward in our own boat, with six able natives to paddle; on account of the falling tide we landed at a place much more distant from the meeting to which we were going, than would otherwise have been necessary. It was, however, much safer for the boat, with which it behoves us to use every precaution, to enable her to hold out to the end; she is now leaky and much worse for wear, and was not a thoroughly good one when new.

The heat of the afternoon made the extra walking very fatiguing; and the current of air to which I was afterwards exposed, occasioned considerable pain in my head: but such was the engagement of my mind, that this bodily annoyance was little regarded. After resting awhile at a house built for the special purpose of accommodating the teachers, the meeting commenced; and although I was as an emptied vessel, while the translation of my certificates was read: yet shortly after the reading concluded, my mouth was opened to turn the attention of the people to that Almighty power, which “is not far from every one of us,” dwelling in our hearts by his Holy Spirit, except we be reprobates; “in whom we live and move and have our being.” He that abides of old, with whom a thousand years are but as one day, and one day as a thousand years,—from everlasting to everlasting he is God, and changes not. My desire for this people was, that they might become wise in heart, by seeking after that knowledge which is life eternal, through the operation of the Holy Spirit, which shines in every heart; that they might inherit glory, and be numbered among those that shall shine as the brightness of the firmament, and with them that turn many to righteousness, as the stars forever and ever. The gospel of the everlasting kingdom was freely preached to these dear people: it was a memorable season, and yielded peaceful relief to my mind. We reached our vessel soon after dark. What, indeed, can we render unto the Lord for all this! being nothing ourselves and possessing nothing, but what we have received from Him, the God of love and praise.

Tenth Month 1st.—Yesterday engaged on board most of the day, making ready for sailing for the Haabai. My attention has been drawn at times, in the course of yesterday and today, towards again attending the native meeting at Neiafu tomorrow; and John Thomas and Stephen Rabone calling on board this afternoon, afforded me an opportunity of mentioning the subject. John Thomas kindly agreed at once to make way for it, and offered his assistance as interpreter. Although so often a partaker of heavenly help and goodness, I am still imploring more; being increasingly sensible of the lack of it, when looking towards this meeting; that the name of the Lord Jesus may be exalted, to the glory of God the Father.

Having now every prospect of bending our course towards Lifuka, I deemed it expedient to make an offer to convey as many of the missionary families as inclined to go to the congress; telling John Thomas, that if they were willing to put up with the lack of accommodations to which they would be subjected in our small vessel, the whole of them might go with us. He expressed a fear that such a number would put us to great inconvenience; but I told him, it was themselves that would have to suffer the inconvenience, as they would have literally to stow themselves as they could upon the cabin sofas and floor; but, perhaps, we might not be out more than one or two nights, which would depend upon the wind. The distance is sometimes performed in a few hours, when the trade-wind is strong and favourable.

The shock of another earthquake was felt on the night of the 29th ultimo.

2nd. (First day.)—This morning I felt a very poor creature, both in body and mind; but “knowing in whom I have believed,” and unto whom “all power in heaven and earth is given,” I prepared to attend the native meeting at Neiafu. We reached the mission-house before the bell rung; and accompanied John Thomas to the meeting in due time. I sat for some time in a pew constructed for the missionaries; and when John Thomas had finished speaking, I went and stood in front of the people, upon the base on which the pulpit is erected. John Thomas then came down to me, and a general silence prevailed over the assembly, which was large, until broken by myself with the words;—“Watch, stand fast in the faith, quit you like men, be strong.” The burden which rested upon my mind was, that these people might become the Lord's people, formed for himself, to show forth his praise,—that they might become his children, and be taught of Him; for all the sons and daughters of men, which form His church, are taught of the Lord himself: in righteousness they are established, and great shall be their peace.—That they might indeed be sheep of the one fold, and of the one great and heavenly Shepherd, hear his voice, be known of him, and follow him; and thus be enabled individually to say, from blessed experience, “The Lord is my shepherd; I shall not want. He makes me to lie down in green pastures; he leads me beside the still waters. He restores my soul; he leads me in the paths of righteousness for His name's sake.” But the sheep must first learn to know the voice of the great Shepherd, when they hear it, from the voice of a stranger; that so they may follow him with safety whithersoever he leads: those that are the sheep of his fold know him, and are known of him. “My sheep,” said Christ, “hear my voice, and I know them, and they follow me: and I give unto them eternal life; and they shall never perish, neither shall any man pluck them out of my hand: My Father, which gave them me, is greater than all; and no man is able to pluck them out of my Father's hand.” Thus, the security and blessedness of the Lord's children, which compose his church, are set forth by its holy Head, the Lord Jesus, that great Shepherd of the sheep: and there is no other way for any of us to become of this happy number, but that of sitting under the teaching of His Holy Spirit, to learn of Him, to know His voice and be known of Him, and be His sheep and follow Him. He will teach us humility, meekness, and lowliness of heart. Such are formed for himself, do show forth His praise, and glorify Him before men, by producing the fruit of the Spirit in the sight of those around them; openly declaring by life and conversation, that the gospel of Christ is the power of God unto salvation, even to those who beforetime were in darkness, hateful and hating one another. I was largely opened among them; and if it was possible to recapitulate all that was uttered, words would still fall short, and fail to describe the heart-tendering solemnity which crowned the meeting. Towards the conclusion when about saying farewell to these dear people, as one never to see their faces again, that Almighty power which alone can soften the heart was eminently conspicuous; tears could not be restrained, but silently and undisguisedly rolled down the swarthy cheeks of the sons and daughters of this isle of the ocean.

3rd.—Early in the morning the Henry Freeling unmoored, and prepared for sailing: by twelve o'clock the whole of the missionary families, with their servants and luggage being on board, we left the well-sheltered harbour of Port Refuge; and retracing our course through the maze of islands into the open ocean, stretched away from the shore of Vavau. A large number of the natives attended to the last, and hung round the sides of our vessel until compelled to let go their hold, evincing sincere regret at her departure. One of the chiefs of the island of Otea, named Noah, a noble man in person, with whom we were particularly acquainted, and whom we highly esteemed, wept aloud when he left us, and was heard when the canoe was at a considerable distance. He was affected by the whole circumstance of parting with all his friends; but principally on account of losing an adopted daughter, who was leaving Vavau for Tongataboo: she had been for a long time an inmate of the mission-house. Our passengers consisted of John Thomas, Stephen Rabone, John Spinney, John Hobbs, (going to reside at Lifuka,) and William A. Brooks, with their families, in all eighteen persons, besides nine domestics. We had also William Bunubunu, nephew of the late Finau the conqueror of these islands in former days, selected by King George, as our pilot for the Haabai group. Soon after getting fairly out to sea, the whole of our guests, except two of the youngest children, became sick; and some of them remained so the whole time. The wind became unfavourable in the night, and prevented our seeing the isle of Aano next morning as was calculated upon. [Haanna in the Map?]

4th.—When morning came, it was found that we had drifted towards the island of Kao, in appearance a lofty mountain of regular conic shape rising out of the sea, and evidently of volcanic origin. By ten o'clock a.m., the island of Toofoa was fairly opened, and the action of the volcano at the north end plainly to be seen, vomiting clouds of smoke into the atmosphere, which occasionally burst forth with increased strength. It was soon ascertained that getting to Lifuka by night, as before anticipated, was quite impracticable, as the wind continued to baffle us; but shifting two or three points after midnight, we fetched well to windward, and after making one short tack at the entrance of the reef, before ten o'clock were favoured safely to anchor off the island of Lifuka, abreast of the settlement of Mua, in only three and a half fathoms water, on Fourth day the 5th instant. Any vessel less manageable than the Henry Freeling, might easily have got upon the reef, the entrance is so narrow and intricate, in the worst part of which she had to tack. It is probable that few vessels so large as ours ever anchored upon the same ground; and none, however small, ought to venture without a competent pilot on board. It is close to this spot that the Port au Prince was wrecked, perhaps thirty years ago: some of her remains are visible at this day, and are frequently dug out of the sand by the king's order, for the sake of the copper bolts, etc. Of recent date, the Snapper was cut off by the natives and lost upon an adjoining reef, not far from Mua. Soon after we had anchored, Charles Tucker, the resident missionary at this place came off, bringing with him James Watkin, who had arrived the preceding day from his station on the island of Tongataboo. A double canoe was procured, which took the whole of our passengers and luggage at once to the shore: they were safely landed by eleven o'clock, to their great relief. The natives soon began to visit us, well pleased to see a vessel at anchor off the island, as it is but seldom that such a circumstance occurs.

Chapter XXXII.

Island of Lifuka—Native Meeting—Distribution of Bibles, etc.—Visit of the King Meeting with the Missionaries—Sail For Tongataboo—Anchor Off the Settlement at Nukualofa—Letter from the Wesleyan Missionaries—Distribution of Clothing and Medicines—Visit to the Heathen Settlement at Mua—Restraining Influence of the Missionaries—Native Meeting at Nukualofa.

Tenth Month 6th.—This morning early, a turtle of prodigious size was sent on board as a present from Josiah Tubou, the king of Tongataboo, who had arrived here from that island. In the forenoon the weather became quite stormy, and the wind coming in from the westward, made it uneasy riding in the bay. Charles and myself sat down together as usual to wait upon the Lord, though in much poverty and weakness. At noon it threatened to blow strong; but shortly afterwards the atmosphere became more tranquil. There was not so much to be apprehended from the anchor and cables not holding the vessel, as from the danger of striking on the rocky bottom, had the swell from the ocean been permitted to come in upon us. The hurricanes which we are told occasionally occur here, are very awful, levelling with the earth houses, trees, etc., before their tremendous blast; and they generally, if not always, blow from the westward, the only quarter from which we have any thing to fear at this anchorage, as the land and the reefs are a shelter on every side, but this; but the Lord's power is the same here as in every other place—“mighty to save and to deliver” out of every trouble and distress.

7th.—This morning the natives thronged our decks with trifling shells for barter; but the poor creatures have very little in their possession to offer. The last violent hurricane with which they were visited, destroyed their breadfruit trees, etc. to considerable extent, and materially injured their yams, upon which they are usually supported; and from this serious calamity they have not yet recovered. Many of them are now subsisting upon the fern and tea-tree roots; but it is expected that in a few weeks' time, the present complaints of famine will be banished by an abundant supply of yams, sweet potatoes, etc. In the afternoon we visited the mission-house by invitation. While there it was with me to propose having an opportunity afforded of seeing the people, when collected at their morning meeting next First day. On inquiring about some one to interpret what I might have to say to the people, James Watkin the missionary then present from Tongataboo, was proposed to undertake that part of the work, to which he kindly and readily assented. May the Lord be graciously pleased to magnify his power, and cause this stranger and myself to be faithful to Him, in performing each his office; so that, “that life and immortality” which “are brought to light by the glorious gospel,” may be declared to the natives of Lifuka, and others assembled with them, to our Maker's praise.

8th.—Engaged on board till late in the afternoon with the natives. It is probable that the meeting tomorrow will be very large, as the inhabitants from the different islands which compose the Haabai group, are now assembled at this place, besides a vast number from the Haafuluhau group, and Tongataboo. Oh! that the Master of assemblies may be there. To Him, who only knows my motive for coming amongst them, I commend them and myself; humbly praying for help in the needful time, lest the cause of truth and righteousness should suffer in such weak and feeble hands

9th. (First day.)—Proceeded towards the shore at an early hour. We were met on landing by a swarm of young natives, who appeared to be on the look out for us. In half an hour the first bell rung to assemble the people: this bell might have been spared, as the large meeting-house was filled, and a multitude still outside, when we passed by on our way from the boat to the mission-house: another extensive building was also filled, not far from the largest. The natives were indeed gathered together to an extent, which we have not before witnessed in the Friendly Islands.

James Watkin kindly conducted me through the concourse of people, into an enclosed place in front of the pulpit on a level with the floor: here I remained, until the interval arrived for me to take a station by the side of my interpreter, to be in readiness to minister to the people, as way should open. I felt no hesitation in going up into the pulpit, believing that even when the most advantageous position was chosen, but a small portion of the people in comparison with the whole collected about the house, would distinctly hear what was said; these buildings are open at the side, a circumstance which the nature of the climate requires, and which is a special advantage at these times, as before has been witnessed by us at Vavau. A general stillness now prevailed over this large assembly, which I thought might be occasioned in the first place, by the novelty of two persons appearing in the pulpit, both standing, and both silent. It was not long however before I had to turn their attention to Him, unto whom the cattle on a thousand hills belong; before whom, the secret thoughts of every heart are laid open. He sees us as we really are, born in sin, and laden with iniquity, helpless, and utterly unable of ourselves to do any thing for ourselves; for, as men and mortals, we possess nothing, and are as nothing; and yet such is the love of God even to a guilty world, that of the fulness of His Son Christ Jesus the Lord, “have we all received, and grace for grace.” “God so loved the world that he gave his only begotten Son, that whosoever believes in him should not perish, but have everlasting life.” Who among us can contemplate the wondrous mercy and unutterable love, wherewith God so loved the world, without feeling a desire to pour forth a grateful acknowledgment of “thanks be unto God for his unspeakable gift;”—even the gift of His Son Jesus Christ, by whom came that grace which has appeared unto all men; by which grace alone are we saved from sin and from the wrath to come, through faith, and that not of ourselves; for we have nothing, and are only sinners. It is through faith which comes from the Son of God, who loved us, and gave himself for us; who is also “the author and finisher” of that one true faith, which works by love, and purifies the hearts of those who believe in its saving, cleansing power; which gives the victory over the evil propensities of fallen nature, and over every temptation of the devil.

The word of the Truth of the gospel flowed freely to these dear people; for whom my desire was, that they might not rest satisfied with making an empty profession of religion, but “believe in the Lord Jesus Christ, and be saved.” Although at the close of the meeting I felt as if my strength was renewed for the work, I should, without such sustaining help, have been dismayed at the burden which still rested upon my mind. After the meeting broke up many of the people flocked about us; amongst others, I shook hands with an aged female of rank, considered by the people higher than their king: king George himself was one of those who helped to carry her on their shoulders—she being unable to walk any considerable distance. Her placid countenance, and manner altogether, bespoke that she had good will in her heart towards us; and the remembrance of the interview, though short, always brings with it a feeling of peaceful tranquillity to my mind.

11th.—Yesterday, engaged on board, bartering for the commodities brought by the natives, not being willing to turn them back, although what they brought was often almost useless. In the afternoon landed and conveyed to be deposited in the mission-house, twenty-four English Testaments and six Bibles, six Spanish Testaments, six French ditto, and six Portuguese ditto; one French Bible was given to Charles Simeon, a native of France, now settled here. Whaling vessels and others, not infrequently at the present day, fall in among the different groups of these islands; by some on board such vessels, a copy of the Scriptures is often prized, as we have experienced; and individuals are here and there to be found, of different nations, whose lot has been cast among the natives from a variety of causes; some by shipwreck, others by sickness, left by the ships to return if they can, or remain the rest of their lives among the natives, wandering from island to island. Some marry and bring up children among them. If such understand a handicraft business, as that of blacksmith or carpenter, ship or boat builder, etc., and there is no ardent spirit to be procured, they generally fare well amongst the islanders. Today the natives have furnished a supply of hogs; but it is almost impossible to procure food, except the ninita, (papaw) which remains but for a short time in a wholesome state. At present the poor people are very destitute of the vegetable food on which they are accustomed to subsist, and frequently complain and make signs of being hungry; but it is out of our power to supply their needs: they never think of killing a hog for themselves, they are mostly reared for sale and for the use of the chiefs. In the afternoon went on shore with a present for king George, consisting of a large chest of tools, a cask of flooring nails, and a ship's compass, with sundry articles for his queen Charlotte. Some articles had already been given to Josiah Tubou, the king of Tongataboo, when on board the Henry Freeling. Today we took with us some things considered suitable for his queen Mary, so that no preference might appear on our side, more particularly as Josiah Tubou is an older man, and much higher in rank. King George is however very assiduous in giving him the preference in every thing.

13th.—At two o'clock p.m., Charles Tucker, the resident missionary at Lifuka, and his wife, accompanied king George and his wife Charlotte on board to dinner. On taking our seats at the table, I told Charles Tucker that it was our practice to endeavour to feel a grateful tribute arise in our hearts to Him, from whom all our blessings come; they were of course left at liberty: when Charles Tucker called upon the king to ask a blessing, which he did in a serious manner. The parties were greatly amused with a set of William Darton's Scripture views, etc.; and I believe were pleased with their visit. We landed towards evening, and walked to the other side of the island for exercise; this part is wholly enclosed by a coral reef, which enables the people to procure fish in almost any weather.

When looking towards visiting Lifuka, I thought as the principal part of the Tongataboo people, with their ruler, would be assembled here, that I might not have to proceed to the latter island; but I do not find that this will be sanction enough for me to stay away from it, as it has dwelt much upon my mind for several days past; I therefore believe it safest for me to go there, however opposed to my own inclination: if the Lord's presence does but go with me, it is enough; for in His presence only there is life, and at His right hand durable riches and righteousness, yes pleasures for evermore. The desire and prayer of my heart, and I believe it may be added, my greatest delight also, is to be found labouring to exalt his great and adorable name, and to promote the extension of the blessed Saviour's kingdom in the hearts of mankind.

On returning to the boat in the evening, several of the missionaries were upon the beach, when I told James Watkin that I could not pass by Tongataboo, offering him a passage with us to his family at Nukualofa. Fearing to let the members of the mission separate without requesting a select opportunity with them, I told them that I should like us to have an hour or so together, in the presence of the Most High, before they separated; this proposal was accepted with openness, and every thing made to give way for bringing it about: tomorrow evening at six or seven o'clock was mentioned as the probable time for our meeting together. When we got on board I told Captain Keen, that as matters then stood with me, I saw nothing in the way to prevent our going towards Tongataboo, and that the water casks had better be filled up tomorrow, as the beginning of the ensuing week might be looked to as the probable time of our leaving this place. It is expected that the Vavau missionaries will return in two or three days from this time.

14th.—Engaged on board bartering with the natives during the fore-part of the day. A large canoe came alongside before dinner with a present from king George, namely, six spears, two bundles of native cloth, a large floor mat, and two orange cowries, which in days past were considered the most valuable ornaments worn by the rulers of these islands, and are very rarely met with at present. The bearer of these articles is a Portuguese, but understands English; he said that the king was desirous to obtain from me an English spelling-book. This token of the king's good will was verbally acknowledged, and the messenger himself presented with a Testament in the Portuguese language. My mind in the midst of many interruptions attendant upon bartering with the natives and other duties, had to sustain a heavy load of exercise, in the prospect of meeting the missionaries and their families in the evening, which to my view was no small matter.

Landed in the afternoon, and drank tea at the mission-house. About the time agreed upon, the whole of the families, except the wife and young children of John Hobbs, (whose numerous family could not be left alone,) assembled in a large room in Charles Tucker's house, and sat down together in silence. I endeavoured to keep my mind staid in humble dependence upon Him, who commands the morning, and causes the dayspring to know his place; and after dwelling a considerable time in silence, it was with me to bow the knee in supplication unto Him, who inhabits the praises of eternity, and “covers himself with light as with a garment;”—and to ask in the name of our Redeemer, that His life-giving presence might be near on the occasion, to subdue in us every thing that stands opposed to His righteous principle of light, life, and love;—that His power alone may rule, and preserve our hearts, etc.

After sitting down again, a quiet season was vouchsafed, though a further time of silence was to be passed. There seemed much to travail under before the way was fairly opened for me, to declare the indispensable necessity for each of us to know for ourselves the will of God, seeing that Christ has said,—“not every one that says, Lord, Lord, shall enter into the kingdom of heaven; but he that does the will of my Father which is in heaven.” That before we are in a state to be entrusted with the knowledge of the Divine will, the will of the creature must be laid low, and subjected to the will of the great Creator; our bodies must become living sacrifices, holy, acceptable to God; we must be altogether transformed, and our minds renewed by the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, believed in, and operating in us, “that we may prove what is that good and acceptable, and perfect will of God,”—as defined by the apostle Paul to the Romans. Every thing depends upon this,—to know the will of God in the first place, and then to do it. “To obey is better than sacrifice, and to hearken than the fat of rams.” It is those only who do the will of the Father, that shall know of the doctrine of His well beloved Son, in whom he is well pleased. It was with me particularly to urge this upon all present, both male and female, for both are one in Christ;—that all might, by implicit obedience, know for themselves the will of God, and Christ to be unto them wisdom and righteousness, sanctification and redemption. The whole of our Lord's precepts must be regarded as binding upon His followers; we cannot choose for ourselves, by selecting some parts and leaving others. His example must be followed in every thing, in every part, to the denial of self in all things. “He that will be my disciple must deny himself, take up his daily cross and follow me,”—these are the terms which He prescribes; we must take up a daily cross to our own corrupt wills and inclinations. It seldom occurs, that the path chosen for us, or the thing required of us, is what we, as creatures, should choose for ourselves, or can very readily yield obedience to; it is against the nature of flesh and blood,—it does not suit our inclination; if it were not so, and our will was consulted, there would be no cross to take up,—it would be a sacrifice which costs us nothing. We must be willing to part with and to suffer the loss of all things for Christ's sake; and in following the great example which He has left us, we must in no part thereof deny Him before men, nor be ashamed of Him and his words before men, lest He should also deny us, and be ashamed of us, before His Father and the holy angels,—according to His own awful denunciation against such unworthy followers.

It was a solid and solemn season, the power of Truth was over all. Before leaving the shore, I mentioned the probability of my again attending a meeting of the natives on the following First day morning, to which no difficulty seemed likely to present.

15th.—In the afternoon we went on shore, with a view to getting things so settled as to insure no failure in my seeing the natives tomorrow. James Watkin again kindly undertook the office of interpreter; and I returned on board satisfied with the arrangements agreed upon, and strengthened to look forward with some degree of confidence and resignation.

16th. (First day.)—This morning went to Charles Tucker's house, to wait until the natives were collected together. On the way was much gratified to learn, that it was concluded to dispense with many of the exercises usual at their meetings on First days. This circumstance had come about without my knowledge, although I had before-time mentioned, that the meetings lasted longer than the people were able to bear; being densely stowed upon the floor, almost without a circulation of air, in a tropical climate.

After I had taken my station by the side of James Watkin, a general silence prevailed over the multitude assembled; and in due time my mouth was opened to revive in their hearing, that—“Whoso is wise, and will observe these things, even they shall understand the loving-kindness of the Lord.” But the first thing to be done in order to partake of the Lord's loving-kindness, which is better than life, is to believe in the Lord Jesus Christ; without this, none can behold his wonderful works, nor praise Him, for his great goodness to the children of men. When the Saviour of the world was on earth, and dwelt among the sons of men, he did not many mighty works in some places, because of the unbelief of the people; and it is the same at this day. There is no way unto God the Father, but by the Son; and we can never know the Son, to be “the way, the truth, and the life,” unless we believe in His power to save to the uttermost, all those that are willing to come unto God by him.—“For he that comes to God, must believe that He is, and that He is a rewarder of them that diligently seek him.” Without faith it is impossible to please him: but how great is his goodness to the humble believer that fears him,—to them that wait for him,—to the soul that seeks him. Yes, eternal life is the reward of all those, who by patient continuance in well-doing, thus seek the Lord with believing hearts. While tribulation, anguish, indignation and wrath, will be the portion of unbelievers, and of those who are contentious; who disregard the shinings of the true light that enlightens every man that comes into the world, who obey not the truth, or the manifestations of the Spirit of truth, which convinces of sin. My heart was enlarged, and the way fairly opened before me, to proclaim amongst the people the truth as it is in Jesus; and to tell them that salvation was nigh unto them that day:—it depended upon themselves,—it remained with themselves,—to “believe on the Lord Jesus Christ and be saved.” Not merely to believe that he came in the flesh, and died for the sins of the whole world; but to believe in the coming of his Holy Spirit into their hearts, to purge away their sins, and save them from the wrath to come, while the day of their visitation is mercifully lengthened out. In the same love which brought me among them, I bade them all an affectionate farewell in the Lord.

Many of them with whom we were personally acquainted, flocked round us to shake hands, amongst others, the king and his principal chiefs. And now believing myself clear of the island, we paid a short and final visit to the mission-house, and then returned to the vessel, having no other prospect before me, but that of sailing in the morning towards Tongataboo.

The following are copies of letters received while at the island of Lifuka:—

Lifuka, October 10th, 1836.

Dear Sir,

We, the Wesleyan missionaries, assembled at our annual district meeting, beg leave sincerely to congratulate you upon the hitherto successful prosecution of your missionary voyage; and to express the unfeigned pleasure we feel in seeing you in this part of the great missionary field; and we trust that your efforts to promote the knowledge of the true God, will have had the blessing of God; and that you will have the pleasure of seeing at the right hand of the Most High, many who, from among the Gentiles have been turned from darkness to light, by your instrumentality.

'We beg leave too to offer you our best thanks for the kindness you have manifested in bringing five of our members, with our families, to this place; and we pray that He, who does not forget the smallest kindness done to the least of His disciples, may reward you with every needful blessing, both for soul and body: and finally grant unto you and yours, Eternal Life, through Jesus Christ our Lord.

Signed on behalf of the meeting,

John Thomas, Chairman. James Watkin, Secretary.

—————

Lifuka, Ilaabai, October 17th, 1836.'Dear Friend,

We, as Wesleyan Methodist missionaries, labouring in the Friendly Islands, beg leave at this our annual meeting, to express our sentiments to you, in reference to your visiting the various mission stations in these seas.

We admire the principle which induced you to sacrifice the blessings of civilized society, and to quit the land of your fathers, in order to witness the glorious effects of the gospel among heathen nations, and preach among the Gentiles the unsearchable riches of Christ.

'We doubt not but you have been richly rewarded in your own mind for all the sacrifices you have made, and the privations you have been called to endure while prosecuting the great work in which you are engaged. We rejoice that the Lord has so signally blessed you hitherto in your undertaking; and pray that his kind Providence may still preside over you, and make your way plain.

We have been very much gratified by your visit to this part of the great mission field. We hail you as a fellow-labourer in the gospel, and wish you God's speed.

The very great kindness which you and your excellent son have manifested to us in a variety of instances, has produced a deep impression on our minds; be assured you will long live in our affection; and we hope, that your addresses and conversation will produce their desired effect.

And now, as you are about to take your departure from this place, we commend you to God, and take an affectionate farewell, until we shall meet in our Father's house above. We remain dear friend,

Yours affectionately,

John Thomas, William Allen Brooks, John Hofps, Stephen Rabone, James Watkin, John Spinney. Charles Tucker,

17th.—Unmoored at the earliest dawn of day. Soon after we were ready, our passenger James Watkin came on board, with the whole body of missionaries then at Lifuka. Their stay was necessarily short indeed, scarcely longer than while they delivered up their letters and parcels, for not a few of their friends and connexions in Sydney and England. On their departure the anchor was weighed, and we immediately proceeded towards the opening in the reef; making all sail, if possible, to clear the principal dangers of the Haabai group, before nightfall. We had a pilot with us, a native of Tongataboo, well acquainted with the different channels; but who could not understand many words of English. The wind became more opposed at sun-set; and instead of our being in tolerably open water, we were entangled with the long and dangerous reef off the island of Anamooka; and were at last compelled to run down to its leeward-most point, in order to get clear of its crags. While the sound of the breakers thundering upon the reef could be heard, we were still within its reach; but as the noise became fainter, we considered ourselves beyond its outermost point, and ventured to haul up to the south south-east, for the night.

19th.—About ten o'clock were favoured to get sight of Eouaigee, owing to a strong current, which had, during the night, hurried us away to the eastward; and the wind being strong, by noon the island of Tongataboo was distinctly to be seen, though the weather was thick and hazy. By two o'clock we were abreast of the settlement of Nukulofa, and were favoured to anchor safely in fourteen fathoms water, in a place well sheltered, except when the winds blow from the northward and westward: the north side of this island is one mass of reefs, rocks, and small islands. Twenty-two of these islands are in sight from the vessel; and in several directions the surf breaks incessantly upon sunken reefs, which form the principal shelter between us and the main ocean. A brig under English colours was entering the narrow channel from the southward at the same time as ourselves; but she took a different route from us, and anchored off a heathen settlement, several miles distant from Nukulofa: she proved to be the Guide, a Sydney whaling vessel in need of supplies. Soon after having anchored, a canoe arrived, and carried off our agreeable passenger and companion, James Watkin, whose wife could be seen on the shore waiting for her husband. Having had but little rest for the two past nights, we remained on board; and the afternoon turning out wet, but few of the natives visited the vessel. It is indeed renewed cause of humble thankfulness to be again and again preserved amidst these dangerous and little frequented groups of the Friendly islands; and particularly during our stay at Lifuka, where there were but few feet of water to spare between the rocks which were visible, and the bottom of our vessel. Had one of those furious hurricanes been permitted, which are occasionally witnessed by these islands, her destruction would have been inevitable. The very day after our arrival, (as before noticed,) the wind came in upon us, and the atmosphere assumed for a time a threatening appearance: but after having been shown our critical and helpless situation, and renewedly made sensible that there was no refuge, but in that power which winds and waves obey,—the storm was hushed, the wind gradually shifted to its usual trade-quarter again; and the rod was no more lifted up during our stay of about a fortnight. Some of the missionaries, who well knew our dangerous situation, were perhaps more alarmed for us than we ourselves were, who were comparatively ignorant of many circumstances, peculiar to that neighbourhood; indeed, one of them afterwards acknowledged his not having been able to sleep on our account, when the change of weather took place, and the clouds gathered blackness in the stormy quarter.

We find that a large portion of the inhabitants of Tongataboo still retain their heathenish practices, and hitherto could never be prevailed upon to cast away their idols. They keep those who have embraced Christianity in constant alarm, and cause them to keep up a strict watch, and to live within strongly fortified places, as in a state of actual warfare.

20th.—A few of the natives came off this morning with some poor hogs and a few vegetables; but for these and for their shells, they have learned to ask very extravagant prices, which is owing we are told, to their having calls not very infrequently from our men-of-war, who purchase largely their hogs, yams, shells, etc., without regard to price. In the forenoon Charles and myself sat down together in the cabin. It was a low season with me, as when the bridegroom is taken away; towards the conclusion, a degree of strength was graciously afforded, although my soul's enemies were still felt to be lively and strong. At one o'clock p.m., landed for the first time at the settlement of Nukulofa; but the tide being low we were compelled to submit to being carried over a part of the reef, the water being too shallow to float our boat. James Watkin, with two children, was on the beach, ready to conduct us to his house; and we spent an agreeable afternoon with his family. In the course of the time we were there, Abraham a brother of Josiah Tubou the king, came in to see us:—he seems a serious steady man, from forty to fifty years of age, and is considered a religious character. The settlement of Nukulofa is surrounded by tall trees, so thickly planted, that a man cannot pass between them, having several sally-ports or entrance gates, which are secured at night in a substantial manner. Outside this wall of trees, which have rails connected with them, is a very deep trench, the coral taken out of which forms an additional barrier of defence outside the trees, and renders the approach almost inaccessible. It was pleasant to find that the missionaries have lived latterly entirely outside of these fortifications, without any defence beyond a fence of slender canework. On returning to the vessel at sun-set, we found a large shark hanging to her side, which had been struck with a harpoon, by some whalers who had called on board.

21st.—Landed in the afternoon and made our way to the mission-house, taking with us a variety of drugs, and numerous articles of clothing for children, for the use of James Watkin's family, with a quantity of dresses suitable for the native children. It is a great privilege, through the kindness of my dear friends in England, to be able to administer, in some degree, to the needs and comforts of those to whom I am most certainly very greatly indebted; and without whose kind and brotherly assistance, my mouth, in most instances, must have been closed, as regards declaring the word of life in the different islands.

22nd.—In the morning some of the heathen part of the community came on board, and appeared pleased at the treatment they met with; some articles they brought were purchased, by way of gaining their good-will rather than from necessity. Abraham, the king's brother spent a part of the day with us; after dinner he was presented with a broad axe. Landed in the afternoon, and called upon Thomas Wellard, a person connected with the missionaries here, who is about to return to Australia, and has applied to me to give him and his wife a passage to Sydney; I can give no answer, it being at present uncertain whether a direct course to Sydney from hence will be a peaceful one; time must decide our future destination. All that man can do, is to endeavour to stand in the counsel of the Divine will, and in humble resignation wait for its unfolding to the finite understanding; and when once ascertained, then to do it with all his might. Go and do likewise, with all your might, whoever you are, who may perhaps read these fragments, inscribed by one who has trodden the narrow path before you; but who, however unworthy of the least of all the Lord's tender mercies, is at seasons comforted in believing, that he is on the way to the heavenly city, none of whose inhabitants can say, “I am sick.”

Finding the necessary arrangements had been made to open the way for my seeing the people tomorrow, when collected in their place of worship, we returned on board, and found some of the poor despised heathen waiting with a quantity of cocoa-nuts for sale. These nuts are such as are only fit for hogs, being too old and rancid for the use of the people, who are very short of food at this time.

23rd.—On going to the meeting we found the house quite filled, with many standing and squatting outside, and others coming towards it. My truly kind and faithful interpreter, James Watkin, did every thing in his power to open the way clearly for me, by explaining the translation of the Morning Meeting's certificate, which he read. The reading was succeeded by a time of silence, until I stood up, and was strengthened to express the desire of my heart, that they might all come to the knowledge of the truth as it is in Jesus, and be saved. That a mere profession of the Christian religion would avail them nothing: truth in the inward parts, the Lord desired. They must come to know the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, (which is the Spirit of Truth,) in their own hearts; which the blessed Saviour promised should come in his name, even into the hearts of his followers, and abide with them forever. I had to speak of the greatness of the love of God, in sending his Son into the world to save sinners. I doubted not that many of them believed in His coming in a body of flesh; but I wanted them to believe in His coming in the Spirit into their hearts. I had to contrast their present state,—although it is to be feared, in too many instances, making but an empty profession of the Christian religion, and remaining as yet, in great measure, strangers to the power of Christ,—with the dark and heathenish condition they formerly were in, without hope in the world; laden with sin, hateful, and hating one another. Many of them had lived long enough to see and know the difference between the past and the present; and to be able to discern what are the works of the flesh, and what is the fruit of the Spirit. “What fruit had you then in those things whereof you are now ashamed? for the end of those things is death,”—the sure wages of sin: “but the gift of God is eternal life by Jesus Christ our Lord.” They were earnestly entreated, in the love of the gospel, to come to this precious gift of God, to turn inward to this light; and they would find to their inexpressible comfort, that it is none other than the Holy Spirit of Him, of whom Moses in the law, and the prophets did write. It was a precious meeting: the people sat as if afraid to move,—such was the solemnity that prevailed over us. Power belongs unto God; and the praise and glory are his forever. Remained on board in the afternoon with our own people.

25th.—Fakafonua, a heathen chief, who can talk a little English, paid us a visit this morning. He had been invited to breakfast and was treated with kindness. He behaved in a solid manner, while a chapter in the Testament was read, and during silence. An axe was presented to him before leaving the vessel. In the afternoon it was with me to inquire, whether it was practicable to obtain an interview with these poor heathen people, who though apparently lost sight of, are still the sealed inheritance of the Lord Jesus. James Watkin said it might be done, and thought the best way would be to take them by surprise; for if notice was given, as I had suggested, they would only get out of the way. It is true, it may only tend to exposure, without any beneficial results; but this must be left: to omit, however, making an attempt to visit them, might make work for repentance at a future day, when the present opportunity presented to me is forever gone by. May the Lord Most High prepare their hearts to receive, and mine to declare to them salvation by Christ Jesus.

26th.—This morning the fleet from Lifuka made its appearance, consisting of seventeen large double canoes. The first which reached Nukulofa had on board Josiah Tubou and king George, (alias Taufaahau), the kings of Haabaiand Tongataboo. We afterwards, in company with James Watkin, attended the king's kava party, assembled in the neighbourhood to welcome the arrival of the different parties from Lifuka, who had been to attend the general congress.

26th.—The kava ceremony was performed in the open air, the heads of the islands only being under cover, and the strangers, when any are present. The people were squatted in regular order, forming three sides of a square, in front of their king and chiefs. The fourth side was an open building, on the floor of which sat Josiah Tubou, with three of his principal men on each side of him, the admiral of the fleet directed the different proceedings of the meeting, but Taufaahau mingled among those who were to prepare the kava. As strangers, we were allowed to sit upon the floor of the building, with the rulers of the people, which afforded us full opportunity of seeing the whole process. The kava root, after being well crushed with a heavy pole, was separated into small parcels, and handed to different individuals, whose names were proclaimed aloud, being chosen for having good clean teeth, and sweet breath. When they had chewed a mouthful of the root sufficiently, it was placed in a cup made from the banana leaf; these cups were finally collected, and their contents emptied into a large bowl, employed solely for the purpose. Water was then poured into the bowl, and when the chewed root was sufficiently saturated, a large bunch of very fine shavings, prepared from the purau bark was used as a strainer, and the liquor repeatedly passed through it, until clear of all apparent sediment. When pronounced ready, it is ordered to be served up, and every cup that is filled is retained, until the name of the person is declared to whom it should be handed. We had to take a share of the nauseous liquid, but of course, a little served the turn. Many heavy burdens of baked food, each brought upon a pole on the shoulders of two men, were laid in front of the king and chiefs; who directed to whom a basket should be given. Many of these were ordered to the men of the fleet, who were numerous on the occasion, as the largest canoes carry at least a hundred men. Thanks were repeatedly given to those who had the fatiguing part of the work, especially to the kava makers, the food bakers, the chewers, the carriers, and the cup bearers. Returned on board as soon as the tide was high enough to carry us over the outer reef.

27th.—Before eight o'clock a.m., James Watkin came on board, bringing with him five natives, to accompany us in an attempt to procure an interview with a body of the heathen, residing at the settlement of Mua, in a fortified position. We left the vessel quickly, and proceeded towards the lagoon, at the entrance of which a bay of islands in miniature is formed. At eleven o'clock, we were abreast of the settlement; but the boat grounding upon a sand-bank, at a considerable distance from the shore, one of the natives, Isaackee, waded to the landing-place, where a number of the people were collected on seeing the boat approach their territory. On being informed by Isaackee who we were, and what the object of our visit, they denied that the chief was at home. Our man returned to us and said the chief was not at home, and that Charles and myself might land, but not the missionary. Appearances on the shore were not very inviting, as the war clubs were plainly seen in the hands of some of the natives. James Watkin advised us not to land. I was not satisfied, however, without making some further attempt to get among them, and Isaackee was dispatched again, to say, that our coming on shore would be useless, without the missionary to interpret. He did not at all hesitate to go; but, apprehending some mischief might arise, said, on leaving us, 'if they kill me, it will be nothing.' After a considerable parley had taken place, our man returned again, and said, that 'we might all come on shore;' but now James Watkin refused to accompany us, as the objection had appeared to be against him only. I felt a little disappointed, but concluded to land, at all events, without further debate. Charles and myself were then conveyed to the shore by our native boat's crew; and although a considerable number of these people immediately flocked about us, I had not the least apprehension of danger, for the fear of man was cast out.

We ascertained afterwards that at least twenty muskets were pointed upon us, from behind a strong wooden fence, in readiness, had any affray taken place. We had in our hands only an umbrella each. We proceeded towards the settlement, under an escort of the people, until we had passed through the gates of the stronghold, and at length reached the habitation of the chief. We found him at home, and with a number of his people squatted ready upon the floor, waiting our arrival. The chief, perceiving mo at a loss to distinguish him from the rest, moved aside to the log of an old tree, upon which we both sat down together: this, I thought, was correct on my part, from the signs that he made to me. He could talk a few words of English; but could understand little that I said. I made him understand that they had a shipwrecked sailor among them, of whom I had heard previously, and made signs for him to be fetched; but he did not make his appearance, and was probably ashamed of being seen by his countrymen. The chief was evidently desirous of asking questions; but I signified that without the missionary we could do nothing. Some people then had orders to go for James Watkin, who arrived in less than half an hour. During this interval the number of people increased, and a root of the kava plant was laid at my feet, as a token of good-will towards me. An offer of some of the liquor was then tendered, which I accepted, to show that I had nothing but good-will towards them. Some persons were then appointed to chew the root, and prepare this odious drink, which, in due time, was handed to me. I drank some of it before them, and handed the remainder to one of the people, which I had learned was a usual practice in such cases. James Watkin now entered into conversation with the chief, and believing that things were going on smoothly, I proposed that the translation of my certificate from the Morning Meeting should be read. It was patiently and attentively heard to the end, with ample explanation to elucidate the cause of my coming among them. I had then to tell them, that the God whom I serve is a God of love and mercy, and wills not the death of a sinner, but rather that all men every where should repent, return unto Him and live; and that such is the love of God to his creature man, that he gave His only begotten Son to save them from their sins, “that whosoever believes on Him should not perish, but have everlasting life.” That I was not satisfied to leave their island without telling them of the good things which God has prepared for those that love him: I declared that salvation was come nigh unto them,—yes, placed within their reach, and that by Jesus Christ;—He is Lord of all; through the shedding of whose precious blood the gift of the Holy Spirit was received for every mortal, whether son or daughter,—for the whole human race,—even for the rebellious. I told them, that I did not come among them to persuade them to turn to this way of life or that way of life; but to turn them from the darkness they were in to the light of Christ, “from the power of Satan unto God.” To this Holy Spirit I desired that their hearts might be directed, and to the patient waiting for Christ, that they might know Him to be in them, “who lives and abides forever.” The above is the substance of what I had to express among them; and though some individuals mocked and behaved rudely, saying aloud, 'I wish he had doneso that James Watkin stopped, and reproved them for their behaviour; yet the Divine Power was over others, and I believe that its influence was felt by the chief, as I observed, when I had finished and sat down, that his countenance was entirely changed, and he said that, 'I had done well in coming.'

Afterwards, by way of accounting for their not setting food before us, as is their usual custom with strangers, (which I firmly believe would have been done, had it been in his power,) he said, that they had very little to eat, and that it would be about five months before they could have plenty again; looking forward to the rainy season setting in. This I knew to be the case, as the famine in all the Friendly Isles was grievous, but more so at Tongataboo, than at Lifuka, as the bread fruit, banana, yam, sweet potatoes, etc., were almost wholly destroyed by a hurricane; and they were at this time eating the roots of the banana and tea tree. It has been painful to observe how many have complained to us of hunger: some would put their hands on their stomachs, and exclaim, 'dead, dead.' It is, however, a certain fact, that in those places where the people are under the control of the missionaries, although suffering much, they are much better off for food than the heathen part of the community. Some of these, called heathen, particularly the chief just alluded to, and the other that came on board our vessel, declare, that they perfectly understand the nature of Christianity, and the blessing that it bestows, but they say, 'If we were to follow it, we should have to give up all our present delights,—put away all our wives but one, and all our bad habits.' They seem sensible of the sinful condition in which they live; for they say, in effect, 'it is impossible that we should be saved,—it cannot be.' Their poor bodies very generally bear the marks of violence, from the habit they are in of lacerating and burning themselves, as an indication of mourning for the dead; this was strikingly apparent. The little fingers on both hands had been in many cases cut off, and offered as sacrifices to avert the evils they most dreaded. This we found to be very general among those who are called Christians, but more particularly remarked it to be the case with those that are grown up; the rising generation of these now retain them. This circumstance we discovered on shaking hands with them, from their kings and chiefs down to the humblest individuals of their tribes, both male and female. We parted from this heathen chief in a friendly manner: his name is Fatu. It gave me much pain, to hear from his own mouth, through James Watkin, that, amidst all the wretchedness of a heathen life, the miseries of his people were greatly increased by their interaction with the shipping; disease was fast sweeping them away.

It is a lamentable fact, that most of the vessels which touch at Tongataboo, come to anchor on the heathen shores, because where the missionaries reside at Nukulofa, there is not the same opportunity for the crew to indulge in their diabolical practices, and promote the sale of rum, etc. While we were at Tongataboo, two vessels under the English flag, and one under the American, anchored near the heathen settlement; where, it is true, there is much better shelter from the sea, than at Nukulofa; at the latter station, however, the Henry Freeling rode sufficiently secure. Such as do anchor at Nukulofa, are uniformly respectable, and the crews under proper restraint: it was quite the reverse with those which went to the other place, during our stay at the island. It was late in the afternoon before we got back from the heathen settlement of Mua.

28th.—Today, Josiah Tubou, and Mary, the king and queen of the island, with their two sons dined on board, they brought with them James Watkin, as interpreter. A prodigiously large fat turtle, and a quantity of fine yams, were brought as a present by our guests. These yams we understood to have come from Vavau; that island being hilly, the crops in the valleys, were more sheltered from the late storm, but as Lifuka and Tongataboo are flat, level islands, no pari escaped the fury of this sweeping blast.

No opening presented, during the stay of our royal visitors, for any thing like edifying conversation, but I believe the heat and the motion of the vessel, made some of them a little seasick, as the wind was strong and a swell of the sea tumbled in upon us. The king, however, expressed his satisfaction with the visit, and they were all much pleased with the inside of the Henry Freeling. The tide being low, our boat could only approach the edge of the reef; but the queen being barefooted, had no difficulty in paddling over the coral bottom, a few inches under water. The king preferred taking a passage in a small canoe, with a single native to manage it.

29th.—The morning proved boisterous, but we landed for an hour about the time of high water, being desirous to speak with James Watkin, not feeling easy to let an opportunity pass away without improvement, of attending the native meeting tomorrow, if it should rest with me to do so. The fleet from Haabai, having arrived since last First day, has greatly increased the number of people from the other islands. I found James Watkin ready as usual, to render me every assistance in his power, and the morning was mentioned, if it were concluded to come, and the weather did not prevent our landing. It may be the last opportunity that I shall have to see such a body of the Friendly islanders together; and such a one as could scarcely have been calculated on; and is of rare occurrence at any time, if indeed it ever took place before this season. No other motive, I trust, prompts in me a desire to avail myself of the opportunity thus placed within my reach so unexpectedly, than what is induced by that love which embraces the whole human family, and would bind all the children of men in the Lord's “bundle of life” everlasting. May the shout of a king be heard among these people, and the glorious majesty of the spiritual kingdom of our Lord and Saviour Christ, be unfolded to their understanding, by the same Almighty power which opened the heart of Lydia, in days that are over and gone, to His own praise and glory.

30th. (First day.)—The state of the weather combined with other circumstances to weigh down my mind, when looking towards attending the native meeting; and the secret prayer of my heart last evening was,—'Help, O Lord, for your great name's sake, and for the sake of Him who died, the just for the unjust, that He might bring all mankind unto You.' The morning was rough and boisterous; and there not being water enough for the boat to pass over the reef into a sheltered landing-place, seemed to throw difficulties in the way of our getting on shore. This being the position of affairs, I determined to take an arm-chair from the vessel to render the fatigue of transporting us more tolerable to the willing natives, and divide the weight more equally between several men; two of these who had been watching our movements, were seen wading towards the edge of the outer reef, as our boat approached. We were, however, at last placed safely upon the beach, without any material inconvenience to ourselves, though the task was laborious for our burden-bearers. I felt much discouraged soon after day-break, and could almost have reasoned myself into a fancied liberty to remain quietly on board; but it did not appear that I should stand acquitted, unless a firm attempt to get through was first made on my part: before leaving the vessel this gloom was measurably dispelled, and I was strengthened to press forward, and with humble resignation to bind the sacrifice as to the horns of the altar.

On account of the inadequate dimensions of the building to accommodate the thousands assembled, several hundreds were left outside; but they endeavoured to keep as near as they could to the place where the speaker is best heard. James Watkin occupied a short space of time in speaking to the people, and then left them in expectation of something from my mouth, when a general silence prevailed. It was not long before I stood up, in great weakness and fear, and told them that I felt myself to be indeed a feeble instrument in a cause so great and dignified; but they might remember, that the Lord's servants formerly, as now, had nothing of their own with which to satisfy the cravings of a hungry multitude. But when the Great Master was pleased to command a blessing, the few loaves and fishes were so multiplied, that there was much more left, after the people were fed to the full, than there had been before they began to eat. It is only, as He is pleased to qualify any one to speak in His name, and to open the understandings of them that hear, that any can be availingly benefited. “Without me you can do nothing,” said Christ; and though some may feel desirous to follow Him in the way of self-denial and the cross, yet when an hour of trial comes, such is the weakness of the flesh, that we are ready to shrink for fear of man, for fear of persecution; and are ready to deny Him, who suffered for us,—who died that we might live forever. But although without Christ we can do nothing, yet through His strength we can do all things;—through the strength of His Holy Spirit, in our inner man, we can do all things to the praise and glory of God. It is in the Holy Spirit of Christ Jesus, that we must believe; and so wait to hear His voice, and obey Him in all things. This is that heavenly Prophet, of whom Moses spoke to the children of Israel, whom the Lord their God should raise up unto them from amongst their brethren:—“A Prophet shall the Lord your God raise up unto you, from amongst your brethren, like unto me, (said Moses;)—Him shall you hear in all things; and the soul that will not hear this Prophet shall be cut off from amongst the people.” In due time this was fulfilled;—this Prophet of the Lord was raised up amongst the people,—born at Bethlehem in Judea; in whom the fulness of the God-head dwelt bodily; and of whom the holy Father testified, and said,—“This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased; hear him.” This is the Prophet whom we must hear in all things, as the children of Israel in that day heard Moses in all things; but with this difference,—Moses was only heard while in the flesh upon the earth, and this Prophet speaks from heaven, by His Holy Spirit in the soul of man. How needful then for us to wait, and to watch, and to pray, that we may hear and obey Him, who speaks unto us from heaven in righteousness, and is mighty to save the soul from sin. It is by the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, that our hearts must be cleansed and purified from every defilement: it is this that searches all things; our secret thoughts and imaginations are all laid open before it; and nothing that is unclean or impure, that works abomination, or that makes a lie, can stand before this heart-searching power of the Lord; which, as a fire, consumes all that cannot bear His righteous judgments. But if this heavenly Teacher is heard, and obeyed in all things, with meekness and resignation,—if we fear to offend or grieve this Holy Spirit of the Lord,—it will purify us even as He is pure; and it will prepare us for the reception into our hearts of the spiritual kingdom of Christ Jesus. This is the kingdom that men are commanded, above all things, first to seek;—with the sure promise of our Lord, that “all things needful should be added” unto them. What then remains to prevent mankind from receiving the kingdom of Christ Jesus, but hardness of heart and unbelief in his spiritual appearance in man. We can scarcely suppose that any will earnestly seek for that, which they do not believe can be found. Hopeless and forlorn indeed is the situation of such as these: in vain do they say, that they believe in Jesus Christ as the Saviour of the world, and that there is no salvation but by Him;—while they remain strangers to His heavenly power to cleanse their hearts from sin, for lack of believing that He is come in Spirit: therefore they know him not. It is a consideration, as affectingly awful as it is true,—that although He is the Saviour of them that believe, yet without we know and witness the power of His Holy Spirit to save us from our sins, He is no Saviour of ours: our belief is vanity, and will end in vexation of spirit;—we are not among them that believe to the saving of the soul, notwithstanding all our profession of religion before men.

This is the substance of the testimony I had to bear amongst these people, though but a part of what I had to say.—Inviting and encouraging them, above all things, to seek first and in earnest the kingdom of heaven, and the righteousness thereof,—and with desires for their present and eternal welfare, I sat down. The place was exceedingly crowded, and the people were vory solid and attentive. A number of English persons were present, probably in part from the shipping.

Spent the afternoon on board with our own people.

Eleventh Month 1st.—Believing that it would be best for me to leave here a copy of the address presented to those in authority at the Sandwich Islands, to be translated in the Tonguese language, for the kings and rulers of the Friendly Islands; the subject was this afternoon mentioned to James Watkin, who concurred in the apprehension that it would be useful to them. Under these considerations, a fair copy was drawn up by Charles, and put into the hands of James Watkin, accompanied by the following letter, which was addressed to the missionaries at the Friendly Islands.

Dear Friends,

The annexed, as will be seen on perusal, was addressed to those highest in authority upon the Sandwich Islands, and was presented, when the king and Kinau, (the female in whom the executive power is invested,) with several of the principal chiefs, were assembled together to receive it. It was translated at the time by the senior American missionary, Hiram Bingham; and they afterwards expressed a desire that it should be printed. Although its contents may be peculiarly adapted to the present state of those for whom it was originally intended, yet as the same interest dwells in my heart towards the inhabitants of the Friendly Islands, I thought no harm could arise from presenting a copy of it to Josiah Tubou and Taufaahau, the kings of Tongataboo and Haabai; as it is possible that some hints may be found applicable, (if not at the present day, in a day that is to come,) to themselves, or to those who may succeed them in authority: at any rate it exhibits a Christian principle, a standard, round which all nations may rally with safety at all times, and at every period of their existence.

I am your affectionate friend, in the bonds of the gospel—the soul's truest liberty.

Daniel Wheeler.
Henry Freeling, off Nukulofa, Tongataboo, 1st of Eleventh Month, 1836.

Chapter XXXIII.

Tongataboo—Meeting with the Foreigners—Parting Interviews with the Natives and Missionaries—Sail from the Friendly Islands—New Zealand—Anchor in the Bay of Islands—Visit the Mission Family—Native Meeting at Koua-Koua—Desolating Effects of Interaction with the Shipping.

Eleventh Month 3rd.—While on shore yesterday afternoon for exercise, we saw many fine healthy plantations of yams coming forward; but the poor natives are suffering grievously for lack of food at present, and yet they do not seem to exert themselves to procure an extra quantity of fish, which we find no difficulty in taking.

Today, sent a quantity of tracts on board the Chieftain, a London whaling vessel, having become acquainted with her captain. Got on shore in the afternoon, but the state of the tides just now renders these excursions both tedious and difficult.

Taufaahau, having accomplished his object of escorting Josiah Tubou back in safety to his own islands, sailed again with his numerous fleet very early this morning; but towards evening he was compelled to return by opposing winds and rough weather: and to be ready to put to sea again, on the first appearance of a change in the weather, he anchored his canoes in the neighbourhood of the heathen settlements, to the very great alarm of those miserable people; who now fully concluded he had returned to chastise them for the provoking and insulting conduct of which they had been guilty in the morning, when he was about to take his departure. The missionary, however, assured us that Taufaahau had no intention whatever of meddling with them. From what we saw, it is very evident that a trifling cause would at once set them all in a flame: both parties carry warlike weapons about with them. There are at present seventeen garrisons upon this island; such are the fear and suspicion on both sides, that they dare not live out of their strong holds. The heathen party in Tongataboo, although much superior in number to those who call themselves Christians, are the weaker body, in consequence of their own internal and perpetual broils, and the dreadful ravages of disease brought amongst them by the shipping; which is indeed as the “noisome pestilence, that walks in darkness,” and as “the destruction that wastes at noon-day.”

These remarks have reference to Tongataboo only: at Vavau and the other islands which compose the Hafulauhau group, and those of the Haabai, the people almost if not altogether are subject to missionary control, with their king at the head of religious affairs, nominally at any rate. It is from these islands that the heathen of Tongataboo, have every thing to fear, while Taufaahau lives: they know that he is a desperate warrior, and never fails to carry all before him, when once roused up. Josiah Tubou is a very different character, and though leaning to the missionary party, is more despised by the heathen, than feared; his power is much greater than that of Taufaahau, who being a much younger man, is very submissive and subservient to him. If Tubou inclined to go to war, the other would probably unite with him at once; and furnish strength and skill not to be resisted, which the heathen are well aware of. It seems that a number of these poor people have now gone on board the canoes of Taufaahau, that they may get to Vavau, and Lifuka, and become Christians, without risking the loss of life from their own kindred; and we are told that many of them would be glad to lead peaceable lives, but dare not join the missionaries here, for fear of their neighbours: at the same time the different tribes are imperceptibly mingling together by marriages. All these circumstances serve to diminish the strength of the heathen party, and gradually to prepare them to renounce their abominable practices.

4th.—From the swell of the sea setting directly upon the landing-place for boats, we remained on board all day; and Josiah Tubou, with his brother Abraham, spent the afternoon on board with us. I feel comfort when looking back, that the opportunity of speaking to the people last First day, was not suffered to pass over unembraced on my part. It is plain now, that if the return of another First day had been waited for, or an excuse from the state of the weather been listened to, the precious moment would have been lost forever; and instead of a peaceful retrospect, now at seasons vouchsafed in mercy to a poor unworthy creature, an accusing blot of anguish would have rested upon my mind; which the few yet remaining days of my pilgrimage would have been too short to obliterate. It was a remarkable circumstance, that so many hundreds of the natives should be brought together at Lifuka, and again at Tongataboo; with many of whom we had become acquainted, first at Vavau and its neighbourhood, and at Tongataboo. I recognised with heartfelt pleasure, Lazarus, the chief of the island of Otea, also David Afu, the chief of Haalaufulu, and others, as people dear to my best feelings. We have now been here more than a fortnight, and I do not yet see a way open for leaving the island, an event anxiously desired by some on board, on account of the exposed situation of the anchorage, when some particular winds set in. Two English vessels, and one American, have anchored off the heathen settlements, while we have been here; there the sailors can indulge their licentious habits unrestrained; but as a striking proof of the utility of missionary establishments, it is not so at Nukulofa. I desire to stand in humble resignation, as to any further proceeding here, or to leaving the place, and bending our course towards New Zealand; and I trust to be enabled to decide with clearness before we sail.

5th.—The weather being more favourable for landing, we went on shore at four o'clock p.m.; and having found my mind drawn towards the remnant of English and other white people here, I told James Watkin on his inquiring about arrangements for tomorrow, that I had nothing in view towards the natives; but to sit with the English, seemed to be my present business, if that could be brought to bear. This was readily assented to. I have felt a poor creature indeed, for the last day or two, owing perhaps to the increased heat of our vessel under deck; but the Lord can deliver, and strengthen him that has no might, either in body or mind; and can at his pleasure make quick of understanding in His fear, those that trust and hope in his mercy. May He be graciously pleased to cause the opportunity tomorrow, to be a time of visitation to some; cause the earth to tremble at His power and presence, as in days of old, when the sea saw it and fled, and Jordan was driven back; so may every thing in us, comparable to the unstable element, flee before Him; and the ever blessed truth reign over all to His glory.

6th. (First day.)—Landed about ten o'clock in the forenoon: the natives were coming from their meeting as we approached the shore: soon after this the white people assembled together. On going into the place appointed for us to meet in, I observed that James Watkin had taken a side seat, to show the people that he had no part to take in that meeting, and as no hymn book appeared in the hands of any one, it seemed as if some pains had been taken to inform them, that it would be held after the manner of the Society of Friends. I sat down near a table, and as those who attended came in, they joined in the silent sitting of the rest. We had not remained long in this exercise, before I was made sensible of that power being nigh, which alone can soften the rocky heart, and cause the earthly nature in man to bow before it; and abiding under it, I had in due time to revive amongst them the language of the patriarch Jacob, when wrestling with the angel,—“I will not let you go, except you bless me;” desiring that we might individually imitate his noble example this morning, and like him prevail, and receive that blessing of the Lord which makes truly rich, and satisfies the hungry wrestling soul with favour. It was then with me to state the true intent and meaning of our sitting together in silence before the Lord, and the excellency of waiting upon God, if we believe in the promise of the Most High God, in the new covenant of life and power,—that he would write his law in the heart, and put it in the inward parts of man; and that he would be their God, and they should be his people: and they shall no more teach every man his brother, and every man his neighbour, saying, “Know the Lord, for they shall all know me from the least of them, unto the greatest of them,” says the Lord; “for I will forgive their iniquity, and remember their sin no more.” We, therefore, desire to know the Lord for ourselves; and the only way to come to this blessed knowledge, is to obey his commands and be still. “Be still, and know that I am God: I will be exalted among the heathen; I will be exalted on the earth.” Here is the great and glorious privilege of the gospel dispensation: “the law of the spirit of life in Christ Jesus,” is written in every heart, to make free from the law of sin and death. None are left without a manifestation of the Spirit of Christ Jesus; by which all have access unto God the Father, who is a Spirit, and must be worshipped in spirit and in truth. We, therefore, in our religious meetings, have no confidence in the flesh; we do not look to man as our teacher, whose breath is in his nostrils, to assist us in the worship of Almighty God; but we wait for the influence of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, to prepare our hearts to perform this worship aright. A manifestation of this heavenly spirit of grace is mercifully given unto all men; it is “the grace of God which brings salvation, and has appeared unto all men,” teaching all men that believe in it and obey it, to deny ungodliness: even the heathen have a measure of this heavenly gift dwelling in their hearts; by which, and through which, they can worship God in spirit and in truth;—“for I will be exalted among the heathen,” says the Lord, “I will be exalted on the earth.”

Before sitting down, I told them that I did not feel at liberty to leave the island without seeing those of my own colour, to set before them the responsible station they held, and how much depended upon them and lay at their door, as examples to the surrounding natives: the superior advantages they possessed over these would be heavy in the scale of condemnation, if corresponding fruit were not brought forth. They professed to be Christians; had been brought up in Christian lands; had long had in their possession the Holy Scriptures, a blessing invaluable, for which we cannot be thankful enough: but they are a sealed book, until our understanding is opened by the same Holy Spirit, which inspired those holy men who gave them forth: even the followers of our Lord, when He was upon the earth, could not understand them, until their understandings were opened by Him. Without Him, we can do nothing. The Jews had the Scriptures; and yet they were the enemies of Him, of whom they so faithfully testify: they felt themselves secure, and thought they had in them eternal life; but what said the Prince of life,—“Search the Scriptures, for in them you think you have eternal life; and they are they which testify of me: but you will not come unto me that you might have life.” So that although they are an inestimable gift out of the divine treasury, bestowed upon man by the Holy Spirit, for his greatest outward heavenly comfort, to strengthen his hope in the promises of God, of life eternal through that Saviour, who is Christ the Lord,—and are “profitable for doctrine, for reproof, for correction, for instruction in righteousness, that the man of God may be made perfect, thoroughly furnished unto every good work;” and although they are able to make wise unto salvation,—it is only “through faith, which is in Christ Jesus,” of whom they so abundantly testify from their earliest pages. And yet, if we could repeat them from the beginning of Genesis to the end of the Revelations, they cannot save one soul, nor blot out one sin. But they direct us unto Him, unto whom all power in heaven and earth is given: who only has the words of eternal life; who is Himself that eternal life. To Him, then, we must go to be saved; in Him we must believe; to His Holy Spirit in our hearts we must turn, whose light shines in all. His long-suffering and goodness will lead us to repentance; when we look on Him, whom we have so grievously pierced, and from whose merciful reproofs we have so long revolted, and which we have disregarded with hardness of heart and unbelief in his power to save. This light in us, will not only set all our sins in order before us, that we may repent of them, and forsake them; but as we abide under the righteous judgments of the Lord's redeeming love, they will, though they may have been as scarlet and crimson, be made white as snow and wool, by the blood of the Lamb, and be remembered no more by Him, who redeems our life from destruction, and crowns us with loving-kindness and tender mercy, for His great name's sake. Behold then the blessedness of those, who know the Lord for themselves; who have come to the knowledge of the only true God, and Jesus Christ whom he has sent, by believing in the power of the Holy Spirit, and sitting under its heavenly teachings:—“this is life eternal.”

The foregoing, although but a part, contains I believe, the substance of the whole I had to say to them. We remained on shore until sunset, by which time the water had arisen high enough to allow our boat to come close to the shore.

7th.—Fixed with James Watkin to visit Fakafonua the heathen chief, tomorrow, in his own fortress of Maofanga.

8th.—Landed early, and called upon James Watkin, who accompanied Charles and myself to Maofanga; the sun was very hot, and having little or no shelter, the walk was very fatiguing, though the distance is comparatively short. On reaching the fortress, we found the entrance closely blocked up; and the keeper inside could not be prevailed upon to open to us, declaring that Fakafonua was on board the American ship, which we afterwards found to be correct. James Watkin returned with us on board; and on canvassing the subject over, he advised me not to attempt another visit. I did not however feel satisfied, or as if I had done all that might be done, without making further trial; and proposed to James Watkin our endeavouring to fix a time with the chief for my coming, if that could be accomplished, by sending a confidential person over for the special purpose of doing it. We landed in the evening, and after some inquiry, Nathan a nephew of the king, was fixed upon to arrange the business altogether.

9th.—Nathan having fulfilled his engagement, came off to us at an early hour, to say, that he had been to Maofanga, and succeeded in getting into the fortress from a bush entrance; but could obtain no tidings whatever of Fakafonua. On considering the matter I concluded to land after breakfast, and inquire whether there were any other places where we could go, which was done accordingly. James Watkin said that the natives residing to the westward, came to the meeting at Nukulofa, and that the few heathens towards the other side of the island, were scattered at distances too considerable for us to attempt to go in search of them. With me, however, there yet remained something to be done; and I believed it safest for me to tell James Watkin, that notwithstanding the trouble already incurred, and the disappointment we had witnessed, I should like to go again to Maofanga, and if our object again failed, as regarded seeing Fakafonua, I believed that I should then have done what I could. It was not a pleasant task to tell James Watkin this, as I knew he was very averse to having any thing further to do with this man: I believe, however, he saw that I was bent upon going again to Maofanga, and kindly agreed to make another trial to accomplish what I had in view.

On reaching the fortress we found the entrance blocked up as before; but James Watkin proposed that we should try another passage, more private, which he had got a hint of: this we reached at last, and found it open, but so narrow that only one person could pass through at a time. We soon met with a native who told us the chief was there; and having obtained directions to his house, a short walk brought us to the place, where we found seven or eight American sailors hanging about. It was not long before Fakafonua himself made his appearance. Having seen him on board the Henry Freeling, we were not altogether strangers to each other. I took a seat on a log at his right hand, and the natives took their stations upon the floor, with the American sailors and some others. James Watkin entered into conversation with the chief, while I endeavoured to keep my mind retired in a waiting frame.

At length I requested that Fakafonua might be told, that I had been among many of the islands in the Pacific Ocean with glad tidings of great joy to their inhabitants, and I was not satisfied to leave Tongataboo, without giving him a like opportunity with others to repent and believe the gospel: believing that it was not too late for him to be saved, if the terms of offered mercy were accepted on his part; for the Almighty Creator of man would have all to be saved, and that He had provided the means, that all might repent and live, by his Son Jesus Christ, the light of whose Holy Spirit shines in every heart. I was fully persuaded, that at times he had known something of this light in himself, which had shined upon and shown him his sinful state and condition, and which had reproved him, and convinced him of his evil deeds; and though in his wickedness and hardness of heart he had rejected and resisted the strivings of the Holy Spirit, grieved it, and wounded it, yet a day would overtake him at last when its convictions would be too heavy for him to bear. “The spirit of a man may sustain his infirmities, but a wounded spirit who can bear?” I exhorted and entreated him for some time, to repent, believe, and obey the gospel; to turn to the light of Christ Jesus in his own heart, follow it, and live; he would then no longer walk in darkness, but in the light of life. Fakafonua interrupted me once or twice to express his thanks; and when I stopped, he told James Watkin again to thank me, and said, 'I know very well it is true. I have thought of these things, and understand, and am convinced that it is better to be a Christian; but I can never be one, I am too great a sinner to be saved: I must remain as I am.' I told James Watkin to tell him, that as he knew and understood these things, his condemnation would be greater on that account; and certainly his destruction would be of himself.

James Watkin then said he thought I had better speak to the sailors, who sat and listened with great attention, I replied, 'there is no occasion for that,—they know very well.' James Watkin replied, 'he thought they did not.' 'Yes,' said I, 'there is not one of them, but knows very well, that he ought to fear God; and knows when he commits sin, and that he ought not to do it, for that which may be known of God, is manifest in man: He has showed it unto him.' Afterwards I found my mind drawn towards these men, and I was strengthened to declare the Truth among them as it is in Jesus.

We then took leave of this poor benighted heathen chief, who with his people thanked me and shook hands very kindly; and I believe we parted better friends than we met. We were offered the juice of the cocoa-nut, and the stupifying kava, both which were declined. Although nothing may come of this visit, yet it is not for me to calculate upon results, but to leave them. I felt relieved, and rejoiced that I had made the effort; and I believe that James Watkin was not sorry at having accompanied me on this errand, now that it was well over. On looking round, my way seemed now clear for leaving the island, and before reaching the mission-house, I told James Watkin and Charles, that I knew of nothing to prevent our sailing on the following day. We called upon Thomas Wellard and his wife, and found their luggage could be embarked in the afternoon, and that they had kept themselves in readiness to leave their habitation at a short notice.

We returned on board before dinner, and informed Captain Keen, that all things would be ready with us, for leaving the roads of Nukulofa tomorrow. In the afternoon we collected our linen, etc., from the shore, and took leave of James Watkin's family, he himself intending to be on board at the time of our departure. Isaackee the pilot, was agreed with to conduct us into open water, and we bade a last farewell to a mass of the poor natives, men, women and children, who had crowded to the spot of embarkation, having learned probably from the pilot, that we were about to leave their shores finally.

10th.—Our decks were crowded at an early hour with the natives, bringing vegetables and fowls, and a collection of their war clubs and other implements of destruction, which we rejoiced to take out of their hands. The morning was, for the first time since arriving at Tongataboo, calm and cloudy. It afforded, however, an opportunity for the natives to dispose of what they had, which the usual trade-wind would wholly have prevented, as they must have hurried out of the vessel on our beginning to move. James Watkin and our passengers came on board before eight o'clock; but the forenoon proving showery, and windless, there seemed no probability of our getting off to sea. James Watkin returned to the shore, intending to come off again tomorrow morning, to see us under weigh; but at three o'clock p.m., the clouds began to disperse: a signal was made quickly for the pilot, and a nimble native dispatched to the mission-house to state that we were about to sail.

By the time the last anchor was up, the parties were on board; and leaving the last of the Friendly Islands, (though not the least of them, as an object of our tender solicitude and regard,) we steered through the wide spreading reefs towards the open ocean. James Watkin accompanied us a considerable distance, until the shore of Nukulofa could be but dimly seen; but however painful the task of separating, the moment was come for it to be done. We waved to each other, while our movements could be seen in the twilight; and I believe we parted with sincere regret on both sides. If I mistake not, we can mutually acknowledge—'though lost to sight, to memory dear.' The day beginning to close upon us, and the wind continuing light, rendered it impracticable for the Henry Freeling to get completely through the passage before dark, when our faithful compass became as heretofore, the only guide remaining to us. Our pilot, who had been at the mast-head for three hours looking out for the reefs, left his post when the sun went down, wishing to be set at liberty, in order to take up his lodging upon a small island at no great distance from us, as he could not get back before morning to his own island of Tongataboo; and if he had been compelled to continue on board until we had got completely out to sea, which is the common usage, it would have been too dark for him to have found the small island, and he might have perished in his canoe, if the wind had got up strong. He told us in broken English, but very intelligible, 'Me no like go dead in canoe.' This is the same man who ran no trifling risk to gain us admittance into the heathen settlement at Mua. He was of course well paid for his useful services, and his request to leave us immediately granted. Towards ten o'clock p.m., the breeze freshening up we got nicely clear of the island of Tongataboo, and its many lurking snares; and before midnight hauled round its most western point.

11th.—Stood to the south-west, close to the wind. I stood resigned as to our destination, whether it should be New Holland or New Zealand, and endeavoured to leave it to my heavenly Father to dispose of us according to his own good pleasure; believing if it was right for us to go to New Zealand, we should be enabled to fetch it, though the wind was opposed to it at that time.

12th.—My mind is much weighed down this morning, with a load of exercise, which none about me know of; and this is not a little aggravated, by an open avowal, that nearly every one on board was in hopes we should not go to New Zealand. It was suggested to my mind by the grand adversary, that as the wind was unfavourable for New Zealand, we might safely keep away for Sydney, in New South Wales, for which it blew sufficiently free. But I was preserved from listening to this, and strengthened to conclude, that it would be time enough for me to bear up when the distance was accomplished, and no prospect remained of fetching the Bay of Islands. Thus strengthened and supported, we held on our way. Soon after this, the wind became more favourable; but the current and leeway together had set us so far to the westward, that it was deemed advisable to run still further to leeward to make sure of escaping the Pilstart's and Nicholson's shoals. This circumstance, to appearance, would almost set aside the New Zealand question altogether. When night came, our captain was so fearful of the shoals that the sails were reduced, and the head of the vessel turned again towards Tongataboo: this was mortifying, though, perhaps, the safest policy, notwithstanding the wind had now become much more favourable.

13th. (First Day.)—A fresh wind sprung up from the old trade quarter, at noon: the latitude 23° 37' south, by observation. Our sailors were collected twice in the day for devotional purposes. Today is the third anniversary of our leaving London; we reached the Henry Freeling, soon after nine o'clock p.m., at the Lower Hope in the Thames. Many have been the trials and conflicts permitted to overtake us; but abundantly more have been the mercies of the Lord since that time, overshadowing us by night and by day: and truly our strength has been proportioned to the necessity in the darkest hour of dismay. There has been no lack of any needful thing; all our needs have been abundantly supplied; and that loving-kindness which is better than life, has at seasons been eminently displayed for our comfort and consolation; causing the Lord's own work to praise Him, and enabling us to give thanks at the remembrance of his holiness; and I trust, in humble resignation and devotedness, to renew our covenant, and say,—“Not my will, O Lord, but yours be done:” if you will be with me in the way that I go, here am I a poor unworthy creature.

14th.—Beautiful weather, with the wind free. This day completed 180° of west longitude. At noon we were in i 79° 54' east longitude, latitude 25° 8' south, Cape Breton; New Zealand distant 640 miles.

16th.—Yesterday, the latitude at noon 26° 59' south. Today the wind baffling: a heavy squall and the threatening appearance of the atmosphere, with a heavy swell of the sea from the southward, brought us under double-reefed canvass; but the wind did not materially increase.

19th.—Since the 17th the weather has been rugged, and the wind so scant, that there seemed considerable doubt whether we should fetch the north Cape of New Zealand; but we still persevered in keeping close to the wind. Today the weather is more moderate, with less sea, and the wind in a slight degree, more favourable. We sensibly feel the cold, since coming a few degrees to the southward of the tropic. We trust that we shall not be forgotten by Him, who cares for the sparrows, and causes the day-spring of the morning to know his place.

21st.—Yesterday, assembled the crew for devotional purposes, both before and after noon. The weather clear and the wind gentle from south-east to east south-east. Today several birds have been seen, of kinds that indicate that land is not very far off; and in the afternoon it was rumoured to be in sight, but this could be nothing more than a fog-bank.

22nd.—In the afternoon land was discovered from the masthead, but too distant to determine, with certainty, whether it was the North Cape or not.

23rd.—The wind being light and scant for our purpose, it was noon before we got close in with the coast a few miles to windward of the North Cape. Towards evening the wind became more favourable, but there was so little of it, that we could not approach the entrance of the Bay of Islands, before the breeze died away altogether.

24th.—Becalmed until nearly noon, when a breeze sprung up from the north westward, which soon freshened, and enabled us to push for the Bay. Before six o'clock, anchored in little more than three fathoms water, on a muddy bottom, near the entrance towards Koua-Koua, after a passage of fourteen clays from Tongataboo; thus we have to acknowledge that through the lovo and mercy of Him, who upholds all things by the word of his power, we have been brought in safety to the desired haven: the Lord of Hosts is his name. Several ships under English colours are near our vessel, belonging to London and Sydney, and one American whaler. Before dark some of the principal store-keepers came on board; it appears from their statements, that an internal war is raging amongst the natives, and that some of the missionary stations have been totally destroyed, in the neighbourhood of the Bay of Plenty; and the country around laid waste. I find that James Stack, a missionary with whom I was acquainted in England, had been compelled to fly, (with his wife, who was then on a bed of weakness,) from the scene of blood and carnage to this neighbourhood. We learnt from a person, lately arrived from Sydney, that our dear friends James Backhouse and George W. Walker were in that neighbourhood a few weeks ago. A few of the natives have been on board, but their barbarous and filthy appearance is enough to discourage any stranger; perhaps, these may not be a fair specimen, because of their interaction with civilized nations, and their acquaintance with rum.

25th.—In the morning five or six natives came off, but with the exception of a hog, they had nothing to sell worth purchasing. Two of them appeared to be much out of health with the prevalent influenza, which, it is said, has been very general. We intended to give each of them a dose of salts; the first who tried them, drank nearly the contents of a tumbler glass, but the other before venturing, would taste only what his comrade had been drinking, and was quite satisfied with what was remaining at the bottom of the glass without wanting a further quantity. They seemed desirous to possess a steel pen, and one was given to each, with which they seemed pleased. They appear to suffer very sensibly from the cold, as if a large dirty Witney blanket, worn loosely about the shoulders and body was insufficient for them. Before noon the Post-master Gilbert Maer came on board; and very kindly offered to conduct us to the resident missionary at the station of Paihia, engaging to call for us in his own boat, which he did accordingly: accompanied by our passengers we set out, and landed opposite to the missionary establishment, consisting of several good houses, occupied by its members, also one place of worship: this belongs to the Church Mission. The senior and only ordained minister at this place, Henry Williams, being from home, endeavouring to restore peace among the contending tribes to the southward, we were conducted to the habitation of the lay minister, Charles Baker: we were kindly received by his wife, who was engaged amidst a large family, one member of which was not more than a year old. Before tea was finished, our host arrived, and confirmed the kind treatment of his wife, in a friendly manner: when the repast was over, Charles Baker took me into his study, when the object of my visit was fully entered into, and an offer made me of all the assistance in his power. After attentively reading my certificates, he said, he hailed me as a minister of the gospel, and a father, etc. Before leaving Paihia, we visited for a short interval the wife of the absent missionary, Henry Williams, formerly a lieutenant in the British navy: they have ten children. We were much gratified with this family. It proved a very dark and rainy night, but we got well on board.

26th.—In the forenoon Charles Baker came on board, and while with us proposed our calling upon the British resident, James Busby: having known his father when at Sydney, this offer was gladly accepted. James Busby is the only person legally authorized to act for the British government here; but as he is wholly destitute of power, instead of being recognized as Consul, he is styled the British resident; as such, a visit was due to him, as well as on account of his being our countryman. We were kindly received, and remained several hours under his roof, before he would permit us to leave him. His wife and children are now on a visit at Sydney. My Charles having a serious pain in the side, owing, perhaps, to the wetness of the preceding evening, remained on board through the day; but on my return to him in the evening I found him much recruited. Finding, while with Charles Baker, that there would be on the morrow a good opportunity to visit one of the native congregations, and that a young man, who is a competent interpreter, would be furnished with a well-manned roomy boat, I did not feel satisfied to let the opportunity pass away without availing myself of it. The prospect of moving, as it were, upon new and untried ground felt indeed weighty, but I was enabled to cast my burden upon the Lord; for truly he has hitherto sustained me, and borne up my head amidst the floods of many waters.

27th. (First Day.)—We left the Henry Freeling about six o'clock a.m., in a boat belonging to the mission, which had arrived with our interpreter. It had lightened and rained most of the night, and the morning had every appearance of wet weather. It would have been a relief to me, if my Charles could have been satisfied to remain on board, but I did not like to urge it upon him, being aware that he was desirous of attending the meeting: though I rather dreaded the consequences if he got wet, and thought if the rain kept off until after the meeting, and we had dry weather to return to our seats in the boat again, it was all I could desire. After rowing about two hours and a half, we reached the point of destination at Koua-Koua, and found on our arrival at the building, that the customary service was going forward, conducted by a native teacher: he was at the moment, as we were informed, reading the nineteenth chapter of Matthew: we went quietly in, and sat down near a table. This was a rough building, lately erected, with a few seats for the females only. When the native preacher had finished, William Colenzo explained to the people the cause of our visit, which we could ascertain by the names of the different islands in the Pacific which he mentioned, to enable them the better to understand its real object. We had not agreed on any particular mode of proceeding; but when a suitable time arrived, I stood up by his side, leaving the event to my never failing heavenly Helper. After a solemn pause, I warned the people of the necessity of our humbling ourselves under the mighty hand of God, the judge of the whole earth, whom they had professedly met together to worship. “God is a spirit,” and without the aid of his Holy Spirit, we cannot draw nigh unto Him. How can we worship Him in spirit and in truth, without the help and assistance of the Holy Spirit of truth, when we cannot of ourselves think a good thought, or restrain an evil one. After enlarging on the nature of true spiritual worship, I had to turn them to the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus—the light of truth which shines in every heart. My heart was greatly enlarged on this occasion, though a very poor empty creature on going into the meeting.

When the meeting was over, most if not all the people, came about us to shake hands, which though somewhat irksome to my exhausted frame, was much to be preferred to the practice common among the New Zealanders,—of rubbing noses together; of which we only witnessed a few specimens among themselves. I felt unwell in the morning, before leaving the vessel, and much cast down; but was now greatly relieved, though pain still continued in my head. The rain kept off until we had got through the coarse herbage and rushy plants on our way back from the meeting; but we had no sooner resumed our seats in the boat than it began to drop, and soon fell smartly: we were, however, well prepared for it, so as to keep ourselves comfortably dry over head, and about the seats of the boat. The Lord sustained me through all this day, and magnified his own name among the people at the meeting. It was indeed a day which the Lord had made memorable to myself, for divine favour; and on which I completed my sixty-fifth year. Thus is the thread of my life lengthened out; and O! says my soul, that it may be to the praise and glory of Him, who has so marvellously redeemed it from destruction, and crowned me with loving-kindness and tender mercies. How can I sufficiently declare unto others, what has been done for myself; that they also may come to taste and see for themselves His goodness and His love; and be able to say from heart-felt living experience, “mercy and truth have met together, righteousness and peace have kissed each other!”

In a letter to a friend in England written from the Bay of Islands some weeks afterwards, the following passages occur:—

The day my sixty-fifth year was completed, I was strengthened to proclaim the glad tidings of the gospel, for the first time, to a body of New Zealanders at the Koua-Koua station, through an excellent interpreter, to my own peace, and I trust the exaltation of the dear Redeemer's kingdom in the hearts of the people. My soul rejoices in that I have lived to this time, and to see this day, though truly life is only desirable, as we are found living “unto Him who died for us, and rose again.” And although bound by earth's tenderest and strongest tie, that of a precious family, whose present and eternal welfare claims our earnest prayer and anxious thought; yet, without we are living “unto Him who died for us,” our prayer and solicitude are all unavailing; because if we are not living unto Him, he lives not in us; and therefore we receive not, because we ask amiss, in our own way and will of self, and not in His name, His power, and for His sake, who died for us and rose again.

“Verily, verily, I say unto you, he that believes on me, the works that I do, shall he do also; and greater works than these shall he, do, because I go unto my Father.” John xiv. 12. In the first place, have we believed in the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, and witnessed it to work mightily in us! Have we known those great works fulfilled in us, which are promised to him that believes in the Son, when He shall have gone to the Father? Have we faithfully resisted all the temptations of the enemy, and overcome, as Christ overcame? The blessed Saviour of the world “was in all points tempted like as we are, yet without sin.” “He knew no sin, though made to be sin for us.” And if we, who are born in sin, and have lived in sin, shall endure temptations at all points, and overcome as He overcame, the works that He did, we shall have done also, and shall have witnessed our part of the greater works that should be done; not in our own strength, or might, or power, but through believing in Christ, in the power of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus in our hearts, strengthening our inner man “unto all patience and long suffering, with joyfulness,” to resist every temptation of the enemy, being stedfast in the faith that works by love and overcomes. “The works that I do shall he do also, and greater works than these shall he do, because,” said Christ, “I go unto my Father.” After his precious blood was shed for poor, lost, sinful man, He “ascended on high” to his heavenly Father, “led captivity captive,” and “received gifts for men; yes, for the rebellious also,—that the Lord God might dwell amongst them:” and it is through these inestimable gifts, received of the Father, that these great works in us are accomplished. “The Comforter, which is the Holy Spirit,” is thus sent by the Father in the name of Him who said, “because I go unto my Father.” Now if we have received this promised Comforter in the name of Jesus, let us “pray without ceasing:” this name is the power and efficacy of prayer, and what we ask in this name, we shall receive,—“because I go unto my Father; and whatsoever you shall ask in my name, that will I do, that the Father may be glorified in the Son. If you shall ask any thing in my name, I will do it.”

28th.—The weather rough, and to us cold. Some of the natives came on board in the afternoon. Being desirous of purchasing a canoe paddle as a specimen, I was very soon offered one for a shilling. Having no money about me I went below, and found some quarter dollars, of rather more value than a shilling each. One of these quarter dollars was given, and a paddle received in return; but the man perceiving that I had still a quarter dollar left, made signs that he wished to have that also. I supposed for another of his paddles, which he held in his hand; but on giving him the money, and taking hold of the paddle at the same time, with a stern countenance he refused to let me have it,—keeping both the quarter dollars for one paddle only. I thought it would not be well to suffer this imposition, and demanded one of my quarter dollars back again; but he persisted in retaining both. The other paddle was then returned to him, which he took into his hand, and I then insisted by signs on having my money back again, and the bargain made altogether void. He hesitated for some time; but seeing that I was determined to carry it through, at last returned me the money, and we parted without any further trafficking. I have no doubt that he will behave in a more reasonable manner when he comes again. Upon inquiry, I found that nothing will do with these people, but firm decided measures; they are daring, ferocious, and insulting if they think that a stranger is afraid of them, and are sometimes prompted to commit outrages; but calmness, and steady firmness generally prevail with them.

29th.—Breakfasted early, and proceeded to the missionary station at Paihia, where taking in Charles Baker, we pursued our route to Tepuna, where the first missionary station was originally established. Here we saw John King, one of the first missionaries that trod the shores of New Zealand, but now so far advanced in years, as to be considered at liberty from the general work. He has a family of ten children; the two oldest sons are cultivating land on their own account. The natives now surviving, are so few, and widely scattered, that Tepuna is now scarcely considered one of the stations. Our visit did not seem to amount to much more than just seeing the family, by whom we were kindly received and entertained. They appear to have taken up their residence here for life. At one time, a considerable congregation used to assemble, but the whole is now laid waste, and the natives, owing to war and other circumstances, seem swept off the soil. By the wreck of the establishment now remaining, it is obvious that this station, at one period, must have been an important one. We returned on board by six o'clock p.m. Before parting with this ancient missionary, he asked me, if I had with me, No Cross, No Crown, of which I thought we had a copy: as he seemed desirous to see this book, from a former knowledge of it, care was taken to forward the volume, the receipt of which was afterwards gratefully acknowledged.

Tomorrow we expect to go to Korarareka, but are a little apprehensive from every appearance at present, that this will turn to small account. Today, sent a parcel of tracts on board the Nimrod whaler, of Sydney, and the American ship Martha, of Nantucket, also a whaling vessel. Arrived, the Diana South Sea whaler, from London in sixteen weeks.

30th.—The day being cold and showery, and there being no prospect of any opportunity of speaking to the people, I seem unwilling to run any risk by going to Korarareka, merely to look at the place, which is all that the journey holds out.

This afternoon a large ship beat into the bay; her name not yet ascertained. The pleasure formerly arising, on the first glance of a vessel, more especially when under the flag of our own nation, is now superseded by feelings bordering upon disgust, from a knowledge of the accumulated weight of sin and wretchedness they are introducing amongst this already depraved and degraded race of barbarous natives; who, like those of all the isles we have heretofore visited, with one solitary exception, are rapidly wasting from the face of the earth, by loathsome disease brought amongst them, and renewed again and again, by these circulating mediums of evil. In this dreadful picture, the noble natives of the Friendly Islands are not included, except at some of the heathen settlements at Tongataboo. At the other islands of that group, the interaction with shipping has been but small hitherto; but it is greatly to be feared that this evil is on the increase.

The majority of the people of England, and that of the most virtuous part of the community at home, little know the ravages their own countrymen are making in these distant parts of the world, nor can they possibly estimate the depth of the misery, suffering and aggravated distress they are inflicting upon these unhappy and helpless islanders. I have no doubt that there are many who, if they could see what we have seen, would wash their hands of the guilt of partaking of luxuries, and even of supposed necessaries of life, furnished from distant and foreign climes through such a channel; much less be found deriving a profit through the exertions of these agents of Satan, who are thus extensively and destructively contributing to afflict the human race wherever they go. I would say to all, individually, who love the Lord Jesus in sincerity, and are openly professing to follow Him before men,—“cry aloud, spare not, lift up your voice like a trumpet,” and make known the transgression of the people, and the magnitude of their sin. “Let every one that names the name of Christ depart from iniquity for the Lord himself will assuredly plead the cause of the afflicted and helpless,—He will hear the voice of their weeping,—He will regard their supplication,—He will receive their prayer. When going last First day to the meeting at Koua-Koua, we met a native taking his wife or daughter in his canoe, to one of the ships. Our young friend and interpreter remonstrated earnestly with him, and endeavoured to dissuade him from his dreadful purpose, but it was all in vain, the man pursued his wretched and miserable errand to the bay. The chiefs are the principal contractors between the parties, and reap the reward of iniquity, which, though comparatively small, is sufficient to induce these miserable people to continue their infamous and abhorrent traffic, which is regularly systematised through the bay: a few hours only elapse, after the arrival of a vessel, before she is amply furnished with these poor devoted victims.

Twelfth Month 1st.—In the forenoon we sat together as usual, and were favoured to feel a degree of strength sufficient to turn the battle to the gate, and check the torrent of dissipating thought, that prevents the sacrifice from arising, which is acceptable only, when offered in spiritual purity. In the afternoon went to the mission-house at Paihia; while there, Henry Bobart, a missionary and an ordained minister of the Church of England arrived, sent apparently on purpose to conduct us to the Waimate settlement. The fatigue of this journey, though considerable, would shrink into nothingness, if any thing bordering upon certainty might be looked for, of an opportunity being realised for the exaltation of the dear Redeemer's kingdom among the people; but from what we have already witnessed, this place is more an establishment of missionaries and their families, than of a body of seriously disposed natives. It will be cause of rejoicing if it proves otherwise; but without going over the ground, the retrospect at a future day may be darkened with gloom, from a consciousness of not having done all in my power to serve the best of Masters, in the best of causes,—by losing an opportunity which can never be regained, of declaring Christ in man, by His Holy Spirit, the hope of glory, to these affectingly benighted islanders,—alike with others, the objects of the love of God, and part of that inheritance purchased by the Saviour's precious blood.

Chapter XXXIV.

New Zealand—Visit to the Mission-Station at Waimate—War Among the Natives—Meeting with the Mission Families—Distribution of Tracts—Native Meetings at Korarareka—Address to the Missionaries—Sail from the Bay of Islands—Remarks on the Character of the New Zealanders—Anchor Off Sydney—Religious Engagements There—Return to England.

Twelfth Month 2nd.—Spent the forenoon on board, and the afternoon at James Busby's with Charles Baker, and three others of the missionary establishment. James Busby is an amiable man, upright in all his dealings with the people; and decidedly desirous of promoting in others that which he conceives to be the duty of man. Men of his general character are greatly needed to improve the present state of things, as regards the best interests of the natives; while the bad example of licentious foreigners might be checked, and their influence to a considerable extent diminished.

3rd.—At eight o'clock a.m., reached the station at Paihia, and found that the absent missionary, and senior of the establishment, Henry Williams, had returned to his family. He had been to the southward to endeavour to persuade the hostile tribes, who are butchering and devouring one another in a dreadful manner, to desist and listen to terms of peace. He reports that they are determined to persevere in the contest; and though he has heretofore been successful in restoring peace among them, they now turn a deaf ear to every proposition which he made to them. More than six hundred of these poor creatures have been slaughtered; and some of the missionary stations in those parts are entirely broken up for the present. One of their houses had been destroyed, some of the families stripped of every thing, and others had taken refuge in flight. Henry Williams brought with him a boy, whose sister had been murdered in a recent struggle of the contending parties.

On leaving Henry Williams and his family, we proceeded towards Keri-Keri, in a boat well manned by natives belonging to the mission, having sent our own boat and crew back to the vessel from Paihia. We reached the station of Keri-Keri about noon, and were kindly received by James Kemp and his wife: he is the principal resident missionary there. This family came originally from Wymondham, in Norfolk. Just after our arrival, a messenger appeared with a note to Henry Bobart, our conductor, from Waimate, the object of which was to prevent our coming forward, until Second day, on account of indisposition in one of the families, as the invalid would, no doubt, then be recruited. We consequently remained at KeriKeri, and were invited to attend their place of worship, next morning, the 4th instant; this I did not like to shrink from, however painful; although there was nothing before the view of my mind, beyond the testimony, which we, as a Society, have to bear, against form without life and power, in the will of man. I think there were not ten adult natives male and female; nor as many children present, and these belong to the household department of the missionaries: the Europeans, who were on a raised platform, at the other end of the building, were probably twice as numerous as the natives.

5th.—A note arrived from Waimate, stating, that if the weather cleared up, a cart should meet us on the way; but the road was so slippery, the soil being clay, and the horses wholly without shoes, that with the present rain, the steep hills would be difficult and dangerous to travel over. I preferred going on foot to horseback, under all the attending circumstances; but Henry Bobart and Charles rode part of the way, and then gave up the horses to native boys, and travelled on foot with me. The rain commenced again before we had proceeded far, and increased after noon-tide of the day; and having to pass through much fern, and high coarse grass, procured us a larger share of wet than the rain which actually descended. We were five hours performing the journey, as from the state of the roads and lameness, I could only proceed at a crawling pace. Just as we began the last long hill, when my strength was nearly exhausted, and breathing difficult, we met the principal missionary William Williams, who (having been formerly a medical man,) anticipating my situation from what he had heard of my age, brought with him a sandwich, etc. I told him that a friend in need was a friend indeed. On the strength of this, and with frequent stops to rest and recover my breath, I was enabled to reach the summit of the hill, and enter Waimate. Every accommodation within the reach of William Williams and his wife, was cheerfully afforded us; but the greater part of our damp clothes we were forced to keep on. In this place we found a well-conducted family, and a peaceful and quiet abode. When invited to the family devotion in the evening, we entered a large room, where thirty boys were assembled, the children of the missionaries; but such was the quiet order of the establishment, I did not know they were in the house till that time, nor that the house was a school, although we had then been three hours under its roof.

6th.—Rested little during the night, but rose early to join the family before breakfast, and remained in the house most of the day, on account of my lameness; and the weather continuing so wet, the garden walks served only as channels to carry off the superfluous water from the surface of the neighbourhood.

7th.—The weather still showery, but fine at intervals. Had an opportunity of seeing the manner in which the natives prepare the fern root, at present the principal article of their food. This root has an astringent property, and is admirably calculated to counterbalance the effects of fish and bad potatoes. Although well beaten after being roasted, it still retains a strong fibre, which is separated from the more pulpy substance in the chewing, and thrown away by the eater. It requires good teeth to obtain sufficient support from it.

9th.—Yesterday, my lameness but little gone off, and no opening presenting for religious service, my situation altogether required continued exercise of faith and patience; the weather was too unsettled to undertake the journey back to Keri-Keri. This morning, the state of the weather was more promising. Before breakfast, it crossed my mind, that it was not improbable a proposal would be held out, that if we stayed over next First day, an opportunity would be afforded for seeing the people collected: after breakfast, I mentioned to our host, that as the weather appeared more favourable, we should be thinking about returning to the Bay of Islands. The anticipated proposal, however, was immediately drawn forth, for us to remain over First day, to see the natives collected. I then stated, that we left the vessel unprepared for so lengthened a visit, but as this offer was now made, I did not dare to run away from it, acknowledging at the same time, that our clean linen was exhausted. This difficulty was soon surmounted by our hostess, who insisted upon getting every thing we had immediately washed. At nine o'clock, being informed that a considerable number of the natives would be collected from a distance, who would not be present on First day, it seemed safest for me to attend on the occasion. We repaired to the building pointed out, and a goodly number soon collected in the place. Finding that the manner of conducting the meeting was wholly left to my disposal, we settled down into silence, until I was strengthened to declare amongst them, in an encouraging manner, the truths of the everlasting gospel. I had to turn them inward to the true minister of the sanctuary, and of the true tabernacle, which the Lord has pitched and not man; who teaches as never man taught, and speaks as never man spoke, by the Holy Spirit, in the hearts of the children of men the world over. There were some tender people present: the Lord's power was over us, and my heart rejoiced.

10th.—The weather being much improved, I was enabled to take what exercise I could bear without retarding the cure of my lameness. Late in the afternoon, William Williams informed me that the usual meeting of the whole establishment of missionaries and their families would be held in the evening, querying whether I could not join them. I said but little in return, but in a while found that I must avail myself of this opportunity, and at a suitable interval told William Williams that I should like to have a little time afforded me at that meeting; and knowing their mode of conducting these meetings, I mentioned as the best time, the interval after the chapter in the Testament had been read. He directly asked, if I wished that any chapter in particular should be selected; I replied in the negative, saying, it would make no difference with me. In due time the meeting commenced, when individuals were fixed upon by them and named to lead the first and second prayer; when these were gone through, a hymn was sung as usual, and then the twentieth chapter of the Revelation was read by William Williams himself. When this was concluded, we dropped into silence, no doubt, to the surprise of many, as but few could have come to the knowledge of the request which I had made, from the shortness of the intervening space of time. After a solemn pause, I stood up with the words of the beloved disciple, when on the Isle of Patmos, in the day of the Lord's power and presence in spirit, for the word of God and the testimony of the Lord Jesus;—“Unto Him that loved us, and washed us from our sins in his own blood, and has made us kings and priests unto God and his Father; to Him be glory and dominion forever and ever, Amen;”—declaring that this language was what I desired they might be all enabled to adopt from their own blessed experience; and proclaiming amongst them the glory of the gospel day,—“When the earth shall be filled with the knowledge of the Lord, as the waters cover the sea.” I had to show the indispensable necessity of our possessing the true faith of the gospel, once delivered to the saints, and still delivered to all true believers in the spiritual appearance of its only Author and Finisher, in the heart of man at this day; which faith works by love, purifies the heart, and gives the victory over sin, and the evil propensities of human nature. This is the faith of the Son of God, who loved us and gave himself for us; and is only bestowed on the simple, humble, child-like, and obedient followers of the lowly Jesus, in the way of self-denial and the daily cross; these henceforth live not unto themselves, but unto Him who died for them and rose again. The dear children were directed to hearken to that voice which says, “I love them that love me, and they that seek me early shall find me.” I had for some time to wade, as it were, against wind and tide; but eventually it proved a solid opportunity: the goodliness of man was laid low, as in dust and ashes, before the power of an endless life.

11th. (First-day.)—Since last Sixth day morning, way has opened in the minds of those about us, in a remarkable manner, as if the ever-blessed Master had directed our steps to a place, where He himself intended to come, in his own appointed time, in condescending mercy to a poor, way-worn, unprofitable servant. It was now proposed by William Williams, that I should attend their place of public worship, and after the customary service was gone through in the New Zealand language, according to their prescribed forms; he said, 'if you have a word for the people, I will interpret for you.' This was more than I had looked for, or dared to hope, but a few days ago. Although not exactly accordant with my own views, or if I might have chosen for myself, what I should have proposed; yet I have of late, I think, learned to be willing almost to become all things, and to submit to all things, however humiliating to the creaturely part, that would lead to an opening for me to proclaim to others the glad tidings of salvation, through a Saviour's love. At the proper time, we accompanied William Williams and family to the place of worship. That I might not be at a loss, he said, when they had gone through their part, he would come and conduct me to the proper place in front of the people, which was raised higher than the platform to assist the speaker's voice. We sat on one side of the congregation, on a low form, attracting the attention of many, by retaining our seats, while all, but ourselves, stood, or knelt, as occasion required.

When all was gone through, William Williams threw aside his surplice, and fetched me to the appointed spot, where we stood together in silence; until I reminded the people, that we were in the presence of Him, without whose knowledge a sparrow cannot fall to the ground: but, though heaven is his throne, and the earth his footstool, yet to this man will he look, even unto Him that is poor, and of a contrite spirit, and who trembles at the word of his power. I had largely to testify of the love of God, as it is in Christ Jesus, and to turn the attention of the people to the light of His unspeakable gift, which shines in every heart; who once in a body of flesh spoke to man upon the earth, but now speaks from heaven, by the Holy Spirit; and to all that believe in it, and obey it, it is the power of God unto salvation. The countenances of some of these dear people spoke louder than words, that they had fallen upon the stone of Israel,—their brokenness could not be hid; to such, the message of everlasting love flowed freely, and I humbly trust, was as a shower upon the thirsty soil. It was an open and relieving season:—it was the Lord's doing, and, I believe, marvellous in the eyes of some present. There were several European families, besides those of artizans, attached one way or other to the mission; which, with the boys' school and the natives of the surrounding neighbourhood, formed a considerable body of the people: but the praise was His alone, who wrought the work; and surely some of these were constrained to render unto Him of his due. In the afternoon we attended the meeting again, but my lips were closed up: it afterwards appeared that some were looking for words, and were disappointed.

12th.—Before getting up this morning, I found there was something gathering upon my mind towards the children in the school; and knowing that the whole family would be collected together at seven o'clock, I thought it best to speak with William Williams, without loss of time. Meeting him soon after, I told him that I wished to have a little time in the course of their usual family devotion that morning, mentioning the opportunity after the chapter had been read, as most likely to answer my purpose, and not to interfere with them;—for this, he readily made way. As the whole company are accustomed to kneel down at the conclusion of the chapter, I thought there might be a little unsettlement on this account, particularly as the boys knew not of the alteration; however, with a simple motion of the master's hand, all remained in stillness. After sitting silent awhile, I revived our Lord's expressions,—“Herein is my Father glorified, that you bear much fruit; so shall you be my disciples,”—which were spoken to his immediate followers, when comparing himself and them to the vine and its branches, so beautifully illustrative and instructive:—“As a branch cannot bear fruit, except it abide in the vine, no more can you except you abide in me. He that abides in me, and I in him, the same brings forth much fruit; for without me you can do nothing.” How then can we without Him glorify the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, or exhibit in the sight of others that heavenly badge, which designates his true disciples. I had, also, to remind the younger branches present, of their privileges and advantages, far above the lot of many, in being placed under such care, in a situation so guarded; where every thing is conducted for the promotion of their best welfare, and governed by the law of love and kindness: having the Holy Scriptures read to them daily, which point to the Saviour, from their earliest pages, by holy promises and prophecies, which were fulfilled in the fulness of time, to every jot and tittle; that through patience and comfort of them we might have hope;—which are also able to make wise unto salvation, through faith which is in Christ Jesus; and yet they cannot be understood without the assistance of the same Holy Spirit, which inspired the holy men that gave them forth. We can know nothing of the things which belong unto God the Father, but through the Holy Spirit of his Son. And although all are not called to be apostles, or prophets, or teachers, or workers of miracles, yet we are called to glory and to virtue, with a high and holy calling; and to show forth the praises of Him, who has called us out of darkness into His marvellous light, by bringing forth the fruits of love, joy, peace, long-suffering, gentleness, goodness, faith, meekness, temperance, wrought by the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, in our hearts. After bidding them an affectionate farewell in the Lord, I sat down.

After breakfast, preparation was made for our departure; but from one cause or other, this was delayed until near noon. During this interval, I called to see the wife of one of the missionaries, who had long been an invalid, but is now considered in a state of convalescence. It arose in my mind to tell her, that it is by these things we live, and by this, is the life of the spirit, which inherits the kingdom; and which retains in meekness and lowliness, as it is concerned to pray always with all prayer and supplication, watching thereunto. Henry Hobart and W. R. Wade, accompanied my son Charles on horseback, but a cart being provided on account of my lameness, I was conveyed in it a great part of the way. We reached Keri-Keri by five o'clock; and having nothing to detain us there, proceeded towards the Bay of Islands, as soon as a boat could be got ready: we were favoured to reach the vessel soon after ten o'clock p.m., and to find all well on board, which was cause of thankfulness on my part, as the neighbourhood of the Bay is a very dissipated and wicked place. We had been absent ten days.

17th.—Since returning from Waimate, and getting well rested, I have nearly got rid of my lameness. In the day-time we have been engaged in selecting school materials, for the use of the native children, from the stock presented to us by the British and Foreign School Society in London; also a variety of religious and temperance tracts, with clothing for the native children, to a considerable extent; these we conveyed to the station at Paihia in the evening. On Fifth day we sat down together in our usual way, and were favoured to get into quiet. For some days I have been waiting to see what was likely to open for me, in the line of duty, and now find that the minds of some in this neighbourhood have been turned towards me, who have it in their power to lend a hand of help, to forward the work in which I am engaged.

This morning, Charles Baker came off to say, that there would be an opening for my going to Korarareka tomorrow to attend the native meeting; and that afterwards, there would be a meeting held for the English residents in this neighbourhood. He also said, that Henry Williams and himself had concluded to prepare a notice, stating that a member of the Society of Friends would be there, perhaps mentioning my name, and would give them an address. To avail myself of the opportunity of attending these meetings was a duty from which I was not satisfied to shrink; but I could not agree to the notice without its being worded in such a manner, that none would be disappointed, if I should have nothing to say to them. He said, the notice was so qualified, that that would be fully understood by all parties.

18th. (First day.)—Charles Baker came on board in the forenoon, and we proceeded with him up the bay, and landed at Korarareka. A considerable time was then occupied in going round to the different huts, (of the natives,) to rouse them up and persuade them to attend the meeting. I could perceive that Charles Baker availed himself of the circumstance of my having been among the islands in the South Seas, with the glad tidings of the gospel; when one of the chiefs immediately asked, 'if the people of those islands had listened.' I am not aware of the reply of our interpreter to this question, though we fully understood the sort of conversation going forward, by the names of the different islands that were mentioned; but the chief who was then lying on the ground, wrapped in a large Witney blanket, seemed determined to attend the meeting, though not in the habit of so doing, and quickly starting up retired into his hut,—but soon made his appearance again, dressed in European clothing, and was about the first man to go into the meeting, when the bell rang. Charles Baker occupied a short time with them in the native language; but they came in, in such a straggling, careless manner, that they had scarcely all assembled before he had finished. The number altogether was very small; but the love of the gospel flowed towards them, as numbered among those for whom the Saviour died, and rose again, that they might live. The truths of the gospel were sounded among them; and they were invited to accept the terms of salvation then proclaimed,—“Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ, and be saved.” They were directed to turn inward to the true light, “that enlightens every man that comes into the world;” for this light is Christ, the light of the world, and the Saviour of the world, who by His Holy Spirit, shines in every heart. In this light they must be willing to believe, which would not only show them their sins, but if these were forsaken and repented of, would also save them from their sins. With more words they were exhorted and entreated to repent, believe, and obey. The people were very attentive and solid: may the Lord soften their hearts, and incline them to ponder the things which they heard spoken. The interval was short, after this meeting concluded, before that for the English residents was to begin. We dined upon such eatables as we brought with us in our pockets, and distributed what we could spare, to the boat's crew of natives; but we were not in a neighbourhood where a drink of water could be readily procured, before the people began to gather; who now appeared in numbers far greater than had been contemplated. The families which had attended the missionary establishment at Paihia in the forenoon, now crossed the bay in their boats to this meeting, amounting, with some well-disposed persons from the shipping, and others perhaps prompted by curiosity, to about seventy persons.

While Charles Baker went through what he considered himself bound to perform, I sat more than half-an-hour, but never under a feeling more destitute and more sensible of weakness and inability; and yet the present appeared as an opportunity afforded, to declare that the Son of God is come into the hearts of all true believers, and in boundless love and mercy is still standing and knocking at the door of the hearts of all: that to those who are willing to hear His voice, open unto Him, and receive His Holy Spirit, He will come in unto them; and if His purifying and cleansing operations are patiently submitted to, with full belief in His power to save,—their sins, though many, if repented of, will be purged away through His blood, and remembered no more. Of this, I had largely to testify, as no new doctrine, but an incontrovertible, established truth; having holy writ for its author without us, and an evidence which lives and abides forever, within us, even in our own hearts; for “he that has the Son of God, has the witness in himself,”—His law is written in the heart;—the law of the spirit of life in Christ Jesus, which makes free from the law of sin and death. The necessity was urged of a serious examination being entered into individually to ascertain whether we really know the law written in our hearts,—the law of the spirit of life in Christ Jesus,—the faithful witness against sin and transgression; these keep the soul of man in darkness and in death: but he that has the Son of God has life, and he that has not the Son of God has not life, but the wrath of God abides on him. We were favoured with a solemn season together, though the opportunity was brought about in an unusual manner, and agreed upon in the first place without my knowledge, or any suggestion of mine.

25th. (First day.)—On Fifth day last, we had a visit from Nathaniel Turner, the senior Wesleyan missionary at Hokianga, with whom I became acquainted at Hobart Town in 1834. From all we have seen, New Zealand is at present a barren soil, where religion does not thrive. Without any previous knowledge of the real state of things at Hokianga, I never saw my way to make an attempt to visit its neighbourhood, either by sea or land. Nathaniel Turner said that the state of the road is so bad at this time, that he believed I could not, at my age, accomplish a journey there; but that they should be glad to welcome us, if it could be done. I am fully aware that the undertaking would be attended with difficulty and fatigue; but if I felt the same inducement to go there, which has hitherto enabled me, as it were “to run through a troop” of difficulties, “and leap over a wall” of opposition, all the statements we have had of the difficulties by land, and the danger by sea, should not deter me from endeavouring to reach it.

Having been invited to attend a meeting to be held this evening, by the whole of the members of the mission at Paihia, at the house of Henry Williams; and believing it best for me to be there, we landed in time to take tea with the family. When the meeting was gathering, Henry Williams asked me if I would like to read a chapter in the Bible. I declined the offer, at the same time requesting that a little time might be afforded me when the reading was over; adding, that if I had any thing to say to them, they should have it. The chapter had not been long finished before I stood up, which produced a general silence. And after referring to the affecting example of the dear Son of God, as set forth in the language of inspiration,—“Lo, I come to do your will, O God,” I told them that I was among them in the bonds of the gospel, and was desirous of being found in the counsel of this will, which is ever excellent; and I stood resigned to minister in the ability which might be afforded, and hoped to be faithful thereunto on the present occasion: declaring, that it is only those that do the will of the Father, that shall know of the doctrine of the Son. His doctrine shall descend as the dew, and as the small rain upon the tender herb, upon those that do the Father's will: they shall inherit substance, eternal substance,—the living and substantial truth, pure and undefiled, “as it is in Jesus;”—truth in the inward parts, which the Lord desires. Such are the Lord's children, and compose His church on earth; they are all taught of Him: “in righteousness shall they be established, and great shall be their peace.” “This is the heritage of the servants of the Lord, and their righteousness is of me, says the Lord.” There is no way of becoming of this blessed number, but by a knowledge of the doctrine of the Son, our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ. “This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased; hear him.” This is the will of God the Father; and those who are faithful in doing this, shall assuredly be taught of the Son: they shall know of His doctrine. In this way I was engaged to turn the minds of all present, to the teaching of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, which would lead them safely along through time, and sustain them in a boundless eternity. This appeared to be well received: a solemn feeling spread over us, under which we separated.

31st.—Most of the week has been employed in preparing documents for England, a vessel being nearly ready to sail from hence. On Fifth day our little meeting was held as usual. On Sixth day, a proposition was made to pay another visit to Koua-Koua, next First day; but not feeling any thing towards it, I declined going. When on shore yesterday, I met with a missionary, Wilson, just arrived from the seat of war, having been driven with his family from the station occupied by him. The account he gives of their vindictive barbarism and cannibalism is truly horrifying. On his way, he had to pass by a piece of raised ground, upon which the heads of the vanquished were placed, with their faces to the sun, as they are seen to most advantage in this position. A human heart was stuck upon a spear as a token of victory. He saw one tribe returning from the battle-field, loaded with human flesh for themselves and their friends to feast upon. Miserable women and children followed in train after the mangled remains of their husbands, sons, brothers, and fathers; themselves captives, and doomed to slavery the rest of their days. He saw a child amusing himself with putting his fingers into the eyes and nostrils of a human head, which had been given him to play with. Who can wonder at their hardness of heart, when thus trained from infancy to habits of savage cruelty and barbarism! At one place which they were destroying with fire, their conduct was really fiend-like. In one instance, a missionary family had been plundered by their own congregation: the reason assigned for this shameful conduct was, that they expected the missionary was about to leave the neighbourhood, probably taking for granted that the property would fall into the hands of their enemies.

First Month 1st, 1837. (First day.)—Remained on board all the day, low and stripped, like her who had lost her Lord, and knew not where to find him. Assembled the crew both in the forenoon and afternoon as usual. It seems as if something was gathering upon my mind towards all the members of the mission, in a collective capacity; and standing in resignation, I felt somewhat relieved.

6th.—Much of our time has been spent on board this week, owing to different persons coming from the shore. Today I learned that the missionaries from Waimate, who had been generally over at Paihia during the time called Christmas, with those from Keri-Keri, had all returned to their own stations, which at once set aside my seeing them in a collective capacity, which I had a little thought of, but had apparently been prevented from moving in; and now the time was gone past, this brought me under a painful exercise of mind. Today the wind is so strong as to prevent our getting on shore, our vessel tumbling about, almost as if she was not in harbour. In the forenoon we held our little meeting, which had been set aside yesterday by the confused state of things on board. My state was similar to that of the heath in the desert, which knows not when good comes; and as the barren mountain top, where there is neither dew, nor rain, nor fields of offering: the accuser of the brethren seemed to have prevailed against me. I was smitten and wounded within; and a wounded spirit who can bear?

7th.—Early this morning the wind, which had been strong through the night lessened, and the rain fell without intermission through the day, which not a little contributed to darken the gloom already spread over my mind. My Charles at the same time was unwell, with a sore throat and other symptoms of a violent cold.

8th. (First day.)—Today the rain fell at intervals in light showers: our sailors were assembled as usual; and in the afternoon two strangers joined us from the shore. I had to testify, that the Almighty has not left himself without a witness in every heart, which shines as a light in a dark place; and is no other than the light of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus, “the true light that enlightens every man that comes into the world,” etc. My mind has since felt more peaceful. This afternoon the Chieftain, a British whaling vessel, which was at Tongataboo at the same time as the Henry Freeling, arrived in the Bay of Islands.

11th.—Yesterday, employed in disposing of articles of hardware, etc. The way seemed now to open with clearness, before leaving New Zealand, to draw up an address to the missionaries stationed at Paihia, Keri-Keri, Waimate, Tepuna, etc, and all the members belonging to the 'Church Missionary Society,' (as it is denominated by themselves,) employed in New Zealand; and as I endeavoured to keep close to this prospect, it more and more brightened before me.

12th.—We held our usual meeting, and although a low time, I felt comforted and peaceful. In the afternoon took exercise on shore, after having been detained on board, by one circumstance or other, nearly a fortnight. As the way opened, I began to commit to paper, from time to time, the matter which arose towards the members of the mission.

15th. (First day.)—Believed it my place to remain with our people on board, feeling nothing towards the shore; and being well aware that the whole neighbourhood of the bay, except where missionary interest prevails, answers nearly, if not altogether, the description of the place, where Satan's seat is.

16th.—Engaged in writing a fair copy of an address to the members of the mission. In the evening went on shore for exercise; and thinking that those at the station at Paihia, might suppose I shunned calling upon them of late, I told Charles Baker, that seeing their members could not be collected together, as had been the case at the Sandwich and Friendly Islands, I was preparing a written address to them; at the same time I informed him, that the time of our departure from the Bay was drawing near. This evening the Ganges, an American whaler, arrived from the neighbourhood of Madagascar. Not far distant from New Zealand, her boats were engaged in pursuit of whales, and affecting to relate, when night came on, one boat was missing altogether. There was no trace whatever of the cause of this disastrous event: whether the boat had been dashed in pieces by a whale, or towed under water when fastened to one by a harpoon, or had lost sight of the ship, and could not find her again before night overtook them, cannot be ascertained. The captain, fourth mate, carpenter, and three others, were in this boat when she left the Ganges. Three other American whalers have also arrived; and one English merchant ship, from Cloudy Bay, in the South of New Zealand.

17th.—Yesterday and today, employed in getting ready for sea. Having parted with a considerable weight of iron goods out of the hold, and our general stock of stores and provisions being greatly lessened, I thought it needful to procure a quantity of stone, lest the vessel should be endangered by being too light in the water, and thus rendered unable to carry sail in a comfortable manner. James Busby, the British resident, very kindly supplied our needs, from the margin of his estate, which is washed by the sea. In the morning called upon Charles Baker, and afterwards took leave of James Busby, by whom we had been treated with much kindness and hospitality.

18th.—All being ready, at day-break this morning the Henry Freeling got under weigh, and dropped down the Bay opposite the station at Paihia, where we anchored again. We landed in the forenoon on the north side, settled our accounts, and bade farewell to the parties as we went along. My address being copied fairly, and various articles put together to remunerate the natives for their services in boats, etc., we landed in the evening for the last time at Paihia, and delivered them with the address to the care of Charles Baker, at whose house we drank tea. As a reward of industry, and an encouragement to persevere, we presented to a native farmer of promise, who goes by the name of industrious David, a spade, ship axe, drawing knife, small saw, and a bunch of gimblets. We also gave a Bible to a Sheffield woman, the wife of a blacksmith residing in the Bay, and numerous articles of clothing to the native children;—two Dutch hoes and a spade for Charles Baker, with sundry drugs and glass bottles for James Stack were also landed. We called upon all the resident families, and saw those who had been forced from their stations to the southward by the war, before we returned on board. Before reaching the vessel a light land breeze had sprung up; and the night being moonlight we weighed and steered towards the entrance of the Bay with a fine breeze in our favour.

At half-past nine o'clock, Gilbert Maer, the post-master, with whom we had had some considerable traffic, who had very kindly brought us off some milk, and accompanied us until clear of all danger, left us in his own boat, with a crew of natives, and I believe sincerely desired for us a prosperous voyage. At midnight, we were clear of the islands which form the entrance to the Bay, and from which it is probable the appellation of the Bay of Islands was originally taken. I may long have to mourn, on account of the lamentable state of the poor miserable natives of New Zealand, bound down as with chains in the service of Satan, and the dupes of his agents, who are mingled among them, of a lighter coloured skin, but in many instances, it is greatly to be feared, the very scum and offscouring of the nations which gave them birth, and not a few of these my own countrymen: however, under all these unhappy circumstances, the New Zealanders are a noble race of men; and though far behind-hand in that gentleness and docility which characterize the swarthy multitudes of the more sultry climates, in which the Georgian, Society, Hervey, and other isles of the Pacific ocean are placed; and they certainly possess greater energy and firmness of character. This unhappily in their present lost and undone and, I may add, betrayed condition, is only devoted to the most barbarous purposes, for the destruction of their fellow-men. But if the day should ever come, when the benign principles of the everlasting gospel take root and spread among them, soften their hearts, and prepare them for that wisdom from above, which is pure, and peaceable, and profitable in all things to direct into the love of God and love to man,—they would then far outstrip those who have long since made only a profession of the Christian religion; both in exalting and promoting the spiritual kingdom of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ, in the heart of man, to the praise and glory of God, and the welfare of their own species. With this view of a deeply injured race of my fellow-creatures, constituting a part of the innumerable inheritance of the Lord Jesus, I leave their shores with a peaceful and easy mind;—at the same time, comforted under a belief, that the address to the missionary establishment will now circulate to every member; many of whom could not possibly have been present at a transitory interview, however regularly appointed. On looking at this subject, I have thought that the conflict of mind I have lately had to pass through, might be the means graciously vouchsafed, to beget in me a willingness to prepare the address. My desire is, that by it, and through it, the great name may be exalted, and the kingdom of Christ Jesus in the heart better understood and believed in, than heretofore has been the case, in the minds of many. May the Lord on high prepare the ground, in which it may, as seed, be sown; and may He bless it with fertility to bring forth fruit that will lastingly remain;—that He may be glorified thereby.

The following are extracts from the address to the missionaries in New Zealand.

'Finding that I have no longer any place in these parts, and being at the same time restrained from journeying forward, as when the cloud rested on the tabernacle formerly. I have endeavoured to wait in singleness of heart at the posts of wisdom's gate. I find that, before being liberated from the Bay of Islands, there is something due on my part to the members of the mission; for whom I feel too much love to withhold any thing, that may tend to strengthen or encourage them on their way to the everlasting kingdom.

In communicating what may be unfolded to my view, should it be my lot to impart any spiritual benefit, let it be remembered, that it is the Lord, from whom alone comes every good and perfect gift, and that the writer is but an unprofitable servant.

Among the different Isles that stud the capacious bosom of the Pacific, to which my steps have been directed, opportunities have most unexpectedly presented, for seeing the different members of the respective missions with their families, concentrated at one place; but in New Zealand, circumstances not only local, but of a deeply affecting nature, combine to render this impracticable, if not impossible. I have therefore no alternative, but through this medium to salute you on the broad basis of the gospel; which, expanding to earth's utmost bound, embraces all, while it ever breathes in angelic unison, “Glory to God in the highest, on earth peace, good-will toward men.”

We live in no common times, and the present is a day of distress and gloominess, as the morning spread upon the mountains, before illumined by the brightness of the rising sun;—a day when some, struck with dismay as when a standard-bearer faints, are ready to exclaim with Elijah the prophet of the Lord,—“I only am left, and they seek my life.” “Oh! the depth of the riches, both of the wisdom and knowledge of God! how unsearchable are his judgments, and his ways past finding out!” Who among the sons of the mighty, at this cloudy season, can develop the strength of the remnant of the called and chosen and faithful, when the penetrating eye of the holy prophet, strong in the power of the Spirit, was ignorant in his day of calamity and distress, that the Lord had seven thousand men that had not bowed the knee to the image of Baal? It is enough for mortal man to be allowed to participate in the things that are revealed, and no more is required from each of us in return, than sufficient ability is given us to perform: our own individual duty is all we have to attend to, or shall be accountable for. It is not for us to say, “and what shall this man do?” lest the reproof should be ours, “what is that to you? You follow me.” So that while surrounding circumstances exhibit ample cause for lamentation, and mourning and woe; still we must not shrink, nor suffer ourselves to be drawn aside from following our Lord and Master, by searching after secret things which belong unto God, or in brooding over results beyond our reach, and our power to control. Our insidious adversary will not fail to prompt to any exercises calculated to prevent our seeking after that knowledge which gives life; and the more plausible the engagement of mind, the less we suspect that a snare lies beneath. It is no matter to him, how near the Christian's path we may tread, if not in it;—we are the more lulled into mistaken security: even under the semblance of promoting the cause of religion, our attention may be so unsuspectingly but completely engrossed, that the great work of labouring in our own vineyards, of seeking salvation in our own hearts, may be overlooked and neglected. It is of little consequence by what bait the grand adversary succeeds; his purpose is fully accomplished, if we are but kept destitute of that knowledge which is life eternal.

To the heart that is upright and fixed, trusting in the Lord, the trials and conflicts of time are highest, richest blessings, operating like a weight of costly treasure on a pillar erect; the greater the burden, the firmer and stronger it stands, and the closer it presses the foundation. All the sufferings of the present time permitted to assail us, are not worthy to be compared to the glory revealed in that man; because he has made the Lord his refuge, and the Most High his habitation, in the day of trouble and adversity: he can say from heartfelt knowledge, in humble resignation,—“it is the Lord.”

In the course of the last two years, I have had an opportunity of witnessing the attempts that are making to benefit the benighted inhabitants of various islands in the Southern and Northern Pacific Ocean, and have been enabled to visit almost without exception, the solitary and secluded allotments of those engaged in this important work. Although this has been but partially the case in New Zealand, yet opportunities have been afforded of seeing the faces of many of the members of this extensive mission from remote places, as well as of those who reside in this immediate neighbourhood, who with others scattered among the different isles, where my lot has been cast, are dwelling among strangers, in a strange land. Having myself dwelt among a people whose language I could not understand, gives me to know the heart of a stranger, and to feel for him; and I also know his only place of safety and refuge to be Christ Jesus the Lord:—if He be with us, we have nothing to fear, for He is love itself, and “perfect love casts out fear.” It is that which revives and animates the fainting, wayworn traveller, to persevere in the tribulated path. It is the effect of this heaven-born principle, and the true dignity of its nature, to sustain the Christian with fortitude and innocent boldness, above the torments of fear, and far from the reach of terror.

Although my tarriance has been but short among you, it has been long enough to allow me to witness the upright devotedness of heart and intention, of some whom our interaction has given me an opportunity to know and love; and to feel and sympathize with them. I am also aware of the great difficulties to be encountered in the prosecution of the cause of truth and righteousness, and of the many obstacles thrown in the way by the agents of Satan: but if the work be the Lord's, it will assuredly prosper, though “the heathen” should “rage, and the people imagine a vain thing;” however “the kings of the earth” may “set themselves, and the rulers take counsel together.” “He that sits in the heavens shall laugh, the Lord shall have them in derision.”

I believe that you are all desirous of knowing the Lord for yourselves; and I feel bound to encourage you to follow on to know Him, desiring to be your companion in a pursuit of such eternal consequence; for in the same proportion as we ourselves grow in the saving knowledge of our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ: so shall we be in a capacity to benefit others. My desire is, that none of us may be contented with saying, we hope that we are led and guided by the Holy Spirit; for I can tell you, “in the word of the truth of the gospel,” that no man led by the Spirit of the Lord can have any doubt or hesitation on this account, any more than he can doubt the shining of the sun, when he sees it at noon-day: the way-faring men, though fools, shall not err therein, or be mistaken. If we are not in possession of this inestimable gift, the fault is our own,—we have the word of a King for it, even the King of saints, and King of kings;—“ask and it shall be given you, seek and you shall find, knock and it shall be opened unto you;” again, “if you then, being evil, know how to give good gifts unto your children, how much more shall your heavenly Father give the Holy Spirit to them that ask him.” But then it must be sought in faith, and as by those that have none in heaven but the Lord, nor in all the earth in comparison of Him. It must be sought as prescribed by the lip of Truth himself, “first” and before every earthly consideration whatever: “seek first the kingdom of heaven and His righteousness, and all these things shall be added unto you.” Without strict compliance with the terms “seek first,” we ask and receive not, because we ask amiss. Let none be discouraged; there is no cause for it. “Heaven and earth shall pass away,” but the words of our King “shall not pass away;” his promises are yes and amen forever. “Seek and you shall find;” but let us seek aright: for “the Lord is good unto them that wait for him—to the soul that seeks him;” and for the encouragement of such as thus seek and wait for the coming of the Lord's holy Spirit, like those who watch for the morning, after a dark and dismal night of peril,—for such as these, the gracious promise through the inspired prophet is designed, that they “through patience and comfort of the scriptures might have hope:”—“the Lord whom you seek, shall suddenly come to his temple, even the messenger of the covenant, whom you delight in; behold he shall come, says the Lord of Hosts.” The heart of man must be purified and cleansed, before it can become the temple of a pure and holy God. “But who may abide the day of His coming? and who shall stand, when He appears?” Truly nothing in man or of man;—self must be cast out, and all that belongs to it: for “He is like a refiners fire and like fuller's soap. He shall sit as a refiner and purifier of silver; and He shall purify the sons of Levi, (the priesthood He himself has chosen,) that they may offer unto the Lord an offering in righteousness;”—even those whom He has chosen and called to proclaim the glad tidings of His gospel in His name and by His power and authority, having their feet shod with His holy sanctifying preparation. O! how great is the work to be done in the heart of every individual, before it is fit for the reception of this heavenly guest, who only dwells in the temple of an undefiled heart! How many baptisms have we to pass through, in order to purify and prepare us for the knowledge of the only true God, and Jesus Christ whom He has sent once in a body of flesh on the earth,—but who now appears by the eternal Spirit in the heart of every man. We have great instruction from the narrative in holy writ, of the preparation which Elijah had to pass through on Mount Horeb, before he was in a situation to discern the “still small voice.” He had first to witness “a great and strong wind to break in pieces the rocks,”—as a figure of that power, which alone can subdue and soften the rocky and obdurate nature in the human heart;—“but the Lord was not in the wind.” “And after the wind, an earthquake,”—another needful dispensation for the reduction of the creature, and the shaking and separating of the earthly part, and every thing in man that cannot abide the day of the Lord's coming, or stand when he appears.—“But the Lord was not in the earthquake: and after the earthquake a fire;”—that searching, consuming, baptising element—the fire of the Lord, that consumes not only that which is light and chaffy, but also the dross and tin and reprobate silver; that nothing may remain, but what can endure and abide the trial, as pure gold.—“But the Lord was not in the fire: and after the fire, a still small voice.” This ordeal we must all pass through, according to our measure: it is the great work of regeneration; and in order to hear this “still small voice,” we must ourselves be still, as with our faces wrapped in a mantle. The prince of this world must be cast out, and his strong holds pulled down; all our imaginations and every high thing that exalts itself against the knowledge of God must be cast down, and brought into captivity unto obedience, before we can know Christ to be in us, “the hope of glory.” The silence of all flesh must be attained: the creature must cease from its own willings and runnings and strivings: the holy command must be obeyed,—“be still, and know that I am God: I will be exalted among the heathen: I will be exalted in the earth.” Blessed and happy are they, who thus seek, and thus find; and having found, to them the glorious day is come, when whatsoever they shall ask the Father in the name of the Son, He will do it. Before this day, how vain have been our petitions, because not in the name, not in the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, but in our own strength, time and will. “Verily, verily, I say unto you, whatsoever you shall ask of the Father in my name, he will give it you. Hitherto you have asked nothing in my name. Ask and you shall receive, that your joy may be full. At that day you shall ask in my name, and I say not unto you that I will pray the Father for you; for the Father himself loves you, because you have loved me, and have believed that I came out from God.”

I am reminded instructively of the confirming expressions of our dear Lord on another occasion, which prove to me how little can be done for the benefit of others, until the great and necessary work is first wrought in ourselves. Addressing Simon with the other disciples, he said, “Simon, Simon, behold Satan has desired to have you, that he might sift you as wheat; but I have prayed for you that your faith fail not; and when you are converted, strengthen your brethren.” As a stream cannot rise higher than the fountain from which it issues, so it is impossible for any to instruct others further than they themselves have learned in the school of Christ. Let us then seek, until we find the prize immortal. Let us be determined to know nothing, save Jesus Christ, and him crucified. Let nothing on earth prevent us from coming to the life-giving knowledge of the Holy Spirit of this crucified, risen, and glorified Lord, in our own hearts; for unless we are crucified with Him to the world, and the world unto us, we can never rise with Him into life. And why should not we in this our day, be as complete as the Colossians, to whom the great Apostle writing, said, “and you are complete in Him, which is the head of all principality and power; in whom also you are circumcised with the circumcision made without hands, in putting off the body of the sins of the flesh, by the circumcision of Christ; buried with Him in baptism, wherein also you are risen with Him through the faith of the operation of God, who has raised Him from the dead.” The great apostle of the Gentiles and his contemporaries preached “Christ crucified, unto the Jews a stumbling block, and unto the Greeks foolishness; but unto them which are called, both Jews and Greeks, Christ the power of God, and the wisdom of God,” unto salvation. Alas! we may see and believe from the conduct and conversation of thousands in this our gospel day, and these too in the higher walks of life, as well as in every other, without exclusion of sex, age, or condition,—that however this may be overlooked and unheeded, the same will judge these unhappy mortals at the last day. They will then remember how they have been striven with on particular occasions, when the Lord's visitations have been extended towards them in love indescribable; staining the glory of this world in their sight; wooing, entreating, warning, and as when reasoning “of righteousness, temperance, and judgment to come,” making them afraid; stirring up the precious principle of life, procured by the shedding of a Saviour's blood;—as when “an eagle stirs up her nest, flutters over her young, spreads abroad her wings,” to strengthen, cherish, and save. A day will certainly come upon them as a thief in the night, unless averted by “repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ,” when such will have, in spite of themselves, to look upon Him whom they have so long pierced; when they will find this “still small voice” to be the voice of the Lord in Spirit, “powerful and full of majesty,” to the guilty soul. The judge stands at the door—He who when on earth in the body prepared for him, told those who then disregarded His holy voice, that his words should judge them at the last day;—“I judge no man,” said he;—“the word that I have spoken, the same shall judge him in the last day.”

Then let us press toward the mark for the prize immortal, the prize of the high calling of God in Christ Jesus: let us be found striving together for the faith of the gospel; until we all come into the unity of the same, and thereby grow in grace and stature from measure to measure, unto the measure of the stature of the fulness of Christ Jesus our Lord. Let us not stop short, until we have obtained the like precious faith, once delivered to the saints;—the true faith of the gospel, which works by love, purifies the heart, and gives victory over sin, death, hell, and the grave. A historical or traditional faith, or one that admits of a continuance in sin, is dead and unavailing; but the faith of the gospel is a living, operative principle,—an impenetrable shield: it quenches the fiery darts of the wicked, disarms sin, justifies its happy possessor, and gives peace with God, through our Lord Jesus Christ; from whom alone it must be obtained, and for it we must all come to Him, in the humility and simplicity of little children; of whom is the kingdom of heaven, though they be upon earth “the poor in spirit.” It is Jesus alone who imparts this heavenly treasure,—faith: He is the blessed author and finisher of it, and from him we must receive the precious gift into our hearts. “The righteousness of God is revealed from faith to faith,” to those who walk in the obedience thereof; it is indeed the life of the just, a glorious reality to those who are crucified with Christ, and live thereby. These can adopt the apostolic language, and say from blessed experience, “I am crucified with Christ: nevertheless I live; yet not I, but Christ lives in me: and the life which I now live in the flesh, I live by the faith of the Son of God, who loved me, and gave himself for me.” “Happy is that people that is in such a case: yes, happy is that people, whose God is the Lord.” In Him they live; in Him they die; and with Him they are everlastingly blessed.

The love in which this is dictated, still flows in my heart towards you, and in the same I trust it will be received. And now let me commend you in apostolic language, “to God, and to the word of His grace, which is able to build yon up, and to give you an inheritance among all them which are sanctified;”—even that “eternal word, which lives and abides forever.”

I remain your affectionate friend, etc.

Daniel Wheeler
Henry Freelng, of Paihia, Bay of Islands, First Month 18th, 1837.

A copy of a letter from the missionaries at Paihia.

Church Missionary Society's Station, Paihia, Bay of Islands, “New Zealand, 18th January, 1837.

Reverend and Dear Sir,

Before you bid adieu to New Zealand, we take this opportunity of expressing the pleasure, and, we hope, the edification we have derived, by your unexpected coming to this country.

We had heard of your benevolent mission to other islands of these seas; but we now have to record the higher gratification of having seen you and your affectionate son amongst us.

We regret, that circumstances of war and tumult have not made it desirable for you to visit the more extensive field of our labour, south of the Bay of Islands. But we do hope, that the places favoured by your Christian example and addresses, may have seen and heard to profit, and that “at the last day” it may be found that your sojourn here has not been in vain.

One effect of your visit to New Zealand has been to remind us, that though “there are differences of administrations, it is the same spirit” which actuates the whole of Christ's mystical body, “the Church of the first-born, whose names are written in heaven.” With gratitude, also, we have to acknowledge your liberal bestowment of school-books, tracts, clothing for natives, medicines, etc., which will remain behind you as a memorial of your Christian kindness.

The pleasure of our meeting together, is, alas! now embittered by the painfulness of separation;—but our high calling entitles us to the privilege of a friendship, which is not interrupted by distance or time. We cannot, however, at your advanced age, and the immense distance which will before long separate us, but be solemnly reminded of the affecting words of the venerable apostle to the elders of Ephesus, “And now I know that you all among whom I have gone preaching the kingdom of God, shall see my face no more!”

It is our earnest prayer to God for you, that if consistent with His will, you may be spared to return to our beloved native land, and to the bosom of your family, to tell all your eyes have seen of “what God has wrought among the Gentiles by the ministry of reconciliation.”

Pray for us, that the word of the Lord may have free course, and be glorified in New Zealand; and that we may be delivered from unreasonable and wicked men.

Finally, Reverend and dear Sir, we bid you farewell, and remain in the bonds of Christian friendship.

Yours, very affectionately,

Charles Baker, James Stack, William Colenss, William Thomas Fairbcrk.

P. S.—A difference of location of several of our brethren, and the absence of some from home, will not allow of their signing their names; but we can confidently say, they fully agree with us in this expression of our sentiments.

[No circumstance attending Daniel Wheeler's visit to the South Sea Islands, appears to have more painfully affected his feelings, than the observation forced upon him from place to place, of the demoralizing and devastating effects of the interaction of the natives with the crews of vessels visiting their shores. In some letters, not forming a part of his Journal, he thus alludes to the subject.]

We find that the voyages of the whaling-vessels are much longer than formerly, their success being more precarious and uncertain, owing to the increased number of ships engaged in that employ, which constantly disturb a great breadth of ocean, by looking over several hundred square miles of its surface every day; so that the fish are becoming scarcer, and more shy than formerly. We should rejoice to hear of any cause that would reduce the number of shipping which visit these islands for supplies, and to refit; as they only tend to diminish their population, by bringing spirituous liquors amongst the people, and by keeping alive a disease, the ravages of which are destroying whole families, both old and young, to an extent little contemplated in England, and truly painful and distressing to be an eye-witness to, and which is greatly aggravated by the use of ardent spirits. Surely, something will be done to stop this desolating scourge of the human race. It is the suffering case of an afflicted, injured people, and calls for the attention, and that speedily, of the legislature of every country, but particularly of England and America, which are the nations principally implicated in this dreadful traffic. Scarcely a ship arrives, but what has for sale rum, muskets, and gunpowder, for all of which the natives are extremely eager: many of these are denominated 'Temperance ships,' and yet are engaged in producing madness amongst the natives, by furnishing the means of intoxication, at the same time supplying them with weapons of destruction to complete their misery. We saw much of this while our lot was cast amongst them: and although in certain of the islands the use of spirits is forbidden, and the article itself destroyed when found, yet, even in those, there are too many who carry on the trade in an underhand manner; and of late its effects have been more and more apparent. Those who have it in their power effectually to stop it, are in their hearts desirous that it should be allowed; they not only like it themselves, but are fully aware how profitable the sale is to those that deal in it. Again, if my friends at home could witness for themselves the state of many of the islands in these seas, which we have visited,—lamentation and mourning and woe, must inevitably be their portion. Rum, muskets, and gunpowder, are articles brought in great abundance, particularly by the American ships, many of which are styled 'Temperance ships.' It is an incontrovertible fact, that vessels of this description have landed larger quantities of spirits on some islands than any other class of ships. On almost every island the population decreases, and the dreadful ravages made by disease is much aggravated by the use of spirits.

[After giving an affecting description of the consequences of disease, and mentioning that he had, in as many cases as his stock of medicine would allow, successfully checked and eradicated it, he adds:—]

The island of Bolabola is one that has suffered most of any by the introduction of spirits, as it has caused the people to distil their bread-fruit, and every kind of food capable of producing spirit. I can never forget the abject wretched state of these people, with scarcely rags to cover them, in need of every thing, and possessing nothing to purchase any thing with, their little property being consumed in order to obtain spirits: the famished appearance also, of the more than half-naked children, who abound, will long retain a place in my memory, in that love which must ever intercede on behalf of, and plead the cause of suffering humanity. The little things used to come on board to us; and when on shore, we were surrounded in a few minutes by delighted groups of them. My heart often revisits Bolabola, and gladly would I bind up her wretched inhabitants in the Lord's bundle of life forever.

20th.—Yesterday, the weather was fine and wind fair. In the evening, the island of New Zealand was scarcely distinguishable from the deck. We are now steering a course for New South Wales, I trust, in the right line of things, to reach the port of Sydney, having nothing on my mind towards any other place. Not having sat down yesterday, we held our little meeting this morning; the forepart was more lively than sometimes, but the latter, as regards myself, was unusually heavy. At sundown, three whaling vessels were in company together. As night approached, a heavy swell from the north-east, and a still heavier from the southward, increased upon us, after having fairly passed the isles of the three Kings of New Zealand. The vessel lurched with such violence and suddenness, owing to these cross and heavy swells of the sea, that about ten o'clock p.m. the topmast was carried away. By midnight, the fragments of the mast, and the shattered rigging and sail were rescued and properly secured.

24th.—On First day, the weather being too rough for us to admit much light into the cabin, and the heat being oppressive in the vessel below deck, our crew were not assembled as at other times. Fair wind and heavy sea through the day. Our captain ascertained that seventy miles had been lost in forty-eight hours, by an opposing current; to which cause the cross swell and agitated state of the sea might fairly be attributed. Today, our people were employed in substituting our flying jib-boom for a topmast, which as a jury mast, will help to drive us along; but in point of strength it is much inferior to the old topmast, which came from England with us, and has stood ever since; happily no one was hurt when the accident of losing it occurred, which ought to be remembered with thankfulness of heart.

26th.—Today, the weather is favourable with less wind; we made but little headway. We sat down in the forenoon in much poverty and strippedness, and yet under a peaceful covering. My Charles complains today of much pain in his side, owing I believe to the great damp in the cabin, produced by our having been closely shut up, to prevent the sea from getting down in a wholesale manner; but the water makes its way through so many places in the decks, as to make every article of clothing and bedding too damp for use: we have, however, no alternative, and hope, in a few days, again to see better times. A sight of New Holland, will, I trust, revive and animate us.

27th.—Gentle breezes and fair all night. At three o'clock a.m., Lord Howe's Island was discovered upon the lee-bow, and at day-break Ball's Pyramid on the weather-bow. At ten o'clock, passed between them with breeze from north northeast. Upon Lord Howe's Island, there are three Englishmen residing, who have women from New Zealand as wives. It appears that they have raised hogs, potatoes and cabbages, sufficient for the supply of fourteen whaling vessels in a year. We are, this day at noon, four hundred miles from the shores of New Holland. Charles seems better this morning.

28th—The heat of the atmosphere quite oppressive, and below deck almost insupportable. After midnight the lightning was extremely vivid all round us, with thunder at times awfully loud and near the vessel; the rain falling in torrents, and the wind flying about, first on one side, and then on the other. At five o'clock a.m., the breeze became strong and steady from the south south-east, which enabled us to pursue our course.

29th. (First day.)—A portion of the Scriptures was read to the crew, only three of whom attended. The air much cooler since the thunder-storm. The state of feeling with me, both as to mind and body, for the last two days, cannot be easily described; the former, as if it had never known good; and yet the loss could not be felt, if the possession had never been witnessed. It is, however, to myself a relieving proof or evidence that a spark of life still remains, for that which is dead cannot feel: but outward circumstances, which affect the body, also bear upon the mind, though imperceptibly, and at the moment unthought of as having any share in the mental conflict. Below deck the water filters through upon us in many places: the deck above us is drenched again and again by the breaking tops of the waves; the motion of the vessel is so violent and incessant as to admit of no rest, either sitting or lying, and walking is altogether impracticable. Perhaps, the motto of 'Brighter hours will come,' is particularly appropriate in our case; and we may yet be permitted to realize the fact itself, and the language of David exultingly be ours,—“God has spoken in his holiness; I will rejoice.”

30th.—A fresh gale all night; but the moon rising about midnight, enabled us to run towards the land without fear. At daylight, several parts of the coast could be seen, from Port Stephen to the eastward. At eight o'clock a.m., the lighthouse upon the South Head appeared. Strong breezes with considerable sea from the southward and eastward. Soon after getting sight of the Heads, which form the entrance into Sydney, a bark was seen standing into the offing, that had just come out of the harbour. Not knowing but that she was one of the homeward bound for England, and thinking this might possibly be an opportunity of letting our dear friends know of our return to New South Wales, from the isles of the Pacific, the Henry Freeling's flag was hoisted immediately, but, on getting nearer to her, she was found to be a whaling vessel, by the number of boats which she carried. At ten o'clock, took in a pilot and bore up for the harbour, and before two o'clock were safely anchored in the Cove. In the evening, moored close under the government domain, about thirty yards from the shore, by the side of the Jessie, of Liverpool. Here we found several ships preparing to take in cargoes for London, also the Rattlesnake and Victor men-of-war. Our arrival was soon known in the neighbourhood. Abraham Davy was shortly on board, and our dear friends James Backhouse and George Washington Walker were not long before they reached us: our joy was mutual at seeing each other's faces again, and I trust that our hearts were filled with gratitude and thankfulness to Him, who had sustained us through all, and brought it about for His great name's sake. It was afterwards ascertained, that a number of letters from England and home were lying in store for us. Accounts of the welfare of our beloved family at Shoosharry, beyond my most sanguine expectations, were received up to within seven months of the present date; not having heard of them for nearly two years, they seemed now restored to us again, as a treasure enhanced in value a hundred fold indeed, but still far beyond the reach of full possession. Humbled under a sense of the Lord's everlasting love and faithfulness, my heart rejoiced before Him.

Second Month 2nd. (Fifth day.)—Attended the meeting in Sydney at eleven a.m., held in a comfortable building, erected for the purpose during our absence from these shores. Twelve persons were the whole number present: it was a silent meeting. May faith and strength be more and more increased, if consistent with the Divine will, and a door effectually opened for the word of the gospel to be declared amongst these people; that the name of the Lord may be glorified, and the way of life and salvation, as it is in Jesus, set before them, to the exaltation of the blessed Saviour's spiritual kingdom in the heart of man; of the increase of whose government and peace, there shall be no end, but the earth shall be filled with His praise.

[Daniel Wheeler and his son remained at Sydney until the 30th of Seventh Month, when they sailed for Hobart Town. Much public service did not devolve upon him while at Sydney; when health permitted, he regularly attended the meetings for worship on First and Fifth days, kept up by a few individuals professing with Friends in that town, which were not infrequently resorted to by others. Soon after their arrival at Sydney, agreeably with arrangements made on leaving England, the Henry Freeling was sold, the ship's company were discharged, and the numerous surplus stores belonging to the ship disposed of; these engagements undertaken in an exhausted state of health, occupied much time.

The following extracts from his journal and letters, refer to this period.]

To John Kitching.

Sydney, Third Month 3rd, 1837

I consider it no small favour that our crew have passed through the voyage amongst the islands in so exemplary a manner. Their good behaviour was remarked and commented on by the missionaries and others, at various places. They seemed to consider themselves bound to do nothing that would be likely to bring reproach on the vessel, on account of the object which she was engaged to promote. Instead of being shunned and feared as dangerous people by the missionaries, which is the case with the generality of sailors, they were looked upon as quite a different class of men, and treated with marked kindness on account of their orderly deportment. Towards the latter part of the voyage, their patience began to get exhausted: they longed for home; and on reaching New Zealand they were like people “weary in well doing” but I think this arose in great measure from our unavoidably coming into close contact with other vessels, where they could not fail to be assailed with continual jeers; and the ridiculous stories as to the supposed strict discipline they were under in our vessel, (such as their having to pay a dollar for every oath they swore,) seemed to make them think they really were rigidly treated, and their just rights withheld from them. Two or three of them at one time seemed desirous of settling in New Zealand; this served to amuse, and keep their thoughts engaged, and I promised them their discharge on reaching New Holland. Sometimes in the night watches, I used to lay before them the comfort they might enjoy when they got to England, if they took proper care of their money; and some of them seemed quite to enter into the idea of not having to go to sea again, which with a little assistance might certainly have been realized.

It was my earnest desire on first setting out, that our voyage together might truly be one towards the kingdom of heaven; but now, if I except two or three individuals, every hope of this kind has vanished, and has been exchanged for the painful certainty, that after all the advantages they have enjoyed, and the victory they seemed to have gained over the temptations which in former days had so often prevailed over them, they have again relapsed to their old degradation. Perhaps they may not have gone to the full extent that it is common in this horrible place; yet there is little doubt that they have nearly got through their money in a dissipated manner.

However much this is to be deplored on their account, it is a consolation that nothing of the sort occurred while they belonged to the Henry Freeling, and that whatever infamy they may bring upon themselves, it is altogether unconnected with that vessel, and cannot bear in the least on the object of her late voyage. Their conduct here is thought nothing of, and passes unnoticed amidst the general mass of wickedness with which this place overflows. Let the conduct of those sailors be ever so notorious, no one asks to what ship they belong; the thing is so common, and of hourly occurrence.

To the Same.

Sydney, Third Month 18th, 1837.

Our dear friends James Backhouse and George W. Walker took their departure from these shores last First day, the 12th instant; so that we are sitting desolate, and somewhat resembling those that are forsaken; but, alas! not amongst an afflicted people. Would that I could say so; but instead of this, I think this is as wicked a place as any I have seen, which have not been a few in my day. Pride and haughtiness abound, and lamentable ignorance of spiritual religion is manifest on every side: indeed few seem to make even an outward profession of it. Drunkenness appears to be the prevailing sin, which leads to the most deadly amongst the working part of the community, although it is not confined to their grade. The major part of the lower order are bound in the fetters of popery; and for the most part are prisoners who have obtained tickets of leave, or they are what are called assigned servants, many of whom have been accustomed to crime from their very youth. The contrast is very and painfully striking with what we have seen among the poor and benighted islanders, with whom our lot has lately been cast; the situation of many of these may be considered enviable, when compared with the miserable wretchedness of many here, who consider themselves Christians. Cursing and bitterness resound continually through the streets; and extortion and deceit prevail almost universally among the shop-keepers, on whose promises hardly any dependence can be placed. Many have amassed considerable wealth by extortion and the sale of spirits; and having risen only as from a dung-hill, are living as if there was no God, no judgment, and no world to come,—and length of days at their command. Those who come out as settlers are generally of a better stamp, though even among these there is little stability of character.

This is the state of the rising and fast flourishing colony of Sydney and its neighbourhood; but the most grievous thing we witness is the miserable condition of the aborigines of the country, who are frequently seen rolling about the streets in groups, altogether intoxicated; while their emaciated frames declare, that they are fast wasting from the surface of the earth. They too, are following the dreadful example set before them, of cursing and swearing in the English tongue, which they have learnt from their exterminating visitors.

How long we may have to remain here, I know not; but I desire to be resigned to wait the blessed Master's time.

Third Month 26th.—In the forenoon meeting yesterday I had a close, searching testimony to bear,—standing up with the words of our Lord,—“If your eye offend you, pluck it out: it is better for you to enter into the kingdom of God with one eye, than having two eyes, to be cast into hell fire; where their worm dies not, and the fire is not quenched.” Stating that I believed it safest for me to revive these expressions in their hearing, lest there should be any present who were sensible that something stood in the way between them and eternal life; and though this might be dear to them as a right hand, a right foot, or a right eye, it would be their soul's true interest to pluck it out, or cut it off, and cast it from them, before it was too late to enter into life, even halt or maimed or with one eye, and before the day of the Lord's visitation was passed away forever. Entreating all to lay aside every weight and every burden, and that sin which most easily besets, and “run with patience the race that is set before us, looking unto Jesus the author and finisher of our faith; who, for the joy that was set before Him, endured the cross, despising the shame, and is set down at the right hand of the throne of God.”

Fourth Month 3rd.—Yesterday the forenoon meeting was better attended than is frequently the case; in the course of which it was with me to recite the words of the Saviour to his disciples,—“If you love me, keep my commandments;”—stating my belief that it would be difficult to find any who profess to believe in Christ, who have not a hope that they love Him. But let us prove what ground we have for this hope by the test of obedience, and examine how far we really have obeyed the commands of Christ: His commandments, as His promises, are “yes and amen forever.” “Seek first the kingdom of God and his righteousness.” Have we obeyed this important command I Has this been the employment of our life, as the first and primary object of our search, by which all things needful shall be added unto us? Or have we only occasionally remembered it, while following with eagerness after the follies, and vanities, and riches of the world; instead of laying up for ourselves “treasure in heaven?” Have we been securing to ourselves the enduring riches of eternity, by seeking this kingdom as it should be sought, “first” before all other things? It is time for some of us who are advanced in life, diligently to examine how we stand in this important search, and more especially so for those who make mention of His name before men. It is evident, that those whom our Lord enjoined to “seek first the kingdom of God,” were fearful that while in pursuit of this heavenly treasure, they should fall short of the food and raiment necessary for their poor perishing bodies. “Behold the fowls of the air:” “Consider the lilies of the field,” etc., said our Saviour, as encouragement to these of “little faith.”

8th.—Attended the funeral of the wife of William Satterthwaite. The privilege of interment in the ground recently bequeathed to the Society of Friends, was granted at his request, his wife having formerly been a member. This being the first interment at Sydney conducted after the manner of Friends, it is probable that many would have attended out of curiosity, had not the morning been extremely wet. The whole was conducted in a consistent manner. I had to remind those present, that to our own Master we must stand or fall: the work is our own, and the reward is our own. “No man can save his brother.” And although nothing said or done by the living can possibly affect the dead; yet the dead are often powerful preachers to the living, warning them to flee from the wrath to come, by preparing for their latter end. “For we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ, that every one may receive the things done in the body, according to that he has done, whether it be good or bad.” “Every man's work shall be made manifest, for the day shall declare it.” Blessed and happy are they that are building on the ancient and sure foundation, which the righteous in all ages have built upon;—even Christ Jesus, that tried corner-stone;—“unto the Jews a stumbling block, and unto the Greeks foolishness; but unto them which are called, both Jews and Greeks, Christ the power of God, and the wisdom of God.” This is a stone of stumbling, and a rock of offence to all unbelievers now, as in the day when this declaration was made; but to those who believe, it is “a chief corner-stone, elect, precious,”—and the blessed means appointed for the salvation of all mankind, who are willing to submit to the power of the Holy Spirit of the Lord Jesus in the heart. Although it was a scene never before witnessed here, those present were very attentive and solid, and I had peace: it appeared afterwards, that two Jews were present in the grave yard.

9th. (First day.)—In the forenoon meeting I had to set forth the righteousness of Christ Jesus; without which, none can enter the kingdom of heaven. There are many highly professing Christians in this our day, who like the Scribes and Pharisees of old, have a righteousness of their own making; but a more excellent righteousness must be attained to, than any that man is capable of clothing himself with, before the heart is converted unto God. “Except your righteousness exceed the righteousness of the Scribes and Pharisees, you shall in no case enter into the kingdom of heaven,” was declared by our Lord. Now this righteousness which excells, is of the Lord; and none but His children who have been taught of Him, are acquainted with it. There are many who take upon themselves to teach others the way to the heavenly kingdom, who “being ignorant of God's righteousness, and going about to establish their own righteousness, have not submitted themselves to the righteousness of God.” Nothing but the righteousness of Christ Jesus believed in, and operating in our hearts, by the power of the Holy Spirit, and submitted to on our part, will be availing. It is this alone that can purify us as He is pure, and procure for us an entrance into the everlasting kingdom of “righteousness and peace, and joy in the Holy Spirit.” Whatever may be our profession before men, if we have not the righteousness of Christ Jesus, we shall be like the poor man of whom we read; who, destitute of the wedding garment, was speechless, when the question was put to him by the king,—“Friend, how did you enter here, not having a wedding garment?” After this manner I was largely opened amongst them. Some strangers were present, but the whole number did not, I think, exceed eighteen persons. The evening meeting was smaller, but held under a comfortable quiet.

15th.—This week the passengers from the ship Lady Macnaughten have been landed; after being some weeks under quarantine, which the vessel was subjected to on arrival. We understand that there has been great suffering among them during the latter part of the voyage for lack of the actual necessaries of life: many of them have been swept away by a contagious disorder, which prevailed on board. It is much to be regretted that no efficient measures are in force, to protect the emigrants from the cruel rapacity of some of the ship owners and agents.

23rd. (First day.)—This morning attended the funeral of William Satterthwaite. During a solemn pause before the coffin was lowered into the grave, I had to call the attention of the by-standers to the awful instance before us, of the necessity of being prepared individually for the great change: “prepare to meet your God,” was sounded among them. None of us know how soon the undeniable messenger may be sent to our houses:—are we then acquainted with the appointed means of salvation? Nothing will avail us in that hour of extremity, but an interest in the Lord Jesus, unto whom all power in heaven and earth is given. He died for the sins of all mankind, that all mankind might live. Are we acquainted with the power of his Holy Spirit in our hearts. Have we not felt this power in our hearts when we have committed sin, convincing us of sin, and reproving for it. Have we bowed to it in obedience, and acknowledged its might, and thereby known its sufficiency to save from our sins? If so, we have hearkened to the voice of the well-beloved Son, in spirit. But if we have resisted this power when striving with us, set it at naught, and rebelled against it, the day will yet come upon us, when we shall have to bow before it, but it will be in judgment for sin and transgression unrepented of, in anguish of heart for having thus disregarded the Holy Spirit, purchased by the blood of the Lamb of God. There might be some present of various religious sentiments; but however our opinions differ in some things, in one we shall all agree, that we must all die, and all stand before the judgment seat of Christ: then, how needful it is for us to be ready, when called upon to return the spirit unto God who gave it, with joy and not with grief.

30th. (First day.)—In the forenoon meeting it was with me to revive the language of the apostle when addressing the primitive believers, who had witnessed the beauty and spirituality of the gospel dispensation, when every man may sit under his own vine, and under his own fig tree, and none shall make him afraid; which is realized at this day, to all true believers in the second coming of the Lord Jesus, by the Holy Spirit in the heart of man;—“The anointing which you have received of Him (Christ) abides in you, and you need not that any man teach you; but as the same anointing teaches you of all things, and is truth, and is no lie, and even as it has taught you, you shall abide in Him.” What a great and precious privilege it is to be permitted to sit as at the feet of Jesus, to hear the gracious words that proceed from Him; it is the one thing needful for all to do,—the part which Mary chose, and which our Lord declared should never be taken away from her. It is this inward teaching of the Holy Spirit, that I want all to believe in, and be acquainted with for and in themselves. Those who have received from Him the anointing which abides, are qualified to give an account of the hope that is in them, not only in meekness and fear, but from heart-felt knowledge of the coming of the Son of God in spirit. “We believe and are sure that you are that Christ,” said Simon Peter, when many had turned back and walked no more with Him, on account of the narrowness of the path which leads to life. “Will you also go away,” said our Lord to the few remaining disciples:—“to whom shall we go?” said Peter,—“You have the words of eternal life; and we believe and are sure, that you are that Christ, the Son of the living God.” Of this, and of the blessedness of those who come to this knowledge, I had further to impart.

[It was while at Sydney that Daniel Wheeler received the deeply affecting intelligence of the death of his eldest son, William Wheeler, who had succeeded his father in his agricultural concerns in Russia. He died on the 24th of Eleventh Month, 1836, at the Sand Rock Hotel, near Niton, on the Isle of Wight, to which place he had resorted for a more genial climate: his illness was a consumption, which rapidly terminated his life. The first intelligence of this event came to hand in a public journal, and proved a keen stroke; but was borne with much Christian resignation. The life of William Wheeler had been marked by watchfulness and prayer; and a conscientious regard to the pointing of Divine wisdom in the discharge of his religious duties, as well as by an active and diligent attention to his concerns in business;—his end was eminently crowned with peace, and a humble and confiding trust in redeeming mercy.]

Fifth Month 30th.—A letter has reached us by way of Hobarton, from our beloved Joshua, conveying the long anticipated confirmation of the painful report already in our possession, that our dear William has finished his earthly course.²⁵ Although we have lost what never can be regained in this world; yet the accompanying particulars of his last days administered great consolation and relief, and raised in my heart a tribute of humble thankfulness to the great Preserver of men, who indeed “loves his own unto the end,” at once removing all my doubts, and causing me in the depths of distress, to triumph with admiration at the loving-kindness of the Lord to the poor and to “him that has no helper.” On reviewing with calmness the provision which has been made for every exigency of the case, I was constrained to acknowledge, that had it been practicable, I could not have made any arrangement more satisfactory to myself; so that while I am enabled to say Amen, so be it, to this dispensation of His holy will, who wrought the work,—I can rejoice in the sustaining belief, and give thanks at the remembrance of His holiness, that the loss sustained is only ours; to the dear departed soul it is eternal gain, through the tender mercy of God in Christ Jesus. And now, some things which at first sight only seemed to aggravate and add to our affliction, appear to have formed a part of the great whole which has been vouchsafed, by having in degree prepared our minds for the mournful event, of which we were afterwards more fully to be informed. Although the tidings received through a channel so unexpected and abrupt, plunged us at once into deep affliction, as a stern harbinger of woe; yet even this could afterwards be viewed as a blessing in disguise, gradually to lighten the weight of an overwhelming reality, and lessen the density of the gloom about to envelope us. “By watering, he wearies the thick cloud,” says Job; so does the tear of affection when shed in meekness and submission, soften the heart's keenest anguish, until the dark cloud of grief dissolves into resignation to the Divine will, and is sanctified to the praise and glory of God. For some days my dear Charles could not divest himself of the idea, that such a report might have got into the newspaper accidentally and without any foundation in fact; but this slender ray of hope was of short duration.

Sixth Month 11th. (First day.)—Since the 30th ultimo my pen has been laid aside as to a record of passing events, either outward or inward. My harp has been hung, as it were, upon the willow, and my lips have been sealed; but at seasons my heart has been softened by the love of God, and my peace has been permitted to flow as the stream of a mighty river, sheltered from every ruffling blast, and too strong to be impeded by trifles. In the meeting this evening a word of encouragement was spoken to the poor and needy, that are hungering and thirsting after heavenly food, and looking to the Lord alone for their souls' nourishment: verily the Lord will hear them, and they shall be fed.

18th.—Since last First day, various have been my trials and provings; but the Divine hand has sustained through all; and by letters now received from England I am greatly comforted, inasmuch as the belief so strong in my heart, of the mercy and compassion of my God, is more than ever confirmed as regards the close of my precious William,—in several particulars far more abundantly than I could have conceived; and above all, in the certain evidence that He has crowned him with everlasting life:—I had nothing more to ask. “The Lord has heard the voice of my weeping;—the Lord has heard my supplication;—the Lord has received my prayer;” and the kingdom, and the power, and the glory are His, forever.

26th.—The way seems now to open more and more for us to leave this place: I humbly pray that we may be rightly directed, both as to the time, and the next place of our destination.

At our morning meeting yesterday several persons attended, who were evidently unaccustomed to sit in silence: they stayed till near the conclusion of the meeting. A Friend who has lately come to settle here, spoke a few words, though perhaps from diffidence too long withheld, to the effect that, the most eloquent language, if the heart be not right, however esteemed among men, is an abomination in the sight of God, who sees not as man sees. “Man looks at the outward appearance, but the Lord looks on the heart.”

Seventh Month 10th.—On First day the 2nd, both the meetings were held in silence throughout: this cannot be wondered at, when the expectation of many that attend on these days is evidently placed upon man, instead of gathering inward to the great Teacher of his people. Yesterday, the forenoon meeting was also held in silence: in the evening the new covenant and its holy Mediator Christ Jesus, were proclaimed amongst the people, to my own relief. A solemn feeling was vouchsafed, under which we separated.

17th.—The fore-part of the morning meeting yesterday was greatly disturbed by persons coming in, and shortly going out again: towards the conclusion more settled quiet prevailed. The evening meeting was altogether more comfortable. The complaint of the Most High, through the holy prophet to His people formerly, it is greatly to be feared is equally applicable to many professing Christianity in this gospel day, as when uttered by Divine inspiration, in that period of degeneracy:—“The ox knows his owner, and the ass his master's crib; but Israel does not know, my people do not consider.” I was largely opened to speak of the means mercifully afforded to all, through the blood of Jesus; by whom alone we can come to a saving knowledge of God the Father, and of His beloved Son, on which knowledge eternal life depends.

During the past week a cargo of male convicts arrived from London; and one of female convicts from Dublin. A vessel also came in with male emigrants from Scotland; and another with females from Ireland; the former having lost twenty-three of her passengers in typhus fever during her voyage, was placed under quarantine on arrival.

15th.—Attended the funeral of our landlord, who died after a severe illness four days ago. It was not a pleasing task, to bear our public testimony against the forms and practices adopted on such occasions; but I did not feel satisfied to absent myself. The service was performed according to the usual forms of the Episcopalian establishment; and although consisting of Scripture language was painfully inapplicable to the occasion. Our standing the whole time with our hats on, might be a new thing in the colony, but no notice was openly taken of it.

22nd.—Arrived the Marian Watson from Hobarton. Went on board and secured our passage on her return. Two days ago we very accidentally ascertained, from a public print, that the house and furniture where we are lodging are advertised for sale almost immediately. This circumstance, for lack of any previous notice, has subjected us to much inconvenience, and no light expense, as the Marian Watson will not be ready for sea for some time to come, so that we must occupy fresh quarters in the mean time. It may, however, serve renewedly to remind us, that here we have no continuing city of habitation; but if when the conflicts of time are ended, we should be mercifully favoured to reach one that has foundations and is everlasting, every earthly change and suffering will be light as the dust of the balance, and not worth a thought; save only as they may have contributed to work for us a far more exceeding and eternal weight of glory.

24th.—Having with much fatigue removed all our baggage to a hotel near the head of the cove, to be in readiness for embarkation, we expected to have ample time to make our final arrangements in a comfortable manner; but my Charles is so much indisposed, that I scarcely know whether to venture the risk of removing to Hobarton at this inclement season. He does not, however, appear willing, notwithstanding present discouragements, that the voyage should be delayed. Our lodgings are so infested with rats, that little undisturbed rest can be obtained at night; though we have exerted all the skill we are masters of, in blocking up their numerous holes, and have the assistance of an excellent cat.

30th. (First day.)—In the forenoon attended the meeting; I had to bear testimony to the power of Truth in the heart, if believed in and submitted to. Just as we are concerned to dwell near to this power in our daily walks through life, shall we be permitted to witness its influence upon our minds, when met together for the purpose of worshipping that God who is a Spirit, and must be worshipped in spirit and in truth. It was declared by the Saviour of the world, when personally on earth, that where two or three are gathered together in His name, there is He in the midst of them. But it would be well for us all to examine, whether we are met in His name? whether His name, which is His power, does rule and reign in our hearts? whether our thoughts are brought into obedience to the Spirit of Truth? None can meet in His name, in the expectation of witnessing His presence in the midst of them, but those who are subject to his power. It is for lack of submission to this power in our hearts, that so many sit in dry places, where there is neither dew, nor rain, nor fields of offering. Such go from meetings as they came, barren, unfruitful, and unrefreshed; yet the Divine promise stands fast. “Where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them.”

31st.—Left the colony of New South Wales, with a gentle and favourable breeze. There are on board ten prisoners in chains, with a guard of five soldiers, making up with the captain, crew and passengers, thirty-nine persons.

[After a voyage of eleven days, they reached Hobart Town, where they rejoined our friends James Backhouse and George W. Walker. Here again the ministerial labours of Daniel Wheeler, appear to have been pretty much confined to the meetings for Divine worship, kept up in this town by persons professing with Friends, and regularly held on First and Fifth

[Extract from a letter dated Hobart Town, Eighth Month 16th, 1837.]

It is encouraging to observe, that the number of those who profess with us in this place is considerably increased, since our visit three years ago; but the house where they meet is so small, that the addition of Charles and myself amounts almost to an inconvenience, and the members are not in a capacity of themselves to remedy the difficulty. On First day last, in the morning, eight persons appeared in the ministry; and I think the persevering manner in which several of these attend, under very discouraging circumstances, and the solid deportment they manifest, is a strong indication of their having found something, which “the topaz of Ethiopia cannot equal” in value, nor the wealth of the universe purchase. About forty persons were present. Of the above individuals alluded to as having spoken, six are of those who have joined the Society by convincement. I am told that occasionally a still greater number than this open their mouths; and is it not a natural consequence, that as the heart believes unto righteousness, with the mouth confession is made unto salvation. If these were to hold their peace, would not the very stones cry out? In my apprehension it does not necessarily follow, that such as these must become hereafter, or be extensively employed as gospel ministers; although they are thus constrained, like the tenth leper that was cleansed, to return and give glory to God, from a sensible conviction of the working of the power of the Spirit of Him, who speaks in righteousness, is mighty to save from sin, and that to the very uttermost. I need not say more of these interesting people, as I find from dear James Backhouse, that their case is already known to Friends in England in every particular.

22nd.—We attended a meeting of the temperance society, held in Hobart Town: my mind is more and more impressed with the great importance of this institution, from a conviction that next to the gospel of life and salvation, and the circulation of the Holy Scriptures, it is of the highest importance to the well being of the human race. Nothing stands more opposed to the benign influence of the gospel than intemperance. I believed it my duty to speak on this important subject.

27th.—In the forenoon the little meeting house was filled. James Backhouse had good service both in testimony and supplication. The afternoon meeting-was somewhat smaller: James Backhouse had again to exercise his gift. Although much of what was expressed during the day passed before the view of my mind, yet not feeling what I deem sufficient qualification to warrant my standing up, I had no part in the vocal service; and although under much poverty of spirit was not conscious of having withheld what should have been uttered.

Tenth Month 1st. (First day.)—In the forenoon an individual who has attended meetings for some time, expressed a few words under much exercise of mind: he said, it has been strongly impressed upon his mind to say, “the meek shall inherit the earth,”—adding, and the humble Christian does inherit all things. After some other communications, I had to remind the meeting that the two mites cast into the treasury by the poor widow, were of more value than all that had been given by the rich; these gave of their abundance, but she had given all that she had. It is not the magnitude of the offering that insures its acceptance with the Lord: He sees not as man sees. “Lebanon is not sufficient to burn, nor the beasts thereof for a burnt offering.”—“To obey is better than sacrifice, and to hearken to the voice of the Lord than the fat of rams.”—“If you know these things,” said our Lord to his immediate followers, “happy are you, if you do them.” Knowledge will profit us little, unless obedience keeps pace therewith. It is not the hearers of the law, but the doers, that are justified in the sight of Almighty God. “It is not every one that says unto me, Lord, Lord,” said Christ, “that shall enter into the kingdom, but he that does the will of my Father which is in heaven.” Therefore while we labour after humility and resignation of mind in sincerity to say, “not my will but yours be done,”—let us at the same time be earnestly desirous to ascertain what is the Lord's will concerning us. But this can never be done in the noise and mixture of the world; it must be sought for in retirement, in the silence of all flesh, and that more frequently than the returning morning, and in the night watches also. We cannot reasonably expect to be entrusted with a knowledge of the Divine will, if we conform to the world and its practices. “Be not conformed to this world, but be transformed by the renewing of your mind; that you may prove what is that good and acceptable and perfect will of God.” The judgments of the Lord must pass over the transgressing nature in our hearts to redeem us therefrom; and it is only by and through the righteousness of Christ believed in and operating in us, that our minds can be transformed and renewed unto God. The meeting was in the fore part very unsettled and discouraging, but it ended well under a very solemn feeling.

31st.—Not feeling bound to remain any longer on this side of the globe, we this day engaged places in the Lloyds, which arrived yesterday with part of her cargo of oil, to load out here for London.

Eleventh Month 3rd.—Accompanied J. Backhouse and G. W. Walker on board the Eudora, who were about to proceed to some of the South Australian settlements. We did not think well to add to their unsettled situation by remaining long on board; but soon took leave, parting from them in much love, and under a feeling of Divine regard. Whether we shall ever meet again in this world is very doubtful; and as regards myself at least, I consider it a final parting; yet we know the Lord can lengthen out our days at his pleasure. To Him I desire to commend both them and ourselves. The Eudora was crowded with passengers, and in my apprehension a very undesirable vessel to sail in; but our dear friends seemed to have no alternative left.

27th.—This day completed my sixty-sixth year. May the Lord be graciously pleased to make me more and more, a living monument of his everlasting mercy; and to humble me before Him under a sense thereof, until He shall say “it is enough.”

30th.—Visited a young man in the hospital, who has just arrived here as a convict. His family were formerly in comfortable circumstances in England. He appears to have long strayed from the paths of virtue; but the laws of his country have now arrested his wild career, and he is sensible of his deplorable situation. I was led to commiserate his case, thinking it very possible, that though the hand of human justice has overtaken him, and he is doomed to several years of painful and degrading exile; yet that in reality he may not have been more evil-disposed than some others, who have escaped the laws of man, who and have in a still greater degree transgressed the laws of a righteous God, and been still more offensive in His sight. Amongst these I feel willing to number myself, remembering as I write, the words of the compassionate Saviour,—“Or those eighteen on whom the tower of Siloam fell and slew them, do you think that they were greater sinners than all men that dwell in Jerusalem? I tell you no; but except you repent, you shall all likewise perish.”

Twelfth Month 7th.—Received a letter from our cousin John Kitching, communicating the mournful intelligence that my precious [daughter] Jane had finished her course, and entered into rest. These tidings had truly flown quickly, as it still eight days less than four months since they were dispatched from Petersburg. Although this was sudden at last, and truly overwhelming for a time, yet the mercy and goodness of our heavenly Father soon changed the strain of sorrow, into that of adoration and thanksgiving,—binding up all the wounds of affliction in the healing virtue of His everlasting love: for her end had been truly peaceful; death was deprived of its sting, and the grave of its victory. Thus, the eldest and the youngest of my flock, have been gathered, since we left them, into the arms of everlasting mercy; while we are left a little longer in this vale of tears. May the Lord Most High be graciously pleased to prepare us also in like manner, for the heavenly kingdom.

After calling upon all our friends and acquaintance for the last time, and desiring their welfare in the utmost signification of the word 'farewell,' we embarked on board the Lloyds late in the evening of the 9th; and early next morning, being First day, the 10th of Twelfth Month 1837, we began to glide gently down the Derwent towards Storm Bay. We should have been rejoiced if the First day could have been spent in harbour; but I believe the captain was desirous to get to sea, in order to keep his crew from getting intoxicated on shore, which often happens on such occasions, and causes serious delay to the shipping.

In the course of our stay at Hobarton we paid several satisfactory visits to the Lieutenant-governor Sir John Frankland and his family. Although the sphere in which they are accustomed to move, is not one that comports with those who profess to be followers of the lowly Jesus; yet we were not satisfied to shrink from such exposure altogether, however the non-compliance on our parts with the usual practices at such times, might entitle us to the appellation of fools by some of the more gay and thoughtless part of the company; if however the watch was properly maintained, our conduct may prove beneficial to others, by leading them to inquire into the cause of our differing so widely in life and conversation from our fellow-men.

[The voyage to London, by way of Cape Horn, was completed on the 1st of Fifth Month, 1838.]

[The following are the closing extracts from the South Sea Journal:]—

After a voyage of four months and twenty days from Van Diemen's Land, and the changes from heat to cold twice experienced during that time, my own health seemed scarcely to have been impaired; but from the weakly state of my dear Charles, whose constitution had been much shaken by a lengthened illness previous to our leaving Europe, he was less able to bear the total lack of vegetables for many weeks, to which we were exposed, and the small quantity of fresh water, and that of a quality scarcely wholesome, to which we were subjected the latter part of the passage. With these disadvantages, which there is reason to believe contributed to reduce his already diminished strength, he landed in a very feeble and languid condition; but I humbly trust, he is under the immediate and protecting care of the great Physician, who alone has power to heal, and to bless every endeavour to restore.

I should not be satisfied to conclude this unconnected and imperfect narrative, without saying, how greatly I have been aided in the course of this religious engagement by the missionaries from different societies in Europe and North America; who very kindly acted as interpreters on my behalf to the native congregations on the islands where my lot was cast, and opened their meeting-houses for our accommodation in the most brotherly manner; to whom, for this assistance and Christian kindness many ways exhibited, we feel gratefully and highly indebted.

I may also be allowed to add at the same time, that having been encouraged by my dear friends at home to accept the company of my son Charles Wheeler, I have found him very useful and strengthening to me, during our long sojourn in foreign parts, in a variety of instances, and on many important occasions.²⁶

For the best welfare of the dear and interesting people, who inhabit those isles afar off, which in the love of the gospel, I have thus been drawn forth, and enabled to visit,—a petition however feeble, must ever dwell in my heart; and on whose behalf I would earnestly and affectionately crave the fervent aspirations of all my dear brethren and sisters, when it is well with them: and may they unite with me in commemorating the mercy, loving-kindness and faithfulness of Him, who for His great name's sake, and for His beloved Son's sake, wrought the work,—has so marvellously sustained us through every season of trial and conflict, and delivered us out of every distress: that the thanksgiving of many may resound to His praise, to whom the kingdom, and the power, and the glory, belong forever.

Chapter XXXV.

Attends the Yearly Meeting in London of 1838—His Prospect of Religious Service in America—Visits His Family in Russia, Eighth Month, 1838—Sails to New York, First Month, 1839—Travels in the United States—Attends Yearly Meetings of Philadelphia, Virginia And New York.

Shortly after leaving England on my way to the islands of the Pacific, an unfading evidence was granted me that I should have to visit North America, after the service on which I was then entering should be accomplished. Such a marvellous unfolding of the Divine will as to the future, so condescendingly vouchsafed and permitted to make an impression on my mind at so great a length of time before-hand, could not fail to support, comfort, and strengthen me in every season of trial and conflict both inward and outward, which I had afterwards to pass through; and although at seasons my mind was put closely to the test, it was again and again renewed from the heavenly treasury of living faith, to strengthen my confidence in its holy Author and Finisher: for the brightest gleam of that soul-sustaining loving-kindness which is better than life, soon loses its lustre, unless renewed from time to time by Him in whose presence only there is life.

The statement which I felt called upon to render to the Yearly Meeting held soon after our return to England was very short, as my beloved friends were already in possession of the extracts from my Journal; and the time was not come for me to disclose how I had been favoured with such an evidence beforehand of a safe return to the land of my fathers. My exercise of mind during the Yearly Meeting may more easily be conceived than described: and though my countenance might sparkle with joy at once more beholding my brethren and sisters in religious fellowship, my heart was full of a subject which nothing could relieve but disclosure; and that seemed denied, until the appointed days were fulfilled that the seal should be opened, and the thing proclaimed as on the house-top. At times I would gladly have taken counsel as to the right path of proceeding with my concern; but it seemed my place not to confer with flesh and blood, but to keep my eye steadily fixed on that Almighty power, which alone can qualify us like the left-handed sons of Benjamin, to throw a stone to a hairs breadth.

Eventually my way opened with clearness to attend Balby Monthly Meeting, and York Quarterly Meeting in the Sixth Month; and having returned the certificates granted five years and a half ago, after a brief statement of my late journey, and mentioning the earnest of a return in safety, which the Lord had granted me, I had to inform Friends that I no longer stood before them as one returning, but as one requesting a certificate to enable me to visit various parts of North America. As regarded my children, for whom I think I felt more than for myself, I remember telling York Quarterly Meeting when my concern was laid before it, that though human nature keenly felt the separation from, and would gladly remain in possession of its greatest earthly treasure, yet I did believe I could not promote the welfare of my beloved family in any manner so much, as by my own faithfulness to what I apprehended to be the duty required of me. A certificate was granted, setting me at liberty to pursue the prospect then before the view of my mind. That I might not be chargeable in the sight of any, with neglecting to look after the affairs of my own household, it seemed best for me before embarking for America, to visit the residence of my family on the plains of Shoosharry; although if my own inclination only had been consulted, I should have preferred, on several accounts, proceeding immediately across the Atlantic, after having passed the Morning Meeting in London.

[This visit to Russia was satisfactorily accomplished: setting out on the 1st of Eighth Month, Daniel Wheeler passed about as many weeks at his former abode as he had been years absent; returning through Finland and Stockholm, he reached London again on the 22nd of Tenth Month, and finally embarked from Liverpool on the 25th of Eleventh Month following. It was no small trial to leave behind, in a drooping state of health, his son Charles, the faithful companion of his long journeyings. From the boyhood of the latter they had, with but little exception, dwelt under the same roof; and after the very close association of the last few years, almost by day and night, the separation now demanded was more than ordinarily painful to him. In a letter from Daniel Wheeler, written at sea, it is thus alluded to.

Twelfth Month 26th, 1838.

Having for so many years had the society of my dear Charles, under all circumstances, and through each wintry season as it revolved, I have never before felt so friendless and childless, as is now my portion. This circumstance, and the recollection of the bereavements which have befallen us about this dreary season, combine to darken the shade of the gloomy picture, with a deeper hue than it often has had, when clad in its own natural and beautiful, though cheerless garb. Truly may I say, “I had fainted if I had not believed,” to see the loving-kindness of the Lord, and the greatness of his goodness, which is laid up for them that fear Him, and that trust in Him before the sons of men. In the time of trouble He does hide them in His pavilion, in the secret of His tabernacle shall He hide them; He shall set them upon a rock. Although weak and feeble, and utterly unworthy in my own estimation, without might or power, storehouse or barn; yet, through that “mercy” which is “from everlasting to everlasting,” I am at seasons, while floating on the mighty deep, permitted to feel an inward support in the belief, that I am moving in my heavenly Father's will,—for truly it is not in my own,—there is one that knows and judges righteously: of this thing I am sure and certain from incontrovertible evidence, and herein is my rejoicing and hope.

Let none be cast down or discouraged; for greater is He that is for us, than he that is against us: and although many are the trials of faith and patience, the deep baptisms, and the tribulations which the Lord's children have to pass through, yet He delivers out of them all; and He will deliver, and that to the very uttermost, all that in sincerity trust in Him. And how does He mercifully vouchsafe unto such, in the abounding of His love, a blessed portion of that “peace which passes all understanding,” to sustain them in the way that they should go.

[Towards the conclusion of his voyage to America, he thus writes.]

First day, Twelfth Month, 30th, 1838. We have seventeen cabin passengers, and amongst this number, several very dissolute characters; who have passed most of the voyage in drinking and gambling, almost day and night: but the succession of storms which have followed us of late, and their disappointment at not reaching our port as they expected, upon which event they have even risked several sums of money,—seem at length to have brought them to their senses in a remarkable manner. This morning, I found my mind brought into deep thoughtfulness; and was willing, if way should open, either to do or to suffer on their account. I thought of mentioning the subject to one of my fellow-passengers, of whose integrity of life and conversation I have had some proof; but no opportunity offered, until he came to me, saying it would be very agreeable to some of the company, and to the captain, if I would address them when assembled together. I told him the subject had rested with me, and that if we could have a time of silence, if any thing arose for expression, it should not be withheld. This he readily undertook to arrange, and at a fixed time, the whole party was collected. I was not aware that this person had previously selected a Psalm to be read by himself, until all was quiet; he then opened the Bible and commenced: it was the thirty-seventh Psalm, and it appeared very appropriate to the occasion. A general silence followed, until my mouth was opened to declare what arose in my mind in the “word of the truth of the gospel,” setting forth the terms of discipleship, and the necessity of a preparation of heart, before true worship can be offered; it was at considerable length, and to my own peace and comfort. They appeared measurably sobered, and have passed the afternoon in a rational manner, some of them for the first time since coming on board. We had a heavy blow last night, and lost the main-top sail before morning, which I think contributed to humble them.

31st.—This evening we were saluted with the joyful sound, from a fast sailing clipper schooner, 'Do you need a pilot? which being answered in the affirmative, 'then heave to' was the word. Our decks rang with the cheers of all on board I believe, but myself, when our courses were hauled up, and the main-yard immediately thrown to the mast. The pilot soon boarded us to leeward, and the 'guessing' shortly commenced,—such as, 'I guess you are from Liverpool? 'I guess you have had pretty smart weather? Etc. For my own part, I 'guessed' from the rapid motion of the clouds, that we should have another rough night, and so it proved. As the ship was beating to windward, the crew were toiling incessantly through the whole of it; and such was the noise, and confusion on board, that very little sleep could be obtained.

[The Extracts which follow are from Daniel Wheeler's Journal and letters.]

First Month 1st, 1839.—This morning the Never Sink hills were in sight, and we worked up the bay amidst fields of floating ice, drifting from the mouth of the Hudson river. The morning was so foggy in the neighbourhood of the city, that the signal of the telegraph announcing the approach of the George Washington, was not discovered by the 'look out,' so that we were within three miles of the wharf at New York, before a steamer came to assist us through the ice. By the way, I think the method of steering the American steamers is admirable: the helmsman is stationed in the fore part of the vessel, where he can see all before him, instead of being in the after part, where he can scarcely see any thing for the masts, etc. of his own vessel: he is also sheltered from the weather in a large lantern, the windows of which, he can open or shut at pleasure. Before noon we were at our desired haven, and I trust that some of our hearts were filled with gratitude and thankfulness.

Though unexpected and a perfect stranger, as by some means I had left England, without any introductions for New York, I was kindly received on shore by John R. Willis. In the afternoon, it was finally arranged that I should become an inmate with J. and P. Clapp.

2nd.—Attended the week-day meeting for worship and the Monthly meeting held at its close. In the former, I had a short testimony to bear to the faithfulness of that God with whom we have to do.

4th.—Had a most unexpected visit from my much loved friend Stephen Grellet, who had come from his home at Burlington to see me. He struck me as very little altered since we parted in Petersburg twenty years ago. It was truly delightful to meet him again, though the interview could not fail to awaken many painful recollections of days that are past, when our little family circle was unbroken, and, as far as we can expect enjoyment while on earth, happy in itself. But though many seasons of sorrow were brought to remembrance, the never failing mercy of the Lord could be traced to have compassed us about as with a shield, for His great name's sake, from the time of our separation up to this very day.

6th. (First day.)—In the early part of the meeting this morning I was greatly bowed down; but in the Lord's time was raised up to declare the way of life and salvation, and the necessity of the whole heart being given up to follow the Son of Man in the regeneration. In the afternoon I had to revive the words of the apostle,—“the weapons of our warfare are not carnal, but mighty through God to the pulling down of strongholds querying, what we knew of this for ourselves.

15th.—We were favoured with a blessed meeting, when the poor in spirit were declared to be those, to whom the gospel was ever and is still preached. Elizabeth Coggeshall afterwards knelt down, and gave the glory to Him, who had thus condescended to grant us that drop of heavenly refreshment.

20th.—In the forenoon meeting, I had to declare the necessity for all to come to the knowledge and possession of true faith; which can only be obtained from its ever blessed author and finisher.

23rd.—Attended the Select Meeting at Westbury, where I had to encourage Friends to faithfulness in the maintenance of that cause, which is as precious at the present day as when David replied to the remonstrances of his elder brother, “What have I now done? Is there not a cause?” Although in the promotion of this dignified cause, we may certainly have to drink of the cup which the Master drank of, and be baptised with the same baptism that he was baptised withal. The disciple is not above his master, nor the servant above his lord, etc.

24th.—Attended the Quarterly Meeting, in which I had to sound an alarm amongst Friends, declaring that the Most High will have a church, He will have a people for himself, that shall show forth his praise. Many were willing and ready to join in the “Hosannato the son of David;” but how few were found to confess Him, and to stand by Him, at the blood-stained cross: one betrayed his Master, another denied Him, and they all forsook Him and fled. I stood long on my feet, and had peace afterwards.

On the 25th, the meeting for public worship was again held, and I was largely opened amongst them. The young people were earnestly entreated to hearken to the voice of wisdom, and offer an early sacrifice to the Lord: and I had to acknowledge the loving-kindness of the Lord in spreading the mantle of His heavenly presence over us, to my own comfort, and I trust to the satisfaction of my brethren also. In the evening, some opportunities were afforded to address large companies of Friends, assembled at each other's houses.

27th.—Attended the meetings for worship, and had service in both, to my own peace.

28th.—Set out for Burlington, accompanied by Samuel Clapp and Wager Hull by steam-boat to Amboy, from there by rail-road: the route led by the house and grounds of Joseph Buonaparte, on the banks of the Delaware. A heavy storm of wind and rain on the 26th, had raised the water in many parts to an unusual height, and occasioned much loss of property by sweeping the quays even of heavy articles, such as coal. The rising of the Delaware had spread large masses of ice over the neighbourhood; and the railroad by which we have travelled was in places entirely hidden by the water, which was still too high to be confined within its usual limits. The car in which we rode held about forty persons, with a stove in the middle of it, well supplied with fuel, which made it sufficiently warm. Reached Burlington as it became dark, and were soon conducted to the abode of dear Stephen Grellet. Remained here over their preparative meeting on the 31st, and had an opportunity of calling on many Friends.

Second Month 1st.—Took leave of the family, where my residence had been delightful, and which reminded me of dwelling in a nest of turtle doves. Friends of this place appear to live in much harmony, and have not witnessed many of those afflicting circumstances, in which many other meetings have shared, from the Hicksite apostacy. Proceeded to Philadelphia in company with my country-people Thomas and Elizabeth Robson, S. Grellet and other Friends; crossed the Delaware opposite the city by steam bridge: we lodged at the house of Ellis Yarnall, a quiet retreat indeed. Next day I attended and had service in the Select Meeting.

3rd. (First Day.)—Attended the meeting for the Western district in the morning, and was largely engaged therein. In the afternoon was at the Arch Street meeting, and from the oppressive heat of the house, had to labour under discouraging circumstances as to the body, but was enabled to declare the way of the Lord amongst them.

4th.—The Quarterly Meeting was held this day: it was the largest meeting of Friends I ever saw, except the Yearly Meeting in London: the attendance was greater, perhaps by one third, on the women's side of the house, than on the men's; and this is more or less the case wherever I go. I had to press upon Friends the necessity of attaining that state, which characterizes all the living members of the gospel church.

8th.—Attended the meetings in the northern and western districts, and had good service therein. The former is considered the largest in Philadelphia.

On the 12th, 13th, and 14th, I attended the North, the Orange Street and the Arch Street Meetings, in all of which my mouth was opened.

On the 15th, I visited an afflicted family, the mother having died two days before. After seeing the corpse, we had a contriting opportunity with the father and children, under the wing of the Prince of Peace. Coming to Philadelphia seems to haw opened a wide door for me in the minds of a large body of Friends, and gives strength again to move forward: leaving New York has I trust been in the right ordering, in which I humbly pray to be preserved.

17th.—At the forenoon meeting under much discouragement. Had to stand some time amongst the people, and to insist on the necessity of our doing the will of the Holy Father, if we would know the doctrine of the Son; unto those thus found in obedience, his doctrine shall distil as the dew, and as the small rain upon the tender herb: they shall inherit substance, and shall certainly know that they have not followed cunningly devised fables, but living and substantial truth.

[The following is a letter of Daniel Wheeler written about this time to John Wilbur:²⁷]

To John Wilbur

Philadelphia, 2nd of Second Month, 1839.

My Dear Friend John Wilbur,

When just on the eve of taking my departure from New York for this city, your letter of the 22nd alt. was received; and truly welcome it was to hear from you once more upon your own shores. My time has been fully occupied ever since, in Burlington and its neighborhood, until yesterday, when I left, and got here in the afternoon. On leaving England for North America, I had no defined plan in prospect of what I might have to do when I got there; but it was clear to my mind that the first step which I had to take was to make the best of my way there; and since my arrival I have found that I must be content to live one day alone, and am thankful to be able to say that thus far I have been graciously supported and helped along to my own admiration and comfort and peace. I am not, however, insensible that bonds and afflictions abide me; and I do not feel any disposition to shrink from feeling the burden of them, believing that if they be accepted for Christ's sake and his gospel's; in his own time, if patiently abode under, the freedom and liberty and consolations of the gospel will also be permitted at seasons to abound to his praise.

Without anticipating more tribulation to be my portion than what falls to the lot of other mortals, I cannot conceive it should be otherwise than a day of suffering with those who are called upon to fill up a share of that which remains for the body's sake according to their measure, when those things which make truly desolate, and destitute of the Divine presence, stand where they ought not, (in the place which should be holy,) instead of that pure vital religion which the spirituality of the gospel dispensation bestows upon all that believe in its teachings; and it is these only that know it to be the power of God unto salvation from sin and transgression. How many are contenting themselves at this day, even though making high profession of the Christian religion, with a mere outward declaration of “glad tidings of good things, and great joy to all people,” without coming to the heartfelt knowledge of this very gospel within themselves, though preached in and to every creature under heaven, in language as intelligible as that of the angel which John saw fly through the midst of heaven with it in his hand, who cried with a loud voice, “Fear God and give glory to him,” and which is only hidden from those “whose minds are blinded by the god of this world, lest the light of the glorious gospel of Christ should shine unto them!” It is much more palatable to the creature to be fed with pleasant food from the tree of knowledge, which never can sustain the soul and was never intended for man to feed upon, though good in its proper place, (and if to a proper extent cultivated, allowable,) than to have the attention turned to that holy principle of gospel light which shines in every heart, which would set a man's sins in order before him without flattery or deceit, whereby he might be induced to commence the great and necessary work, and learn the first principles of the doctrines of Christ, which is “repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ,” by faith in the power of the Holy Spirit to purify and cleanse the heart from every defilement. “Repent and believe the gospel,” “Repent and obey the gospel,” is coarse food in the present day.

Farewell, my dear friend; desiring my love to yourself and family, I am your affectionate friend,

Daniel Wheeler.

Third Month 11th.—Since the last entry very much confined to the house with an attack of influenza, which has prevailed here very generally. My mind has often been brought very low; but my gracious Master has been pleased to enable me to stand resigned to every dispensation of His holy will. Many Friends have called to console and comfort me, and the estimable family with whom my lot has been cast, have lost no opportunity to administer to my relief in every way; so that in every thing I have abundant cause to give thanks to Him, through whom all my needs have been so mercifully supplied. Yesterday got to meeting, and had a short testimony to bear,—that the path to the kingdom changes not, but is the same now as in the beginning; and this way is Jesus, the first and the last, the Alpha and the Omega, the beginning and the ending, the bright and morning star.

17th.—At the Western district meeting. Shortly after gathering, the silence was broken by one of the Hicksite preachers. His doctrine was guarded, and condemnable rather for what he had not spoken, than for what he did speak. I thought that those who really knew what he was, were certainly blame-worthy in not apprising the elders, so that the meeting might not have been disturbed by him. The discourses of these people are frequently very extravagant; denying the divinity of the Lord who bought them, in terms little short of blasphemy.

19th.—Attended the North meeting, after which the preparative meeting was held. In the meeting for worship, seven ministers were present, but not a word spoken. It is truly and sorrowfully a low time, in which the rightly concerned must be willing to suffer with their suffering Lord, and be crucified with Him, in the spiritual Sodom and Egypt of the present day.

20th.—Attended the Western meeting; after which the Monthly Meeting was held. I have been silent in several meetings of late, and at times much depressed from day to day. In the meeting for worship, a Friend from another meeting spoke encouragingly to my state, as one acquainted with the Lord's dealings, and the trials his servants have to pass through.

24th. (First day.)—Attended the Western district meeting in the morning, which was much disturbed by the indisposition of a female who had to retire, and by an alarm of fire. My mind was under exercise, and a woman Friend standing up, led the way for my declaring, that the Lord most assuredly is looking for fruit, even the fruit of the Spirit; afterwards reciting the words of our Saviour to his disciples,—“Herein is my Father glorified, that you bear much fruit; so shall you be my disciples. Every branch in me that bears not fruit, He takes away; and every branch that bears fruit, He purges it, that it may bring forth more fruit,” etc. I felt somewhat relieved at the close of the meeting.

In the evening attended a meeting appointed by Elizabeth Robson for the young people particularly. Dear Elizabeth Robson had to speak of the blessedness of those who take up the cross, and follow the Lord Jesus, and of the impossibility of serving two masters: towards the conclusion she supplicated on their behalf. It might be termed a solid meeting; but it seemed to me that the minds of too many of our young people have already been so much dazzled with the glare of creaturely activity and excitement, as to have but little relish for the plain but incontrovertible truths of the gospel in their primitive purity. O! the beguiling influence of human wisdom! how does it corrupt from the simplicity that is in Jesus: it strikes at the very life of spiritual Christianity

25th.—The day rough and cold with showers of snow. My health through favour is much restored: my only need is more and more of the Divine presence, and more ability to exalt the cause of truth and righteousness in the earth.

26th.—Attended the North meeting, after which their Monthly Meeting was held, and my certificates were read.

27th and 28th.—Attended the Orange Street and Arch Street meetings, after each of which the Monthly Meeting was held. At all the Monthly Meetings I have recently attended, it is very painful to witness the number of young persons who are leaving the Society. These for the most part were minors when their parents became Hicksites; and as they become of age, are disowned for non-attendance of meetings. Others, again, are selling their birthright for a mess of pottage; and it is evident, from the inconsistency of conduct of hundreds in this city, how lightly they esteem the principles in which they have been educated. Alas! Alas! what will they do in the end.

31st.—Attended the meeting now held as the wreck of the once large and comfortable meeting of Merion, consisting of thirty-six to forty persons. I had to stand up amongst them and testify, that “the law is holy, and the commandment holy, and just, and good”—that the true worshippers are no longer under the law of sin and death, but under the law of the Spirit of life in Christ Jesus, which makes free from the law of sin and death. They are not under the dominion of sin, but under grace,—that grace and truth which came by Jesus Christ: the Truth has made them free, and they are free indeed. It is only such that can worship the Father in the beauty of holiness, and in newness of life.

Fourth Month 1st.—Accompanied Israel Morris to Haverford. Here is established a school for Friends' children, where the higher branches of learning are taught, at present to about seventy boys; but as the vacation is near at hand, and preparations making for an examination before that commences, I saw no part of the usual routine of the institution.

4th.—Attended the meeting at Haverford. It was a restless and trying time to me. I had to revive among them the passage, beginning—“Let not the wise man glory in his wisdom, neither let the mighty man glory in his might. Let not the rich man glory in his riches; but let him that glories, glory in this, that he that understands and knows me, that I am the Lord, which exercise loving-kindness, judgment, and righteousness in the earth; for in these things I delight, says the Lord.”

7th. (First day.)—Attended both meetings at Burlington, having come by steam-boat yesterday. In the forenoon I stood up with these expressions,—the royal Psalmist, than whom none could bear a more ample testimony to the lovingkindness, mercy, and faithfulness of the Lord, had nevertheless his share of trial, and had at seasons to mourn as a dove in the absence of his Beloved; as when we find him making the solemn appeal,—“Will the Lord cast off forever, and will He be favourable no more?” etc. In the afternoon, I revived the words of our dear Redeemer,—“Strive to enter in at the strait gate”—which strait gate remains to be the only way to the kingdom. If “we live after the flesh, we shall die: but if we through the Spirit, do mortify the deeds of the body, we shall live;” the life of the Christian is a continual warfare,—the flesh against the Spirit, and the Spirit against the flesh; but the weapons of his warfare are inward and spiritual, and “mighty through God,” etc.

8th.—Spent the afternoon much to my satisfaction with our ancient friend John Cox, eighty-seven years of age: he is a minister, and alive in the Truth. In the evening _______ arrived from New York, whom it was very pleasant to meet again.

9th.—Returned to New York, and found J. Clapp and family well, and as kind as heretofore. The next day attended the meeting here, which proved satisfactory. I had to allude to the blessedness and peace that are the portion of the children of God, who have been ransomed from their sins by the blood of Jesus, and redeemed by submission to the operation of His Holy Spirit in their hearts: reviving the language of the prophet,—“Look upon Zion, the city of our solemnities; your eyes shall see Jerusalem a quiet habitation,—a tabernacle that shall not be taken down.” Several others spoke.

11th.—Returned by rail-road to Philadelphia, having the company of Anna A. Jenkins and her companion from Providence.

12th.—Attended the Meeting for Sufferings, which was large, nearly all the members being present. The subject of slavery came before it; and the case of the oppressed slaves, as well as of the slave-holders, was treated with much feeling. Many Friends seem under much concern on this subject; and on account of those of our numbers who have joined the Colonization Society, which is not unlike sanctioning the continuance of this cruel system. May the Lord be graciously pleased to break this inhuman yoke asunder.

13th.—Attended the first sitting of the Yearly Meeting of ministers and elders: it was a low time with me, and I believe with others also.

14th. (First day.)—Attended the meeting in Twelfth Street, in the fore-part of which Anna A. Jenkins appeared in supplication. A young minister followed in a lively testimony; after which I found an exercise which I was enabled to throw off, and had to encourage the young man who preceded me. A Friend who sat by me, afterwards said, that he was sensible when my concern came on, it was suddenly 'like a flash,' and so it was; under the feeling of which, I stood up almost immediately, and was afterwards comforted.

15th.—The Yearly Meeting at large sat down. I little thought that it would be my lot to break in upon the solemnity that prevailed, until a short interval before I found that I could do no other than petition on the bended knee, that the Lord in his everlasting mercy would be pleased to lift up the light of His heavenly countenance upon us. After taking my seat again, my soul was melted in humble contrition before Him, who lives forever and ever.

The Yearly Meeting continued by adjournments until the 19th instant inclusive, and was an exercising time, on account of the too general departure from, and ignorance of that light and truth, which distinguished the meetings of our worthy predecessors in so eminent a manner. On the subject of meetings for worship, I had one remark to make; and to declare that if ever we suffered the righteous testimony to the teachings of that Divine grace which has appeared unto all men, to fall to the ground, or be lowered by departure from a silent waiting upon God for the blessed influence of the Holy Spirit, to enable us to worship Him aright,—the glory would depart from our Israel, and nothing be left us but an empty name.

On the morning of the 15th, before the sun was up, the love of God flowed through my heart towards our beloved sisters in their Yearly Meeting; but this blessed visitation soon passed away as a morning cloud, leaving not a trace behind: and yet it was in the same glorious manner, but shorter and in a less degree, as that which once prompted me to visit the distant isles of the ocean. I felt no more of it, although my mind often recurred to the manifestation during a time of great sensible weakness and self-abasement for several successive sittings; wherein was remarkably verified the necessity for the feet of the priests to stand firm in the bottom of Jordan with the ark of the testimony, until all the people had clean passed over. When all the minutes were gone through, and the principal cases disposed of, dear Elizabeth Robson came into the men's meeting: before this scarcely any thing in the line of ministry was offered by any one: but now the seals seemed to be loosed. E. R. was highly favoured, and bore an awakening testimony among us. This opened the way for me to follow, exhorting all to turn to the Lord with full purpose of heart, in the very depths of humility. My soul had mourned over the low state of things among us: the sorrowful and manifest declension, which had so greatly marred and defaced our religious Society, might be traced to our having departed in heart from that precious principle of light and life, bestowed in redeeming mercy on every individual of the human race. It is high time to lay aside the unfruitful works of darkness, and to put on the whole armour of light; for the day is far spent, and the night is at hand.

On the 19th, the prospect above-mentioned again revived before me, and in the afternoon I thought I could not allow the meeting to conclude without making some attempt to bring it about. I hinted my situation to an elder in the meeting-house yard, when our meeting was gathering, who advised me to proceed with it; and as soon as the clerk had opened the meeting, I spread my concern before it, and Friends rising in quick succession with a word of encouragement, I was soon set at liberty. I had full opportunity to clear my mind in a crowded meeting, to my own great relief; and perhaps some longing desires might be raised in the hearts of individuals after that purity of heart and life, in which the Lord delights: the result I desire to leave to Him, who sees the end from the beginning. As the men's meeting gathered, my exercise had become stronger and stronger, in tender mercy confirming me that it was of the Lord; and truly His heavenly power and presence went with me, and enabled me richly to open the way of life to my beloved sisters, and to encourage them to press toward the mark for the prize immortal, the high calling of God in Christ Jesus. I understood afterwards, that no other time during the whole Yearly Meeting, would have been so seasonable as the one I was pressed to resort to. Trust in the Lord, O! my soul!

21st.—Attended both meetings; in the forenoon I had to deal very plainly: in the afternoon was silent.

23rd.—Attended the funeral of Timothy Paxton, a worthy elder, whom I had visited in the course of his sickness. The crucified Saviour was declared to a large assemblage, including I suppose many Hicksites, but all was quietly received.

27th.—Proceeded to Wilmington and was kindly received at the abode of Samuel Hillis. This city is built in a'well chosen situation, with the noble Delaware in its front, and the Brandy Wine and Christiana rivers navigable up to the wharfs. At the foot of the Brandy Wine, many mills are established, where the bulk of the American flour that is exported is dried and ground.

Attended both meetings in Wilmington, in which I had some service. In the afternoon an ancient Friend spoke, which opened the way for me to quote the apostolic declaration,—“That which may be known of God, is manifest in man, for God has showed it unto him”—making a solemn appeal to some present, whether they were not treating the Spirit of the Lord in their hearts, as His holy person was treated when on earth by the Jews; when “He was despised and rejected of men, a man of sorrows and acquainted with grief.” Assuredly, a day will come when He who now pleads with them for their own soul's sake, in matchless love and mercy, shall be their judge. “I judge no man. The words that I speak, the same shall judge them at the last day.”

Fifth Month 3rd.—Went over two whaling vessels, lately returned from the Pacific,—in one, found a poor solitary New Zealander; of course little could be done in the way of conversation, as he spoke but little English. One of these vessels had been out only twenty-two months, the other nearly four years, and at last returned with only a scanty cargo.

4th.—Attended the Monthly Meeting: to myself a lifeless season. A number of young persons at schools kept by Friends in this neighbourhood attend meetings; which tends very much to make them unsettled and unsatisfactory, as some of the boys particularly are very restless, and appear insensible of the true intent of our meeting together. I found that unless they came to meetings, their teachers would have to remain at home with them, and Friends on this account make allowances, and bear these things with much Christian charity.

5th. (First day.)—Had good service in the forenoon meeting, declaring the blessedness of those who do the will of the Father, by hearkening to the voice of His well-beloved Son. In the evening I had a public meeting, to which the inhabitants at large were invited: a considerable number assembled, but the house was not filled. It was an exercising time to myself, arising in part from the weight of responsibility resting upon me, and partly from having an intoxicated individual seated directly before me, who fell asleep, and leaned forward so much that his hat fell twice from his head. An attempt was made to persuade him to go home, but did not succeed: he eventually roused up, I was informed, and listened attentively. I sat pretty long before I felt strength to stand up. At length the following expressions crossed my mind, and brought with them the ability to testify, that “the God of Israel is He that gives strength and power to his people. Blessed be God!” I had abundant cause as on many former occasions, to magnify that Almighty power, which enabled me to declare His mercy and His truth among the people; enlarging my heart, as I proceeded to speak with innocent boldness of the things of His kingdom. It was with me to set forth the glories of the present gospel day, and to query how far we were individually contributing or otherwise to promote its fulness, as we have each a responsible part to act in the great work. My late visit to the South Seas was adverted to, and the message with which I was charged by Paofai, and of the principal chiefs of the island of Eimeo, was faithfully delivered.²⁸ I had to point out the dreadful national responsibility we were incurring, and the imperative necessity for all earnestly to consider, whether they were clear of contributing in any manner to the sacrifice of those poor islanders, who are fast vanishing from the surface of the earth, in consequence of their interaction with foreigners; reviving the words of the prophet of the Most High, “shall I not visit for these things; shall not my soul be avenged upon such a nation?” It was a solemn opportunity, and was overshadowed by the wing of everlasting love: so that my soul could truly say, I trust with humble reverence, at the end as at the beginning,—“Blessed be God,” who alone gives strength and power to His people.

10th.—Attended the meeting this day, which was a highly favoured season. A precious remnant was present, capable of appreciating this signal instance of Divine regard vouchsafed even in this degenerate day, as a brook by the way.

11th.—Took leave of Friends, and left Wilmington by railroad, with a peaceful mind. We crossed the noble Susquehanna river at Havre de Grace, and several branches of the Chesapeak bay and the Gunpowder water, on the way to Baltimore: we reached this city early in the afternoon, where I am now kindly entertained at the house of Dr. Thomas. The passage of the Susquehanna, which I have just mentioned is by steamer, and is so managed that from leaving the railway car on one side, till again seated in a fresh car on the other side, the passenger is constantly under cover, so that whatever be the weather, he is provided for.

12th.—In the forenoon meeting I was closely engaged, standing up with the words of the blessed Redeemer,—“You worship what you do not know.” However abrupt and unpalatable the accusation might appear, I found that I had no other course to take. Many Hicksites were at the meeting, for whom what I had to say might have seemed to have been previously prepared, if I had known that they would have been at the meeting: it was, however, a solid meeting. The afternoon meeting was silent as to myself, but we had the ministry of another Friend to satisfaction.

14th.—Believing that I could do no less than endeavour to meet the sailors, and others connected with a sea-faring life, arrangements were made for this purpose; and the privilege obtained of the use of the Bethel chapel, when it was ascertained that the stranger for whom it was requested was not a Hicksite: the meeting was held at a suitable hour in the evening, and was considered large. As regards myself, it was a low season; and I believed while sitting in silence before them, that but few were present of the description whom my soul longed after. I was strengthened to declare the everlasting gospel amongst them; but seemed led along to a class making much higher profession of religion than those whom I expected to assemble. It was I believe, considered a satisfactory meeting; but the feelings of the unprofitable servant were mine.

10th.—Called on some of the sick and afflicted, to my own comfort and peace. In the evening a large number of Friends and others collected at the house of Dr. Thomas, where a precious opportunity was vouchsafed to us.

16th.—The week day meeting held in course was small, but very precious to a living remnant. I had much to say among them of an encouraging and comforting nature; but I hope it was done in such a manner, that none could take that to themselves which belonged to another: the terms were rigidly specified. I had to commemorate the tender mercy of our God, and the continued regard of our holy High Priest, Christ Jesus; whose presence was livingly felt amongst us. It was a blessed season to myself; and I believe will not soon be forgotten by some others.

In the afternoon, took leave of my truly kind host; and accompanied by Samuel Carey, proceeded by railway towards Virginia. After crossing the Patapsco river, and passing through the city of Washington, we were embarked on board a steamer; we proceeded down the spacious Potomac, as far as the head of Potomac Creek, which runs up from Chesapeake Bay. Here we were packed in crowded clumsy stages, and conveyed nine miles to Fredericsburgh, where we were again seated in a railway car, holding about sixty persons; many of them in rocking chairs, which seem quite a sine qua non with all classes here. We reached the station near Taylorsville about four o'clock the next morning; but as this is merely a boarded shed, where whiskey and cider are sold, we walked on to the village, carrying our luggage with us. Here we found comfortable quarters; but owing to some failure of letters, a carriage which was to have met us here was not to be found. We were now in a land of slavery, and the delay which this disappointment occasioned, afforded some opportunity of remarking the effects of the system; but although perhaps here, in its mildest form, both the country and the people wear an aspect of wretchedness and poverty, quite striking to a stranger. The land has grown tobacco, until in places it can scarcely cover itself with a plant of any kind. Here and there a patch of Indian corn is to be seen, which, with hogs, seems to constitute the principal food of the inhabitants. In the afternoon we hired a pair of horses that had been ploughing, a very old shabby vehicle, and equally shabby harness, and set forward for Montpelier in Hanover county. Had to ford a small river by the way, in the middle of which the horses became awkward, probably from a desire to drink; when the harness broke, and the poor animals drank their fill, while our negro driver repaired damages, cutting up parts of the harness to strengthen what had given way. The weather was very sultry, and we reached the mansion of Nathaniel C. Crenshaw, just at the commence merit of a heavy thunder storm. We were most hospitably received, although a large party of Friends had already assembled, like ourselves, on their way to the Yearly Meeting of Virginia, to be held the next day at Cedar Creek, five miles distant.

18th.—Attended the Select Meeting in the forenoon, which, though small, was satisfactory; and afterwards the Meeting for Sufferings.

19th. (First Day.)—The people collected for the forenoon meeting in great numbers. The neighbourhood of the meeting house exhibited such a display of equipages, as I could not have supposed the country hereaway was capable of making. Many of the coloured people also attended. The meeting house was built before the separation, and therefore of large dimensions, so that there was room for all; but for a time we were much disturbed by the very loose behaviour of some of our well dressed white visitors. I was grieved with their conduct, and at length told them, that in order to get into a settled state, it would be well for each individual to consider in whose presence we were assembled, as became men and Christians, etc: we were afterwards favoured with a solemn season together. A few went out, but the more solid part remained, until the meeting ended. At my request a public meeting was held that afternoon. It was not so large as that in the forenoon, but the company were much more solid; and I humbly trust the great Name was exalted that day, and His power felt to reign in the hearts of many.

20th. (Second Day.)—It is the practice for the business of the Yearly Meeting to commence this morning. The men and women usually sit together for a short interval, and then the shutters are drawn up, which separate them into distinct meetings; but before this could be done, the people flocked in so numerously, as almost to compel the holding of a meeting for worship with them; and through favour it proved a season worth coming several hundred miles to witness. It was, I believe, a day of solemn warning and renewed visitation to many, and particularly to the young people in membership with us. I felt bound to revive among them the fatherly invitation of the Most High, “Come out of Babylon, my people, that you be not partakers of her sins, and that yo receive not of her plagues.” “Come out from among them, and be separate, says the Lord, and I will receive you: and I will be a father unto you, and you shall be my sons and daughters, says the Lord Almighty.” Let not the Babylonish garment, nor the wedge of gold, be in our camp; but save yourselves from this untoward generation, etc. The Lord's power was felt to prevail among us, to the softening of many hearts, and the encouragement of the faithful of this sequestered little flock. On the way afterwards to the house of Walter Crewe, in company with his daughter, and Samuel Carey, we experienced a marvellous preservation from being hurled down a precipitous bank. Owing to something being wrong about the harness, one of the horses got off the road, and dragged the other with him; and had the driver attempted to turn them again, we must have been overturned. Our escape seemed brought about by the horses being kept as it were before wind and sea, directly end-on, and almost on their haunches, sliding straight down the hill to level ground below. Had the carriage been turned ever so little on one side, it must immediately have toppled over, and probably would have rolled several times over before it reached the bottom; and yet such was the mercy extended to us that no one was hurt, and neither carriage nor horses apparently injured. Such unmerited favours demand our humblest gratitude.

Attended the different sittings of this Yearly Meeting on the 21st and 22nd. In the afternoon of the latter day, the business was nearly concluded, and I took leave of Friends, being desirous of attending the Yearly Meeting in New York, which is fast approaching. I was comforted in the belief, that in this Yearly Meeting, although small indeed to what it formerly was, there is yet a living remnant, to whom the cause of truth is precious. May the Lord preserve them, in this land of oppression; and may their hands be unpolluted by the blood of the suffering sons of Africa. We set out the same afternoon, and were favoured to reach Baltimore the next morning, and were again hospitably received by Dr. Thomas and family. During the night there was a succession of thunder and lightning: my attention was much attracted by the brilliant little lamps of the fire-fly, which were perceptible between the flashes of lightning, pursuing their nightly excursions, and filling their place in the marvellous works of this beautiful creation, according to their order and the part assigned them; showing forth the praises of their Almighty Creator.

Rested on the 23rd, and the next morning, again left my kind friends of Baltimore, and pursued my way alone to Philadelphia, where I reached the abode of my ancient friend Ellis Yaniall the same night; and finally got to my quarters in New York on the 25th: here I found many Friends from Canada and other parts arrived for the Yearly Meeting. Attended the various meetings as they came in course, and sat for the most part in silence.

31st.—The last sitting of the Select Meeting was held. In this I had to state in plain terms my fears as to the present state of the ministry; and had to remind Friends of the devastation in our Society in England, from this very cause of unsound ministry having crept in among us. My mind found some relief.

In the evening attended a meeting appointed at the request of Elizabeth Robson for the young people, in which she had largely to labour amongst them, in the love of the gospel,—I trust to the relief of her own mind, and to the benefit of many. It appeared from the different epistles, that there is a prospect of a succession of burden-bearers amongst the young people, which I sincerely desire may be amply realized; but to myself the prospect is very gloomy as regards our Society in this land. Sixth Month 2nd.—In the forenoon, _______ appeared at some length; and greatly do I desire that lasting impressions may have been made on some: but alas! how often does the ear listen with gladness, and even the heart desire to become acquainted with those things that accompany life and salvation, while it still remains in the unregenerate state, for lack of that self-denial and daily cross to our corrupt wills and inclinations, without which we cannot advance one step nearer the heavenly kingdom.

Chapter XXXVI.

Attends New England Yearly Meeting, Etc.—Visits Nova Scotia and Canada—Returns to Philadelphia and Proceeds to Ohio; Attends the Yearly Meeting at Mount Pleasant—Returns to England.

Sixth Month 7th.—Embarked in the steamer for Newport, Rhode Island, with a company of two hundred and seventy-five passengers, including several Friends. We were favoured with a beautiful night, and rounded Point Judith next morning under the most favourable circumstances: this point being exposed to the swells of the Atlantic, is often a very rough part of the voyage. We reached Newport at five a.m., and proceeded in stages towards New Bedford, arriving by noon at Francis Tabor's; where I found a family dwelling much in the ancient style and simplicity of our early Friends, both the heads being elders in the Society. Here I was again a stranger, and without any defined prospect of duty before me.

The next day the 9th, being First day, my path was greatly opened; and at the close of the forenoon meeting the way was clear for me to request that a meeting should be appointed for the inhabitants generally, seamen, and those connected with a seafaring life; which was arranged for the following evening. We were favoured with two comfortable meetings that day; and in the evening, before separating from a large company assembled at the house of a Friend, it was with me to recognise that Almighty power, which “makes the outgoings of the morning and the evening to rejoice,” and to acknowledge the unspeakable favour, after a day full of mercy and full of love, to be sensible that the heavenly wing still overshadowed us,—a great and precious privilege, demanding all our admiration,, gratitude, and humble praise.

10th.—In the afternoon attended the funeral of a young person who died after a severe illness, occasioned by sitting on the ice, when heated and fatigued, six months ago. Many were collected on the occasion, and after two other Friends had spoken, I had to urge the necessity of our individually becoming acquainted with Him, who is “the resurrection and the life” and thus be prepared for the day of death appointed unto all men. The meeting in the evening was largely attended, and proved a solemn season. Friends of New Bedford were hearty in the cause, and had taken great pains to apprize their fellow-townsmen by advertisement, the circulation of hand bills, and in some instances, by personal application. Notwithstanding the responsibility was heavy upon me, and the prospect truly formidable, I was supported under it to my own admiration; well knowing Him in whom I had believed, by His heavenly grace, to be sufficient for me in all things. That Almighty power which is the crown and diadem of every religious assembly, was mercifully pleased to own our gathering, and this evidence of Divine regard was acknowledged, I trust, to His glory and praise.

I came here poor and low enough; and now how eminently have I witnessed the gracious dealings of the Lord for His great name's sake! My heart feels more and more constrained to trust with humble confidence in Him, and to cast all my care and burden upon Him alone; desiring earnestly that self may be so kept down, that the Divine glory may be the only motive to action, in my feeble endeavours to promote the precious cause of truth among my fellow-creatures, as from time to time, I may apprehend required of me.

13th.—Came to Nantucket by steamer on the 11th, and was kindly received by Prince Gardner and family, with whom I am now staying. Yesterday visited several sick and infirm persons; I trust the time was profitably spent. I tried the fleece last night until pretty late, and at length concluded it safest for me to propose that a public meeting should be hold here this evening; and Friends uniting in this prospect, notice has been given of the same.

This morning attended the week-day meeting, and although a considerable body of valuable Friends was collected, every thing was like iron and brass about us; my mouth was completely sealed up, until the meeting was about two-thirds over, when a Friend stood up in the body of the meeting and expressed a few sentences. This was what had to be waited for, and now my bonds were broken asunder, and my tongue loosed. Thus “day unto day utters speech,” and instruction is sealed to the mind, more and more to cast our care upon Him, who cares for us,—although wholly unperceived, until He is pleased to reveal Himself to our finite understanding.

Newport, Rhode Island. Sixth Month 22nd.—Unable from a variety of circumstances to resume my pen until this day. The public meeting on the 13th proved a highly favoured season, and much larger than the one held at New Bedford. Thus was this, (to me) eventful day rendered memorable to the very close, through Him who does all things well. At an early hour the next morning embarked with a goodly company of Friends on our way to the New England Yearly Meeting;²⁹ and reached the house of Edward Wing at Tiverton the same evening, the 14th instant, having travelled by land and water about one hundred miles. Here I found a house apparently filled with guests; but was cheerfully accommodated, our host telling us they were never so full, but that one more could be admitted. In these parts, their neighbours of other societies freely open their doors to Friends on such occasions.

15th.—Attended the Select Meeting, and the Meeting for Sufferings at Plymouth, eight miles farther; and the same evening continued our course towards Newport, reaching the house of David Buffam before sun-set, about two miles from this town. Here I found a hospitable family, and many Friends with whom I had already become acquainted.

16th. (First day.)—Attended the meetings for public worship, to which the town's-people flowed like a living stream. The Meeting-house holds, I was informed, about two thousand people; and it was so filled before the appointed time, that it was difficult to reach the gallery. In the morning, after our aged friend Elizabeth Coggeshall had broken the silence by a solemn petition to the throne of grace, I had largely to declare the way of life and salvation, to my own comfort and relief; though no light matter to have to stand forward in the presence of so many weighty ministers and elders of both sexes.

The Yearly Meeting was considered large; and was favoured at seasons throughout its sittings with the Divine presence. Although it comprises many living members, yet there was much found to mourn over, and render getting along very heavy work, when the true state of the Society was opened out by the answers to the queries. There were many present I believe, who could say with the prophet,—“I was bowed down at the hearing of it, I was dismayed at the seeing of it.” An address was drawn up by the Committee of Correspondence, and sent down to the different Quarterly Meetings, containing much excellent advice, very applicable to the state of things, in many of the meetings. Non-attendance of meetings, lack of love, and in several instances an attachment to military parade, were the principal causes of mourning.

The last sitting of the Yearly Meeting was held yesterday the 21st, and many Friends left Newport last evening; but the foggy state of the weather having prevented the arrival of the usual steam-boats, some hundreds, I suppose, are still in the boarding-houses. I met here my country-people Thomas and Elizabeth Robson; also John Wilbur, my acquaintance in Old England. Today I am lying upon my oars, and resting a little; it is probable that Providence may be the next point of destination; but I am waiting to see what tomorrow will bring forth.

While looking round a little at New Bedford, I met with Matthew Luce, a captain who has made several voyages up the Baltic; but what makes the circumstance worthy of record, and attaches me to him, is the fact of his having been a fellow-passenger from Constadt to England with my ever dear and lamented William, a few weeks before his decease. Finding that, during the voyage, Captain Luce had rendered much kind assistance to this darling object of my hopes in his weak and declining state, I could not but feel him greatly endeared to me. He spoke with much feeling of dear William's pious resignation, and humble but firm confidence in the arm of everlasting strength; and that although he had no care-taker with him, or precious acquaintance to lend a hand of help, yet he comforted himself in the belief, that this and every other lack would be supplied: telling Matthew Luce that he considered him an instance of what would be cast up for him in his friendless condition. Matthew Luce said he considered it quite a privilege to have been with him. To hear this from so authentic a source was indeed very comforting and cheering to my heart, in the midst of a renewed sense of the treasure I had lost; and to find that he had been thus cared for, when in a peculiar manner cast out, as it were, upon the wide world. Truly,—“as the mountains are round about Jerusalem, so is the Lord round about his people, from henceforth and forever,” however widely separated from their families and connexions, I can abundantly testify.

23rd. (First day.)—Attended both meetings at Newport: in the forenoon many attended besides members, and I had good service. In the afternoon meeting Elizabeth Robson was drawn forth to minister among them.

24th.—Attended a public meeting held at my request. The evening proved wet; and the gathering not so large as was expected, but remarkably solid: and I was favoured with an open time among them. My mind afterwards felt peaceful; and I think I never was more sensible that help and strength had been administered in the needful time.

25th.—Came to Lynn by way of Providence and Boston, arriving about sun-set; and was kindly entertained at the house of Isaac Basset. Before reaching Providence, the site of the dwelling, and burying place of Mary Dyer was shown me; and before crossing the ferry to East Boston, the place where she was executed, with Marmaduke Stevenson and William Robinson.

26th.—Attended the week-day meeting of Friends at Lynn; where we had renewed cause to bow in humble reverence to the great Preserver of men, for the extension of His goodness to His poor unworthy creatures, wherewith he was pleased to comfort us together in an eminent degree. After a long silence, and a female Friend had expressed a few sentences, I had to revive the sealed promises to the wise, and to them that turn many to righteousness, in the words of Daniel the prophet; and to declare the sure way for every individual to be numbered with those, who inherit such transcendant glory.—“Behold, thus shall the man be blessed that fears the Lord.”—“The fear of the Lord is the beginning of wisdom.”—“The secret of the Lord is with them that fear Him; and He will show them His covenant” of light, life, and truth;—which, if obedience keep pace with knowledge, will make us wise in heart, and enable us so to let our “light shine before men, that others seeing our good works, may glorify” God in the day of their visitation; and be strengthened more and more to follow after righteousness, that their example also may produce the like happy result. Thus many, by our faithfulness, may be turned to righteousness; and the language of inspiration will be fulfilled,—“They that be wise, shall shine as the brightness of the firmament, and they that turn many to righteousness, as the stars forever and ever.” The Lord was with us of a truth, to the tendering of the hearts of many. Reached the house of Abijah Chase of Salem, that evening.

27th.—Sat with Friends of Salem, in their usual meeting. I had a close testimony to bear, and, I trust, did not withhold any part of what came before me. Returned to Lynn in the afternoon.

28th.—In company with several Friends, went to Boston. As no Friends reside there, we put up at the Marlborough, which is one of the first hotels in the city; and is a Temperance house, where we were well accommodated. In the evening attended a public meeting appointed for me: and for which arrangements had been carefully made before-hand. We met in a house belonging to Friends, nominally at half-past seven; but it was much later before the meeting became tolerably settled. I had largely to labour among them, but found it heavy work: J. D. Lang, a Friend from the State of Maine, was present, and his company very acceptable to me, though ho sat by mc in silence.

29th.—Returned as far as Providence, in company with W. Jenkins; and next day the 30th, attended meetings there. In the forenoon it was a dull season;—one of those when deep calls unto deep. E. Robson was present, but both of us were silent. The expectation of the people being too much upon the poor instruments, was wholly disappointed, and found to end in vanity and vexation of spirit; while we sat as fools among them: I would that this might operate as a sign, that man can of himself do nothing.

In the afternoon a public meeting was appointed for Elizabeth Robson, and good attendance given: E. R. had the whole weight of the service; and was helped through to my admiration and rejoicing. The day altogether was one that confirmed me in my belief of the sympathy and fellow-feeling of the living members of the one body. In the morning we shared the humiliating but wholesome season together; and in the afternoon were favoured to share in the love of the Master, which flowed to both in an encouraging manner. Before E. R. had uttered one word, I believe I could have foretold what she would say; such is the fellowship of the gospel flowing from the one holy Head: and how precious is this unity, in the one Spirit, even as we are called in the one hope of our calling,—in the one faith and baptism of the same gracious Lord. It was a highly favoured meeting.

Seventh Month 1st.—Was conveyed by W. Jenkins as far as New Bedford; and on the 2nd embarked in the steamer for Nantucket to attend the Quarterly Meeting. Near one hundred Friends in company arrived the same afternoon.

3rd.—Attended the Select Meeting, which was a low time; in which I had to speak of the awful responsibility attaching to those in the stations of ministers and elders: and to warn those present, of a day of farther trial awaiting our Society; which, from its nearer approximation to the world, would have more difficulty to maintain its standing, than in former instances, when Friends, like Israel of old, dwelt more alone.

In the afternoon attended the funeral of a young man whom I had seen on his dying bed when last here.

4th.—The meeting for worship was held, and several searching testimonies were borne, in which a warning voice went forth to the young people. The business of the Quarterly Meeting was completed the same day. Returned to Providence next day.

7th. (First day.)—Attended both meetings, in which I had some service.

8th.—Had a public meeting with the inhabitants. It was not large, but proved a very solemn and favoured time. Few, I believe, were present, but such as had something of the true hunger begotten in them; and I trust that these were fed with food convenient for them. The Lord was my helper, in humble thankfulness be it spoken.

On reaching this place on the 5th, I received accounts of the declining health of my dear Charles. I trust that these things, although deeply painful, may not be suffered to trouble me, nor hinder the service of the blessed Master; but rather have a tendency to promote His cause, by keeping me clothed with humility, and watchful towards Him in His fear and in His love; who so often fills my heart with His praise.'

]0th.—In company with Anna A. Jenkins, attended the meeting at a public school belonging to Friends, and had some counsel to offer, which perhaps might hurt neither teachers nor scholars.

11th.—Shortly after the week-day meeting gathered, a thunder-storm came on, and lasted for some time in a very awful manner, doing considerable damage in the neighbourhood. Had some service of an encouraging nature to the little ones. In the evening, at a public meeting held in a Temperance boarding house. It was well attended, and proved a comforting season, although commenced under feelings of much strippedness. Some sailors were present, and many of the wives and connexions of seafaring men.

12th.—Accompanied by Reuben Peckham proceeded to Lynn.

14th. (First day.)—Had a public meeting in the evening, which was well attended and proved an open time; utterance being freely given. It was cause of thankfulness with me, and the more so, as I had felt unwell during the afternoon, and for a time had been doubtful whether I could attend the meeting. But my gracious Master was pleased not only to raise me up for the work, but abundantly to strengthen and furnish for it, beyond what has often been vouchsafed to me.

17th.—Reached Portland by six o'clock a.m., accompanied by Samuel Boyce. Arrangements were immediately made for holding a public meeting that evening. It was smaller than anticipated, but on the whole was a solid comfortable season. I found it very hard and exercising work to bear a testimony to the Truth, under existing circumstances at this place. Lodged at Peter Neild's, expecting to leave in the morning, but on rising did not feel satisfied without sitting with Friends of Portland in their own meeting, although most of them had attended the public meeting.

18th.—Attended the meeting, which was small. After a plain stranger Friend had twice said a few words, I was opened out amongst them, to my own peace of mind, though in much plainness of speech.

19th—Left early by stage for North Berwick, passing in the course of the day, a large Shaker's settlement, and were favoured to reach the house of John D. Lang, the same evening. Since being in Portland my mind has been much turned towards an infant people residing in Nova Scotia, who make profession with us; and I felt freedom to make several inquiries as to the best mode of getting there; but did not see how I could proceed farther without a suitable companion. At one time, I intended passing through North Berwick, and endeavouring to reach Newbury Port the same night, but not feeling quite easy to do this, I concluded to stop there accordingly.

The next day, the 20th, I found that J. D. Lang had been looking towards visiting Nova Scotia in the fall of the year, and had a certificate from his Monthly Meeting, granted some months ago, still in his possession. It soon appeared that he had given up to accompany me. To myself this was a confirming evidence that my going to Nova Scotia was in the ordering of the great Master, who had thus led me in a way that I knew not, and in paths that I had not heard of, to a companion of his own choosing; of whose intentions, and having a certificate in readiness, I had not had the slightest intimation. Our hearts in this thing soon became as the heart of one man, bound together in the bonds of the everlasting gospel.

J. D. L. accompanied us to Newbury Port, where efforts were made to arrange for a public meeting to be held the next day; but it appeared that so many meetings of the Universalists and Methodists would occur that day, that it would be unwise to attempt it, however much desired. As I had done all that I could to obtain a meeting with the inhabitants of this port, having purposely come about eighty miles to the place, my mind felt easy on the subject.

21st.—Attended the meeting at West Newbury where the neighbours came in, and a comfortable season was vouchsafed to us. In the afternoon travelled about twenty-eight miles to Lynn, and reached the house of Isaac Basset in good and I trust in safe keeping. The next day took leave of J. D. Lang and went to Providence.

24th.—Attended the Monthly Meeting, in which I had to bear testimony to the ample and simple means for salvation bestowed on every mortal, through Christ the Saviour, who died that we might live. In the evening went by railroad to Stonington, and there embarked in the steam-boat, with two hundred and seventy-five passengers for New York.

25th.—Arrived at John Clapp's in good time this morning, and after attending to some needful arrangements, left the city the same day, via Providence and Lynn to Boston, where we arrived on the 27th, and prepared to embark in the Boundary sailing-packet for East Port, which is the boundary port of the United States, my friend J. D. Lang having arrived.

Left Boston on the 28th, and entered the passage towards East Port on the 30th. Saw several Indians in their canoes fishing, as we entered the Narrows. In the hope of meeting the steam-boat on her way from East Port to St. John's, in the British province of New Brunswick, had our luggage prepared and brought on deck. The paddle of the steamer was heard for some time before she could be seen, the fog was so dense; but her captain told me afterwards, that he saw our mast-heads above the fog, and had steered for us. We got safely on board the steamer, to my rejoicing, having scarcely ever been more uncomfortable, or suffered more for lack of rest, than while in this packet. Reached the city of St. John's the same evening. Here we found two members, and several more or less connected with the Society, in all about twenty persons, with whom we had a sitting. My companion broke the silence, and we were afterwards favoured with an open time. I trust that some were encouraged to hold on their way, and the lukewarm and indifferent, as well as those who had been wholly neglecting the Lord's talent, were warned and entreated to avail themselves of their day of visitation. Returned to the steamer, and started at midnight for Windsor, in Nova Scotia. Arrived there early next day, and proceeded by stage to Halifax, which we reached the same night, the 31st.

Eighth Month 2nd.—Having secured places to Picton yesterday at an early hour, this morning repaired to the coach office, and found that instead of a covered carriage, an open waggon was provided for our conveyance, and this to all appearance very unequal to the journey. After crossing the water by steam to Dartmouth, we mounted our vehicle, and proceeded much better than we had calculated on, through a very rough and uncultivated country. The roads were in fair order, and small detachments of a British regiment were employed for their farther improvement. On reaching the first station, twenty miles distant, we found to our great mortification, that at least one of the horses had to continue at its post, though perhaps changed to another position in the team. Lodged for the night at Truro, a pleasant country village. Reached the neighbourhood of Picton next day, and when within three miles of the town, a Friend seeing our garb as we passed, came out of his shop by the way side to greet us. This was James Kitching; and we had intended stopping at the house of his brother, some distance further on: but finding that he was from home, we at once concluded to accept the hearty invitation of J. K., whose cottage was hard by. The father of our host, who made one of this large family and their apprentices in the shoe-making business, was originally a member of Society, and had emigrated from Whitehaven seventeen years ago. In the evening after a portion of the scriptures was read, we had a religious opportunity with the family, and were comforted together.

4th.—Sat down with the little remnant that meet regularly at J. Kitching's. Several persons attended, until every seat was occupied. Notwithstanding there was a precious seed in this company, we found it hard work to wrestle against those who are making only a lifeless profession of the Truth, and are led away by the pursuit of the perishing things of this world, to the neglect of those which are of eternal consequence. It was however a season, in which the Lord's faithful children were contrited together.

In the evening attended a public meeting in the meetinghouse of the Seceders from the Scotch kirk, for which arrangements had been made the day before. For some time it was heavy work to labour amongst them, but towards the latter part, the blessed Truth had the dominion; and although some went out, yet a number of the weightier spirits seemed reluctant to separate from under the precious covering that prevailed.

5th.—Early in the morning the stage stopped to take us up, when we took leave of this family, who had become dear to us in the love of the gospel. J. Kitching accompanied us the first stage, where we breakfasted; and before separating, we were refreshed together in that love which makes one in the Lord. Travelled hard till nightfall, and got to Halifax by one p.m. the next day. The 6th, having previously engaged horses, after dining on wild raspberries and milk, we resumed our journey in an open waggon, and reached Windsor about midnight; not without difficulty procuring a lodging place, many persons having arrived to embark in the same steamer with ourselves on the following day. We had been travelling nineteen hours. After it became dark, about fifteen miles from Windsor, we found that a bridge over which we had to pass, was broken up and impassable. As we drew near it, we were hailed by two negroes, who told us we could not go that way, but must drive through the water, across which they had themselves waded. These men were on their way to Halifax, and had it not been for them, we must have been quite at a loss how to dispose of ourselves for the night. My companion J. D. Lang, to lighten the waggon we rode in, had at the last halting place agreed to join another traveller who had overtaken us in a gig, and like ourselves was going to Windsor. As we were then in advance of the gig, we waited on that side of the water till they came up, as they were equally strangers to the state of the bridge; and in due time we drove through the water in company. I thought the Divine arm was in this thing.

7th.—Left Windsor in good time, but our progress was greatly retarded, by having to take in tow a vessel, which had only just been launched. Soon after ten at night, the fog became so dense as to oblige us to anchor until day-light, when we again pursued our way, still towing the other vessel, and reached the town called St. Johns, by ten o'clock a.m., of the 8th. We were kindly received at our former quarters, and arrangements were immediately commenced to procure a meeting with the inhabitants the same evening: the Wesleyan Methodist meeting-house was cheerfully granted for the purpose. At the first collecting of this meeting, things appeared not a little discouraging; but before its conclusion our compassionate Lord condescended to magnify His power amongst us in a remarkable manner, and to own it with the life-giving influence of His heavenly presence.

9th.—Early this morning we again embarked in the steamer for Annapolis on the other side of the bay, touching at the village of Digby by the way. About twenty-five miles farther is Annapolis, where we were favoured to land safely that afternoon. This neighbourhood and for many miles up the river, is thickly studded with farm-houses, at the foot of a high mountain. On landing we were met by an individual connected with Friends, who eventually took us to his residence, about fourteen miles up the country.

10th.—In the evening attended a public meeting in the Wesleyan meeting house at Bridgetown: being a Seventh day, and the hay-harvest in progress, it was small; but a comfortable season was vouchsafed, and the blessed Truth was freely declared to the people.

11th. (First Bay.)—Rising early, we crossed the North Mountain to Chute's Cove, where a number of people were collected, some of whom profess with us. Both my companion and myself had a searching testimony to bear among the latter, and an awakening one also to others present, amongst whom were some tender spirits. As another meeting had been appointed to be held at Bridgetown that afternoon, there was but little more time than was necessary to take some refreshment, and again to cross the mountain. This was heavy work for both man and beast, as the road in many places lay over steep bare rocks, where it was difficult for the horse to obtain foot-hold. The distance is said to be eight miles; but it took us three hours to perform it. We were favoured to arrive in time for the meeting, for which the use of the Baptist meeting house had been granted: this proved the largest meeting we had in these parts, and was mercifully owned by the Master's presence. Both J. D. Lang and myself had largely to declare the word among them, and I believe we both felt peaceful minds afterwards.

12th.—Returned to Annapolis by stage, which was merely an open waggon. We soon found there was no probability of the people being collected, so as to hold a meeting to profit, as they were fully engaged in the fields with their harvest; and to many of them it would have been difficult to convey the requisite information.

13th.—At two a.m. went on board the steamer, not inappropriately called The Maid of the Mist, on account of the misty atmosphere of the bay. After touching at Digby, where we waited an hour and a half before the mail-bags were given out, we had to make a considerable round to take in tow a new vessel; but on reaching the point, we had the mortification to find she was not yet launched, and we should have to wait in an exposed situation until high-water, then six hours distant. Every appeal to the captain, and even the threatening of a lawyer passenger were disregarded, so that instead of getting to 'St. Johns' by nine in the morning, it was not till long after sunset that we entered the harbour.

14th.—Took passage in the same comfortless boat to East Port, State of Maine; here our luggage was slightly examined, as coming from a foreign country. Went forward again by stage to Bangor, on the Penobscott river; from there by steamer to Portland on the 16th; and finally reached the house of my dear companion J. D. Lang, at North Berwick, on the 17th. I trust with feelings of thankfulness for the many deliverances we had witnessed in the course of our journey. A considerable quantity of religious tracts, and the writings of Friends were circulated, and in some instances deposited as libraries, along our route.

18th. (First Day.)—At the meeting at North Berwick, to which several seeking people came; we were favoured with a blessed season. In the afternoon attended a funeral at Dover, thirteen miles distant. The meeting was not held at the regular place, but at the house of the deceased.

20th.—Attended the Monthly Meeting at Dover. The meeting for worship was a heavy season, as when “death is in the pot;” the one succeeding it was equally painful.

21st.—Attended the Dover Select Meeting. We sat long in a low state, as in the deeps; when it was with me to break the silence with this language,-—“Awake, O! north wind, and come, you south; blow upon my garden, that the spices thereof may flow out. Let my beloved come into his garden, and eat his pleasant fruits endeavouring to show the necessity of our being willing to pass through that stripped wintry state, in which nothing can live that is not of the Lord's planting, and which can prepare our hearts to bring forth fruit, such as the beloved of our souls delights in. Several others spoke to the edification of the meeting. The Quarterly Meeting commenced with a large meeting for worship, in which I had some labour: it was the first yet held in a new meetinghouse.

22nd.—Feeling bound to attend the Ohio Yearly Meeting, and having the opportunity of accompanying William Deweese, we set out together this day, and reached New York on the 25th; the latter part of the journey in the steamer Lexington. I was no stranger to the character of this vessel, and had on a former occasion avoided travelling by her; but now I had no time to lose, and trusting in that Almighty power, which has so often been my preserver, we were favoured to reach New York without accident. Here I found distressing accounts from my family. In addition to the continued indisposition of dear Charles, it appears that the health of my eldest son Joshua had so much declined, as to oblige him to return to England. I cannot but feel tried under this increased affliction, but I desire to be resigned to the will of my heavenly Father, in the belief that he does indeed not willingly afflict the children of men. Attended the forenoon meeting for worship, and was strengthened to declare among them the way of salvation from sin.

On the 26th, we reached the house of my kind friend Ellis Yarnall of Philadelphia. While here, I felt best satisfied to write to my children, holding out the probability of my returning to England after the Ohio Yearly Meeting, if the way should appear to open for this measure with clearness. Reached Harrisburgh, the capital of the State of Pennsylvania, the next day, and from this place proceeded by packet drawn by three horses on the Pennsylvania canal, along the beautiful valleys of the Allegany mountains, eventually crossing the Susquehanna river by a long and well constructed bridge. Beyond Lewistown the valleys become wider and better cultivated, and the general appearance of things strikingly different to what we had lately seen in the State of Maine, in New Brunswick, and Nova Scotia.

28th.—After a night disturbed by passing many locks, we are still winding our way through beautiful valleys, backed although rather more distantly by well-wooded mountains. Have employed the interval of leisure in bringing up my journal which had fallen into arrear, believing that I shall not soon have a more favourable opportunity.

On the 29th reached Hollydaysville, where the railway over the Allegany mountains begins. Drawn sometimes by locomotive, at others by stationary engines, then by horses, and eventually descended an incline, and again proceeded by canal to Pittsburgh. From this town we proceeded by steamer along the Ohio river to Mount Pleasant, where we arrived on the 1st of Ninth Month. The Yearly Meeting is held here.

Ninth Month 2nd.—The Yearly Meeting at large commenced, when my certificates were read, and I had to give the meeting some account of the Lord's merciful dealings with me. The Yearly Meeting ended on the 7th, and was favoured to its close with great solemnity. In the last sitting of the Select Meeting, I had some remarks to make on the great responsibility of those in the station of elders, who, if not anointed from on high, are incapable of discerning from where the ministry proceeds; and to add my belief, that there is a ministry growing in the Society, which, if not checked, would fill the minds of the hearers with things like “the abomination of desolation,” spoken of by the prophet,—that would stand in the holy place, where it ought not,—in the place of vital religion,—and would make truly desolate and destitute of the presence of the Lord. It was the elders of Ephesus who were sent for, and charged to take heed to themselves, and to the flock, by the great apostle. Set out the same evening in company with several Friends, on my return towards Philadelphia, which we reached on the 12th, after a fatiguing journey.

15th. (First day.)—In the forenoon meeting I was largely engaged in declaring the blessed Truth. I had taken cold, and my cough troubled me during the early part of the meeting; but on standing up, to my admiration, it was no more felt. During the silent part of the meeting, it had been suggested to me, when in expectation of having to speak, that it would be in vain to attempt it on account of my cough, which would be immediately excited by raising my voice; but this I believe to have been the work of the enemy, who was a liar from the beginning; for I stood long without once coughing, to my own great relief.

16th.—Went to Burlington, and spent the night at the house of dear S. and R. Grellet. In the evening many Friends came in; and we were comforted together by the life-giving presence of the gracious Master.

22nd. (First day.)—In the forenoon my mouth was opened, and my heart enlarged to declare, in the love of the gospel, the new and only way to the everlasting kingdom. In the afternoon, silent.

25th.—At a marriage in Twelfth Street meeting-house, Philadelphia, which was numerously attended by the public; I was strengthened to declare the day of the Lord amongst them, and to show that it is not to the mighty or the noble, not to the wise or the prudent, that the things of the heavenly kingdom are revealed; but to the weak and despised, to the unassuming and child-like: rehearsing the beautiful and instructive acknowledgment of our blessed Saviour,—“I thank you, O! Father, Lord of heaven and earth, that you have hid these things from the wise and prudent, and have revealed them unto babes: even so, Father, for so it seemed good in your sight.”

26th.—Took leave of Friends as extensively as time and circumstances would permit; and the next day proceeded to New York. Here I examined the British Queen steamer, and the Mediator packet ship; and concluded, for various reasons, to take passage in the latter.

Tenth Month 1st.—Finally embarked for England. Several kind friends accompanied us as far as the vessel was towed out to sea, returning with the steamer. Forty passengers were on board, twenty of whom are in the cabin. May the Lord preserve me in watchfulness and prayer amongst them. We were favoured to get sight of the Scilly Islands on the sixteenth day, when the wind changed and blew strong from the eastward, so that we did not anchor on the Mother Bank till the 23rd instant. The company on board proved one of the most agreeable that has ever fallen to my lot.

Left the vessel at Portsmouth, and after writing to inquire where the wreck of my family were sojourning, crossed the Isle of Wight to Niton, where I was comforted by the particulars I gleaned of the close of my precious William; and I had an opportunity of acknowledging personally, the Christian kindness of several whose hearts had been opened to administer to the comfort of his last days. Spent a solitary evening at the hotel, and occupied the chamber from which his immortal spirit had returned unto God who gave it, purified I humbly trust, through the blood of Jesus, and prepared for an admittance into the everlasting kingdom.

Chapter XXXVII.

Alarmina Illness of His Son Charles, Then In France—Daniel Wheeler Proceeds There Before the Death of Charles—Returns to England—Again Sails for New York—Last Illness and Death.

On the 25th of Tenth Month, I learned that my children had left England, with the idea of wintering in the South of France; but that my dear Charles had been so much exhausted with travelling before they reached Paris, that the hope of continuing the journey had been relinquished. I also learned that they were accompanied by our true friends Wilson and Charlotte Burgess, which was quite a relief to my mind. Having now accomplished my mournful purpose, and visited at Southampton the grave of my first-born, I should have proceeded immediately in the track of my children; but that several circumstances compelled me first to return to London. This detained me till the 29th, when having obtained my passport, I went down to Dover by the night mail, intending to join the steamer for Calais in the morning. The day, however, proved so stormy, that it was with some difficulty I could procure a boat to take me on board the steamer, at that time hovering off the Foreland. At length I succeeded in hiring a stout boat with five men, who were willing to make the attempt. The risk was not a little; but on viewing the storm, and remembering the situation of my drooping child, who had so faithfully shared all my toils and cares during our long voyage in the Pacific, the thought of danger was at once outbalanced; and trusting in Him who knew my motive for making the attempt, at a suitable moment we launched into the surf, and were favoured to get well off the strand; and the steamer being judiciously placed to enable us to reach her, I was favoured to gain her deck without accident. After leaving the coast the captain soon found that we could not fetch Calais, and very prudently bore away at once for Boulogne, without making any fruitless efforts to reach the other port.

After a lonely winterly journey, arrived in Paris late in the evening of the 31st, and the next day was favoured to reach the bed-side of my sinking Charles, in the little town of St. Germains, twelve miles distant. The peaceful feeling that pervades the atmosphere around him is, I humbly trust, an earnest that the arms of everlasting mercy are open to receive him, when the awful change shall come. I found him apparently in a far advanced stage of consumption, and my dear Joshua looking very much shrunk, and altogether in very delicate health, although not actually confined to the house.

Extract from a Letter to Sarah Smith.

St. Germain's, [so called,] near Paris, Eleventh Month 2nd, 1839.

Little did I then anticipate that it would ever be my lot to address you from this neighbourhood; but I was very unexpectedly prompted to look towards crossing the Atlantic, if only for a season, should the way fairly open after the close of the Ohio Yearly Meeting, and the step be approved by my American friends. During the first sittings of the above meeting, I felt discouraged, and doubts arose in my mind whether I could possibly clear myself towards that large assembly so as to feel at liberty when it was over, as I had been prevented by the lowness of the water in the Ohio from arriving in time for the two public meetings held previously to the sitting down of the Yearly Meeting; but at the conclusion an opportunity was afforded me of seeing the whole body of Friends collected under one roof, I suppose two thousand persons; when to my unexpected consolation, a most relieving season was vouchsafed. During the last sitting, I had a full opportunity with women Friends, and afterwards in the men's meeting, before the concluding minute was read. I now felt perfect freedom to leave Mount Pleasant, and proceeded eastward the same night.

We have the comfort of having our friends Wilson and Charlotte Burgess with us; so that amidst our sorrows we are still favoured with many blessings which sweeten the bitter cup; and when I reflect that I have not to grieve for the misconduct of my children as having brought this affliction upon themselves, my heart is humbled under a sense that the present dispensation is of the Lord;—desiring to bow very low before Him, and believing that it is by these things we live, and in all these things is the life of our spirits. Our dear friends will I hope remember us, as I am sure we stand in need of the prayers and sympathy of the faithful, if ever any poor creatures did, under the accumulated trials of a dark and cloudy day; that so we may be preserved in humble resignation to the unerring will of our heavenly Father, and that others may see by our patience, the blessed effects of the power of the Spirit of the Lord Jesus, “in word, in conversation, in charity, in spirit, in faith, in purity.”

[Although it is not proposed here to record the details of illness which follow in Daniel Wheeler's M.S. journal, it was thought that the following sketch which occurs after the decease of our brother, possessed sufficient interest to warrant its insertion.]

Although my dear Charles had been nearly two years in a critical state of health, and for the last six or eight months rapidly declining, he did not appear entirely to lose the idea of recovery, until about a fortnight before his decease: of its great uncertainty he was fully aware. In the early part of his illness he would say, 'if it be the will of my heavenly Father, I could enjoy life a little longer' but in its more advanced stages he would acknowledge, that 'life is no longer desirable, under such an accumulation of suffering: but the will of the Lord be done.' About twelve days before his close, he said to me, 'I am going,—I see it plainly' and then adverted to a check which had occurred in his disorder, and had been the means of allowing him to see all his family; speaking of it as a mark of Divine condescension, quite incomprehensible to himself. 'It is one of the links in that chain of providences, with which I have been so marvellously encompassed.'

He used frequently to compare his own case with those of others in the family who had preceded him. Speaking about this time of dear William, he observed, 'I know little about his death, but I know how he lived; he fed on heavenly food. O! that I were as much prepared for the change as he was,—to him, to die was but to sink into his Father's arms;'—adding with much emphasis, 'blessed are those who can die as he did.'

He often spoke of his own unworthiness, saying, that his only dependence was on the mercy of God in Christ Jesus; and on this he seemed to rest without a sense of fear. Once or twice, when referring to the composure he felt, he said, 'surely I am not self-deceived;' shortly adding, 'O! no; it cannot be that the mercy, which has so signally followed me up to the present time, should now forsake me.'

On one occasion, he said to one of his brothers, 'heed not the world, nor the things thereof: I wish I had heeded it less;' and once when in great bodily extremity, he exclaimed, 'here is the end of pride!'

He frequently engaged in fervent prayer for patience and support, for the pardon of all transgressions, and a release in the Lord's time. Three days before his death, he was heard to say,—“Bless the Lord, O my soul! and forget not all His benefits.” Even though He slay me, I will trust in Him. Blessed be His name, He has granted me a little relief. One crowning mercy yet remains; and for this I desire to wait His time. O! grant me grace for this. You, O Lord! are full of compassion and gracious, or you wouldest long ago have abandoned a wretch like me: even yet I feel my proneness to rebel. O! let your Holy Spirit support me through the few fearful hours that may remain; and grant me patience to wait your time. I ask it for the blessed Saviour's sake.'

A text on which he frequently dwelt, was that in Revelations, “They shall hunger no more, neither thirst any more,” etc.; and perhaps his own sufferings from thirst, which were at times distressing, led him to realize more fully the blessedness of those thus set free from the infirmities of the flesh. A few days before his death, when parched with fever, and much exhausted, he exclaimed, 'I shall soon be where all is rest, and more than rest,' referring to the passage, “Eye has not seen,” etc.

One evening when in a very suffering state, he remarked, that this was a new kind of conflict to him,—he had long been accustomed to mental conflict; but such positive physical suffering, he had neither known nor imagined. On being asked which he thought the more difficult to endure, he replied, that in his present state, he greatly preferred the contest allotted him; but, that when in health, when the mind was vigorous, he thought the mental struggle less severe.

On the morning of the 5th, (of Second Month, 1840,) we thought him very near his close; but he afterwards revived, and seemed disappointed at being again delayed. On the same day, when in severe pain, he supplicated thus: 'O! Lord, if it please you, grant me a little patience; for without your holy aid, it is past all mortal endurance.' As evening approached, he seemed to have an extraordinary dread of the coming night, exclaiming despondingly, 'another night, another night;' and truly it proved a season of severe conflict, though the last of mortal suffering. About nine p.m., a change was noticed, which he soon detected himself,—saying, that he thought he was dying; and shortly afterwards, 'O! Lord, if it please your righteous will, release me. Blessed be your holy name!' A short time before the close, on being asked if he felt peaceful, he replied calmly, 'I feel no fear.' He bade us separately farewell; and I believe his last connected expressions were,—'You are very kind—the Lord Almighty bless you.' The pains of the body seemed all he had to contend with: the struggle continued until four a.m., when he quietly expired, being apparently sensible till within a few minutes of the last.

Dear Charles's desire that I should pray for him, when on the bed of sickness, often tended greatly to my own humiliation, it being at that time frequently my lot to be as one unable to pray even for myself; and when the spirit of supplication was at seasons permitted to influence my mind, it was not that length of days should be added to his life, or that it should be shortened; but that the will of his heavenly Father should be done, whatever it might be; and that all his afflictions might be sanctified to his eternal benefit: and strong were my cries to the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, that though the dear sufferer might not be permitted to give us any strikingly comforting assurance of his being “accepted in the beloved” yet that an evidence might be vouchsafed of his having been admitted into that heavenly kingdom, which shall never have an end. On looking at his remains some hours after his departure, to my unspeakable comfort, I saw on his placid countenance that evidence for which I had besought the Lord. In the midst of death, there was a sweet angelic smile, surpassing that of life,—its loveliness none can describe. In the course of the illness of my dearest Charles, and the frequent opportunities we had of close converse on subjects of the highest importance, he never once brought into view his having forsaken all from an apprehension of duty to accompany me on the long voyage in the South Seas. To have reminded him of a sacrifice which had cost him so much; and which I humbly believe was not only called for, but accepted at his hands, by Him who had prepared the offering, would but have raised a feeling of honest indignation in his mind,—that an idea should be entertained of any merit being due to him, or that he had any act of dedication to lean upon, or to plead his cause. On the contrary, he seemed truly to possess nothing of his own, but the infirmities incident to the frailty of human nature; often dwelling on his own unworthiness of the least of all the Lord's mercies extended to him, and alluding to them in humblest gratitude. Doubtless it was best that he should cherish so humble a view of himself; and I never found it my place to throw out any hint, by way of encouragement to his often drooping mind: preferring to commit him into the hands of Him who judges righteously, whose compassions fail not; and who never fails freely to forgive all that have nothing of their own to pay unto their Lord,—who are truly poor and of a contrite spirit.

[The remains were removed to Southampton, and] interred within a few feet of those of his beloved brother William: dear Maria S. Fox kneeling at the grave side, offered the tribute of thanksgiving and praise to that gracious Being, who had thus prepared and taken to Himself, him for whom we mourned. The meeting afterwards proved a solemn, and I trust, an instructive season, wherein the life-giving presence of the great Master was felt.

My attention was next turned towards finding a suitable situation for my dear Joshua, whose declining health rendered it needful to remove into some of the more sheltered parts of the island; and the west being strongly recommended, we made our way towards Bristol, and succeeded in obtaining apartments for him at the Hot Wells, (sheltered by the stupendous cliffs from which the place above takes the name of Clifton,) which were considered very suitable for him in his present weak state.

Third Month 8th. (First day.)—Attended both meetings at Bristol; and in the forenoon had to declare the Truth among them, to my own relief.

Feeling my mind attracted towards Balby Monthly Meeting, I set out in time to attend the Select Meeting at Sheffield on the 11th: I was comforted in beholding the addition that had been made to their numbers during my absence; and my mouth was opened amongst them, in an encouraging manner. Next day attended the Monthly Meeting. In the meeting for worship that preceded it, my heart was enlarged towards my dear friends; and the way of life and salvation was proclaimed amongst them.

15th.—Attended the meetings at Dewsbury, in both which my mouth was largely opened.

23rd.—Bristol. Through all the vicissitudes which have of late attended my tribulated path, the inhabitants of the western world have been renewedly brought to my remembrance, under a feeling of that love, which would gather all mankind into the one great sheep-fold of rest and peace,—though I have felt no liberty to take any decided measures till lately: but the way has within the last few days so remarkably opened, as to remove every doubt from my mind of the propriety of making preparations for my departure thitherwards.

Finding it was in vain to attempt seeing my long loved friends in other parts of Yorkshire, I took leave of my Sheffield friends on the 18th, and proceeded to London, where a place was secured for me in my favourite ship the Mediator. After settling some affairs there, I returned to this place, to spend with my children the few days yet remaining, till the sailing of the packet.

27th.—At the week day meeting in Bristol, I stood up with the words,—“Then restored I, that which I took not away stating that these expressions had attracted the attention of my mind; and although the mysterious language of inspiration, I believed they might be understood by all who had passed through the great work of regeneration. The Lord Jesus restores the heavenly image in man, which was lost by transgression: and which the shedding of His precious blood had placed all in a capacity to have restored to them, who believe in Him, and are willing to submit to the power of His Holy Spirit in their own hearts. The poor of the Lord's people were encouraged; and the heaven-born sons and daughters of Zion strengthened to trust in their God.

28th.—Took leave of dear Joshua,³⁰ and accompanied by my dear S., went to Portsmouth to meet the ship, which was to leave London on the 26th. The next being First day, knowing of no Friends residing in this town, we remained at home, and enjoyed a quiet and peaceful Sabbath together before the Lord,—something like a little passover before the painful moment of separation which was fast approaching; it brought with it the bitter cup of which we had before so largely partaken, but now under the pressure of more sorrowful circumstances.

30th.—Embarked in the Mediator; it was late before our final departure, and it grew dusk soon after sailing.

31st.—Worked all day against a head-wind, of sufficient strength to confine the major part of our company to their berths. To myself, I seemed like a poor outcast among them; and could I not have felt something like a foundation cause for being there, sufficiently firm for me to ground an appeal in brokenness of spirit to Him from whom nothing can be hid, there would have been nothing for the feet of the mind to rest upon. It is no light matter, at my age, to embark singlehanded for the American shore; but I have been so mercifully led, guided, and sustained through all my late trials, that I dare not for a moment doubt my being in my right allotment; and particularly because of the peace and love which have not infrequently been permitted to flow through my heart, since having again forsaken all that is dear to me in this world for the blessed Master's sake.

Fourth Month 1st.—The wind backed so far to the southward of west, that we made a good slant down the British Channel. In the night the Mediator was enabled to point to the right course, though with nothing to spare.

2nd.—Wind to the eastward of south, and in the night became still more favourable, when all sail was crowded to the breeze, and every advantage taken of it. Eventually it became a strong breeze from the north-east. The ship now made rapid progress, and but for an old north-west swell, the motion would have been comparatively trifling. On the 3rd we were found to be in longitude 13° 30' west; and now the 4th, being Seventh day afternoon, we are still rolling on with a fair wind, though its strength has somewhat lessened. Yesterday before breakfast the sea made its way through the cabin windows, some of which had been raised for the admission of air. Happily no material quantity of water got in, though it ran to the far end of the main cabin; my cabin escaped, which I consider a privilege and favour.

——————————

Here our dear father laid down the pen never to resume it, except to address a few trembling lines to his children from his sick bed. It appears that after he had been about a week at sea, he took cold, which soon settled on the chest, and was accompanied by great oppression of the breathing, and inability to use a recumbent position. As there was no surgeon on board, he could not have the medical treatment which his symptoms so urgently demanded, and though in every other respect he received the utmost attention and kindness, his disorder gained a fearful ascendancy during the three following weeks which he remained on ship-board. A few days before the vessel reached her destination, he was so extremely ill that his fellow-passengers doubted his surviving till they entered their port. He had himself, however, no apprehensions on this head; and on the 28th of Fourth Month, he was landed at New York, in a very feeble and suffering state. He was immediately taken to the house of his kind friend John Clapp, from whose family he was favoured to receive the most unremitting and tender care, during the remainder of his illness.

The change from the inconvenience of ship-board, to comfortable accommodations on shore, combined with the tender assiduities of the dear friends around him, appeared to be refreshing to him. The night after landing he rested well, and the next morning seemed so much better, that those around him felt quite cheered respecting him. Towards the evening of the 29th, however, he became greatly oppressed, and lay in a very suffering state. After passing a restless night, in the morning of the 30th the oppression returned with increased violence; and from the coldness of the extremities, and the state of exhaustion to which he was reduced, it was thought by his medical attendant that he could not long survive. On being informed of this by a dear friend, he replied calmly, 'All has been done that could be done; only write to my dear children how it is. The work has been going on with the day. Love to all my friends on this side of the Atlantic, as well as the other. It is a great thing to be clear of pain. I want nothing but the love of my heavenly Father, and I witness it.' After remaining for some time in this state, the oppression gradually subsided, and he enjoyed some hours of tranquil sleep. This refreshed him much, and towards evening he had so far rallied, as himself to address a few lines to his distant family; they are written in a very tremulous and almost illegible hand. In these he remarks, 'I have been landed a very sick man in this city; but my most gracious Lord has borne me up in a marvellous manner through a multitude of distress and difficulty, for His great name's sake, and for His dear Son's sake;—to His own everlasting praise be it spoken:'—thus evincing, that thankfulness and love to our heavenly Father, so conspicuously the covering of his mind in the time of health, still pervaded his spirit on the bed of languishing.

For several succeeding days his disorder fluctuated greatly: at times he appeared very comfortable, and then again laboured under great oppression. On the night of the 1st of Fifth Month, a friend sat up with him, whom he had not seen since his return to England the preceding autumn. On observing him, he said,' Ah_______, I have had a suffering time since I left America; but I have been mercifully directed as to a hair's breadth.' Then spreading out his hand, he added, 'Yes, plainly, as if I had had a scroll of directions in my hand.' Towards morning, when apparently in a very exhausted state, he said to those around him, 'Well now, my dear friends, I want to be left entirely alone with my heavenly Father;' and several times during his illness he made a similar request.

On the 2nd, he was bled from the arm, which produced considerable relief to the breathing: the following day the bleeding was repeated, and again the oppression appeared to be diminished by it. During the operation, he remarked to his medical attendant,—'without blood, there is no cleansing.' Dr. Willet replied,—it is “the blood of Jesus that cleanses us from all our sins.” 'Yes,' said his patient, 'but not in our natural unregenerate state: when we are in the light, as He is in the light, then I believe it will cleanse us from all our sins. Yes,' he added with much emphasis, 'I know it.'

Through the day he appeared more comfortable; but in the evening the oppression returned, accompanied by great prostration of strength. This continued nearly an hour; when a little revived, he said, 'I have had a hard struggle. At one time I did not know but it was the cold sweat of death.'

On the 4th, 5th and 6th, he remained in a suffering state. On the morning of the latter day, after making some arrangements respecting his papers, etc., he said he had now done with the things of this world; he had no wish to live, but for the sake of his family, and that the Lord Jesus might live in him;—He had been his guide for many years, and he had declared His name unto thousands: he had no hope but in Him;—He was the same Lord over all. It was not the prospect of an immediate release that led him to speak thus, for he did not see that; but it was in his heart, and he must say it while he had words. Many other remarks he made at this time, in a very impressive manner, and with a strong voice. After this he had some refreshing sleep.

In the afternoon of the same day, he received a visit from his beloved friend Stephen Grellet, which proved an occasion of deep interest. His mind seemed to overflow with admiration of the goodness of his dear Lord and Master, which had constantly attended him in his varied pilgrimage. He recapitulated briefly what had occurred since he left America, alluding to the consolation he received at the death of his beloved Charles, when he was made to rejoice in the midst of grief. He added, 'the Lord is good to them that love and fear His name. Great things has He done for me,—things so wonderfully marvellous, that they would hardly be believed were I to tell of them. If I have experienced any shortness in my journey Zionward, it has been on my side, not the Lord's,—for He has been faithful, and his promises have been and remain to be, yes and amen forever. While I was on shipboard, and thought by some of the passengers to be nigh unto death, how did the Lord appear for my help and consolation; and since I have been in this chamber, how has He appeared for my comfort in the night season; and I have been enabled to sing hymns of praise and thanksgiving unto Him. When the ship made her soundings, I made my soundings upon that Rock, whose foundation is from everlasting to everlasting. I saw that I should be safely landed, though extremely weak in body; and I was enabled to say, should the Lord see fit to raise me up, and strengthen me still to show forth His wonderful works to the children of men, or cut the work short in righteousness, “Your will O God, not mine be done.” I do not see how the end will be.'

He spoke of the last First day he had spent in England, and of the precious season before the Lord, which he had then enjoyed. It was like a little passover, but whether unto death or unto suffering, he could not tell.

For several succeeding days, the disorder appeared very stationary: he lay in a languid state, but apparently suffering little positive pain. On the 11th, he received a letter of sympathy from a kind friend, who remarked that he felt a very comfortable assurance that the Lord would still continue to protect him, etc. The dear sufferer said that he was too ill to write himself, but wished those about him to do so, and to tell his friend that he believed it would be as he had said; adding, 'I feel the Saviour to be near me every hour of the day.'

After this period, considerable mitigation of the symptoms occurred, and for two successive weeks, he appeared to be slowly gaining ground, so that his anxious friends were ready to take comfort in the hope that his life might yet be spared to them. For a time, he seems himself to have participated in this expectation; and a very cheering letter written on the 13th to his children, led them also to indulge the hope, that the bitter cup might for the present be permitted to pass from them. His full heart seemed to overflow with the love and praises of the Lord, for all His rich mercies towards him; and in the feeling of some degree of returning health, he was afresh animated to pursue with unreserved dedication of soul, the service of his dear Lord and Master.

On the 19th, he addressed a few lines to his family for the last time, which breathed the same spirit of encouragement and thankfulness as his preceding letter. The following is an extract.

My Very Dear Children.

I wrote you a few lines on the 13th instant, by the Stephen Whitney packet-ship for Liverpool; and again, through Him who died that we might live, I am enabled this day to send you a still better account of myself; at which, with me you will rejoice in the true fear that keeps the heart clean. You must accept it in the gross, as in the present state of my convalescence, it is impossible for me to delineate one-half of the Lord's gracious dealings with me. I trust I shall be able to ride out for air daily in a short time. The weather here is very hot, which makes writing more irksome to me than it otherwise would be; but I know that you will make every allowance for me. Scatter abroad my love, wherever you go,—take as much as you can desire for yourselves, and believe me,

Your ever affectionate father,

Daniel Wheeler.

At this time he had rallied so much, as for several days to be able to rise and be dressed, and to walk with assistance into an adjoining room; and the improvement in his appearance, and the cheerfulness of his spirits quite encouraged those around him. Soon, however, these pleasing prospects were overcast, and the last fondly cherished hope of his restoration to health entirely faded. On the 26th of Fifth Month, he appeared rather drooping, and more feeble than before; and after passing a most restless night, on the morning of the 27th, he sank into a state of insensibility, accompanied by a convulsive movement of the hands and feet: in this situation he continued several hours. When partially recovered from it, a kind friend called to see him. On being told she was present, he held out his hand, saying, 'you see a poor creature.' 'Yes,' she replied; 'but rich I trust in the Master's favour.' 'If it were not so,' said he, 'I should be poor indeed.' She was afterwards engaged in supplication by the bed-side, fervently imploring the continuance of Divine love and mercy towards him; but he seemed scarcely sufficiently collected to be aware of what was passing around him. Towards evening, the stupor was in degree relieved, and he passed a more tranquil night than the preceding one.

In the morning of the 29th, he laboured for some time under great oppression of the breathing; when this had a little subsided, our friend Jacob Green, who was about returning to his home in Ireland, called to take leave of him. At the conclusion of their interview, our dear father observed that as to himself, he had no doubt:—he had the same faith that had been with him through life, founded upon the gospel of Christ; and which enabled him to say with the apostle, “nevertheless I live, yet not I, but Christ lives in me; and the life which I now live, I live by the faith of the Son of God, who loved me and gave himself for me.”

30th.—This morning, in reference to the ship in which he had come over from England having again sailed, he remarked that the captain had gone and left him; but added in a moment, 'if my heavenly Father cares for me, I shall fear nothing: He will carry me safely through:—He is my only hope.' For several days after this, the dear sufferer remained in a very sinking state, and the measures resorted to in the hope of relieving the disorder, added to his debility.

On the 3rd of Sixth Month, a friend from a distance who had come to see him, remarking how glad he should be in any way to help him, our dear father replied,—'I have but one Helper, but He is Almighty.'

On the 6th, when his kind hostess entered the room, he was engaged in vocal prayer, but she was unable to collect much that he said. On some friends who were leaving the city calling to bid him farewell, he said they must leave him in the hands of his heavenly Father,—to his love and mercy. He could not tell half what had been done for his soul; but the time might come when it would be proclaimed as on the housetops. On a previous occasion, when the same friends were seated by his bed-side, one of them remarked, that it was a great favour to see him preserved in so much calmness and quietness. 'Ah,' he rejoined, 'you would think so, if you knew all;' at other times he intimated the favoured state of his mind.

For several succeeding days he remained in a state of great feebleness and exhaustion, apparently without much suffering, except from occasional oppression of the breathing, and generally in a drowsy state; so that he entered very little into conversation of any kind. During this period, he took extremely little nourishment; and his weakness increased rapidly in consequence. From the state of the mouth and throat, he could not swallow without pain and difficulty; and on one occasion as one of his affectionate attendants was urging him to take something,—saying she thought he stood in need of it, he replied—'I think not; and when there is need, my heavenly Father will enable me to take it, for there is not a pang I suffer, but what is known to Him; and I have evidence, that though far from home and my native land, I am not forgotten.' Thus mercifully was he sustained, and his faith and confidence permitted to remain unshaken, amidst the sinking of nature.

On the morning of the 12th, he appeared unusually feeble, though not apparently worse in other respects. He was wheeled into the adjoining apartment as usual; and shortly afterwards remarked to one of the family, who had most affectionately watched over him, 'perhaps this day will end all your cares and troubles.' It was an unusual remark; but as it was supposed to arise from the feeling of present weakness, it did not excite any particular alarm. The heat of the weather being oppressive, he was placed in a current of air, and was almost constantly fanned. His mouth he said was better; but still it was with difficulty that he was induced to make the effort to take any nourishment. In the afternoon, one of those around him making some allusion to his returning to England, he remarked,—'it is very doubtful whether I shall be permitted to return to England.' His friend expressed her hope that it might yet be permitted; for though he felt very weak at that time, his symptoms were better than they had been: his only answer was an incredulous smile. After this he was supported from one bed to another; but it was observed that his steps were more faltering than before.

Between four and five o'clock that afternoon, a young friend who had been much with him during his sickness, and had watched by him a part of the preceding night, called to take leave, as he was about to attend a distant Yearly Meeting. Our dear father acknowledged his kindness, adding,—'give my dear love to all my friends. God reigns over all: His mercy and goodness have never failed me. The end I have not been able to see.'

About eight in the evening, being offered some tea, he remarked, that he could not see it; and it was evident that his sight had quite failed. Shortly afterwards he fell asleep; but his breathing was more laboured than usual. This being observed, he was twice asked if he was comfortable, to which he replied, 'yes.' The difficulty of breathing continued, and he was turned partly on one side, which not arousing him, his friends became alarmed; various means were resorted to, but nothing seemed to afford any relief. In this state he continued, apparently breathing with the same difficulty as before, till a little after twelve at night, when he gently passed away without sigh or struggle.

The funeral took place on the 15th of the Sixth Month: it was largely attended, and proved a season of much solemnity; in which survivors were loudly called upon to follow the departed, as he had been concerned to follow Christ. Afterwards at the grave side, the voice of thanksgiving and praise ascended to Him, who had sustained His devoted follower through all the conflicts and trials of his pilgrimage,—who had prepared him for Himself through the sanctifying operation of His grace,—and had now been pleased in His abounding mercy to gather him in peace into the heavenly garner, even “as a shock of corn comes in his season.”

—————

Concluding Remarks.

It is far from being the intention of the Editor to attempt any elaborate delineation of the character of the subject of these Memoirs:—this he thinks will be best gathered from the correspondence and memoranda which have preceded. There is however one feature, on which he hopes the reader will bear with him, while he offers a few remarks, which appear to be called for by the peculiar opportunities for observation which he enjoyed,—namely, the mingled fidelity and tenderness with which his beloved father sustained the responsible character of a parent. In reverting to this particular, those who enjoyed the privilege of a filial relationship, feel that they have abundant cause to rise up and call him blessed. From their early years, the benign influence of his devout and pious spirit was forcibly felt; and it is now a mournful satisfaction to the survivors to recollect, that their earliest impressions of good were associated with the affectionate counsels of their departed father. His was not the language of precept only,—that of his strikingly consistent example was still more powerful. It was impossible to observe from day to day the thankful, cheerful, humble frame of mind which he so uniformly manifested,—his watchfulness to check every rising of improper feeling,—and above all, the deep reverence and filial love which pervaded his heart towards the great Author of every mercy,—without being made sensible of that blessed and all-pervading principle, which regulated the daily tenor of his life. His children at once loved and honoured him; for while he possessed their entire confidence, and the fullest hold on their affections, they knew that he was unflinching in the refusal of whatever he felt to be inconsistent with his principles or their highest good. Notwithstanding the kindness of his nature, and the strength and warmth of his parental feelings, his known firmness precluded all hope of inducing him to yield to their inclinations, when these stood opposed to their eternal interests. Many perhaps may have been more systematic in their instructions; but few could keep more steadily or practically in view the superior importance of heavenly things.

From their early years, he patiently laboured to imbue the minds of his children, with the love and fear of the Almighty. He instructed them diligently in the holy Scriptures; and endeavoured to explain in a manner suited to their capacities, the truths they contain. He was also persevering in his efforts to exhibit to them the example of the righteous of other generations: and especially that exemplification of the fruits of his own principles, which the lives of the early members of our Society so strikingly display. For this purpose he set apart a portion of time daily, in which he read to his family works of this description; a practice that was continued up to the period when his religious labours called him from them. Perhaps some might be ready to think that such a course would be found irksome by the young; but certainly in the present instance the result was widely different, and his children can now recall the feelings of solemn interest and enjoyment that often attended these readings, and the short period of quiet by which they were invariably followed. It was also his custom each evening, when his children had retired to rest, to visit their chambers, and endeavour to direct their hearts to their great Creator and Preserver. On these occasions, he would repeat, or teach them to repeat passages of Scripture, or poetry of a devotional character, to which his own admonitions were frequently added; and he generally closed these sweet and well remembered seasons with a solemn pause: during which, doubtless, his pious spirit was often engaged in committing them to the Lord.

As his children advanced towards maturity, instead of relaxing his watchful care, he felt that there was need rather of redoubled vigilance to shield them from surrounding danger. Ever anxious for their best welfare, yet deeply sensible that through Divine grace alone, their youthful minds must be awakened, quickened, and enabled to lay hold of a Saviour's love; he was earnest in imploring for them this heavenly gift, and diligent in watching for opportunities to impress upon them the importance of spiritual things. One instance of the condescension of the Lord in hearing and answering his prayers may be here introduced. As his eldest son attained the age of manhood, earnest were the cravings of his father, that the Lord would direct his heart “into the love of God, and into the patient waiting for Christ.” He knew well that to the natural man, the things of God must ever be a mystery; and he longed that through submission to the operations of the Spirit of truth they might be opened to his understanding. Often with parental tenderness he silently watched the opening convictions of his inquiring mind, and as opportunities presented, he laboured to explain to him the views he had himself received.

At one time the sentiments of his son on these all important subjects were exceedingly unsettled, and he passed through deep mental conflict before he yielded to the light of Divine truth in his soul, which dispelled the doubts and reasonings by which he was assailed. It was at this period, that one evening his father and he being alone together, they had much conversation on the points which then pressed heavily on the mind of the latter. Before retiring to rest, his father handed him the Bible, and requested him to read a chapter: he took the book and read the third chapter of Malachi. Deep seriousness overspread his countenance, and after a considerable time of silence he repeated, 'The Lord whom you seek shall suddenly come to his temple, even the messenger of the covenant whom you delight in;”—and he shall be “like a refiner's fire, and like fuller's soap,” adding, 'yes, he will come into his own temple, the temple of the heart, and there do his own work. I never understood this chapter before, nor saw, as I now see it, the spiritual nature of the gospel dispensation.' The impression thus made was not soon effaced; and it was evident to his thankful and rejoicing parent, that the prophetic declaration was indeed fulfilled in his experience,—that the Lord had come into his temple, and was there working to the purifying of his soul. The change which gradually succeeded was most striking; clearly evincing to those around, that the day had indeed dawned and the day star arisen, in a heart long oppressed with darkness, and a prey to many doubts. In reference to this period his father once remarked with much emotion,—“this kind can come forth by nothing but by prayer and fasting,” intimating the long continued exercise of soul through which he had been led on behalf of his son.

Two avenues to evil, he guarded with especial jealousy in his domestic sphere,—the introduction of books of an injurious tendency, and the association which he allowed to his children. With respect to reading, he was liberal in supplying whatever he thought calculated to improve or expand the mind, and furnish profitable exercise to the understanding; but very few productions of a frivolous or hurtful nature escaped the vigilance of his watchful eye. On these occasions, he regarded not the inclinations of those he so tenderly loved; and he has been known, when works that he disapproved had been lent to his young people, to return them himself to the parties from whom they came, accompanied by a frank avowal of his sentiments respecting them. With regard to society for his family, his situation in a foreign country, far separated from those of his own religious views, would doubtless have appeared to many to present unusual difficulties. These he endeavoured to obviate, by rendering home as pleasant and cheerful as possible, and thus leaving his children little to desire beyond its precincts. Perhaps few domestic circles ever presented a happier scene than his own, while its links were permitted to remain unbroken. Doubtless the result of such a system has been to make the changes and separations, inevitable in a world of fluctuation and mutability, fall heavily on the hearts of survivors; but the shelter thus afforded to their inexperience, and to the unfixed principles of early years, was an invaluable safeguard; and they can now look back with grateful hearts to the wisdom and care of their departed parent. If his labours have not always been attended with adequate results, his children can freely, though with shame acknowledge, that the fault rested not with him but with themselves; and as respects those who have been called from this state of probation, the survivors are permitted to believe the counsels and prayers of their pious father were blessed on their behalf, and that they were made partakers of that redemption which is in Christ Jesus, and favoured to know their robes washed and made white in His precious blood. And how full of consolation is the belief, that their spirits are now united with his, who so fondly and faithfully watched over their early years,—shielded them from temptations to surrounding evil,—and turned their feet into the path that leads to blessedness:—“Therefore are they before the throne of God, and serve him day and night in His temple: and He that sits on the throne shall dwell among them. They shall hunger no more, neither thirst anymore; neither shall the sun light on them, nor any heat. For the Lamb which is in the midst of the throne shall feed them, and shall lead them unto living fountains of waters: and God shall wipe away all tears from their eyes.”

Appendix

—————

Appendix A.

Letters of the Empress Elizabeth to Her Mother, Relative to the Last Illness and Death of Her Husband, the Emperor Alexander of Russia.

Dear Mother.

I was not in a condition to write to you by the post of yesterday. Today, a thousand and a thousand thanks to the Supreme Being, there is an evident improvement in the state of the Emperor, this angel of patience in the midst of his sufferings: for whom, upon whom, will God manifest His infinite mercy, if not upon him? Ah, my God! what bitter moments have I passed. And you, my dear mother! I figure to myself your anxiety; you have received the bulletin, you have seen to what we were reduced yesterday, and last night. But Wylie³¹ himself says today, that the state of our dear invalid is satisfactory. He is excessively weak. My dear mother, I confess to you that I am not myself, and that I cannot say more. Pray with us, with fifty millions of men, that God will deign to complete the restoration of our beloved invalid.

Elizabeth.

Second Letter, which soon followed.

I have lost all—the angel is no more;—dead, he smiles upon me, as he so often did while living. There now remains to me only you my dear mother, with whom I wish to come and weep, and to be present at the interment. I shall remain near the deceased, and shall follow him as fast as my strength will permit.

Elizabeth.

Appendix B.

In the Petersburg Gazette, of the date of Twelfth Month 15th, 1825, is contained an account of this insurrection; the extract from which, although originally intended for insertion, lack of space has compelled us to omit.

Appendix C.

Extracts from the Account of the Last Illness of Jane, Wife of Daniel Wheeler, Inserted in the Annual Monitor for 1835.

It was on the 10th day of the Twelfth Month, 1832, N. S., that the fever which was to terminate the life of our dear mother first appeared; but its form was for some days so mild, and our fears were at that time so strongly excited by the situation of another member of the family, who appeared to be on the very brink of the grave, that at first little apprehension was entertained of its serious nature. At length, however, the high degree of excitement which was obvious, amounting to a degree of delirium, awoke us to a sense of the awful reality; but rational conversation was already nearly impracticable, and we have no reason to think that our beloved parent was sensible of her situation, till within a few hours of her final change, which took place on the 19th of the Twelfth Month. During this brief period, she appeared quite free from delirium, and remained composed and sensible nearly to the close; but her strength was so completely exhausted, that her attempts to speak, which were many, mostly ended in a tremulous inarticulate motion of the lips, which left those about her painfully unconscious of the meaning which she appeared solicitous to convey. Her countenance was, at this time, beautifully serene and peaceful; and once the words “Jesus” and “God” were clearly distinguished, though the import of the sentence could not be collected. At another time, observing one of her children in tears, she said distinctly, and with the utmost composure,—'Look up for help:' thus proving at once the tendency of her soul in the hour of extremity towards the great object of the Christian's faith and hope; her consciousness of her own situation, and of surrounding circumstances; and her practical reliance on that Omnipotent Arm, which alone was sufficient to support at such a moment.

At length her respiration, which for some hours had been laborious, became more gentle, till the beloved sufferer passed away without sigh, groan, or struggle, leaving those around her bed unable to fix the precise moment at which the spirit fled. A holy calm spread itself over our feelings, and we remained for some time as silent as she on whom we gazed. The swell of sorrow seemed completely hushed, and the silent tribute of thanksgiving ascended to Him who had graciously led our departed mother all her life long, and had at last, in infinite mercy, taken her to Himself. It was a moment of solemnity and favour, never to be forgotten by us; in which all doubting was swallowed up, and the soul reposed, with a richness and fulness of peace, altogether indescribable, on the boundless goodness of God.

The external circumstances of our bereaved family at this juncture, were, in some respects peculiarly trying. One of us was still alarmingly ill, and the others were shattered by disease, or worn down with anxiety and watching; in the middle of a Russian winter,—our beloved father, as has been stated, absent,—and not having a single member of our own Society, out of the family, within our reach, we could not but feel our situation: and a new difficulty immediately arose respecting the interment of the mortal remains of our departed parent. No burying-place belonging to the Society of Friends existed here, and the adoption of any of those possessed by other bodies of professors, was not satisfactory to the minds of some of us. But Divine goodness never fails those who trust Him, and desire to obey Him. The precise path of duty became gradually plain, and way was ultimately made, in a manner we had by no means anticipated, for the enclosure of a small space of ground near our dwelling, for the purpose of interment. This necessarily produced delay, and the successive illness of three of the survivors still farther postponed the performance of the last sad duty to our deceased mother, and drew our attention from the dead, by most painful solicitude for the living. In mercy, however, the lives of these were spared; and on the 28th day of the Third Month, 1833, our mournful and solitary band, bowed down at once by sickness and sorrow, followed to her isolated resting-place, the remains of our late venerable mother.³²

He who had graciously promised, that where two or three are gathered together in his name, there will He be in the midst of them, was pleased to support our afflicted and drooping minds, and to strengthen us for the painful duty which succeeded. Thus through the mercy of Him, whose “compassions fail not,” a day, the anticipation of which had been so appalling, was crowned with peace; and we felt in its close, that the tribute of praise and thanksgiving was due to that Gracious Being, who had thus been pleased to manifest His strength in our exceeding weakness.

Appendix D.

The Following Statement of the Result of Daniel Wheeler's Agricultural Labours in the Neighbourhood of Petersburg, Was Received Too Late for the Insertion of a Reference to It In the Body of the Work.

The land placed under Daniel Wheeler's care in 1818 consisted chiefly of certain parcels in the immediate vicinity of Petersburg, the cultivation of which to private enterprize appeared impracticable, on account of their barrenness, or their marshy nature. At the time of Daniel Wheeler's departure in 1832, about three thousand English acres were in full cultivation, on part of which fifteen farms had been established, varying in extent from thirty-five to one hundred-and-five acres each. About two thousand seven hundred acres more had been drained, the cultivation being either left to other hands, or was in progress, when Daniel Wheeler resigned his appointment. Besides the improvement thus effected in the neighbourhood of the capital, the most satisfactory evidence of the utility of the undertaking had been afforded, by the extensive adoption of various implements and methods of culture, heretofore unknown in Russia; and by the consideration which agriculture and rural economy in general had obtained. The suggestion of letting out land to free tenants, had not met with all the success that could have been desired.

Appendix E.

Extracts from the Letters of Charles Wheeler, Relative to the South Sea Islands,
Addressed To His Family.

South Pacific, Second Month 26th, 1835.—Some fresh marine phenomena were seen today, among which none were more beautiful than a species of jelly fish, (probably Pyrosoma Atlantica,) in form resembling a glass tube, six or seven inches in length with one end closed, and covered with opaque protuberances. With these the ocean was illuminated at night in a brilliant manner, and many of those that we took exhibited, on being touched, a splendid phosphorescent light, sufficiently strong to show the time by a common watch, when it was placed near a single specimen. They showed perhaps few signs of animation, excepting this power of emitting or retaining light at pleasure. Several other species varying in form and size, are numerous here, but from their half liquid and perishable substance, it is almost impossible to preserve them. Probably most of these several varieties are luminous; some of them are of a mushroom shape, (medusa Pelluceus) and have the power to move along through the water by dilating and retracting their richly fringed head. Grampuses, sharks, porpoises, dolphins, and some small striped fishes, called by the sailors, pilot fishes, are common in this part of the Pacific. The little pilot fishes attract a good deal of notice from their propensity to accompany the vessel: they are seen for hundreds of miles, (perhaps I might say thousands of miles,) frolicking close before the vessel's stem, and occasionally darting aside after some particle that attracts them for a moment from their favourite position in the van.

On the morning of the 27th, a sail was discovered a-head, and watched with shipboard interest, as it gradually augmented in size, till about noon a large whaler 'brought to' close alongside us. English colours were displayed on both sides, and Captain _______, of the Elizabeth of Sydney, accompanied by the surgeon of the vessel, came on board. They had been out eight or nine months, and succeeded in securing 1200 barrels of oil—which amounts to about one-third of a full cargo. After obtaining a few fresh provisions for some of their oil, and accepting some tracts, etc., our visitors returned to their ship, and in a few hours we lost sight of each other. The call from these marine sportsmen was quite an incident in our monotonous life; though from the natural and acquired characters of the parties, such interviews are not generally productive of much enjoyment. What a strange life is that of a whaler, roving the wide ocean for months and years in quest of fish,—banished from almost every comfort that the humblest landsman may ordinarily possess! But the prospect of gain reconciles to present privation, and the promise of hope stimulates to exertion, and supports them in their dangerous career. There were five men at the mast heads of this ship, looking out for whales, as she ranged over the blue swelling expanse. The space of ocean surveyed by these rangers is incredibly large. If we estimate the horizon as seen from the mast head at about thirty six superficial miles, which are changed every hour and a half, nearly three hundred square miles will be overlooked in twelve hours; and there are several hundred ships employed in the South Seas. Each of these is probably out from two to four years at a time.

Third Month 5th, 1835.—The settlement on Norfolk Island, which is on the south shore, has a neat and respectable appearance, the houses being built of limestone, and with some degree of regularity. The whole population is about one thousand persons, and of these the greater part are prisoners of the lowest grade. The boats which came off to our vessel were each of them manned with six or eight convicts, and two or three armed soldiers. Two government vessels were cruising round the island, waiting an opportunity to land their cargoes. One of these had brought about seventy prisoners, who had risen during the passage from Sydney, and very nearly succeeded in taking the ship. They would be tried, and it was the opinion of an officer who was speaking of the circumstance, that some of them would be executed.

Papeiti Bay, Tahiti, Fifth Month 1st.—There is nothing, perhaps, in Tahitian habits more striking or pitiable than their aimless, nerveless mode of spending life. The community, with the exception of a few foreigners or foreignized natives, might seem to exist to fish, pluck and eat fruit, bask in the sun, dabble in the water, or frolic on the sand. I mean to say that things have this appearance; and that according to our notions, their habits are deplorably indolent; and it is difficult to imagine any very different state under their circumstances. From the size and strength of their frames, they would appear to be of a stock capable of great exertion; yet they seem to inherit all the lassitude and inactivity of tropical residents, and the climate is so extremely hot, that by day every movement is an effort. Their needs are few and remarkably supplied clothing being an incumbrance, desired only because associated with ideas of superiority, and tolerated occasionally in compliment to imported notions;—and food of the kind most adapted and grateful, teeming around them, almost independently of their care. If the faculties were developed, and all effeminating indulgence discarded, I cannot but think that an adult Tahitian would be a more respectable human being than he now is even though external circumstances remained the same.

Their outward circumstances, there can be no doubt, have derived material benefit from the introduction of Christian teachers and civilized regulations, so far as they have been introduced: these, beside preventing certain Pagan enormities amongst the natives, constitute a valuable check to the vicious and overbearing conduct of foreigners, which so lamentably sullies the history of these islands. Adventurers of all kinds are not now at liberty to take up their abode on shore, without reference on the part of the government, to their respectability and motives in coming; but certain credentials or recommendations, as we are told, are required, without which no one is encouraged or openly allowed to remain. This is a very useful restriction, as previously to its adoption, the most worthless characters have caused much disorder and misery by settling among the natives and marrying, to remain only till caprice has dictated the desirableness of a move, when their families have been deserted without scruple or redress.

Trial by jury, which has been introduced here, is a great blessing, and one which perhaps Englishmen are better able to appreciate than any others, from their long experience of its value at home. The Tahitian jury consists of six men instead of twelve; but the principle, as I understand it, is precisely the same.

Fifth Month 13th.—After attending a missionary meeting held at Papaoa, Charles Wheeler remarks: 'We were pleased with the appearance and manners of the chiefs, and with what we saw of their queen. Some of the former are fine intelligent men, and in their general appearance reminded me of North American Indians. Many speeches were made by the principal chiefs, who avowed their sentiments with great animation; and throughout the whole affair, very considerable order, and respectful demeanour were observed by all parties. The queen is a decidedly intelligent looking woman, of about four and twenty years of age: and has by no means an ignoble appearance; though her artless, unassuming manner and simple attire, accord little with our notions of regal dignity. Her dress was much less showy than that of many of her inferiors, and far from inelegant. A long robe of beautifully white muslin flowing loosely round her figure, a little embroidery and silk about the neck, and a jet black bonnet, comprehended all that was apparent.

We have since been visited by the king, (properly speaking he is only the queen's husband,) and some of his chiefs, who breakfasted on board our vessel. The former appears to be about twenty years of age; and is a mild, intelligent, unassuming youth. His countenance is not strictly handsome, but it is truly Tahitian and pleasing; and his slender form, dark expressive eye, and gentle manner,—which are completely Asiatic,—give something feminine to his appearance. The chiefs who accompanied him were of a much sterner school, and all of them considerably older than himself. They behaved with great propriety and good nature, and conversed in a friendly, sensible manner, expressing their satisfaction with the frank, unceremonious way in which they had been received. Before they left us, a telescope was presented to the king, and a shawl to each of the party. Nothing like selfishness was shown by the leading personage, who did not attempt to select the best article for himself; but taking that which happened to be next him, he allowed the rest of the company to do the same. The chiefs playfully vied with each other, as to who should take charge of their master's property, which was left in their hands. On going away, the king asked the steward for a little bread for the queen. He had evidently relished this article himself as a rarity, and therefore I suppose intended her to share. They were all dressed in the native style, but in foreign articles of good quality. A fine white shirt, and an ample piece of print wound round the waist, and reaching to the knees, with a straw hat encircled by a broad ribbon or piece of silk, seems to be the favourite dress.

16th.—We took a walk for exercise along the high road, which is a path formed by the soil thrown out of two ditches, affording in dry weather, a tolerable causeway. The lack of bridges over the rivulets that cross it on their way from the hills to the sea, obliges passengers to wade through the water occasionally, or else adopt a mode, to which, on this occasion we were compelled to have recourse,—that of getting a native to carry them over on his back. The formation of these roads is an occupation in which criminals are employed by way of penalty: so many fathoms of the queen's road, or so many fathoms of sea-wall on the queen's island, are frequently imposed as punishments on male, and the making of a certain quantity of native cloth or matting, on female delinquents; and these punishments, if equitably put in force, are well adapted to the people.

It is a singular fact that there are no wild beasts on any of the Pacific islands, lying distant from the continent of Asia.

Sixth Month 16th.—The remains of idolatry have been so effectually destroyed, that scarcely a trace of them is to be found. Perhaps the objects most intimately connected with them are the natives who persist in rejecting the profession of the gospel, a numerous class even now. The government compels all to attend worship, it is said on pain of forfeiture of landed property;³³ but this coercion of course does no more than enforce a ceremony,—if indeed from its unchristian character, it does not operate rather as a hinderance to the progress of Christianity. The portion of the community not professing the new religion, often retain the true native dress, and are thus conspicuous among their professing countrymen, who have to a great extent adopted foreign articles of clothing.

Eighth Month 9th.—After a sojourn of three months and a half at Tahiti, during which considerable opportunity for observation has been afforded, I shall now offer a few remarks, that may enable you to estimate more easily its present state. Without reference to what it may have been, my observations will apply simply to what it is at the present moment.

I need not describe the geographical position of Tahiti: it is the largest island in the Georgian and Society cluster; and considered to be about one hundred miles in circumference. Together with Kimeo, (a small adjacent island to the westward, subject to the same government and laws) the population is estimated at upwards of 10,000 persons; there is no doubt that the above is a tolerable approximation to the truth, and that, however it may have been formerly, the islands are now very thinly peopled. In fact, the interior of Tahiti is not inhabited at all,—the low lands next the sea, which constitute but a small portion of the whole, being universally selected by the natives for the place of their abode. Upon this fertile margin along the coast, their little huts of poles, mats and thatch are scattered with great irregularity,—not in well defined clusters or villages, but singly or otherwise as the course of a stream, or the boundary of a plantation, may suit best. The mountainous tracts inland are little frequented, although from the luxuriance of the vegetation, I conclude that many parts are capable of cultivation. Some fruits are produced spontaneously, and in the remoter valleys these are never gathered by human hands. The highest ridges, reckoned about 7000 feet above the ocean, are covered with rich forests, whose verdure never fades; and the deep shade of valleys, vocal with the thunder of descending waters, is of course still more prolific of vegetation. But whatever the inland districts may produce, or may be capable of producing, the low tract of country stretching along the circumference of the island, seems to be fully adequate to maintain the present population, without requiring much culture or care on the part of those who gather the fruits. The taro, (caladium esculentum,) an excellent farinaceous vegetable, the yam (Diotcorea alata) and the sweet potatoe (Convolvulus batatas,) involve some little labour; but many of the fruits demand only occasional weeding from the overwhelming growth of guavas, and protection from the ravages of hogs, with which the place is overrun. The gigantic cocoa-nut tree bears fruit without intermission the year round, and furnishes at once the means of shelter, food, and clothing. The leaf is used for mats, and thatch, and fuel; the bark is converted into cloth; the timber is valuable for many purposes; the nut shell is the native basin; the kernel is ground up into a nutritious food; the milk is universally drunk; and the ripe nut affords abundant oil, both for home use and exportation. The bread fruit too is highly prized: as a vegetable it is both palatable and wholesome, and from the bark of the large trees is made the cloth in common use by the Tahitians. Oranges, lemons, limes, melons, vis., (spondias dulcis;) papaw, (carica papaya;) bananas, musa sapientum:) pine apples and pumpkins abound among the indigenous and exotic fruits and vegetables of this island. If the shore is thus teeming with spontaneous provision for the needs of the inhabitants, the surrounding ocean is not less prolific in affording an endless variety of fish. Turtles, shell-fish, and many half-animated marine substances used as food, are found within the reefs.

When I mention the reefs, I cannot forbear making a few remarks on these extraordinary natural break-waters, which are of the highest value to the South Sea Islands. Take Tahiti for instance. Without this coral breast-work there is not a single harbour in the island; but with it, the coast, with few exceptions, is sheltered from the ocean, and circumnavigated with safety in the smallest canoe. In one or two places the coast is exposed; but excepting these openings, and a number of narrow passes for boats or ships, a bank of sand and coral, nearly even with the surface of the water, varying in distance from the beach from half a mile to perhaps a mile and a half, extends round the whole island, and defends it from the sea. On this wonderful barrier, the mighty swell of the Pacific breaks in ceaseless thunder, from age to age; but within the providential limit the raging deep is chained, and all is tranquil as a lake: ships of the largest size may enter and ride securely, and the light canoe of the native has a safe access to every part of the coast. We have all heard of coral reefs long ago; but till we reached this place, I may confess I had not the least idea of the characteristic peculiarity, in the natural shelter furnished by them among the South Sea Islands.

The government of Tahiti is nominally vested in one person, but as might be expected, the principal chiefs possess a large share of power. The queen and two of the most influential chiefs entertain a very friendly feeling towards the missionaries, and consequently their wishes are consulted, and their interest supported in most cases; but there is an opposite faction who would doubtless be glad if it were otherwise. Although Pomare appears to favour the cause of the missionaries, and by enforcing the laws against the sale of spirits, etc., to consult the welfare of her people, she is by no means a woman on whose principles full dependence can be placed. At a national assembly held annually, when nearly the whole population of the island come together to see, hear, and enjoy themselves,—which took place a week or two back at Papaoa, she is said to have sanctioned great disorders, and allowed some of the ancient heathen customs, of a shameful nature, to be indulged in.

In almost all the dealings which we have had with the natives, one principle of action appears predominant, to obtain all they can: and this is in precise accordance with the practice of our countrymen among them. The people of the neighbourhood of the Bay, labour under the disadvantage of being constantly exposed to contact with unprincipled foreigners, who encourage what is wrong, and introduce large quantities of ardent spirits among them, in spite of the legal prohibition. This fact alone is enough to account for the prevalence of vice, and sordid venality; and the formal, unwilling conformity to established restrictive regulations.

But though much of evil may be underneath, and great thoughtlessness may be obvious, yet there are doubtless alleviating exceptions; and external tranquillity is for the most part preserved.

It is nearly impossible for a visitor, who cannot even speak the language, to pronounce with much certainty on a subject of such moment, as the religious state of the community. Certainly appearances are unpromising; and however unwilling to adopt such a conclusion, there is reason to apprehend that Christian principle is a great rarity. Far, however, be it from me to depreciate the labours of those who have been the instruments of the change produced in this island. So far from considering the beneficial results of their efforts as unimportant and insignificant, I regard them as of the highest moment, and as fully equal to what could in reason have been anticipated. In my opinion, if nothing more had been effected by the Tahitian mission than the translation of the holy Scriptures into the language of the country, every sacrifice that has been made, would have been abundantly rewarded. But the translation of the Sacred Writings is not all. Idol worship, the adoration of nonentities or of supposed divinities, in the form of images, with all the frightful train of debasing ceremonies and human sacrifices, are abolished. Open infanticide, which prevailed to such a dreadful extent, is done away; and some degree of attention is paid to the improvement of the minds of children. Many salutary civil restrictions have been introduced, and a check imposed on the unbridled licentiousness of foreigners.

There is a singular custom prevailing in Tahiti, which I have not yet noticed. Every child possesses an indefinite number of adopted parents, who, at its birth, or perhaps even before, promise to cherish and assist it in after life, in case of need. This practice confers great independence on the children, who remain with their real parents, only so long as is agreeable to them; and if maltreated or corrected, they take up their residence with another family, to desert it hereafter in the same way. This is a great barrier to the right management of the native children, who can at once forsake their parents, should the correction or restraints they impose become irksome to them.

The Tahitian mode of living is certainly very much in the simplicity, or perhaps more properly in the rudeness, of nature. Their houses afford a shelter from the rain, and a receptacle for their little property; which consists of a few imported articles of clothing for special occasions, some food, nets, sleeping mats, and a display of firelocks: comforts, conveniences, and luxuries, (according to our ideas,) are for the most part unknown. One apartment usually accommodates the whole household, which generally consists of individuals of all ages, more or less related to each other, and herded together in considerable numbers. When at home, the usual employment of the men appears to be the preparation of food or oil, gardening and making nets, and that of the women the manufacture of native cloth, cooking and sewing; but both sexes are very frequently found unemployed,—perhaps smoking, or playing with a ball and string. The men ordinarily wear very little clothing: the women a loose piece of print or calico thrown round the waist, leaving, except in the presence of foreigners, or when 'dressed out,' the upper part of the figure nearly or entirely exposed. The young children frequently go quite naked. A true native hut contains neither table, chair nor bed,—the reed-covered soil which forms a floor, serving the purposes of all. The food is spread on leaves, and the people sit round on their heels, squatted on the ground; and when recumbent, they lie upon mats, covered with folds of their native bark cloth. This cloth is made from the bark of several trees,—a large proportion of what is used here, from that of the bread fruit tree. This is beaten into thin sheets, which are rendered tenacious by the gum they contain, when properly dried in the sun. When fit for use, this ingenious substitute for woven goods resembles coarse paper: it is, however, less easily torn, and generally somewhat thinner. It forms but a harsh, uncomfortable drapery, and will not bear properly washing, being injured by moisture, without much friction; but habit and necessity render it tolerable, and it is very readily made. When dressed for chapel, the men generally wear a foreign shirt, and a piece of print or blue cotton wrapped round the waist: the women a similar girdle of some light material, and either a kind of loose gown, or a shawl, of calico, thrown over the shoulders, with a bonnet generally made of pressed paper, in imitation of straw, and profusely decorated with broad bright coloured ribbon. The last mentioned article is in very extensive use, and is sold to great advantage by almost every body here. I was one day trying to purchase a piece of ornamented native cloth, and offered an equal length of English print for it; but the owner refused this remuneration, demanding a similar length of ribbon instead. The gay colours worn by the whites are, of course, zealously imitated by the poor natives, whose clothing seems to be adopted rather from vanity, or deference to foreign customs, than from necessity or a sense of decorum.

Taloo Harbour, Island of Eimeo, Ninth Month 12th, 1835.—This is a most romantic spot, surrounded by almost perpendicular hills, towering nearly four thousand feet, with a broken fantastic outline. As in Tahiti, there is a margin of lowland next the water, which produces abundant crops of fruit and vegetables; but the proportion of this fertile soil is small, and as a whole, probably, this is the less productive island of the two. Its scenery is wilder and more diversified, and the ridges are much more angular and rugged than those of Tahiti, some of them, where huge black rocks and foliage blend in the obscurity of distance, resembling the broken fragments of a stupendous ruin. Many parts are nearly perpendicular for hundreds of feet, and of course quite inaccessible. The summit of a mountain that skirts one side of Taloo Harbour, extending for a considerable distance at an elevation of three thousand feet, is yet so narrow, we are told, in some places, that a man cannot walk along it, but is obliged to push himself forward in a sitting posture, grasping the mountain with his legs.

On the 23rd, arrangements were made for visiting the opposite side of the island, where a number of natives, and one English family reside. The direction of the trade-wind rendered the longest route most eligible, and we pursued our course among coral rocks within the reefs. In a few hours we arrived opposite a famous entrance through the reef, formerly held sacred on account of a large marai, called Orua, situated on the beach near it. Here we landed and explored the marai, with its ruined piles of rock, its consecrated enclosures, praying-stones, and venerable grove of Aitos and Tamanus.³⁴ The whole neighbourhood is overgrown with trees and climbers, and the ruins are so completely dilapidated, that it is difficult to appreciate the original design. Many smaller heaps of stone, and the remains of pavements, steps, and praying-stones are seen near the principal pile,—the whole forming an enduring relic of superstition, and a proof of the laborious zeal of idolaters. After surveying this gloomy grove, once associated with scenes of horror and death, we continued an intricate passage through innumerable beds of coral, till we reached Afareaitu, and were cordially welcomed by the resident English family.

Ninth Month 27'A, 1838.—We heard some days since that more ardent spirits have just been brought to Tahiti by a schooner from Valparaiso, which is now trading in them. When we left Tahiti, another American vessel was there selling all she could of this destructive poison; in fact, the chief articles of barter for cocoa-nut oil and arrow-root that she seemed to have, were fire-arms and brandy, and these she was retailing round the coast. Her supercargo told me himself, that he had sold all the brandy he could get rid of, and between one and two hundred muskets. He is quite a youth, but well enough suited for the task he has undertaken, being a profligate, thoughtless fellow, initiated into the trade, which he avows his intention to continue. What could be more completely barbarous than this traffic, carried on with uncivilized nations at the present day; and that too by professing Christians!

During the afternoon of Tenth Month 15th, we rambled for exercise on the public road, along the coast, and saw a curious salt-water lake, situated about two miles to the northward of the harbour. It is a magnificent sheet of water, encircled by mountains and tropical forests; and probably would have been still more gratifying to eyes less familiar with the water than ours. There is, however, an essential distinction between the prospects to which trc are accustomed, and inland lake scenery. The characteristic of the former is ceaseless fluctuation,—that of the latter unbroken tranquillity.

Among the enclosures of the natives here, there is greater indication of industry than we remarked in Tahiti, and many of the houses are built in the civilized manner, with windows, plastered walls, etc. Nevertheless the dwellings we have seen have by no means a comfortable aspect, and the general effect of the native settlements is not particularly pleasing. Unfurnished, dirty huts, surrounded with lumber, the remains of food, etc., naked children, and all but naked parents, working, or rolling about, smoking or playing, sleeping or waking, as the case may be; with groups of half starved hogs and dogs occupying every corner in the neighbourhood, do not constitute the most delightful objects, though viewed in the far-famed South Sea Islands.

Our afternoon ramble on the 17th, led to the site of William Ellis's residence. The vicinity is completely overgrown with gnavas, and the most authentic traces of its former occupant are discoverable in some fine fruit-trees, planted in the immediate neighbourhood of the house. We afterwards took tea at the mission-house, and were shown the press which is occasionally employed in printing native lessons, laws, etc.

On the afternoon of the 24th, we accompanied one of the missionaries on an excursion up the salt-water lake mentioned before After walking about two miles, we embarked in a canoe, and were pushed along the shore by a man with a long pole;—a method adopted where the water is shallow, as the most expeditious mode of propelling their light barks. In about an hour we reached the farther end of the lagoon, distant perhaps five miles from the place of embarkation. The banks as we went along appeared thickly wooded and very thinly inhabited, exhibiting little rariety, beside the occasional remains of marais, of which there are a great number. Our native conductor pointed out the particular pile of stones appropriated to his family, on which he had himself offered gifts to the supposed gods of Tahiti. He mentioned having been present on one occasion when a human victim was taken near this lake:—he was a boy at the time, and was rambling along the bank, when a party of men, led by a chief, approached the spot where he was, and where also the object of their pursuit happened to be. The chief, when he discovered his victim, bade him climb a cocoa-nut tree, which he of course instantly did. He ordered him to pluck some nuts for them, and when this was done, to break off a leaf, and come down. The leaf was to form a basket for his own body to be carried in. On coming down he was quickly dispatched. Our informant ran away in great fear, while the murderers laughed at his terror, and exulted in their easy capture.

Fare' Harbour. Huahiru.—In personal appearance, there is no perceptible difference between the natives of this island and those of Tahiti; and from what we have seen, their progress in civil, social, and religious improvement is precisely similar. I think more pains have been bestowed on their instruction; but, as far as our observation has extended, they occupy much the same position as their Georgian neighbours in the scale of civilization, mental development and morality. On the whole, I should suppose a larger proportion of the population is more or less acquainted with the rudiments of reading and writing; though many are ignorant of these, and it is not impossible that less constant interaction with the shipping may have prevented some of that licentious degradation, which peculiarly characterizes the vicinity of sea-ports. Only one ship has been here during our stay, but in her case considerable irregularities were committed. The use of spirits is just now generally laid aside, and doubtless this salutary regulation will tend to prevent many evils.

Raiatea.—The natural scenery of Raiatea resembles what I have already described in the other islands, but is for the most part less picturesque than any other we have yet seen. It is a much larger island than Huahine, and is supposed to contain fourteen or fifteen hundred people; the whole of whom belong, nominally, to the settlement of Uturoa, though they are of course found scattered round the coast, as most convenient to themselves. Tahaa, a smaller island, containing a population of four or five hundred souls, subject to the same government, is situated a few miles to the northward, and is included within the same reef as Raiatea. This reef is precisely similar to what we have before seen, and extends round the two islands at a considerable distance, affording several excellent harbours, to which commodious channels furnish an easy access. The one in which we are lying is entered from the eastward, through a fine passage between two small islands, and is a spacious basin, capable of containing a large fleet, with a passage at the opposite end to leeward of the island. Nothing could well be more convenient; and although from the circumstance that its shelter, the reef, is as usual low and bare, good tackle is required in the anchorage; yet this stupendous barrier affords a most complete defence from the ocean. Coral and shells are plentiful, but the latter rather dear. Provisions seem to be rather lower than at Tahiti, where more competition diminishes the value of foreign articles of barter. Even there, things are very cheap for the most part. The common price for a good sized hog is six or eight yards of print, or from three to four dollars. Horned cattle are plentiful in all the islands we have yet seen, and are principally the property of the missionaries. When several ships can agree to take an ox among them, beef is sold at about 2d. per lb. Broad print, or cotton dyed a blue colour, is a favourite article of barter, and is always sold by the fathom, this length being convenient for the garment worn round the waist. A fathom is reckoned to be worth nearly a dollar,—about four times its value in England. Gaudy-coloured ribbons are about the same price. A musket costing at home perhaps 12s. is sold at Tahiti for seven or eight dollars.

On the afternoon of Eleventh Month 2nd, we walked out for exercise along the settlement of Uturoa, which extends some distance by the seaside, and called to see an old chief who is said to have been the principal instigator of the last war with Bolabola; to which perhaps more than to any other obvious reason, the present deteriorated condition of this people and the miserable falling away in Bolabola must be attributed. Beside the numerous evils inevitably incident to a nation engaged in hostilities with its neighbours, it is from this fatal period that both islands date the general introduction of spirits; which has proved no less detrimental to the community than fighting. Here, happily, the law has been passed for their prohibition; but in the other island their ravages still continue. We saw four pieces of cannon taken from the Bolabolans, which were used in the late contest; originally brought by a trading vessel from New Zealand, and sold to the poor natives at the rate of eighty hogs each. They are said to have belonged to the unfortunate Boyd, and to have been raised from her wreck by the New Zealanders.

On the 3rd of Eleventh Month, we started in company with C. Barff and a little boy on an excursion to the famous marai of Tabutabu Atea,—situated in the district of Apóa. The wind being against us all the way, it was a hard pull of about twelve miles, which occupied nearly three hours, and unfortunately for us it rained at intervals most of the time. The object of our curiosity is situated on a projecting piece of low land, running from the base of a considerable hill to the beach, and retains abundant features to identify it with the late system of horrors. An enormous banyan tree grows quite near it, and which could not fail to attract our notice and admiration. Like all other specimens of this extraordinary tree, it consists of a column of matted fibrous trunks, intersecting, supporting, or distorting each other, surmounted by a fine head of foliage; from which fall those slender, cord-like tendrils which connect roots and branches, and thus furnish the means of continual increase in size. Exclusive of these junior supporters, what may be called the stem of this enormous and complicated fabric, measured by paces forty-six yards in circumference; and I should think at least twenty men might conceal themselves in its truly gigantic mass. Between this natural curiosity and the marai, under the shade of a grove is seen the space of ground appropriated to the dances, once so much in vogue here, in celebration of their abominable orgies.

Bolabola, Eleventh Month 11th.—In the afternoon we walked through the settlement, and saw several sick and infirm persons. My father distributed several pairs of spectacles where they seemed to be most needed, among the more serious natives who could read. One of these, a cripple, we found in his hut with his Bible before him, and two muskets hanging over his head: he is a constant attender of the school, acting as teacher as well as he is able. On our walks here we have generally been attended by a group of children, who frolic round the strangers, and afford much amusement by their sprightliness, wildness and curiosity. They are really fine, intelligent little creatures. Some of them look healthy, but too many bear marks of the prevailing disorders, which have been deplorably neglected among these islanders. A more invaluable present could scarcely be sent to them than a good supply of drugs,—particularly calomel, salts, sulphur, ipecacuanha, opium and rhubarb. It is true, in many places there is no one to administer them, and in others they would not be administered to the greatest advantage, for lack of professional knowledge; but if sent to the care of some of the missionaries, they would confer a great blessing. C. B. does much in relieving the poor creatures around him, by his own exertions in this way.

South Pacific, Eleventh Month 19th, 1836.—However deficient my accounts of the islands we have just left may appear, it would be no difficult matter to add considerably to the interest felt in their perusal, had my object been merely to draw a pleasing picture. I have noticed the causes which operate in producing the very false impression which certainly is produced by reading the reports of some former visitors. There are many circumstances connected with the South Sea Islands, peculiarly fascinating and poetical, and these have been made the most of by some of their delineators. My wish, that a simple statement should produce a simple and correct impression, has induced me to confine my remarks pretty much to matters of plain fact, more or less intimately connected with our own progress or the object of the voyage.

Of Tahiti, I have already given you some particulars, also of Eimeo. The government, laws, and people of the other Georgian Isles are essentially the same, and the state of society not materially different. The same compulsory system which obtains in Tahiti, ensures for the present in Eimeo an external attention to the services of the chapel; but the very existence of this detestable regulation indicates unsoundness. The fact that the poor native is subjected to a penalty if he absents himself from the chapel, and the sight of a man with a stick ransacking the villages for worshippers, before the hour of service,—a spectacle we have witnessed,—are so utterly abhorrent to our notions, that I cannot revert to the subject without feelings of regret and disgust. The general appearance of the country, and of the inhabitants of Huahine, is similar to Tahiti, and the popular habits seem nearly the same. The soil is exceedingly prolific, demanding but little labour. Hogs and domestic fowls are pretty numerous, but horned cattle are only found in the possession of the missionary and a few others; and indeed it is undesirable that they should increase much, as they certainly are a great nuisance among the native plantations. In Tahiti and Eimeo they abound and run wild, preying upon the fruits and damaging the fences in parts that cannot be easily watched.

Both Raiatea and Tahaa are fine fertile islands, capable of supporting ten times their present population; but there is no prospect of increase under present circumstances; and if the sweeping bane of ardent spirits is re-admitted, the numbers will rapidly decline. Even in Huahine, where things are undoubtedly better managed and the people more instructed, the number of births and deaths are just about equal. C. B. told us that he hoped during the present year there would be a small preponderance in favour of the former. The more abandoned portion of the community scarcely ever have families, and many of the children that are born are miserably diseased, so that a little aggravation of circumstances, such as a return to general intemperance, would make existing causes adequate for a speedy extermination. I trust, however, these islanders may be preserved, after having survived the bloody era of human immolation, infanticide, and other pagan atrocities,—from falling victims to vices introduced and kept up by 'Christians.'

But of all the islands in the Society group, Bolabola exhibits at the present time the most melancholy spectacle. It is indeed a lovely island, and lacks only a moral and industrious population, and a consistent united government, to ensure its national prosperity. But, exhausted by the late struggle with Raiatea, the chiefs divided among themselves, all moral restraints disregarded by one faction, and every excess openly sanctioned;—the other party, who still adhere nominally to the cause of the missionaries, left to support their own principles,—there is little of a pleasing nature to be said respecting it. The more sober part of the people seemed tractable enough; but it is scarcely to be expected that they will maintain their ground, associated with and related as they are, to the lawless faction. At the time of our visit the fruit season had not arrived, and consequently the means of distillation were not within their power; but a few weeks would furnish them with an abundant harvest of bread-fruit, etc., and it was greatly feared, that last year's excesses would again be indulged in, and a famine produced by the consumption of every article of food in the making of spirits.

The people here have much less of foreign clothing than the natives of the other islands,—possessing fewer opportunities of obtaining it, and having wasted their means in drinking. This circumstance alone prevents many from attending chapel, when a missionary is here. Whatever their motive might be, the better sort appeared extremely eager to supply themselves with clothing, and would part with almost any thing they possessed, (which is not much, poor creatures!) to obtain a bit of print or calico.

The settlement is composed of wicker huts, with the exception of one or two dilapidated houses, the chapel and the mission-house. The island is extremely fertile, producing vast quantities of bread-fruit; but it is by no means well supplied with water, and on this account can never become a general resort for shipping, although it possesses a most magnificent harbour. We saw a spring or two, which furnish a constant supply; but the water usually found among the natives is nearly unfit for use, except during the rainy season.

As a missionary station, it is at present abandoned; but we saw nothing about the chiefs and people of the more respectable party particularly discouraging. On the contrary, I feel no doubt that a large portion of the inhabitants, whose interest in every point of view it would certainly be to protect such a resident, are capable of appreciating the value of a conscientious missionary. The lawless faction are at present incorrigible; but the removal of their leader would no doubt terminate their career, and this is an event by no means improbable, if he persist in his present intemperate habits. One of his sons fell a victim to intemperance only a few weeks back.

Sandwich Islet, Oahu.—On the 7th of First Month, 1836, we visited the mission establishment and looked through the printing, binding, composing-rooms, etc. Two presses are kept at work: at present printing the New Testament, a geography, the Hawaii newspaper,—(Ke Kumu Hawaii,)—and a music-book for a volume of hymns. The newspaper last year was twice its present size, and sold for twice its present price, which is half a dollar annually: it was published every fortnight, and 3500 copies were circulated. Probably its circulation will be much increased this season. It is a small but neat paper, containing information on subjects calculated to interest the people, such as natural history, and particular occurrences in the islands; and the demand indicates a relish on the part of the natives for such a source of instruction and amusement. We were pleased with the machinery on the establishment, which is in good repair, and is worked entirely by natives, under the direction of a foreign printer and binder.

There are at present residing in Honolulu, belonging to the American Board of Missions, two 'ordained' ministers, a doctor, a book-binder, a printer, and a 'secular agent.' A missionary from one of the other islands is here just now with his family. The above are all married men, although one or two of their number are quite young; and they all reside in the same neighbourhood, forming quite a community among themselves.

The end of the week is almost universally adopted in Oahu as a time for riding on horseback; and accordingly the roads and commons swarm with the gentry of the neighbourhood, who vie with each other in risking their necks. Foreigners, native nobility, and others, are seen galloping about in all directions, to the discomfiture, or at least the 'bodily fear' of sober pedestrians. The Sandwich Island women are really very adroit on horseback; but the posture in which these amazons choose to exhibit, violates every feeling of refinement.

22nd.—Some efforts have lately been making on the part of both natives and foreigners, in the way of petitioning the government here for the suppression of spirit-selling, which is increased to a shocking extent. The king, unhappily, is fond of drinking himself, and moreover derives considerable emolument from the licenses to vend this pernicious article; so that surrounded as he is by ill-advisers, there is little hope that any alteration will take place at present. Many of the foreign residents defend the sale and use of spirits; which is one principal source of profit with some of them. The village of Honolulu is supposed to contain about two hundred foreigners, and we can only hear of two houses among those who are traders, not more or less concerned in the sale of spirits. There are at present about fifteen grog shops, where all kinds of distilled liquors are sold at a very low rate. I have not yet seen a single native intoxicated, and really believe the drinking is almost exclusively confined to the foreigners and half-castes.

One of the white inhabitants was killed in a drunken quarrel just before our arrival; and a captain narrowly escaped the same fate a few days since, having the temporal artery cut in a fray on shore.

Among the sailors, the evil of drinking is greatly upheld by masters and owners of ships, whose practice has a tendency to perpetuate the grievance which they pretend to deplore. How absurd on board vessels lying at anchor, in a hot climate, where the men are in a state of almost continual excitement in consequence of what they get when on shore, to give out regularly to each man, and even in some cases to each boy, an allowance of rum every day!

On the 2nd of Second Month, I accompanied Captain C. and his sister on an excursion inland, to see the famous mountain pass of Oahu It is situated about seven or eight miles up a fine valley, which stretches across the centre of the island, behind the village of Honolulu. After crossing the plain of lava which lies along the coast, our route was along a winding path, through brooks and foliage and steep ravines; which by a very gradual ascent led us eventually to the verge of the precipice. Here the most imposing spectacle is presented. Before us—from the bare torrent-worn rocks which surmount this giant barrier—was spread a wide undulated tract of country, bounded by the then tranquil ocean, and varied by woods, meadows, and sheets of water, all distinctly exhibited at one view beneath our feet. The point on which we stood is the verge of a precipice, perhaps eight hundred or a thousand feet high; which is ascended from the eastward by a winding staircase track, leading from rock to rock, in some places nearly perpendicular. From this track the frightful depth is in many parts concealed by bushes and projecting points of the cliff; a circumstance which makes the danger of ascent and descent much less than it could otherwise be: but from the dizzy summit, the eye fathoms at a glance the tremendous void below. On the left was seen the termination of a cliff, which towers like a pillar from the vale beneath high into the air above our heads, with a boldness and sublimity altogether indescribable: on the right, a bank of rich foliage rose from the plain to the very summit of the mountain, with a richness and grandeur equally beyond the reach of words,—though less striking to the eye. The huts of the natives scattered over the country below, were seen like specks on the green surface; and the white dwelling of the missionary at the Koloa station was just discoverable on the distant shore. Behind us lay the fine romantic slope, by which we had reached this truly imposing pass, skirted by a chain of luxuriant hills on each side, and covered with an exuberance of vegetation peculiar to the tropics:—the harbour and its floating occupants and the dim expanse of ocean beyond it, terminating the prospect in the west. After collecting some curious plants and land-shells, and feasting our eyes on the magnificent scenery of the place, we commenced a return towards the inhabited world, and arrived safe in Honolulu soon after sun-set.

These islanders, like all the other uncivilized tribes whom we have seen, are fond of tobacco, and carry the practice of smoking it to a singular extreme. They inhale the fumes into the lungs, and quickly feel their stupifying effects. In some of the islands, the use of it is made illegal; and we have heard of an instance in which a strange expedient was resorted to, in order to supply the place of this narcotic;—this was to press two or three of the arteries in the neck till dizziness was produced, and the individual fell down insensible, recovering after some time, as from a fit of intoxication. Thus stupor and forgetfulness are proved to constitute great part of the gratification supposed to be afforded by smoking. The missionaries are very often censured for trying to suppress the use of tobacco; but the Sandwich islanders carry smoking to such an extent, that their influence seems very properly directed to abolish it.

17th.—The harbour has been a good deal disturbed by the yells of a band of north-west-coast Indians, who are quartered on board a hulk at anchor near us. These poor fellows come here to receive payment for their furs, and for services which the ships obtain from them on the coast; and they being fond of rum, and rum being very plentiful among their employers, the result might be easily predicted. Howling, dancing, and drumming on a piece of wood form their amusements, to which quarrelling and fighting may be added. One of them was drowned a short time since close to our vessel, by falling into the water by night in a state of intoxication.

These Indians differ widely in character and appearance from the South Sea Islanders. They are wary, intelligent people, rather Jewish in their expression of countenance, and not so handsome as the Polynesians. Their heads are remarkably large,—their faces broad and eyes deep,—hair long, straight and black, and complexion swarthy. Their language is particularly disagreeable to the ear: few of their words are properly articulated; but the whole business of enunciation is referred to the throat, which seems half blocked up with spasms and contortions to produce the requisite sounds. They have frequently been on board to sell shells, and appear very friendly and harmless, though by no means so childish and simple as Tahitians. Fire arms, rum, tobacco, and clothing—for use rather than ornament,—are what they most crave.

Fourth Month 6th, 1836.—I was invited to join in another equestrian excursion, with my former kind companions; and a remarkably fine day proved highly propitious to our enjoyment,—although previous rains, which rendered the steeps less accessible, prevented our ascending the mountains so far as had been proposed. We reached sufficient elevation, however, to obtain a magnificent view of the coast, village, harbour, and ocean, and to be surrounded by rich hills and dales, which blend with indescribable loveliness. The valleys—literally huge ravines between the heights, which conduct the fertilizing streams to the shore, are but thinly inhabited; but they teem with exuberant vegetation. The mountains are very finely wooded, and the more open parts of the hills are studded over with cattle. As we were situated when at the highest point of our journey, the deep vales spread beneath us with an enchanting variety; and summit rising over summit into the clouds, marked the multitude of hills which stretch towards the coast in wild fantastic ranges. Punch-bowl Hill, a brown volcanic mound of a circular form, probably about five hundred feet high, looked quite diminutive from our superior elevation, and its fortified top was completely exposed beneath us; though from the harbour, this hill appears large. You can scarcely form an idea of the exhilarating feeling, which the mind experiences on these noble heights in a tropical climate. Here all is wild, and bold, and majestic; the air is pure and cool, and the solitude is unbroken by a sound less romantic than the lowing of herds, the murmur of descending waters, or the simple notes of songsters dwelling unseen in the wooded recesses. The eye,—accustomed below to parched, naked plains,—here luxuriates on the smooth slopes, the deep shades, or the towering forest-clothed peaks and ridges, and the lungs inhale new life and vigour in the free, bracing atmosphere of a more genial clime. If to the smiles of surrounding nature are super-added the rare delights of congenial society, the wanderer and the exile might almost be tempted to forget for a moment that the wide world separates him from his home. But such an illusion must be of short duration: a descent soon restores the less pleasing reality of common life in the desert of a strange land.

Island of Tanai, Sandwich Group,—Koloa Station, Sixth Month 20th, 1836.—Being kindly furnished with a steed and conductor, I undertook an excursion along the sea shore to see a curious cavern in the rock, through which the surf rushes to a considerable distance underground, and hurls a column of foam with tremendous force into the air, like a magnificent fountain. There are several such cavities in the lava, on the shore of this island; the largest we saw lies a considerable distance from the anchorage at Koloa, to the westward. The coast is composed of rude masses of lava, extending in every rugged form along the margin of the sea, and occasionally rising into huge perpendicular cliffs. The phenomenon in question, is merely caused by a passage which leads from beneath the surf, when it rolls up the strand, and opens like a well, some little distance inland, sufficiently removed from the breakers to give the fountain an isolated appearance. When a heavy swell breaks on the shore, the air in this unexplored cavern is driven with tremendous noise through its sounding caves, and from one or more mouths is projected a momentary blast of white foam, to the height probably of twenty or thirty feet. As the wave retires, all is still on the black broken rocks; the mouth of the cave looks like a natural well, half-filled with masses of stone, which conceal its depth; but as the rolling billow thunders towards the coast, a deafening noise is heard underneath, which increases in violence till it ends in a fierce loud hiss, as steam discharged from the valve of a steam-engine; and in a moment afterwards, a cloud of water and foam is driven high into the air.

The geographical position of the Sandwich Islands, in a commercial point of view, is a valuable one;—in the North Pacific, they form an intermediate link between two distant continents, and thus facilitate an interaction which is now considerable, and will probably become much more so hereafter. As a resort of the whalers, and of traders to the north-west coast of America, they are likewise important: at Honolulu alone about one hundred and thirty ships touched during last year, and at other places the number was very considerable.

A constant trade breeze, which during great part of the year sweeps across the group from the eastward, renders the atmosphere exceedingly salubrious: probably between the tropics no situation is more healthy. To an English constitution the climate is undoubtedly relaxing, and would probably, apart from all causes which contribute to increase its effect but which are not inseparable from it, exhaust the animal system more speedily than a colder clime. The human constitution, like the vine, seems periodically to require a season of comparative repose, which these seats of perennial summer do not furnish; early maturity and premature decline characterize the residents in these sunny, stormless regions. The winter here, a cooler, more irregular, showery season than the summer, is called 'the rainy season,' but this epithet, as generally understood, is not quite appropriate; the continued drenching rains that mark that period in Tahiti, we certainly did not see. The rain which fell during our stay, (and the season was considered rather unusually wet,) did not I believe exceed what generally falls in England during the corresponding season.

Eight islands constitute this cluster, to which might be added several small ones lying near the others, which are not usually enumerated; the present population of the group, as determined by a census taken by the missionaries in the present year, is 110,000. In 1826, it was said to be about 155,000, so that if these numbers are correct, and the past is a specimen of the future, it will not require many more years to depopulate the islands altogether.

In the instance before us, the injury is evidently to be referred, not to a succession of open hostilities, but to a complication of causes, in increasing operation. Among these, disease and immoral habits are no doubt the principal; but there are others of no trifling character. Association with foreigners has increased the needs of the chiefs, without furnishing any corresponding means of supplying them, and in consequence of this, the poor people are more heavily burdened than formerly. They are continually obliged to labour without receiving any remuneration, and to furnish an indefinite amount of property in the form of taxes or tribute, in order to retain an inch of ground; and this last evil is increased by every addition to the size of their families. A large number of the more enterprizing natives now avoid, at least for a time, the impositions of their chiefs, by going as sailors in the whale ships; emigration too, is said to be eagerly sought by the poor, dissatisfied people, who are anxious to try a change, in the hope of amending their condition.

Many of the above evils arise, as you will perceive, out of the moral degradation of the people, and I cannot for a moment doubt, that could they be really formed into a temperate Christian community, there would be no danger whatever of their national extinction, so long as they retain their independence. May the purifying influence of the gospel of our Lord, which has already made some progress among them, correct the disordered state of society which now prevails, and avert the fate which threatens this people!

Of the Sandwich Islanders, as a race, I think highly. They are intelligent, grave, inquiring, and peculiarly inoffensive and docile. No one who has seen much of them, can, without great injustice, refuse to admit that the minds of these natives are quite capable of improvement and elevation: there are difficulties connected with their instruction, but the ground-work of natural capability is indisputably there. Less volatile and playful than Tahitians, their gravity might in some cases, be mistaken for moroseness; but no people could be more conciliating and ready to oblige than they generally are. Their curiosity is excited by every thing new, which is brought under their notice, and to prove their observation, we need only look at the improvements and conveniences which they have adopted or ingeniously imitated. In connexion with their docility, they sometimes appear childish; but this apparent imbecility arises from their simplicity, and a consciousness of their ignorance and circumstantial inferiority to many whom they meet from the civilized world. In some of their actions, however, where no such considerations weigh,—as for instance, when they have to deal with lawless and abandoned foreigners, they prove that they neither fear nor venerate a white skin, merely as such.

[Speaking of the dress of the islanders, C. W. remarks,] the garland worn on the head by chief women, is a costly decoration, it is said to be worth fifty or sixty dollars. It is formed of yellow feathers, which one species of mountain bird furnishes in small numbers; it is said that each bird does not supply more than two or three small feathers; these are arranged like the swan's down neck-bands of Europe, and are glossy and silky in the extreme. Lord Byron procured two of these costly garlands for some ladies of rank in England, a few years since. In the remoter parts of the islands, the females still retain their old garments, which happily are very much out of use among the more civilized. A piece of native cloth wound round the waist, and a loose, shapeless frock, either of print or native cloth made in imitation of print, extends from the neck to the ankles, with ample sleeves, and sometimes with a frill or collar. This dress almost entirely conceals the figure, and is a very rational and becoming garment, in which they look well. Their hair, which is usually strong and black, is allowed to grow long, and either tied in a knot on the top of the head, or regularly parted in front and set off with combs, curls, etc. Shoes and stockings are scarcely ever seen. Of course there are many of both sexes in the principal sea-ports, who approximate very considerably towards the European style of dress, and exhibit a great variety of costume; but these are exceptions to the general rule.

The Sandwich Island female countenance is often coarse and unfeminine,—expressive,—but not of those qualities which we most admire: in many, intelligence is conspicuous, and they have fine keen eyes. Their movements are particularly awkward and ungraceful. Like the Tahitians both sexes are accustomed to sit cross legged, or still more commonly, squatted on their heels.

The appearance of the native dwellings, gardens, etc., is indicative of much greater industry than any thing seen at Tahiti; but as to civilization or comfort, I will say but little. The huts strikingly resemble in appearance old hay stacks, having sides as well as roof of thatch: they are, however, well adapted to the climate, being at once a protection from the heat and the cold. One of the king's houses, and the native chapels which we have seen, are composed of this very homely material. The dwellings of the chiefs are more or less modelled upon those of the white residents. Some of them are really quite respectably furnished, and capable of containing the rare elements of comfort and convenience. The American missionaries, excepting in some places where stations have been but recently occupied, are uniformly provided with comfortable houses, built, as nearly as circumstances will admit, in home style and often of home materials; neat stone, or coral, or mud-brick walled cottages, shingled or roofed with zinc, plastered, and floored and ceiled; the woodwork in some cases imported from America, whereby the natives are furnished with models, and they have already, in several instances, availed themselves of the advantage.

Idolatry, so far as the adoration of images is concerned, may be said to be nationally abolished in the Sandwich Islands. This fact does not imply that all have even nominally embraced the Christian religion; but a small part of the whole population belong to the church by any right of membership. At one station, not very long ago established, in a district where hundreds usually attend the services in the chapel, we were informed, I think, that the number of church members did not exceed fifteen or sixteen. The missionaries find it needful to be constantly on their guard against hypocritical profession.

The influence of irreligious foreigners, who are scattered over nearly all the islands of the Pacific, constitutes probably the greatest external hinderance to the moral improvement of the natives, which the missionaries have to encounter. They may be styled the missionaries of Satan, diligently engaged in extending his kingdom, and counteracting with the efficiency of well-instructed agents, every attempt to diminish his power;—and unhappily these labourers are not few. The Sandwich Island government has adopted certain regulations, which discountenance the settlement of seamen, who might choose to leave their vessels; but in one way or other many contrive to take up their abode. Men arrested and confined in the fort at Honolulu are bought out perhaps by a dram-shop keeper, who can easily pay himself afterwards out of the wages of his purchase. Dollars will effect almost any thing with the chiefs: most of their sentences passed on criminals can be commuted for money, and that legally.

I am not aware of any public measures which tend to discourage foreign traders from settling in the islands. They cannot buy land it is true, but they may rent it for a stated term of years. The steady determination of the government, not to sell an inch of ground, is a measure of excellent policy; and I hope neither king nor chiefs will ever be persuaded or frightened out of it. Whenever they sell the soil, they give away their strength, and this is already insufficient to govern their unruly white subjects.

The present is a critical time in the history of these islands, and many of the more reflective and sagacious natives are fully sensible of the fact. While the aboriginal inhabitants are rapidly on the decline in point of number, the foreigners are increasing, and acquiring an ascendancy which threatens the downfall of the former as a nation. The government is inefficient, partly from the character of the king, who is very much influenced by the whites and half castes, whose interest leads them to encourage his dissipated, thoughtless course of life,—and partly because his native simplicity and inexperience, are ill adapted to cope with designing adventurers who are ready to take every advantage. The remote locality of the islands in these seas, so inaccessible to the eye of philanthropy and the hand of unbiased justice, is greatly against them. Who is to represent them in civilized countries? Who is to defend their insulted rights in the respective islands,—to advise them what measures to pursue, and with an impartiality that levels all petty distinctions of nation or complexion, to stand forward in the cause of religion, equity, and humanity? If foreigners encroach upon the common prerogatives of nature, the laws of England and America are no laws in the Pacific; but if Pacific islanders infringe on the assumed or usurped privileges of the subject of a powerful nation, a sloop of war is dispatched to inflict punishment—a punishment too often dispensing ruin, alike to the innocent and the guilty, by an act of bloody retribution.

The first missionaries who settled on the Sandwich Islands arrived about fifteen years since; and though several families have left the ground and returned home, subsequent reinforcements have augmented the number to nearly thirty families, including physician, printer, bookbinder, etc. Some of the original pioneers have acquired an excellent knowledge of the native language, and by these it has been reduced to writing, and numerous translations made from the English into it. The New Testament is published in a neat 12mo. volume: the Bible itself has not yet been circulated; but many parts have been printed, and probably the entire Bible will appear before long. A vocabulary, a grammar, a work on geography, the rudiments of arithmetic, natural history, astronomy, mathematics, with small works on several familiar subjects calculated to interest and instruct, have been issued; beside selections from Scripture in various forms, and several hymn books. There is also as already noticed a semimonthly newspaper, which is no doubt the medium of much information; and is calculated to amuse and incite to application many of the young people. Great interest is evinced in the new works as they appear, and they are bought up with eagerness.

The time of the missionaries is devoted almost exclusively to their professional duties, so far as the unavoidable cares connected with recent domestic establishments will permit. The principle on which they are supported, leaves no inducement to engage in trade in order to maintain their families. The board at home supplies them with every thing they require through their 'secular agent,' a person whose office it is to provide for all their necessities on the spot. He is applied to for whatever they stand in need of, furnishes conveyances to and fro, transmits their letters, books, etc., and in fact acts the part of general agent to them all. But though all partake of the common stock, no narrow prescriptions or restrictions in regard to their several expenses and arrangements, reduce the families to one level: each one does as he sees best according to his habits and necessities, with the understanding that all extravagance will be studiously avoided.

As an organized body, destined to operate in a given field, and to prosecute a given object, I think the Americans in the Sandwich Islands afford a highly creditable example; and certainly, as regards the personal character of many of the labourers, their evident exclusive desire to benefit the natives by imparting what they themselves value, their openness to receive the suggestions of others, whose ideas and views may differ, and their intellectual qualifications,—they form a highly estimable community. They are Congregationalists by profession, and probably their acknowledged principles recognize the lawfulness of war; but several individuals among them, with whom we conversed on this subject, appeared practically convinced of its utter inconsistency with the gospel of peace. Oaths are happily not in use in the Pacific, so that our Lord's command in this respect is not, so far as I am aware, judicially abrogated among the natives by presumptuous man.

In the public assemblies for worship, the Sandwich Islanders generally behave with decent quietness, without the vigorous application of sticks, or even the exhibition in terrorem of these unhallowed appurtenances of a house for religious worship. Their habit of coming in and going out during the services, is not yet broken off, although attempts have been made to correct it.

The wives of the missionaries are in the habit of meeting certain classes of the natives for the purpose of instructing them; some assemble the adult female members of the congregation,—some teach the children, and one in Hololulu has charge of an infant school. An effort is now making to teach the people to manufacture cotton cloth, and some good common material has been already produced; which if attainable by all would constitute an important improvement on the present paper coverings, and make the islanders less dependent on a foreign supply. It appears to me that literary education alone, is not what this people most need: a system adapted to benefit them, ought to exert a more general influence. What they require at the present time for their moral and civil melioration, is a class of plain, honest, industrious settlers, who would furnish domestic models for their imitation: not men who merely come to make money by their exertions, but such as would come from a sense of duty to live among the people, and by leading them on towards improvement and civilization, through the silent but potent means of personal influence and example, endeavour to raise their present low condition. The mission families are of course now exerting an excellent influence in this way; but their number is small, their efforts are divided among a variety of objects, and they ordinarily belong to a class of society, somewhat more refined and intellectual than the persons to whom I refer: their sphere in fact is a different one.

The missionaries, wherever we have been, form an important civil defence for the poor natives, which the overbearing and unjust encroachments of foreign adventurers render needful. They occupy the opposite scale: while others combine to support their individual interests, or the more general interests of commerce and national aggrandizement, the missionary takes the part of the islander: he informs him of his just right, remonstrates for him against injustice, and what is more important still, he constitutes a continual witness of the lawless conduct, in which unprincipled men indulge abroad. We may perhaps have met with a few singular instances, in which other foreigners occupy something of an equal, neutral ground—not exclusively bent on the support of one side; but I must confess I should find it difficult to point out half a dozen cases of much efficiency, independent of the missionaries. The latter, from the very nature of their circumstances, as agents of absent benevolence directed towards the native population, in constant correspondence with the better part of the community at home, almost necessarily serve as a salutary check. This is perhaps indicated with sufficient clearness by the fact, that they are universally hated and dreaded by the contrary faction, wherever they reside.

And now before I finally leave the Sandwich Islands, I will just remark, that our visit to them has afforded us an opportunity of becoming acquainted with some of our trans-atlantic brethren, which I cannot but highly value. I own, in order to judge of the American character, we ought to see it in America; but still, for obtaining a general idea of it, the white community we have left, affords probably a favourable opportunity: the numerical proportion of English residents with whom we had interaction, is quite small. To both classes indeed, we are indebted for much kindness and many polite attentions; for which, as wanderers and strangers, we could not but highly appreciate and feel grateful. For myself, I can say, I shall always recur to our visit to this remote corner of the earth, with feelings of peculiar and lively interest.

On the 19th of Seventh Month, 1836, we re-crossed the equator, and entered once more the southern hemisphere. The sinking North star was watched with considerable interest, although the Magellan clouds, and the beautiful Cross of the South, more than compensate for his loss. Perhaps the sky between the tropics never exhibits a more imposing aspect than during a short space subsequent to the sun-set. The whole west is tinged with the most delicate shades of colouring,—from the rich amber to the deep, bright blue of ether, which intermingle from the gilded horizon that conceals the sun, up to the regions of the starlit hemisphere above. My father has a particular admiration of this evening exhibition, and delights to contemplate it, in these almost cloudless latitudes. The shades of colouring which encircle the bright region where the sun has just set, have something of the prismatic hues about them; but they are less defined, and spread richly from the ocean to the high vault of blue overhead, with a vastness and beauty almost indescribable. Before the sun sets, the atmosphere is usually mottled with light fleecy clouds, which fly in the direction of the trade-wind till the heat of day is gone: afterwards the cool air condenses them, and they are dissipated in the form of dew, leaving an atmosphere of cloudless purity.

While crossing the trade latitudes this time, it has appeared as though the wind is perceptibly affected by the rays of the sun; for during the day the breeze is often light; but when the heat of his beams is felt to the westward of our horizon, and the air consequently rarified to leeward of us, the force of the wind increases.

South Pacific, Eighth Month 10th.—Rarotonga, or as in the charts, Orurule, is the principal island in the Hervey cluster; all of which are inhabited.

Rarotonga contains a population of 7000

Magnica is supposed to contain 1800

Atui is supposed to contain 1600

Aitutuki is supposed to contain 1800

Mitiaro and Mauki together, about 700

Rarotonga is a lovely island, about thirty miles in circumference, and nearly circular in form. It is obviously of volcanic origin, although I am not aware that any crater is known to exist on its surface. Calcined stone and cinders are abundant; and the marked, rugged outline of its peaks and ridges, indicates significantly the convulsive agency which has been employed in their formation.

The shores are built up by coral architects, and exhibit a curious instance of coralline formation intermingled with upheaved masses of original rock, which protrude in some places through the former, in a way that would lead to the supposition that sub-marine eruptions of comparatively recent date, have encroached on a super-stratum of coral, which has been progressively rising round the coast. Coral sand and shells, etc., consolidated by the action of the elements, in some parts of the shore, form beds of fine, available stone, probably as durable as ordinary free-stone, of which the natives are beginning to find the value, as a building material.

The highest mountain is, I should think, four thousand feet high, possibly rather more than this; and others of somewhat inferior elevation occupy the central districts, and ensure a constant supply of moisture to the lowlands. These districts team with bread-fruit, plantains, bananas, citrons, limes, vis, papaws, taro, sweet potatoe, sugar-cane, cocoa-nuts, palms, and many other tropical productions of majestic growth. Every thing flourishes with an exuberance and richness rarely surpassed.

The island is divided into four parts, governed by separate, independent chiefs. These are at present happily united in the wish to promote the tranquillity and improvement of the country, by seconding the efforts of the missionaries. It is now eight or nine years since the latter settled among them, and although assailed by many difficulties and discouragements, their residence has been cheered by continued kindness on the part of the people, of whose friendly conduct and docility C. Fittman gives the most gratifying account. It is doubtless the civil and political interest of the islanders to retain their missionary instructors; and therefore in the absence of particular causes of complaint or dislike, it is not at all surprising that they should behave courteously to them: I think too, that the character of the Rarotonga natives is superior to that of their windward neighbours. They appear to possess finer feelings, and less slothful, effeminate minds than the Tahitians. In their wars before the introduction of Christianity, it is said they never practised any of those fiend-like barbarities, which the luxurious, mild Tahitian was guilty of; such, for example, as dealing out indiscriminate vengeance in cold blood, on the defenceless and the innocent; beating the body of a dead foe to a pulp, and when dried in the sun in a flat form, wearing it as a cloak, etc. On the contrary, though furious and bloody in the moment of passion, these warriors are said to have even relented of their deeds of death; and in some instances, to have repaired with their personal efforts the desolations of war, which their enemies had suffered. They appear to be more irascible than the Tahitians or Sandwich Islanders. We hear that the boys are often seen fighting each other, with a spirit and rancour that would probably frighten the children of Tahiti; although, more docile, lively and harmless little urchins, than they are on ordinary occasions, cannot well be imagined. As proof of their sensitiveness and excitability of feeling, I may remark, that it is no uncommon thing in Rarotonga, for the party who thinks himself aggrieved, to commit suicide. We were informed that such a death frequently occurs; and during our short stay, one man hung himself in consequence of a quarrel with some other native; even women are guilty of this crime.

As a people, the natives of Rarotonga are certainly more energetic and industriously disposed, than some of the other islanders. They only need a motive, and they will not shun labour and persevering effort. There is no difficulty in getting work done, if an adequate inducement is offered. No sooner was it known that we wished to obtain curiosities, than they set to work to furnish them: they refitted their neglected war-caps, collected shells, brought specimens of timber hewn with great labour, and actually manufactured a number of new drums out of solid wood. Some of their sashes, mats, baskets, etc., are made with great labour; and their large canoes, which were formerly used in war, exhibited in their decorations great ingenuity and pains. Some of the figures which form the heads of these canoes, are really quite neatly sculptured, considering the tools with which they have been made; and the carving is executed with considerable regularity of design.

The native dwellings are mostly situated along the shore, forming several straggling, irregular villages, which are half concealed in foliage, and are connected by raised foot-paths, wooden bridges, etc., so as to be easily visited from all parts of the coast. Many of the more modern houses are wattled buildings, and look respectable and capable of being made comfortable dwellings, if the owners possessed but the requisite materials. The original huts were constructed in the bird-cage style of Tahiti. In some respects, I think the modern plan of building greatly superior to the one formerly in vogue; although really in point of comfort, with their habits, the difference to the natives is not so striking as might be supposed. White-washed walls, without glazed windows or boarded floors, destitute of all furniture but a few mats, and some dried reeds or grass for a carpet,—have a poor, stable-like appearance. However, time will, I trust, introduce a change of habits, and furnish with civilized conveniences, apartments certainly better calculated to receive them, than the open railed huts formerly in use, and which are still not uncommon.

Out of the seven thousand persons on this island, about three thousand are estimated as children; they are, with few exceptions, receiving some kind of instruction. Great numbers can read and write, and if the utility of these acquirements is not quite so obvious as could be wished, at least it is probable that the time passed in school by so large a portion of the young inhabitants is more innocently employed than it would be elsewhere: a compulsion is used on the part of the chiefs to compel them to learn, which is abhorrent to our free notions. A considerable number of copies of the four Evangelists are now in circulation, and one cannot but rejoice, that many of the people can read them with ease; otherwise I confess their close application to the study of reading and writing, when we know that neither pen, ink, nor paper, and but very few printed pages, are within their reach, has appeared to me as of comparatively little value. Corporal punishment is unhappily tolerated in the schools here. Under the immediate eye of C. P. there is no danger of much severity, but he cannot see every where: natives are empowered to act as teachers, and it cannot be expected that moderation and discretion will always be observed, particularly when the scholars are obliged to attend. The influence of fear is in itself an evil, and therefore I regret its existence at all.

Out of the whole population of the island, I understand not more than one hundredth part are regularly initiated into church membership. Candidates for admission pass through an ordeal of classes, as they are termed, which is intended to prevent the easy introduction of hypocrisy and unsound profession.

The bulk of the people, I rejoice to say, are independent holders of property, which is as much their own as the land belonging to the chiefs, unless forfeited by a breach of the law. But by virtue of a right acknowledged from time immemorial, obtained by usurpation and superior power, and upheld by superstition and ignorance, the word of a chief is absolute law among the uncivilized tribes; and his views and wishes are studiously followed by the multitude, who seem to feel a pride in maintaining his influence, and venerating his generally huge, unwieldy person. The chiefs of Rarotonga support the interests of the missionaries, take part in person in the services which are performed in the pulpit or the desk, and live on terms of intimacy and courtesy with the families of their instructors.

C. P. is a zealous, active and amiable man, whose individual influence is most salutary upon those by whom he is surrounded. His health unhappily is extremely delicate, but with care it is possible he may yet be spared to his family and pastoral charge for a considerable time.

Some years back the manufacture of calico was introduced into this island and met with more encouragement and success than under the protection of the Tahitians. Some of the people learned to spin and weave tolerably well, and traces of their skill are visible at this day; but this most needful provision for the destitution of the islanders has not become by any means so generally useful as could have been wished. Under their circumstances, destitute of the facilities for its manufacture which civilized countries would supply, the natives find making calico a tedious and laborious affair; and consequently it has been very much relinquished: although for lack of the requisite supply of bark, which has been rendered extremely scarce, in consequence of a hurricane that destroyed many of the bread-fruit trees a few years ago, the poor people are miserably in need of clothing. When a vessel touches for provisions, cotton goods in the way of barter are easily obtained; but this source is by no means adequate to the supply of a dense population. The common dress of the adults is a piece of native cloth wound round the waist and extending to the knee; in-doors occasionally, and generally out of doors, a large loose piece of cloth is thrown round the bust and held on with one arm. They have little to say, but look very observing, and display great acuteness and cheerfulness. The women are more nearly white in complexion than any other of the Pacific islanders we have seen, and often have pleasing faces and well formed graceful figures.

The amount of disease among this people is exceedingly small, when compared with other islands, and the adult population generally look healthy and comfortable. The place we visited literally swarmed with children, and the population is rapidly increasing. In two districts which contain about 3700 souls, between the Seventh Month 1834, and Sixth Month 1836, the births and deaths were in the proportion of 248 to 100.

The mission establishment, at which we were kindly entertained during our stay, wears quite a respectable, orderly appearance; indeed the settlement of Gnatagnia altogether has a flourishing aspect,—the houses being neat buildings, and the chapel and school houses commodious structures.

There are several striking natural curiosities on one of the other islands. Huge subterranean caverns, which extend under the body of the island, and exhibit the most wonderful spectacle of its kind perhaps existing in the Pacific, are said to be found in Atiu, where beautiful specimens of spar are also obtained.

But to take a final leave of Rarotonga:—the island seems indeed to possess those features, which imagination loves to trace in her ideal picture of a South Sea paradise. The scenery is picturesque and the soil fruitful j the natives retain much of their primitive simplicity, uncorrupted by contact with the vile, sordid, money-hunting world; who spread the vices and misery of civilization without its blessings, wherever they go. It is true they are but half reclaimed from barbarism; their minds are untutored, and their ideas low and childish; but they at least appear willing to receive instruction, and they are blessed with a missionary who is earnestly endeavouring to impart it.

Port Refuge, Vatau, Eighth Month 25th.—We were visited by the captain of a whaler, who was not long ago embroiled in a quarrel with the natives of this place. He insisted on cutting fuel without paying for it, and landed with arms to accomplish his purpose. But for the interference of the missionaries, in all probability a contest would have taken place, attributed no doubt at home to the ferocity of the Vavau natives, who assaulted his men while procuring needful supplies for the vessel. The last time this individual was here, he carried off by force several natives of this island, landing them afterwards at the Navigator's, where they still remain. Other cases of the kind might be mentioned.

Ninth Month 1st, 1836.—Our route in visiting the station of Haalaufuli, led through winding passages, between the groups of small islands, which surround the mainland in the south and south-west directions, and furnish considerable variety of wooded landscape and tranquil lake scenery; but it is destitute of that boldness and magnificence of outline, characteristic of many other South Sea Islands. The shores are moderately low, and covered with dense matted forests, which extend to the water's edge, and seem to flourish amid masses of bare rock without a trace of soil. In some parts there are precipices which exhibit stupendous piles of stone thrown together in the utmost confusion about these unexplored caverns and overhanging ruins, the restless waters murmur, and the sea fowl finds an impregnable retreat. The tide undermines the shore, and flows in some places far under the land; we passed one insulated rock, which is supported by a comparatively insignificant pillar,—all the rest of the original base being washed away: the appearance of this rock is the more curious, from its being surmounted with vegetation and a large tree. Coral of a thousand forms and colours is seen under water in the shallows; and among its variegated branches the gorgeous fishes of the Pacific, exhibiting hues as rich and brilliant as the peacock's train, or the butterfly's wing, seem to sport secure from all enemies but those of their own kind. Sharks are said however to find shelter in the thick coral grove, where masses of consolidating roots and branches become gradually overgrown with fresh vegetation, which conceals the dark labyrinths below from the eye of day. These monsters are numerous and occasionally destructive: we have seen a man who has lost both his arms by the bite of one of them. Since lying here, we have seen a number of them, and caught one of considerable size. A hog which escaped from one of the ships lying near to us was devoured almost as soon as he reached the water, and before a boat could overtake him. They were formerly deified here, as well as in Tahiti, and were dreaded with more reason than many others of the South Sea dirinitia.

Ninth Month 8th.—About a mile from the place of our re-embarkation there is a large cavern, which it was agreed that we should explore before returning to the harbour; so, piloted by some natives who live near the spot, we coasted along towards the open sea, till the object of our curiosity appeared in sight.³⁵ I had observed it as we beat up to the harbour on the day of our arrival, and was glad of the opportunity now afforded of investigating such a wonderful recess. The entrance is under a kind of natural portico of rock, of great height, which leads into the principal cavern: the passage is broad and the water deep; so that our boat and a canoe entered together with ease, and navigated the interior of the vault, which is lighted from the entrance. After passing the vast archway of rock which forms the mouth, the scene is magnificent in the extreme, and called forth an involuntary burst of surprise and admiration. The roof is an amazing height, with pendant masses of stalactile, which garnish with indescribable richness the variegated concave above. Beneath, is a beautifully transparent surface of water, which reflects the walls and arches in a moving mirror, and reveals a world of submarine life and beauty beneath; caves, rocks, beds of coral and petrifactions richly coloured, and the painted finny tribes of the Pacific roving in perfect security, among these romantic watery glens. The walls are encrusted with spar of various colours, but principally of a bright blue, whose descending columns look like the ruins of a marble edifice, built not with the puny regularity of art, but with the wild unstudied magnificence of nature's inimitable architecture. On the left hand, is an arched passage into another apartment, whose recesses are indistinctly visible, which can be explored in a similar manner; and in front is a winding ascent, between high walls, which must be traversed on foot. By stepping from crag to crag along the irregular sides of this passage, and holding by projecting points and ridges for some distance, you reach a floor of solid earth, which leads at length to another circular dome of great height, composed of somewhat darker materials, which are but partially illuminated by a small opening at the very summit. Here all is silent, dismal, and damp: untraversed caves leading to an unknown distance in utter darkness, open from the side of this gloomy vault. We would gladly have attempted to penetrate further, but being destitute of torches, it was impossible to proceed with any degree of safety. We obtained specimens of the stalactite, and after rousing the echoes of the cave, commenced a return to the anchorage. This most imposing cavern is situated opposite the entrance of the channel which leads to the harbour of Port Refuge, and consequently is exposed in heavy westerly gales to the full lash of the ocean. I leave you to imagine what a spectacle must be exhibited in the interior of the cave, when it is invaded by an infuriated surf.

Ninth Month 16th.—The summit of Talau, in this island of Vavau, is computed to be one thousand feet above the level of the sea, and the ascent is rugged and circuitous, through a dense forest, matted together with thousands of climbing plants, creepers and vines, which very much increase the difficulty of traversing it. Such a rich chaos of rock, foliage, gigantic ferns and cocoa-nut trees, you can scarcely imagine; and flying foxes and birds of brilliant plumage gave animation to this splendid wilderness.

At Sea, Eleventh Month 12tA, 1836.—The Friendly Islands is a name originally given by Captain Cook when he first visited these comparatively friendly shores. In this general appellation is included Tongataboo and its inferior island neighbours,—the Fiji group, which lies a few leagues to the westward, and is very little known,—the Haabai, a cluster of low coral islands, eighteen of which are inhabited,—Haafuluhau which consists of Vavau, and above a hundred small islets by which it is almost encircled—the Hamoa or Navigator's Islands which lie to the north-east, and several less important insular tracts of land, interspersed among the above enumerated groups. Of these only a few have been occupied by missionaries, and with some inconsiderable exceptions, the profession of Christianity is confined to Tonga, Haabai, and Haafuluhau. To these places our visit was confined, and to them of course the following remarks exclusively apply.

To begin with Haafuluhau, which we first visited. The island of Vavau includes the larger portion of the land settled on by natives, which this group possesses, and is supposed to contain a population of 3000 souls. The other islands of the group collectively augment this number to about 6000, which is the whole amount of the native population, according to the estimates of the missionaries. The king has renounced idolatry and embraced the doctrines of Christianity; he has put away all his wives but one, become a local preacher and a class leader in the Methodist Society, and seems willing to be guided and advised by the missionaries in every undertaking. The queen is a class leader, and a teacher in the schools, and nearly the whole population of these islands on which missionaries reside, have been admitted into the church. There are no less than one hundred and seventy native local preachers, who are employed in all parts of the Haafuluhau group, and thirty chapels in which there is service three times a week. The people thus led by their king and chiefs, attend diligently to the instructions of their teachers, and have already acquired considerable Scripture knowledge, and a taste for reading and writing.

The Haabai group is situated a little more than a degree to the southward of Haafuluhau. They are inhabited by a similar race, who speak the same dialect, and are now united under one government. Very few ships visit this group, as it possesses no good harbour, and the character of the inhabitants and the policy of the rulers deter white men from settling. Lifuka, although by no means a fine island, has been selected as the seat of royalty, and it now contains a mission establishment. This group which consists of eighteen inhabited islands, is said to contain a population of 4564. The profession of Christianity is universal here.

A few leagues to the southward of Haabai lies the island of Tongataboo, at present under the government of Tubou, a relation of king George, who is expected to succeed him. The country and its inhabitants correspond very nearly with what is found in the two before mentioned groups, but the civil condition of the people is much less favourable. The population is estimated at 7000 persons, and of these upwards of 1000 are Christians by profession; the rest still retain their old superstitions. There are seventeen fortified towns or villages on the island, one of which Nukualofa is occupied by the adherents of the missionaries, at the head of whom is king Tubou.

One cannot but deeply regret that the pacific principles of the New Testament are not fully professed by those who are sent to “preach glad tidings,” and to “publish peace” among these teachable islanders. However feelings of personal piety and benevolence may, and I rejoice to believe, do actuate many, if not all of these individuals, to desire and to labour for the continuance of harmony and good-will,—still their doctrines are defective; and they tolerate and recommend a dangerous middle course,—a course, which the spirit of the gospel forbids, and which has never yet proved adequate to avert, among Christians, the shocking incongruity of mutual destruction. I never can at all comprehend how the doctrines of our blessed Saviour, the Prince of Peace, and the right to destroy a brother mortal are to be reconciled; nor have I ever been able to contemplate without a feeling of wonder, men really lovely for the Christian graces they exhibit, surrounded by instruments of death, avowedly destined to be used with their own hands against the lives of their deluded fellow-men.

Slavery, that 'execrable sum of all villany,' still prevails to a certain extent among the heathen party; although even this monster is rendered less destructive by the proximity of a better system. Tonga slaves ore made such in the most capricious manner possible; a word or any slight offence may subject a man to be condemned to the lowest servitude, without any trial, and when once sentenced to slavery the curse is hereditary.

The natives who still remain in their heathen state are more destitute of clothing and other foreign articles, than their neighbours: they look less cleanly, and less regularly and adequately fed; their persons are frequently mutilated by wounds received in fighting, and disfigured with sores or burns, inflicted according to superstitious custom, as indications of grief or respect for the dead. From the very recent introduction of Christianity, many of these external marks of heathenism are seen among the professing natives; but these are not the effects of a cause every day in operation as in the other case, but merely the relics of departed folly and madness. Some of the poor women in the heathen settlements, who torture themselves according to ancient usage, are really appalling objects: their hair cut off, their cheeks burnt and bruised with a rough instrument, till they look purple, and other parts of the body more or less disfigured with wounds thus self-inflicted, give them a frightful appearance, and furnish a sad demonstration of the reigning power of superstition. I have seen a woman spotted over with scars in this way like a leopard. This practice was formerly in use among the men likewise: they commonly have one round scar under each eye, and some have many rings burnt in the flesh of the arms. The custom too, of cutting off the little finger on the death of a relative or superior, was very common; and most of the older men are destitute of one or both of these minor members, which have been thus sacrificed. No, the absurd practice has extended to the children, and if a chief is dangerously ill, many little fingers are even yet occasionally amputated to avert his death; but this, like the cutting and burning of the skin, is abolished among the professors of Christianity.

In a commercial point of view, the three sections of the Friendly islands which we have visited, are not of much importance, and probably never can be so. The harbour in Vavau has great disadvantages from the inconvenient depth of water for anchorage, excepting in one small part; also from the lack of good fresh water for the supply of the shipping: among the Haabai group there is no secure anchorage at all. In Tongataboo, though one part of the harbour is safe, and the produce of the country is valuable for the whalers, the water is very inferior. All three groups are subject to earthquakes, also to very destructive gales.

With the exception of Kao, Tufua, and Haufuluhau, these islands furnish the most complete specimens of coral formation that we have yet seen, on a large scale. I have no doubt they have been rendered habitable by the progress of marine vegetation, and the subsequent accumulation of coral sand, and decomposed vegetable substances, which covered the islands as soon as they reached the surface of the sea, Coral obviously forms the fathomable ground-work: the soil is quite superficial, and underneath is coral rock and salt or brackish water. One of the Haabai islands is said to rock frightfully during heavy gales, which tends to prove its incomplete solidity under water; and some others exhibit various indications of hollowness. Constantly recurring earthquakes, and the volcanic crater in Tufua, which disgorges a vast quantity of combustibles and smoke from the subterranean furnace beneath, indicate the proximity of great igneous operations under ground; and I think there is rational ground for concluding, that the whole island has at some time been raised by this sub-marine agency. They are for the most part fertile, producing abundance of tropical vegetation, which, under different management, might be increased and improved by culture to almost any extent. The trees and plants most common, are similar to those found in the other groups, with comparatively few exceptions. The fruits most abundant are shaddocks, papau apples, pine apples, melons, and citrons. The orange, so common elsewhere, is very scarce andof had quality; but the papau, introduced intothese islands at the same time, has more than compensated for the deficiency,—being produced in perfection, and in exhaustless quantities. To this exotic fruit the islanders are indebted for a valuable supply of food during their periodical seasons of scarcity, and their more formidable occasional famines, which occur after the ravages of a hurricane or a strong westerly storm. The yam is peculiarly obnoxious to injury from the wind, and on this precarious, though excellent vegetable, which is the staple food of the Friendly Islanders, their sustenance to a great extent depends. Other more hardy vegetables have been hitherto most improvidently neglected, the people have consequently been subjected to great scarcity after these violent storms, and but for the papau fruit must have endured much greater hardships. The cultivation of the sweet potatoe is becoming more common, and will no doubt tend in future to prevent the evils alluded to. The vegetables most cultivated are the yam, bread-fruit, taro, sweet potatoe, plantain, and a root resembling the yam, which we had not before seen. Cocoa-nuts grow spontaneously in great abundance, on almost all these low sandy islands.

The climate of the Friendly group, judging from what we saw, is very fine,—preferable to that of Tahiti, where several months of the year are rendered almost unavailable by incessant rains. No season appears to merit the epithet rainy, although the summer months probably furnish a larger quantity of downfall than the rest of the year. On the whole, there appears to be rather a deficiency than otherwise, owing no doubt to the lowness of the islands, and the sandy nature of the soil. During our stay the thermometer ranged principally between 75° and 85°: a temperature very pleasant to residents in the torrid zone, but somewhat enervating to the human constitution, which as in the other islands of the Pacific, attains very early to a state of maturity, and is subject to a correspondingly premature decline.

As regards the character of the islanders, I prefer that of the Friendly Isles, to that of any other natives of the Pacific whom we have seen. Such a preference may be more than is generally awarded them; but several reasons might be alleged for the relative estimate that has been formed of them and the other islanders. Many of the voyagers who visit this ocean, are men of miserably low moral feelings and habits, and as such, they unite in eulogizing the natives whose manners are most congenial to their own. On this account, the voluptuous effeminate Tahitians are spoken of in high terms, though they certainly will not bear comparison with these more sober, and manly islanders. I think these people are less prone to sensual indulgence than either the Sandwich, Georgian, Society or Hervey islanders. But if less depraved, I do not think them at all less sensitive or susceptible of the kindly emotions: they evince quite as much affection towards each other, and towards their children. They are not so volatile and frivolous as Tahitians, and perhaps they may not be quite so quick and lively as the Hervey islanders, but their gravity and good sense are accompanied by nothing particularly austere, much less ferocious: on the contrary, they are gentle and affable as children.

Their domestic habits resemble those of the other groups. Their houses are small fragile huts with thatched roofs and matted floors,—no windows, or doors, and scarcely any furniture. The flexible character of the building materials is a great security to the inhabitants during the earthquakes which frequently occur, and on this account it seems undesirable to alter the style of building which prevails, although in themselves, Tongese dwellings are comfortless looking places.

The dress of the natives is almost exclusively native cloth, loosely wrapped round the figure in irregular ample folds. A few of the leading men who officiate as preachers, etc., and some of the females connected with the kings and chiefs, possess articles of foreign clothing for particular occasions; but on the whole, the national costume is much more completely retained than in any other groups we have visited. Individuals of both sexes wear the hair cut short, so as to leave a thick covering for the head, and this they friz out with great pains till it assumes the appearance of wool;—using lime or white clay to make the hairs stand out and exhibit the proper bushy appearance. The women commonly wear much less than the men, and the children have the top of the head shaved, or the hair cut very short, leaving merely a fringe round the head, a few inches in width.

They make great use of cocoa-nut oil for anointing their heads and bodies, and it seems probable this practice has a salutary effect. It softens the skin, which might by continual exposure to a hot sun become callous or irritable; particularly as the people are so much in salt water.

Healing the sick is a most important means of influencing the minds of the untutored natives of Tonga. If a man has derived benefit from the medicine prescribed for him by a missionary, he very naturally leans to the side of his benefactor, and often joins his party. The value of English remedies is known and acknowledged among these islanders.

According to missionary information, 23,000 persons have renounced idolatry in this group, within the last ten years. Of these 9000 are members of the Wesleyan Society, 329 are local preachers, and 1100 are school teachers.

I cannot but acknowledge the kindness we received from the Wesleyan missionaries and their converts in these islands. Several of the former are interesting persons, whose society we enjoyed, although as might in reason be expected, we could not on all points think, see, and feel alike.

The Tonga dialect has been reduced to writing, and large portions of the Bible are in circulation, but the whole has not yet appeared. Several small books of a preceptive and devotional character, and one or two intended for the use of schools, containing the rudiments of grammar, etc., are printed, and no doubt others are in progress, and will before long be published.

The Ilamoa or Navigator Island's dialect differs from the Tongese, and the Fiji forms a third variety in the groups already occupied by the Wesleyans: probably several others exist among the neighbouring islands, but these are as yet little known. It appears that the Fiji tongue has several striking peculiarities quite unknown to the other dialects of the Pacific. For instance, the sound of th is found in it, if I am correctly informed, and syllables do not necessarily end with vowels, as in all the other known varieties of the Polynesian. But there seems to be quite a distinct character about the Fiji islanders altogether: their appearance indicates a mixture of the black and the Asiatic races, and their manners are very barbarous. Their knowledge of several branches of manufacture is decidedly superior to that possessed by any of the other tribes. They display great labour and ingenuity in carving weapons, basket-making, canoe-building, making a variety of showy ornaments for the person, and in the manufacture of earthenware utensils for culinary purposes. They evidently belong to a distinct family, no doubt derived originally from the same source as the other Friendly islanders, but amalgamated with the Malay or negro. A few years will develop more fully the national character of these formidable warriors: two missionaries are now among them with promising hopes of success in their arduous undertaking. I think it not improbable, that this section of the group contains the most energetic and intelligent division of the Friendly islanders, although at present without doubt the most wayward and contentious.

New Zealand, Twelfth Month 3rd, 1836.—While halting at Keri Keri, we visited a cascade situated on the river of that name, which affords a highly picturesque spectacle. The fall is about seventy feet perpendicular, and the spacious valley beneath it beautifully verdant, and furnishing a variety of vegetation which we had probably never seen surpassed. The name of this cascade is the same in signification as one in Hawaii, called the 'cascade of the rainbow,'—no doubt in both cases in consequence of the effect produced by the sun's rays passing through the spray. Like the still more imposing fall in the Sandwich isles, there is a deep cavern extending behind the projection of water, which adds greatly to the effect produced on the eye.

First Month 13th, 1837.—We were told that all the merchants, even the few who have renounced the sale of spirits,—deal in muskets and ammunition. You can form little idea of the quantity of these articles that has been brought to New Zealand: it is astonishingly great. I remember to have heard a missionary state, that in one pa or native fort,—of which he was speaking, the chief had In his possession about a ton of gunpowder. Many dreadful accidents, as you may suppose, occur with such a formidable combustible, thus kept in the huts of these poor reckless natives.

While mentioning war,—the darling passion of uncivilized men,—I am reminded of a remark made by a New Zealand chief to one of our mission friends, who was conversing with him on the subject of a future world. The warrior expressed his disapprobation of the opinion which the missionary advanced respecting the life to come, saying, 'If this be true, what is to become of the warrior? If there are no pas to attack, he will have nothing to do.' How much more consistent are the present practice and the anticipated paradise of pagans, than the lives of the majority of Christians and their professed expectations of a scriptural heaven? The warrior of New Zealand sees in a moment, that his warlike tastes are incompatible with a world of peace and angelic blessedness; while his more enlightened antipodes lay claim to both!

The notions of these aborigines on points connected with an invisible existence, appear to be extremely vague and various,—much less definite and refined than the superstitions of the other islanders we have seen. A belief in a future state, and in superhuman agency, appear to be universal. The New Zealanders cannot properly be called idolaters, having no objects of adoration in the form of images or idols; although there are many things to which they attach a sacred character, regarding them rather as charms or spells than as divinities. The term which in all the dialects of the Pacific islands that we have visited, is used to express Deity—Atua, Odiia, Akiia, etc.,—which are all but variations of the same word, is here too used to designate something sacred, but with an extent of application that renders it almost incomprehensible. The New Zealand ideas of the Almighty seem to be much less definite than those entertained by the other islanders, and this term is correspondingly vague in its application.

My allusion to this subject recalls an anecdote which pleased me much at the time I heard it from the lips of our venerable friend Samuel Marsden. He was talking one day to a New Zealander of the ideas entertained by these natives respecting a Supreme Being, and asking him what their god was?—what he was like I The warrior placed his hand so as to produce a shadow on the trunk of a huge tree that stood near them, and told his interrogator to look at that. 'There,' said he, 'is our god:—he exists but you cannot touch him or injure him;—he is before your eyes, yet you can discern no substance in the form you see and know to exist'—or to this effect. Is not this a beautiful illustration to come from a New Zealander?

A disturbance occurred today on board one of the ships lying by us, which very nearly ended disasterously. It happened on board an English whaler, commanded by a captain, who appears to be much more of a gentleman in manner and conduct, when among his countrymen, than most of the masters of these ships,—but who countenances just as much license on board his vessel as the worst of his profligate brethren. A chief from a neighbouring pa, who supports all that is vile among the ships, was on board this whaler, with great numbers of his male and female dependents,—the latter of whom were quartered on board,—when either he or one of his men brought some spirits from their canoe, which the mate of the ship immediately seized and threw overboard. This irritated the natives, and pistols were produced on the quarter-deck to intimidate them. In a while however, the dissatisfaction appeared to subside, and suspicion was banished from the minds of the whites. When all was thus quiet, the old chief seized the mate by the throat, and waving his tomahawk over him made a signal to his followers to occupy the deck. In an instant, the ship was covered with naked men, and every instrument resembling a weapon was in the hands of the natives. Not one-half the ship's company was on board, and therefore no resistance could be made, so nothing occurred likely to exasperate farther; and after some time, an old man interfered, recommending that the affront offered to the chief should be made up over a glass of grog: this was in some sort done, and the matter ended without any bloodshed. One of our seamen was on board the ship at the time and saw the fray: he determined if violence should ensue to jump overboard, and try to regain his own more peaceable vessel by swimming, in which resolution one of the ship's crew joined. When the chief went away, he seemed still unreconciled, and threatened to be revenged, and during the following night we heard muskets fired in his pa, indicating defiance, in answer to which a cannon shot was returned by the vessel, with the idea, we concluded, of proving to the excited natives, that she was ready to encounter them. Had the whole ship's company been on board at the time of the disturbance, there is little doubt but a bloody contest would have been the result.

First Month 16th—The white residents, missionaries and others, are at present preparing a petition to the British government, praying that the state of New Zealand may be taken into consideration, and measures adopted for the protection of British property in this country. The object of this petition is evidently to induce the government to send a force into New Zealand, which shall be able to secure the possessions of the whites from all injury, in case of such being attempted; and at the same time to compel the fighting tribes to make peace. This is a most critical step in the progress of New Zealand civilization; and I sincerely hope that no unjust measure will be adopted;—in fact, without the most glaring inconsistency, our government cannot interfere, coercively, at all. It has long since declared the independence of New Zealand, furnishing the chiefs with a national flag, which has been formally recognized and honoured as such: how then can an armed dictator be placed on the island, who shall be empowered to enforce submission to his requisitions? As for the danger to which British property is said to be exposed, I do not believe it is now in any danger from natites in this part of the country; and whites are amenable to their respective governments, and consequently ought to be placed at the disposal of proper agents of those governments, who ought undoubtedly to be sent into the land. The proximity of the colonies would render the authority of a Consul quite adequate. In parts of New Zealand where property may be somewhat insecure, there are no establishments of any moment, excepting those which on their present footing, ought to be prohibited instead of being protected,—being the sources which supply those very arms that are liable to be employed in their demolition, and which serve greatly to aggravate these very contests with which we now wish to interfere. By what possible right can we command the warriors whom we have formally declared independent, to desist from settling their disputes by force of arms, while our own subjects are providing them with the means of doing so? We cannot interfere with British subjects who circulate rum and weapons among the conflicting clans, and yet we think it very proper to compel those clans to abstain from using the weapons so acquired.

About two hundred signatures are already procured to the petition in question; and it is to be hoped that the proportion of spirit dealers and traders in arms who have joined in it, will be specified. Do we wish to prevent New Zealanders from destroying each other, which is assigned as one of the objects of the petition? Well, then, stop the sources which furnish three-fourths of the means: make it a crime to bring cargoes of these pernicious articles, and to build stores round the coast for the traffic in them—a traffic which we in fact protect, if we revenge the destruction of property that consists of little else beside these and the native produce obtained in exchange for them. Let us prevent in this way, our own countrymen from spreading firebrands, arrows, and death among the aborigines, and we shall in great measure avert those wars which threaten the extinction of the people, even before the vices of Christians (which are no less infallibly destroying the natives where war is not raging) have cut them off. If disputes still arise, and native spears and clubs are used to settle them, we are certainly not answerable for those who may perish; and in plain English, I think, that so far as we are concerned, the islanders have a full right to decide their differences in the same way as Christian nations, until by lawful means we can induce them to act more sanely than we do ourselves. To compel them to remain at peace, (and that too, without providing any other means of adjusting their quarrels in a more humane manner,) is in my opinion no other than “to do evil that good may come.” Not that we can for a moment suppose that good would come, if such a policy were to be adopted; on the contrary, if the fate of the New Zealanders be fixed now, it would be no less certain then. If we endeavoured to prevent mischief by sapping the root of the evil, as I have above said, the people might no doubt be gradually influenced by good men to change their present savage mode of life, and so be preserved from extinction; but the moment a British force enters New Zealand, the country becomes a dependency of Britain, and as such the aborigines of the soil will perish as in all our other colonial possessions.

While reprobating severely the attempt which is now being made, I am aware that a wish to prevent disorder may have a place in some minds, and that a zeal for the extension of Christianity may operate in others. I likewise know that a petition for protection does not necessarily specify the mode in which it shall be sent, but these considerations are of little value. No supposed good can sanctify evil means; and if unjustifiable measures are not suggested to our government, they must, judging by past experience, be calculated on as the only probable results. I as heartily wish the warriors of New Zealand could be induced to suspend their sanguinary operations, as any one can do who deprecates the horrors and crimes of war; but never will I subscribe to the doctrine, that it is lawful for us to use brute force in compelling them to desist.

First Month 28th.—The Bay of Islands by no means furnishes a specimen of New Zealand generally, being the resort of numerous foreigners, and its neighbourhood but thinly peopled with the aboriginal inhabitants. There are various tribes in the vicinity of the Bay, and scattered over the northern islands, who occupy in peace their little potatoe-grounds and fortified villages, which are studded over the fern-clad hills that mark the country not covered with pine and caurie forests. These tribes are not under one common government, but are independent fraternities, subject only to their respective chiefs; so that within a short distance you find natives living soberly and professing christianity, and barbarians with rudely carved figures stuck round their stockade fortifications, their tabued ground, and all the brute license of heathenism. Several villages quite near the Bay refuse to have any connexion with the missionaries, and these are of course the haunts of run-away sailors, convicts and grogsellers, who in fact perpetuate the present wretched pagan abominations, and if possible, degrade the natives lower than they would otherwise be. It is said there are five or six hundred white men to the northward of the Thames, thus scattered among the natives, and leading the most abandoned lives.

The 'Church Missionary Society' has five stations on the northern part of this island, where missionaries are at present residing. Five stations have been formed on the river Thames and about the Bay of Plenty, but two of these have been lately abandoned on account of the unsettled state of the native tribes in that part of the country: one mission house has been plundered and burnt, and one or two of the missionaries have been exposed to considerable personal danger. The latter circumstance cannot of course be wondered at; it is rather remarkable that during these popular tumults the persons and property of the Society's agents have been uniformly held sacred, scarcely an instance of violence having occurred among them, although they have been frequently placed in the heart of savage warfare. These eight stations are managed by about two dozen missionaries, most of whom have families with them. A schooner belonging to the Society is kept constantly plying between the several posts accessible from the sea, transferring the families or their property, as expediency or necessity may dictate. The contending clans have avoided making enemies of the missionaries, regarding them as a neutral party, and as such even among barbarians, entitled to protection; an instance or two to the contrary have unhappily occurred recently, in which the teachers appear to have been identified in some degree with their adherents, though even in these cases their persons have not been injured.

The Wesleyans have occupied a part of the western coast, their head quarters being at Hokianga, but we did not see any of their establishments. We were told that the country where they are located is more populous than those parts where the Church Missionary Society agents are employed, some of whose stations are entirely deserted, Keri Keri and Tepuna more particularly. Waimate, the inland agricultural settlement, has not many natives near it, but there are several tribes scattered round the neighbourhood, within a moderate distance, whom the missionaries visit and instruct. The same may be said of Faihia; though the villages near the Bay of Islands are hostile to the missionaries, yet there are several places up the rivers Kauakaua and Waikate, where the people listen to their weekly instructions, and have made some progress towards improvement. The whole numerical amount of these teachable natives is insignificant, indeed one hundred persons is considered a large congregation in New Zealand.

The Church Missionary Society, and several individuals belonging to the mission hold large parcels of land which have been regularly purchased of the natives, partly for the present use of the mission, and in part as a provision for the rising families of its members. The children are not as among some other missionaries whom we have visited, destined to be sent home at a certain age, nor do the parents anticipate the expiration of a term of years, when they and their families will leave the ground, and take up their abode in England or the colonies. The church missionaries came out with the intention of remaining, and of establishing their children after them in their adopted country, and several of the sons of the earlier missionaries are already settled on farms, from which they expect to obtain a competency. In this way large portions of the country will soon be colonized by Europeans, for it is an acknowledged fact that English stock flourishes abundantly in New Zealand. Several of the mission families are very large, and though the second generation will doubtless assume something of the Creole temperament and appearance, yet the Anglo New Zealand natives enjoy robust constitutions, and suffer very little from disease. With such prospects of a permanent residence in the country, no attempt is made to prevent the children acquiring the native language; although in itself I imagine familiarity with native habits and intellectual and moral degradation, must be nearly as injurious here as in any of the other islands, where the policy of secluding the children from contact with barbarism, has induced the parents to prevent their learning the language of the people.

The New Zealand missionaries keep great numbers of native servants about them, and really this practice appears highly advantageous under present circumstances; for from the character of the people it would be extremely difficult to obtain much ascendancy over them in any other way. Induced by motives of self-interest to submit while young to some degree of restraint, and to receive instruction from their patrons, it is to be hoped their wild, wayward, vicious habits will be corrected, while at the same time, their situation brings them within the religious influence of the missionaries.

The New Zealandere are by far the rudest and most warlike islanders that we have seen, (if I except the few natives of the Marquesas and Fiji groups, whom we met with occasionally among their more docile neighbours; and the accounts we have received from residents here, confirmed every unfavourable impression, that their appearance can make on the mind of a stranger. I confess I never thought the difference between these and the other Pacific islanders, was so very striking as it appears to be. They resemble North American Indians to a degree that you would scarcely credit, both in appearance, habits, and Jewish customs. They possess an invincible determination, an independence which acknowledges no restraint, not reconciled by a supposed decree of fate, and a restless martial daring, accompanied by an undying spirit of revenge, perhaps never more strongly exhibited in the human character. The heart of a New Zealander seems almost insensible, in many instances at least, to the softer emotions, and he does not possess terms to express such foreign influences. Gratitude, meekness, lowliness, grace, and repentance, affection and thankfulness are alike unknown to him; while martial epithets and words significant of cruelty and violence are abundant and elaborately explicit. There seems to be an untameable spirit and pride about them, which renders a concession almost impossible: they will rather die than yield,—a principle no doubt greatly fostered by their Spartan education, which is calculated to infuse into the minds of mere children, the hardihood and recklessness of the tiger. Their notions about 'satisfaction' might have been formed in imitation of the famous 'laws of honour.' Every offence must be resented or expiated, and where actual warfare is not the consequence of a false step, plunder is liable to follow the smallest insult. They are said to procure an insult or a false accusation merely as a pretext for demanding satisfaction. The intelligence of the New Zealanders is universally admitted, and from what I saw of them I was led to conclude, that they possess greater versatility of mind than their tropical neighbours, and perhaps quite as much acuteness. They seem to experience little or no difficulty in acquiring a knowledge of reading and writing, even in places unvisited by regular instructors. I saw, just before leaving the country a very fairly written letter, addressed to one of the missionaries by a native who lived at a distance, and who had only occasionally visited the station.

Their appearance is very Asiatic,—swarthy complexions, bald, marked and often spare countenances, with dark, restless eye, black, straight hair, somewhat raised cheek-bones, and irregular broad mouths; athletic but not generally graceful figures characterize the appearance of the men, whose faces, hips, and thighs are often scored with deep tatoo. A shark's tooth, a bird skin, or a piece of iron drawn through the ear, and a filthy mat or blanket thrown round the figure, and occasionally exposing every part, in many instances complete the decorations of these aborigines, and render their exterior far less pleasing than that of many other Pacific islanders. The women, who have been praised as furnishing perfect models of beauty, are I think more pleasing than most of the other islanders. They are not however so gentle, nor are their habits so accordant with our notions of female propriety, being often extremely dirty in their personal appearance and domestic management; but their countenances are expressive, and their features well formed. The lips are frequently disfigured with tatoo, which gives them a singular and unpleasant appearance, like that of persons who have been eating black-berries.

The British resident has made one attempt to unite the principal chiefs in a sort of council, in which they might act collectively; and in theory he succeeded so far as to induce them to consent that each one should no longer act singly, but that in affairs of importance the collective opinions of the chiefs of the 'united tribes of New Zealand' should constitute a decision. The members of this national council signed a formal declaration of their independence, and agreed to meet annually for purposes of government. But unhappily these auspicious indications were very transient, and the perverseness of some exasperated individuals, who could not support the dignity of civil rulers, frustrated the design altogether. On the occasion of a dispute about some land which had been sold, the national assembly was convened at the 'resident's' place of abode near the Bay of Islands, to decide the case. This was readily done, but the vanquished party in the rage of disappointment, flew to their more congenial arbitrators—their muskets—and fired upon the assembly. Some lives I believe were lost on the occasion, and it has never since been deemed expedient to call together such unmanageable counsellors. It is very much to be regretted that the untoward conduct of a few lawless individuals has, for a time at least, set aside a noble attempt to benefit by justifiable means this distracted country.

THE END.

1Our expedition landed without any tents, but a supply was furnished about six weeks afterwards, I think while we were encamped on the plains of Breda.

2The accounts of the deplorable treatment of the sick, and of the disasters of the British army in their retreat to Bremen, as given in the Annual Register of 1795, more than confirm the description of the author of this biographical sketch.

3It is stated in the Annual Register, that on the arrival of the British army at Bremen, the kind and cordial treatment they received from its inhabitants, was strongly contrasted with the hard-heartedness and hostility of the Dutch. 'It was something like a dream,' says a witness and partaker of their sufferings:'—'we who had lately been so buffeted about, driven like vagabonds through frost and snow over the wilds of Holland; and who, in our greatest extremities when we asked for any thing to refresh ourselves, with the money in our hands, were answered only with a shrug of the shoulders 'nothing for the Englishman!'—now to be seated in the most elegant apartments,—servants attending, ready to anticipate every wish,—beds of down to repose upon, without being disturbed in the morning by the thundering of cannon, or the usual alarms of war. They omitted nothing that could contribute to either our ease or pleasure: and a great number of the inhabitants accompanied us out of the town, and showed us every respect.—Annual Register, 1795, p. 55, 56.

4The above was copied from the original in 'the Chancery of drainage and cultivation of the neighbourhood of Petersburg.'

5This man though he submitted to the operation, subsequently fell a victim to hydrophobia.

6It may be worthy of remark, that Elizabeth Robson, to whom the letter is addressed, expired the very day on which it was written.

7Samuel Stansfield had resided some years in Petersburg, and been a constant attender of the little gathering at Daniel Wheeler's house.

8From his engagement in Russia.

9See Eusebius.

10At this time Elisha Bates was still a minister and highly respected author in the Society of Friends. Sadly, however, in 1837 Bates was disowned from the society for holding and preaching unsound principles. For a time he became a Methodist and served as a minister among them, but his membership in that organization was also eventually revoked.

11This passage will probably remind the reader, that when Bartholomew Diaz first rounded the Cape, he bestowed upon it the significant appellation of 'Cape of the Furies,' which the Portuguese authorities thought proper to exchange for its present name.

12(Originally written Corpus Sancti.) See John Woolman's Journal, Dublin edition, 1704, p. 212,

13This devoted servant of Christ is since deceased; he died on the 12th of the Fifth Month, 1838.

14The following extract from the journal of our friend, James Backhouse, between Sydney and Norfolk Island, relative to the seamen on board the Henry Freeling, will, it is thought, not be out of place here.

15'It is pleasing to see the seamen of the Henry Frceling instructing one another in nautical observations and calculations; the carpenter is a good navigator, and since he became a steady man he has taken pleasure in instructing the other sailors, who appear to be improving in knowledge and conduct. They strongly exemplify the benefit of temperance principles on board ship. They are allowed beer, when it is to be had, and as much tea, coffee, or cocoa, as they like. There is no swearing to be heard; and the men have the appearance of comfort, and spend their leisure in improving themselves, reading, etc. Happily neither the captain nor mate make a foolish mystery about the course of the vessel, such as is common on board many ships, by which the sailors are kept in ignorance, to no purpose, unless it be to enable the captain and officers to puff themselves up with an unworthy conceit of knowing more than those under them, and keep the sailors in a state of degradation, inimical to good morals and conduct.'

16This letter of Daniel Wheeler was taken from the Journal of the Life of John Wilbur, and included in this memoir by The Friends Library.

17Isaiah 30:25

18This is an establishment for the children of missionaries.

19See Appendix C.

20It is an octagonal stone building, with lofts running entirely round it.

21It was at this island that Captain Cook caused the ears of several of the natives to be cut off for committing petty thefts on board the ships, and in other respects used them very cruelly.

22The missionaries stationed in the Sandwich Islands are exclusively from the American board of missions.

23Kauikeaouli is said to mean in the Sandwich Island dialect,' to hang upon the dark blue sky.'

24Having had of late a number of letters handed to us by way of introduction from one missionary to another, in order to procure the needful aid from station to station, I have thought it might afford satisfaction to others, to know how we stood in their estimation, after having sojourned nearly five months within their borders on the Sandwich Isles. As they are all of the same tenor, a copy of one may suffice for the whole.

(Copy,) April 33rd, 1836. To Rev. David B. Lyman and Titus Coan.

Dear Brethren,

Allow me the pleasure of introducing to you our friends, Daniel Wheeler, a minister of the gospel, of the Society of Friends, and his son Charles Wheeler, who, on an errand of benevolence to the dwellers on the isles of the Pacific, have visited this quarter, to co-operate in the work of our Master, in turning men from darkness to light, and from the power of Satan unto God. I have had the pleasure of interpreting repeatedly the warm, earnest, and evangelical appeals of Daniel Wheeler to our people, and presume you will feel it a pleasure to assist him in a similar way, for the furtherance of his object, and otherwise facilitating their interaction with the chiefs and the people, and cheering their toil in a long and expensive voyage. Affectionately your brother,

Hiram Binouam.

Honolulu, Island Oahu.

25His son Joshua was removed by death about four years after; decease took place at Clifton, on the 29th of Third Month, 1841. He was mercifully permitted, towards the close of life, to enjoy a trembling, but we trust a well-founded hope of acceptance.

26Notes respecting the South Sea Isles, etc., by Charles Wheeler, being extracts from letters to his family, will be found in the Appendix.

27This letter was not taken from the Journal of the Life and Labour of John Wilbur and included in this memoir by The Friends Library.

28“Go,” he said, “to Britannia, and tell the people to have mercy on us;—and then go to America, and tell the people there to have mercy on us; for it is these countries that send the poison amongst us;” alluding to the introduction of rum, etc. See page 308.

29Held at Newport, Rhode Island.

30Joshua Wheeler survived till the following spring.

31Sir James Wylie, a Physician.

32Some of our readers may not, perhaps, be aware, that such is the severity of the frost rear Petersburg, that no difficulty would arise in keeping the remains for the long period, which circumstances rendered expedient.

33A respectable resident told us, that one flagrant Instance of this came within his knowledge some time back. A poor man had been out Ashing, and returned too late for the week day service. He was tried, and his land was taken from him by men empowered to enforce this abominable regulation. It is not enrolled in the Tahltlan code of laws, but is said to be a 'command' only. Remove the penalty, and the command might very safely remain unrepealed.

34The Tumanu (calophyllitm Inophyllum,) was formerly held sacred in the South Sea Islands. It is a noble tree,—in general appearance something resembling the oak.

35See Memoirs, p. 573.